Presented to the

LIBRARY of the
UNIVERSITY OF TORONTO
by

PROF. A. GLEASON

OF THE

KANNADA LANGUAGE
IN ENGLISH

BY

THE REV.

DR.

F.

K ITT

EL

MANGALORE
BASEL MISSION BOOK AND TRACT DEPOSITORY

1903

PREFACE.
The present Grammar
The terminology

of

way

general

chiefly based

Grammar

his

on Kesava's Sabdamanidarpana.
is

At the same time

of Kannacla.

dialects

the

of this

is

an

native

ancient

and

simple,
will

it

for the three

fit

be interesting to learn

scholar's

Kannada

teaching

grammar.
In Kesava's age most of the rules of Kannada grammar were fixed.

to follow

from his quoting a part of a Kanda verse that

Sabdanusasana (under
1

That

him there had been grammarians who had not deserved that name, seems

before

Remain,

daughter!

sutra 469), from which

its

we

is

fully

translate

Could the unprofitable grammarian

quoted in the

it

as follows

(sushkavaiyakarana),

the unprofitable sophist and the rustic have as (their) subject matter the
poetical composition which

is

gem

of

the subject matter of the assemblage of very clever

poets?'

Some

statements of Kesava concerning bis predecessors or contempo-

specific

raries are the following

He
final

considered

in several

He

teaches

it

a matter of necessity to caution literary writers against using

Kannada

words, as only rustics would do so

252) that

words ought to be

if

in their

Tadbhava form.

from his great predecessor

Rice), viz. taravel
(tappu), as

He

228).

Hamsaraja

In this respect he quotes an instance

(of A, D.

941, according to Mr. B. Lewis

manikyabhandarada putikegalam, which, he

says,

is

a mistak

manikabhandarada would be right (suddha).

says that in satisaptami

letter e is to

365) which always refers to two subjects, the

be used; by some (of his predecessors or contemporaries^ al has.

without hesitation, been employed for

Then he quotes two sentences with

He

there exist Tadbhavas of two words compounded, both

states (very probably

al,

it;

and

clever people
calls

found at least in the mediaeval dialect)

is

added to verbs ending in a consonant (see

to

that.

them wrong <abudda:0.

in order to counteract

form kanike, teralike, punike of kan, pun,

do not agree

a tendency of that kind) that to

teral (which formations are frequently

faulty, as the suffix

243, A,

5).

ike should not be

PREFACE.

IV

When

he teaches that

introducing the suffix tana,

Samskrita words, as

is

it

not to be used for

g. arohakatana would be wrong (abaddha,

e.

That he certainly has done so

for the above-mentioned reason

the fact that the Sabdanusasana (under

its

243, 4, 14).

becomes evident by

and

sutra 431) adduces unnatatana

pannatatana as instances of ancient usage.

He

from khandisu,
(

g. khandisisu, to cause to

noun,

is

cut,

not allowed

which statement probably also opposes a tendency of grammarians

(or poets) towards

so.

doing

says that nouns ending in a consonant do not insert in before the a of the

and

genitive, except pagal

fault (dosha,

that they

He

e.

a verb derived from a Samskrita

to cut,

150, remark),

He

form a causative verb,

states that to

121,

irul

to

It follows

6).

form

from

544) they were

is

forms as bemarina

into use.

forms like nodidapam, madidapam are not used as declinable

remark

194,

g. bemarina, manalina, mugalina

e.

his opposition to such

had already come or were coming

states that

krillingas

used

but according to the Sabdanuiasana (sutras 447. 448.

2);

as

such,

because

its

author

Bhattakalankadeva adduces

nodidapanam, kudidapanam, madidapange, irdapana as ancient formations.

He

240,

says (see

of a practice that

remark) that some (grammarians or poets) who are fond

connected with grass (satrinabhyavahariga]), do not consider

is

that abnormity does not enter in poetical prose,

an

initial letter

(aroeigal)

which

do put

it

is

and use a short

a compound with repha, as

in poetical prose without calling

The author hopes that the remarkable

sithila
it

fact

explained and established by him

Kannada and

that

330),

European

210), two subjects wbich

of the

to the age of

Kannada

Sabdanusasana

nam

may remark) used

(p. 1 1 seq.)

(which

is

evident

to

puzzle

169.

poets Mr. Rice's Introduction to his edition

should be consulted.

Sabdanusaaana (under its sutra

137) was agreed to by some
the southern one were siding with

to the

not mentioned by Kdsava,

of the great poets of the northern way, whereas those of

am.

made

188).

*Here the remark may be added that according

288) the pronoun

and that the

See also his explanation of the participles

scholars.

185) and of the infinitive

As

(he

the

has been

174),

origin of the negative form of the verb in Dravida has been

by him

by

a blame (tegal). *

other Dravida languages have no relative pronoun

satisfactorily

letter followed

such disgustful persons

According to Nripatuuga's Kavirajamarga (1, 36)

which Kannada was spoken, extended from the Kaveri as

of the 9th century the

far as the Godavari.

region in

'i: I.

FACE.

Regarding the comparison of Dravida languages see 'A Comparative

Grammar

of the Dravidian or South-Indian

Rev. R. Caldwell, D.

D., LL. D, etc.,

Dr. Caldwell in his

Co.'

2nd

work

is

Family of Languages, by the

edition, 1875,

London, Trtibner

it-

inclined to think that Dravida exhibit-

close traces of relationship to the languages of the Scythian group.

The Publications consulted

for the present

grammar

are, besides the

Sabdamanidarpana, the following

1.

The Karnataka Sabdanusasana

2.

Nudigattu.

A Kannada

(see p. 4, note).

Manual of School-Grammar, by Dhondo Narasimha

Mulbagal, Kannada Teacher, Training College.

2nd

edition.

Mangalore, Basel

Mission Press, 1894.

3.

Kannada Schoolbooks, by native

Public Instruction.
4.

An

Elementary Grammar of the Kannada Language, by the Rev. Thomas

2nd

Practical

Key

to the

Bangalore, 1864.

edition.

Canarese Language, by the Rev. F. Ziegler.

NAgavarma's Karnataka Bhashabhushana

12th century), edited by B. Lewis Rice, M.

7.

1898.

2nd

Mangalore, Basel Mission Press, 1892.

edition.
6.

Bombay, the Department of

Printed at the Basel Mission Press, Mangalore, 1882

Hodson, "Wesleyan Missionary.

5.

authors.

R. A.

s.,

etc.

(of

about the beginning of the

Bangalore, 1884.

Kannada-English Dictionary, by the Rev. F.

Kittel.

Mangalore, Basel

Mission Press, 1894.

8.

Very valuable Inscriptions published

Indica, by
9.

J. F. Fleet, PH. D., c.

in the Indian

Antiquary and Epigraphia

E., etc.

Elements of South-Indian Palaeography, by A. C. Burnell, HOS.

University of Strassburg, etc.

10.

i.

Sanskrit

PH. D. of the

Mangalore, Basel Mission Press, 1874.

Grammar

for

Beginners,

by Professor

Max

Muller, M.

A.,

London, 1866.
Special thanks are due to the

SECRETARY OP STATE FOR INDIA

for his

generous aid by ordering a certain number of copies of the forthcoming

Grammar

for the

Home Department

in Calcutta

and by inducing the

Governors of Madras and Bombay and the Governments of Mysore and

of His Highness the

the
it

work

in

Nijam

to take a considerable

number

of copies of

advance whereby the Publishers have been enabled

through the Press.

to

cany

PREFACE.

VI

The author would

also gratefully

acknowledge the encouragement

he has received from the interest that several gentlemen have taken in

composing the present Grammar, of

his

Lewis RICE,
in

Mysore;

c.

i.

E.,

s.,

s.,

M. R. A.

he

may mention Mr.

late

Inspector of Schools in Coorg

Government Epigraphist, Bangalore; Dr.

s.. c. i. E.,

B.

Director of the Archaeological Researches

the Rev. G. RICHTER,

Dr. E. HULTZSCH,
BO. c.

M. R. A.

whom

and Professor R. GARBE, PH.

D.,

Tubingen.

As the author lived in Germany, the printing was carried on

and proof-sheets could not be sent

an unusual number of misprints;

to

him

F. FLEET,

J.

in India,

for correction, there occurs

but a corrected

list

of the errata will

enable the student to set them right before perusing the Grammar.
Finally the author quotes for his work the words of Kesava (sutra

and

vritti 4)

darpana,

may

"If there are any mistakes (dosha) in this (my) Sabdamanithe learned

(first)

mercy combined with gladness

Tubingen, 5th February 1903.

thoughtfully listen, and (then)

of heart rectify them."

with

TABLE OF CONTENTS.

Paget.
I.

II.

III.

IV.

V.
VI.

VII.
VIII.

IX.

X.
XI.
XII.
XIII.

XIV.

XV.
XVI.
XVII.

Introductory observations

On
On
On
On
On

On

XIX.

On

XX.

On
On

XXI.

22

--

29

declinable bases (Declension)

29

87

88163

verbs

164

adverbs, etc

160

170185
185198

in prosody,

primitive nominal bases

198

200

secondary nominal bases

compound bases

200

207

207

218

verbal declinable bases

218222

pronouns

222

242

adjectives

242

251

numerals

251

260

adverbs (again)

260300

the repetition of nouns, pronouns, adjectives, numerals, adverbs,

300

311

'only', 'alone'

311

314

additional tense-forms of the verb

314

330

so-called auxiliary verbs

330342

interjections,

XVIII.

roots or verbal themes

Euphonic junction of letters

Particulars of some letters, also

On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On

the form of the signs that are used as Letters (Alphabet, etc.)

and imitative sounds

the expression of 'other', on the article, and on the expression of

or; the
the; as
as; for;
or; neither
nor; whether
namely, as follows: what is that?; what happened?; in this

either

manner; as

so;

how much

so

much, how

so

many

many;
343

352

352

359

On illade, allade, altu

XXIV. On the repetition of verbs, and on the combination of certain verbs
XXV. On comparison
XXVI. On syntax
XXVII. On words corrupted from Samskrita
XXVIII. On the doubling of consonants
On a number of words contained in various places of the Sabdanuiasana

359

362

362

376

376

380

442

456

Index

457

478

479

483

XX.II.

when?; who he, etc

On the verbs en and an

*
.

XXIII.

.........

Corrections and Additions

380432
432

439

439

442

GRAMMAR
OF THE

KANNADA LANGUAGE
Introductory observations

I,

The term Kannada (^^),

1.

the Canarese of

European

writers,

is

formed

from Kar-nadu (S^-^rfo), the black cultivated country, referring to the black

commonly called cotton soil, which characterises the plateau of the Southern
Dckkan (^raj. jn the Samskrita language the term appears as Karnata (S^areJ)

soil,

and Karnataka
and

its

language.

is

the appellation of the Canarese country

l}

Kannada

2.

Kannada

(Srrasry^).

is

spoken throughout Mysore, the Southern Mahratta country.

some of the western

districts of the Nijam's territory (as far north as Bidar),

North Canara on the western coast.
The people that speak the
Kannada language are estimated at about nine millions.

in

and partly

in

The Kannada language belongs

3.

called the Dravidian

members

or

a group of languages whicn has been

n^>3) family by European

writers.

The

chief

of this family are

(3o<uoi33tf),

Tulu

The

4.

^>3

(/. c.

to

(^JtfJ),

Kannada, Telugu (3sJJrtO), Tamij. (33^), Malayala

Kodagu (tfadrtj), and Badaga (Urfrt, on the Nilagiri).
have borrowed a great many wonl<

so-called Dravidian languages

from Samskrita, especially such as express abstract ideas of philosophy, science,

and

roligion, together
S

(<;/'.

369);

but their

''The

structure
district of

name because
(/.

,-.

non-Samskrita portion

ordinary conversation.

sufficient for

matical

with the technical terras of the more elegant arts, etc.

it

with

that

Chiefly

considerable,

of Samskrita the essential

Canara (a corrupted form

was subjected

is

of

and once was

by a comparison of their gramindependence of

the

Kunnada) on the Western coast got that

for centuries to the rule of Kantiail.i princes, and the Carnatic

Karnutaka), the country below the Fustcrn Ghauts on the Coromandal coast, was (by a

ini*:i]>plioation of

terms) called Uy that

name

tiiM

l>y

tin-

Dravidian languages

can

Samskrita

of

satisfactorily

and

conclusively

be

established.

The

5.

on walls and

earliest written

documents of the Kannada language are inscriptions

and monumental stones,

detached stone-tablets
pillars of temples, on

and on copper-plates of the Canarese country. The inscriptions are often dated
if they have no date, the form of the letters used and historical references to
;

dated inscriptions serve to ascertain their age.

of the Old and

As regards the forms

6.

varieties of the so-called Cave-character,

Modern Kannada alphabets, they are

an alphabet which was used

for the

cave hermitages of Buddhists in India (e. g. at Salsette, Kanheri, Nasik, Sabyadri, Ajanta), and rests on the Southern Asoka character. This
character was about 250 B. C. employed in the Edicts of the Buddhist king Asoka.
inscriptions in the

Kannada

Different forms of the letters used for the

inscriptions

appear at

differ-

ent periods, the earlier forms differing in the greatest degree from those of the
1
Modern Kannada alphabet ^. At the time of the composition of the Basavapurana

1369 A. D. the

old alphabet

work mentions the

of that

had become already out of use, as the author

a
of Old Kannada (5to rf3j30&) as belonging

letters

to the past.

The Kannada language in the old inscriptions (of the Kadamba, Ganga,
Calukya, Rashtrakuta and other kings) of which specimens exist that belong to
7.

about 600 A. D.,

is

not the

same as that of the present day;

This Old Canarese

Old Canarese.

authors or the literary style.

It

it is

what

also the language of the early

is

may be

said to

have continued

is

called

Kannada

in use to

the

109), when by degrees the language of the

and
literary compositions begins to evince a tendency to become
inscriptions
Modern Canarese or the popular and colloquial dialect of the present time. A

middle of the 13th century (see

characteristic of the literary or classical style of the early authors

ordinary amount of polish and refinement.

One

of

The

classical authors

them was Nripatunga, who wrote the Kavirajamarga

is its

extra-

were Jainas.
(a treatise

on

l'
The earliest authentic specimens of writing in India are the edictal inscriptions of the
Buddhist king Asoka (also called Dharmasoka and Priyadarsi) who was the grandson of the
Maurya king Candragupta at Pataliputra (the modern Patna), and ruled from the extreme

north-west of India as far as

These

South.

which

is

right to

found

left,

Khanoshti)

and

inscriptions
in
is

in

Magadha
are

the East and

written

the inscription that

is

in
at

two

Mahishmandala (Mysore) in the

The alphabet
alphabets.

different

Kapurdigiri (near Peshawar),

clearly of Phenician or old Semitic (Aramaic) origin

the Southern inscriptions that are found in

Gujerat to Siddapura

in the

is

written from

has been called

numerous places from Girnar

Chitaldroog district of Mysore (these

B. L. Rice), are written from left to right,

(it

last

in

ones discovered by Mr.

and the alphabet employed in them is the source

has
been
alphabets.
thought by some scholars (Professors Weber,
Biihler and others) that the character of the Southern inscriptions also may be traced back
of all other Indian

to

a Phenician prototype.

It

the 9th century; another was

in

alankara)

Pampa

or

Hampa who composed

Bharata (an itibasa more or less based on Vyasa's Mahabharata)

and a third one was Argaja who finished his Purana in 1189 A. D.
8.

plan.

his

941 A.

in

D.;

The grammatical treatises on Kannada were constructed on the Samskrita

Their Jaina authors took Panini and others as their guides.
The earliest

grammarian, whose works have come down

belong to the first half of the 12th century.

to us, is

Nagavarma who appears

to

Kosiraja or Kesava, the author of a

well-known grammar, lived about one hundred years later, in the 13th century.
The above-named authors treat on the Old Canarese language, illustrating it by
quotations from the writings of former (or

wrote his

first

embodied

it

grammar, an epitome,

in his treatise

in

Nagavarma
contemporary) poets.
Kanda verses and Old Canarese, and

on the art of poetry, the Kavyavalokana

(in

Old

Canarese); his second grammar, the Karnatakabhashabhushana, is in Samskrita

proso sutras, each accompanied by a vritti or explanatory gloss also in Samskrita.

grammar, the Sabdamanidarpana, is composed wholly in Kanda verses

and Old Canarese (each verse having its prose vritti), and is the fullest
Kesiraja's

systematic exposition of that language ^.

9.

The ancient Kannada grammarians held the study

of

grammar

in

high

may be learned from the following words of the author of the Sabda"
manidarpana
Through grammar (correct) words originate, through the
words of that grammar meaning (originates), through meaning the beholding of
esteem, as

through the beholding of truth the desired final beatitude;

"
(sutra 10 of the Preface).
beatitude) is the fruit for the learned

this

truth,

')

The Kavirajanmrga was

tor of Archaeological
c.

i.

K.,

M. R. A.

.,

edited in 1898 by K. B. Pathak,

Researches
Director

of

B. A.,

(final

Assistant to the Direc-

Mysore, the Bharata also in 1898 by Lewis L. Rice?

in

Archaeological

Researches

in

Mysore.

(Mysore Govern-

ment Central Press, Bangalore.)

*)
Nagavarma's Karnatakabhashabhushana

was edited by B- Lewis Rice, M. R. A. 8.,

It contains
Mysore Government Press, 1884).
sabdakarakavidhana.
sandhividhana.
vibhaktividhana,
sanjnavidhana,

Director of Public Instruction (Bangalore,

10 paricchedas, viz.
ritividhana,
vi. Hi

samasavidhana,

taddhitavidhana.

Ana. and nipatanirupaaavidhana,

in

akhyataniganiavidhana, avyayanirupana280 sutras. An edition of Kesiraja's Sabdamani-

darpana was printed at Mangalore (Basel Mission Press. 1872). His work has
A short summary of its contents is as follows:
chapters and 322 sutras.
euphonic combinations of
used as

letters.

themes,

1)

Sandhi or

aksharasanjnapraknrana or the section of the signs

a) the letters of the alphabet;

b)

the vowels in particular;

c)

the conso-

sandhiprakarana or the section of combination of the mentioned

II. Nama or nominal
a) combination of vowels;
b) combination of consonants.
a) lingas or declinable bases, a) krits or bases formed from verbs by means of

nants in particular.
letters,

letters.

8 sandhis or
I.

2)

taddhita-bases formed from nouns and verbs by means of certain other

eamasas or compound bases, </</) namns or ready nouns (distinguished as
rudha, anvartha and tinkita; they include the so-called adjectives, pronoun-, numerals, and
themes from Samskrita, altered or unaltered); b) genders; c) the seven oases in the sinsuffixes,

suffixes,

ijular;

i>ii)

cc)

d) the

two numbers;

e)

the augments of the plural;

f)

particularities regarding

On

II,

the form of the signs that are used as Letters

(akshararupa, aksharasanjnakara, aksharasanjnarupa, varnasarijne,

varnanka,
10.

Kesava, the author of the Sabdamanidarpana, remarks on the origin

"
By the wish of the individual soul, by means of suitable
root
of
the
at
the
navel, like a trumpet, the substance of sound (sabdaair,

of articulate sound
(vital)

217-241), etc.

cf.

dravya) originates which

white (sveta, dhavala);

is

"The body

aksharatmaka) sound (sabda)"; and:

is

its

result

is

(articulate,

the musical instrument, the

is the
performer; on account of the
sound (sabda) originates which is of a white
colour (dhavalavarna) and has the form of letters (aksharariipa)."

tongue

the plectrum, the individual soul

is

mind

operation of his

(articulate)

Inarticulate (anaksharatmaka) sounds, as thunder from the clouds or the roar

of the sea, have no representations in grammatical alphabets.

There

11.

is

distinct letter for each sound,,

is a

pronounced exactly as

declension;

uses of the cases;

g)

declension of pronouns;
of

position

and vipsasamasa.
V.

themes).

VII.

VIII.

j)

change

change

k)

augment,

1)

3)

of letters.

elision,

and

III.

t)

substitution.

2)

the six

the

etc.

Samskrita sutras,

Archaeological

the

etc.,

It

another

is

grammar

the

of

it

Researches in Mysore,
the order given,

in

treats,

case affixes;

Old Canarese

Karnatakasabdanusasana, written by the Jaina

was edited by B. Lewis Rice, c. i. B., M. R. A. s.,
late

Director of Public

Mysore and Coorg (Bangalore, Mysore Government Central Press, 1890).

learned editor

etc.;

Sarnasa or com-

VI. Dhatu or verbal roots (or

Akhyata or verbs and their conjugation.
Tadbhava (Apabhramsa) or words corrupted from the Samskrita language.

Bhattakalanka, dated A. D. 1604.

Director of

a sufficient guide

compounds called kriyasamasa. gamakasamasa

IV. Taddhita-bases formed from nouns and verbs by means of certain
compounds.

Avyaya or adverbs,
in

is

remarks on number, gender, construction,

h)

Besides the Karnatakabhashabhushana there

language

and therefore every word

thus the ear

spelt;

of gender;

bases.

words, compound

classes of Saraskrita

suffixes.

it is

of

the

Instruction

According

alphabet; avyayas; sandhi;

iu

to its

nipatas;

personal pronouns; uses of the

singular and plural numbers and numerals; taddhitas; verbs and verbal affixes.

gender;

The

tadbhavas;

first

grammar

of the

by John McKerrell Esq..

November the

M. c.

16th, 1820.

compound words;

-uses of

Canarese language which appeared in English, was compiled

s., who dedicated his work to the King (George IV), Madras,

He

calls

it

Preface he states: "In the course of

"A Grammar

my

labours

of the Carnataka Language".

In his
ha\e derived much information from a

very scarce and accurate treatise upon the ancient dialect, which was compiled, about seven
centuries ago. by an Indian author

'The mirror

of verbal

Edward Richard

gems'

named Ccuhaca, and by him termed

I

feel

myself

iio SorfSo3~cso, or

under considerable obligations to

Sullivan, Esq., of the Civil Service, for his kindness in procuring for me
"
of Mysoor. the work of Ceshava
McKerrell's work has

from His Highness the Rajah

211 pages.

in

of the letters have been once

After the exact sounds

orthography.

acquired, every word can be pronounced with perfect accuracy.

The

accent falls on the first syllable.

12.

The

name

of a

true

pure,

letter

(suddhakshara)

is

akshara,

akkara, or varna.

Each

13.

the

Kannada

14.

has

letter

becomes

first it

its

own form (akara) and sound

is

by

(sabda);

by the other audible (sravana).

visible (cakshusha),

written from left to right.

The Alphabet (called aksharamale, akkaramale in the old and

and also onama in the later one), as an instruction for the

15.

later dialect

youthful (balasikshe), consists of 57 letters, in which case the so-called

Samskrita and Prakrita kshala (the vedic letter 55 of certain schools) is

and sound are the same as that of the

also counted, though its form

Kannada

so-called

kula.

various forms) are notorious on the

"sea-girdled" earth, i.e. throughout India, and the order in which they

Of the 57

letters forty-eight (in

are read (pathakrama)

& o

tf tf t?
in this

<3*

(see

The
<o

&o

is

kula.
in

tf is

(su.l(lli;i-vi,

anusvara) o;

16.

3*

jty*

zf

&

order to

Kannada

it

is

a^

3S*

The

35*

73*

&&

er

fej

ado 3d.

?TJ3

distinguish

is

PS*

en

3< qr

letter

&

from the true

it

a substitute for the letter Q*

substitute

&>

are peculiar to the

Samskrita

the

for

to

n*

&

S*

CO*

Kannada country

letter

oo.

(desiya),

Of these

and

this

the kula.
letters o

'&

with the above-mentioned forty-

oo, together

form the Samskrita alphabet of 52

In true

fej-

wu

31).

The four
eight,

9*
s

^ &

tJ

S3

In Samskrita the kshala

other nine letters are

C3* V*

letter

z? zf z? ^3 03^
called kshala in

33*

230)

(c/.

as follows:

so*

aj* 7^,2?*

list

Kannada

is

Kannada (accagannada)
rlz. (the vowels)
ea w
a
(and the consonants) 5*
re

r n*

3*

The consonants

with the top-mark

s*

are

47

indigenous

& VUSA^OJ^SD

stf

s33*i#

(25)

letters.

there

n* zp* CP*
t

13*

op

letters

ZM t> !?;
t3*

ith'*

dc^*

'3T3

sl

that in the preceding paragraph appear

which indicates that they are to be

(<5, 53*, etc.)
without
vowel
after them (asvaravidhi, vyanjanavidhi),
pronounced
any
*

are commonly printed with the sign - (a sort of crest, nowadays called
talekattu) added to the top (^ ri, etc.), in order to point out that the
1

Kannada vowel a (y)

short

is

be sounded after them.

to

In the case of ten consonants

(ajzsfci'sofcjrazoe;^!) C3), however,
the crest does not appear on the top, as it is so to say incorporated
- is a
It is supposed that the sign
with them.
secondary form of the
1

Kannada vowel
ero,

OXE, etc.)

a (y, see
24); but why are certain other vowels (u, u,
united with crested consonants? See
37.

The following

17.

is

a tabular

view

forms

of the

57

of the

and printed nowadays

are written

the Alphabet as they

letters of

(cf.

6),

the

->

consonants bearing the sign

Their sounds
16).
(the talekattu, see
are expressed in Roman characters with the aid of some diacritical

and

marks,

illustrated,

as

as

well

authors of

being given according

English
Telugu, Tamil and Malayala grammars):
a.

S3.

English letters

by

possible,
to

illustrations

(the

Kannada,

This letter has the sound of the English initial a in about ', around ',
or of the English final a in era ', Sophia ', 'Victoria ', or of the English
'

'

'

'

u in 'gun', 'cup'. (There is no letter in Kannada to represent the

sound of the English a in such words as 'pan', 'can', 'sat', 'hat').
3

a.

(ei ^).

This letter has the sound of the English a in

or of the English final a in

'S

papa

'

pique

',

'

or of the English ee in

eel

'

',

feel

'

'

in

pin

This letter has the sound of the English

i.

in

in

',
'

'

half,

father',

'

'

gig

',

machine

folio

'.

ravine

',

',
'

',

'.
'

This letter has the sound of the English u in

or of the English oo in book '.

u.

Ai.

'

'.

This letter has the sound of the English

i.

3?.

'

'full', 'pull',

put',

'

U.

erua.

This letter has the sound of the English u

in

'

rule

'

',

crude

or of

',

the English 00 in 'fool', 'root', 'shoot'.

SJj.

ri.

The sound

of this letter can only be learned from the

efficient teacher.

(Rustics pronounce

or also like the English roo in

srioja (S)dJ3).
<>2

Iri.

ri.

The sound

The sound

<fy.

The sound

rook

mouth of an

like the English ri in 'rich',

'.)

of this letter is that of lengthened s&.

of this letter can only be learned from an educated native.

(Rustics pronounce
Iri.

'

it

it

like the

of this letter

English loo in
is

'

look

'.)

that of lengthened *.

(The

letter is a

mere invention of grammarians.)

tO-

e.

This letter has the sound of the English e in

>.

e.

This letter has the sound of the English a

'

end

in

'

'

',

leg',

beg

'

',

peg'.

'ache', 'fate', 'late'.

This letter has the sound of the English

ai.

S3.

ei in 'height',
2o.

or of the English word

ai in 'aisle', of the

English

'

eye'.

This letter has the sound of the English o in 'police',

6.

'polite',

'romance', 'produced', 'potential' 'located'.

(There is no sound in
Kannada to represent the sound of the English o in such words as 'on'^
'hot', 'got',
this

L.

(a)

making,

e. g. lost

^^

This letter has the sound of the English

?3. au.

m.

o,

This letter has the sound of the English o

6.

o.

English

Uneducated Canarese people use

'object'.

pronounce

hot S53ib, top k>#.)

in

'gold', 'old', 'sold', 'ode'.

on, in

'ounce', 'out', 'mount'.

letter,
final, has the sound of the English m in
'botom ', 'bartram'.
(When in the middle of a word it is followed by
a consonant, its sound depends on the character of that consonant, as

when

This

in

the words ^o^,

it

is

s!oa), Toori, ToosjJ',

aoi$, eruo$, aoarf,

This aspirate has the sound of the English

h.

initial

5ocJ, sood,

tfo&Js',

34. 39. 40.)

rioaoS; cf.

riossd,
8.

to

in

'hat', 'head',

or 'hiss', the aspiration proceeding directly from the chest.

the alphabet, use to pronounce

in reciting

sound of the Kannada

letter ^-)

This aspirate is used only before the letters

then pronounced like the letter * (h).

X.

h.

oo

(&3).

This aspirate

rh.

is

=^.

ka.

the
SO. kha.

it is

(ka)

and

so

(kha),

and

to that of the letter

(h).

(In

often represented by the letter S*, sh.)

This letter has the sound of the English

Kannada

5*

used only before the letters & (pa) and $ (pha),

and then has a sound somewhat similar

Samskrita

(Rustics,

aha the a having the

it

letter

(a) after

k pronounced with

initial

it.

This letter has the sound of the preceding one, but aspirated, the

aspiration proceeding directly from the chest.

rl.

This letter has the sound of the English initial g

(a) after it.
pronounced with the Kannada letter

ga.

3^. gha.
22.

na.

ca.

'song' with the

Kannada

This letter has a sound similar

letter

fcj.

ja.

gold

'good

',

This letter has the sound of the English letter n before g in

cha.

(a)

after

K-ttcr

to that of

'charm', 'chase', 'child', 'church',

Cp (ejj).

'

'

This letter has the sound of the preceding one but aspirated.

'ring', 'long',
2c.

in

"J

(a) after

the English ch

kiii

'.

it.

in

'

pronounced with tho

charity'.
Kruinai.l.i

it.

This letter has the sound of the preceding one but aspirated.

This letter has a sound similar to that of the English

'join',

'

^
'jar', 'jackal', pronounced with the Kaiuiad.i

in
(a)

'judge',
after

it.

This letter has the sound of the preceding one but aspirated.

dp. jha.
'SP.

This letter has a sound which

ria.

ni in 'opinion', 'onion' (the

Kannada
y.

letter

&

is something like that of the

English
n being nasalised), pronounced with the

(a) after it.

This letter has the sound of an English letter t that

ta.

is

curling back the tongue, forcibly striking the under part of

Kannada

the roof of the mouth, and pronouncing the

(It differs essentially

it.

letter in
ti.

from the true English

Kannada. Natives, however, use

t, for

letter

formed by
it

&

against
(a) after

which there

to represent the

is

no

English t by

&.)

This letter has the sound of the preceding one but aspirated.

tha.

This letter has the sound of an English letter d that

is formed
by
back
the
the
under
of
it
curling
tongue, forcibly striking
against
part
the roof of the mouth, and pronouncing the Kannada letter & (a) after

3. da-

(It differs

it.

no

letter in

d by &
Zj.

dha.

essentially from the true English d, for

Kannada.

which there

is

Natives, however, use to represent the English

See also sub-letter

3, ra.)

This letter has the sound of the preceding one but aspirated.

This letter has the sound of an English n that is formed by curling

back the tongue, forcibly striking the under part of it against the roof

re. na.

of the mouth, and pronouncing the

English

letter

answers

to it;

Kannada

see under letter

letter
rf,

(a) after it.

(No

na.)

This letter has the sound of an English letter t that is formed by

bringing the tip of the tongue against the very edge of the upper front

3. ta.

teeth,

and pronouncing the Kannada

corresponding letter
ZjJ.

C3.

tha.
da.

letter

(a) after

see under letter

in English-,

6J,

it.

(There

is

no

ta.)

This letter has the sound of the preceding one but aspirated.

This letter has the sound of the English letter d that

is

formed by

bringing the point of the tongue against the very edge of the upper

and pronouncing the Kannada letter & (a) after it.

(There
no English letter which answers to it see under letter 3, da.)

front teeth,
is

c^.
(3.

dha.
na.

This letter has the sound of the preceding one but aspirated.

This letter has the sound of the English letter n that

is

formed by

placing the tip of the tongue against the very edge of the upper front
(There is no
teeth, and pronouncing the Kannada letter w (a) after it.

corresponding English
English n by ra, na.)
3J.

pa.

The sound

letter.

of this letter answers to that of the English initial p pro-

nounced with the Kannada

efi.

pha.

Natives, however, use to represent the

letter

(a) after

it.

This letter has the sound of the preceding one but aspirated.

The sound

ba.

to.

of this letter

the

is

same as that

pronounced with the Kannada letter

!0.

(a) after

of the English initial b

it.

This letter has the sound of the preceding one but as-

bha.

3XJJ

"J

pirated.
o.

The sound

ma.

The sound

OuO. ya.

in

(a) after

of this letter

like that of the English

is

the

is

pronounced

it.

same as that

'yonder'

of the English initial

pronounced with the Kannada

(a) after it.

The sound

ra.

letter

'yard', 'young', 'you',

letter

d.

of this letter

Kannada

with the

of this letter

nowadays has an

indefinite character like

(which Canarese people occasionally mistook for their

in ancient times it was formed by placing the point of the

the Samskrita r
letter

es)

tongue against the very edge of the upper front teeth, producing a
trilled, delicate sound of the English letter r, and pronouncing the
Kannada letter 5 (a) after it. At present the sound may be said to

resemble that of the English

Kaunada

letter

(a)

represent

the

Kannada

= ^^,

Dharwar

letter

^firirto,

'risk' with the

initial letter r in 'ring',

sounded after
z3,

(English people often used to

it.

their

by

r,

as in Canara, Coorg,

93d3sci)

This letter has the sound of a very harsh English letter r pronounced
with the Kannada letter
(a) after it. Nowadays it is not unfrequently
39).
represented by a double Kannada 3, i.e. Q (see

C5. ra.

w.

This letter has the sound of the English letter

la.

tip of the

bringing the

that

is

formed by

tongue against the very edge of the upper front

and pronouncing the Kannada letter & (a) after it. (The Kannada
v has neither the same sound as the Samskrita & nor that of the
English 1. The Samskrita letter ^ is very often represented in Kannada

teeth,
letter

by the so-called Kshaja;

SJ.

va.
'

2i.

The sound
wife

'

',

woman ',

The sound

sa.

see

15. 31.)

of this letter resembles that of the initial letter

the

Kannada

letter

(a)

being pronounced after

of this sibilant letter cannot be represented

in

it.

by any English

be learnt by hearing an efficient teacher pronounce it.

have represented it by the s in 'sure' and
however,
(Englishmen,
'

3Si.

session

sha.

is

it

letter;

to

'.)

This letter has the sound of an English

that

is

'shun')
mouth, and pronouncing the Kannada
X. sa.

initial

formed by placing the tongue

letter

&

(a) after

This letter has nearly the sound of the English

'sat',

'sin',

'so', the

Kannada

letter

(a)

sh (as

in-ar the

in

'shoe',

roof of the

it.

initial

letter s in

being pronounced after

it.

10
3o

na"

(stl).

The sound

initial letter

being pronounced
tf.

la.

of this letter

in 'horse',

after

is

something like that of the English

'husband', 'hoop', the Kannada letter

This letter has the sound of the English letter

that

Kannada

the roof of the mouth, and pronouncing the

tf.

&3.

la.

(It

represents two

See the preceding

la.

The sound

letters, viz.

manner

of this letter

Of the above-mentioned 57

19.

The

Kannada
ss

Present Tamij.
<>!

^L

is

SAJ3

sxk

/^

a.

>crr

U.

ri

ri

Iri

S3

after

15.31.)

formed by curling back the tongue and

e.g. in the word 'farm', in a rather

Kannada

letter

(a) after

it.

letters sixteen are vowels (svara).

Present Malayala
a
<3YD

a
i

GI

g_<D

3TF

^37

^T

ri

(OO)

pi

ri

6YO

Iri

Iri

Iri

t'

ai

ai

CT

o^J)

O_(.\)

<sr

ai
ffiaQ)

to

t>

a>o

25

au

au

*T

ri

*^

Devanagari

<$2>

Iri

o^

(a)

r,

against

forms of the vowels are as follows:

ero

it

the kshaja and kula; see

(Dr. Caldwell) with the

18.

initial

letter

letter.

pronouncing the English letter

liquid

(a)

formed by

is

curling back the tongue, forcibly striking the under part of

it.

&

it.

,<!)

au

au

Seven of the vowels are short (lirasva),

20.

and nine are long (dirgha),

&,;

viz.

viz. 53, *a, ero,

sdj,

w, &, WXO,

aJS>, <^,

&,

SO,

j,

o,

L, D.

have one measure (matre or prosodical instant) or

ekamfitraka;
ubhayamatra or
long vowels have two or are
dvimfitra.
A consonant (3, su, etc.) is said to last half the time of a
Short vowels

are

short vowel.
is lengthened to three measures in pronunciation
trimatraka or protracted (pluta). See
140, a and 215,6,

Occasionally a vowel
or becomes
letter k.

prosody a short or light vowel is called laghu, and a long or

Such a long vowel is long either by nature, or
vowel
guru.
heavy
by position (i.e. being followed by a double or compound consonant;
In

see

38).

Vowels are again divided into ten monophthongs (samauakshara):

of which each pair is of the same class
3s, ero SAJS, irfo s>3j>, 03 H>,

21.
3

w,

'a,

of letters (savarna) whether its letters be read in regular order (anuloraa)

as

e>

w,

or as

w,

-ds,

e?

or out of the usual order (viloma) as

etc.,

w,

'a,

di

-d?,

io S3 lo

(sandhyakshara):

etc.;

are eso&*,

Also the vowels

ii

<o

tj

&

-a, etc.,

>

so

to

are no

O, however,

language the radical forms of

in this

Kannada;
and those of O are 3^,

S5o5o,

y,

(in Samskrita) into four diphthongs

The vowels

5?.

real diphthongs in true

SO

and

sssj

(see

217).

are such as belong to one class, or are

savarna.
22.

By

the

way

it is

observed that,

in so far as

Samskrita

is

concerned, the

true Samskrita vowels ( 15), except a and a, /. e. 12 of them, are subject to the
217).
Though the terms are
peculiar changes called guna and vriddhi (see
mentioned by the grammarians Kagavarma and Kesava, their use is not stated.
The same is to be said with regard to the term nami which they mention, and

which

in

Samskrita denotes

changing a dental

all

the true Saihskrita vowels, except a and a, as

into a cerebral.

The Upendravajra verso

cited

by Napa-

varma and Kesava (probably from a Purana), in which the terms guna, vriddhi
and nami occur together, is in praise of the 12 Adityas.
pure Kannada the vowels gtfj sriJS <*j ^ are not indigenous;
they are found only in words borrowed from Samskrita.
23.

In

24.

If

each

of

the

initial

them uses

vowels

mentioned

secondary

one of the consonant forms (see

form

in

that

is

18,

follow

consonant,

always compounded with

36. 37).
j*

12

The

forms of the vowels together with their secondary ones

initial

appear in the subjoined table:

Initial

Secondary forms

forms

(See

16)

e)

SJ

SAJ3

Remark.

The form

and the sign ? (see

37) nowadays
used
to mark a long secondary vowel form, are somewhat uncommon
regularly
in Kannada
manuscripts of the 18th century. Initial & is written oSo (euphonical

o&s + <o)

in

we

<o?

find

sign

).

of the long initial vowel

them, but
for

<o.

to

The existence

etc.

appears as

of the sign

OSJ3

in

at the time that the manuscripts

were written,

(miru), to transgress,
by the form of the verb
is used also nowadays (>J3-> for S-xeso).
vowelled compound-syllables (see
36) are generally
S-ees.)

e. g.

repeatedly used in them, a form which

^, a and
not

= ass^; only occasionally

them (euphonical o&* + 2 +the

be pronounced a, e.g. oSj^D^

Initial

becomes further certain

however

in

marked as long by the sign

i.o3o3, dd^

for

c3?SJ,

for ^J3?rlo, e< c . C/. also

s^

in the

manuscripts,

for $<3, &c5 for ^c5, &,3 for

41.

e.

g.

^^,

^esJri stands for

^es3 for

13
25.

The consonants (vyanjana, bilakkara)

seven in number.

of the alphabet are thirty-

Bearing the sign which indicates that they are sounded

with the short vowel

53

(a) after

them

16. 17. 3G), they are the

(see

following:

SJ

&,

<

<3

3i

^j

The same

$>

2S

dtp

*SP

Ca

(^

20

ri

ra

Si)

Tamil

in present

633T

Uj

ff

&)

fO

611

The same
cb

01

6L\

SO
oo>

(0

The same

r^a

6MP

fiW

^y-

in present

S3T

Malayala

C>D

G1

6Y3

(0\JU

6TO)

r\JO

CVXD

6YY)

ccn

UD

cu

no

o_i

on

6DJ

2)

ej

QJ

c/a

Q^I

oro

QD

in Devanagari, as far as they exist therein

?T

gi

14
It will

26.
in

sets

series

having

be observed that 25 consonants are horizontally arranged

Such a
(pancaka) in each.
and
a
letter
belonging to it a
(varga),

five

or class

set is called a

letters

letter

classified

(vargakshara, vargiyakshara).

The

27.

(pancavarga), each from their

five classes

distinguished as kavarga

(^sjrtr),

tavarga (^drtr), and pavarga

The remaining 12
The

28.

letter, are

first

cavarga (^drl~), tavarga (k^rlr),

(sjrfrlr).

(11) consonants are unclassified (avarga, avargiya).

column

letters of the first perpendicular

(called vargapra-

thama or vargaprathamakshara) are hard, those of the second one

(called vargadvitiya or vargadviti) akshara) hard and aspirated, those of
the third one (called vargatritiya or vargatritiyakshara) soft, those of the

fourth one (called vargacaturtha or vargacaturthakshara) soft and aspirated ; those of the fifth one (called vargapaiicama or vargapaucamakshara)

are

particular nasals (anunasika) of each class, which are used as

the

such when, in combination, they precede a consonant of their respective

class; see

The

220, and

39. 40.

cf.

difference between hard

in the old

Kannada grammars.

Kannada grammars

and

By

soft

the

consonants

way

it

may

is not expressed in words

be remarked that modern

hard ones karkasavarna or parushavarna, and

call

soft

ones

rnriduvarna, or saralavarna.

29.

Kannada grammars

distinguish between consonants with slight

6
breathing or weak aspiration (alpaprana), viz. =s* 13* ktf s S3- n* 22* &*
S3* w*, and consonants with hard breathing or strong aspiration (maha-

prana),
is

viz. S36

an unaspirated

Nowadays some

3*

zp*

^^

letter,

tty

9* 2^; but practically alpaprana

and mahaprana an

aspirated one (see

an aspirated letter gandakkara (male

an unaspirated one hennakkara (female letter).
30.

In pure

call

Kannada

the consonants ^ and

351

218).

letter)

do not occur;

and

they

are found only in words borrowed from Samskrita.

31.

the

The

letter

in parenthesis in
It is,
in
Kesava.

by
grammarian
and pronunciation with the
Kannada ^ ( 15); and it

kula,
is,

as

25
fact,

is

called

kshala

identical

as

Kesava terms

therefore,

it,

unnecessary

or
to

to

the

make

15)

form
true
it

It is often used by Kannada people as a substitute for

separate letter.
Samskrita ^, the sound of which in the Samskrita language apparently

15
bears a dubious character for them, one that
their

tf

this

Kesava's kshala.

is

The consonants

and

neither their

is

nor

<j

227. 228.

Of.

have become, at the present period,

obsolete (although they are of intrinsic value for Dravidian philology).
Already the grammarian Kesava had to state in which words the C^*
In bygone times &>
was used according to previous authors (see
233).
32.

C5*

was occasionally

changed into o* (see

236), occasionally into
in the mediaeval dialect
occasionally into the letter which it preceded
and nowadays it is as a rule represented by & (see 228), is exception}

converted

ally

modern

the

in

are

up

to

common

time in

occurs

3*

in

still

appears
course

of

use

l)

Kannada

zodor^j)

J*,

(oM. &? and

S5<

the Tamil, Malayala and

among

the present Telugu (see

in

still

>c3of) or

tJ

or

altogether (as wdo^o,

dialect, appears as o* or as a double o*

this

the

In

Jo or

for

odo,
Q

for zoejjo^o

Badaga people;
letter S36

a following letter (as

into

disappears also

The

3).

literature of the 18th century.

work the ancient original forms have been

this

retained.
l)

Some

historical dates regarding the

(based chiefly on the very valuable inscriptions

C3*

or sasanas published by Dr. Fleet in the Indian Antiquary are the following

From about 600

1.

we

find e.g. nC3 J

to

destroy,

to

wash.

We
world,

(for

we

(for

ecO' rfjcSj),

(for

toCS),

place, etc..

),

'att*, to be,

and

free grant,

in

ss? (for

enC3),

about 1200 A. D.

SaS^o

D.;

and #&->

staff,

la

and

f5rtC3*,

to

paddy
a

field,

paddy

ffo
to

aa^Oj),
fallen.

in

field,

(for

^OJ^),

C3*

into

*Qj,
to

e3je?tf),

r and

seventeen, s3?v* (for

wash, in one

having

C3J),

seven, e<? (for

>C3j).

^onv

r!C^

(for

la

(for

place, etc.,

one of 1076 A. D.

to dig,

*C3J

a
ndi^F (for nO^),

>Vj (for

fC3>),

to be, of the Dictionary?),

a transition of the

pleasure, nnd

(for wC3),

(for S(^c*),

St^rt)*
waste,

till

(for rtW*),
to

to stay,

'3S3J,

strange forms tfMrt (for 3vrt), below, GJ'j^tf (for

having gained or overcome.

~
immersed, &:&

increase,

GJ*

the

find aCS^,

it

Srts-*, to shine,

the

v*,

is

s3?C3*),

951 A. D.;

of

>so (for

>Qj),

seven,

one of 1019 A. D.; to<? (for

in one of 1048 A. D.; fSnO* and
to wash, in one of 1075 A. D.;

3O), to destroy, truiioC (for eruotoO), a rentshine.

(for 5|3nC3), to praise,

SC3 s<.

fSn^r

N. of a place,

(for rjncs.), fame,

to

'3C3*,

5^v<

be,

and

(for CTC3),

he make,
one of 1084 A. D.;
sj?"^ (for cj?::^), may
4
ana*), a ditch, ^pnv* (for s&nK ), to praise, $nv* (for

to ruin, in

nv<

(for

fame, sfiurc? (for syncs'), praise, r5n^. (for jSnoy, fame, in one
1123 A. D.; J3oO>^, N. of a place, loC5>, place, etc... 35;Q*. to speak, c3-;Q*, to see,
make, and *JF (for tfCOJ ), to wash, s<? (for eC5'), to destroy, s^jri^ (for ^jnc^), praise,
(for e8nc^), fame, in one of 1181 A. !>.; sSrtv (for s^HCS*), to pr ii>,-. =tnv-(f,.r

to shine,

to

rttx>

sasana of 929 A.

to speak, in a

of

field, 'aGJj^o^FC
be (could this be the

From about 900

2.

observed, as

(for

to

meet also with

rtC3j

a paddy

'BCD*,

109).

(cf.

was throughout in nse; in that period

seven hundred persons, 3G3 3J., seventy, SO,

about 900 A. D. the

to

rfn^

(for jSrSC^),

to shine,

&v*,

>VJ (for

will (leseen.l. in one of

^C,

4sC3j),

1187 A. D.

seven,
Cf.

in

_".!>;

one of Us:; A.
;>

t'.O,

1.

!>.;

'a^ruo

(for

TSC'rtjo).

IK-

leThe throat (kantha,

ss.

koral), the palate or

roof

of

the

mouth

(taluka, taluge, galla), the head or skull (sira, mastaka, murdhan), the
teeth (danta, pal), the lips (oshtha, tuti), the nose (nasike), the chest

and the root

(ura, erde),

of the

tongue (jihvamula, naligeya buda) are

the eight places (sthana, tana) or organs of the letters.

The

& & 3

pronounced from the throat are guttural (kanthya) they are

Those formed by means of the palate are
zp & 3o

letters
3J

ri

(X).

palatal (talavya); they are

>

so

been called also kanthya-talavya).

(murdhanya); they are

cerebral

(> and 53 have

Those coming from the head are
ejj

te

gjjja

gtfj

dp

*sp

crfj

3;

y^^^rsdGS^eO;

The letters formed by the

(sometimes these letters are called lingual).
aid of the teeth are dental (dantya); they are ^
^ ^ $ d q$ 3 o ?3 <.
Those pronounced with the lips are labial (oshthya) they are sro erus L>
;

SJ

to

do

oo

5J

(sometimes

has been called dantoshthya).

are nasal (anuuasika, nasikya)

t,

The
;

are called kanthoshthya, and

they are

through the nose

has been
( o
o;

uttered

letters

23 'Sp ca rfo

The letters o3o o s3 (called semi-vowels)

are not nasal (anunasika, niranunasika) and, under certain circumstances,
nasal (anunasika, see
219); there is no mark in Kannada to show the
called also kanthya-nasikya).

The letter pronounced in the chest or pectoral letter (urasya)

uttered
from the root of the tongue or the tongue-root sibilant
That

difference.
is g

(jihvamuliya)

When

is

X.

two consonants are produced

in the

organs, they are called ekasthani (see

The

34.

a letter that

labial sibilant (or aspirate) oo

is

to be

same place or by the same

238. 239).
is

called upadhmaniya,

i. e.

pronounced with a forcing out of breath; it only

& and Sjj. The nasal o is called anusvara

occurs before the consonants

or after-sound, as

that in Samskrita

Kannada where
or sonne;
at the

215,
o in

it is

it

is

it is

always belongs to a preceding vowel; from its form

a dot, it is called bindu, and from its form in
represented by a circle or cipher,

a substitute for a nasal letter, and

17;

39. 40).

either from

The
its

sibilant (or aspirate)

being pronounced

breath or from its liability to be rejected;

is

it
it

called sunya
does not stand

is

end of a word (where it is pronounced like the English m, cf.

its sound depends on the following consonant (see under letter
8),

visarjaniya

it

when

frequently changed and

occasionally

if

is

with

called visarga or
full

emission

of

followed by another letter,

dropped.

The tongue-root

17
sibilant

(or

aspirate;)

3 and

nants

jivhamuliya

can only stand before the conso-

aj.

The sunya (sonne or bindu)

35.

and visarga

are

semi-vowels

They and the upadluna(svaranga) and semi-consonants (vyaiijananga).

and
are
to
so
oo
X
jihvamuliya
say semi-letters, and as such form
niya
the 4 so-called
tion with, or

yogavaha

letters

/. e.

letters,

in connec-

always appearing

depending on, others.

Visarga, upadhmaniya and jihvamuliya do not occur in pure Kannada,

but are used only in words borrowed from Sariiskrita.

As has been stated

36.

cluding aj

vowel

'SP

(a) after

S3

24

eJ

ra

them.

16 and 25 the crested consonants

in

(in-

are always sounded with the short

w^65Cs3)
When any of

the secondary forms of the vowels

united with the consonants to form vowelled compoundsyllables, the consonants partly retain the shape they have when the

given in

is

sounded after them, but mostly lose their talekattu or

Here follows a tabular view of them:

vowel

S3

crest.

is

(a)

sj

2^

EJ

^^

Cs

20

co

CKJ

dO

OJOOOO

the union

Q>

do

$<p

&j

oj

r\

jj

do

&j

When

rt

V*

dOO

OJO

K
r

ST

c^tjj

PS

$9

N?>

SJ0

place, the vowels,

o^O

SJ

2y)

jj

G3^

has taken

5**

2!&

like the short

S3 (a),

are pronounced after the consonants to which they are attached.

In

37.

the

Southern

Mahratta country the

syllables are called ka-gunitakshara,

increased in

number

after the

them

series of

them

and a

is

manner

s>3

(a) is

table exhibiting the union

following-

two pages

it

is

vowelled

compound-

syllables that are multiplied or

of ka, this

called balli.

series of the ka-gunita-syllables

after which the short

i. e.

being the

In writing

customary

tirst

of

and reading the

consonant

to place the

sounded, at the beginning of each series.

of

vowels with consonants

is

given on the

18
^J"J)

kha

sj

ixt*

SJ3 kha
rra

ga

^gha

gha
na

23

na

ca

233 ca

cha

ejs

eji

cha

Bja

23*)

dp jha

doje)

ta

d tha

d da

jDkhi

gi

ni

2S

ci

23-

<> chi

^D? khi

Sjj

h? gi

rio

gni

ni

2S ^

23? ci
^)?

chi

ta

Soo? jhi
'SC

ui

ej ti

thi

da

ni

'SC ^

ku ^js ku

^o

khu

kri

kri

khri

SJ N

khri
>

gu

^o ghu ^J3 ghu

220

nu

23J5

nu

2^0

CU

2^J3

CU

chu

^J3 chu

^jj

dcpj

jhu dopfc jhu

nu

nu

tu

eJo

do thu

&

do du

ghri

nri

nri

2^x cri

cri

^N ^hri

chri

22\

jri

Pj

'SCO

Q^ tin

^g

2d\ iri

jn

13? ti

di

khu

SJJS

eJ

fc

33 tha
c33

ki

$?

o^

jha

na
&Je)

ki

ja

na

'SC

dp>. jhri

nri

'SCx

tu

thu

tri

thri
*

thri

dri

dri

e)

du

'

e)

^ dha
na

ra

^ ta
qj

tha

d da
qj

dha

t^3

dha

^4>

na

33

ta

tha
zp3
C3e)

qra

da

dha

^ na

73

na

pa

333

pa

pha
ba

5p3 pha
W3 ba

bha

2J3

3J

cf!

20

sjo

ma

Coj

ya

d ra
f1-^

^^w'

^>

VQ
ui
JL

la

bha

ma
03 ra
C333 ra

dhi

r3 ni

a
a
a

dhu

d?

ni

C30

nu

ti

^o tu

^J3 tu

$o thu

$J3 thu

CK thri

do du

dJ3 du

d\ dri

ti

3^

thi

thi
^>e

di

dhi

>?

di

q^J3

^J3 nu

pi

^j)

^j

phi

^j^ phi

bi

bhi

>g

c^e

bi

^j)

200

pu

phu
bu

2^o

o3o yi

Ji

ri

C3

33 la

ojJ3

$3/3

20J3

dhu

pu

phu
bu

q$>
pJ.

nri

nri

F3\

tri

tri

thri

dri
,

dhri

dhri

nri

nri

3Jx

pri

PP

phri

3^ phri

bri

bri

ri

ri

li

bhu

El bhri

mu

mu

dov mri

yu

yd

oio>,

\3

bhu

mi doo

'

20^

bhi

Do mi

nu

^o nu

pi

dhri

d\ dhri
'a)

$o dhu

&

dhu

ni

ae dhi

ni

>

<^o

^^ dhi

o3oo

2^J3

yri

do ru

ru

d\ rri

C3o ru

ru

C5 rri

vi lu

lu

ex

bhri

mP
J

rri

Iri

iri

e)

d
2!

va

S33

sa

33 sa

va

vi
si

a?
&%

vi
si

rfv

SU

2K sri

shu

shu

3^1x

Sio

su

su

3cO

hu

hu

2c N hri

2JJ

vri

vri

SU

sri

9)

3l
?j

sd
tf

sha
sa

ha
la

CJ la

3S3 sha
TJe)

Sa

00^) ilii

&

shi

&L? shi

A)

si

^o? si

3o hi

&>

hi

s?3 la

s^j

s^o
ft" 9 li

li

lu

eoo lu

shri

shri

sri

Vi

bri
>

Iri
1ft

klri

tf

&

"2

klri

ke

tf

19

ke

tfp

so khlri

sj khlri

rt

r(

"

khe

a3

"I

glri

3^

iilri

23

e$ ghlri

$ ghe

g6

fle

^ ghe

ne

rilri

2C3

clri

saf

c<3

sP

che

22

"7

khe

a3?

ge

rt

ghlri

clri

23
r*

on

chlri

<$

chlri

efi

to

jlri

to

"2

ne

;3p

jhlri

nlri

'SO

tlri
*

eJ

jlri

dp

jhlri

nlri

'so

tlri
"

fej

thlri

d thlri

dlri

rf

07
'

dhlri

rs

nlri

^
rs

**

gai
7\
O

tS je

tlri

zc3

^J3? jo

d^^ jhe dp; jhai &pJ3 jho

'so ^

ne

&3p te

dhe

^^ dhe

nlri

f|

ne

f|p

tlri

cle

ne

3
'SO

Jp te

dhlri

qS

dhlri

nlri

nlri

plri

sj

aW tai

fe3j5

^$ thai

'

&W dai

phlri

3^

plri

"2

20

bhlri

mlri

rlri

<vj

pe

phe

^ phe

23

be

t3p

bhlri

bhe

be

rlri

vlri

So

ve

dp ve

C3 rlri

re

CJen

yai

rai

slri

3^

shlri

^ se
sS

she

se

JJSP to

3^ tau

tho
zpja^

qf

d>e do

c^ dau

ipjs^
fS>J3?

dho
no

^js^ po

p% pho

thau

dhau

qfa

^> nau
pau

35^

3^ phau

23J3P

bo

?&>

bau

2^J3^

bho

2p^

bhau

s3JS)P

mo

o3J3

d&

yo
ro

o3J3e

yo

6 JSP ro

sS^ she

so

^^ se

3o

hlri

3o

he

le

s?f 16

llri

ro

3
Cfl

o^>

rau

J9? ro

5^

rau

<s3>

e3ja 16

e3J)f 16

pjs lau

s3i

vai

do vo

dse vo

^ vau

^J3 so

^J3^ so

35^

3J3^ sho

35^ >lian

sai

shai

3^1

sho

3&J3

sau

Q^

slri

C3

rai

CS3

lai

^,

?j

s^

CS3

"2

llri
"

no

qj

jj

llri

bo

f|j3P

dau

^)

vlri

<3

23J3

6.

sj

hlri

bai

o3o>

s3? 16

3o

phai 5jp pho

23>

df re

16

slri

po

o5p

ye

^J

pai

&

?J3 no

6 re
&33 re

f*2

nai

dho

zpjs

e>

llri

3Si

&

do

o3op ye

o3o

e^

shlri

dhai

zpN

zpj3

tho

bhe $, bhai $J3 bho

s3o? me sSox mai s3js mo

llri

slri

|J3 to

E^^

e;

si

thai

no

ffjs

me

CS3

&3 rlri

^) dhau
^> nau

dhe

3^?

oJo ylri
?
c5
en

"

^w tai

-^

^7
C3

^J3^ dho

zpf

5 pe

sSo

ojj ylri

cf3

dhe

ne

mlri

sli

^jse ]o

ji dai dJ3

"J

s^ thau

de

"{

blri

^JSe tho

^J3 do

zSe

blri

phlri

;jj

^7

20

nai

&pjs? jho dc^jhau

no '3pd^ nau

'ST2 J3^

3.0 tho

to

dhai z^J3 dho

^,
^j
f|,

zfa jau

^p tau

de

?S^

no

^J3e to

zp^

ne

j5

^JS

&

cS

jp

nai

the

zp

nau

2J3 jo

ne

the

2Sf3

z, jai
V

je

jhe

te

K^JSP no

eS

dlri

no

232,0

&p

te

gau

^> chau

dhlri

rf3

e3^?

d^

dlri

c5

go

^JS cho

q5

fiai

'sps
tf

flja?

chai

$p the

thlri

go

q5^

^ khau

^^ che

de

thlri

rU

kau

?f

kho

SfXghai $J3 gho

*l

s3j?>

25^ cau

g the

'

fllri

ro

fj

kho

2J8P 60

"J

a!U)

tJ3 co

<*i

"I

^J3pk6

khai

cai

*J

ko

23\

cu

dp

tfja

s3,

"J

23

kai

glri

"2

&
<>

"?

llri
"

s?

C33 le

ho

e^^

16

^ sai
3o^

bai

^ lai

lai

?3je)

so

^> sau

^j3 ho

3s/)?

ho

gp hau

<&Q 16

^J3^ 16

v^

&&>

C^3j3p 16

C^"3 lau

?3js

so

16

:lu

20
At school the mark

the vowel

used for the vowel

are called

called =^J3djo

ero is

mark

and the mark

-^

used for

mark

used for

rtoS?l) or rtodj^o, the

rtoca?fo,

the

<a

$ that descends 'from a consonant as the

tj'

sign for the long vowels

is

and the name

called 'S.C^,

etc.

be written also

may

If

38.

more than

or by

5^1

a consonant

&

and

tJ

mark

for the

AH

51e

^s

in.

(as

^ is

in

and

33

=&& =jd^

a?^^.

f{

7Y1? etc.

followed immediately by another consonant

is

more consonants are written

one, the two or

group (samyoga), and thus double

consonants

are

20. 240).

(cf.

compounded, the

former

one

in

compound consonants (dvitvakshara,

or

ottakkara, dadda, dacldakkara) are formed

When two

and

etc.,

one

latter

consonant

is

underneath
is
subscribed; wlien three
consonants are united in one group, the third is written underneath
the second one; and when four are compounded, the fourth is subscribed
the

written

the

to

Kannada a combination

true

In

third.

or

more than two

of

consonants does not occur.

In reading, the upper consonant that
eJ

w v

r3

63 C3,

vowel

short

is

pronounced
sounded with the

36)
is

(a)

crested (including sj 23 &

like a half consonant, and the
is

lower

if

consonant;

three

consonants are compounded, the second one too is pronounced like a

53 (a) is sounded with the lowest one;

half consonant, and the short vowel

and

so on.

The subscribed consonants, as a rule, have the uncrested shape

used for the union of Consonants with vowels ( 36); but Jin the

39.

that

is

of seven letters the shape

case
.

as

sjo

as

form of

the

is

different,

vJ'

which case

p, in

d as

<a'

=<.'

also

o3o as

consonant, but sounded before

it;

as

written

same

the

The following are some examples

ov

is

it

namely ^ appearing as
and 3^ as
d often takes
after

the

following

be said concerning

is to

of double

3.

and compound conso-

nants:

kka,

^kna,
nka;
tka,
>

e8a;

tta,

sea;

jj a ,

^ kcha,

kea,

knya,

ttha,

mba, ^rama,
vva;

kkha,

tna;

^ mra,

^nna;

kta,

^ kma, ^ kya, ^

K jna;
^nSa;

&

^,

kra,

tta,

ppa;

j^

J, ktra,

ktya,

krya,

taa;

bba;

nda,
r

bhya;

ktrya,

^ kva,

kla,

ndrya;

mpa,

^mla; ^yya; ^ rka, ^,rta; ^rcha; ^Ipa;

^ ska, ^ sta, ^stra; ^ stha, ?^sma; s^ hna.

shta, ^. 5 shtrya;

21
Instead of

d,,

Q,

d,
<a

may
may

in writing)

the forms tfr. 3r, dr.

etc.,

The 'upper nasals

be used.

etc.

CA,
C3,
eo

etc.,

etc.,

take the form of the circlet called sonne

34), so that

iS
may appear SIS *
ii'
^' 1' *$' ^'
e. g. in yotf,
sioZc, woeJ,
okj, orf, o^, 0$, od, 0$, o?3, osj, ow, o3j,
See
220.
o3,
oq5, zoori, ^o$, ciotf, ^osirs, <oozo, Wodo.

^' ^'

1 3"

*&'

dr,

(for the sake of convenience

02J

'

riozS,

one of the secondary forms of the vowels ( 24) is to form a

compound consonant, it is attached to the upper consonant.
In reading, it -is sounded after the lower consonant, or if more than
If

40.

part of a

two are compounded,

S3

after the lowest one,

the

as

just

vowel

short

38.

of

The following instances may be given,

which also the way of

attaching the vowels appears in case the sonne represents an upper
nasal

39)

&\

akki;

^or

^^

^^

or

^od tande;
UE^ or
See

or ^JSorfo, honnu.

a -d ea> erua
and s* to vo
Initial
osSo^.

see

(=^^,

g. 3^?1) for
remark under

265

also
j,

-cw^^o,

2)

1)

vowels

as

and

and

J
e.

g.

3^

or

^^ keldu;
^-0^

sthana;

vowels

e.

oi

-Ss

i),

4^ 4^ 4^- Regarding
oiosli for

OJo^,

o&s>^^K

g.

to

oi:*

(=wj^,),

to

an

Initial

is

vulgarly changed into 3,

into s,

2,,

e.

</.

of jihvamiiliya,

consonants

1*$

initial

consonant, e.g.

for d^i

Cf. also

sJo.

(the

upadhmaniya, anusvara and

latter

compounded with

form of the vowels) are named

w,

etc.,

'making', to their sounds, e.g. es^sd,

3)
O

o&e>,

_j/.

by simply using their sounds, e.g.

by adding ^tf,

sounds,

n du-,

when attached

talekattu or with any secondary

ways:

^'^

24.

With the exception

all

kunti;

stotra;

to,

may appear

i)

125;

e.

visarga,

3-Q^

ungrammatically, prefixing

(=d^s5), ^foe^eS (=s3j^e3).

42.

strl;

thus: o3o 03J3 o3o o3oe;

use
instead of o3o, ojj e.
also,
they

initial

bandi; ^?

^:>o3

people pronounce and write the initial

<>}>&&,
?ru3

6tti;

^-^ kukshi; ^S, or

or 'Sock

or z-o^ 6nte-,

220.

Many Kannada

41.
r

CTsVSJ

2Jo<3

2^

irme;

^^

or ^csfc arame;

^4, appu; w3^

$&, appi;

'Soyo imbu;
or
'gdo^ or
3TO-S- kanki
^o&j
or
kanei
;

3^

in

^i
oJ

^^;
00

=a,

^s,

etc.;

5e>0,

by adding t to their sounds, e.g. e$3,

an(^

the

in four

4i

4 ) by" adding rfr?r, 'letter', to their

22
The
is

letter

a substitute of

6^

when

or 6e^, also

the F

&3*.

The system

43.

generally called

is

(o*, r)

Kannada manuscripts

punctuation in

of

is

the same

as the Samskrita one, viz. in prose at the end of a sentence the sign
in poetry the
used, and at the end of a longer sentence, the sign
;
|

is

||

sign

placed at the end of a half verse, and at the end of a verse,

is

the sign
the sign

(In certain prose writings, as in Devarasa's Sanandacaritra,

put not only at the end of a sentence, but also after single

is

words or a number of words.)

44.

The Kannada

numbers (anke,

used to express

figures

lekka,

saiikhye) or the numerical figures are:

A.

e.

1234567890
.

They have been adopted from

appear
the

the 5th

in

century A. D.

Hindus, introduced

wherein

the Samskrita,

they

first

The Arabs who borrowed them from

them into

Europe,

where

they were

called

Arabic figures.

Ill,
45.

roots or verbal themes

Before introducing the chapter

author thinks
as very

On

on declinable bases (IV.) the

desirable to treat of the so-called verbal roots (dhatu),

it

many nominal bases are derived from them

100).

"A

(verbal) root (dhatu)", the grammarian Kesava says "is the

basis of a verb's meaning
(kriyarthamula) and has no suffixes (pratyaya,
in
other
a root is the crude form of a verb.
",
or,
words,
vibhakti)
46.

Ancient Kannada grammars based on literary writings, distinguish between monosyllabic (ekaksharadhatu) and polysyllabic roots
47.

(anekaksharadhatu).
'root-recital'

In this

These roots have been collected by Kesava in

(dhatupatha) or

list

list

there appear as monosyllabic roots e.g.

as dissyllabic ones

e.

g. eso, siD,

his

of roots.

&>2o,

^ooo,

,08, jft8,

-ds,

to,

&>*>,,
u

as
trisyllabic

ones

e.
,

23

as quadrisyllable ones

e. //.

e.

la

"O

and as quinquesyllabic ones

tJ

#.

?ddo.cao,

48.

modern Kannada that it apparently

a consonant without a vowel, so that e. g. the

It is a striking peculiarity of

has no roots ending

in

above mentioned roots

'SO*, flotf, =$J30i5,

tfJS^', rO?c3*, &S>ee^, SS^ocf ,

^$0*

tfjtfo*,

by the addition of the vowel

as a help to enunciation, have the forms of

61, remark;
1G6; the present-future participle
54;
and
also
the
for ^jaois* etc. in
^jaofo
205, 2 and
181,
imperative
further that such monosyllabic roots as 3s, )J3 and 2^, appear as
in

it

and

dectfoo in

But we have,
3?io

wi&J,

(of
^jdo

in

(c/l

in the

(of 23?sS&3o,

162. 163).

modern language,
J3o3oo

(of 3?i^},

20^0

(of 30i),

it

160),

e.

g. the past participles

(of ^JScdjjg), rtcdoo

(of todo), ^c^, (of

3Q

s);

(of JC3o,

w^^

cJ^),
zSj^j

161),

(of rtoJoo*,

155),

(of w?3e3o),

23??j^

(of zSeo^oo,

162),

wcso

which forms prove

164),

(of eA)rso), ^rso (of ^rao), ^J3raj (of ^J3b,,

the existence of roots with originally final consonants in

it

too

etc.).

When

49.

carefully examining Kesava's

the English term

in

'root',

many

instances, does .not

the meaning of the term 'dhiitu'.

for

5^or

and

^jsrsp^j

of 2^do* and 3Jck

u
of j^rfdo ^s*, and so
sjj.i^o

properly

and

express

Q?1> in

47,

vJ

is

of

(3oJ3e;20J

Such verbs

Kesava's term 'dhfitu'

from ^doj and

from 55^0'

si?gj,

suffix z^o,

composed

3oJ3^>2johdj of
on.

?3o,rio

suffix

)Dj^or, by means of the

149 seq.)

(see

The verbs

by means of the

instance, are formed

of roots, one finds that

list

^jsrao

and

and

&d

are,

according to European

may

here and there denote a

notions,

no

root

the primary element of a verb or primitive verbal theme, but

i.

e.

roots.

often stands also for a secondary verbal

His definition of dhatu, therefore,

verb which

is

is

not always a real root.

theme

that

it

is

;uul

compound

verb.

the crude form of any

24
In

50.

further

the

discussing

dhatus

of

subject

use

us

let

the

general term of 'verbal themes' for them.

There are a good many monosyllabic verbal themes in ancient

Kannada the vowels of which are short, e. g. 'ao*, eaco s sro^, <0^, toS3*
51.

TJTO&* (or
T^O&*),

>GS

rio*,

themes have long vowels,

e.

>e/,

20033%

5^,

g.

other monosyllabic verbal

sJoo^';

3?o6

^es*,

^a>o&*,

Some monosyllabic verbal themes appear

52.

vowels,

e.

es3* and W&3*,

g.

&3* and &e^,

and

Ws)(!*3,

&&

and

&CO* and ^^0*,

?je3*

and

short and long

with

^53* and 3)&3,

w^,

^o* and 330*,

STOO&*,

and 33$*,
It

?js>e3*.

<oW

and

and WDO*,

200*

be supposed,

may

that the short vowels are original, and the long verbal themes secondary.

(About s)o* and w>o* see

210.)

Because some monosyllabic verbal themes with a long vowel

change, in the past participle, their long vowel into a short one, as -S?
53.

makes

its

past participle

DJ) ^o^o
23^0,
O
Q

23^

<-,^j^

162),

s
163), ^s>fo ^rao
C^

and ^oto*

^^
^^

164),

163),

^J3^ ^J3^o,
Q

reasonable to

it is

think that their primitive vowel has been short (regarding ^fo* cf. =3^,
in the Dictionary).
A similar lengthening of a vowel is also
^riiroo, ts'rso

seen in the verbal themes Jjs^ and

and

^ooSs*

may

^s^,

as they have also the form of

(See also the remark under

f$3,

59.)

In such cases too

54.

48

In

has been

it

there

indicated that nowadays

monosyllabic verbal themes in modern Kannada, the vowel

to

enunciation,

tendency to

being

added

to

make them

are

no

as a help

similar

lengthen an originally monosyllabic verbal theme with a

ancient literary works in which we find

tftfo

ero,

dissyllabic.

short vowel by the addition of the euphonic vowel

in

we

consider the long themes to be secondary.

for rio&S

and also

^>

fl

for

tfo*,

e.

g.

eo> for to^,

is

observed already
for

to

for

2&, v>

for

s3o>

for

)^,

for

Concerning the lengthening of an originally monosyllabic verbal

theme with a short vowel by adding the vowel ro it may be remarked
that this practice too, now and then, took place already in ancient
literature; thus, for instance,

and

;3j^>->

were used therein.

^JSQ* and =J3oj,

tfo*,

and

rtao,

25
Also

themes

monosyllabic

literature occasionally

$&

made

was written ^tfo,

r^pa*

with

N?^O, and

were

vowel

long

dissyllabic by the

^jj^o

jgJSeo*

ancient

in

addition of

as

ero,

e.

y.

166).

(c/.

There are several seemingly dissyllabic verbal themes, with a

first syllable, that end in
d>, as ssc&,
a^j, voct),

55.

short vowel in the

:!>,

sjdo,

Were

rlidj.

>rfo,

these originally monosyllabic, the final

No

being merely euphonic or a help to enunciation?

^ILCo

past participles yejo

ejo,

ercWo.,

and

doubt, for their

are formed

?fcei>

&>.,

>eJo

etc.,

which thus represent the

w
by adding the formative syllable ^o (which by assimilation becomes
6J

1G4,

immediately

4)

to

escs',

Co

vj

*j

'as*, srocs

4
,

tru

CO

fcjo,

primitive themes.

56.

number

small

a short vowel in the

eru&3o,

(oie5o),

the

of the

ero

first

of seemingly dissyllabic verbal

syllable and ending

in

3o,

themes having

represents itself in

ne3o, (tSCao), 3e3o, St^, ^C5J and

aeOo,

themes

53^0,

'S.rfj,

55 that of

etc. in

4^0.

too is
ruC3o, etc.

euphonic addition, as their past participles are erus^, &4?c>

of

33^,

i%

Like

and ^52^,

^^i

(i

nstea^

the formative

(instead 3^,), sSaOj,

been
attached directly to the radical C33*, which by
syllable 3o having
assimilation was changed into 3* ( 160,4;
They are, therefore,
161).
A^Og),

and as such primitive themes. (For the past

and ^C5o we have as yet no grammatical or other

originally monosyllables,
participle of <oC3o

references.)

Also

57-

the

verbal

dissyllabic, as their

themes

jj

Q-&, sj^o and

past participles

are

^e^o

are not radically

and

tefo,
^z^j),
the formative syllable ^o having been added immedi(for fts^j),
ately to the radical 75* with the proper euphonic change of consonants
(

(for

164,9.io).

We

58.

have now to examine another class of verbal themes that

dissyllables.

They have

is

5iJe>3*

?2JS^do,

simply euphonic, as they appear also as fSja^C^, t3^O and

183,. 4).
They are, therefore, true monosyllables and as such

primitive themes.
also

their first

Three of them are

^o.

these

pronounced as if they were

syllable long, and their second syllable
z3?rfj and rfjs^J, and the final ero of

55. 56. 57) are customarily

(like those in

is

"

(According to the Sabdanusasaua, sutra 85, there arc

^jJSCJjo of doJS^J, ^Je&3Jo of

J3^J,

sutra 514

A
A
and sutra 545 aeOj,%* of wd), sJjsWo,^ of ^j^rfo.)

?l&3
"->

Cf.

234.

of

26
Although no
33e>zi>, etc.
show the merely euphonic
character of their final ero (but see the Sabdanusasana's ai^V$ in 58),
they apparently are monosyllables, because their verbal nouns (bhavaOthers are w^o, yxoei>, t^o, ^e>^J, ^JS^J,

them

direct monosyllabic form of

vacanas)

SA^W,

ejfej,

t>eJ,

^DeJ, ^J3iJ

and

of f&aezfc, z3?W of z3?zi>,

59.

further

exists

number

to

and

of verbal

are formed exactly like

srakJ

of sirazl>.

rfjafej

242.

Qf.

themes similar to those mentioned

58 are the following:

in

7TO&3J,

C3o as their second syllable.

formative vowel

(epjatS

formative syllable
etc.,

160,

etc.

and the &3o remains before the

166),

of the present-future participle relative

sj

Thus we have

but there are exceptions.

180,

3);

4),

sjr

166);

ty3J. The difference is that they have

As a rule their past participle shows the

(ye^ +

^&3od

and ^JS^F

166),
,

183,

3J=rf,

^es* and

2);

18

(^J3-S3*+rf,

);

;iJ3e3^ and Jja^Sr (loe&F+ri,

180, 6) and 33 F (^SS* +3J,
sjsC3o^ and

166),
do,

183, 2);

183,

2j

(33^"* + ^,

53?)dr

and ^e^r
166), ^eesj^,
(a?t3*+rf,
and
^jsdr
183, 2)
(sJ333<+rf,

180

jsci>F (^JSG5*+rfj,
verbal nouns Z>3
^F of
(for

and the past participle ^s^j

(for

g^e^

(for s^e3o),

of

6)

180, 6);

?ro

SJo)S5*

(for rfjsCSj),
It

must,

of the verbs is nothing

but a

^S^OF

therefore, be concluded that the final

);

At the same time we have the

166).

3o),

iso,

and

'

159).

?je)3j,

help to enunciation, and that they are originally monosyllabic themes.

It may be remarked that the long vowel of
^)C3o, 33e>&ib and
is

short in

the

nouns ^&3o sj5o and

As has been stated in the preceding paragraphs (51 seq.) there

are many and various monosyllabic verbal themes in Kannada.
60.

As examples

90, ^6, 53^,

their finals

165, letter

of

o^SS3

and ^
a,

3. 4.

dissyllabic

S5?3,

tf,

it is to

5;

themes

verbal

W^o,

oS?,

S5S?,

may

eAiW;

be

but

adduced e.g.

with respect to

be said that they are not radical (see

172;

180,5;

157;

243,16.18.21.23.34.25.26.27;,

27
and

the

in

syllabic

151, a,

some

dialect

vulgar

158;

of

165, a,

with

introduced as trisyllabic ones

may become mono-

7).

themes which

Another class of verbal

61.

the themes

the

final

Kesava's

in

are

list

syllable C3o, are really

which by several of them can be proved, e. g. by ewtf3j,

these occasionally add the participial
3cte3o, rteeSo, 33tfC3o find 233S3J, as
syllables dj and ;j (see
59), with elision of the merely euphonic vowel
dissyllables,

5S

immediately to

eru,

180,

(e^dor,

and
by S5SAC30
v

e),

23*^63 J,

and

&3j

(oiW^,, w*&k,
Let

it

consonants

be

2o(!^j*, ^rtav*,

e3rtoCs3

although

s
,

Some

are never written as trisyllables in the

they

mediseval dialect, and

62.

3*

dialect,

'S,?l>,

into

4).

iJ3Oo*,

particle

^S3o,

'

'0'

remarked here that dissyllabic themes with the final

a s s* and 0*, such as 5co, sroac.6 tSdoo*, ssC^ej*,

ancient

An exception

166;

ZocS^r,

IT

160,

etc.,

rtw^F,

they do the same, changing the C3*

as

^^30,

etc.,

and by ^MCSo,
feW^oF, &<&F),
~
2T

syllable 3j directly to 53*

ti

^ddor,

as they always attach the participial

are

so in

occasionally
the

trisyllabic

modern one

always
(see
formed by a few ancient themes when they
for which see
151, letter a, 2.
is

instances of verbs that are always

trisyllabic,

the

in

48. 166).
suffix the

are

the

following:

and some instances of such as are always

rio>A?3o; quinquesyllabic verbs are

Two

trisyllabic verbs

as

also

dissyllabic

183,

(see

More
or

with final

when

their

do, viz.

forms

quadrisyllable
e.

are:

g.

tSr&o and ti^orfo, appear

become

zSrlCu*

and

/rk~3*

4).

or less of the trisyllabic verbs can be derived from monosyllabic

dissyllabic

themes.

Of the

above-mentioned

terms

zocioro^o

is

another form of wc^oo^o, which has sprung from zjC^, to live,

has arisen of eszS, to fill, etc.; ^odo^j of =3^0, to beat; si>2jrt> of
to

bend or be moved out of a straight or standing

,

to

bend;
of

>o23or of

riodos?*",

position

^o^&orto of

)>oo*, to be stretched; c^dotjj of cf6, to join;

to contract;

B^^o

of =^0, to be mixed; sjd:i> of 3Jd,

4*

28
to

^r^

spread;

noun

of the

of

etc.;

trust, (cf.

% 49).

to

of ^C), to be mixed;

cool; ^ejodoo

grow

adjustment, compared with the verbal theme

ojcl,

be joined,

^r,

S3&3?jj

e33

of

to learn to

of

know; ^)a?fo

to

s2fl,

to

^sjoi,

Of the above-mentioned quadrisyllable verbs LroDroo comes from the

noun L,?od, >rt>>o 3o from ^riodoo rtso 0?oo may be connected with 3*$
&0
cO
O
,

vs)

to dig.

Of the above-mentioned quinquesyllabic verbs enieo.rjsixcii is composed

erc>U.n)o and sj^o (cf.
211, remark 2.
49); regarding ^d^a^o see
u
We have seen that the vowels <a ( 54) and ea> (48. 54-59.
63.

of

61) at the end of verbal themes are often simply euphonic, also
oi

when they seemingly belong

them

to

^ and

60).

Kesava says that there are no Kannada verbs which end in

aspirated consonants (mahapranakshara), the nasals KP* and ^3*, the
64.

consonants s,

and

35*

&

With regard
statement was true only for his own

and the double consonant

35* }

^*"\

be observed that his

to go* it is to

time,

a later period

as in

many

verbal themes with final

in use, this letter often taking the place of

so

(300)

see e 9(S);

53*

'S&^Soo, erueoosoj, =5^0560, ^JSdsoo, ^rfoaoo in the Dictionary.

Kesava's

65.

list

of verbs

(47)

Of verbs that form a

The

following
3*0,

Cgrfo),

OHO;

tfO,

J3

c3;

^,

fS;

63o,

et

ra

OZJO

e^O,
=y);

EJO,

and C^ coming after

<a,

C3",

KJ, OKO;

dO^;
c#;

v,

rfOO,
?,

^0;
tf.

&JO,

0&*;
((y.

C30^;

0^,

Q,

d;

do,

0, 6;

e3

orto, wo, owo, eJo, rao

63.

We

appears

viz.

6;

ra,
5),

dooWo

to

rf,

^);

5; ^0;
A,

ToJ,

That they

e.

g.

^o.

a certain extent from the

o^o,

62

add as a peculiarity that what may be called the root of

is seen in the first form of reduplication,

verbs of frequentative action,

as in

and L,

149-151.)

but sometimes mere formatives,

are not always radical,

and

7$,

syllables of the verbs in his list are the

The'finals often are essential parts of the verbal theme.

rio,

-d?

consonant with a long vowel, twelve,

(^0);

223.

03^0;
e

Q, do,

consonants and

final

3*

single vowel, he adduces only two, viz.

of such as consist of one

^G^SoG,

Cf.

so arranged that the alpha-

is

betical order shows itself in the final letters,

and

were

3oo53orto

211,

6),

29
A

66.

vowels.

peculiarity of some verbal themes

This,

164,

<& that of

10),

later

tek,

z3?3.

as

as
the

'ae*3

^oS

as =aoi3s

d?,

<o

locative into

that of
21. 22,

<a

eo<s*,

into

and that

<o,

of

According

prakfiti).

into

eru

and that

of

erua

appeared as

time,

must originally have been

and =&)^j, to take, 3o<ff<,

as

that

Observe, further,

into

>

to

(kriye),

in

On

^a

as

101

to in

that of eros*

ro

into

in

in

the

109;

9. 10. 13.

247, d,

into
f

n.

is.

251.

declinable bases
there

grammar
is

and

of the instrumental into

<o

and w, that of

ii

Such a base

verbal action

and

Observe also the change of

52. 53).

IV,
67.

^rfo,

s^rk,

s^rfo

exists also as ^o^o.

and that of

>

trto,

Kesava's

in

&C*J

o?3,

'aaz^or as ^dO?oo, and that several themes have a

long and short vowel

and

tnat

S)rt^

aoO&% ^J03i* as ^JSok*, ^ooi3* as Jjaois*,

appears also as
oi:*

erorta

'a killer',

is

(not
^J3j
verbal noun
^J3^o

and

<o?oO

^23*

ts?*;

2o^,

ftS3o that of

g^,

^jdj that of 3J3&>. (164,7).

u

3C3o,

already

as

eros?*

aojl,

e5o

that of

)?*)

ojs^o,

e3J that of

8),

become

has

dialect,

and

especially seen in the past

161 )> tfurk tnat

>z

164,

^jci) that of tfjslb.,

u

(164,12),
the

3fejo
Co

that of

in

that they change their root

is

is

which -a^o takes the form of

participle, in
(

ancient dialect,

the

in

defined

are

words called

bases

(linga,

"It

not

express

as follows:

has no case-terminations

does

(vibhakti,

105

cf.

seq.),

but embodies meaning (artha)."

According to the grammarian

68.

Kesava baees

are first of

four

kinds, viz.

verbal bases

1,

(krit,

krillinga),

/.

c.

such

as arc formed

directly

from

verbs by the so-called krit-suffixes attached to the relative present and past
participle

2,

(krit,

see

102,

8.

e;

177. 180. 185. 253,9, d; 254), e.g. to

doAArf; L?)0*d,

bases

with other

suffixes

(taddhita, taddhitalinga),

formed by the so-called taddhita-suffixes C9rf, 33,

3<^,
r!
from nouns and verbs, e. g.
riart, y^^si^, doQ^*,

t.

*, woJ^,
tfcs,

3rfc3

e.

such as are

etc.,

see

243)

30
compound bases (samasa, samasalinga),

3,

two

(or more) words, e. g. icrras?, 'gd.ra^,

244 seq.);
3,&ew, ?Wo5o (cf. No. 4, i; see

nominal bases (nama,

242) which include
4,

namalinga,

i. e.

Socks w,

such as are compounded of

3ooofioi35

^py,

zasJ,

S?s3j8?^t),

namaprakriti) or crude nouns

a) words not etymological ly derived by the public, but

and used

4333,

(see

commonly known

a conventional sense (rudhanama, ditanama, niseitanama), e. g. c3t>,

that by their number of syllables (aksharavyitti), also without being
in

compounds in the generally accepted meaning (asamasate), may be monosyllabic,

etc., and even quinquesyllabic, as ^-, sod, ^.o^tf, ?r3$tf, rfU-rf^rt;
words whose

b)

is

meaning

intelligible

in

themselves

expressing either quality (gunanurupa) of beings, as

eras,

(anvarthanama),

3 0333.33,

^zparasj,

stos^ao, or circumstance and condition (arthanurupa) of beings, as B&sProo, $i

3oJ3rt (or

sc&dojsri),

SoArlodD

cf.

No. 3, so that Kesava enlarges the compass

of nominal bases by including also

the others)

compound bases, and, we may

say, also all

words by which one of a species is pointed out (aiikitanama) or proper

names, as ^3^, &ti3, 3J9Z3, drad, which though occasionally without a clear
meaning (sarthakam alladuvu), are current everywhere in Kannada and
c)

other languages.

Besides these four kinds of declinable bases there are three

which

will be given in

others,

90.

Remarks.

When

a verb (kriye) stands at the end of the description of the character

too has been called a krillinga by poets, e. g. (with case-terminarfsiiacTo^rte* 'gsfr o^Q^ 'srifo, he who was as Jainas are.

1,

of a person,
tion)

it

When

a series of words (vakyamale) is considered as a whole, as in

attributes, poets have called such a series too a nominal base, e. g. (with case2,

5&>o?o3

terminations)

32tfd
CS

^obo^d
CO

69.

S)d^x

d?3o;

A word

is

riora
"o

termed

tv

or 3Jd in

grammar,

sjrf,

however, has

two additional meanings, signifying also either a nominal base ( 68)

with a case-termination (vibhakti) attached to it (namapada) or a verbal

theme (dhatu,
it

50) with a personal termination (vibhakti) attached to

(ukhyfitapada, kriyapada,

144. 192).

Not only Kannada words do belong to the nominal bases or crude

70.
nouns (linga, namalinga, namaprnkriti), but, as seen in
68, also words
that have been adopted from Saiiiskrita.
These often exhibit the form

31
they have in

Samskrita dictionaries, in which case they are called

,3 terms,

e.

y.

sU
S.8J

053),

Another series of nominal bases called 33

71.

Q
terms which have

s3o

rO

not been borrowed from Samskrita, but of which nearly all exist in the

same shape

Kanuada

in

s^fej

.,

(c/.

as well as in Samskrita, are

or

tfjs^y.),

5o^, esortre, e5J,

rtre,

S252,

MM

Also the nominal bases jj'^e)^!],. siooa^oO are tatsauias.

f
<*>

3).

(avyaya) as o^c^, EOcoO*, 4^0^, O r Samskrita

^
Dtf
oion^, or Samskrita participles ending in 93*
pronouns (sarvanama) as ^
5
5
cannot form by themselves declinable
(sattrinanta) as ^j ra3 S djorss
t^jj^s

Samskrita particles

72.

>

>

bases

in

Kannada;

which they form the

4.^^

333?r;

with a

but compound bases (samasalinga)

first

member, are declinable,

^dj^rf, OJO^OSJ;

e.

g.

vowel, of

final

jjjotiort,

a^^Joraj,

The Samskrita numerals (saukhyavaci) o^, Qj,

e
86), sl&J*, 7o^ (?orf,55*), e5^ (^c5*"), N^ (rf^?s ), rfs! (SsipS*) are

73.

sec

indeclinables

-,

but with suffixes (pratyaya) in the form of 0,^3^, ^,^oJJ, ^^^, rfo^^, ^^, TJ^,
and in compounds (samasa), as assort, Q^^ooa), ^djs?^, iS^j
Sor,

the

first

Samskrita words with

74.
in

rf^Ojtrf,

w^^ozs, ^^s^, dsJ^atora

final w,

e.

g.

3J3CJ2

71), W303, 33^3, aejss, sns,, 6?a33, change this

bases

Kannada, in which case they appear as

<oaO3^ terms.

in

or are
75.

539^^3,

Of

which they form

member), they are declinable bases in Kannada.

As an exception

do^

?D,

to rule

ssyo^ and

is

(which

into

<o

one of the tatsamas

to

become declinable

Srad, wsd, 333,

74 the Samskrita words

others change their

declinable bases in Kannada, appearing therein as

wy^,

efurfsL

3*^03,

final

into

^$3, sro3^,

become

to

etc.

or being

terms.

When

76.
in

the Samskrita words f^tss and

Kannada, they appear as

77.

or (V,^,

(y3
Some Samskrita words with

enjcjs^dra,

d^r, ^^,

QA^>^

and

^^

$^

final

(/'.

$53 are used as declinable bases

or

74),

$#

(^5303^ terms), u/2. ^^, $O3s!,

change this v into oi to become

declinable bases in Kannada, and then appear as 3d, ezpsssi, etc.

78.

53^0^?,

* (^5303^
their ^ into "S

Sathskrita words with final

330?,

always

change

Kannada, and then appear as w^^, n^D,

etc.

terms), e.g.

w*

fc

rP3,

^^3,

to become declinable bases in

32

e.

terras),

rodoi>J3,

g.

80.

with

final

in

so^sgp,

^o5o^oj|^,

Samskrita monosyllabic terms (Oss^cJsJu ), e g.

%,
remain unchanged when used as declinable bases

All

3ra,

As a

81.

words ending

rule Samskrita

333,,

to

|,<,

Kannada.

in

zp, zjS^, 5\o,

change their A> into

and
then
Kannada,
appear as sWoJoo, ^ra^, etc.

aifcs-er,

?rraj^,

become declinable bases

r^?

($W*d$U)

Samskrita polysyllabic words

79.

in

(Kb^soa^ terms), e. g. &^,

33dJ3^, djoo^, Sjs^, qra^ remain unchanged
?to^, rfsj^, 5^F"i
3oJS>e^>
when used as declinables in Kannada.
<3^d>

93^ however,
For the

in az?3^,.

82.

The

&^

in

the substitute

83.

The second

declinable base of ^sO

<3tf

may be

(oad<5J)

of

53^

used, so that

seen from

as end in consonants

declinables, they have

5
sjoon*, To^doJjTJ ,

finals,

and become 83,

to

Kannada.

(Z^oBcSaf^ terms)

but before they

undergo various changes, as will be

rtoraspats

',

x 6 a^s*

as>3

84),

c/.

ff

e
?o^c and

d&d,

85),

(cf.

^dJ.3 s

^vs*, 2^00*, 3;>&>3,

^saoJJTJ5

The Samskrita words

85.

*>& in

84-89.

The Samskrita words 3&,

84.
6

may become

Samskrita words that are used as nominal bases

class of

Kannada are such

become Kannada

s^o

afo

appears as &^d-

&^

in

3 re 3^ 3, and that

often takes the form of $3^, also in

*=>

(^) to their

etc.
srfoa* (aSotJ 6 ),

ff

^^si3

(B^z?*),

(SdC^), Si03o3

(sj,dzia*),

Z^SaS*,
(

5^^

53

^^

ff

^5^^

(^^)

QJJ*

tttq*, 3rt&&,

zwzjj*,

others add

ff

).

(^j^

^^

)'

(a^

^^^
6

and

others double their final consonant (or take SJ^F'SJ) and add

^Ssi^,

scowo^, etc.

The Samskrita words

86.
5

20,^
But
87.

and others drop

^>?3jj3

ff

and

en/a^cS*'

sJoij

or sJohrio,
88.

or

as

Sjrf or
3jrfrf^,

oi>sJ

3 become

e . g, oaas, dojsrfr, etc.

^^ and

383^, 3oii^,

tiritf,

their final consonant,

they appear in Kaunada

^^do^),

dropping their

The Samskrita words

either drop

oaasjs*,

their final (or take

double

rfo5j?3 5 ,

and attach

it

i?a or i

or oksJroo,

in

eft),

&?&>,,

which case

^oii or ^QJJ^O,

^,oij O r ^,a5o^o.

The Samskrita word aso 6 remains

as

it

is;

A?o*

(A0

ff

does so too,

but appears also as A6.

Lastly, the nominative plural in Samskrita of

89.
after

having dropped
5
(of Oi>03$ ),
?o

its

visarga,

e^rf

(of

^^c3

some Samskrita words,

used as a nominal base, e.g. S^rf

5

(of S'SCOJO?^), SC330?J (of

(of

is

rf'SJaOJJ

),

(of *>lO),

a^73

),

JjJS^^ (of

233.od3DO?o

^3^3

e
),

(of

^?^J^

(of

aSg

(of l,?

)>

33
Remark.

The grammarian Kesava does

not class the

apabhramsa

or tadbhava word-

74-79. 81. 82. 84-89, probably because he

(
did not consider the changes they undergo in order to become declinable bases
so essential as those of the tadbhavas.

370) with the words given

In $ 68

90.

it

in

has been stated that

declinable bases (lingas) in Kannada,

Besides these we have a

'ack,

words, wo,

255

wdjrfj,

srodo,

102,

a sixth class called

se</.);

attributive nouns or adjectives,

e.

called ?d53Fo5a>53J, pronouns,

s3S33j,

>o, sso (see

(f3e>o),

g.

>$*',

8,

rtorasd&ci,

(v,

and a seventh class called

(see 8
O 273, sea.);
V.

of

number,

(and, with the termination

dojsrio*, etc.,

and also

Thus there are

sj^s^),

e.

g.

the

or

WrocSj, esA)d>,
isjo23

or ?ooso

ao^jO , oidzl), 5JoJSC3o,

nominative plural,

SJ^^D*, ^^SJD*, see

7 classes of declinable

the four words

indefinite quantity

of

^o^,

subdivision of the numerals

class, viz.

137, a,

6;

278,

4).

bases in Kannada.

may perhaps be adduced

as an 8th

that express
3^30, oa^^o, ero^^o. oj^o, eO^>oo
CO

(nirviseshapavan;

see

278,

3.

4).

281.

Regarding the avyayalingas or adverbial declinable bases see

91.

What

,
'

i,

fo

numerals and appellative nouns

ZuS^F,

a and

rtj353a>z3

^jO^o,
oo

toS?,;^),

e. ;/.

together with the enj*

letters

Hf>

^oO^o

there are four classes of

^orf.

viz.

fifth class

owd),
00

first

has been said

regarding verbal themes

that they are monosyllabic, dissyllabic,

etc.,

47.

applies also to the

51

seq.)

Kannada

nominal bases or crude nouns (namalinga) of the ancient dialect.

92.

In

modern Kannada

all

monosyllabic true Kannada nominal

bases with a final consonant generally appear as dissyllabic, and all

dissyllabic ones as trisyllabic; in the mediaeval dialect the two kinds
are optionally used as dissyllables and trisyllables.
The lengthening.
a rule, is done by the addition of a euphonic vu to facilitate pronunciation

may

(cf.

48. 54 seq.);

likewise use the vowel

oa of

93.

54; see

monosyllabic
*a

to

nominal bases ending in oU*

become

dissyllabic (cf. the euphonic

93), doubling or not doubling their final.

Monosyllabic true

end in consonants (or are

Kannada nominal
^koSi^Df^

bases of the ancient dialect

terms), these consonants being

5

?,

34
and &y

cS

otf,

(t5<),

v*,

e.

61),

(c/!

#.

forms
(s?5*). See some exceptional
the remark under
96.
In

Kannada

mediaeval

the

above terms

Kannada they are

94.

Kannada

true

Dissyllabic

ending in consonants are

e.

and

c/.

viz.

33) WO,

dissyllabic

therein); but see the exceptional forms in

121, a,

are also dissyllabic,

In modern

in

far as they are used

(as

120,

c.

nominal bases of tbe ancient dialect

g.

See a few exceptional forms in

TT

ZT

121, a.

In mediaeval

Kannada

adding a euphonic

en);

far as they are used in

Observe that ancient

in

the above terms

in
it),

23??te

e.

g.

era A) do,

becomes

(as

^$do, ^rJCSo.

rfcTte,

There are a few

trisyllabic

true

final

consonant in the ancient dialect, e.g.

The

last

term occurs

euphonic

ero),

Kannada

is

96.

and ancient

<ae^tt

becomes

^&

i. e.

a,

S^We&o*,

roo*,

^>p?j>

&.

trisyllabic too, viz.

Dissyllabic

ero

^53

nominal bases with

quadrisyllable; but in the same dialect and in modern

true

modern Kannada
r

Kannada

in the mediaeval dialect also as 3aJ3?o<^o

(with the

terms) are used in the

S3,

by

trisyllables

modern Kannada.
95.

in

may become

modern Kannada they always are such

and

oj.

Kannada nominal bases ending in vowels

same shape as well in ancient and mediaeval

(as far as they occur in

With regard

to

it).

The

final

the bases with final

observed that, in this case (see the contrary in

somehow originally have been euphonic., as it is
before a following vowel in sandhi (see
in
215, 4), and as we have =5e>20 for

213

^do,

seq.,

sro

97), this

as

vowels are
it

to be

is

vowel

nearly always

may

elided

also the optional use

and ^fc^O*

for

35

We

give the following instances:

3d, ^oCJ,

skrt,

tfJStf,

3d, ^d,

GO

Observe that

being suffixed

eru

occurs also as

dvSe>s3)

^^

cSd as j5d4,

as

tod as

?5J?)^sJj,

by means

id

sjjs,

wos,

of a euphonic

toV*

as

3dJ), rfd as

as lo^sjjj

tne unradical

53*.

Remark.

Kesava

the sutras and vrittis of his Sabdamanidarpana (but not in the

in

instances given) occasionally adds

final

era

euphonic

to the suffixes

^o* and

eJJ
(see pages 120. 121. 123. 124. 147.
they appear as &&> and
278. 296 of the Mangalore edition) and treats them according to the rule laid
down in 215, 4. Also with regard to the suffixes w^i, w$, ^o, ^^,
he does so (pages 264. 265).
119, a, i;
(for wo*) in
Compare also the

we;*, so that

e^

&

the

2*>

(for eej^)

97.

109, a,

109, a, 7; see

in

with

in

^^

120,

121,

a, 7;

a, i;

$?rio in a verse quoted in

There are a number of true Kannada

final

which this vowel

in

eru

is

187,

i;

the

z-^

(for

271.

dissyllabic nominal bases

not euphonic but radical, and are,

therefore, never elided before a following vowel in sandhi, in this respect

resembling the final

035),

^^ro

etc

SAJ

of the Samskrita nominal bases rtodo,

S ucn bases are

^oC5j, sJCOo, e^)0o, siodo (see

is

3\(215,
98.

ss,

'a,

3,

and

g.

128),

S5?l>,

^^o, ^SSo, =^^o,

and their euphonic

letter in sandhi

d).

Trisyllabic true
?ru

e.

to,

the

ero

Kannada nominal
being like that of

bases which end in the vowels

96, are

e.

g.

d
tO

(see also

The bases cOddo and

Jd^)

etc. in

^-s^rfo

96);

are also dissyllabic, appearing as

and &s3)W<.
As quadrisyllable true Kannada nominal bases which are not plain
68, 2) may bo mentioned zoridrt and ^cLj^ (see also $ 95).
taddhitalinga words (
99.

Quinquesyllabic and sexisyllabic Kannada words, as

esrtdo^rf, {Se^otoja

are plain taddhitalinga terms.

5*

36
Taddhitalinga terms

As

100.

(or are

verbal themes

piling;

be seen, from

Kannada nominal

true

many

will

be treated of separately

will

?5a

Kannada-English

swimming;

sound;

burning;

eroO,
9

eroe^

reading;

^^J

binding;

=00^^, cuckoo;

SAJ^J,

^oljj

blow;

50

wdo, motion;

&oC9rt>,

fear;

C^,

^,

infatuation; ^JSsJ*, saying, word;

or verbal nouns,

state or action.

fragment;

crookedness;

unripe fruit;

limping;

^rfor, training, etc.;

crop;

etc., etc.

Such nominal bases represent the true

ff^o3J*,

6v

cj^rso
Co

passing over;

sSs^or, increase;

flowering;
e3s?,

^jsrao

^o^o*, coolness;

seed; ^?1), soldering:

y\j&,

fitness;
drying; ^rt,
3

=3!^, theft;

^ct, obstacle;

etc.;

putting;

waking;
o^&S*,
CCT

blame; J^rb, belching; Ijsc^^o, entanglement;

walk; ?SJS^o, looking on,

loose;

state;

ss^o,, fear;

-^c&j,

en}&3orto,

outcry;

SAPS'*,

^a, cutting;

crying as a peacock does;

ground

e$d,

hankering after;

making

esz^o,

2<T

>e3a, rising;

6u

pursuing;

en^or, rising;

remaining;

raising; ^&33, pouring;

*5S?s3),

to pass;

erurtaeo*, spittle;

swelling;

coming

tjrta,

weJj

g.

embrace; ycie^, flower;

oJ

destruction;

e.

terms),

wave; ws^o^o, pressing firmly;

esd,

Dictionary very

bases (lingas) are identical as to form with

Foaoaqrs^J

cooking;

e5j3o,

the

243.

in

rfoe^or,

See

fondness;

242.

&}Q>53o3z3c3 or <Sa>53o3a>23

terms

signifying the abstract notion of a verb either as to

243 and the paragraphs

Regarding bhavavacanas see

quoted there.

Other nominal bases are formed by adding

theme, as

(from ^eJo);

(from

^^), TZW

e.

5
(from jroo ),

g.

iaJ3e3

or

oj

to the verbal

(from &ej*),
243.

^^

these and other formatives will be treated of in

Several nominal bases have a form in the ancient dialect that differs from
that which they have in the mediaeval and

aKi

(see

101.

modern one,

e. g.

^GM^

sto^,

^po^,

233).

Kannada nominal bases derived from

their radical vowel

(from

>zSo),

(cf.

?jJ3<^j

66 and see
(from

?djc^o),

verbal themes by altering

242), are

^dj

e.g..

(from

-Ssd)

(from

'azty),

?!>

(from

c3oj,

^J3^j (from ^o^o).

Others alter that vowel and add a formative vowel to the
Jj5?do (from 3ocly),

sonant, as 3C33 (from -o-es^),

(from

JSi 3

(from sea*),

^s3 (from

final con-

37
102.

according

may be

it

(Theoretically)

and

to properties

grammarian Kcsava teaches)

said (the

67. 68. 90), and that there

seven declinable bases (lingas, prakritis,
as a ninth kind, a gender of particles (avyayalinga).
Compare

(Remark that the term 'linga' thus has two

The nine genders are the following:

The masculine gender (pum,

1,

distinct

some animals,

e.

g. aSOre, #js?ra,

The feminine gender

2,

human

female sex of the

e3,, esdA,

da,

belongs everything

which
e-

g.

is

$&,

in

It

^ort, ai>i

or5 .

the

in

appears
e.

names of the

3aoi36

g.

w^, ws^,

To

yao* s5dos

e.

g.

'Siac* ^tfosSo*,

s
d?So*, eru3o* d?soijo

rojit3<

whether animate (Setana) or

ft 3,
(but sec Nos. 1 and 5);

rt&

or epicene gender (pumstrllinga).

demonstrative (see No. 8, remark
sume suffix o ego*) is added to

masculines and feminines without regard to sex,

rtrao e ,

this

common

i.e.

seen in the plural of nouns and

pronouns ($3o, 'sao, sroSo) wherein the
is

eso^

names

the

d<3, ?kd, w*kcJ, and in

fc?dx!,

and of demons,

destitute of reason

The masculine-feminine,

4,

o*;

seen

It is

rPO, 3,re3, ca^A.

inanimate (aSctana),

This

11';.

The neuter gender (nappu, napumsaka, napumsakalinga).

3,

also,

adori, a$?iojo, ristfr,

(strl, strilinga).

race, of deities

is

grammatical meanings.)

pullinga, purusha).

of men, male deities and demons, e.g. wre^, 33^, 3d,

those of

that,

qualities, there are eight genders (lingas) for the

^30* ^oi)
119. 132.

cy.

134It is
is

seen also in the singular, namely in that of

masculine and feminine.

243, B,

Cf.

iJJc:i_,

which term by

The masculine-neuter gender (punnapumsakalinga).

5,

the nouns oa (or

?oJSoi)F),

a;j

(or

tfri

doorty,

),

itself

1.

U)^,

This

is

&>%,

z^ao^S,

found

in

sis,

w*

nine planets,

(see
120), *J?te, tJ^
navagraha),
and 3O3^, which are used either as masculines or neuters.
(the

')

The Kannada grammar

their verb in the neuter, e.g.

that animals,
?Jj

Tatf sj pi),

.<s

!'

if

called Nudigattu (p.

*

eas!o&>*"

lufSJ

ts

1'2'_')

says that e.g.

3-e?5?rSj, sl)on?Sj

s3oon^SJ
Ae?Vfio '33J/.
-*

they aro introduced as speaking, have their verb in the masculine, as

or in the feminine, as tosSosJ

With regard

'afS ;

have

Stu *AiiJ3rf;

but

^-^

* VJ.
ca

masculine and feminine terms the Nudigattu (p. 122) says that in disdain
be used as neuters, e.g.
they
may
(Adsj^rf)
$^ rtrs >=io Cj
In a Bombay sohoolbook we
wrfo fjjs^ao, e
ft!\5rf.
to

3 aSoart ioSj. cSj?jtJj

The Nudigattu (p. 120) says that such

find likewise:

ones are ignorunt,

<.//.

is

also done in ignorance (was?!), i.e.

aljaonOj wso^rf;
sJj

Bombay schoolbook we

find likewise:

fta
t

nn^dOt*

j3jn u^o.;

coo
iiSo.

<fd,

aSjcijrf

-aaflO

if

sro^d|

isij

*rfl,

tho oonsSjes^t^d

ed.

In a

38

The feminine-neuter gender (strfnapumsa, strinapumsakalinga).

6,
is

used for the nouns

33**,

This

AO, rids^ and c3e3J, which are treated either

&?^,

as feminities or neuters.

The masculine-feminine-neuter gender

7,

words wo,

for the
aorios?,

dJrio^,

33o

SKO,

( 8e

j?.as),

5rJ3?oo,

employed e.g.

which are either of

3do3>,

ydrio,

^tf,

is

256), and the nouns 5*>,

e No. 8, letter a, cf.

sir?,

This

(trilinga).

the

masculine or feminine or neuter gender.

The

8,

word which

adjective gender (vaeyalinga) or the gender that depends on the

is to

be distinguished or defined (viseshyadhtnalinga).

This gender comprises

^o

the words (ukti, sabda)

a)

so, 330

(5330),

90).

Remark.
Neither Kesava nor

(sutra 99) reckon Wo, jxo, 330

Nagavarma

the

among

pronouns (sarvanama), though Europeans would call the first two the personal
In order to
pronouns, and the last one the reflexive (reciprocal) pronoun.
us call the
them
under
b
from
the
mentioned
letter
let
distinguish
pronouns
three words simply 'pronouns' here.
IJ
the pronouns (sarvanama,
&, 'Srio, wd), wsgcfc, coy
90) , viz.
edo (neuter) 2J a?!* (masculine, feminine, neuter, see
255. 262) ;
5
5j63o
Sjess?
eruSo,
(masculine); was*, gas*, ova?*,
(feminine); *^o,

b)

do,

(masculine); wtf,

^^,

enja^

(feminine); c/. also

^,

*,

yvs in

264.

Remark.
Both Kesava and Nagavarma (sutras 42. 49.
sarvanama.
'gSP

d>, t|do,

ero^?15

enjdo, sSa^),

w^o, ^^o,

#,

&$,

demonstrative pronouns, and w^do, (Wdo,

are what they call interrogative pronouns.

wdv5

Sjesv*,

To

I,

^0, thou,

As seen

ally use the

!,

ws? ^,
1

oiasridj, aiJ3^rfo,

cxJ3D^s#0),

OeS

distinguish these pronouns from

'

'

in this place.

adjectival pronouns

he, etc.).

pronoun

SE!J in

122) says that in disdain

It (p.

162)

under

in the Dictionary

males and females,

e.

tscSo,

the Basavapurana and Jaiminibharata occasion-

combination with masculine terms (see

(Sd^d)

g. esrio (for sssJfSo

esrio,

'ScSo

or ssdvo) tfjaSS;

w.;

^4

are used for

s$ (for ess3dj)

in order to express positiveness

further says that

The Nudigattu

270).

and their plurals es4>

are combined with masculine terms and feminine terms, e.g.

(&&

odjs>qjr)

srf^

and

*cS?

sd

tforfrt^o:

?J

'aS? tafSSo esO

Cj^iilsSAc

do.

""a

might be used instead; thus:

art

eroSo, Sjeso^

'

(p.

ndo,

are what Europeans call

ara^
,

these terms

102) call

In Samskrita ;333F^;>53J means originally

a class of words beginning with SjSr (^53r
under which native grammarians have included also the real pronouns
enj^i, etc.)'

*'

*)

enjs^o,

we may term them

those under letter a

66.

Sjodo, ^^rfJ, ?5^o,

6re?iJ

*fJ

fiij

(In such
sSort?5?

a case

w and

39
About possessive pronouns see
so-called

c)

Kannada

case from nouns by

272, and about indefinite ones

adjectives (gunavaeana, $ 90, clearly formed in this

means of pronominal

suffixes,

(masculine), c^Orfe* (feminine), 3?03o or 3<03o

276), such as fStOdo

see

nou t er);

'SSioJJo

(n.), and Saihskrita adjectives (which partly are used

bases,
68, 4, i), e.g. rtodo, wa^, &'&>, *&& a$3rea, naa, $a<

so-called

verbal bases

e)

compounds (bahuvrihi,

adjective

EDQdo

(krit, krillinga), e. g.

e.

249),

.),

TJSo3ov<

also as

'SSici)

d)

290.

(f.),

nominal

g.

(of 35D<2d, masculine),

ad, neuter); nsdoio ( O f 333C&3, m.),

Backs, n .). See
68, I. 177. 180. 185. 198,

(of 333Qd, feminine), ssaQdodj ( O f

(of 333do3,

remark

1;

f.),

zncfoddo

253,

2, c;

(O

bases with certain suffixes (taddhita, taddhitaliiiga,

f)

3. 7,

254.
68,

2),

e.g.

ios

*, zsjsoatf, dJ33D?,
t?oix^?,

s!?ocJ o<?, SoesJ^os?

243).

(see

numerals (sankhye,
90), e. g. ^tfod (sa^d, Tjand), because it is put
g)
before nouns in the plural whether these are masculines, feminines or neuters.
See

278,

i.

The gender

9,

appears in words like ^a*do (masculine), (taici** (femiwhich from the particle (avyaya)
(neuter),
(cf.
273), by
+ o,
+ $59* and r
(see
276), a masculine, feminine
It

(avikara, avikrita).
nine), tiStojh

^+D

of particles (avyayalinga), although they are unchangeable

^^

in

^+^

3+&

adding
in such a case
and neuter term has been formed, so that one may say that
and
in
the
or
adverbs
three
then
themselves
represents
genders;
particles

&Q

212. 281) used to modify the sense of a verb, e. g. ^J8?o3r^,

which so to say are of the gender of the agent (kartri,
^jafej^, B'dyS, *o4y5j ^^i
344) of the verb to which they belong, the agent (whether actually given or
only understood by the verbal termination) being either masculine, feminine or

(avyaya, nipata,

and being

neuter,

any of the three grammatical

in

numbers (vacanatraya,

107).

vafcanatritaya,

Although the nine genders (Kesava continues) mentioned in

102 are occasionally accepted and used (kvacitprayoga), practically
103.

there are

only three genders (lingatraya) ia Kannada,

feminine and

the

ri-z.

masculine,

Words denoting males (purushavficaka) are

neuter.

the masculine gender,

e.

g.

3rf,

Oe>si>,

$?s3j,

e5tf;3;

words

females (strivficaka) are of the feminine gender, e.g. sra^r-S,

S3,
M

&i&,

ffe>3o$,

6ja?3or3,

epa>a-,

words, whether Saiuskrita or

^Sv'

&^>

$^> ^ a
y.,

tsu.,
50

'

^ 3
^d,

'

sj,

3>a3:*;

denoting
>&

? ^'

3rt, r^j,

*ti*.
^^.a,
"^

cf.

tj*,,

?33

uiul all other

Kannada, are of the neuter gender,

^^'

^^,

drforS,

of

s3)3

us. no.

40
Remark.
If

it

happens

river, etc.). rtre^,

As a

104.
(jn

be necessary to distinguish the sex of any animal,

6
male, and & (^ ra^, ^^> ^ ra^) female, are prefixed.
to

special rule

it

(tree,

<

be stated

is to

that the terras &c3, SoS3K?5, and

the sense of 'man', 'men') are neuter in Kannada, whereas the terms
rias rf,
and ?3o&3 are masculine; but ?o& 3, if it denotes a woman of

good family (kulastrt), is neuter. Likewise ^J,.

male or female) are of the neuter gender.

wife,

&&,

and

child (whether

In metaphorical diction (rupaka) a substantive (viseshya) in the neuter

represent a feminine noun, as

the

<3y,

earth,

may mean

i^333$i,

may

the earth

considered as a woman ( 239); or an attribute (visesha), e. g. Krt^^rre, may

be masculine, feminine or neuter according to the gender of the noun to which
it

refers

(239).
For the seven

105.

adduced above

(or

68. 90)

declinable

eight

there are

bases

(linga,

prakriti)

seven (sapta) cases (vibhakti) and

case-terminations (vibhakti, namavibhakti, pratyaya).

The names

106.

of the seven

or the E.

tive,

cases

accusative,

are slqjsl) or the English nominaor the E. instrumental, 2^0

a,3?C&
;^<l?03b
r or the E. dative, sjo^^io or the E. ablative,

and Zo^iDo or the E.

Kannada

107.

or the E. genitive,

35l&

&

(About the vocative see

locative.

140.)

declinable bases have two numbers (vaeana), viz. the

singular (ekavacana, ekate, ekatva, ekokti) and the plural (bahuvacana,

bahute, bahutva).

third

number, the dual

(dvitva, dvivacana),

may be thought

of with

propriety (ucita, aucitya), that is when two persons forming a pair are
so introduced that the first one is without a case-termination and the

second one has

w^ ipc

pairs in
108.

base,

a termination of the plural, e.g.

N^ot)?o3dcS^D*; or

i^v*

The case-terminations are attached

The

^d-JdWOF^o*, o>53o

objects are mentioned

nature, e.g. =rsv", ^J3dri<s^,

and therefore are

109.

when

(see

to the

that exist

102,

as

9).

end of a declinable

suffixes.

instances of the case-terminations (or their series, vibhaktimale)

writings of the three periods; if from inscriptions (sasanas),

are taken from

The period of the written ancient dialect

they are marked by 'in a sasana'.
extends from about 600 to 1250 A. D., that of the mediaeval dialect from about

1250

to

1600 A.

present time.

D.,

and that of the modern one from about 1600 A. D.

Compare

^ 32, note.

to the

The terminations for the singular

of neuter bases

are the

ea

in

ending

following:
f

in tho anciont dialect

()

Nominative o,e.g. 3odo (of aod),

1,
(of 3 u),

(of tfW

tf^o

Tho

o or

2,

Accusative

tfwsJo (of
fly), or
(Of T?J8fy,
It will

3* or the

),

(of

3uo

&>->),

followed by a vowel, becomes 3*. 3s

whon

tf-Of^

^poo

(O

tDuo

f5w),

tfowo (of
stow).

*.

53 o,

tf^aoo

SJCirfo

y.
(

Of

ri&J^o

soeJj),

(O f

or a* (see

3os^3oo

riU,),

215,

jSojio

f ^pJ),
(o

3pt>3o

O f 3JO).

Of

aStf,),

8).

(O f So),

tf.e<^ooo

U^300( fUfy.
be observed that
so*

augment

is,

in this

for tho

kind of accusative either the augment (agama)

sake of euphony, inserted between tho base

and termination.
In true

Kannada words

optional which of the two

is

it

6
employed; but in Samskrita words the 3s

(of voej)

Instrumental

3,

w^e33j^oo

lasjsjo (of
t^y),

TO

jjicxJoa^o (of JiJoJj),

^^jjS

(of OT^dra)-

^o,

^o,

oJoQ^o

'SN,

(213

that

o and

'MfS
Co

GQ

The
ablative,
1

A-eg

tiJoij),

annexed

to

oarlO^ ( O f

03rt) }

O f i^oJj).

means of the

the base by

v.,

tho final

43

coalesces with the terminations or in sandhi

it

^w ^

e. U
a-

S^rtjstfa^.
3o*)3r3o, ea,3A 3J3ofiQo, wrf 3o, 3s?rU>tfQ3o,
C&
ijS

See

i}

352

The doubling
with the vowel

-o

c.
,

u$3
is

(or

g.

or siod^ (of sod), <3o# or

optional (see g

in

&-)

8o^

(of s'JW).
*

it).

(of zSUp;

^-^, ^-^,
* of *, ^

o,

W^PSrS,

rt^d^rfj

e.^r.

^-5-", 'S-^-et,

ao^d^do

genitivo.

a,

5).

HT,

4)

^-^t

in the

(of

moan^.
-J that side,

'

ing 'from that side' (see $ 123,

>i

(of

533 r&3 ar e tho ablative of

suffixes ?3^r3o,
e5^rf,^o,
_8
_S
_J
Jj
Q^

tho secondary ^ of the

= "*,

265 the

J^

(of J3J), 4(

conveys the meaning of pointing

-*,

Cf.

^r3o, 'J^cfo

zSU^ddo

^ow^

371 regarding

with the vowels ^, ~,

Dictionary, and see also

Ablative

*&#

or 2J?o^ (of Wei), s\>wtf or

at or exciting attention to.

The

three terminations of tho instrumental are often used also for the

(of JSsy),

(of s3orf);

for

ff

first

5,

and stand

<o,

and ^N, the c being simply

to enunciation.

Dative 3,

4,

or

3od)o (o f

the secondary termination of the genitive, q.

the later dialect J) and

g.

the addition of the suffixes

are forms of ^o lengthened by
*

euphonic or a help

4 a,

e.g.

NOJjtf (of sojj), zjJoJod

sound when

its

e.

always required,

seq.) .

T)rf

(in

is

<O,

(of ?ipdj); ^oJoO?3 (of

(of ^>ao),

augments may be

(of 3dd?sJ).

In this case the terminations are

augment 3,
of w losing

is

They

aro att:u-hod

t.

tlio

lu<r that hu-

42
In the dialect of the present time tMofrif^ or ^dcOo^, both meaning

'from

the side', are occasionally used to imitate the form of this so-called case.

The terminations ^o, ^^o,

under No.

Genitive

6,

of the instrumental are, as has been stated

^^

3, often employed for the ablative.

d,

3odd

e.g.

C3e>,

3Jc&

sod),

(of

(of

^d^ro

aorf);

(in

sasana between 597-608 A. D.), s^rro, 3?$rcra (i n sasana of 804 A. D.).

The suffix d is not the primitive termination of the genitive. It is composed
of n*, a letter of

euphony

120,

as

a, 6).

the lengthening of the genitive in

130,

6;

also

119,

3*

is

117,

+ y,

a, 6;

131, a, 6; that of the accusative

a, 6;

and compare

a, i;

and w, the

facilitating pronunciation,

of the sixth case (see

119,
in

122,

&

Of.

128, a,
About the o* see

120,

a, 6;

also the euphonic oij' in

real termination

long form of

i.e. a

2.

a, 6;

a, 6.

130,

'

of the word, in the Sabdamanidarpana, page 53, is not a mistake

s
^dd, the existence of the termination rf (i. e. euphonic 3 + w, = & + e ) of the
mediaeval and modern period is proved already for the ancient period; cf. the
'

If

drf

for

in ^Jsyrftf

under the locative, and cSeJ&isdak (c3ys!+ ^c3oi>) in

243, B, 23.
6
os*
&
$
and S3* in
the
the
and
Regarding
augments
compare
augments

122, a,

Locative

7,

rfj^

6.

fc^,

?ro<?*,

S5O*, SS^J,

2otfri,

Sw^o,

a sasana of 689-696 A. D.), sgprsF^tosldJV*,

(in

S5,

e.

'3,,

a^orfrfov

g.

S33dra3)2

nsrarfo^

(in

sasana of 707 A.D.); aoddjs^, So^djav 6 ^js^djsv^ ^rfdjs^o, ^j^^djss^o (in a

sasana of 1084 A. D.), :S?c3j2tfj, aotfdetfo (in a sasana of 1123 A. D.); 20^
;

',

djs^rt

w^rdy*

(i

n a sasana of 1181 A. D.)

s302j33nrft>o (in a
z^aoJ^saddyo,
wasadd^o,
(in a sasana of 1182
;

sasana of 1132 A.D.); 3OC33tfrfyj,

^^dwo
A.D.) ; ^Ja^d^, ws!de agjsyrfO (which form occurs in a sasana of 1186 A. D.);
*odo if ?^,Q (in a sasana of 1187 A.
D.).
;

The
1

(c/

and

A>v 6

suffixes

^v*,

nic (cf. 92. 96, remark).

^tfo,

z^tfrt

mean

'inside',

'within', and wo*,

remark in 188), ^<2 niean 'place', 'in a place'; ^

is composed of
the termination "9; the e^ of 2^^J and ^^-> is a help to enunciation or eupho-

(i.e.

in the

6)

1,
i. e.)

0* + ^) or

rf

(.

?5

The

suffixes are

+ t?)

o f the genitive.

added

to

means

the base by

of the

mediaeval dialect

Norn,

o,

?3o,

^),

the crude base,

(of 3ra),
!

e.

(of

?r?J),

^?J,

and

e. g.

(the nominal base itself without

3orfo

^jscsrfo

(O f

( O f slid),

cSjsra),

rtOfS^) (of I^Jra),

arf,

dod, aojo,

^JS^o

Sodrfo

S3J3^

f ^J3^),
(O

O f sod),
(

(of 3-03^),

any termination,

Joo ( O f

aofs^o

f
(O

^es);

fiortrfo (of

aora),

siiaa&i (of

^(O^J3o^) (of

oc

^ the o or ^-8^ has been changed into ?* and

to which the
has
been
added
under letter
which
the
locative
see
e.
euphonic
(regarding
g.
92.
111.
112.
113. 119. 121. 125. 126).
a; $
In NJ and
sru

43
Compare the crude base

nominative

for the

the ancient dialect in

in

110.

120. 121. 122. 123. 125. 126. 127. 128.

Ace. Wo,

2,

3f3o,

*3,

3r$,,

dodrfo,

ff>

WorfSo,

3o3

&8ci3?iO;

J,

aid, s'ouS, drid, riS ?a

The euphonic augments

the terminations.

fcJNO

has taken the form of

on the accusative

in the ancient dialect in

Instr. *ao,

A
In

^^^1

^NO,

^o+n* + w^)
has been added;

4,

Dat. 3, 3,,

5,

Abl.

a;

117,

Loc.

eructedstfrt;

^^

g.

4, 2,

OrfO,
ca

Sl'BDtfQ,

'

s* to which

and the

another

'S is
*3

2 in

the

282.

close of

^^#,
in

which

^wdwo

Compare the

of the genitive in

c.

SwSP, fco^J, ktfrt,

(in

ewo,

es,

S30,

a sasana of 1509

partd, ^jrfdO;

a,

e.

A. D.),

(in

a sasana of

sgitia.

a curtailed form of ^^,-

Kom.

2Jo3o (of

ues),

occasionally 3*

used, as in

is

and) modern dialect

&,, 5^,

Ac&5( fAd),
2,

has been changed into

like a*, is euphonic.

c3*,

a, 6,

in the (later

y. JWdd;

e.

D.); z3ridO,

is

1,

151,
^.

For the augment E

C)

oiJOrf

5^^o, 533^^

The augment

1533 A.

*a,

^^ has dropped the ^-df^. The

of the instrumeatal.
C^. the note under

>

Gen. d, ^,

7,

the

and see the remark

has been dropped.

&(^

109,

a,

SAJ

a, 6),

-.

Dictionary and see also

6,

117,
"arf,

120,

ta

form of the ancient

the

-s^, "atf^,

(z. e.

the euphonic

euphonic SAJ; in s^ the termination

has been doubled on account of euphony.

its final

compare the w of the genitive

Concerning

3,

and

are inserted between the base and

^o

c with the

js

wrf,

and s

3o

3',

and (most frequently)

sJo

Adrio

O f Sod),

O f dJd),

Ace.

Of

Of

23uarfo; wartds-^,

333C5),

^?C33 (of

crude base, e.g. 3oat>& (o f

Ad);

oSrfrf),

^^.^^
wtfrtd

(of ^^,*),

33*^

(of satfrt);

Ad, sod.

(of

ajj^d^
^, and (most frequently) the crude bases, e.g.

tfwrid,
(of

the

AdS,

$d),

dodS,

rfjJOT>

^arf^, sa^ds^,
^ds, ^S3 w^
;

Adarf^, 3od3j^;
(of

w^, ^ba

O f SJ2e3), 3dR3 (of a^C8), a5V3,

Of

(of

*^)

Ad, sod.

The euphonic augments

s6 and

are

doubled for the sake of euphony

the

S*;
is

in

t?^

attached

the final of
to the

&

has been

crude base.
6*

44
Instr.

3,

'a, e

's.rS

oTotfa.

4,

Dat.

=$,

5,

Abl.

^3

il, e.g.
e. g.

f^

The augment

Gen.

C3>

6,

c3

The lengthened

the same as c*.

is

e.

?5,

era

appears frequently

in poetry.

Loc.

7,

110.

In

Kannada no nominal

ancient

bases receive the

"

o or
<,

nominative singular, except masculine, a few feminine (see

and neuter bases with final e5.
in the

Words

2),

of which the crude base forms the nominative singular, are e.g.

See some exceptions

111.

102,

In the

111, and

in

109 under

i.

mediaeval dialect, as has been stated in

93 and 94,

nominal bases ending in a consonant may receive a final euphonic pro,

in which case their nominative singular shows such an ero, e.g. ^rro,
=5^0, ^OJ,

^O^,

5^0, 3^0,,

23(3^,

S^JO^O, ^00^0,.

Exceptionally this is the case in the ancient dialect too, as we find

in one of 1048
sasana of about 778 A. D. also sjori^o (for doris

in a

*),

in one of 1084 A.
A. D. =5^0
(for ^3*),

1123 A. D.

3ojsddo

112.

(for

and

4
(for djafe, Aias? ),

In modern

^J3dc*),

in

final

erusoo (for

yxoo*),

in

one of

one of 1182 A. D.

one of 1187 A. D. sjo^do

(for

Kannada, as

nominal bases with a

in

I).

will

be seen from the same paragraph^,

consonant generally receive the euphonic

in such an

and their nominative singular, therefore very often ends

113.

of

A strange

peculiarity

school-books, which

of

modern Kannada

begins to appear already

that also to nominal bases with the final vowels

g)dJ3,

L,

23,

yv.

writings, especially

mediaeval works,

in

is

a,

-6s,

^ro,

i,

tfvs,

3)io,

the nominative singular of which in the ancient dialect has

no termination at
termination

y\),

of

all

the

(see

110),

nominative

an

TO

singular,

is

annexed, at option, as the

by

means

of the letters ox*

45
and

and s< being merely a help

these c&<

53*,

and compare

128. 129. 130,

and

letters b

T=9

,3

^?4,

2^^, ^sj, slo^,

rtodo^,

to enunciation, e.g.

See

c in g 109.

As very many ancient true Kannada nominal bases have no nomina-

114.

tive case-sign

in

110), as already in the mediaeval dialect

tho singular (see

neuter and masculine bases with final

10 J, letter
(

and

117, letter

occasionally appear without

3 too

and as

),

Kannada such

later

in

masculine and feminine bases are most frequently used without

letter c

rf3 ^.

and

(see

(see

109,

thought arises that the ancient o (sonne), the

letter c), the

117,

it

it

neuter,

termination of the nominative singular of neuters (

109), masculines and femi&>
nines (>j 117) ending in 5, of which 3
and 4 are but other forms,
30*, &,
,

of

sandhi

in

euphony
3od

a sign introduced by grammarians, partly for the sake

may have been

originally

215,

an hiatus

in order to avoid

8)

g,

(e.

Sod?* qriOFCi)

wbrf

s^do
a^dc) and partly as a help to the
formation of the oblique cases, especially the accusative and genitive, it forming
for

'Sidordo,

tsdro?*

for

also therein the euphonic letter

g.

(e.

Sod -f- ?*

Sod -f

+ wo,

&+w

0323

+ 3* + Wo,

O3K +

ff + W). Let it be added that Tulu, one of the

sister-languages of Kannada,
never uses a nominative case-sign for neuter bases ending in S3-

Kannada grammarians teach that by the suffix a (which means

We learn from
193) true Kannada masculine nominial bases are
The application of this rule appears e.g. in the following instances, in

115.

'he',

as

formed.

which the formative w

the two letters
tftrffi,
t?,

is

annexed

to the

w being euphonically

a reddish

foot,

Gen.

joined

tftrfaofc

and forming the crude base

or joined

man

native case-sign o ^?7j<3o3oo, a

&

of the genitive
(

214,

109, letter a,

h e formative suffix

6),

seg.):

130); ^<7ooJo-f

and combined with the nomi-

'tftrtfcoto',

^S, charm, Gen.

of or with reddish feet;

130); ^030 + w, or joined and forming the crude base 'Siaoij', and
combined with the nominative case-sign o tiJjoioo, a man of charm, a charming
^3oi>

man;

ayrfresff,

a flower-like

eye,

joined and forming the crude base

case-sign o oajnrr^o, a
a8*^i

man;

worirre^

'WsJrtFC^',

of or

man

or

w, or <o^oiJ, or

Gen. uewai
0020

122);

or

3wo, a

3ojdre

the east, Gen. sojsdra

man

+ w,

of th

or so^dra,

tho east;

*itfcioo,

128); too^

ao,

or

2&S3*, gold, Gru.

of gold, a very proeiou-

(
123)
3u, the side, Gen. $*>& ( 109); tf<^d + e, or
of or on tho side;
>*, youth, Gen. otfoii (
130); )<?

d-i-fjrf,

man of
^do, a man

or

and combined with the nominative

+,

or sojsdrao, a

oortrra+o,

120);

with flower-like eyes;

120); 3J3f^ + w, or ^-8?^, or

-^o, a
3o ( 120); z3y
z3eJ*, a bow, Gen.

bow, an archer;

Gen.

man

Gen.

?rOJ20

man

a, O r

+ w,

of youth, a youthful

JJes^a,

or UOJ3o,

or ^eww, or

^JUo.

man;

a vain man;
a

man

*Jo>.

vainness,

tfootJJ,

on%

of envy, an envious

46
aV,

man;

Gen.

theft,

120);

^+

o, or

or

*fy

+ w,
rtf^

man

*<Jo,

of theft,

man of
122);
rtt|,
a
man.
249.
Of.
strength,
powerful
224; 243, 5, remark;
Analogously the formation of the true Kannada masculine nominal bases
a thief;

wra

Gen.
rire^ strength,

^^

O r rtrao, a

Or

^ aaj etc. may have taken place, although the

s&ri^,
the genitive of which the formative & was attached, are nowadays

***i'

themes

rtra

to

^^"i

>

out of use.

But the form of true Kannada crude bases with

116.

and the language of ordinary conversation

3od, sgpy,

j3ej,

oyrtFC^,

rir|,

for

e&a^, does not by

used in books

final e,

the nominative singular,

e.

g.

the gender of them

itself indicate

Likewise o (the sonne), the grammatical sign of the nominative singular of bases ending in e (
114), does not express distinction of
(see also

102).

gender; thus, for instance, the neuters Sodo, ^pe;o, sSyo, E3j,o cannot, by their
sonne, be distinguished as to gender from the masculines era o, ^3^0, Tlra^o,
e&ei^o, or from the feminine tadbhavas ^^o. e^o (
117).
This impossibility of discerning the gender by the sonne appears also in the
oblique cases of neuter bases ending in e, because they show, with regard to
o or sonne,
frequently the

their final

109. 117),

(see

vocative

f
g. Nora. &>ti3

e.

and the vocative

3odc3e

same forms as such masculine bases do

(i. e.

^J3tf?3

3odo before a following vowel; c/. its

in 8 140), era 3* (/. e. erao before a

''<>

J*3

following vowel) or also aodrfj, ecs^o; Ace. 3odrfo, era 3o; ^pyrfo, a^^c; ^J3^rf,
rarf Gen. ifjstfrf, era rf; Abl. 3oda3, wra s?{ L OC jiodrfe, tsra^O.
"^
P9
WJ
;

CO

Hence

it

with

final $5 are,

their

gender,

genitive

when

in

the

in

is

it

Kannada nominal bases

formed by means of the euphonic o*

or ^.

109), and in the

109).

the grammarian Kesava says that there are eight or nine genders

Kannada language

102), he does not found their difference on outward

but on their distinguishing properties and qualities.

Kannada no nominal crude base

a fact that in

ending

**>

t*9

all

the singular, destitute of a particular sign to express

it has the euphonic s& in the

signs in the nominal bases,

It is

CO

except in the nominative when

dative ending in

When

O9

be stated as a general rule that

to

is

in w, 's, v\>

and

,0,

or in a consonant,

shows

in the singular,

expressive of the distinction of male, female and neuter, except

pronominal suffixes
3o,

*i and

and

in the

rio

whether

a difference of termination
in

the feminine

e? *, etfo(g

120. 121), in the neuter pronominal suffixes

122. 169), in the neuter pronouns edo, gcfc, wrfo ( 122>
1

feminine suffixes $*,

although also these suffixes

and 3

(e .

a^ans, ^sseDS,

g.

rradft^,

s5ra

d),

and words do not bear such terminations as specify

absolutely their gender by themselves.

The termination e has above been treated

expressing by
sign of gender

itself
is

a distinction of gender.

seen in the

final

vowels

'S,

of as to the impossibility of

The same absence

SA>

and

of

as there are

its

an outward

c.

g.

&*>> a

47
3oA, a younger sister, tf^Q, a female friend, 3->^, male or fomale
a hog, &J&, a sheep, rto*, a feather; rt^^ a male person,

profligate,

persons, 3f^,
a malo person, aoortxb, a fomale,
3JOJ, a cow,

5^,

the neck

^,

rt^-

^^ (^re^), a fomale,

*>'

a master,

woman

^^

*&>, a child, o^, an ox,

\do, a dumb man,
father,

woman, &**, a damsel, C3f

and in
&&, a tank, 33, a wave, ^*, the crescent
Wf*
a
fern,
and
as
there
are
consonants,
(WtfJ),
neuter),
person (masc.,
e.g.

who? which

ws3,

such a

as, WT?, that

).

a whore, w?3, an elephant,

final

&&,

a female,

5jss,

scorpion,

w^c<

life.

(OTCO),

Let

be added that also

it

the gender

distinguish

the plural no terminations exist by which

in

118. 119. 131. 132. 134.

fixed (see

is

^\

136), the plurals of &3>,

(>j

(3W), a

a stone, 3?o*, a chariot, $*&,

1 35); also wd,

ad, n>3j
do not show such forms as at once

snjdo,

them from the singular of the neuters &&$, eroc^, t?ojs^, etc.
109 the case-terminations for the singular of neuter bases

In

117.

with final

have been given according to the forms they have

in the

throe periods of the language; here follow the case-terminations for the
singular of masculine and feminine bases with final
a)

in the ancient dialect

1,

Nom.
3?do^o,

Qdo,
23fc3,do,
CO

e.g.

o,

tsyrtrre^o,

ija?0do,

193,
2,

(O

^^3o

f srs&J),

also as

w^Po

119 and 120,

letters a;

122, letter a;

and remarks).
Ace.

1182 A.

wo,

W^j,

(9),

e.

odrfrfo (of wdri),

#.

S5do. rfo,

'

drarsd^rfo

djdrfrfo

asJ.NO;
c3

o f djarad^),
(i
^ n

a sasana

D.).

y^NQ appears

also as ^^Prfo (Sabdanusasana sAtra 175).

The augment 3s
letters a and b).
In

Of

(c/.

SraQd^o, odrfatfrfo, adrfo, wsj^o; o^.rfo,

of

^rfaoioo

aAoJoo; aslC
oOdo,
^

^^o appears
1

^&o

es, viz.

is

euphonic like that of neuter bases

wrfo the
euphonic SN has been

The termination &

added

to the

in the accusatives}

sonne of

109,

5o.

in the parenthesis refers to a quotation in the

Sabdamani-

jarfoij
thou killedst me), in
( O h,
darpana (page 164), viz. <o^3P?, SW* <o^
which, as Kesava supposes, the ^c^ (of Wo, I,
137) is the genitive used
instead of the accusative <0?^o.
Kesava appears to be wrong our opinion is
;

that in this case ^^.

the

neuter,

is

the accusative with final

and

^oesjri^

n ^ 122,

Likewise when Bhattiikalanka

cOf^

that in

that so frequently occurs in

masculine and feminine singular of the

dialects (cf. TO&J

in

&

<t,

2;

in his

jj

;i,">2,

i,

mediaeval

and

modern

b).

grammar under

sutra 231 thinks that

dOK*do (he forgot me) the genitive is used for the accusative, we believe
this case too
is the accusative with final ts.

48
Another similar instance of Kesava that belongs
75; see

215,

modern

remark

6,

too

it

3);

neuter noun with final

to a

obscene sentence ^pesd ^

in the

w, is ^pesij (of 3&&)

(Sabdamanidarpana page

the accusative of the mediaeval and

is

dialects.

reasonable to think that the accusative ending in

It is

55

existed already in

the colloquial dialect of the ancient period, but had not been generally accepted

by classical writers.
r

Instr.

3,

'S.o,

e.

<SrS,

'S.rfo,

The terminations are attached

(213

pears in sandhi
Dat.

4,

to the genitive,

the final

1123 A.

n a sasana of

under rupaka

ftSo&JFdrt in the stanza

right;

33^0

(of S533F),

O f 32^

&

which disap-

of

seq,).

e.g. (3wjJrt,

(fl), ort,

3333FSO

g.

in

reading be

D., if the

ti*or

239);

*
fi

is

a, 4).

the true termination; the sonne before

n5

-f

<o

it

&+

has the same meaning as

is

merely euphonic

(see

09)

cf. e. y.

137,

(cf.

fcJ-tf-ia,

'S-fl-O

in the Dictionary.

&3

A. D 1

c)

w _0 Co ^5
5'

'

sandhi

6,

213

See

ablative.

Gen. y, y,

The augment

3*

is

and 5 of the genitive

3

see
7,

109,

4 a,

e.

cv

'-

ii-

Q'

"ff .

^j

'

g.

'

a"

to the genitive the final

those of the instrumental are

se^.);

352,

c)

_C

'

The terminations are added

in

53 3

.
'

tJ

-*

'

<a

-*

"a

of which disappears

optionally used

for

the

seq.

?rreF^

(O

a letter of euphony facilitating pronunciation;

109, letters

in

and

a, b

c.

c/*.

the n*

About the lengthening of

6.

Loc. ij<$6 "

,

S3),
<^*"

ffco^ri),
\
/
"

S3dsic

?. ^
g.

"u

The terminations are added

I))

1,

in

to the genitive

according

to

the rule of sandhi.

the mediaeval dialect

Nom.

o, rl),

the crude base,*

and

(the

e. a. vtitio,
*/

In NO the sonne has been

2,

Ace.

In

^^ the

5o,

c3<

SS^O,

nominal base

&3o.

wo;

changed

S5^a,

S5,

e.

itself

without any termination,

^^.o; aarfrfo, -So^irfj,

"jy

into
^.

woii,?Sj,
t)

before the euphonic vowel

tfSS^o (of

has been euphonically doubled.

/. c.)

49
3,

Instr.

4,

Dat.

5,

Abl.

-ao, 'S.N.o,
^
e.

ort,

rt,

</.

'3N )", e.g. *~So; Wo33.ft3o;

^{3,
O ('Stf^,
Q
O^
osrt,

woi^rt, &3rt,

y^rl^o,

('.s^rSo,

Zfo?

**

g&s&sort, curort,

3<*rt;

the terminations

tf^f&fS),

of the

instru-

mental.
0,

Gen.

7,

Loc.

C)

in the

1,

Norn,

2,

Ace.

e.g. ^o^tf;

j,

s5^5i.

fcov

90,

fctfj, (fctffl),

so

('J0,

6),

r.g.

and) modern dialect

(later

frequently the crude base,

tfo,

109, letter

g. 3dodjrtNO, aiet;i33o,

e.

3,

55^0, Wr^o,,

W?3

?5,

Instr.

4,

Dat.

^^

j^rt f

and

vowels
for

y.

^d^,

e . ^.

The augments

e.

's.fi,
tf,

'g3;3

353d33rf,

3,

e.

ia^drt, wrart,

jjtert,

^.

and S and other forms of the euphonic sonne, to which the

are joined for the sake of euphony, so that 3r5 an d art stand

^9

rf

orS.

5,

Abl.

6,

Gen.

7,

Loc.

c. o.
7

atf,
Q'

S3,

CO

e^ri

S5

the ancient dialect

3

rtoreortv*,

?iocl?332JaJjorts?D 5

rtv 6

is

in orttfo.

3Jioriv

s
,

sSod^lsrfrf ?iortD

<?.

The

ort^o*

Hither riv

>$

is

^y,-(v s ; 3od:
^. aodrtv*. s3i;rt^,

c3<j!ortv

f
;

A.

rfv*

composed of

the sonne

and

is

euphonic, likewise the

which

'Sio*

is

another termination

119).

s
or ortv are added to true

Kannada

bases.

Samskrita bases

use to receive ortv* or ortto* (cf. 109, a,

according to

grammar always
sasana of 1076 A. D., however, we find

3?tfr,itfj;tfj

The absence of instances for certain terminations

means to say that instances with them have

oases, only

:ilthoiigh they

a sasana of

1 r.':;

rfrtdoritfj (in

5.

the true termination-, in ortv

of the plural (see

11

nominal bases with

of neuter

131. 132.)

e. (C/.
in

3rf;

oo^ciJrtrf,

^.

e. a.

S3

orts *, oriv'j, ort^o*,

D.V,

e.

The case-terminations for the plural

118.

ft)

(especially in poetry),

^vj*

final

do exist; see

e.

g.

^^S)

in

vj

11'.',

l>:

"D^

iu

parenthesis in

not been met with

in

-'):

in a

and

-<>.

'.

this

and other

by the author.

50
Ace.

2,

S5o, e. g.

The terminations are attached

in oritfo,

Instr.

3,

03,0,

is^o,
CJ

Q$O

(213
Dat.

4,

1076

final

w, as

rioreorteo.

^uorteo;

of which disappears in

the genitive, the

to

seq.}.

g. ^Jdrteo,

e.

The terminations are added

sandhi

to those of the nominative.

(213

disappears then in sandhi

aeq.).
e.

'art,

fl,

g>

3Jdorf<2

^odrftf,

e5jjort

qtoorrterl

(in

sasana of

A. D.).
r

The

*3

5,

Abl. S3^

in 3fi is euphonic.

do V3&3o ^3

The terminations are attached

6,

Gen.

7,

Loc.

55,

C$3

e.

to the genitive.

e. g.

^s*
JjJrrttf.etfo(in

a sasana of 1076 A.D.)-,

The terminations are added

6)

in the mediaeval dialect

1,

Nom. rV,

2,

Ace.

3,

Instr.

4,

Dat.

5,

Abl.

rt^o,

to the genitive.

orV,

fi,

*^rt,

^. rfoorttf,

the terminations of the

instrumental.
6,

Gen.

7,

Loc.

53 }

rfdris^,

e.^.

^
3
,
*

the modern dialect

c]

in

1,

Norn,

2,

Ace.

3,

Instr.

4,

Dat.

rt^jj

e.^r.

Adrttfo,

S3f30,

"-CO
Aciritfri

e.q.
<^^,
Q*
-art, <?.#.

Ai3ri?r>,

erorfwadort^rt,

M'

S3Ci

e.

d.aort0;
^
9) %*A

5,

Abl.

6,

Gen. e,

7,

Loc.

-atf, e.g.
C3

S3

Zotfrt,

e.g.

CO

The case-terminations for the

119.

epicene

102,

bases with final

4)

occur only in the plural.

e, including

Kom. orV,

1,

131. 132. 134. 135. 137.)

(Cj.

3&,

wo*,

estfo,

2*0% wo*, C&JD<, sic*,

ao', woo*, ortSo', e^FSo*, oao*, oaoo*, oarirv*,

nv,

some bases that

also

in the ancient dialect

a)

<

masculine, feminine and

plural of

^onv*,

w^ortv*,

5
(of 3on); yjJToo

erua^oris *,
1

^jsaorw

5
ssziJ^o*, saadFO

doC

do*,

do*,

'sisoijo

Sjeso*,

^orfnsoo*,

^OcxJjo*,

ic*,

'SIZJFO*,

sasana of 1123 A. D.),

3s^?od) (the four terms in a sasana of

^ordj,

#.

dra^orts*; tt^oriv*,

Je^rldo (both in a

acJ?od),

dJaSdo*, oo6^o, rfoa^D*',

cScOdo*,

1182 A.

D.),

1187 A. D.); ^i^&aro* (in a sasana between

sio.oj&ro* (in a sasana of 866 A. D.), rfjarirOSj^o* (in a

(both in a sasana of

680 and 696 A.

D.),

sasana of 916 A. D.);

oi

c
Sdo*,eo4io
a

t>

fid

OO;

'SlSSriF^.
CO

wdo

yo6 and

is

117,

(r/.

euphonic

en>
96 remark)-, &>o* is another form of o*
(c/.
lu wo*, ouo* and 3o* the letters 13*, ow and
are

a euphonic

letter a).

&

5
are composed of ^o* and ^V and rv*; woo
5
5
6
9
5
o* and ^o*, and a^F^o
^P and ISO "; in oOo the
O f ^o

5
augments; y^rv W^FV^
,

"

is

composed of

sonne
nv*;

is

So

243,
2,

(in

is

109, a,
/^,

cQo* and 'SO5

is

composed of a euphonic
6

>o s

that of

remark; that of z-^do

Ace.

wo

esrfo >

<?.

>

</.

*J

in

in

ecsor\s>o;
p^

o^rtF9*

n 5 and

*9O*

132,

5j

a.

is

(cf.

composed of o>o* and

the euphonic c* of the

134, a; that of wC^o, etc.

276).
e^.orS^o. wd?ido.
jjj^*o;
TJ
Tj

etc.;

a sasana of 1182 A. D.).

tsrfo is

3,

oaoo*

euphonic;
6

genitive in
in

o (?*)

Instr.

and a euphonic

^o, a^o,
CJ

era.

'S,^ ,e.<7.

The terminations are added

213 seg.).
4,

Dat.
or

fl,

^, ^7^,

zoodrt F,

za^ci

=#,

srtr

to the genitive

e.g.
or

^)N

according to the rule of sandbi

raon; ^tf;
3rt F,

^^

dtsrtF or dtartF,

<od3rtF or <o6drt F, etc.;

c530rt
7*

(in

52
sasana of 1123 A.
(in

D.), $^0rt, aa^j-aort (both in a sasana of 1181 A.

a sasana between 597 and 608 A. D.).

occurs optionally after the repha; such a doubling of a consonant after

1^
is

D.)-,

very frequent,

The ^

before

Abl.

5,

132, a; 155; 240, under

Of.
ft

246, under a;

5;

371,

it
1.

a euphonic prefix.

is

y^riio, tf^djdo, 53^rl?3; the terminations of the instrumental,

orftf 3 e&x etc.

e *J
a era
*
P^
.

Gen.

6,

M,

S3,

3^,$-

araoritf;
i/>3

e. a.

is

T7

tjJ&Jsdoa (in

simply a euphonically lengthened

Loc. e*^,
(fctffl),

7,

e35-,oritf;

"

TT

a sasana between 680 and 696 A. D.),

srfjsdjsy

e,

e.0.

ca

3;f3<$> oi>33

etc.;

d;'

109,

wraorttfjav*;

(in

a,

6.

e^orttfa*

c33djsv*, datf

etc.

mediaeval dialect

6)

in the

1,

Nom. the same case-terminations

See

S3.

del

a sasana of 804 A. D.).

in the ancient dialect;

as

further

rttfo,

The terminations show a

free

use of the euphonic

en)

and an occasional

omission of the euphonic sonne.

2,

Ace. yo,

3,

Instr. -ao,

4,

Dat.

rfort,

t?oio rt^, yjftkritf, d>?rtd,

e.g. SoOokdJAtfo; riojssdo;
6

55,

^^o,

^^4,

'SfS,

Abl.

^r.

's^

ri

do^ar^,

rireor^,

dorfozsof?,

The ^ and ^o are euphonical

5,

es^ pSo,

^5^ c^rd

dra^^ar^,

asori, <oy

art,

prefixes.

y>^ r^^l

o,

the

terminations

of

the

mental.
6,

Genitive

7,

Loc.

so

S3,

v6

woixris

e.g.

aotfo,

B^rt,

S3, (JQ),

fiddrt, tf^rt^^rt,

e.

esde.

the modern dialect

c)

in

1,

Norn,

rttfo,

^^0, =^*do,
,

aoredo,

&>,

WOo, ddo, odOo, oDdo, e.g

instru-

53
Another plural
pronouns
3

&3

formed by adding W3dj,

is

the nominative plural of the

or O3tfj, to the nominative singular,

e.

g.

(3o

yd^Sdo

or

wd

e^rfado, wai^risdo, or to the nominative plural, e.g.

258.
131, c, i, and see

4. w;3dO),

Cf.

Ace.

2,
(

S3^o,

3,

Instr.

4,

Dat.

e.

tf,

g.

135); $j&p*>

'art,

esrt,
'3

5,

atf,

6,

Gen.

e5

rt

akrfortort.
^Ujdrt; otf^oort,

are euphonic additions.

.*.

e.a.
*?

%3 J

.flf.

before

Abl.

Loc.

S3,

<3^, e.g. ^odortOi^.

The w and

7,

jl,

ssfiJ,,

135); -30 d, ofcad

Zotfri,

es, (e),

.^.

The case-terminations for the singular of neuter and feminine bases

is either masculine or neuter in the ancient language,

120.

(and of one that

viz.

e3$*, $ 102, 5)

ending

in consonants.

a)

in the ancient dialect

1,

Norn, the crude

e.g. ^0*1

base,

5j(0o' (see

55

3rOo3oy

187,

*to*,

^?dv

ff
,

ff

vv6

soov*, ^ofc*.

^dr? *,
1

^ZOFV*; wv*; wno*,

i).

appears also as y^pv* (Sabdanusasana sutra 175).

Ace.

2,

Wo. the crude base, e.g. ^Jo, 23^0, s^o^o, ^oi^o,

S5 G .

(in

v5 ),

t3w

J3tC5

->)> -^3^

J82*

(in

(in

wdc

appears also as *40tfo (Sabdanusasana sutra 175).

The doubling

of the consonant of monosyllabic bases with a short vowel

takes place on account of euphony

(c/.

215,

7,

d).

Kesava (page 297) gives the following quotation (see

rio* <o;3d^>
wz5,ojod ^dortv*, and remarks that the
(abaddha), as

it

agent or subject

and

stands

for

ought
is

to

be

^X

accusative.

rf

tf^ACtf

otf?ic* is

in

wrong
new

or <otf7odsdo or <otf?jdc:3;3, because a

introduced, viz. 3donv*,

the

365); zooto
*

^a^ae^

translation

therefore,
is:

is

the crude base

'When

(they,

certain

people) desired the purple sunshine of the evening, the trees of the hermitage

appeared'.

Cf. the ancient accusatives

As? in

in

6
125, SJJS^o in $ 126,

$ TJ7,
130,
especially also the Kriyasamasa ($ 253,
the crude base represents the accusative, and
352, 6, b.
3,

Instr-

ao,

-.',

arfo,

atf,

e.g.VQo, ^^,^0

i,

a) in

?Jo

in

which

54
The terminations are attached to the genitive according to the
seq.).
Of. the ^o in the Dictionary, Additions, p. 1711.

rule of sandhi

(213

Dat. ^,

4,

A'

Abl.

5,
e. a.
3

y,

sacjj;

sjfs^,

750 A.

of about

A'

A'

t^oix^ do,
_s

Gen.

6,

g.

A'

ef^Zc'O, S5:^r3r3o, ss^rlfS, the terminations of the instrumental

3vn 3_ do,

^J^os?;

e.

ft,
,

^o,

<?.#.

y^s^,

erud ^,
1

'gis^,

y^;

2-Srs^;

wdtf,

eruaoa

(in

sasana

D.).

Here we have the primitive form of the

genitive, viz. ^.

About the doubling

see the Accusative.

Loc. v\JV*, aoS*,

(toVri),

7,

707 A.
(in

)*a^

D.);

5,

S5s;o,

#aoe

to the genitive

1,

Norn, the crude base, e.g. ^o*, sse^;

Ace.

according

e5o,
(in

S5,

a?;

the crude base, e.g.

A)39 5 'gdo),

23*0*

(in

^3?o

ff

yvsesi),

z3^

& 333^
3,

Instr.

4,

Dat.

5,

Abl.

6,

Gen.

7,

Loc.

In

to rule.

mediaeval dialect

6)

erjstf*

^ori^os* (in a sasana of

^.

a sasana of 1187 A. D.); ^ra

(in

in the

2,

e.

(o

a sasana of 971 A. D.);

The terminations are added

(in

S5S3*,

rt

e. o.
7

^rt'i?; addrfei,
TT

ss^rdo, y^rii^o,
S,

the

e.

^r.

^^

auxiliary

the terminations of the instrumental.

^o^-i 3ora, aooo,

augment

^e3.
ojj3,;
warir, araoSo,
O
O
O
iO

yrtd,

53^^^,

'S?^

(in

eruad,

of

^ojj; 33oio

(or

3^^^); &z$,

have

been

that, in general, all ancient

nomi-

121

appears

to

mutilated.
c)

in

the

modern

92. 93 and

In

dialect

112

it

has been stated

nal bases with a final consonant appear with a euphonic final n> or

Kannada

but there are exceptions, that is especially when

immediately connected with another noun or verb, e.g. tf
;

such

in

modern

bases are

55
530*

d,

^oi3

3rt,

^oij*

tfari),

are in union with case-terminations,

saoJj;

3i>oi>,

iboJxC,
usojid;
\>
t7
121, and

in

(of waoi:*)

rfoij*,

The case-terminations

121.

See also

wsoir

a proverb under

in

tfoSx^;

133<XO^,

W3o5.tfrt.

djoijj.v'rt,

J)

when they

doafc* ud.>, or also

tfjatfj,.

g. SDOJJ;

e.

**>

*k^;

rfoi^,

and uactoC

tfcto
"

the Dictionary.

in

and feminine bases

for the singular of neuter

(and of the base wtfo that is masculine-feminine-neuter

modern

the

in

dialect) ending in en), this vowel being merely euphonically suffixed to

ancient bases ending in consonants (see
92. 93. 94. 9(> remark).
Such

bases appear nowadays chiefly in the mediaeval and modern dialer

but there are proofs of their existence also in the ancient one, namely

and

in its dative

^J*)

(for

Xvi.

^a?^,
187,

Cy.

Nona,

1,

dorttfo

(for

dorl<ff),

3&zit>j

(S5^o3o^j),

i.

sjtftfo

crude base, e.y.

yu, i.e. the

(in

a sasana of about 778

one of 1048 A. D.), sJPtw, ASex> (i n one of 1182 A. D.), io^dj

one of 1187 A. D.), eofcM (in one of 1076 A. D.), ci*riex> (in one of 1123

A. D.),

^ejo, (in

A. D.), $>3*rfwJ

one of 1182 A.

(in

Dat. 'Sort, 3,

4,
^jac^Oort

of

3$ok<ix>

rfo^do,

Ao&5>x>,

words

in the

In the ancient dialect

a)

(in

and

genitive,

(in

e.

D.).

sasana of 1084 A.D.),

yx^Oort (in a
g. wrteort, -^rttort;

a sasana of 1123 A. D.);

s&rttfu^

(for J&ricoyo^),

yrtoo^

(i

n one

1123 A. D.).

The grammatical bases

of the terras wr!?ort, ^rtPort, vusOort, ^J8^3ort, ^prt*

oj^, tfrtwj^ are wrtv*, ^rtv

their dative ought to be

ff
,

^ja^o

wrt, ^rt^,

but they have been treated as

tfriu>,

yuso

ff

^srt^s^, yrto*.

wartr, Aadrtr,

they were *ritfo,

analogously to the ancient wridj an d ^rt^J
if

^srttfe^, wrte^

122), for which

grammatical termination of the dative, and somewhat analogously

modern

3-*3ciwo

and

which

sLocrtoo, for

dative (see under letter

*=1^

c).

120);
^prttfwo,

'Sort is

e.

the

g. to the

the grammatical termination of the

is

Thus the forms

to rule

(see

yuadj, ^jsddj,

^rttfj,
(

According

*rt"~,

trrfv*,

erjao*,

*jsd3 s &rtfo'.
",

wrio5 have existed with the euphonic suffix SAJ of the mediaeval and modern
dialect already in ancient times, and have been used like the bases with h'nal
ero

in

122.

Observe that

OG3 5

and acw, seven, appear

in

these two forms in

the ancient dialect.

'Sort
rt

consists of the euphonic

(see ^ 120).
6,

The

Gen. ^N,

The bases

e.

en;

before

g. 'Sd^rf,

simply euphonic.

rfrteDrf,

^Jjc^rf,

of these terms are 'SdJV

5
,

Kesava remarks that

'Sdotfrf

and

ert3,

3rt3

grammatical forms of the genitive would be

120).

and the termination of the dative

'So

augment
is

'Sdjtf,

sirtDrf

^rtorf.

^jaca*,
rfrfy,

wrtv*,

^rtv, an d the

^ecs, wrt^,

are optionally

^rtV

(s.

uscil tor ^dotf

and

56
which goes

together with

to

show that
wrttfj,

TJJSCW,

Kesava adds that

preceding.

and

forms with the euphonic w, were

^,1^j, i n common use at his time an'd in the time
'Sjdjtfo

it is

siiltw,

wrong (dosha)

to use

such forms as z3do03,

He

evidently opposes the too free use of forms of ordinary

which
conversation,
presuppose the existence of many bases with the euphonic

3ora3, SootfC^,

final

en)

122), in the present case of 233o&>, doreiw and 3ooAuo.

is

the termination of the genitive, and the euphonic

9,

in

1,

Nora.

?AJ i. e. th.3
orftfo,

?oJ3Ko,

C9c3

).

crude base,
^jsc^do,

stos^do,

e.

<o^x

g.

3G3i>o;

oatfo, 'gatfo, (ydtfo), a-artfo,

2*20^

tfj;

wrltfo,

2,

Ace. Wo,

It is

impossible to settle whether

the crude base, e.g.

2,

joojjyo, $53^0;

aoritfo;

&oris?o,

with the euphonic

a^s^o,

2joJJt)o,

are the accusative of bases with final consonants

etc.

augment ^o

the mediaeval dialect

b)

etc.

120,

any,
letter b) or

n>.

^Qo,

3,

Instr.

It is

possible that in such forms as ^fi,o. eao3o, etc. the bases are

^^

ao, (^foo,
O

120,

(see
is

^^

letter b).

attached to

-ScS,

Like the ^o the

^^N,
O

-arf),
CO

Dat. 'aofl, 'art, 'a^,

4,

of bases

'

9- ^^,

etc.;

of the genitive.
e.

that precedes the terminations

rt

and

tf,

is

a euphonic

augment.
5.

Abl.

6,

Gen. b,

(5^d)o,

etc.
7,

Loc.

^)

in

1,

Nora,

the

<

a^

5
,

modern
ero, i.
ej3;

</.

the terminations of the instrumental.

^^,

^J

be referred also to *?*, 3)*,

'a^O,
oo

<?

g- rt?rf:3J8V

the crude base,

120, letter

6).

e.

$r.

es^o, 'as^j, oijsa^o, 22J^j;

?5^, w,

w, the

crude

eiA, tfwrfo,,
dttftix,
rf?it4),:
m ^' agjBcifSo,,
t
"t.
v
<.

etc. (see

ff

dialect

e.

aSra^;

Ace. e^j,

2,

e.
J

may

a^JSv

etc.),

t.

base,

tfrt

e.

g.

y^rfo:
wa^iii.
aou,
'g^^rfo,;
m
t
o^
*<

yuaci,

^sej,

to

to

impossible to decide whether ;%, y^d. etc., also in this case, are formed
from ao^w, enrado, etc. or from SoO J , CAWO^, etc. (see ij 120, letter c).
It is

3,

Instr.

"atf, -a^fi, e. ^.

may come from

doCrf; ^

sS-xyo or

^;3^.

Dat.

4,

4); agrfrt.

370,

(sec

Abl.

5,

s^,
Q

'aarf
\

"

Gen. w,

e.

^f^
rf, ^0

or

3.xOrf
Cv

Co

yxuoarf

&

come from

odrf
ijrf?S,
P

iorf,

rf,

^^

come from

this case,

in

c&orf, ajajorf, suOrf,

from

etc. or

^^i'

etc.

Loc. Zo^ri,

7,

or

#. s^ra, 5*0, tfw, 53^, asau, jfcedtf,

rf,

may, also

etc.

3eitf

also in this case,

r*

^^,1

().

eaaOrf

r/.
<7

Q*

e.

^d

'art, e.

qacrt, wstfrt; wrt; ^<Drt, uoo^rt, rirt, riert, export,

30:0^ may,

erusOi^,

G,

-a^JL

".s^,

57

J,

etc.

^^,

may,

'arfS

aO, O,

^FJ^,

e.

#.

also in this case, be referred to bases with final

consonants.
In

the

^C

or

has been mutilated

The case-terminations

122.

130, letter

(c/.

neuter bases, (of the masculine bases

rtrs ?oo.

rte^o,

3cor1^!o,

always ending-

the

of

in the

masculine-ferainine-neuter

euphonic yu

?3?0do, etc.

s^ and d>

in

tfJS^io)

127.

^^^ ^^i,

2-^^, 2-^^,1

the so-called

272,

2),

in

169), in erorWj

fcrfi, aojjdb

in the

125),

^J,

in WWJ,

212), in past participles

138,

remark

and

6),

d, 3)

&

t3J23do^, dradrf^, etc.

(euphonically doubled) and

&

and w3,

etc.

1,

o^caj^

^^

166. 168.

d, 3 ;

138,

in past participles

254,

(^

in

Rrfo,

193. 198. 199), in the

194), in a personal termination ($

243, A,

modern

adjectives,

we find again
They are pronominal forms;
w*JF (
135. 270. 272 under 2), in )<&,,

123, a; 272),

^,

e3d?do,

and modern dialect

in

formation of the pronouns 33

and

in

(which are classed with

base-terminations.

bases

102, 8,
273. 276) the grammarian Ivosava teaches only that they are their

b. c.;

(Jjjj

^^jo

eA)?3o,
o

Concerning the terminations ^o,

S-e^cii,

feminine base

in the ancient, mediaeval

See etfo, -s^o,

o
o

96. 98).

(see

and trisyllabic

of the

ca'

ca

and

c).

for the singular of dissyllabic

265),

a and remark

represent the letters

3).

&,, n^, the

5*,

w.

primitive signs which point to an object in a general way, with a euphonic

When

the vowels w,

'9,

en)

(other forms of

^,

SAW,

in

($$ 106. 168. 169)

see $ 264)

an

&> (rfo, 'gdi, ero^o which are the

to

commonly used demonstrative neuter profor w^J)

the
direction
becomes
nouns)
distinct; 53^, ^^, (which are substitutes
are met with in combination with <o3 (of me), etc. as
a, 6; $

272,

-),

*>c3^->,

033^,

w^o, -q^, 'q^ (=l|dj) as personal terminations

etc.

(>;

<
(

1!I3),
-

58

combination with

in

erodo)

Compare

173).

Regarding the neuter plural of

as <o3oo&3.), etc.

etc.

(of us),

as a participial termination,

also

(272,2,

124,

es*.

-d-a'do, etc., wrfj, etc.

2*<?,3o, etc.,

and

265.

136.

see

The case-terminations are

rt)

in the ancient dialect

1.

Nom.

the crude base,

e.

P/O,

wrfd),

2do

appears also as

e.

g.

2-^,

FsaQdo,

^cs^, ^pra^, ^JSTOJ, 333^,

^raorto,

a sasana between

(in

ktfrto,

^tfrto,

d>?rio,

594 and 608 A.

D.-,

cf.

117, letter a).

Ace.

2,
t??)^o,

S5o,

and

in

e.

one of 750 A.

The

ts

2-^,, #-03^o, sado,

<?.

2orf o,
CO

680 and 696 A.

a sasana between

(in

Wo,

(S5),

&sdo w^irfo, ^es'do,

2*.^o,
V

FSDC^O,

^J3ao, rfdsio,

^d^o. eoj^o, do?wjdo; (3C^,

^o^jSoj;
^
"0
CO
D., in one of

somewhat

after

732 A.

D.,

D.).

33^ and ^esi^. We take cK>^ to be the

3
by Kesava (page 164) in ^o2r?sd 3ae3 o3)^
ever come to (my) mind to forget the southern

in parenthesis refers to

accusative in the sentence quoted

(Octf^o

3o?ta

2J3\>r;l}

it

(could

He, however, supposes that c33^ is the genitive used for the accusa^a)^ stands (according to a Mdb. Ms.) in the passage qnoted by Kesava

country?).
tive.

in

page 288:

or her or

its

tftira^ ^pa^OcS*

ancient accusative in

109,

Instr.

4,

Dat.

-So,

^0,

A
;

6,

<

^FS,

3?3,

"

S3&39 o,

e.

his

CQ

rt

e.

g-

e.g

doerid!,

The terminations are

tions

(*'.

a, 6.

3,

5,

yyrtoSAdo^ ^jes^rf^ (they scratched the

and clawed the hair-knot).

Cf. the note under the
117, and see
352, i, b.
Regarding the lengthening cf.

or their) navel

and

and ^;

^es^ are

euphonical augments.

Abl.
of the

e^rf^r.

o,

the termina

instrumental, e.g.

Gen. w,
,

e.

'S.f

20030

<-

rf,

dartre,

ade,

rgdes,

w^jdes,

s,

?59e>a,

59

genitive;

tho euphonic
in wra
the

augments

&

'Qti

is

and

Loc.

7,

augment

'a&av*,

and W, the true termination of the

(-33*)

wra5

is

and

wo

in

109, letter a, and see

in $

c3*

'So

augment

'SNJStfo,

wo*.

is

Compare the

141, remark under Dative.

wCS5 ^^*, esCSO'-

e5C3-v*

-arfS,
CO

*aSJ3v*rt,

it

<53affltletfo (in a
#. sjJ^&av*, dja^(3j8^, 3jaa?3.e9*, CDA^JSV*, stores
sasana of 1123 A. D.); zorfctetfrt; 3DSrfC ^tfo^ewv* (j n a sasana between 680
1

e.

and 696 A.
6
,

<o

e^do'.a v*

'Sides* JSVT*,

D.);

Siesta V*; odexD

&)

in the mediaeval dialect

1,

Norn.
),

i.

wx>,

ewQ

^o,

wdo,

crude base,

the

e.

z^j,

i-"?^.),

Ace. e5o, y, the

2,

eiy.^o,

e.

e.

^^,

y. -o^,
z^rfo

-a-es'rfj,

crude base,

o?oo; wus'r, ^rf^,

ac3o,

.oddetav*

eafcosD.

<odd>,

^^o,

<j.

-S-ii, ?roe3js!,

^rfrfo,

^td, ^i,

5oi^,

ed,

'gd,

Instr.

3,

S5&5 r^,

),

6. //.

Dat.

4,

rfwart,

3ort

^, t^, the terminations of the dative, and the

In
^^o3o^, ^'^o3o^, Zotfo^oo^ the final letter rto
euphonic augments
of T?^r<o and 2-tfrto has been changed into o3->J^^, 55^ generally are mutilated

'g^ are

'S)!?,

and

*9o

forms of
for

we!tr

A)oe8,
,

5,
6,

^oO"#, do?o^,,

^Joorf^,

2o^|

letter

uoo^e^,

(see

20^^,
Q

^oorf^,
& V

03

a),

or

&o^,
w v

s3o<^r,

for

either stand
fcrf^r,

doorfrfr,

etc.

Abl.
('s^^r^io, etc.), the terminations of the instrumental.
Gen. w, 'atf, S3ra, ?3S5, e- ^7- ^^=3, 353^, ed* ^oetwd; t,^?J, LQrf, i6
^OQci,
,

rfo^re,

e3*de3,

The Basavapurana,
Loc.

wdArf,

23*0rf,

z-^rira,
es,

7,

r^,

*%.

So?ooOrf;

sojsescs;

defines,

^tfrtre,

Soo^cs,

wde, w^es,

zSWj^es.

exceptionally, has oo^red;

-ajSjav*, -acSJa^o,

^o?r<c8,

ca^jatfrt,

a^,

see

^123,

letter

c, 4. 5. 6.

-arf,

8*

rf,

Sorfre,

60

c)

in the

modern

1,

Nom.

ero, i- e.

2,

Ace.

dialect

the crude

3^J,

ss^j,

5?$,

adrfo,

base, e.g.

23^,
the crude base, e.g.

5S3?j4,

w,

3,

5?^,

&,,

cgdrfo,

=1

About

the

Instr.

3,

see

etc.

e3c&,

attached to the

is

^,

ridri,

6, c

117,

<.

6, c.

In the vulgar

O f the genitive.

<

Abl.

6,

Gen. y,

^jses'^;

a6or^A^,

comes from
5,

to

<

es,,

ar^,

rira&ri,

a S^o

So?

a'

<a
r

Dat.

109, letters

^.

-arf

6.

4,

e.

^d^, 5^ =,

and z-tf?

T?tfrto,

the terminations

of

(for ^s?oij^)

the

from ^s?no (see letter

instrumental,

6).

e.g.

a o
):

rtC^

rf,

r
,

a^,

S5rc,

<9^,

^JSArf.-^^O*J ?S, ioArf,

ssC5,

e.

5r3A3,

z3-3-,^,

^J3Si 9 rf,

E3s>Arf,

^^A^,

aj^Aci,

35J?

ra,

tf

is

7,

another form of

Loc.

(S3),
/
\

50,
co

'

ra.

^?J3^^,

'Sri,
'3,
ro'
;

Eight neuter nominal hases with

123.

digvacaka, digvaci), which,

partly also in the

euphonic

of

modern

1,

Norn.

I,

Dat.

i.e. the

5fl

Abl. erso,

e. #.
/

i>

Gen.

jrs,

The simple
272 under No.

^
2).

crude base,

(words denoting direction.

mediaeval dialect, and

I'iz.

^,

'9^,,

A^,

in

final

126).

<o

W^E?
-

esr^^o,
o

oS'rfo, SJ^rfE^O,

6,

final e>

the ancient and

one, are declined like some hases with the

in the ancient dialect

5,

in

(Their lengthened form appears

122.

e/x>

a)

5,

eroirfO,

3r??2

jrsa do,

e. g.

dOJS^^O; dOJS^rs^ do.

5?*,

e.

jj^os
^. w^ra, 'S^cs, Jo^ra,

appears

in o^rao., that

stands for the

full

form o^rerfo (see

61
tho mediaeval dialect

l>)

in

1,

Norn.

4,

Dat.

5,

Abl.

6,

Gen. ees, wtf,

c)

in the

1,

Nom.

4,

Dat.

5,

the crude basei

e.

modern
i. e.

s,

dialect

the crude base,

3r3=# or S3rs 3\, T? or

become a part of the base, which

109).

final

&

So^fsrf

122 under

in

io*re;

udrttf or

zJdrttf,.

has received an o, and as wre has

declined like a neuter base with final

is

is

treated as a neuter

for

*o3d^; d^rfrea^: wsrf, -a*^.

has been formed like that of io^re of the

*arf, e.^.

^J-CCars

and has been declined

The bases

^^

'9^,-

So^retf or

Abl.

dative,

w^,

y.

e.g.

wdrt
wdrt^ no augment appears, and

<sr^,
O
O wrsa^,
For SJJa^rsOrfCD the base
5,

e.

=3*

^o^rs^ the augment

In w^rt^,

urfrtrc, 3-xacte;

o^re, 3o*re, zWjsto,

/. 'aai.re,

In ^o^ra#,

(tj

>*,.

e.

T7

base with

*, *a*,

a. //.

letter

like

109);

cf.

the

b.

a^rf seem to be

w^,

&

a neuter base ending in

3o,

^^o

(i,

'a*,

with final ew,

<

-J-Ji.

Gen. yrs, sirad, e. g. 3o5='re, rfciodcs, S-xoc^cs.

6,
Regarding ^rad see the ablative and locative.
Loc. ssreco

7,

The bases are

final

e. q.
*

es
PO'

Sj^oare

and

Remarks

$ 122 and 123.

on

es3<

*j'

(*b,

is

the

3,

in

eJi)

srf^o
_a

e.

(oo^oi,
_; N-aew;

g. fccfc^ oci^j,

wkb one
tf

as!^, -a^o, osl^; (the

of ^siOj;

w^J

ono of w^o^j, the

finals

^ft^J,

wa

probably another form

having taken the form of

is

so-called adjectives i^uiiavacana), their finals *).

pronominal forms, and

draddj,
(modern)
x
*A

tho

pronoun

^d),

e. g.

z-*^

^^i

^,

do being

*'do,

tJAdOi

^ff,dj;
xlredj,
Pfl
w

verbal bases
e.

122),

&, ^S;^,

e. g.

having become short);

in the

in

that

3JJ8S3J,

pronouns (sarvanama), e. g. wdJ, 'ad), erjdo,

terms denoting quantity (pramanavaei, pavan), their

kk and the

SSR* of

and

125 and

^rfo, a?oJ, weJo, ^6i), aii),

pronouns,

in

136).

being pronominal forms (see

of t$s>3o;

vt?

pronoun ^3*

used

JM^.^O,
v) -'
in

5,

that are declined like neuter bases with

employment of the augments

numerals (saukhye),

in

2,

4,

urfricic

(See also the declension of the

of the plural of ^d>, etc. in

orao.,

zo^rt,

109).

124.

1,

sJc&sredS

g. SJafidjdo,

(krit),

their

^Sdodo,

end-syllables

srodj

Or

do

being neuter

62
the term sfowod),

in

6,

it

The Sabdanusasana under

being composed of sS-XO* and the neuter pronoun

269

sutra

its

^ (^^,)'

states that

which

is

one

words which express indefinite quantity ( 90), exceptionally receives

the augment
in the neuter forms <osJ,es o, o^f, <oe^e3, .osuefov*.
The dative
of the

^,^ appears in the Sabdamanidarpana, and ^^, "^^ in the mediaeval and
modern dialect, in which forms the repha has disappeared. See the neuter
-ow in
plural of
is

in

136,

119

epicene plural in

its

266.

cf.

used

nominal bases denoting direction (digvaeaka, digvaei), e.g.

^, ^^, 3o^, 2Ji3ri.
Compare the terms rf&>, &d, ^<3,

w,

in

139.

262. 269.
Declension of the interrogative pronoun b^s6 (>o, cf.
the
This
attached
to
is
not
>o or
augment being S5&3*'.
directly
301),
125.

its

crude form, but to

literally

'

meaning

in the ancient dialect

1,

Nom.

2,

Ace.

3,

Instr.

4,

Dat.

the crude base,

eso,

e5s
T7

a^^

e.

/'.

S5^, 3,

/. e.

&o; a.

e.

&3o; &

I. e.

^^^i";

a^f;

and modern

^^;

a*

compare the mutilated forms of the dative

122 and in this paragraph. Such

dialect in

&$

forms, therefore, must have existed in ancient times.

In

has been suffixed directly

^$

5,

Abl.

es&^J^o,

6,

Gen.

e3,

7,

Loc.

to a.

See also

124

^<^

the termination
for

i.e.

*. e.

&3 3 J3^,

the mediaeval dialect

b)

in

1,

Nom.

arfo is

122),

&3&o.

a mutilated form of

is

of the mediaeval

i.

the crude base,

e5S5 o,

'.

a)

o,

and the pronominal form 3o

i. e.

Si^o,

what-it

o,

ao

(3o,

the crude base,

and the euphonic

(*>5S*)

i. e.

ew.

crf33

2,

Ace.

3,

Instr.

4,

Dat.

W5\

5,

Abl.

(wSS^rso), the termination

6,

Gen.

*. e. a^es, oijs^es.

7,

LOC.

wo,

55,

W3
*

ejfid,

o,

the crude base,

is

another form of & (see

/. e.

i. e.

S5=^ '

"#

i. e.

Se^r or

^^, cxbs^i? or
of the instrumental.

wc5 3 J3v*, we^js^o, we^jsVri, 55550

41).

63
in

c)

the modern dialect

1,

Nom.

2,

Ace.

the crude base,

?1),

jgo,

S3?l>,
9

3,

Instr.

4,

Dat-

f>,

Abl. s$e3 9 rf, i.e.

it

e.

o&s^

or

e.

53, (w3j,

Loc. aesSjatffl,

126.

i.

oto^o^.
^. e.

=,

7,

e.g.

Concerning the eight nominal bases with final $3 mentioned in

is to be stated that in the nominative, accusative, and locative

may

they

*. e.

SS"#,

Gen. W&3,

6,

123

S3S3 ?*,
3^.,

o&; oka

i. e.

y, the crude base,

receive the termination

3g or

or

$353*

e3^j;

3^x>

appears also

in the ablative of the mediaeval dialect, arid es^>o in the ablative, genitive.

and locative of the modern one.

is

The declension

of the

lengthened bases

the following.
a)

in the ancient dialect

Nom. the crude

sasana of 1123 A. D.).
whether

e.

&>$&& may

g.

(see the genitive with

^o

For w^o*,

y.

dJ-^^,

& means 'place' (see

In this case the

arises

sro, e.

base,

1,

in

yu^er,

^^o

Sri-J^o6

o^o*;

109, letter a, Locative).

The question

not be s3^e^, the genitive of sk-edj, the east

o r , i. e. the place of the east.

120. 122), and
however, no base ending in SAJ has as yet been
,

^^

established; but see the curious modern ablative ^t,^,

Ace. the crude base, e. </. 3oja;3o*, rfc^sy', o^ej*.
2,

in

Here we have an accusative represented by the crude base;

123, letter

cf.

c.

the ancient

120. 125. 127.

accusative in
7,

jjrfrtoo (in

Loc. the crude base, e.g. 3>Jdd&, zfcfrao*, w^o*.

In this case

&&

means

'

in the place'.

been suffixed to the genitive of

base ending

in en) for

a^o*,

etc.

3&Q&

and

is still to

It

in

1,

Nom. the crude

5,

Abl.

7,

Loc. the crude base,

c)

in the

'So,

e.

^J^;

1,

Nom.

5,

Abl.

('.,

Gen. y,

7,

Loc.

ero,

^^,
Q'
e.

^.

sru, e.

g. 3-i.edo*;

dialect

the crude base, e.g.

/. e.

c.

g. :&J3do

es^eDo.

().

modern

sro, e.

base,

J(i.

&3C3,
o

sorirtu,

e5O, e.g.

ng^crf.
-*

a^w.

not impossible that

^o* has

but, as remarked above, a

bo established.

the mediaeval dialect

b)

is

64
Declension of four nominal bases always ending in the euphonic eru

127.

122)

(see
A)?>o,
O

cO?i),
O

that express time (kalavacaka, kalavaci), viz. ?3^j, 'ajl),

the nominative, accusative, and locative of which have the

same form, though the

locative

receive also the terminations

may

(6y. the declension of

etc. in

e>s?,

139.)

in the ancient dialect

Nom. the crude

/. e.

base,

Ace. the crude base,

Instr.

e. tf.
**

-so,

Dat.

-aori,

Abl.

^3_ r^o

Gen.

e-

g.

e.

^3,

<7-

Loc. the crude

CO

w^
^

Nom. the crude

1,

oa?3j?<?

base,

^^

instance for

<?.

wrfo,

^.

^rfJ,

wrfo,

orfo;

has not been found by the author.

Ace. the crude base,

3,

Instr.

4,

Dat.

'actf,

5,

Abl.

'a^o, -a^|,

6,

Gen.

^,

7,

Loc. the crude base,

i. e.

the terminations of the ablative.

'arl,

i. e.

the modern

e. .9

art,

e^rf,

nsi^
-i.

e.

dialect

c)

in

1,

Nom. the crude

2,

Ace. the crude base,

3,

Instr. the

base,

/. e.
*.

55^,

e.

termination of the ablative.

4,

Dat.

*art, i. e.

5,

Abl.

v^,e.g.v^,^t>l.
^, ^^.

e^rt, ^^ri, J^rt.

Gen. -a^, e.g.

Loc. the crude base,

6,

7,

^$D,

The case-terminations for

128.
radical

atfg,

base, i.e.

2,

(see

^N.

a^rf,

in the mediaeval dialect

6)

An

^,
wrfo,

^,
e.

*. e.

final

e/u

(see

97),

e.

g.

the

whether

&,
singular

of

masculine,

nominal bases with a

feminine,

or

neuter

139 regarding ^do)-

They can easily

their final SAD
as
and
127,
121, 122,

The bases comprise Kannada and

he distinguished from those in

Saiiiskrita words.

never unites with a following vowel without the euphonic augment

being inserted.

For instance, we say ^scsso^J^O

(c3e>cl)

65
but we cannot say, as every intelligent teaci.
sjocSejO&j^j, but must say =g\)do;3e>oaj& (tfjck-o*,

knows,

^oosoSj^j,

See
215, 3, d.
woSo^o), rfozliSTOOaj^j (3oc&-;3*-o2>j3j).
The case-terminations are suffixed by means of a euphonic
in

53*,

except

one form of the dative.

the ancient dialect

a)

in

1,

Norn.

2,

Ace. e$o,

3,

Instr. 'ao,

4,

Dat. rt,

5,

Abl.

i. e.

/o,

e.

arf o,
o

'ajjo,

'SicF^,

e.

erook,

<o

-u, stoo, 3roi,

(^odo.a^.ao), steoso (Jicso-a^.wo)

5%)d>3o

rtoOJi)?)0,

OC&SSO,

mental,

</.

&,

the crude base, e.g.

'a^o

^^?io,
o

rtodJSo

e.

dJ^OilSO;

g- ^^Jr5, ci^rt,

^c^ort; ;i>cl)ort,

'a^^rSo, 'stf^riirfc, a?i^.cli^, the terminations

of the instru-

e.

6,

g. 9^b>ii^i4o.
Gen. y, y, ^^,e.g.

7,

Loc.

6)

in

M*

(550),
V
fv^
'

the mediaeval dialect

Nom.

1,

i.e.

ero

Ace.

the

crude base, vu,

113, and

otdo^) (see
2,

SocfciS,

e.

eso, (S5?l>), ?5,

e.

130, letter

cf.
(7.

tsrfjso,

#.
A).

2rew3o,

2J03, ^OJiJ 3,
Q

Instr.

3,

ao, ^^o,

e.

g.

"

4,

Dat.

5,

Abl.

6,

Gen.

rt,

^7^, CSLO^),

cs.f^do,
(es),

etc.),

e.

the terminations of the instrumnntal.

Qtf, e.g

SN.

7,

Loc.

C)

in the

modern

1,

Nom.

enj

2,

Ace.

los^

/. e.

e,

?5,

dialect

the crude base, yu (see

*a^,

-arf,

113),

the crude base,

e.

g.

c. //.

The strange forms rtoctoarf, rtodoi)?^ are given in hia 'Outlines of K

Grammar', page 17, by Venkat Rango K.uii. lv;ui;u\-sr Translator, K
Bombay, 1886.

66
Forms
in

modem

of the

which the

dialect like

final

rioJJsA^sS^

wrongly treated as

is

and a&JA^rf5^ (of

were radical, are modern

(of ?jorf^)
if it

licenses in literature.
3,

Instr.

4,

Dat.

5,

Abl.

<ad,
O

arf,
CD
e.

fart,

^N,
O
O aa,e..9
(

6,

Gen. y, -a^,

7,

Loc.

39
co'

e.

in

riodoa^, adrfj^rf; rtod>aa;|,

e. (7<<o'

in the

Nom. the crude

2,

Ace.

ak,

sd/9,

128, e.g.

&>,

and

^JP,

3o

ancient dialect

S5o

-ao,

&^, #>.

base, e.g. 43,

o^So, (L^.So. ^J3?so, n^^io.

e. ^.

Sabdamanidarpana
Instr.

in en/a,

singular are declined like those in

the

1,

3,

g.

'S.rS

a)

In

There are some nominal bases ending

129.

which

e.

g. wrfo^rt, ^oo^tf, riodo&ri,

67 there

p.

'S^o,

'SuS,

si/sS^o or the crude base.

is

'aJio,

e.

o.

3&z>, b%Lao

Cf. letter

c.

QJ

4,

Dat.

5,

Abl.

6,

Gen.

7,

Loc.

6)

in the

1,

Nom. the crude

2,

Ace.

6,

Gen.

c)

in the

1,

Nom. the crude

2,

Ace.

S3rfo,,

4,

Dat.

'art,

e.

#.

G,

Gen.

^^,

e.

g.

130.

"aort, e.

rt,

'a^c^o,
'a^,

55,

.9'

e.g.
e.

^S *
1

mediaeval dialect
base, ero>

e.

#.

e.

?5o,
'arf,

e.

modern

dialect
base, vo,

e.

g.

ao-o,

r^-Q?;

3oJ3^),

the crude base, e.g.

The case-terminations

neuter bases ending

in 'a, -g

for the singular of

and

o.

masculine, feminine and

(Regarding some exceptions see

139.)

The terminations are

in

suffixed

the dative (cf. the o* in

s
by means of a euphonic o& except

109, a,

6).

67
the ancient dialect

a)

in

1,

Nom.

2,

Ace.

OiiO, dOZaOJJO,

3s,

'3,

(the crude base),

?5o,

OODSOJJO, ^djrfoiiO;

The crude base

See

e.

3&oijo,

g.

na*oi)o,

^?S,

aj,

e.#. -frSoDJo, 33^^0030,

e^7rae3o5oo:
T
sasana of 929 A. D.;

5,

Abl.

e.g. *art,

rf,

^o,

dorfrt, ^art,

23rH,

A.,

e.

140;

1,

see

introduction p. 2).

rf^Srt, ^drt, doc'rt,

s?

g.

S5^r^^o, w^r^^,
d^oio^r^o; ^o'oij^rfrfo
_ao

sirtaJi^ r3c,
_

ifes'oij^ rso,
_o

A*

ZJ^OSOo,

Bbarata

Pampa

^S'ripatunga's Kavirajaraarga, edited by K. B. Pathak, B.

Dat.

nsaoJoo, stoojoo,

?OJJO; 30(3oJJO, tf?3oi>0, *tfoi)0, ^tfoii

^ewrtoSoo.
(in

4,

roa, *a,

2.

^o,

-So,

ricSoOoo,

Ai

3)O, tfda,

seen, e.g. in the following instance of Kesava:

is

120, a,

Instr.

3,

the crude base, e.g.

i.e.

},

j^-s

Gen. w, y, e. 7. naflcxJj. fWoi), ^^jcii, d^^oio, ^artoio,

ajdj6oio, W(3oij, ^^oij, w^oio; ^Cofcu, -S-oaiobD, fSt^oiss, nortobs.
6,

109, a,

about the lengthening.

Loc.

7,
(in

6,

See under

ero

Vs

kv*,

a sasana of 707 A.

D.),

&sk, 2^r^, wo*,

OTdra^obj** (in a sasana of 866 A. D.);

(both in a sasana of

1076 A.

tfQ^oletfj (in a sasana of

D.),

1123

A. D.); en>Qo3J3tfrt, SJ^ol&tfrt; oa^oko5 (in a sasana of 1 186 A. D.) ;

(in a sasana of 1076 A. D.), aSu^ofceH (in a sasana of 1123 A. D.),
(in one of 1182 A. D.)-, wixrfoO, To^olxD.
mediaeval dialect

in the

&)

1,~

Nom.

^?0; &

31)050,

*a,

3,

dO?S

The augment
a help

(^, i. e.

that of

u, like

enunciation, and

to

128 and

129

it

2,

Ace.

3,

Instr. 'So,

is

128 and

S5,

129,

ij

e.g.

ZjJ-S^oioo,

(213

.,

Tvj_i>

4,

Dat.

5,

Abl.

e. *
a.

ri,

Gen.

o,

-aS,

e. g.

55,

etc.j,
odosoti.

arf

rf^rt, saoaort,

(y^r^o,

^oOoiorfd;
a

6,

'S

>

113), e.g.

is in

reality not

euphonic or
Like that of

seq.).

?toioJoo,
j,

ero (see

Sie3oJOJ.

so to say, a superfluous addition.

disappears in sandhi

Wfk,

?5o,

the crude base, the augment

SQoiiO, W^OJOO, To^OJOO,

f.
,

rte?,oio.

,
1

sojaSrrt,

the

jj

^.
-*

"cjj-^rt,

'a.ri s^;,

es^oioo;

^rt,

wtfrt, ?Joirt,

terminations

of

the

instrumental,

P. a.
,7

&&_ oi),

^oAoij, wsol), ^o^oi^, ^~

osj,

wrfoi.\ *3o3o.
9*

68
LOC. &oS*,

7,

^oSja?

S3A),

to^tf,

&otfo,

16

S5

$dr3o5,tfo

?3;3ao3.tfo,

OO,

te d&otfrt, s^ototfrt,

modern

C)

in the

1,

Nom. ^,

dialect

the crude base, the augment

Q^, ,0, i. e.

ero (see

113), e.g.

u'

33-3-

Ace. y^j,

2,

e^,

BDO^^O,

base, e.g.

lengthening of the

5?5,

5,

oJoo.

^=ia,

*-

^o with a final

wrf is

The forms

etc.

Instr.

4,

Dat.

5,

Abl. ^fi,

6,

A
=

eoij,

'arf
I

e.

<7.

Q'^/

and

a;^,

?3oA?, etc.,

3,

final

3oAerf, a^srf,
etc.,

riorio,
o

etc.

stand for ^oAoii,

7,

^Q^oio,

etc.,

etc.

33 sort,
^. Soo^ri, ^or^,

tf, e.

etc.,

w3,

s3ooso5o?i. rfoQoaorf, ^?5

C5

e.

^.

Loc.

crude

stand for

Gen. j, y, lengthening of the final vowel,

oix
^J3?Ae
^fS oi), ^JS^cdi, w^oJo, -^oix
dojj, ^J3?Ae3oJ^;
a

33C&,

the

vowel,

eStooijrfo, ttiQoiicfo,

^4,
00

etc.

^rt,

0033. ??,

stand for ssofooi),

*5g,

g.

S3QoJJ3:

eJ

tfj3,

?,

etc.
^^ojj,
<Z

etc.,

S5, ^s, ^0,

:; ay oio,

e.

uiS.oija,

e.g. ^ps

etc. are

etc.

S^O,

etc.,

131.

The case-terminations

are given in

Here follow

the

consonants

ancient dialect,
ero

121,

(c/".

($ 120),
is

final

^oJ^C,

etc.,

lc=3*',

in

and

of the plural of neuter bases with final

in

and feminine

of masculine

119.
neuter

bases, (the

and the masculine-neuter base e*vM ending

the

euphonieally

that in each dialect

etc.;

letter c).

case-terminations for the plural of

feminine bases 3s)0&*,

vowel

etc.

118, and those of the plural

(and epicene) bases with

in

stand for W3Soi>,

corrupted forms of ^eOoi>>,

is

vowel

eru

suffixed

that,

occasionally

($121),

always suffixed

and
122),

in

also in

the

the

euphonical

and further those

for the plural of

vowel vo

masculine, feminine and neuter bases endin* in the radical

128), in

69

si>,

srua,

and

to

8&fi>,

2J

129),

and

in

-a

and

132
130), the case-terminations nowhere indicating the gender (see
wherein the gender, to some extent, appears from the terminations of
(

the plural).

The case-terminations are

a)

in the ancient dialect

1,

Norn.

rV,

***, rt*>, e.g.

tov* arexiocsv*

(i

rtodorJ^o.

2,

Ace.

3,

Instr.

4,

Dat.

The

in

ero

Abl.

5,

mental,

e.

(stfo, a?S,

e.

e^rt, e..^. yvariF^;

wrt

is

^.

*an; ^5^0^ (in

a sasana of 1187 A.D.).

merely euphonic.

(e^cSo, w^c^fio, W^cS^), the terminations

7,

Loc.

LoV* '

e. ^r.

Cw
V

s'retf,

rlodorts^,

^oiwrt's'; sgprttf;

e. a.

in the mediaeval dialect

1,

Nora.

^ooi)^, ^ocSo^"!?;

fr,/'

6)

rttfo,

e.

rteSnv*:

sa

rt<s*,

the instru-

3 oaoio<#.ri?^.
v
a

a. ^-EKcaSo;
53,

of

1:7

6,

D.);

a sasana of 1182 A. D.).

wajOorttfo (both in

-so,

Gen. y,

1187 A.

e.g. sautfo, enjsrir^

$o,

ri,

n a sasana of

^.

so

In

^TJo^rttfo the termination

the nominative singular (see

2,

Ace. e3o, erfo,

3,

Instr.

^o,

S5,

rttfj

has been appended to the euphonic ^J of

128, letter
e.

^7.

'atfo, "aS,, -arf,

,

b).

^s

a, e.^r. ^,sr,*o, ?iodr(oi

a
For the
4,

Dat.

in JJjsoSoris? see
rt,

'art,

e.

#.

109, letters 6 and

c.

70
5,

Abl.

(ea^c&o,

terminations

the

etc.j,

of

the

e.

instrumental,

g.

0o.
6,

Gen. s,

7,

Loc. &,$*,

^tfri,

(&>b),

raoJMto
c)

modern

dialect

1,

Norn,

rttfo, e.

g. ^rsorteO,

.o^rttfo,

^jsjforftfo,

e-

eO,

sfoitfaritfo,

=325orftf;

0.

do^rftfe, 3?s?ritf,

;3o3ritfe, aocSrftfC,

in the

sora^ri^o,

rf^rttfO,

ssej^rt^o,

ao?odori^o,

nodori^o, S^rts^o, aorfort^o; sgp^rttfo,

jjja&irttfo;

33cOJrts#o,

Another plural

W2.

tJdrioritf, <o^> * rttf, Soo^oritf;

zfctforttf,
^sejtf;
*
rt

e. a.
t/

s5JiciJ,

to the

singular, e.g.

is

formed by adding the plural of the pronouns

nominative plural, e.g.

^33raoJJddo.

2,

Ace.

3,

Instr.

4,

Dat. ^ft,

S5?5o

e,

e.

e.

g.

^g

dotfritf^cio, |,?rl^rido, or to

119,

#.

riodon^,

^3^Ayortf ^;

e.g.

^JSToortsrt,

o^rtsfrt,

5,

Abl. the termination of the instrumental.

6,

Gen. w.
^^"

7,

Loc.

e.

a.

ti7

23?dort^;
^wort^,
PO

As has been remarked

132.

or

the nominative

c, i.

'a^,

ss^ort^rt;

z3?rirt^;
rfodontf,
*CT

?rJS7oort^,

rtodort^rt,

131 there are such plural case-

in

terminations for nominal bases as indicate their gender, but only to

a certain extent; for these terminations are of an epicene character (c/.

102, 4), and besides in poetical diction are appended even to neuter
(C/. the

objects.

terminations in

The terminations
o,

,0,

(o&,

that are

118. 119. 134.)

affixed

to

bases ending

in

3%

(v,

e.

g. in

e
in ssois*), (<3*, e.g. in 3oofto ), are the following:

the ancient dialect

a)

in

1,

Nom. wo*,

rt$o,

sao*,

30o s f^rs? 4
,

w^r^o*, So*,

s
.

^.

^(|oi)o

C^O

(of
6

*
CD

The o& f

in

of rtv* and 'SO*,

*V

and

and

etc. is

and

In Qo*

rts*.

2,

Ace. wo,

3,

Instr. -ao, fa^o,' 'SifS), e.

'V

4,

Dat.

e.

tf-

Gen. w,

7,

Loc.

6)

in the

1,

Nom.

e.

^ toJortr

119,

c*

and so* the c* an d a* are euphonic

Or

A
-e^

;oi)rt r,
/-\

ca^_6 oi>rtr O r

^3f?
_A

as to the doubling.

a,

the terminations of the instrumental).

etc.,

(y^jio,

6,

Of

JJ^FV* o f so*

Q/'

e. *7
a.

See

or ^^OJJI^F.
Abl.
5,

*FO*

'ao*,

g.

rl

SOo* of ^o* and

OS^FV* O f So* an d *v*,

tio*,

)rtrv* O f so*

and ***,

rt0* consists

euphonic or a help to enunciation.

>0o* of wo* and 'SO*, atfrs* O f JO* and ^v*,

^^o3jo

#. 3;|o3oo.

S3).

(ioV*,

mediaeval dialect

cxJoo*,

The wo*

stands for e^oiid).

TarniJ. (by

in

BkwrfoKJdSO* has been adopted from

the-Basavapurana).

6,

Gen.

7,

Loc.

c)

in the

1,

Nora, ydj,

5,

e.

#. 7oJ8^oi)d.
Zotfo,

(&v*),

modern

e.g.

(S3),

dialect

oSd),

e.

~
stand for 5-3ft^ oi)dj
a

Let

133.

pluralised in

kind

(jati),

it

be remarked here that many declinable bases are optionally

Kannada,

1,

neuters expressing the idea of genus, species or

as

neuters of numerical character (saiikhyeya, sankhyaiiavastu), as

2,

oi-wrt;

3,

numerals (sankhye,

and

sUew;

5^,
sankhyuna), as c53^,
See
354, I.
z3tfj_, ^5d)F.

4.

abstract neuters (bhava), as ^Jas^r,

The case-terminations

134.

in the ancient dialect

estfj,

V*),

and

in the

120, 121,

ends

modern

of the plural of feminines of

in

estf*,

dialect in

in

the mediaeval dialect in esv* or

^tfj.

and regarding the plural of

a)

in the ancient dialect

1,

Norn.

>o*, (and

'SlS^O* (of t)3V*),

with the elision of

STO^O*

(of WU3V*),

which the singular

(Regarding their singular see

their masculine has^s. ^ 110.)

"*)

y^

^0%

0*,

^V*,
33i?0 J
,

<?

^ij

(of e;3

'Sdo*

av),

(of

'SiSioiiO* (of

eroau*

(of 'Siat*),
atooj.jo*

^aoJJV*),

wo* stands

w3os

for

72

Of

A)S*>, wo*

Of

O f ^Oojje*);

se e
(

135).

^o^v* ( O f
The case-terminations

the oblique

for

cases are identical with those of the plural of the masculine bases.

the mediaeval dialect

b)

in

1,

Nom.

230s

c)

in the

modern

1,

Nom.

?$dj

6. (/

S33O*, -cjojw,

cowi- u",

(Xujru",

au"

wjuj,

GJJUJ)

).

dialect

e.

3c!o,

93dj, ^ado,

g.

2^20 do,

oiasdo.

In the preceding paragraph we have met with the forms

and o&e>dj as the nominative plural of feminines with final
and ?5^o. It is to be added here that the same forms of the plural are
135.

also those of the masculine interrogative pronouns

final

ss

o&>^?^,

in the ancient dialect

Nom. wo*

a contraction of wSo* (see

wdo.

wo*

is

2,

Ace.

4,

Dat. wrir.

6,

Gen. wd,

wo 5

wo* occurs only

265).

in

W^JF

for

wd^J or wddo, of whom

whose

it?

(is)

it?

270).
b)

in the mediaeval dialect

1,

Nom.

wo*.

2,

Ace.

4,

Dat.

6,

Gen. wd.

c)

in the

modern

1,

Nom.

(wdo),

2,

Ace.

4,

Dat. ofcaort, naOrt.

6,

Gen. oi^d, asd.

136.
o5S3^o,

dialect

o33adj,

csudo.

od33dt^, oadcfo:

The

plural

ojejdj

(S
v

of

the

102,

s,

oisnd,

neuter
b.

c),

pronouns
oi3?)rfdj,

pronominal hases (so-called adjectives,

So

(wdrfo),

masculine bases with

270.

Cf.

117).

1,

?do,

their singular being declined like that of

ne>;5^o,

(c/.

116.

122.

276),

such as

102,

y^j,
cj^dulj,
8,

c)

xx^o,

and

erocSo,

of

with final

the
3o,

neuter

^ and

73
Regarding their singular see
their masculine and feminine or epicine,

<< 122. 124, and

regarding
119. 134).

;<

plural
a)

in the ancient dialect

1,

Norn.

In

iy

siisii,

4, ^3),

wsS^ w3>

enj^i,

attached to the base

is

in z-*,rfJ^, etc. (of

w43>, 353), *>3); z-^ck^, s3o0cta$, tfU^ii, ic,

^^,

W3

etc.) the

and

117),

eru^i is

in

joined to a

&*!,

JW,^)

6
euphonic a

to

(//.the

masculine bases z-*^, sSJ^c?, ^^, etc. in

117); in tSAoJJ^, etc. the pronominal
rfj
and
has
been
ts^)
(
(for ero^>) been suffixed to the original
122)
dropped

base

*,

6
by means of a euphonic 3&

etc.

Regarding the
2,

Ace.

3,

Instr.

4,

Djtt.

or to their genitive (see

compare the plural signs So* and

3o, qrfo, erodo,

(e^do,

rfia^o,

^do^o,

AoJ)do),

J^

3^e

S^

5,

Abl. (aa'es^rfo,

6,

Gen. wdes,

7,

Lo'c.

6)

in the mediaeval dialect

ifses'O).

'gaes, Sja^es,

wae#^9 J

<oy lia,

'gsesVav*

1,

Norn.

The

plurals 33i4, a-^dod), etc. have not been found by the author.

2,

Ace. wdo, gdo; ^e^doo, <oy

3,

Instr. (eaa'o).

4,

Dat.

3. or

3*,

^d

a.

or

Abl. (^se

5,
6,

276).

137. 193, remarks.

in

d)

^Gen.

7,

Loc. waesC; .o^aes^.

c)

in the

1,

Nora.

modern

dialect

In osSrt^o, etc. the

termination

rttfj

(see

it e.

</.

in

j}

131) has been added

to ^53, etc.

2,

Ace.

3,

Instr.

^^d

1,

Dat.

5,

Abl.

G,

Gen.

7,

Loc.

137.

(see

or

w^^,

W^.

or

Declension of the personal pronouns and of the reflexive

102,

pronoun

7, 8, a).

10

74
a)

in the ancient dialect

1,

Kom.

Singular.

o (3

also

(e*3"), (530,

FSSO (N3c3

330

($*);

used (Sabdanusasana

is

?>?o

533*)-

see the plural.

288;

The long vowel

of the crude form of the

above terms, as

be

will

seen,

as well as of the

in the oblique cases of the singular

itself as short

presents

wo

before vowels), viz.

some ancient poets

to

According
sutra

plural.

^o,

Ace. S5o, viz.

2,

The 3s

an augment-,

is

Instr.

3,

Dat.

4,

has been inserted

(^4'

5,
6,

Gen.

The

not doubling of the

?;^. <o^,

55 oo,

o)?

7,

',

^^,

Loc.

3ao;

16).

109, b and c).

aarfo. 3 ado?
oario,
^
g.

^CO

CO

see

*^U)

augment

and

ssl,

^^;

(<o^,

appears when

272,

17, a).

etc.).

s^, ^^); (^^,

etc.).

the pronouns

are added to the genitive, e.g.

<ojdoJ,
is

122)

(see

suffixed to

2).

oj^ v,

vte.

the letter

(o)

<o^c3o, s^^rfo, '^^rfo; (^f|^do.

122)

(^),

augment 5

^of(, etc. (c/. e. g, letter c

^^; <o^,

srf,

6.^. ^rf^ (see

Eo<

352,
e.

(rfrirt).

Exceptionally the pronominal form

<orf^, (rfrf^).
xs*,

stand for

etc., e. g.

SJ^rlio,

(substitutes for

aao,

JS.o,

3rfrt;

arir!,

<^^^, etc.

Abl.

ss,

euphonic (see

irregular, as after the euphonic

see

(^,

(rfc^o);
is

etc -).

o^,

viz.

The forms are

w.

'a??,
arfo,
A
1

ofl,

doubling

ao,

^i

^3, Hi-

a^o, g^o;

its

gSJ^v*;

Stio^v*,

N^).

(rfcSJ^v*,

Aural.
1,

Nom.

(^^ before vowels), ^, orty4

(?rao); ?3^ (j n a sasana of 1181 A.

330 (53rio);
A. D.); wortv

s?ortvff

ff
,

The change

of the sonne into

&

3,

Instr.

4,

Dat.

5o.

6
),

sxo

(p)^

ff

),

1123

^* and ^

(see also the mediaeval

JS,

193).

etc.

Cf.

and modern
136) and of

265.

viz. <o^Ap, ftdoo, ^^0,0;

cee*

'S.o,

ori,

D.),

(ySo

33^) (in a sftsana of

as a sign of the plural in

that of the plural of the personal terminations

Ace.

ws. ^o

33ort^.

forms) reminds one of the

2,

etc.,

e.

g. siO^o,

vie. oSjrt,

ftao^p,

ad^rt, irfort;

Regarding the form see the remark under the dative singular. In the
^^-3 is an abbreviation of

often-

used form of reduplication 33* 33ort the

5,

Abl.

6,

Gen.

The

not doubling of the

are added

etc., e.g.

(^^riic,
5,

viz.

<^^->,

to the genitive,

reduplication

$3$

^\

tne

<o^.rfo,

etc.);

^^i *>^, 33-i,

augment ^^ appears when

^^J,

e,

^^

<o3o3.),

g.
i8

codo^.

In

an abbreviation of

the pronouns
the

often-used

^^-> or

33\-

form

Cf.

of

250.

75
7,

Loc.

l>)

in

1,

Norn,

^v,

viz.

(S3$),

the mediaeval dialect

Singular.
o,

the crude

<tfo,

(a30), 3330;

rfo,

N,

33,

yo

"base, rie.

a<o

(WoJ*),

(StjJ*),

sac

33.

Ace. eso, W2. i^o, S^o, 3^0; .Ocio^o, arioso, 33^30.

2,
In (Oidi^o, etc. a euphonic
has been added to <o?^, etc. which has been
treated as if it were radical (see
128).

Instr.

4,

Dat. O ri, viz.

5,

Abl.

6,

Gen.

7,

Loc. k<$*,

1,

IS'om. (o or

2,

ACC. S3o. W2.

3,

Instr.

4,

Dat.
ff

etc.).

viz. Af^,

^c^.

ftj^,

(0),

^s^?^,

aos#j,

3o),

W0. (o,

sj,

e.g.

etc.);

&&

i30,0,
o (^SO^O), ftdOO,

(-so), -a^o, (-3^), e.g.

otf,

W2.

in <o3rt

^30

often-used

srf

<orfrt,

(W^r^o,
?5,

'S

si#o,

ao),

The s

and

3,

-OSJ^, <o^rt,

and

and

^stotf

rfzsor^,

225.
In the
an optional substitute for 30s see
^srl the ^3o and ^^ are abbreviations of

Srt is

^53

^J3rt.

5,

Abl.

6,

Gen.

7,

Loc.

c)

in

1,

Nom. ?^ the crude

2,

Ace.

(a^rSo,
5,

5f.

etc.).

^^;

-03
e.

(fcv*), 2^^o, etc.,

the

3,

Instr.

4,

Dat.

In

e.

modern

a^,
ort,

etc.

rfart,

5^0,,

S5fl),

g.

dialect

base,

W2.

?ra?fo,

W-3. cic^cdo,

55,

33^0; 53, a?,

ft?rfj,

S^rfo,

33.

rf^rf^,

^i^ci);

v*

'sri,

v2.

sort,

ftort.

euphonic ^

the

^ort;

of

)rfrt,

sSrfrt.

117, letter

c,

arfri,

^rfrt;

rfsrt,

^srt,

has been inserted.

<ojirt is

occasionally used in proverbs.

5,

Abl. the termination of the instrumental.

6,

Gen.

s!^ in

tf,

rfrfri,

viz. 33,
o

abbreviations of 33, $3,

7,

Loc.

&tffl,

Brf,

^^i

S?^ in

rfrf TO,

33

aS,

^,

33^,

ftiirt,

srf,?S,

272,

(see
>,

w'2.

^;

(rfcJ*,

an d ^5e

S3*, ^3).

in

^it>
***

(/. f.

^J^

^>) are

-2}.

^'^-

*3^

^e

fi^C

f:S,

10*

76

Plural.

<*i;
=<
.

1,

Norn.

2,

Ace.

viz.

^),

^La

330.

c530,,

3,

Instr.

4,

Dat.

For

srio ^^or^,

via.

-stf,

via.

otf,

which

is

often used, see under letter

5,

Abl. the termination of the instrumental.

6,

Gen.

viz. rfao, $3o, ^3J;

rf^o^o,

in rfS^rt,

rfso^,

SJ^

rf^<3,

?>^>,

in

^J3o

b.

&

$3oo 3, an(j ^30*

in

abbreviations of
7,

Loc.

As

138.

the

possible to trace the

is

it

almost

reflexive

origin of the personal

with

the

pronoun
certainty,
remarks on them may not be out of place.
a)

Forms

following

pronouns and
etymological

of their nominative singular in the five chief Dravida languages.

Kannada ^o

(?*3

5
),

3ao

Malayala
Tamij.

Tulu
Telugu

Kannada
SK;

Malyaja

Tamij. 8t;

Tulu *;

Telugu

S>?d),

Kannada 330
Malayala

-^^i.

(33?!*),

3srfo,

33;

3355*;

Tamij

Tulu

Telugu

a;

33^o, 33.

crude forms.

b)

Its

The

finals o, 3*,

ft?,

rfo,

^)

are not radical, as

is

learned from the forms

33; they are signs of the nominative singular.

Without them the bases are w,

the interrogative O

in

265.)

33,

"^^3,

oias,

a,

Cf.

3; ^,

33,

3?,

114.
s?; 33.

(Cf. also

77
The forms used

c)

for the

oblique cases.

If we accept the
be primitive, the shortening rests on nothing else but euphonism
attaching the case-terminations (cf. (OsD^ysJC^, o-faC^ in
265).

In the oblique eases the long vowels are, as a rule, short.

long vowels

to

in

employed

Kannada w appears
in

sionally

the

as

<o,

c3e>

Tami).

dative),

as

&3,

^s

3,

Malayala

c33

appear as

3 and

as

(this occa*

'S

Tulu oka appears as

*,

oio

and following a consonant as <o, Telugu &, ^' appear as 33 (in the genitive
and dative) and as rf (in the accusative). The forms of the oblique cases for
the first person are, therefore,

Kannada and Malayala

appears as

ft?

Telugu

ft

appears as
second person are
TamiJ. S

The form

(in

oJ,

ft,

rfo,

F5,

^Se).

>,

Thus the forms

ro-

&

appears likewise as

(in

ft,

the genitive and dative),

cases of the

for the oblique

ero.

f3o 5

for the oblique cases

the third person),

*S,

appear as ft, Tulu

the accusative) and as ft?
ftt

pronoun of

of 33, the reflexive pronoun (the

^ in Kannada,
Malayala, Tamil., Tulu, and Telugu.

is

Probable origin of the three pronouns.

d)

That of the

1,

first

The vowels used

The exceptional ^

person.

in

the

formation of

consideration, as the regular vowel of

^ and

<o

The

frequently interchange in

and

short

<o

w and a

forms of

Which
first

its

person are

may

dative too

Kannada

w,

S3,

<o,

"a,

Zj.

be dismissed from further

is

i;

may be added

it

109,

66;

(see e.g.

that

i, 3).

of the oblique cases have been taken to be the shortened

(above letter

difference will proceed from

of the

this

of the dative of Malayala

it.

c);

if

the reverse be accepted, no material

Let the radical vowels be

and

).

of the two vowels has been leading in the formation of the pronoun

We may

person?

say the one or the other, because they are related

and occasionally interchanged, e. g. Kannada w, =0,0! (see

140); tf, a, what?
s
D
ae
which?
to be
ao*, a pair of oxen yoked to the plough;
'

*n>o*,

possible;

TSlugu

Wes-i,

e.g.

),

3?c 6

o!

to

be or become near;

a river.

*X3J,

(see

140);

Telugu

Tami).,

<*,

(Regarding the interchange of short

^c3

<os*, to

Tamil

o;

& and

the hand;

^ofc*,

say; ^oi}*,

&,

3e3,

cf.

3d

the head; w^r, oi^r, swallow-wort).

If

we take

t'ormation of the

W) as the leading vowel, the idea which underlies the

pronoun of the first person, is that of calling the attention of
>

(or

another or others to one's self or the

the particle

&

(or ^) being commonly

aa
used in calling, or calling to, a person near or at a distance (see
140).
the-0-here
(or wo) thus is the person that desires to be taken notice of,
'I',

'

'

But what about the

way

influence the

initial

consoriants

meaning of So (wo) or

ofc 5 ,

in

-sp*

artd

?*?

Do

they in any

other words are they essential

78
The answer must be
in

Kannada
In order

is

to

negative already on account of their not appearing

a rule, in the oblique cases.

and, as

*>3o, a,

we add

explain this

that the letter

o&*

(like the

Samskrita Q&

Kannada, and especially Kannada and Telugu people very

a semi-vowel in

^, A *>
euphonically as a help to pronouncing the initial vowels
5
ok
113. 130. 132); only exceptionally
41; cf. also the euphonic
e.g. in
has disappeared in the tadbhavas aaov* (=abdoo) and 2A)rt ( = oi>Jri); in the

often use
(

in the

wo, Telugu

it

it

<o
= oi)3), oi^ ( = ojj^), ^3 ( = oi>d) the initial <o, when not preceded
(
a
consonant
or a consonant with a euphonic SAJ, is pronounced o3o.
Also
by
before * the ok* is euphonically sounded, e.g. *, o&3, what? which?,
ofaao*, who?, Tamij. wo*, oisao*, who?, v$# oi$3% an elephant, Telugu art, oiasJ

tadbhavas

^^

which

wild,

done when an

likewise

is

female

ofcdd),

>3dJ,

Telugu

buffalo,

when

'SO^

is

never

initial

e.

oi),

at

Thus the

first

pronoun
are

is

^^ ^^
ott*

initial

and 3

are used in

its

a true Kannada and Telugu word; but

in

'3^

Malayala.

Kannada 3z3,

another form of

is

*>^,
why?

g.

of the

person must be declared to be

the initial of some Tamij., Malayala and Tulu terms.

first

e.

*>^, oisa^,

same time one considers

the

'31a

^^ ^^

g.

who?).

has no place there, that

occasionally
that it is not found in the oblique cases.
it

what? which?,

oijs,

nominative singular of the pronoun of the

unessential or simply euphonic,

appears as o&3,

initial

o&au-^, cardamoms, &3, o&a^, a picotta,

(or when an initial short <^ appears as

The form
c3*;

that

and

stead,

found as

is

spas?

of the

thus Tamij.

^a^o, c33O) are Kannada

^oeD, 330 are Kannada 3ao*, Telugu Sa

the sun; Tamil,

to be suspended; Tamij.
c33, a peacock.
Besides, as apparently in the first person of the pronoun, it
makes its appearance as a vowel (i or ) also in other words, as does likewise

co-ordinate and

its

Kannada
s3wo)

cfco*,

Telugu

to

3o,

crab, are *>S in

primitive form

Kannada and

<0?oS,

a crab)

<^^, in
<

person, as

it

<oeS,

and

oij*,

<oe|

Kannada

in Tulu.

Telugu

sss?,

There

& Tamij.

(in

'S?

c33^,

Tamij. 33^, Malayala

is,

^ ra

ra

i'

also

is

i>

the

to-morrow,

therefore, no reason for consider-

pronoun of the
ofc*; it

is

first

used to

by a small section of the Dravida people.

in

the pronoun different from that of

the last occurring in Tamij. side by side with

the

^^

Kannada there

bears the same character as the semi-vowel

5< bears no character

ST=

in

<oao

essential part of the nominative of the

facilitate pronunciation

<

sp3a, 3>wo and

the ancient Kannada owo* (Telugu
<

For instance for Tamil.

be suspended, there is
a peacock, appears also as

Telugu and
*
X3
3
to be an
ing the

are

3*.

substitute

of the second person), although

3s

its

it

substitutes

too

is

has been, and

simply

still is,
euphonic (cf.
a
often used in the nominative of the pronoun and its oblique cases by
large
number of the Dravidas. By the bye, in a few tadbhavas 3s appears as a direct
53*

it

79
substitute of ofc,

Kannada

in

e. g.

3J3rt (=oJ:.>rt),

a yoke, and

Tamil

in

33o (=otafc), Yama.

That of the second person.
2,
The vowels used in the formation of the second person are d?, 'S, and y\)That the initial consonant ?3* is not essential, but euphonic, follows from
absence

its

Tulu ^, Telugu ^^) in the nominative, and Tamij.

(cf. the 3 of the tirst person).

in

oblique cases

eru

in

the

The leading vowel is 3s, this, the proximate demonstrative particle,

expressing that a person (or any object) is situated in front of another; the
This 3* appears also
original meaning of the pronoun is 'next (to me) one'!
as short e.g. in

*S)do,

33-

In the oblique cases of the Tamij. pronoun the leading vowel presents itself
as

a short form of AW, the intermediate demonstrative pronoun, denoting, in

who is intermediate between the left and right and

<JTO,

the present case, a person

directly faces the

in

speaker

'right opposite (to me) one'!

being addressed, the primitive meaning being

This A> is also short e.g. in e/udo, en>3.

That of the pronoun of the third person or of the reflexive pronoun.

for the formation of this pronoun are
J and

3,

The vowels employed

the

first

the oblique cases,

mean 'that'
as we have

y and

according

f.,

&+

(213

it,

seq.),

to

the

circumstances,

appears also

ate-it-he'; see

S5,

the base used for

both demonstrative particles which

being used for

all

the three genders; W,

pronominal syllable

'he'.

(3*

+ euphonic

en),

& or &&, the demonstrative neuter pronoun, by means

the w disappearing.
The ^ in this case points back

agent or subject, and 33 (3o

to the
i.

he, she,

are attached to

122), another form of

of sandhi

e.

the second in

115, has got also the specific meaning of

seen in
?3

33,

shortened into

is

i.

264),

the crude base

in

appearing

in

^3,

-^3,

+ tf),

3 (3o
'

'that-he',
crus^,

+ 53)

originally

mean

that-she ', 'that-it'.

'that-it-he',

'that-that'.

(The same

'this-it-he', 'this-intermedi-

265.)

Remark.
seems proper here

It

pronouns of the
the verb.

to

refer to the connection that exists

between tho

second and third person and the personal terminations of

first,

Regarding the vowels ^,

W,

<o,

of the pronoun of the first person

205 and
of the first person plural of the imperative in
compare the 53, ^o,
the <o, <oo, and <o?fo O f the first person singular and its ^>o, <o^j in the plural in
11)3

the ^,

& of the pronoun of the second person compare

regarding the vowels
and 530& s of the second person singular in >> 193, the 'SO*, 'gSofthe

>

second person plural in

193, and the

the

of

the third person compare the

imperative

in $

205;

'S,

'So,

and regarding the

of

o,

?k

of the second person plural

& and

of the third

tf

of

the

pronoun

person singular

in

80
declension of some nominal bases are

Peculiarities in the

139.

be adduced.

euphonic

122

In

and

ero,

This augment

(see

124).

the

following

direction

express

a term of direction with radical ero

3o,
ablative F^J^F^O, dative ^do^ri, genitive

with final

direction

gen. ^doJora.

,0

The use
es
CO

in

chiefly

the

of

'S,
00

ero>
00

128. 130,

^o
oo o

the ancient dialect, viz.

5o^,
PO

S3

modern dialect

gen. S5<>03o,
OO

&JS

like

and

3$2

^d

130); gen.

their

of direction,

f(

%5^,
MO'MQ'

gen.

'S.Ori

esOtf,

co

is

ro'

55

'

oo

o,

dat.

a.

esOok
po

v)?^
oo

'

'

e.

j,

and

ablative

mediaeval dialect

S3)F2,

dat.

ro'

oi

co

oi>ra.

ero

?3r{ '

in the

6)

'aSoSora.

of

abl.
'

^o^o.
'a^.
^OJo,
OO
OO
CO

in

dialect)

(for Sszlr',)

?idj:^, ^dol), ojdol>.

g.

terms of direction with

terms ending

and modern

as terms

o5ors>.

ro

^)"1 f^.
O

a term of

vd,

^dodor^o, dat.

abl.

PO

dative

fir.

abl.

oi
a>rl,
r^,
<r>'ro'

in the

e.

3o3o;

genitive

A&.
and

same augment is seen also in the genitive singular

and cO, terms of direction with final ^ (8 130),
0"'

a) in the ancient dialect

c)

e.

^d,

do,

jS erodes.

The common declension, however,

o3ofc)

final

which the

of

instrumental

128);

a term of direction with final

orS,

declension follows that of

of

and

130); instr.

the three words are not used

If

O&rs.

is

when they

words

with

direction

of

formed by the help of the augment y^'

used likewise in the ancient declension of

are

etc.

singular,

genitive

some terms

there are

123 some such terms with final

in

to

still

and

final

130), e.g. genitive

oj (

but in

92^

modern

the

are generally declined

weloJo (in the

we

dialect

mediaeval
also

find

e.

g.

(for gj^ofc).

Further, in the same manner as the nominal bases always ending

127 which express time, ^DS?, $$ and
in a euphonic efo in

terms with

dialect

^$$;

>rl,
Q^_

dialect e.g.

^ which

final

ancient

e.

g.

>cX^,
G^_

relate to time, are declined, viz.

nom.

(the

?Xf3;
Q^_

^JSfS.,
*X_

^^, FSD^,

with

mediaeval

final

dialect

si>3,otf,
G\.

c3)^^);

Besides, two terms with final

bases

crude base)

euphonic

we have

<yo
e.

</.

c)

5
(

referred to

gen.

^s^ori,

in the mediaeval
b)

modern

dialect e.g.

122),

t*ft?j,

and

viz.

yri

in

the

and

also a term endin

in

-Ssrt.

modern

The mediaeval form

s3oj|3

a) in the

that relate to time, are declined like

a
l>e

^DS?,

wJaa,rf;
Q\,

the

in

dat.

In

one

djj3

the

tJAfi,

mav

81'

In the ancient dialect the genitive of the term Zji3

The vocative (sambodhana, sambuddhi, amantrana)

140.

only seven

It

100).

used in addressing,

is

(jadavastu, as

not con-

is

or

calling

calling

to

objects that are inanimate or destitute

(amantrana, abhimukhik.-iranu)
reason

Kannada grammarians, who enumerate

sidered as one of the cases by

of

s&l

is

posts,

pots,

flowers,

bees,

trees,

idols

etc.),

(th'-vapratime), persons which are different from one's self (Idk&ntara),

and one's own self (atmiyacitta).

The forms
(l)

in

of the vocative are as follows

the ancient dialect

Singular.

1,

The

form

first

of

the

vocative
i

This form
2,

In

to

called long emphatical speech

is

e.g. osstax

is

20. 215,

y.

6,

is

e. ().

lengthened,

(dirghakaku).

pluta form

letter k).

third form the vocative particle

its

e.

second form the vowel of the base

This form

In

the crude base,

is

333d

called short emphatical speech (hrasvakaku).

is

its

of this vocative
3,

rtrf

oj is

suffixed either immediately

bases with a final consonant, or by the help of a euphonic letter

ending

in

a vowel, e.g.

3x>3 (of ^rasS)

(of

^oa^^oaj)

(Of

^3^)!

( O f d?d)

^J3^fS (of

wdsJjS

(O f

etf)

d^)

^^,?3 (of

(of

33

bases

to

Of

a^doi-iA) (of

OZp^rfo^ (of W^JJ^rf^) Zi^^ (of

33d6)
aewBrj^ofo (of Stw^orf,^)
!

The euphonic augments, as

particle

'.

(of enxrfxo*)

^v*)'. swaJ^d

(of ^J3?oO)!

ga^SoSo

(Of 3oorioi33cS)

(of

^S^TJ^J (of ^tfri)

c3?3?3

^?5

3orfO)!

(of

3%$

In

its

&

is

will be

observed, are 3*,

fourth form, instead of the ^ and

attached,

e.

y.

erjoJo^:

^J3^

in the

^*,

;s

same manner, the vocative

^^y3?

ff

3,>c}c3?

I'lnml.
1,

The

2,

In

first

its

is

the nominative plural,

ca

d^iiaJj^F^d

In

its

ewn^artv

to

3aod!
-

o3rt*d! d^rt^d! djsd^od!

u.

3,

c. //.

second form the vocative particle S3 is added to tho nominative,

rfrfrfort?d! tfra.Od! rfwad;
uj^od; dt^Qi! dcaoijod! u^rcd;
M

ajjftwd!
n
fl'r^i

form simply

third form the vocative particle

is

added

to tho nominative,

e.g.
11

'82

4,

In

its

fourth form the vocative particle

5,

In

its

fifth

added

o} is

to the nominative,

e.g.

&

form the vocative particle

is

added

to the nominative,

cS^rtfe!

e.g. derfd?!

in the mediaeval dialect

b)

Singular.

C5tS3!

2,

O3233!

3,
4,
Plural.
*^

CSP

Jd

tj

4,
5,

in the

c)

modern

dialect

Singular.

2,
3,

4,

dtzido!

1,

o master!

3,

4,
5,

Here follows an enumeration

141.

the terminations and augments

of

seven cases.

of the

1.

Norn.

1,

Singular.

the crude base

109,

6, c;

125; 126; 127; 128; 129; 130;

added
3, a euphonic

137, &, c-

3* or

4,

109. 117);
J3

109,

enunciative
b, c;

129,

ois*

6, c;

or

6,

130,

117,

C;

&,

to the

b, c)

vowels

M;

117,

139);

a euphonic

3t,

en>,

eao,

122,

6, C;
6, C;

or

oi3 s

(^

130,

3,
6, C),

adua,

L,

it

S) and

<o

(^

128,

6, c).

125; 126;
122);

(^

appears as
added, by means of an

erx>

(arfo,

Ace. 1, the crude base with or without a vowel

121,

2,

o or the sonne

which case

to the sonne, in

'3,

121; 122; 123;

120;

127; 128,

C;

129, C;

130, C);

6
preceded by a euphonic 3

or

n j (ij 109,

&, C;

109, C; 120

($

128,

2,

($$ 109,

6, C)

4,

121,

W(g120,
6, C;

($

117,

120,

I, c

A,

r:

6, e),
,

/>

83
121,6; 122,
125, a,

or

6),

Wo preceded by a euphonic 3s

5,

6);

oft*

130, a, 6), or a* ($

121, C;

117;

6, c;

122,6';

135, C);

130, c;

8,

I,

109,

6;

130, a, 6; 137, a);

d^, d

do,

d,

129, a;

128, a, c;
genitive of
or

by

-So

^o

O r ^3*

through

129, a);

a, 6;

(/.

e.

1,

^o

^tip,

122

we^o, etc.,

which

is

to

represent the sonne

euphonic 8 which

by a euphonic a
137,

c;

c);

8,

^,

(i. e.
rt

109; 123,
137);

c/.
(i. e.

6,

129, a);

ft

(z. e.

(/.

preceded by the euphonic augment

14,

or

$r>,

6, C;
(/.

g.

117, C);
127,

6,

6, c)

(i.

123,

16,

erf,

c)
i.

e.

rt

7,

128,

c;

preceded

6,

c; 129,

121, o, 6; 122, a;

siort,

e.

'a

^,

(i.e.
5j

e.

we^,

122, 6);

(/. e.

122, a;

i.

wratf, wre?^,

12,

13,

123, a),

which

a mutilated form of ee^ (

122,
e^,
a mutilated form of
122, 6, C; 125).
easj. (
15,

*a*,

121, C,

122, a, 6; 125, a);

wc^,

was

preceded by the euphonic augment wra

a vulgar form,

125,

preceded by a euphonic
6, rt preceded by a

120

preceded by a

3 preceded by a .euphonic

9,

preceded by the euphonic augment ww*

rt

117

rt

4,

C);

5,

rt

117, c);

rfrt,

122,

C;

2,

121,6,c; 122,6);
preceded by a euphonic ^ (i.
a
11, ^preceded by
122,6);
euphonic 'So (i.e. ^o^,
10,

C),

128,

genitive.

123, C; 125);

preceded by a euphonic ^o

128, a;

6; 127, a, 6;

121,

127, 6;

125).

represent the sonne

is to

128, a,

6, C;

122, a, 6;

6
preceded by the augment Wes through

rf

122; 127,6;
by means of 'SJrf, the

122; 127,

b, C;

e . 'afto,

(i.

a-,

3,
128, a, 6; 129, a; 130);
(
117, a, 6;
euphonic sonne (i.e. ort,

109,
129, a;

121, C;

a, 6;

augments presuppose the

their

c).

length either by the final augments

121,

'SSrf, etc.,

*>(

3,

128, a, 6;

127, a;

^ ^o, ^,

or by

109; 120; 121,

in

109; 117; 120,

137),

^,

The terminations and

Dat.

122, a, 6;

the genitive of

'So,

5,

genitive wes

its

(i. c.

*arf,

109, a; 130, a);

121,6;

etc.,

130;

>

extended

*ao

4,

(i. e. 'arf,

109,

5j

Wadded

7,

117, C; 122, C;

109, 6;

wrf^,

erf^,

6, C);

worf^, a quite vulgar form, $ 122,

(i. e.

2,

b, c);

120, a, 6;

117, a, 6;

erf,

erfo,

130,

117, a,6;
a euphonic

by the insertion of the augment wo*

Instr.

e.

(i. e.

129, C;

6,

109, C; 121, C; 122, c) ;

9, tfo (
120, a;
wo
and
suffixed to the base
of No. 6 added to

10, the euphonic

122, a);

rt,

128, C;

125, C;

sonne becoming 3* or 3^ (i

to Wo, its

128, a, 6; 129, a, 6);

wo becoming 3s or 3^

em suffixed to wo, the sonne of

B, 6;

e.

is

6, C

Remark.
That the

another form of a* becomes a fact when the Tulu

Kannada Dictionary p. XVI, note 1, sub 7); further,
& appears as &6 in Tulu (see the same note, sub 5), and * as 3* in T&lugu
_ Kannada ^^, s'rao,
^ _"_"J>
(.//. Telugu 3^0, gs^
^re^, the eye; r/. also
Hence it may be concluded that the letters *, n*, R* and ?5* are closely related
dialect

in

is

letter

compared

is

(see

Dravida and change places

in the dialect.

The augments

n* and 3* of the
11*

84

&

6
109; 117), vb of the genitive ( 130: s/. 243, B, remark),
and 53^ of the dative and genitive, and to some extent the sonne
(55*) are,
5
o
and
in
the
same
letters
3*,
176; see
therefore, ultimately
(cf.
euphonic

genitive

also the S3

in

apparently

is

Abl.

The vowel w sounded

265).

122, a; 123);

^3

3,

e^

^,

9<^,

^^,

F$O,

etc.,

e.

(i.

augment ^^ through its genitive wrad

^rfo, ^^, ^| preceded by e^ra, the

^o,

4,

nsirf,

109, a, 6; 117, a; 120, a; 123,

123, i.e. e^rfo, etc.,
^, the genitive of the augment & s and 3^.fs (<'. e.

125, a);

122, a;

etc.,

genitive of

2,

<^>;

genitive &&>

its

^o preceded by

wo^eSo,

^-ra s )

preceded by the

123, e);

(i.e. eraOc^,

a);

',

&-<&

(i. e.

a help to enunciation.

WES* through
preceded by the augment

5,

and &*

the terminations of the instrumental except

1,

genitive of

before

and e^ra

'SIcJ*,

The terminations and

g.

(t.

their

'g^^do,

^^

^o,

6,

122,

etc.,

preceded by ^rf, the

a).

augments presuppose the genitive.

Gen. 1, ?3 (
2, w preceded
120, a, 6; 121,6, c; 122; 126, c; 137);
c
n
9
e.
the
cJ,
(?'.
3,
109);
euphonic augment
by
preceded by the euphonic
109. 117);
4, ^preceded by the euphonic augment
121. 122. 127);
5, w preceded by the euphonic augment
6
Ora 5 (e. e era,
122. 123);
6, ^preceded by the euphonic augment w*
5
7.
this being another form of wes (/. e. as^,
122, c; 123, 6)
preceded
6
^rac
g.
which
is
a
erad,
123, C);
(f.
vulgar form,
by the euphonic augment
S*

augment
'955*

(i.e.

(?. e.

^,

gtf,

53

8,

6
preceded by the euphonic augment <^o

od3 ff

preceded by the euphonic augment

the euphonic

No.

&

augment

(i.e. 3,

6
augments n

o33 f

5*,

128, a; 130, a, c);

Loc.
;

1,

enjv*

117,a,6;

and

a*

14,

130,

>,

(/.

e.

6;

120,0,6;

122, a, e;

120, a; 130, a);

125,
6,

109; 117; 120; 121,

130; 137,

C);

128,6; 130,
121,C;

8,

6, c;

130,6');

10,

final

121,6;

128,6;

(^

6, C;
(

2,

109,

6, C;

^(109);

C;

117;

6, C;

109, a,

127, a; 128, a, 6;

109;

137,6);

125,

12,

of the base

the euphonic

^e*

5,

126, C;

120,6; 122,

H7,c; 120,6;
^s6 (
109, a;

109, a, 6; 120, a, 6; 130, a, 6);

122; 123,

9,

130;

<o

i. e.

c).

a*rt

4,

+ e,

109, a, C; 117, a, c;

109, a, 6; 117,6;

C33

w preceded by

125, a, 6;

122, a, 6;
fctfo

a, 6; 137, 6)

6, C;

ewo

137, C);
11,

3,

and

*9

9,

preceded by

128. 129);

odjaand TO,

?ra,

11,
rf,

109, a; 120, a; 122, a; 130, a);

125,6; 128,6; 130,

121, C;

csa,

13,

c);

120, a; 122,

129, a; 130, a, 6; 137, a, 6);

rt,

130);

augment
and forming with the

ff

122. 125);

(i.e. ^es,

oi),

129, a);
3~ (i. e.

128;

4) preceded by the euphonic

preceded by the euphonic oij

a long syllable (z. e. ^ or

(z. e.

7,

($$

127, a, C; 128;

120, 6; 121, C; 122,6; 125, 6;

120,6; 121,

C;

12, the crude base

122, C);

(^

10,

126. 127).

85
The terminations are
Norn.

o (So5

1,

case this

is

137, a);

&

into

changed

131, a; 134, a);

**

5,

$,

ritfo

ri*

with a euphonic
with the augment 'SO*

(/. c.

e.

(/.

(/.

118,

119,

119, 6);

ori?*,

&

a,

en>

(t. e.

wci),

119;

132,

e.

e^rv5

the

by

addition

(,'.

6, C);

132, a);

119, a;

(l

etfr?o*,

e>

119, a;

ri<fc

addition of r(?o*
5

aeo

edori^o,

woorto,

e.

(/.

132, a);

119, a;

(i.e.

119, 6);
*sio*

23,

o*

22,

rtv6

lengthened by tho addition of

(/.

e.

oQdi,

e.

(i.

119,

&

oQriFV*,

e.

119, 6);

Q3o,

132,

C;

6,

(i.

30,

19, edo lengthen-

(i.e.

^o5

oQo5

riv*

lengthened by the addition of

wo*,
preceded by a euphonic w* (t.

(i. e.

(see

119, 6; 132,

119, a);

27,
oOo*
28,

119, a);
sioo

29,

preceded

on5

d&* preceded by a euphonic

^
(i.

No. 15) preceded by a

No. 25) lengthened by the

e.

(/.

e.

preceded by the euphonic

^^

'SO*

24,

,-

5
34, so lengthened by the addition of 'SO*
132, a);
a^rv*.
35, ao lengthened by the addition of *<* (i.

132, a);
36,

6)

So*,

(i. c.

119, a);

31, wdj

C);

5
119, c);
32, Qo
euphonic on (i. e oddj,
***
e.
addition of
Q^rv, 132, a); 33,
(i.

o*

18,

edo lengthened by

119, a; 132, a,

&

lengthened

lengthened by

26, ^o* preceded by a euphonic oc (i. e

a; 134, a);
oQo lengthened by the addition of ^o* (i.e. oQQo f

by a euphonic

o*

21, woo lengthened by the

119,6);

j>

25, ^)O* preceded by a euphonic

NOB. 29. 30);

137, a);

119, 6);

1B2, a);

addition of

131);

17,

119, a);
lengthened by the addition of ri* (i. e. wrfr?*,
ed by the addition of rip* (/. c edorts*,
119,6); 20,
the

9,

^*o*

of

134,

c;

6,
,

6)

118, a; 119, a, 6);

a* with a euphonic
ao*
16,
lengthened by

the addition of *s*

**o

10, rtv*

118, a, 6;

preceded

with the
,

119, a, 6;

by a euphonic sonne (i.e. orttfo,

5
13, rt*o* preceded by a euphonic sonne (i. e. orftfo
14, wo*
15,
119, a, 6; 132, a, 6; 134, a, 6);
(

12,

11, riv* preceded

132, a, 6);

118,

**

131,

No. 2)

6,

6, c);

7,

H9,6,c;

C;

118, 6;

ris?o*,

tfVo,

<?.

(i.

which

in
<?.

***($$

4,

** (118,,6;

8,

rttfo,

e.

en>

*tfort9 f ,

e.

(i.

136, C);

s^rttfo,

with a euphonic

en)

euphonic sonne

rttfo

augments.

(/. e.

lengthened by the addition of rt*

119, e) ;
augment ^do (i. e. *oo,

its

a euphonic n> added to the sonne,

137
3, 3 (i.
c/.
136);

2*,

(i. e.

lengthened by the addition of

by

and without

suffixed to the genitive with

Plural.

2.

(/.

e.

^r(r^, 132, a);

&

SOo*,

(i.e.

132, a);
37,

wo5

o*
38,
119, a);
preceded by a
wo*
e.
a
(i.
119, a);
39,
euphonic
preceded by
w*
e
uoo,
e No. 15) preceded by a euphonic
(/.
(i.
.

euphonic
so*,
i>

w*~

(/.

119, a);

119,

1>,

c);

ozJD*,

e.

cio

40,
41,

0o

preceded by a euphonic

42, wdo preceded by a euphonic 3*

Ace.
a, 6;

1,

w(j{$

119, a, 6;

us,

119,

&, e;

131,6,

souno becoming 3* or

&

3*^

C;
(/.

(/.

wrfo,

=00,

131,

6, c;

135, c);
.

e.

3,

e^o,

o'af

119,
6, C;

c)

118,6,

oudo,

r:

e/\>

119, 6);

o* (^ 132, 6).

43,

135, C);

a euphonic
ij

(i.e.

2,

wo ($118,

attached to wo, the

ll'J.

<t,

C;

131,

6,

C;

86
135, C);

e added

4,

sonne becoming

to wo, the

?s

(i. e.

119, c; 135,

We^,

c)

(119,<0.

5,

Regarding the augments see the nominative.

Instr.

1,

^(131,

3,

'So

137, a);

(i.

118; 119; 131,

e. v&o,
136, a).
Dat. 1,

rt

119, a;

4,

tf

a, 6;

132, a);

3,

6, C);

ert,

e.

(i.

131, a, 6; 132, a;
preceded by a euphonic sonne
('. e.

euphonic augment
136,

119, c);

&&

(i.

Abl. 1, ^o, ^^o,

118 a; 119,

e.

11,' otf,

6, C);

118;

'Slrt,

tf

8,

136, a);

Otf^,

rt

137);
6,

c;

135,6);

preceded by a

* preceded by

9,

the

a mutilated form of

(136,

6,'C).

(z.

w^do,

e.

etc.,

terminations of the instrumental.

1, e(g118; 119; 131; 132,

*
(. e wes,
by the euphonic augment

135; 136,

o, 6;

136, a, 6);

preceded

2,

c);

(119,

c*

3,

a,c;

a).

Loc.

131,

i>V

1,

(118,

136, C);

132,6;
4,

eJ3^ and

137,6);

137,

<se3%,

c)

3,

z-tfrt

118,

119,

C;

6,

^o

2,

6,

C;

5,
136, C);
119; 131, 6, C
2-?15 and
&&, preceded by the augment

6y

135, a,

137, a);

131, a, 6;

118;

131,6, c;

6, c;

(i. e.

119, a, 6;

118, a, 6;

119,6;

a, 6;
c;

6,

(118,
oe>*

e^

fl

7,

w^,

10,

a mutilated form of

Gen.

131,

131, a);

es

135,

C;

6,

etc.,

2,

e. otf,

(z.

119,6;

'Sotf,

119, a);

e.

(/.

135, a);

131,

119;

(i.e.

preceded by the genitive of

2, the

a);

<3

do, d^>,

d,

119, a, 6;

132, a;

119, a; 131, a, 6;

a, 6;

augments
^,
4, ^o preceded by the augment

final

fl

5,

euphonic

e^

us,

preceded by a euphonic 'Sjo

preceded by a euphonic en> (i.e. wutf,,

136, C);
6,

118,

137,

6, c;

preceded by a euphonic

rt

qo

2,

6);

lengthened by the

6).

(109.

142.
117-137. 139)
Looking back on the declension of bases
one observes twelve more or less distinct modes of declension.

The

1-

2363^,

&,

Tfjstf,

mode comprises neuter bases with

;3.is<u.

Their singular appears in

final

55,

e,

g. Ari, 3od, <3w,

109, their plural in

The second comprises masculine and feminine bases ending

2,

first

533^,

W3^, 5^.

Their singular

is

given in

in

118.
w, e. g.

117, their plurals appear

in

119. 135.

The

3,

third comprises neuter

(and one that

e.g.

is

S'SS*,

eo)^!^,

singular

4,

and feminine bases ending

consonants

used either as masculine or neuter in the ancient dialect,

3*0*,

22or^,

Z3etf

d-X)^,

z-sSrv5

eAJ30 s ,

y^v 5

53O, ^?0*,

sSev 6

',

^?Je35

^QoJoy*.

is
120, their plurals appear in
given in
ri" gee
121.

The

in

fourth comprises two kinds of bases

330J3

zS^oiov 5

131. 134.

33^;

wv5

rtz.

W3V 6

Their

Regarding

87
neuter and feminine bases (and one that

a)

modern

or neuter in the

dialect, viz.

is

either masculine, feminine,

also

which, occasionally

&&J)

the

in

ancient dialect, optionally in the mediaeval one, and always in the modern one

are formed from bases with final consonants (see No. 3) by the addition of a

euphonic w, e.g.

otoatfo, ^Ftfs),

stftfo,

Srfsj

iv'j,

tfew,

^rttfo;

^tfo;

rfc^Tio,

and two masculine-feminine-neuter ones

seort?Jj,

mediaeval and modern dialect,

also

uad), s'Qdo,

qio,
ti'

oslo,,

aToo,

tj

viz.

is

5\o?i>)

the ancient,

woo, ocw, (or

WR^O, ^s^J, ewsio, oos^o, y?i>, ^^o,

y,

&rfo,
a'
a Sorfo,

aojsesrto,

122

in

wdrij,
in

^pcs^

^rfj, <oddj, d^jaoi, 33 WA, yoj-w

sSj^rio.

given

-"u

124),

(cf.

doorfo

docrtj,

^'s'rto,

a',

their

plurals appear in

fifth comprises
masculine, feminine, and neuter bases ending in a radical

a)

3->e, ^j^o, rtodj,

tfew,

3&,

Their singular appears

3is!j.

masculine, feminine, and neuter bases ending in

6)

The

6,

g. ^cto,

128, their

3J33^,

sx^,

rtJS?,

vfl,

oio,

Their singular appears

rt^.

i,

aCsjj,

in

an d C,

129, their

131.

plural in

^, S.

&^d

a^o,

^. ^P,

e.

en>,

in

131.

plural in $

e.

a.
y

^(5,

eara^,

121;

The

5,

^^

iC3^,

&3

Their singular
TOO^.
131. 136.

eruriJ,

g.

(or also 3><a

z-s?rto,

ooslj,;

e.

-S-ea'cij;

ad^, NJSSJ

^ra>y,

^J3*"),

wstfo,

in

one feminine

rtre^,

always (with option only in two numerals) ending in a euphonic

j,

Sorftfj

tfjsdtfo,

Their singular appears

masculine ones viz.

neuter bases (and two

6)

wtfo.

ESUJ,

131. 134.

their plurals are given in

one viz.

ywl>,

T<DJ,

sixth comprises masculine, feminine and neuter bases ending in

i.
3*3, 330^0. ^OA, 3*i, 'gO, ^50; A?: ^3,
j3.
?^^, tfrf, *^,
-

>

Their

W(3.

singular

is

given

130, their plurals appear

in

in

131. 132.
7,

e5^,

rsi^,

8,

wo*

or
9,

No.

The seventh comprises

ios*.

eight neuter bases of direction with final ^,

Their declension

is

given

in

e.

g^

123.

The eighth comprises the bases of the seventh mode when the
w&w is attached,
d-xeduo.
See
126.
g. w^o*, w^ejj, slxade^,

suffix

?..

The

ninth comprises four bases expressing time that end

4, letter b,

10,
11,

viz.

nsjrfo,

ewrfo, ^rfj.

12,

in

the

*n>

of

127.

Oc^,
125.
See
formed by the pronoun o (5), o*>.
of
and
the
is
formed
tlio
The eleventh
personal
by
singular
plural

The

tenth

is

pronouns and of the reflexive pronoun,

33rfo.
See
137.

and time,

See

The
viz.

twelfth

s?o,

330, wrfo,

jrarfo,

mode comprises a number of terms that express

e<, -35 eruO, wzS, ^t5, jratf, fj^, 3-8^,

3c&, 3rd, ^d,

See

riz. tfo, 330,

139.

s?^J,

direction
wr>, ^rt.

88

On verbs

V,

313-315)

(see

In chapter III (^ 45 seq.) verbal roots or themes (dhatu) have

143.
been already treated of. We have seen that Kesava calls the crude
form (prakritisvarupa, dhfttusvarupa) of any verb its root, whether it be

the primary element (primitive theme) or a secondary theme.

He gives the rule (sutra 216) that the crude form or theme

by dropping the pronominal termination

209, text and note

(see

insufficient, as

does

it

between themes ending in

instances,

o^

This rule, however,

2).

enable

not

en)

(as =5\f3do, ?3JS?ei),

found

is

(vibhakti) e*o of the negative

is

(to

make

student to

say the least)

a

distinction

(which alone are contained in Kesava's

and themes ending in consonants

3^o)

5
and as it does not take
(as
),
notice of the doubling of final consonants in the negative ( 215, 7,/),

gw*, waO', ^JSe^

=JSO&*,

rioto*,

themes ending in ^ and <o

of themes that lengthen their vowel ( 209), thus
grammarian's list of dhatus ( 47).

o&6

of the euphonic

Ancient

144.
its

action,

or

of

Kannada grammarians

the

general

idea

call

170. 209),

and

presupposing

the

verb &o3a or

tJsjSo^:

*.)

expressed

10

verb,

any

by

they

term

$,o3j too.

They do not distinguish between mood (mode) and

Kannada

tense.

has so to say only one mood, the indicative, for which, however,
no particular word. Cf.
314.
Tense they

3eKS<>,
o"

or %oiJ5s5d

i. e.

one ending

in

a personal termination,

is

called

>3,

69. 189.192).

The name of

145.

uses

call ^>w.

conjugated verb,

tf^ssdd

it

the present tense

or sj^rdj^^^e)^, or

dorsj

is

3
d^F^Je)^ or $;3;, or
3 that of the past tense

5-3^, or sJdo.

<rf

$J3^, or $JSa^e>o, or $J3^d3, or ^s^d u3^>; that of the future tense

is
or
or
or wsj^ ^e;^, or 953 a.
The
$a3$gg,
gjtos^ga,^,
comprehensive term for the three times or tenses is S^^GJO.
is

(3^^,

'

The action

146.

^o3j,
is

or

of the imperative,

p, or Ci^pqir.

or the imperative,

The negative form

is

called

>

of the verb, or the negative,

termed sloss^qS.
147.

person

A
(i. e.

person of the verb

the third person in

or also ^NO,

eSdo^

is

called

^dossl.

The name

European grammars)
that of the second

is

is

of the first

sjqta'o

or

rfoz&siJ or

89

^ do

and that of the third

351;

erc^sjo or

vu^o^dos*.

the

first in

European grammars)

is

192.

Of.

term ^o5o

If occasionally the

(i.e.

is

added

to

**,$3o,

and n>^3J, or

3Jt^;io

to

^^^o^jdosJ, doz^SJ^dj^ and yu^ao^doaS, it is to say that no other persons are

meant than those who regulate the action of a verb in grammar.

The comprehensive term

148.

for the three persons is

s^Go^ ok.

The grammarians Nagavarma and Kesava do not use a word

an intransitive verb; they mentally saw

to distinguish a transitive from

such a distinction themselves, and expected others to do the same. The

sutra about the so-called passive voice in the Sabdamanidarpana wherein
the term ^rforsr, transitive, occurs,

is

an interpolation
(y^j^^JS^).

About 400 years afterwards Bhattukalanka in

introduced by

(sutra 443)

and

name

verbal themes,

intransitive

S3

his

Sabdanusasana

transitive verbal themes,

tf^;3.)F^qn>3o,

3 dor 3 93^0.

active and passive (see

315), are not mentioned by
and
and
the
terms
Nagavarma
Kesava,
parasmaipada and atmanepada
which have been introduced from Saihskrita into Kannada by modern
Voices,

i. e.

writers, are not used

149.
is

causal

Causation

is

is

(ao^j? ),

adding the particle

by them.
called 3o?3o.

verb that expresses causation or

formed from an intransitive or transitive one by

's.sjo

(or also, as

we

shall see in

151,

;fo,

2^0, -azoo,

cause (somebody) to laugh (from

to
yo),
tfrto), esazdo,
cause (somebody) to cook (from
to cause (a person) to
e3c3o), c$o&oSo?jj,
speak (from &>&), rfjoSoSOroO, to cause (a person) to put (something) into
the hair (from
to cause (a person) to churn (from
^jooS), ^o&Jnlo,
^d),
3so5j^j, to cause (a person) to give (from
JeoSozdo, to cause (a
e.g.

tfft?oj,

to

3s),

person) to grind (from If), FSJSeo^o, to cause (a person) to feel pain

(from fJS>e), sSj^j^o, to cause (cattle) to eat grass (from s3o), ?5oS;0,
to cause (a flower) to open (from
to cause (something)
wsjo*), ^ejr^^Jo,
to

appear (from ^3^*).

The agent

344) that causes another to do something or causes

3^3 r,
something to be done or happen, is called SO^^^F, efir^^r,
or
(cf.

$j^F.

"

It

may be remarked

make, and an

infinitive

that a

causative verb

ending in a

187,

may
2),

also be

e.g.

formed by the verb 0J33J,

i*s^A

'-->3

to

Sjs~o, make him read

12

90
But if a verb is formed by means of ^?jo (etc.,
150.
149) that is
used in the sense of doing that which the word expresses, the agent is
termed a&JxS^xF, ZO^^F or ZoOJJo^xF Such verbs may be intransitive
e)

eJ

,3

or transitive, e.g.

J}t3?fo,
SJ

to look, to stare; ^j|3?oo, to decrease in

vJ

C3&30, to become greater in bulk;

roam

to

2^>o?oo,

effecting

useful

figures, pictures)

to extend, to

wander about

or

Dos??io,

sjrl

sSo,

oSA^torfsiJ

object,,

widen; ;&>&

to break, to

see

draw

to

float;

(or

(sketches,
;

i, b.

215,

Cf.

t.).

power;

to

crush;

151, remark)

to slacken (v.

?fo,

move about,

2&3?fo,

sJoo&ZoJ, to affix a seal to

to

Remark.
It

is

a)f|&?oj

not allowed to form causative verbs from such verbs,

from

The

151.

some
the

of the
in

-a

of

soe|7oj

appears also as
mentioned in
65.

suffix -s^o

finals

&&

e.

form

g. to

would be wrong.

and ^2^0, and the

rfj,

It

in

53

a^o, and $5?fo; compare

more than probable that

2^0,
is

ej^j are euphonic (cf. the

same as ^zk, ^^J,

to

63. 168).
It

has been supposed that

permit,

etc. 5

but that

by means of ?i> which

and 316, H.

We

further state

a)

that *a?oo

1,

to verbal

consonants

^J

wrong, as

is
is

2,

are the

&T*J are formed from ^, to give,

^^;

another form of

see letter

6, 3

in this

etc.,

paragraph

is suffixed

themes which originally are monosyllabic, and end

they have not received a euphonic eru (see
54), e.

if

See exceptions under letter

to

^J

and

^^

verbal

b,

i,

letter

c,

i,

and

letter

g.

e.

themes that originally are dissyllabic and end

consonants, but are

in

made

trisyllabic by the addition of a euphonic

class

belong

in
w\),

e.g.

To

this

See the

[eirt^roj.

>

and exceptions under

In

^?k,

cte^o,

nowadays appears

to

also the

common

ancient

ancient forms under letter

c, s

letter d.

s^rfo and OJ^rij (

is added.

which *%&

terms are derived from nouns by means of

150) no verbal
l>drfrfo,
'Srio.

dfe^^J,

or

nominal theme

5j^e37oo,

and similar

themes that appear as dissyllables and trisyllables

ancient, mediaeval and modern dialect and end in y\j, e. g. wA*j,
to

3,

OT

exception under letter e.

to themes that are dissyllabic and end in
4,
especially in

means

the ancient

and mediaeval

a and
-a^o

dialect,

Regarding the dropping of the

60; 157; 165,

to which,

attached

is

by

letter a,

3. 4. s

and

b, z

&J?>eo3o?l>,

in the

modern
that

b)

vowel of some themes

final

cf. letter A, 2

33e>?3o

e.

See exceptions under letter

dialect.

b, 3.

consonants 0&* and o*

in the

(only

in

themes ending

in

and

<o,

in

Cf.

ssd?oo

A.I).,

'era?!),

the three dialects,

(also in a

sk),

e.g.

the mediaeval one).

i.

to dissyllabic

2,

The forms occur also

sSo?o&o?oJ.

TOO is suffixed

(in the three dialects), ^J3^o

letter a,

2;

A,

3jso3j?oo,

themes that end

to

1,

z3?o3o;&,

165,

c, 3.

172; 180, 5.
a
themes
that
are
vowel or end in one, to which
to
monosyllabic
5,
is attached by means of a euphonic o&*, e.g. -dsoSj^o, ifoSozio, ;!,?

OSo?k,

a,

,0,

of a euphonic 033*, e.g.

See exceptions under letter

it

See an

the

in

jizlsb, ?iaslo),

s3$^j),

and

rfoa?i> (sio^?oj),

^o&3SK)(doe5

s5osb, 3o?k.

adW^o are derived from nouns by means

About the dropping of the

final

See letter

a 109,
about the change of <>j
a into vu
165, a, 5; 247, d, is. u.
to monosyllabic
'atfo, of

Ss

b, 3

themes that are

316,

u;

of

?i>.

vowel of some themes see letter

into

(or

?ij),

c, 3.

sj^ri>,

3,

z3d?k (23o?jj), z3^^o (23^

^^sb, ^a^o,

^oa^>,

sasana of 1076

cf.

its

(cf.

66),

and

vowel or end

past participle

a,

4,

about that of

in one, e. g.

'S^),
1-2*

92

Cf. letter a,

that

c)

the three

to

is suffixed

Cy. letter a,

is

33ra^

common

are

5.

monosyllabic long themes ending in the consonant

to

1,

e&

The forms

s5j?l).

)Je>?*>,

dialects.

e.

D*,

g.

i.

derived from a noun with a long vowel by means of *&

Themes

#zl)F, ^^oo^o are derived from nouns with short vowels which they

like Sj^Jf,

retain.

themes ending

to dissyllabic

?,,

and mediaeval

in the ancient

to

to

io-

to

3,

themes ending

dissyllabic

in

in the three dialects.

Cf. letter

About the dropping of the

and

letter d.

and

,0,

e.

*;.

and

less

b, 2.

vowel of some themes see also

final

#,

The forms appear more or

^JSde^o, sJod^o.
a, 4

and

<$?*

tc-

to-

and

Cy. letter a, 2

es

g.

Jo-

Wo.

e.

dialect,

tor

consonants o, o*

in the

letter a, 4

&, 2.

that occasionally ^z^j

d)
letter a,
e)

e.#. enidoS^o,

bdbolo,

that occasionally

esisjj is

2,

letter a,

and

suffixed to the

is

themes mentioned under

!d$s&>, in the mediaeval dialect.

&&>,

suffixed to the

themes mentioned under

e.g. <0j^?oo, 2od?oo, aoS'S'roj, in the

3,

modern

dialect.

Remarks.

Ae
nouns,

will
.e.

2jJoo^?io,

be seen from

sjrf TOO,
g.

wSrfj,

in the three dialects.

in suffixing the
rf^joajToo,

letter

in

^^

a^Too, dooa^o,

fo^Orio,

Sometimes,

150

is

s^rrio, dtr

^^OToO, d^o?3o, rto?oo,

Cf.

215,

i,

as&rfo,

rfo,

^jstnrio,

i>?JA?oo.

^a^^J, ^S^IJTOJ

Such verbs occur

letter b.

the ancient and mediaeval dialect, also a euphonic

^o,

^socOoxio,

e.

&>d
g.

dsooaoToo,

Samskrita

also used to form verbs from

5>'^?i),

oso?oO,

araFcOoTk,

33doDo?io,

ri^ooDJTjj,

&&oDi?l>,

oil 5 is

(L>2JoSo?jO).

used

dottf oSo?io,

s&dcooToO,

(y.

215,

2,

^^

is

c.

Occasionally, chiefly in the ancient and mediaeval dialect, the

*3

of

5
dropped, and we get such forms as ssdoio^, 3&ioin; in ksJAToo the n is changed
into o&*, and i>wojjo is produced.
Also in Kannada words that dropping takes

place, so that ^8Joaj?l) appears as ij3tcici>o

(or

i^^0),
^,

^cdoDo?io as JitfsJJO (or

^^^),

O r ^J33jrfo), ^y oSo?3j as
as rfW crfjo, rfjs^oDo?^ as

d^oOJxlo

S53dc&>?l> as
ssd^i)^, scjaooDJToo as 3oJ3^oi>o (aSja^^j, see

217).

93
In the mediaeval dialect the euphonic

^Farfo,

gads?!),

sfc* in cdirij

d-xtfajk,

3pcto?io,

changes also
ao>da;k.

jtotfaxb,

&,

into

Cf.

e.

g.

215,

3,

letter a.

148

In

152.

and

intransitive,

been stated

has

it

verbs

that

are

transitive

There are

149 that there are causal verbs too.

in

and

no frequentative verbs in Kannada; no verbal theme (dhatu) cau be

turned into a frequentative one. But though frequentative or iterative
action

never contained in a particular shape of a Karmada verbal

is

theme,

is

it

expressed

either

by

simple

repetition

dvihprayoga) or triple repetition (triprayoga); see

Regarding a sort of reflexive verb see

Kannada not only

In

153.

cf3

^,

165, 211,

and 339.

341.

verbal themes (dhatu) are conjugated,

but also declinable bases (linga,

liriga), e.g. sSrs 3.

(yugaloccarana,

68. 90), that

compound bases

is

to say

nouns (nama-

(samasaliriga), e.g.

^>^^3,

pronouns (sarvanama), e.g. s3S5, attributive

nouns or adjectives (gunavacana) whether Kannada or Samskrita, e. g.
2oS?rf. ^J30c3, rSeOtf. Wrooi), &0o3o, yx>d3, sicS, and appellative nouns
53o>5e>fciOF<3?3o3, ^^eJSJr^^,

QUO

of

number (sankhye),

When

See

e.g. Sorir.

197.

bases like the mentioned ones

are conjugated they have been

Europeans, appellative verbs or conjugated

grammarians use no name for them.
called, by

The author

of the present

conjugated base
of nouns, etc.

in the

is in

grammar has

mediaeval dialect;

first

is

purvakulakriye,

See

met with any instance of such a

modern dialect no conjugation

in the

There are two different forms of the Kannada verb that have

154.

verbal

Kannada

use.

been called verbal participles

The

not

appellatives.

participle

the

or

gerunds by Europeans.

or

preterit

past

verbal

155

piirvukriye,

171);

(vartamanakalakriye,

participle

(bhutakiilakriye,

the second

vartamanakriye,

is

the
172.

present
173).

361.

The

155.
syllable

d)

first

to

kind of the past participle

verbal

themes (dhatu,

(vyai'ijananta), in the vowel

without altering the themes,

is

prakriti)

(ikuranta),

and

in

formed by suffixing the

ending in consonants
the vowel o (ek.'irfinta)
admitted,

(of j^prjp^), having

the later WfiV), having
djsreo (of
ceased,
having
55^0
(of yj5<,
s&sra^),
the later
IKIVIIIsaid.
the
later
said,
(of 3??,
(of ^^3*,
oj^o,),

oo

e.

g.

^jpcao

^j

&fco3oj (of ^.oio*, the later ^J3a2oj c ), having cut.

3^0,), having eaten,

94
(of flois

48), having

cf.

S3j>o3oj

tilled,

(of

^c5oF (of &0*), having sucked, ^JS^dor (of

having gained, sSowo,

O having chewed,
having swung, ^^j,
having become angry,
CO
O having stolen, s^oo^o,
3ja
having heard, nj^o,
es3o,
O w>&3o,
CT esrfockF, EwnJdoF, JJS^dor,
Q'
esrtao,
o'

dc3o, ?S?Sdj,

^d),

rtoj,
Q

'aacSo (of

?$rfo3j:
T#^WO,
o' ^rio^o,
o roaoJ,
o
o

^jo^rfo,
(of

flo3oo,

having dropped,

later

having jumped,

the

^ddo, ^e3do,

o?5c3o,

53rforfo F,
z3js?c3jr,
O

in

o s optionally double the n* of

^^rfoF,
Iftrfciir,
O
O

^drfoF
Q

Regarding

oiCjSrfj.

^$d>,

the etymological explanation and original meaning see

Themes ending

'ae^dj; ^sldo

3$do,

'se^rfo, zoOrfo, ^o^orfo,

169.
cfo, e. g.

371, 2;

(see

^a).

&d)r,
O

c/.

119,

a, 4).

The same formation

place also
vowel, e.g.

of the

=ffe>d>

(of 53),

^do

means

past participle by

when verbal themes

of cto takes

consist of one consonant with a long

=js^j

(of =$?),

J^cSo,

&&?),

(of

Remark.

The grammarian Kesava

(ukara) added

to the

states that the syllable

d.

augment (agama)

In the formation of the second kind

156.

only difference

is

consists of the vowel

ci>

About & see

that in several themes

go

175. 189.

of

the

is

substituted for c&,

past

participle

the
e.

g.

&e3o (of -3-^, s^^o, we)^o,

?;>.
of themes that form their past participle by means of gj
given in sutra 507 of the Sabdanusasana, viz. =3^2^

is

which

it

(Of Wt3*),

^>^,

tfJ^OF,

W^,
^^^;

=5^, $Wi,

5e33

(of

S?

),

ees 9

(of

(of i,),

trs,

list

-S-e,

S^P,

adds So&S3

tie,

t.,

^J3^*,

S5C33 in sutra 508,

remarking that one may use

(of
In

As?^,

33?j5,

^^

in

Wf^, ?Sjse^,

sutra 509, and

or ?S^o

-^fs*,

^o*

to

in sutra 510,

under sutra 553

it

^.

some instances the use

of cfo

and go

is optional, e.g.

?S?^o

has also

95
.

The use

of suffixing dj or

partly disappeared

modern one, on account

See

&

to themes with a final consonant has

and

in the mediaeval dialect,

of a euphonic

more so

still

the

in

being added to the themes.

y\>

166.

The third kind

157.

and second one, as

of the past participle differs in so far

from the

first

themes ending in a vowel this vowel (o or -a) may

be altered or dropped before cto and &). In the ancient, mediaeval and
modern dialect the vowel i may be converted into the vowel es, e.g.
in

a sasana between 750 and 814 A. D.),

(in

a sasana of 929

?3ddj (in

A. D.), sgpddo (in a sasana of 804 A. D.), zStfdj, 3J3tfdo, z3tf&,

in the
e.

>,

g.

modern
xs^dj

dialect the vowel

a,

151,

4-,

The fourth kind

158.

too

2; 151,

6,

of

c,

3.

165, a,

4.

172; 180,

formed by
theme ending

the past participle

is

vowel (^ or 'a) of the theme, producing a

consonant, and then suffixing cD or &3, e.g. y^or (=s5t

final

of

^J303o;

changed into the vowel

be

may

doddj, ?oddo, Aiddo, 3os;do, adoddo, 3ooiJ3j.

(^ado),

60; 151,

(Cf.

5.)

eliding the
in

half

3o of

y\)0

addo

165, letter a,

Cy.

7.

The mentioned past

except

^dJ

which

is

participles occur only

found likewise

in

modern

the

in the mediaeval one,

which, according to the Sabdanusasana sutra 482,

is

dialect

and

met with

in

>j3^
the

ancient one.

The

159.

consonant of

kind of the past participle

fifth

themes

before the termination

formed by

is

C3o or

1,

&^j
(of

the elision of

t3o (= wtf^),

cJD^o

in the ancient dialect (cf. the -ds^o of

the

elision

=3oe)OioO)
3,

e.g.

(= Flo^oJ, ro?^o (=roe?^), for which there

&*)
2,

53*,

&>.

We

nearly wholly restricted to the modern dialect.

of
C/.

odb*, e.g.

?Sedo (=??0300);

the elision of &3*, e.g.

wdJ (=wo3jj),

53^5

(of

in

eliding the final

This formation

have
or
is

the instance

156);

is

96
of

the elision

4,

&,

e.

g.

(=
mediaeval dialect), aS^j
(=2050^),

used also in the

^JS^oo,,,

3J5^o (=38^?^);

5,

the elision of o* of the ancient theme ^o^o*,

6,

the elision of a* together with the preceding vowel

theme ^O^DS

*. e.
,

^os^ (^^o'gdoF),

^oSJ^o

e.

(^o^dOF);

^ of the ancient

a form used in the mediaeval dialect;

the elision of a* of ^JSQ*, a theme formed from the ancient

7,
i. e.

The sixth kind

160.

converting the

changing

We

final

takes

of the

formed by changing or

is

past participle

consonant into another one before

place

and 3j.

c3J

mediaeval, and modern

the ancient,

in

This

dialect.

find

the conversion of eo*

1,

in

(=2X^0)

ancient dialect, and

the

in the mediaeval

one

the conversion of &3

-S-^ (s-S-C^)
the conversion of

3,

ssdoF

=0 i*3o),
doF

(=S2&3o),

236);

(cf.

into 3* before ^o 5

e.

sa>^o
5^0
es^jQ/"
(=
"),
_yn
,^0
\

<7.
/

and modern dialect;

in the mediaeval

C3* into

}doF

before do, e.g.

into o*

3* before ^o in sjjj^ (of

of the

sjoorfo)

ancient* and mediaeval dialect;

the conversion of

4,

before 3o, e-^.

into 9*

or

oiW&3o),

and mediaeval

the euphonic
(or Cf* with

5*

ero^

(= ero^or, of

WS%, 3^%,

dialect,

334i>

en>63* or

^P^i

ero5o),

^^^

>. e.

y\),

o>3

3o)

(of

aucient

of the

and

and modern

3*
(of ^&5'

occurs in
^C3J)
the Jaimini Bharata; exceptions to this rule in the ancient dialect are e.g.
of the mediaeval

the conversion of y* into 3* before ^j in

5,

modern
6,

before
)Ci)F)

2^dJF)
7,

^^

(= ^i^) of the

dialect;

the conversion of
e.g.

rfo,

a6

the subsitute of

5d> (=?5Jo,
^rfo
Q' WtfoF),
Q
O ^

in the mediaeval dialect,

in the

the

(s'adoF)
8,

^^

dialect;

and

0* (see No.

(=^^o,
Q'

V-

1),

into

C3*

oiO^F), ^)do C=
V

(=<o0o, <adoF), ^c3o (=

oirfj

modern one;

conversion

in the

of

an original

into

C3*

before

do in

mediaeval and modern dialect;

the conversion of

o*

into

C3*

before do in tfdo

mediaaval and modern dialect, and in ^odo

f^^ooo^

(=^01
o>

of the

of the

modern one;

97
the conversion

'>,

of

v* into

before

C3*

of the
0'
Q (^BVo)

c$o in tfcio

mediaeval and modern dialect;

the conversion

10,

and

zjfl)

wo^

(of

of

a*

into

j3*

3J3^J),
"

(of 3

and modern dialect;

(of sjg*

Srfo

3&

in

cb

before

53*

and
&>j),
w''

(of r>3*,

>Fl>

d>

of the ancient, mediaeval

zojjy)

the conversion of o* into

11,

before

in

^J3fio

sJs>o)
'

(of
of the ancient,

media3val and modern dialect;

the conversion

12,

o*

of

into

<& before ^j

in

^^

of the

(= ^tj^)

mediaeval and modern dialect;

the

1;J,

ancient
i. e.

conversion

'g'otfo*

^j^rfjrj

(see

of the

159, No.

modern

The seventh kind

161.

To

35*

into

G),

of the past participle is

formed by changing not

theme before the termination

&>, but also

this

vowel

into

3%

i^jp occurs

and

oi

(see

their

66).

likewise

modern

the

in

The eighth kind

162.

into 3*, so that their participles are

however, appears as J&3o, which

is

dialect

wherein

termination

of the past participle is

formed by changing,
$5*

i. e.

before the

cfo.

The themes which do

are

so,

>JNJ, ?SJe)NJ in the ancient

o
o'

modern

theme,

its

found also in the mediaeval one.

shortening, the vowel of the theme and inserting a euphonic

(see

(=^j^,

^o?!^

vowel.

*3^, rt%,

o'

of the

kind belong only the three themes C3

(*C3i), ft^< (fte3o),
of the ancient and mediaeval dialect, which convert their
(3i3o)

initial

zStfo,

form

mutilated

5^ before 3o in

dialect.

only the final consonant of the

its initial

v* of ^js*, a

the

of

>53,

z3?,

?!>?;

and mediaeval

their participles

dialect,

and also

are

in the

and ^jaeofoo

oue, though their themes herein are &3?ol>o, ^ijsafco

48).

163.

The ninth kind

of the past participle is

formed by changing,

i. e.

shortening, the vowel of the theme and inserting a euphonic g* before

the termination 3j.

The themes are

and

-d?

?33oD in the ancient

and
and

and their participles are Q&t

dialect, and also in the .nudeni

?ro (^e)0i3*),

niedia'val

one, though the themes herein appear as -^oJoo and ^oJoo.

Remark.

The form of

is in

sutras 477.

iu the Karnutakiibhi'ishabhushana

566

of the Sabd&nuifattfc;

which adduces only the past

it

is

not

participle

13

98
the Sabdamanidarpana under, sutra 48 clearly gives the form of xraois^; under
1
or SD ^; it has neither
sutra 240 it has ?rao3ra, which may be either saoi:

&

'

?35od3 5

nor ^3 in

its

The presont-future

dhatupatha.

and mediaeval

sa^, instead of ssoS^, in the ancient

From

164.

155 up to

dialect

180,

is

generally

participle

remark).

1,

163 the syllables do and ^j

underwent

no changes when they were used as suffixes for the past participle; in
the present paragraph instances of the tenth kind of the past participle
will be
of

adduced, that

which the

do

1,

suffixes

is

to say instances of the participle in the formation

is

do and 3o

are changed.

Namely

en^

converted into do after the theme

the past

*
(srorso),

J>9'

participle of which is erorso in the ancient, mediaeval

do

2,

is

converted into do after the theme

so

being shortened,

that

its

past

v'dttf

is

participle

and modern dialect;

(ysrao),
^rao in the

its

vowel

ancient,

medieval and modern dialect;

rfo is

3,

&

converted into do after the theme

being changed into

the final

=&$* (&OS&,),

and ^jsrso becomes the participle

f^,

for

the

Cft

three dialects;

^o

4,

converted into

is

s^odo, ?oodo

>,

so that sjljo

'aeJo.,'

'

and

eA)s3j.,'

the three dialects, and

after the themes esdo,

fedo

^)?oodo, their final

^^o

3JeJo.,'

j5'

^^o.,
^o^o, are the participles for
w'

^^oejj. those for the ancient one.

^ofcjo,,

6J'

In the ancient dialect

^^o, ero^o,
dj being changed into

Wrjofej^

is

written also

23?ooSJ),

a form that

is

common

in the mediaeval one.

The

original forms of the past participles of the

and

sojses&jv)

5,

the

past

c/.

(of ao-oo^j)

No. 6

participle

3oJSS3eJo,

mentioned

the past participle

dialect #733&Jo (of

#?33&j^ (23?J3^o+^o)

and

contraction, vulgarly changed into SoJSraj

6,

modern

must have been

sSdrso

is

under No.

4,

is,

by

identical in form with the theme,

e.
sSdrsj (Sabdamanidarpana sutra 241); the participle's original
&J
form must have been zSdrao,, i. e. zSdreo, with the termination ^j which

i.

eJ

was converted
7,
=5\ici>

3o

converted into Wo after the ancient and mediaeval themes

and ^ock, these changing

the forms

and

is

ej

into &0;

&/s>fa*

JjsUo..

and

;iJ5)&5*,

their initial vowel

CAJ

into

so that the past participles

Zj

and taking

become

^jsejo

99
The themes

and &>& occasionally appear as

^JJl>

mediaeval dialect, and always so in the modern one

and i.o&)

tf-ecfc

in

the

the participles remain

'

eJ'

ai'

3j

8,

changing

converted

is

into

vowel

its initial

'a into

past participle becomes

In the mediaeval

remains

comes

<0

theme

ancient

this

rfj,

and taking the form #&J*, so that the

and modern dialect the theme

is

^&;

the participle

^^;
^j

9,

=^eJo

the

after

fed)

is

after the ancient

tfo,

so that the past participle

5jZ3*

3o

10,

converted into

QTti and

which be-

is sjz^o
ij

>?!),

z3z3*, so that the participles

become ^^o and

*>^o,

fcr

23^; the participles

converted into

is

z&^

IT

In the mediaeval dialect the themes generally are

remain *>&}to z3^to

^o

;3o

converted into &j after the ancient (and mediaeval) themes

these changing the initial vowel
into oi and taking the

is

forms o^zs6 and

11,

theme

?fo

themes

after the

>orto

^rfo,

(and ancient

^rb, Sabdamanidarpana under sutra 241) of the ancient, mediaeval and

modern dialect, and rorto of the mediaeval and modern one, the themes
taking

forms

the

becon;e

dtf,

Ste 5
:

(^^j?

0^0,,

c^^o,,

^o

12,

(^s ^),

nj^o,;

converted into

is

?fo

c/.

^*

so

^ na ^

^ ne

P as ^

after the themes vorio

ancient and mediaeval dialect, the themes changing their

into Zo and taking the forms

become- So^vX and

us6

and

participles

165, letter, a, 7;

and ^rto of the

initial

vowel

eru

so that the past participles

Sjf?e*,

^jjs^o,.

IT

-d

The themes

erorto

and ^^o appear also as

krf-

and

in the mediaeval

s^prto

In the modern dialect ^Pf^ has

dialect, the participles remaining k?r^, ^p^.
taken the form of ^JSrto which occurs also in the mediaeval one ; the past participle
is

2&33^;

cf.

13,

165, letter a, 7;
is

converted into

after the ancient

the form 35*, so that the past participle

in

165 under

From

165.
is

formed

the theme;

in

becomes ^^)
o-i

^rf),

this taking

see an instance
;

i.

164 we have seen how the Kannada past participle

various ways when the syllables tfj and
are suffixed to

now

out cto and 3j,

at the

b,

theme

155 to

&

its
is

same time

eleventh kind follows, a short form which appears with-

theme (which
a verbal noun), and may be considered to be a

often identical as to shape with the verbal

often

is

100
100 compared with

verbal noun (see

past participle with final

r&

60;

Compare

169).

the short

168.

in

This short participle occurs only when a verb directly follows it which
is meant, as it does not bear

shows that the sense of the past participle

the characteristic

mark

of a participle itself.

where the third person neuter singular

It is
It

a)

includes two classes,

second case

it

it

it is

repetition

e.

g.

with

regard

^^s6 so*

),
,

to

^JS^

^JS^o,,

cf.

unaltered verbal themes

identical

with a

final

Iri

e.

dialect), are e.g.

vowel
in the

g.

157.

Instances with regard to themes that have changed their

(which often are verbal

final

nouns and occasionally appear

6y.

modern

final

vowel, are e.g.

Instances with regard to themes that have changed their

-a into PS

341) and

mediaeval dialect and frequently in the modern one), are

the

is

into ?9 (which often are verbal

4,

6,

152. 211).

Instances with regard to unaltered themes with a

30

3,

198,
it.

being put either before a verb that differs

it

has been formed, or before a verb that

has been formed, chiefly before

Instances

consonant, are

2,

directly formed from

The short participle used before verbs that are not the same as that

from which

1,

See, however,

used in the ancient, mediaeval and modern dialect.

from that from which

in the

is

final

vowel

nouns and not (infrequently occur

in

101

157.

G?.

Instances with regard to themes that have changed their

5,

final

'a

(which partly are verbal nouns and occasionally occur in the

modern dialect), are e. (j. -ado i?J3v* (=

into

eaj

do

151, letter

^.

6, 2.

Instances with regard to themes that have dropped their

6,

are S50&*
(=S503o

of

esoJoo) ^D*

in

(used

final syllable,

and

ancient

the

z^^ (=^j8^h of ^^rij) ^o* (used in the ancient

in the modern dialect).
(= 530>Aof jjoortoj ^JS^ (used

mediseval

and

dialect),

dialect),

irfoej

Cf. letter b,

Here may be adduced the vulgar

Cf. ste

i,

final

A,

rtj

before the verbs

or

ft

20=5*

dialect.

158;

,The short

from which

E^

=5^0,

it

(^JStfo,),

are

e.

^J5^,

(of Sort)

S
^5*
Wfl) ^J3V

164, n.

(Of tSA)

e.

in repetition

Instances with regard to themes that,

in

=^6

It

is

oja, ^jsri ^prt,

ijoa a)a, siooes

to be

(of Jrt) ^JSv*,

^V*,

SSJ3^ (Of
in

the modern

with that

riojSl

9
,

211):

an unaltered form, precede

an identical verb, are e.g. =&& 3&>

(=^arfo ^S),

rfora,

3<

participle used before verbs that are identical

^a

into =5*

12.

has been formed, L

3, sjo 3io,

n6

g. S3^ (=S5nrfo of

The instances occur only

(of rorto) ^JS<ff*.

Cf.

166).

the vowel of

and converted the remaining consonant

(Of

1,

(=yua& ^Qrfo; see

4.

^J^o and ^JSv*

(of zrt)

b)

3J3fi?J->

Instances with regard to themes that have dropped

7,

their

under

sies-rfj

en>rio

3.

^O

3Z>

wa,

ao

S C)dj

(=

^6 (=

WA

zoh, zoa

oo, sjoa

sS^ri diart,

observed that the instances always presuppose the second

verb to be in the form of the past participle ending in do

155) or

102
in the past tense, as

found in the three

etc. (see

^Srfo,

211,

They are

4).

Abhinavapampa 13, 53 there

In

is

Instances with regard to themes that have lost their

2,

before an identical
dialect), are

e.

3ti)

^^j

vowel

final

verb (which are found in the mediaeval and modern

g. 3*3 (i.

151, letter a,

6y.

&& ^&d>, ^O

dialects.

^rfo

e.

and

of

irt

*3,

3s?j

Iric3j of

3rt
Jrt) itf,

b, 2.

Remark.
In such an instance the short participle

when another verb

also

follows,

Instances with

3,

e.

may be

uti 2Jd ^J3> s

g.

regard to themes

syllable before an identical verb, are

doubled,

gee

e.g.

g.

Wd

tod

ud,

211,8.

that have

3d

e.

dropped

their

last

30

(of

3drfo,

(of 3drfj)

30rto)

Cf. letter a,

6.

The instances belong

to the three dialects.

See

211,

i.

Remarks.
In such an instance the short participle

3d ti&fo

rfri

rto,

(or

See also

10.

211,

339,

<$

?^Jrio),

be doubled,

may

23<s*r!o

e.

g.

$>& $>& &&$

(used in the ancient dialect, see

8.

Also in the repetition of nouns the last syllable has been dropped, as in
Sort Sorttfo, ;3j3d stoste*
(see

An

4,

166.

i,

a. b. c. d).

instance in which the vowel

before an identical verb,

Cf.

dialect).

303,

is 3JS3 3JS3 ;3o

AJ^O iJ3^?oo under a,

penultima too has been lost

ro ^fc^o, of the mediaeval

of the

(=3iG0

6.

Hitherto the formation of the past participle of verbal themes

and the vowels Q and ^ has been treated of; it

ending in consonants
still

remains to be introduced the formation

participle.

It concerns the

of the twelfth kind of the past

themes which end

in

the vowel en) in the three

dialects.

Their past participle

is

formed by

The

mediaeval and modern dialect.

letter,

disappearing before the

suffixing the vowel *a, in the ancient,

final

eru

is

treated as a euphonic

according to the rule of sandhi

213,

seq.).

Instances are
together,

&$

(of wtfo.,),

having feared,

$1%
having trusted,
(of ?&&),
?.T V
9r*f

s3oa
?sr

th

(of torto), having

(of
^oe^J),
^
r>.^-^

met

having liked,

103
^o^U, ta,

(of tfolk.),

sira^,

rtdes9 , ricfcS 9

<toA),

&>el,

9
srsa, s^es

wa,

sraw9

^ts9

fteea

333*0,

ew&r,

rae&o, !>*>,

form also the irregular past participles woi3*,

wrto, ^J8frto, 3oJ3?rfo

J^o&*, used for the third person neuter singular of the past tense
wo&s appears also as e30&<, regarding which
199, and cf.
176).

(see

176, and compare wrto (=e?rto) in the Dictionary

see

Themes with
of the vowel

and

a; but

if

155.

the G5o

changed into 3*, which occasionally

done (
59. 61. 160, 4), they suffix cio

"S^rfor

156), e.g.

(^0%,

160,

etc.,

"""

means

is

is

and before the syllable ^o

into 3*

generally form their past participle by

some instances always

in

or 3o

final C3o

!)

(of

their final &3*

is

sometimes converted

4).

In the mediaeval dialect a theme that in the ancient one ends in a

consonant,
vowel 'a

is

is not unfrequently made to end in

used to form its past participle, e.g.

a rule,

this, as

is

in

which case the

yrlO,

done

in the

The thirteenth kind

167.

g\3,

modern
of the

dialect.

48. 181,

Cf.

past participle

which,

as

i.

198,
it

4. 5.

would

appear, occurs only in the mediaeval (tyU ec t, is formed by means of the

This is, instead of do ( 155), suffixed to themes that
syllable 'acfo.
in the ancient dialect, without exception, end in consonants, but in later
times have optionally received a euphonic

e.g.
*)

Dr.

(of

F. Fleet

I.

tf^j,

<xjj,

3yst3&,

writes:

etc.

^jstfrio

=3^0),

draws the author's attention

ask* have been used

find

He

^<Sdo

directly for

(for sjjjsdh,

esft

sjjjsasf*,

to

eru

(cf.

the close of

(of

some copper-plate grants

and Wft in the forms 3JJ93odJ*,

3o*ft, io-8P>,

With one exception, noted further

on,

the spurious copper-plate grants of the Western

166),

etc., to

series,

which

the east, to the south,

have found these forms

Oanga

in

do*

Sjjs^scxjj*,

in only

from Mysore.

etc.).

some

of

These grants

claim to bo of various dates from A. D. 248 upwards.

But there are strong reasons for
the
eleventh
as
the
when
were fabricated.'' The one
most
them
of
period
fixing
century
exception occurs in a stone inscription at Bannur in the Tiruma-Kudlu-narasfpura taluka,
Mysore district, which appears to include the word SSSOOTOiJ* (or SSajs^SOd.-* ?), and may

belong to about A. D. 920.

Cf.

281.

We

remark that

en

appears as W3&J

in T.-lugu.

104
?je)do,

(of

= ?5e>doF),

^<s?do

(f

SoJ3erfj,

(Of

= o)?tfj)

^s?o,

T^otfoSdo

(of

SoJe^WCk

(of

3!iJ5?doF),

wWio, = 2o53^:>), rfodSdo (of rfjdtfj,

1123 we find tf^do
in which a euphonic
(for ^s;j)
f

In a sasana of A. D.
ero is

used for a.
(

of the mediaeval period

in the Kannada
(e. g.
we
which
the stcl> has
and
there
meet
with
forms
in
here
Ramayana)
been used to form the past participle even of verbal themes that end

Towards the end

WWW

in vu in the three dialects

sSoUdo (of
the

sSjfeJo.,

curious

=a

past

e.

166),

sSjfeJj),

participle

g. &3i>2&do

(of

do

of

(=>?&,

2^71^0),

=a &?do).
^

?l>?&do (of ?l>?do,

>

LS^O, = a
occurs

wo)

Also
in

the

Ramayana.

The vowel
euphonic
168.

in

ac5o in

this

case

of course, nothing else but a

is,

employed before the real termination ck.

letter

The question naturally

how

arises

the vowel

to represent the suffix for the past participle of verbal

of

166 came

themes ending

in

^
appears
a euphonic or enunciative augment put before do ( 155 seq.) in order
to avoid forms like 333^
used in the
(of ss^^J), having sung (actually
Jaimini Bharata 21, 57), ^jjs^j
made (used in the
(of rfjs^o), having
eru

in the three dialects.

originally was

to be certain that

It

Dharmaparikshe, edited by the Rev. G. Wurth in his ss^sX^^jsC)^

'
"o" *U
vacana 1301), ^okjj.
etc. Such forms, certainly, are
Sjo^j
<$&*
w
solaclumsy and cacophonous, and led people to use the enunciative augment
^*

<a

,
'

between the theme and

etc.

and then

in

cfo,

as they actually did in the forms

the forms ^-s^do,

probably as a remnant of by-gone times,

s3o!3do,

we

find

in

?l?8>d>, which,
This is
167.

corroborated by the fact that in the so-called relative past participle

(

175, e.g. 53>ad, ^oeiSd, ^olirf, dooiid,

and

rnediajval present tense

^d^Jo), and
the

194, e.g.

in the imperfect tense

do, in the

form of

d (178),

rfo^ci),

in the ancient

53)^d33o, ^j

198, e.g. sraScS,

is

^d,

always used.

present-future tense the participle with

is

(In the contingent

generally added directly to

fctfo, etc.).

We
final

'St

165.

are, therefore,
is

compelled to think. that the past participle with

another particular kind of the short participles treated of in

About

its

representing verbal nouns see

169.

105

In passing it may bo observed that in the future tense ( 200) the trisyllabic
forms 3j3^;3o, fi&tti&o, when they are to become dissyllabic, do not appear as
bat as 3Jaco,
in combination with X being used
the
djadjjO, cto^o,

&

&eo,

to

avoid a hardness of the pronunciation, which

is

3J3d^ by the insertion of an enunciativo

533ri,

the

avoided

in the past participles

3o
and finally dropping
before

ci).

Remark.

Nagavarma and Kesava

that this

and the

'S

terminations

s/u

call the *3

in 3o

an augment

(a

gam a), and Kesava

states

are vowels which are substitutes for the personal

See

(kriyavibhaktyadeaasvara).

the

personal

terminations

in

193.

out the original meaning

Is it possible to find

169.
in

of

the past participle

Kannada?
165

In

has been stated that the short past participles, namely

it

those without dj and ^j, are often identical as to shape with their verbal
themes which at the same time are verbal nouns, so that the participles

themselves

a rising,
ito,

3;3,

verbal

a running,

srsofc*,

3o?c,

9
30, oS3

nouns and
Aj^V*,

finally

a splitting,

must be such,

e.

g.

3J3oi3*, a striking;

33,

SoS

SoO

If

as

appear

we thus consider the short

before ^JSv* and

&&

is

participles to be verbal nouns, their

3oJ3o&* T?J3<^, to take

as follows:

(/.

e.

meaning
to apply)

a blow (or blows, to one's self); <>}O~ ^D*, to bring a standing up (to a
certain' .place, i. e. to come); 33e>o&* ^o*, to give a running (/. e. to run);

33

=^J3<9*,

to take

(i. e.

to apply) a stabbing (to one's self)

bring a walking (i.e. to come); etc.

We believe that analogously the past participles ending

in

$d

^c*, to

d) and 3j

are

nouns, namely verbal nouns augmented by the pronominal suffixes 3j and c3o
178 and 298, 3). Thus, for instance, aW, a descending,
122; cf.
(

has become

OO, a

'aCO'cSo, a descending-it;

selling,

nating-it

Wc3 in
188, of

(cf.

selling-it;

sSjss?,

our explanation of wcS

178.
rto

S)^j, a
179, of

and ^o

in

^,

j&S, a walking, fftScSo, a walking-it:

and 3^

204, and

a germinating, s3jss?&, a germi171, of

in

in

ro^oo, etc. in

173, of

185. 186, of the infinitive in

of the second

and third person of the

imperative in $ 205). The suffixes cjj and 3o are so to say redundant.

The special idea of the past ca having descended-it ', 'a having walkod-it '.
or having descended, having walked, etc.) has, only by usage, been attached
14

106
Kb and 3o

to the forms with

t>d in

(cf.

273).

similar indefinite

character as to time has been actually preserved in the verbal forms

produced by suffixing the syllables ^oo and rtao (see 203), in the negative

and conjugated negative

participle

the verbal
3o

(see

170. 171. 209. 210), and in

(see

forms (participles) produced by the syllables sj, 10,

Further the use of the past participle
180-185).

combination with aod or

of the infinitive with final

in
322-329
(o^&Alii, <0f36), e.g.
with
in combination
soo
(

536

and
,

^oW

QV

(S323*)

in

and that
316,

-2)

such an original indefiniteness as to time. Cf. also

about the combination of the past participle and verbal nouns

will assist to elucidate

313,

in the past.

In

168 the short past participles with

final

enunciative

which

remained after the dropping of do, have been introduced. With their
do they are obvious verbal nouns, and they are therefore to be considered
as verbal

nouns also without do.

QV

in

combination with

in

combination with -ao in

170.

This

is

established by the fact that they

are used identically

The fourteenth kind

316,

(e.g.

with other verbal nouns

sira&o, tJfto =:
'

of the past participle is the so-called negative

one (pratishedhakriye, vilomakriye, abhavakriye).

It is

formed by putting

escS to the short form of the so-called infinitive (kriyfirtha, see

to

the form of the verb that

is

187),

/.

e.

conventionally used to denote object,

design, purpose, or future of intention of action (before another verb),

expressing the idea of the English infinitive preceded by

'about

to', 'ready to', 'yet to' (see

188).

'to', 'for to',

This short form of the infinitive

to be or stay, about to be
(of ^o*, ^J),
or stay, going to be or stay, yet to be or stay.
When ssd is put to ^d,
the form of the participle becomes either ^d 55:3, or, with the application

ends in the vowel

of sandhi

t>, e. g.

<3id

214), <adc3, 'not actually being or staying' or 'not having

actually been or stayed'.

The idea

of the past is secondary,

depending

on circumstances (see
Both forms, 'ad escS and
209, and cf.
169).
were
used
in
ancient
in
the
mediaeval and modern
the
dialect;
*adc5,

one only 'adcS

fit

is

in use.

or not having been

having been present

feared, ^fcjd (of ^iio),

(of &do),

arid,

Other instances are 5t)d (of

yo

),

not being

'S^d
fit,
(of
^o*), not being present or not
^
CO
338), esofcid (of 5ofc;j), not fearing or not having
not tying or not having tied, srudd
jx>3o),
(of

3edc3,

z3?ric5,

slre^d,

Oo^&ficS,

aJ3?rtz3,

107

208. 209. 210. (212,

Cf.

verbal

If

themes end

in

between

the

oij*

euphonic

ae^crfjd (of racJ

7).

*a,

3r

5,

oi,

9
yx,eo c&>d (of er^eo ),
9

),

(of

3*),

rfdojod (of

jftS),

(of

^e>),

3*o3od (of

3$),

3j&rfjd (of
?o3od

(of

short

initial

vowel or consonant, form the

their final consonant before the

(of

20033

^>r3 ),

^^tS

).

and the

,,

and having

v*,

negative participle by doubling

and

suffixing

E^), ^J3^cS

(of

As an exception there

o*, and

of

^zS

(of <JTUD),

of the infinitive

ss

?),

(of

inserts a euphonic

octo

g.

wrioSjd (of art

T??odjcS

&e),

?*,

e.

attached,

is

^oaoijcS (of =>&),

sJzS),

The theme to exceptionally

(of ?$js^.
negative participle becomes t,sjd.
Monosyllabic themes ending in ?*,

the infinitive inserts a

Jo,

when csd

and

theme

or

^cS

is

(of

y.

&$*),
in

=5V)

(of

e.

cS,

the

we find exceptionally -Tored) ( of

one
as
the
modern
uses to double the finals of
ero^), ftvd (of fio*);
monosyllabic themes already before a euphonic tro (48), its forms of
In the mediaeval one

ancient dialect.

the negative participle are

rur?cS (of
erorao).
v

e. a.

qy.

(of ri^oj.

<o^.d fof
v

ee/'

r*3

(OJ^o,),
y

<

ri^cS

215, ?,/.

The themes 3u* and zoa* generally appear as go>a and zroo* in
forming their negative participle, which is 3e>dc3 and wsdd; only in the
mediaeval

and modern dialect also

^rfc3

and todd occasionally occur.

184. 210.)

(Cy.

165, letter

In repetition (see

drops the suffix escS, e.g.

It

171.

&d add.

becomes evident

and

209. nil) the

cf.

211,

(Cf.

4.

first

verb

339.)

fi-om the formation of the so-called negative

170 that

participle given in

b,

its

primitive meaning

was not that of direct

come

negation, but that of futurity,

/. e.

once having been yet to come,

or, in other words, the state of not being

or of not having been.

(cf.

with

the do and 3o of
oj,

under

the particle

escS is e3t3o, the

169, and the yx^,

of

emphasis

consideration, therefore,

the first

meaning

the state of being yet to

is

remote demonstrative pronoun

etc. of $ 173), in combination
215,6, remark

(cf.

so

to

of the above-mentioned

say

a3

a
ssd;

The form

1).

and

pronominal

noun,

or 'aod

'yet to be

or stay-even-it', 'not yet being or staying-even-it', or

tion of not actually being or staying',

or of

is

'the state or condi-

'not actually hfint.

01

14*

108
'not having actually been or stayed'.

according to circumstances,

or,

Thus

also e.g. sJjs^cS, 'yet to make-even-it', 'having been yet to

make-

'not actually making', 'not actually having made'.

even-it':

In

172.

154

has been stated that the second form of the Kannada

it

verb that has been called a verbal participle or gerund by Europeans,

is

the present verbal participle (vartamanakriye, vartamanakalakriye; see

362).

formed by adding to the verbal theme one of the following ten

e/U^Jo (in the ancient and mediaeval dialect), eri)3 (in the

It is

suffixes:

ancient and mediaeval one),

the ancient one),

eroabgO (in
en)^ (in the
the mediaeval one), eru3 (in the mediaeval and

ancient one), e/u3o (in

modern
eruaEj,

one).,

en;3 o

(in

the mediaeval and, occasionally, ancient one),

the mediaeval and modern one), en)3>, eA)3^

(in

modern

(in the

one).

The

final

of a

eru

theme disappears (according to the rule of sandhi,

213 seq .) when any of the terminations

'a,

oi,

e5, 3t,

or

6
dialect) 53 , is put

the insertion of

(of

$0,

a euphonic

53* is

fio&';c/.215,

?,e),

laughing, ^jsezi^oo (of

(of

seeing,

burning;

o (of

of

o^f^O^ (of

theme ends

in

after

to,

to love,

9
o3jj&o(of ^,C3 ), descending,

^),

guarding, 3soSoo^oo (of

ca^jj

(of

weary;

(of =^J3^);

^J3^J^

y^),

(of

(of z3e),
of

(of

(of
(Of

(Of

(Of
(of

(Of to);

(Of3);

or

(of Sirack),

(of

(of
tfzi),

=5^^, (of
w^o^ (of

(Of 200*), 5s)r30^0 (Of

(Of

or

*),

arfo), throwing,

),

or

saying,

threatening;

(of

(of

o^),

^^

becoming

(of

(of tfejcio), fighting,

(of

o^o^o

^J3^),

saying,

(Of ^0^);

riojoo

weeping,

Se)OJoj^oc (of
(of 3d), calling,

quivering;
WS^j),

Odb*,

(of e5!^),

doing,

zSeoJoo^oo (of :3e),

(of <0c3*),

if

always required.

S50o3oo

giving,

annexed;

or occasionally (in the mediaeval

between the vowel and termination

Instances are

^dc&u&o

is

(Of W5?);

^OO^JJ^
M

(of

109
(of ^d),

tos?4^ (of

(The Basavapurana has once, 22, 29,

zos?).

treating the final vo as radical).

o of the theme may be dropped,

Before the euphonic zf the vowel

^4^0
do^3 (of

e. ff.

(of 3d),

wd^^o

3J3^^)^

os3),

(offcd);

3ti$3

(ofaojatf).

3d),

(of

^4^

151, letters a,

C/.

Instances regarding the present verbal participle see in

etc.

From
in the

'g'js^j

modern

2;

b,

362.

a contraction of ^jav^,

exceptionally T?J3^,

(of Sri),

and

formed

is

dialect.

Further, in the modern dialect there are the puzzling forms

es^ and

used, like the past participles *$& and <o?l> ( 155), to introduce
to be forms corrupted
words and sentences (see
332). They are likely

0^

from the present participles y?k3 or 55^^, <Orl>3 or ^rfo^, saying (cf.
the rustic form of the present tense in
196, remark 3, and also the
explanation of 55^,

and o^

the place of 533

<0^03s> or

remark

,oj;&3*

remark

ibid.,

y^ and

4).

would be equal

Another

to

be offered in

will

explanation

which may take

es^ose) or yjdj^ and

tO^

198,

7,

339,

6).

1.

In repetition the ero^e)

of the first verb

Considering the origin of

173.

adduced

in

to be another

gously

(see

the present participle

the suffixes 'of

172 we take CAJ^J to be their primitive form. CAJ^J is known

form of sn)d>, the intermediate demonstrative pronoun neuter

(Sabdmanidarpana sutra 148;

to

may be dropped

the formation of

272,

122;

ea^

from which

2),

yurfo, analo-

from e5do and a^JB from

f

'acl),

ea)^

may be formed.

ea)^ we

These pronominal suffixes eru&> and

believe to be attached to

form the present participle correspondingly to the formapast one which suffixes the pronouns c3o and 3j to verbal

verbal nouns to
tion of the

nouns

169) and to the present-past negative one which suffixes

pronoun ycS (i.e.

which
for
is

will finally

instance,

added,

it

reading-this '.

The

final

conjunction

to the

3d)+the emphatic ^)
prove to be also a verbal noun

the verbal noun

kftj, reading;

eruo in vo^oo, en)^> o

eruo,

when

188).

to this

171)
(
Let us take.

eru^o or

eru^
and
mean
-a
t^do^Op
the bhfivavacanas or verbal nouns of ;j< IDs. \!i)0).

would have the form of

(Cf.

the

short infinitive

further,

denoting

fcodo^j

is still

or

to be explained,

or

progression

conveys the specific idea of the present participle,

It

continuity,
.3 or

is

the

which

^03^0,

standing before a conjugated verb, e.g. before "he was' (acjro, literally

110
'a

he.

reading-this-further'

was),

progressing or continuing

The

action.

the

that

expresses

final

reading

has the

eso

conjunction

was

same meaning.
The
in

final

or

rfo

In the final

remarks)^.

or perhaps

in

to yo^o and
vuJ, erolB (put
v *

in

emphatical, the idea of the

is

171)
196.

oi

3j of which the

eros^ the

enj^e),

stands for

es>

>j

or

e.

the

g.

past

of the verbal themes

of

yd

tto

participles

before

becomes y,

has then been changed into

like the

disappearing (cf.
sonne has been dropped,

ro^, sro|^ the

of

(cf.

en)o

ero^o

the

157), and

for the sake of

55

euphony.

The use
the action

of the intermediate

is

pronouns

(sni^j, erosbj

may denote

that

neither past nor future.

There are two forms of the Kannada verb that have been called

174.

relative

This

participles.

name has been given

them by Europeans'

to

because they regarded them as including the relative pronouns within

But the Kannada language has no relative pronouns

themselves.

its

whatever;

pronouns

ad

>* (>?k) are not

wd<s* (o3Je>s3^o),

remark), and the

letter b,

w^o

w^jrfj (ofc^sSrij),

(oararf),

relative,

relative pronouns' place

by the so-called relative participles.

(o3K>rf?i>),

but interrogative

102,

8,

somehow supplied

is

267 regarding the interro-

(Cf.

gatives.)

The

first

is

the preterite

or

past relative participle (bhutavatikrit,

175-179), the second comprises the present and future relative participles

180-186) which have the same form.

(bhavishyantikrit,

The past

175.
1,

relative participle (bhutavatikrit) is formed

by removing the

final

yu of the past

into es, e.g.

^ra

(of sgjscsj), OJN (of

changing

it

participle

155-164) or

or esrforfr
<o^), wrfodr

or ao?3c3r
or
(of es^orior, ess^odor), ttitir
(of fcridor, &*?ocl>r), ?3J3?c5r
(of a^cio),

w^

3J3fe),
^rfdo\ od
(of

(of
.,

u
'2.

or

c3 to

by adding
s<i?,d

e.g.

^dr

(of
V

<$<$
TJ

w?^), FSe^

-'
o" ^4,

ca

(of

rof &od>).
v

rfi#
-arf,
O

^s^,;

189;

'st

166-168),

}'
1

aoftd (of
^r\}. Fo^d, doeo-d,
A v
la-

The oi might, howe\er,

and other nouns.

"^

?j^
t3^,
tfra, ^oSra,
-' eA^ra,
o'
ca'
ca'
<a

O
W
the short past participle ending in

A-"ur

^od;

=3ofS

e/.

^^ (of^^oj, ^QJ^
3
(of 3^), <o5 d (of

in this oast j ,

c/.

'tfoiici.

'

189;

be merely formative like the

>

5
in r53^, ^)25J, tf<3 ,

by changing the

3,

of the

final

into es, e.g. 'acid

(of -3,3:3),

negative

^%3

(of

170. 171)

(cj

participle

J ^Cj
'a^cS),
c

(of

wrtrf,

17S and regarding the use

Regarding the moaning see

363.

176.

The formation

?rlo is

irregular, for, instead of sftcS, ^e^ftd, 3oJS?ftd, they have

of the

participle of

relative

past

formed from the irregular past participles

166) by means of syncope, the original forms being
(
wc$ occasionally takes also the forms w^ (
3oJS?oJo.
292)
O
the consonants ^<, c=5*
or yrs ( 293, Tamil =
{3, Telugu S3o5j?i,

3oJ3?c5.

or t?rs

being used for c>;

dative singular)

explanation of

c/.

the remark concerning

^, ^* and n*

141 under

in

and probably also that of a?3 too (see

278, 2, the
The
form
of
remark
212,
original
2).
5?S; c/.
wc3, w'z.

as
in the old rustic
still as
c5,
wcdj,
yctfj,
O and, by syncope,
O appears
forms yoi3^)?3 etc. and S5c3a)^ etc.. used for the third person present
o
still in the
In the same
modern dialect ( 196, cf. &((&,
195).
'

used for the third person

dialect there is also the old rustic form
ssoS^,
neuter singular of the present tense (as to form originally of the past or
preterite tense) which

3o

esrto

you* (the irregular past

is

193) in combination with the

(=t>rfo)

183,

see also the ytf in

remark;

7,

212,

remark

IT

and

their

plurals

things, etc., see e.g.

wo*,

they

calls the

102,

(rnon or

s,

y,

3o

in

205.

55 v, in

past relative participle in

e$o

(es), he,

women),

e),

533860

e. .7.

she, erotfo.

s<>^^

TJ^, they (children,

254) a ^ja^dStfxS* or i^Oorl

(

sssj

IT

combination with any one of the terminations

it,

2, the

203, and the

184, the y^o.o in

The grammarian Kesava

177.

166) and
Regarding the form

participle,

of emphasis.

68,

i),

also

(of sra

the genitive singular, for instance, becoming

s^acj:riS, and the genitive plural ssDadC, sraacSj^eS.

Further instances are e3sjo fof wocS),' ^^rfo sror? c3o. ((Y. e. (/. SS 180.
>
'
,

33e>adtf,

185.

193.

198 under

3.

"O

254.)

[Observe

either the past relative participle or the

The terminations

and

(>

that

bhutavatiki

noun formed from

^J3o

(in

may mean

it.]

wv*" appear also as ZJQ and Zo"^; wo find

a sasana of 707 A. D.), 5i^ 9 dj3o (in

and in one of 887 A. D.), and u^Ja V* ^JS^JSv*

c.//.

it

iteana of 8G6 A.

(i"

1>.

^ ^asana of about

112
778 A.

For

D.).

a,iJ>s rfj

we have

(in

there occurs also

sroci)

&c3o, as there

is

e.

g.

twice

a sasana between 597 and 608 A. D.); for the plural

also &,o* according to

30*

q. v.

185,

Instead of the above-mentioned terminations which, except the pronouns

erod)

and

are

ero^),

pronominal forms, also demonstrative pronouns

used in the mediaeval dialect; in the

themselves are very frequently

modern one only pronouns are

<&& and

of the mediaeval dialect are

Two

in use.
ss

(for tso).

The demonstrative pronouns used

dialect are sssjo,
,

esdo*,

w3,

53rfc&,

3s3il>,

esrf,

yx.5^),

S353),

for

See

the

in

mediaeval
,

117. 119. 121. 122. 134.

3, S3d>, ezSdo, e$3) (see

erftfo,

ancient dialect.

krillingas

j\)<3o,
W^o, W^rfj, wg, esrfs?*, ?Jdtfo,
and those in the modern one yd^o, S53,

ss^o and e?^ are met with as

136).

additional pronominal forms

also in the

suffixes for krilliugas

254.

But not only pronominal forms and pronouns are

suffixed to the

67

past relative participles, but nearly every declinable base (see

is

used after them,

e.

WC3 ?

=5e)0dor.

used

after

o
See

WC

SJJS^CJ

>3i3 ,
ro

03i^,

S5^
f>

282 regarding declinable and other adverbs

363 the translation of the above instances.

them, and

Further instances see in

254.

Kesava terms the instances

in

which a relative past participle

is

followed

by a declinable base (noun), consecutive compounds (gamakasamasa see

2, d and cf.
185).
178.
participle

The author

of the present

be the genitive

to

e>,

the primitive

grammar
of the

singular

formed by means of the pronominal

case

termination

suffixes

the

of

so-called

d> and ^o

yS

past

participle

169), in which

141),

would have

124).

With regard to escS ( 171) it is to be remarked that <o, the particle

emphasis, was removed in order to form the genitive ending in es, <'<:.

Compare the explanation

179.

Now
$5)

'of

253,

considers the past relative

genitive

been employed without the usual augment

of

seq.)

g.

the

turning

back

to

175

'of the having promised',

having

closely

185.

of the relative present-future participle in

united',

$S?J3
~

seq.

we

translate

e.

g.

'of tlie having said',

'of

the

having

feared',

113

add

'of the having gone';

not being' or 'of the not having

'of the

been', wowrf 'of the not fearing' or 'of the not having feared'.
33e)Qrfo

sung',
v

:i

e.

man

of the having sung',

a man

i. e.

or sang; 53e>ac3<p* (ssej&d+ssv*), 'a woman of the having

woman who has sung or sang; 33>a:i>ck

who has sung

i.

means

(o3e>&c34-e3o)

(33e>ac5+tf\>ck),

child of the

having sung',

a child which has sung or sang;

e.

i.

esSui ^ja^c, 'a place of the having played',

a place where (somebody)

i. e.

has played or played; s^rod ^.ODrlo, 'a colour of ashes of the having
smeared with', i. e. a colour of ashes with which (somebody) has smeared
or smeared

being proper',

man

the body);

a.

(e.

i.

e.

s$t>Cjo
is

ra

c3+ ^o}'' 'a

re

eaten

',

i.

e,

man who

man

not

of the

'aocSo ('3^c5+s5oj, 'a

not proper;

of the (something) not being',

5A)rs rfo fsAiC-3

v

man

'a

(e5^)rf+S5o),
*
CO

CO

man who

i.

of the

e. a man who lacks

(something) ;
not eating' or 'of the not having

does not eat or has not eaten

s^jsc^cj

=503^*,

which (anybody) does not

or
not
did
cultivate, or has not cultivated,
cultivate, i. e. a field which
nobody cultivates, etc.; yrtrf ^OJOFO 'an affair of the not being possible

'a

field

of the not cultivating',

i. e.

field

i.

an

e.

which

affair

is

impossible.

Regarding the use of the present time in translating the so-called

relative past participle see

169. 170.
Note.

In the modern dialect a change of

181, note

a),

having cooked
Ofl (/.

e.

',

e.

into &

is

occasionally met with

(cf.

w&a^tfo stands for aSJ^tfo (e6^ + e;tt0), a woman of the

a woman who has cooked ^ftAfl^Ort (f. e. ^Qf^aQrt) ^jaB-e^
-

g.

i. e.

^jaSJ^Ort)

them who give than

180.

OD^tSdJ^ they say "there

them who take".

^ja?&3
for

(is)

much more gain

The present and future relative participles (bhavishyantikrit,

for

174)

that are identical as to shape and receive their respective meaning only

from the context, are formed by means

Regarding their meaning see

of the suffixes

185. 186.

See

5j

s3

and

ao

364.

Instances of the present-future relative participle formed by means

of 53
1,

suffix is

such as regard verbal themes ending

added directly

are wtf (of

w~),

sruiJ

in

consonants in which the

to the theme, in the ancient

(of

ewW"),

enjatf

and mediaeval

(of y\jav*),

J3tf

(Of

dialect,

?0,

W5&3,
UO*),

^^i>,
>-

II

114
?ras3F, i)?dr.

(of wo*),

with final

*> see

183,

Themes ending

in

183, 2.4.

QA

io

about themes

3.

o*

d by

optionally double the

See

^r.

371,

a*,

e.g.

3.

Remark.
About

?ra3 for
see
zraoijj

163, remark.

such as regard monosyllabic verbal themes that end in a vowel or

are a vowel, in which the suffix is added directly to the theme, in the
2,

ancient and mediaeval dialect, are =5-5^

(of ^e>V

fc3 occurs

3,
eru,

in

3^3

(see

3^-

the mediaeval dialect has also

such as regard verbal themes that also in the ancient dialect end in
suffix is added directly to the theme, in the three dialects,

which the

are enackrf
(of srodo),

See No.

is

z3?s3,

ancient form being

dialect, the

only in the mediaeval

183, 6); instead of

>3SSj,

and

183,

tfocfcrf

(of ^ozi>),

i%3,

^do3,

s^rio^,

2. 4. 7. 8.

such as regard verbal themes ending in 'a or <0 in which the suffix
4,
added directly to the theme, in the ancient and mediaeval dialect, are
(of

5,

y^

),

'aS^d,

=5^,

'aetfsi,

3s?d,

such as regard verbal themes with

final

^a^, ^)0d; o&3^

<0

(of

which drop this vowel

before the suffix, in the mediaeval dialect and occasionally also in the

ancient one, are

^drf, =5^3,

wdd

^r&3rf,

sasana of 1019 A.

(of e<3),

wdd

iJS^d, 23^^,

D.).

Cf.

(of yd),

2oJ3^d,

y^ (of
SoJS^d;

e3$),

^^^

^dd,

<^S5d,

(of f^d,

in a

157.

such as regard verbal themes that may change their final &3o into
&5< before the suffix, in the mediaeval dialect, are rtssdr (of r\&3* = r{fc,3j),
C/". No. 3 and
183, 2.
6,

Remark.

The present
,

but SA><

in

participle of the verb

the three dialects.

wv s

Cf.

is

anomalously formed, it being not

20
194, remark 1.

243, #,

115
180 we have found only one form of the present-future
participle with 53 in the modern dialect, viz. that of No. 3, in which the
suffix is added directly to themes that end in tf\i also in the ancient
In

181.

dialect; let us

That

1,

themes with

now

of No.
final

give the other forms:

180

in

consonants

forms by attaching

it

(cf.

a euphonic e/u to the

and then

48. 166)

suffixing the ;j,

formation which occasionally occurs also in the mediaeval dialect.

w^j = *>*),
Instances belonging to both dialects are tftfosi
(of

(of

Instances belonging to the mediaeval one alone are

Instances belonging to the modern one

Or

or

Arfo^, udl)rf,

That

2,

OfWod, Traokod,

themes

to which a euphonic
has been added, suffixing the

5>o3oj> (of

forth),

<ge)OJoj)

(of ?SjseoJoo),

ero

53 to

erorsorf,
rs

^J3^J,3, ^rJJ^J,

182.)

ggjaoko^rf. (C/-

it

the erv, e.g. -dsoijorf (of -^oJoo, to bring

ri?c&>o3

=grJ3ex> SJ,

forms from originally monosyllabic

(by means of o&* as a help to enunciation)

180

of No. 2 in

are 'adosj,

alone

oJffo.d, =ge)K)Od, ^JSOJJOrf Or ^JSOJOJoSl

z3^ojoo^

?SeoJjo

(offl?o3oo),

(of 23?o3ou),

Ojsoio}^ (of

(of ^o^oijo).
3,

That of No.

180

in

it

of o53* as a help to enunciation)

9
(of estt ), 3s?o3oo3

forms by adding a euphonic e/v (by means

and then suffixing the 3, e. g.

(ofae), ^oaoJoorf, ^jQoJood; ^do^oorf (of 3d),

Notes.
a)

and the

suffix

(=

eruditfjS),

J8o^

first

and modern dialect the final SA> of the verbal theme

3 are pretty often changed into to or L>, e.g.

In the mediaeval

?,

^ri&o,

^d^,

5jCJ8?, 23?co'J3,

^Prto'js (ao^rio'JS)

uSo5J3,

tfdoSjs?.

wrtjs?

179, note; 202. 205,

(Cf.

3,

pers. plural.)

In the mediaeval and occasionally in the modern dialect the final w of

b)
the verbal theme and the suffix 3 may be changed into y\0, e. g. 'S^a (= t)tfo3),
oortja (=<oerto3), 33363^

pers. plural.)

c)

in

(=333ewi),

^do s&strtoa

Some vulgar forms

ssarf

in

TOO^

(=?io^).S). (C/.

^cio (that is found in the

which the participle ends

a South-Mahratta school-book,

e..

g.

$&

(in

tjij

202. 205,3,

modern
in

H?^^rfo),

y,

dialect)

first

may be

that are found

OJ3Ci

(in

15*

116
and 3oos^
into

etc.).

(Of.

The second

182.
is

by the change of the &> of No. a

and 3oo^ stand for ^&&, siraci/a and 3oo^ (^tfjsd&i,
the remark in
211, 5.
187, under 2). Cf.
are. to be explained

^o^d^o),

(in

so that ^tf, a.rad

added

to four of the

^pr^

(Of 5e>c^),

tfuco*)
*

tO

(Of S^fvg*), 33e>ra (Of 5J3tt>f^); oir^ (Of <0^),

183,

/".

monosyllabic themes that end in pg*

end in
(nanta), viz. erur? (of

four of them that

to

&, which
(nanta) and

suffix for the present-future participle is

3^

5.

becomes also

and always so

in the mediaeval dialect,

rodo

in

t/J

modern one; ^rs. becomes =5=5)^0 in the modern one; ^^ and 3^

w
tJ
to
.w
and
in the ancient dialect, and always so in
rfo
appear also as cOdo.
w
to
the mediaeval and modern one
the ancient WI>^ gets also the form
the

to

Of

W) do
10

The present-future participle of the themes ^03^ and s5^ the

author of the present grammar has not yet met with. Regarding the
other modern form of the participle of srops*, ^ejfo5
<o^ and 3^
,

see

i.

181,

The present-future participle

ancient dialect

is

^J5^

(180,

of ^J3<? s

i)

therein

appears

which in the

^osta)

(=$JS<^o,

as

also

^J3^o

is

oJ

frequently =$j?doJ in the mediaeval dialect, and

in the

modern one.
The third

183.
is

used

for

suffix

the

is

WF

(cf.

be doubled by a tf after the

and see

371,

In the

It

is sJ.

mediaeval
}

modern

dialect see

In
viz.

'asJr

^J3^r

No.

10

o*,

e.

(of rijg^o*),

of this
g.

^o<),

(of

The

paragraph).

^^ r,

^si r.

^SJF

and ?3^r

Cy.

sj

No. 10,

3.

appear as <as^ ^3j

vowel,

i)-

present-future participle

(of wo*), ^JSSJF (of ^J2o*),

of the ancient dialect

??D*)

2,

(181,

"tfjatf^sj

In some themes ending in a* (repha), viz.

(of ^D^),

may

modern form

1,

(of

Its other

occurs in this form also

dialect
2ori

181,

'asjr,

and

W3JF and

^jasj (for
^J3sj).

C/.

^jssjr

184.

generally

Regarding the

i.

some themes ending

S33JF

^3Jr,

(of wC3*),

in

&3

(rakara)

^JS^rlF (of ^J3?S3*),

with a preceding long

c3e>sJr

(of

^S5

),

and

F (of
of the ancient dialect.
WSJF and JJS^SJF are found
rfj3^3<)
also in the mediaeval one.
The sj may be doubled, e. g. ygj r, ^ja^si F
(see

371,

3).

117
W3JF

is

modern

in the

tfsj

dialect,

and not unfrequently also

in the

mediaeval one.

mediaeval

the

in

form their participle by means of

cSe>9*, etc. occasionally

slreCS*,

e.

dialect,

g.

sfosjjr

<3e>rfr,

180,

(see

When

6).

3>eC3*, ?55>t5*, 3je3*, etc. are used with the final y\/ their participles
are ^J3e3osj, cJe)S5od, slsst^J^, etc. in the three dialects (see
180, 3).
y

In

3,

themes ending

appears twice as

&?&>

themes with

-v

-S-^CO,

(dakara),

viz.

to

The present-future participle

The use of si

some extent optional.

and

z3e0

rfjsCO

?oJ3W

180,

i.

substitute (adesa) of

(of ?dj3^j)

occur also in

z3rt&>),

of the ancient

the mediaeval

one.

234.

Cy.

etc.

form their participle also by means of d, W2.

etc. in

the three dialects.

Cf. 180,

3.

In four themes ending in $* (nakara, cf.

18^), viz.
of
the
ancient
dialect.
A)?^
(of &*?). ?ja?fi

5,
5.

oJ

'

7,

In themes with
6, 3;

^e^o), Jjs^sj

OoC3J3J (of

(of w^*j,

OJ

In the themes

165,

tJtf

6,

(lopa, cf.

(of

of
in

oJ

J'

it is a

See

ftSoC^ (of a^odo), tfrf^ (of

?3J3erfo),

(of si55<>),

sJJe)!*^

&pJ)

viz.

Qj

?5Jg?&^(of

(of z3^o),

dialect.

Kesava),

Sabdanusasana.

in the

was perhaps

final &3*

according to

(lakara,

In themes ending in &3* (lakara) when

4,

t3^

3*

d-fW^J of the ancient dialect.

S5ri0.,
OJ

cs*

in

i,

and

jgp,

final rtj

211,7.

^)o?d03J

t,3J (cf.

180,

2),

;^3i.

(ganta), in which case the rtj suffers elision

10), vte.

(of Jjsv'rlo),

o&3orfo),

v^.

335j (of s^rlo), ^J33i (of 3J5rto),

e3^3J

>o^o

(of zS^rlo),

(of Donjorlo)

(of

These

of the ancient dialect.

participial forms are occasionally found likewise in the mediaeval one,

once 3oJ3?3J for ^j?i^3J. The
of the themes with a short initial may be

doubled, e.g. IvO^sj, z3^3j (see

All themes ending in

rt>

37 1,3).

Cf. tJsra o* in the

remark.

form their participle also by means of

wrtasj, 3e>rt>s5, 3ja^rtas3, etc. in the three dialects (cf.

180,

;j,

e.g.

s).

Remark.

The
or

W3o

present-future participle of ^rto

(

176. 184)

in

(/. e.

the ancient and mediaeval dialect.

(sutras 496. 502) teaches that its participle

can substantiate
dialect, viz.

wrios) often appears as esj

becomes also

WSJ

The Sabdanusasana
we
5J
(or O5J);

statement only by one instance which belongs to the ancient

5
by wzs^o* (for arfo in a sasana between 680 and 696 A. D/), tbe
its

third person plural of the future of wrto (see

201,

1).

The

occasionally used

118
184 might be adduced

in

W3j (of

^Jj

the Sabdanusasana's

1.

In themes that have been formed by means of the suffixes

8,

or

appears

t5es<)

in support of

also

the paragraph under No.

in

(santa) whether they be causative, transitive or intransitive

which case the

in

151),

WrIoaFSJ

final

S3rt!

(of S3rtjF?oO),

(of ao?i)), yuftsj (of erofi?i>),

Kanuada

suffers elision.

T$J

(Of

(of

^5}, ^si

<o,

S5rt)?oO),
>i5 ;d,

148.

instances are

(of

instances of themes formed from Samskrita are e5oft?^03J

(of
,

>-A

^J

tp

The
d^3J, ^03J, ^^3J.
instances are found in the ancient and mediaeval dialect.
The 3j may be
23?o3J

^p^SJ,

doubled,

e.

^asJ

g.

<SJ

^B?J

wOsJ
^J

Osj

All themes with final <a?oj

of

rf

180,

3),

e.

(Of

233?oJ),

rfj)a3J
oj

and

sSo

?Ai^o3o35

^j

371,

(see

oo

3).

form their participle also by means

9
yw?oorf, ^SO ^)^,

g.

ti

in

&>3, eSnj^od, dD?jod,

the

three dialects.
In the themes ess^ and

9,

before
rule

^2. esSsi, ^^si

gj,

changing their final en; into 'a

(Sabdanusasana sutras 473. 480. 513). This

all.

?$),

^<Dsc! would, according to No.

8,

paragraph),

viz.

JJ^!F,

^JJSJF,

sjdsjr (of
erfo*),

^^3JF,

3J?d3JF,

or
184.

wa^F,

The

Originally

it

substitute of

etc.

fourth

sj

may have had

No.

e.'ua^F,

oS?3JF

of this
eroAosJr,

(Sabdanusasana

y^sj
Os)

F, eroasi.F
oJ

371,

3).

are s3<idF or w^^$ F, ?5asJF or

180, i;

suffix

does not

lodsJF appears in the Jaimiui bharata.

after the o*, e.g.

Their usual forms with

(cf.

(of ySo*),

^>a3JF, t3^3JF,

sutra 511) in the ancient dialect.

may be doubled

^asJr

3^

be regular forms of

Optionally in eleven of the themes ending in o*

10,

sj

which the verb

not in the Sabdamanidarpana, in

is

occur at

The

these

3^,

of

371,3).
the

present- future

the form of

so

participle

too, as it first

00

is

ao.

appears as a

(of ^o '), W3^ (of

(of ao*),
see
183, i. 7, remark). s3
appears
zoo*, see
optionally
189)
(or yjj,
as esao in the ancient and mediaeval dialect (cf.
223). ^So (for "asi),

in

yjj

(of wrb),

^33!

^^

occur only in the mediaeval one, in which

^3o (for 33J ), wao (for
wsjj
there are likewise z3eao
and ajs^ao (for ^ja^s
(for z3?Ss3 )

The mediaeval

dialect occasionally shows the forms esao

("for
V

the remark about

cf.

3J

about theme wso* see

119

in

183,

and zsaso

would appear, true explanation

it

so-called present-future participle is to take

nouns, an explanation which

is

analogous

There aie numerous verbal nouns

3oj to

verbal themes (see

the genitive singular by

circumstance that

This

243)

means

many

178 regarding

169) and well suits to

Kannada formed by

in

the

of

to be the genitive of verbal

it

to that given in

the so-called past participle (see also

and

or a ZJSSJF;

zjjj

(for

52. 170. 210).

The simplest and, as

185.

7)

its

suffixing

use.

3^

such nouns allow the formation of

of its primitive termination

of the verbal

nouns used

to

141,

i).

form the present-

future participle do not exist nowadays apart from that use, constitutes

no valid objection

A number

to the offered

explanation.

nouns ending in
of which the genitive with
final es would exactly form the present-future participle, are wSS9 ^
9
9
(knowing, genitive s^S^d), w^o ^ (perishing, genitive y!^ ^), ^55*3)
of verbal

^e^

(stabbing),

^) (remaining),

would be such as end

What

in

^0^) (begging), toy;^ (being pleased),

See

5y>.

grammarian Kesava

the

243, A,

states

participle that in combination with suffixes

and vficyalinga or viseshyadhiualinga,

regarding the past relative

it forms a krit or krillinga

in other

words a declinable verbal

177. 200), he does state likewise regarding the present-future

base (see

participle in combination with suffixes,

krillinga

is a. 24.

174 and see

(cf.

it

forming the bhavishyantikrit or

177).

The pronominal forms and pronouns mentioned in 177 (cf. 193. 200)
are the suffixes also for this participle, and besides nearly every declinable
base
is

used after

is

formed

(cf.

adverbs see

The

282.

suffixes

eso

=sfol

o,

316,

i.

(330). 364.

&,

and &v*;

a sasana between 680 and 696

o3

(in a sasana of 707 A. D.),

and OoS&V*
tj

(in

one of about

of ZuO* in yrta o*
<o

ero&e.D*

The primitive meaning- of the so-called present-future participle

179), if derived from the genitive singular of verbal nouns, will

186.
(cf.

ni^JS o (in

5.

177, also as

as in

The plural sso* has also the form

D.).
'
a sasana between 750 and 814 A. I).).

778 A.
(in

254. 282. 298,

es^* appear,
o3

&&33o

2,

See further

and

thus we find s3W 9 s3po,

A. D.),

by a noun, a consecutive compound

About its combination with
253,
d).

If it is followed

it.

177 and see

120
appear from the following instances,

man

of

now

knowing (either

yS^rfo

viz.

or in future),

i.

(S5^3

d+

he or a

S3o),

he who knows or

e.

will

know; w&^v* (S55 s3+ a^j, she or a woman of knowing, i.e. she who
knows or will know; esC^^cSo (eC3 9 rf +
it or a child, etc. of
ero<3o),
9
knowing, i.e. it which knows or will know; y&f^sJo* (S55 3+ wo*), they
3

or people (male or female) of knowing,

9

S55 5j^j

know

(<sC3

d+

i. e.

they

who know

they or children, etc. of knowing,

SAiS^j),

or will

i. e.

know;

they which

know; ^d^pS* S555 9 do, he of knowing Kannada, i.e. he

one) who knows Kannada; sSo^d 5)O*, grass of eating, i. e. grass

(or

or will

which (an animal) eats or will eat; 3s?^ ?o*, water of clearing, i.e.
water that becomes clear or will become clear; Jjs^gj ^fS^do, an earornament of shining, i.e. an ear-ornament which shines or will shine;
JJS^SJF

5^,do,

a letter of appearing,

a letter which appears or will

i. e.

appear.
In the above instances actually existing nouns appear the genitive

now

of which presents the participle; in the

are to be assumed to exist

,

following instances nouns

an
he of being (or having)
ero^ o
(of
ero^,^)
she of being (or having);
it of being
(or having); qS^sl?"
srutfOjdo,
riches of being he, i. e. he who has riches; oOS?c5o S53J,
an $33^
:

(of

Ci^o,

an animal of being young,

an animal which

young; &&
a black bee which

i. e.

is

a black bee of humming, i. e.

a
S3ido^)) 3.>>o
(of
or will hum; zosiF
a
time of coming, i. e. time
(of
zod)F) ^>s;o,
which comes; sjjsciorf (of a
a business of making, i. e.
sjjsd)^) s-soioFo,
a business which (somebody) makes or will make; ^fsbsj
a
(of
ft^os^))
tSFD^orfo, a chowrie of waving, i. e. a chowrie which (somebody) waves or
,

hums

will
will

wave; sfosO

make; SoJS^rtjd^^o

will go;

do,

o* (of a sjjs^o

it

marians

3oJ3^rlorf)),

i.

e. it

What Europeans
call

i. e.

which goes or

o&e>$r,

i. e.

call

the

purpose or scope of (a verb's)

explanation of the infinitive see

There are four kinds of the

in

they of making,

)}

3J3?r1orfsJ^o, she of going,

of going,

187.

(of

the

i. e.

he

of going,

she

who goes

they

i. e.

who make

or

he who goes or

or will go;

2oJ3?rbs3

will go.
infinitive of

meaning
action,

Kannada gram-

a verb

of a verb,

and then the

^-o&e) o o3J3f^^.

object,

Regarding the

188.
infinitive, viz.

The first infinitive is formed by suffixing ?3e3* to the verbal theme,

1,
which case, by euphonic junction (
213 seq.), a theme's final eru

disappears, e.y. -^ds* (of

^o),

VOC323* (of

ni^,

3$&

(of

3V),

121

(of

When
as in

the theme ends in

or

wo* may be

<>j,

5,

in the three dialects,

gsojoo* (of

^ja^cxJoo*

(of Jj^),

215,

2,

themes that are a vowel or end

s
ieoij3 (of ie), ^eoJoe?
Ojsoioy* (of DJS).
(of z3e),

eSeoke^

letters d. ^. k. m.

Some monosyllabic themes ending

kalpa) the

i.

letters/,

2,

Ssxtfoo*' (of
^s),

9),

&e),

(of

3
rioaoko*, ^CS

215,

Qf.

Infinitives with e3G* of monosyllabic

in a vowel, are

3^ :^3,

sse^ofco* (of es^S9 ),

e. //.

oi^J, ^ooio^, do^oJo^.

OJotf (of

C/.

suffixed immediately,

wa* (a form that was occasionally used in the ancient dialect,

letter a), but generally an enunciative o& is used between, in

=3*6

215,

sjoo^o* (of rfoo^), ft^ozto* (of

s3je>:3:>),

before e$o',

ocb*

e.

in

oii

^jacrfjo* or

.(/.

optionally double (dvitvavi-

^oJJoO*

^o&

(of

),

^J50JJ

a* or ^JSoJOc-s* (of ^J3o3o), rioioe/ or flokoe? (of floss*); the o3J* of the
four themes eroolJ*, ?3o&% zoodJ* and ?ojcxi:* is always doubled (nityadvitva)
before

yuoJJc-^, ^oiooSJ*, woJo c

viz.

it,

S3

and

The

JoooJJo^*.

dissyllabic

"u

theme

wbodo* optionally doubles

215,

Cy.

200*,

(sutra 234) suffixes

viz.

w^de^

sscte*,

?5e;

under No.

3-56

(c/.

theme

to the lengthened
4

of

^o*

of this paragraph).

210.

Of.

In the
(see
erv,

ofc*,

or

0cdoo*

^'2.

7, e.

Nagavarma
and

its

modern

315); in
a form that

all
is

5oortsx), 'adfyo,

w^

dialect

other cases

used only in the

is
it

uses ?se>J,

i.

so-called

?5o* with a

e.

passive

euphonic

not unfrequently found in the medieval one too,

^^uo, ^dex>

c3>^ri5jp,

e.

g.

and occasionally also

2^-S-?j^j,
**n

in the later ancient one,

(in

e. ^/.

a sasana of 1123 A. D.),

A. D.).
In

the

infinitive

oitfd,
tr

96,

Cf.

remark; see

0^&?j^>j,

sS^Wd,
* fioaojjd,
CT

the infinitive with

dialect (see

tsex)

??

(see

is

g.

from

formed

The dative

or

or

<&$

in the

wdoJo^
3^,^,
v
1^

or

(=wrteL

of

sasana of 112:;

A.

modern

wdoiJ^.

we meet with the curious forms

in a

artsi,

e.g.

//),

the

-O"

&$4
t

is

120, letters a.

formed by means of
e.

dative

^sri^d, ^^0?od.
XT

XT

In the later ancient dialect

(=Sjprt&3d),

dialect

rioSiSojo^

121, letter c),

tortwo^

of

wrt^o, 'aD^o
a
sfisana
of 1182
(in

ep-s>?oe;j,

cO&3r(^)0

$ 121, a.

ancient and mediaeval

with esu* by means

d^-^^o,

S5S?aJos;j,

D.: see

tjpritfejjtf
jj

1'Jl.

Dat.).
16

0,

122
About

53

e*

208

The second

2,

infinitive

Kesava states that

final

of

be compared.
ends in the vowel

is to

The grammarian

59.

PJ has originated by the elision (lopa) of the

This statement is only in so far of value, as it makes

3G*.

this

any rule about the

of suffixing the

way

unnecessary, because

es

it

is

identical with that of eso*.

This infinitive

3d

zod

In the infinitive formed by

sort of lengthening

disappears

is

allowed

from themes with

53

modern

the

in

dialect,

in

(cf.

An abnormal

for

seo9 aJo, ^d?

infinitive of

dialect.

Of.

$&?&

=$J3s?

in

and

<o

which the

&

final

<3

the accusative and genitive under letter c in

^CO9 ? may be used

modern

Instances are ^JSo3o or

used in the three dialects.

is

or riooJo

130), e.g.

for ^doio.

is

(&/3VL)

joften

used in the

206.

in

=j^

172;

=ffjs^,

Remark.

The author once entertained

infinitive

(or verbal

Mahratta country,
of

&o?c53^

55,

e.

(for

the opinion (see Dictionary under

noun, see
g.

188) ending
Srad^ or ^rac^, sod^ or

?6J3?C53^),

Srijs^

noun) with

final

^>raciJ3,

j3J3?Z33,

of

^^^

into

with

ii

is (or

i>

a, see

(for

are)

2J6j3,

see

made

The

243, 4,

&

4) that the

in the

South-

W$^ and with the lengthening

Such
33J3^, Nudigattu, page 36).

20.

27),

i. e.

cSjse^o^, 3;l>oi3, the

in the

w3

present instances from

being changed into

?*>

and

i>,

and then again into

and w, viz. sirarf, 2J^,
and see i^ in Dictionary; concerning the change

F3j3?dJ2t, ^^J|^?,

181, note

(c/.

^ra^:>

is:

had a dative

3J3C&S (= sjadoad), ajdod,

viz.

<$

common use there but, instead from the infinitive (or verbal
55, we now derive them from a verbal noun formed by means

dative forms are in

of the suffix

(for

in

c,

An instance
177. 185. 193).
jiraQ ecS, a word
(or words)
eo)^?^

117, a, Norn, and Ace.;

OcS^?^ ^raQ 5j3, s3J3rf

for saying, boiled rice is

made

for eating.

is represented by the verbal theme itself, and

in
It always immediately
found
the
three dialects.
occasionally
9
9
oio
Ozl>
<a3 9 53>a3oo, =
precedes a verb, ^e^

3,

third infinitive

is

(=^^3

333

z&),

123
The fourth

4,

The way
S3j* and

of annexing the

This infinitive of which

55.

same as

the

dialect;

it

or

=&J3s3,

modern poetry

in

vuf^

=&<$,

gsjci

suffixes the

*3

3<>o3o or

once to the long base of Sc*, as

Nagavarma's g^do* under No.

(12, 43; cf.

188.

The force

of the so-called infinitive in

by the following particles:

to eat;

to,

denoting

^cSoJoo*,

^^oi), to

3Q&,

210).

(satisaptami or

335)^53*,

ss-sjl,

Kannada may be expressed

meaning, as ready to go,

futurity;

so as to,

so that;

dj^^e^,

Zjjdti, to

to bring;

33,

^c^.

walk;

so as to fall down, so that

down;

and

end,

purpose,

(somebody or something) perishes

=arj3ol),

it

o, from a meaning

condition

to, in its prepositional

at the time that, when, while, e.g.

make;

i;

calls the infinitive with

or

see

188, remark; 286. 365).

sati, see

zode;*,

be3

206

3?3

not unfrequently has, the locative state

fit

365. 366,

7, e.

The grammarian Kesava

it

to

belongs

of

t>3o3j or

sc&o

The Basavapurana
has

i,

.a.

identical with that

meaning and use is nearly

the ancient and mediaeval

the

found also

is

is

a).

Instances are

215,

No.

that of

occasionally

remark

themes

to verbal

,0

the theme with the suffix

of

consists

infinitive

^d,

so as to perish,

or perished;

53

^zS,

falls or fell

sings or sang;

while (something or somebody) comes or came.

short infinitive with

^doSo,

^dofoej*,

(somebody or something)

when (somebody or something)

so that

206,

Cf. the use of the

170. 171. 210.

in

But these special significations are not primitive; they are derived
somehow from the verbal noun which the infinitive originally was and
very often

Cf. the verbal

still is.

noun

in

100,

169. 173. 205, and also in the so-called passive

That the
is

verbal

infinitive

noun,

'grieving' and
SAJ9CSo*,

thrash,

and

is

its

use in

an indisputable

fact,

and

'to

swell,

because

e.

'ploughing' and

etc.',

165.

315).

ending in ese^ (Ws;o, expressing 'being

'to grieve, etc.', voCuO*,

'swelling'

and

g.

',

'condition')

e5023*

means

'to plough, etc.',

2o^,^, 'thrashing' and 'to

^f

etc.',

'to lie

^JScSo*, 'joining'

down,

a dative (see

etc.',

187,

i).

and

and because

'to join,

etc.',

sidsp, 'lying

down'

this infinitive is declinable, as it

has

124
The character
to the

and

second

'to

'lifting

etc.',

up' and 'to

'coming' and

final

5,

be attributed

also

means

as e.g. <&&

ssc^, 'compressing' and 'to compress,

and 'to gain,
lift up, etc.',
f{^>, 'gaining'

'ending' and 'to end,

&jd,

with

infinitive, viz. that

cook,

can

of being originally a verbal noun

etc.',

<o^,

etc.

'putting on' and 'to put on,

Jjs^,

etc.',

'to come,

'cooking'

'losing'

?3J)o,

etc.',

and

'to

3?ti,
etc.',

lose, etc.'.

Verbal nouns, however, corresponding to the

i, b,
singular.
formed by 3 and the insertion of o&* between it and themes
ending in <, and o (as to form e. g. s^odo, Nfiooo), are nowadays
scarcely met with in Kannada, although a few nouns end in Q& e. 9205,

Cf.

infinitive

^JSrf o3o,
a

eo53 9 o3o,
3ps3ojj,
J
CO

##ok, 2Je3ojj,
CO

We

sJ3?3o&.

think that ojo

CO

has been superseded by so or ^ in verbal nouns. There are numerous

verbal nouns that end in so (see
243, A, 27) and some that end in rf
243, A, 20), and, besides, of the above nouns, zJ3s3o& appears
(see
oo

also as

sJ3dCO 2o,

and

as

3J5e3o3o

present verbal participle

Remember

SuJ5s32o.

PO

172)

not unfrequently used instead of

is

At the same time we may conjecture that

instead of themes with the formative crfo, the simple
033

s.

was preferred

that in the

CO

verbal

for

nouns,

theme ending

in

and

,0

The

third infinitive, being nothing else but the verbal theme itself

which

is

100. 187,

(cf.

very often used as a noun, requires no special remark.

Some verbal nouns which

that with

final

eO,

are

etc.',

^ri,

^d

'laughing' and 'to laugh,

etc.',

^S3

etc.',

wsCO3

(or

3oJSG5 3

),

'-cultivating'

infinitive

'to

i.

e.

'a

=5^

love, etc.',
w
and 'to throw
down'
'throwing
etc.', ^J3s3, 'killing' and 'to kill,

etc.',

'joining'

s^s6,

and

'to join,

'a load for the head' and 'to carry on the head,

and

correspond to the infinitive

oj^

etc.',

'a chip' and 'to chip,

3^

and

'loving'

?n:&33,
r>

etc.',

form to the fourth

are equal in

structure' and 'to construct,

down,

3).

'to cultivate, etc.'.

with

suffixed

Verbal nouns which

by means

of the

euphonic
^do3o, ^o^o3o, fddo3o), we have not found in Kannada; it
be that in such nouns o&* was, for the sake of euphony, changed
<o

(e. g.

may

into rf

(cf.

$&ft,

That the

S39 rt, rfooQtf, dooS^tf) or tf

infinitive

with

<o

was considered

(cf.

SCdsS, rfcWsS).

to be a verbal

noun

in

ancient times seems to be corroborated by the following two sentences

quoted by Kesava (under sutra 134, from Sujanottaihsa

>2^oo3oo

fySjtf

?W3 and z&s^jjr^sod

,

Hampa
'

?5J3o^, literally

the king without fear' and 'a touching of the

pudendum

raja?):

an ordering of
muliebre',

i.

e.

125
when the king ordered

'

and

fearlessly',

when the

'

m. touched',

p.

in

which

the genitive stands before that infinitive as before a noun. Cf. 352, ia.
Let us show by some further instances how the meaning of the
infinitive

was attached

noun by Kannada people

to the verbal

in their

own peculiar way:

Jjs^ rto^do rto3Jo<s* SSfticsdo, literally 'a female
servant's work a doing he became ready', i. e. he became ready to do a
female servant's work;
i.

'he ordered a bringing water',

3^0* T?-^ o, lit. an eating he killed',

do ^tfsS^eOo,

he ordered to bring water;

e.

i.e.

he killed to eat;

(it)

so that (I)

o$

lit.

'an understanding

lit.

aSeWo,

i. e.

tell!',

tell

understand!; s&ssi aoJ^cSrfo, lit. 'a making he went',

he went to make; $& N-o&c3o, lit. 'a falling down he pushed i. e.
1

i.

e.

he pushed so that

'the bard a praising',

down;
^jsrfW
(it)
9
when the bard praises or praised; t??S w6, lit. 'the elephant a
coming', i. e. when the elephant comes or came; jS^SS*
ta>^23*, lit.
'the sun a rising', i. e. when the sun rises or rose.
i.

fell

;j

lit.

e.

365.

Regarding instances

etc. see

The

of 'at the time that', 'when', 'while' of the suffix

Remark.
specific

wo* or

wo,

meaning

which, like the suffix

<o

187,

4),

it

can so to say be accounted for by the meaning of

often has in the infinitive,

6
,

w^ in

109, letters a

expressing ri^Ti^ao, reminds one of the ^ of the

locative in
109, letters a, 6, c, as a final ^ is occasionally used for <0; compare
<o of the instrumental is *si in
e.
g. that the ancient form
109, letters b and c.

and

6,

The

locative.

189.

suffix o,

The grammarian Kesava observes "the verbal action

changes according

(kriye)

to the three times or tenses

(kalatrayaparinami),

and

" the three

(forms of) the conjugated verb (kriyapada) tell the three times
or tenses".
144. 145) are formed by suffixes (agama) which
The three tenses
are called " the indicators of the three tenses (kalatrayasucaka) ".
(

The names

^,

of the suffixes

Of these

3o.

c3,

for the present tense,

It

will

are

and

175,

(present-) future one

rfri
oj

^3j.

i.

53,

2;

3; C3SJ, K$SJOJ

355, 35)Ov

55,

*>

c33o; 53, 20, 5j,

3>, 33^,

c53o

do for the future one.

and ^ are the forms

176), and

s3 5

to,

3l

of the past relative

and

ao

those of the

180-184).

and

c3,

are used for the past tense, c3sJ, c3s>

be observed that

participle (see

cisc!,

ci3o,

the tense-suffixes of the present, are the

past relative participle with final

d and ^

to

which

e,

S5SJ

and

126

&goO

are annexed.

and. 330 we have met with as substitutes of

the present-future relative participle of wrt) (see

yri

is

another form of 53^ and

183,

remark;

7,

184);

$336.

oO

dao

is

found only in the mediaeval dialect wherein

takes the place of

Of the

190.
c3

and 3

tense-suffixes

for the past tense,

182 and

36

very frequently

sj.

mentioned

and

sj

in

189 the modern dialect uses

(exceptionally

195 seq.) for the present-future one.

also

and

20

36,

see

Its suffixes for indicating

the present tense are, as a rule, peculiar, being eru3

and

the terminations of the present verbal participle (see

eru^,,

I. e.

two of

172).

necessary to remark that rf and ^ are but two representatives of the finals of the variously formed past relative participle; they
191.

It is

are to indicate that

the forms of the past

all

based on the past participle (see

are meant.

155-164;

The rules given regarding the formation

relative participle

theme

180

seq.)

hold good also

participle as

relative

175,

of the

when

i.

2,

and 176)

(present-)
it

is

future

used as the

of the future tense.

In conjugation (akhyatamarga) personal terminations (vibhakti,

pratyaya, akhyatavibhakti, kriyavibhakti) are used.
They are suffixed
192.

to the

189-191). When
a conjugated verb (pada, akhyata-

participial forms that indicate the tenses

a verb ends in such a termination,

pada, kriyapada; see

By means

it is

69. 144).

personal terminations the three persons (purusha,

147) in the singular and plural are formed.
of the

Kannada grammarians to speak of only six (yS5o)

terminations
personal
(though there are actually ten), adducing those
for the first person
(prathamapurusha) feminine singular (and plural)
and those for the third person (uttamapurusha) neuter singular and
It is

the custom of

plural separately;

we

shall

exhibit

them

all

at one view in the next

paragraph.
193.

way

In presenting the personal terminations let us use the European

of placing and

naming the persons,

viz. first person (uttamapurusha),

second person (madhyamapurusha), and third person (prathamapurusha).

1,

The following are

the personal terminations of

and future tense in the ancient dialect:

the present, past

127
Plural.

Singular.

1st pers.

oo,

(before

^o

vowels) oi^*.

(if

not followed by a vowel);

137,

(cf.

2nd

3rd pers.
masc. tfo, (before vowels)

t5D; kO<

5<tf;

198^

Wtfj (198,

OV*

M?;

<ss*;

neut.

erodj;

nominative plural).

198,

0*(

too.

fern.

a,

'ac*.

pers. WC&3*.

198,

3,

3,

3>

200,

remark;

201,

remark;

i);

i);

remark),

<so; (fcO*;.

3,

remark).
f

a^0, ^Oj,; 55%;

AiS^;

About

and

S5C30

55 ^)

of the negative see

The personal terminations

are also the suffixes for the

remark

1.

S5<^,

&>o,

in

krillingas

198,

i;

194,

i).

209. 210.
^S?*, vurfj,

S5D*,

177. 179. 185.

and

ero;^

186.

198,

253.

The following are

2,

S3o,

es^

exceptionally

remark

^0.

the corresponding personal

terminations of the

mediaeval dialect:
Plural.

Singular.

1st pers.

<oo,

2nd

j.

pers.

(before vowels)

(0.

<0^).

y^;

ssjdo;

5.

(30*);

(?5V);

neut.

An

0^o;

(^0*); 'aO.

3rd pers.
masc. Wo, (before vowels)
fern;

<o$*;

eroc3o;

occasional

for

^^ in MSS.

for the third

person singular neuter

is

perhaps a mistake of the copyist.

3,

modern

the corresponding personal terminations of the

The following arc

dialect:

Plural.

Singular.

1st pers.

2nd

pers.

<0;

*a.

3rd pers.
masc. SS^j;
fern.

neut.

<O?jO;

128
Remarks.

From a comparison

of the forms of the terminations in the three dialects

follows that the sonne in

euphonic

WNO and

in

SAJ)

The sonne

or

the sonne in

<oo,

plural of the neuter pronouns

and

in the first

*&

wdo,

^o

en>rio,

(for

116. 122. 138,

c/.

singular wdo, web, ^rfo

nominal forms;

90. 102,

wv and
ff

177),

in

^^

is

and

The w

in
<^

3,

person

ws^j

wo5

or

srocfo,

and the corresponding pro-

letter b)

8,

w mean 'he'

ff
e . tss?
(f.

w has taken

the form of

w ith

e . e>o*

136).

'she'

en>),

a.

a).

and
177.

(cf.

117,

(c/.

138, 'd,

115;

(see

with a euphonic

The

stands for the pronoun

a euphonic en>) are the plural of wo, e>NO, w,

e has taken the form of &
134.
In
119, a;
177).
either euphonically lengthened or stands for the pronoun ^o*.
(,-.

c
( /.
is

^0

is "SO*

2. 3,

'S, -^ of the pronoun of the second

taken the plural sign Vs (for wts*, etc.;
and an honorific ^, ^9 often being an honorific plural

the

The

plural).

the pronoun of the

By

'Sck

138); their plural 'W? has

205,

(rf.

or

and wois5 are connected with the

119);

cf.

(for wrfj

either simply euphonically lengthened, or

wo* and wd)

o*

wsfr

In 2-0 and z-v*,

185. 186).

substitutes 33

173. 265), are the demonstrative neuter pronouns

3.

wo, wfc and (the crude form)

remark;

&

wdo),

(for

en>4 are the plural of wdo, e^do

3>,

its

137).

w^

'Sicto),

e?,

person plural reminds one of the

136) and of the sonne and

of that of the personal ones

3)

it

the sonne and a

(i. e.

<o^o are not radical.

substitute

its

&

and the

53o,

way

first

person

may

it

in

<o

<o, <oo,

<orfj,

and

connected with the

<od) is

<o

of

138).

be stated that from wo, e^o, w, wv*, etfj the remote,

intermediate and proximate demonstrative pronouns are formed by prefixing w,

ou and ^ by means of a
3s viz. w^o (w+o + wo), lit. 'that-he',
ff

euphonic

o,

wa

wd;

ff

lit.

Ht. 'this-he',

w, uvs and

194.

remarked

(see

'that-she', wjjtfo; audo,

^3^, ^3;
265).

VXv*,

122 about s e

Of.

The personal terminations

192), suffixed

lit.

-gasfc, 55,

the

to

'this intermediate-he';

en)

and

of the preceding

S5SJ,

^+33i^

the

ancient

dialect,

paragraph

forms that

tenses which in the case of the present tense are

in

n*.

a^,

participial

eA>3V*

being other forms of

'SI

d+

s33J,

and generally

are, as

indicate

the

rf+wsi,

^-f

in

the

cj+ysd

mediaeval one.

Let us take as an illustration the verb

participle of which is =^tf
to this e.g.

179);
added, and then
(see

e.

g. the

^V*,

to hear, the relative past

beard'
(^? S*+c3), meaning 'of the having

e5SJ,

<

meaning

'of the being'

personal termination of the

first

186. 201),

is

person singular

129
meaning

io>

of the being-I',

tense

So the

I'.

e.

i.

literal translation

who

is

would be

one who has heard, or

therefore a sort of compound tense (see

is

'of the having heardI

The present

hear.

To comprehend

313).

that
meaning can be expressed by Kannada people in
manner, it is necessary to know that they, in order to show

the above

its

their ready

attention or obedience, not unfrequently use the past tense for the present
or

future

reply

is,

remark

came,

i. e.

my

if

the

is

366,

b.

The present tense

is

you say to some one, Come

an accomplished fact. See
coming

For instance,

one.
I

in the ancient dialect of the

verb

^^

accordingly

as follows:
Plural.

Singular.

=$P^33o C^ttf

1st pers.

+ w + <oo)

^P^

or

hear.

"^tfsSo

or
,

2nd

or

s3o (^tf +W3tf-f<oo)

we

hear.
or

pers.

or

you hear.

OJ

thou nearest.

3rd pers.
masc.

or

or

they hear.

he hears.
fern.

"gptfjJv* (*<?

+033+

or

they hear.

or
oj
,

she hears.
r

neut.

Q
it

(tf ctf

or

3J+ ^o) or ;3e)f3d33o

or

or

or

the y hear

hears.

first

^oSd^oJ o C^ad+
v

or

)>

OJ

Other instances in the

)
y

+wrf

person singular are

J3i +>io. of tfoa

oJ

(c3e)r^

ui+ W3J
o

to drink),

^sr^o, to become abashed),

+ <oo, of

+
f^^
* +e53j
>
oO

+ oio,
o,

of

^o,

^D\

of

^^,

to learn),

to bring), ^jafcj^o
SO

of ^oc^o, to give),

of &, to give).
o,

See

'a^^
366.
17

130
The present tense of
in

which

53J

5530,

3^o

or

166), in the mediaeval dialect,

(see

'of the being', is nearly constantly used instead of

as follows

is

.^^

&,

or

oo'

Plural.

Singular.

^^3oo (occasionally ^?^o),

1st pers.

or

=5^30,

2nd

^So
O

pers.

3rd pers.
masc.

Cj

(occasionally

(or
*

^^3oo,

fern,

^s?tjooo

3etf 2o&> (or 3^?Co3oo, etc.).

(^tfate*), ^etfritfo (or

etc.).

neut.

^3dodo

(or

^Sd^odo

s
r
person singular are 'adrSoo (of ao to
to say), =5^^200 (of ^O, to rush upon), tfzSriaoo or

Other instances in the

o}^3oo (of

be),

(of

,0c3*,

^d,

to fall

aSo (of &)<?*, to take),

first

(of ?roo33

wsSo, etc. see

s
,

3?<^c5o

5jJ3?d2oo (of cojs^rto, to go),

Regarding

=aJ3eJ 380 (of

down),

^^soo

^od) or ^J3do,

to give),

to die), ytfsSo (of wrto, to become),

(or

aS^

d2oo, of ao?2Jo, to

tell).

2.

201,

Remarks.
1

There

that of

is

one irregularly formed present in the ancient language, namely

to be, which changes its vowel vu into

eros?*,

the 3rd person singular neuter,

participial

terminations
i.

is

e.

2*s?o

i&,

that

As ^v*

is

6)

and receives no

also a verbal noun, the personal

193) appear to have been attached to the genitive of this 2-^,

(2-tf

+ cOo),

e , g,

uses the suffix

it

that tense (except in

180, remark after

cf. also

form to indicate the tense.

2o in

meaning 'of the being-!',

s&

(for

sro^)

in

i. e.

am.

peculiarity

the 3rd person plural neuter.

Its

is:

paradigm

Plural.

Singular.

1st pers.

2nd

pers.

3rd pers.
masc.
fern.

neut.

GO

en)C3J,,

meaning

originally

ew^

(/. e.

literally 'a being-it',

en)V*

+ ^o,

and as such

122),
is

is

a verbal noun (bhavavacana)

used for the 3rd person masculine,

131
feminine and neuter, singular and plural in the mediaeval and modern dialect.

About bhavavaSanas see the paragraphs quoted

The author

2,

of the Sabdanulasana,

in

243.

against Kesava's sutra 73,

makes

the 3rd person singular of the present tenso a knit or krillinga and declines
e.g. rfoxQdrfrfo, ;tt3id3ort, in his sutras 447.

krit;

177. 185.

see

190

In

195.

lias

it

been stated that modern Kannada has

a peculiar

has, however, not abandoned the use of the grammati-

It

present tense.

structure of the present tense

as

changed the form of the tense-suffix

the

it,

calls only the past

and the present -future relative participle a declinable

relative participle

cal

448; Kesava

personal terminations (see

201,

it

5530,
2),

in

appears

194,

'of the being',

and given

but has

combined with

different

meaning

to the tense.

forms of esao combined with the personal terminations are as follows:

Its

Plural.

Singular.

1st

pers. ag^fii

2nd

pers. 3o?

for

(arfo

(&)

3rd pers.
masc. goSf^o

vfo

3^ (4

for

for oSo (ea$+si).

fo^o (3sO) for

c& for watoo ea$

sodtfo

wrfj

for

for wa3tfj055

aoe>do

ado

for

ooD^

(tJ^))

-f

fcm.

soj)^o

ws^o

for
neut. So 5^0
(-^^o)

(ead

'g^o,

an

esSo^o

for

which must

have been another form

of

The

initial

of the forms of

3o*

3e^,

3o,

35e)^,

SoS^o,

2o?^o, etc.,

which have been formed by metathesis and lengthening the vowels (see
the frequently used cS^cJo for yadodo in
201, 2, and compare the noun

;&X>
is

for erurfooo,

and the adverbs

3o?fl,

Sosrt for 'aaotf, S3a6rt in

212,

4),

left out, so that the forms in parenthesis

wjl>, tj*o,
>j3o,
-ds,
are in general use, whereas those with 35" are at present only

commonly

^9^0,

etc.

occasionally
the

<^

still

employed for the verb ^do (^0*),

is added
(see
196).

to be, especially

of emphasis

when

132
the
Let us give a paradigm of the present tense of 'sttfj
('SO*),
relative
see
of
which
is
^rf (='3 cjr,
160, 7; 175, i),
past
participle
1

'of the having been'.

Plural.

Singular.

^(3^0 C9>

Istpers.

+26^0), or 'sde^o C9&4-

a^?3),

or

ask), literally 'of the having been-of

the being-I' (see

2nd

aa

pets.

e,

or

194).

aae.

ane) do, or

or 'acTSok.

5vC33^o, or -acratfo.

fern.

&{&.
Q

neut.

9
'azra^, or

(orig. azj^ci),

of

first

of zodo, to come),

person singular are

^o^de^o

tJrfo,

to

(orig.

^oSq^o,

become, to

ad,

see

is

themes ending in

er\)

is

not added to the

<a

being annexed directly to

's,

in

Thus

168),
*a

&<&,

make, forms

sjjs^o, to

-Ss,

occasionally
this

Plural.

o^jsdo^o (s&sQ-f

2nd pers. siraSe (draS +

(Oj& for

rfjasio^s^),

or

^ for

3rd pers.
masc. siraaso^ijOrsiraaodJSfSi.

^^SeJodo, or

sjjsz3^<;^j,or sira^oi3e)^o.

sjja>cs)Qdv),

rfjaaO.

^J3C5e)o

neut.

166.

which case

Singular.

fera.

of the past participle of

in the three dialects (see

disappears before them (see

215).
tense in the following manner:

Istpers.

used
(ssd being

that in the formation of the present tense under

consideration the suffix

ao,

^o

176. 196).

peculiarity

etc.

ajjjfti) (originally

of ?!)&, to speak),

For acS^o the rustic

be).

dialect occasionally uses sscS^o in the sense of ^cS

for

or

'S.cra do,

or Si.a?^J.
Q

Other instances of the

),

'aaeo,

90
90

3rd pers.
masc. 'an-s^o

or
Or

There can be no doubt whatever that we have here the ancient presen
tense in a somewhat altered form, although the meaning has undergone
an essential change; for
to

convey

the

idea

of

this

form of the present tense

uncertainty or possibility,

and

is

may

nowadays used
be

called the

133

Q&tfb or a^^o means l may

'1
may come' or 'I shall perhaps
w^?^o,

contingent present-future tense, as

be' or 'I shall perhaps bo';

may make'

come'-, sjjsdp^j, 'I

e.

y.

or 'I shall perhaps make'.

In the mediaeval dialect the author has met with only one clear in-

stance of this present,

viz. rfoSc3e)r& (see

under W^N^ZO,
tv

in the Dictionary.

which however stands for

2o>^o

fidcSBoffo without the meaning of contingency.

3j
Basavapurana 1C, 28) may be a mistake for

(in

The idea of uncertainty or

possibility was, as

it

would appear, not

attached to the present tense of this paragraph before the introduction

of the present tense of

About instances see

196 into the modern Kannada dialect.

366, remark a.

The modern dialect having given a different

196.

meaning

the

to

present tense of the ancient and mediaeval one, formed a present tense of
its

own.

For

1,

this

purpose, in the

first

instance,

it

personal terminations ending in

emphasis to the

suffixed the letter

ero

,0 of

combined with

5330

195) in order to express the idea of certainty or to distinctly denote

the present,
as

however the second person singular and plural

leaving

was, but allowing to shorten the

it

3o

or

&

of the

second person

singular.

For the third person singular neuter

it

introduced the forms

(i.e. e5od3^+ o, see

199), escS (i.e. e?d>+<) and ^c3 (i.e.
and for the third person plural neuter it introduced, as optional forms,
s3

(i.-e.

534+ ^) an d

102,

(i.e.

^^)+

j).

^sS probably are the demonstrative pronouns of that

wc3, 'acS, S5sS,

shape

'asS

122. 136)

b;

s,

'even that', 'even this', 'even those',

o,

'even these'.

The verbs concerned here are two,

the relative past participles
ezSetfo in

195),

and 'adj

wrb, to be (to become), of which

viz.

arc e$o3o,

('a.c*),

S5rf

166.

(see

176.

199;

The personal terminations combined with W3o to which the

emphasis is suffixed, and the additional forms are the following:
Plural.

Singular.

Istpers.

2nd

pers.

3??$,

of

195).

&e,

-6?,

or

(for

3o,

3^&,

*a.

o&

c/.

to be.

gg^

(for

of

134
3rd pers.
goe>?S,

fem.

3ae>$, WS?

of

neut.

Plural.

Singular.

masc.

W?2

(for

satfo,

wsto

ao5>6, t?8 (for oosdo,

195).

of

195).

SSOi^,

S5Co,

^CS.

Compare the forms

The verb

saifc, wtfj

(for

of the Perfect

3536,

w6

35e)SS,

WS3

)foe>f3,

(for 23sdJ,

(for 2593,

=3^53-56 in

esrto, to be, is

ea3
(

go3otf3
O
^c3)

Plural.

i + &3)

*&?$

wrf
(

',

i. e.

am

indeed,

am.

pers. S503o

3$, or

u,

3rd pers.
masc.
fem.

or

literally 'of the having been-of

the being-I-indeed

2nd

'

WCraS?.
530&)<$,
a

650^15

'

neut.

4.

conjugated in this present tense as follows:

Singular.

1st pers.

313,

SO

or yjS

e5o3o

The verb 'ado

^rS.

S5oi3)5S S53e>d>

to be, a

(*ao*),

paradigm of the contingent present

tense of which has been given in

195,

is

conjugated in this present

tense as follows:
Plural

Singular.

1st pers.

atSo^ (^ + a<3),

literally

'of the

having been-of the being-I-indeed',

i. e. I am indeed, I am.

2nd

pers.

^8?,

or

aa

3rd pers.
raasc. ^c3e)?S.

^C3*> 6.

9
fem.

9
neut.

wofbg,

9
^C3)s3, or

or ycS; ^cS.

y^;

In the Southern Mahratta country there exist also the forms

,

etc.,

the initial

35*

of So^,

or

2of, etc.

being omitted.

135
But

2,

and ado;

this

of conjugation

way

dialect attaches

-g

^3,

or

is

two pronominal forms

other cases, the modern

e3j3, etc.

'a,

The present tense of

e/u;^,

to which, in all

173), are the tense-suffixes

(see

and

as stated in $ 190, e/u3

for,

restricted to the present of

is

formed according to

'ado, to be,

method,

Plural.

Singular.

1st pers.

CadJ+eroi + aS)

'BdJjtfS

Cado+sn)*

am

this-I

indeed, I

+ ai3),

literally

indeed',

i.

e.

adoJ?s3 or

or

'ado^
'a

e?S

being-

being

am

am.

r
2nd pers. -ado^e or
^do^?, ado3 or
3rd pers.

'adoo^O or

^do^.

'ado3e>6 or

masc. 'adogsfS or ^doge^rS.

s,dj3i) $ or

fern.

neut.

e?3

or

aja?rto^?f3 (of
9

hear),

'aj oJooi^

^doioo^e^

a comiiig-this-I

2oJ3?rto,

or

(of

ado3e)^,

'ado^oS^,

'Svd)^^,

or

person singular are c^djJ^N or

first

(of zodo, to come, literally

or

^do^d,

^do^oS^,

'adoSeid or

ado^s?.

Other instances in the

or

this

as follows:

am

indeed', I come), 3o

to go), T??^oJ?rS or

aCO'cxJjoJ^

(^

^^

^tfj^

(of ^?^o, to

to descend),

?jdajjo5??2

to walk).

Remarks.
1,

yd,

(?5^),

by themselves or

qc5,

in

'as?

are employed also in the mediaeval dialect, either

union with

sru^, sro^)

3>33z>tf
plural of the present tense, e.g.

2,
i)i

In the rustic

modern

to

form the third person singular and

yd

cSyoJorf rtGr\oi>;

dialect the present tense of the verb

to say, is as follows:
Plurnl.

Singular.

1st pers. w^?fS (for arfj^j

2nd pers. eg^ or

3rd pers.
masc.

^.

^css,^.

to m.

ess,

neut.

^oi^

^rf(o)

or

^N

d.

136
In the modern dialect there

3,

a form used for the third person singular

is

neuter of the present tense which in reality

(with the emphatical or perhaps formative

that of a verbal noun (see

'a becoming-this-indeed
it

is, SjCsO^,

to

say,

used in

t??^,

be emphatical.
comes.
Gf. No.

dialect the form

mentioned.

means

literally

^o^,

it

4.

e5^

of the verb

W* (&, a ^),

on dit" (see
It is
336).
'they say',
corrupted from wrfoJ or ^30^, the present participle of
l

(rumour) says',

is

possibility see in

198,

7,

remark

if

the

<o

be emphati-

2.

feminine gender singular and plural, but, as

of the ancient dialect

it

would appear, without

The personal terminations are those

a third person singular feminine.

When

original meaning, viz.

Other instances are

<o

it

its

becomes, that

it

153 appellative verbs or conjugated appellatives have been

They have a present tense for words of the masculine and

In

197.

bearing

i)

primitive sense of 'a saying-this-indeed',

its

Another

cal.

'it

expresses

possible that this

the

if

2J3->3_,

modern

in the

nothing but the present participle

173), e.g. wrta^,

',

experiences,

Again

4,

is

193).

they are suffixed to form the

first

person singular of

Kahnada

Samskrita compound bases and Samskrita adjectives ending in

the sonne (o, the sign of the nominative singular,
117, cf.
114) is

nouns,
S3,

put between,

e. q.

dorW

(am) the sou of the daughter,

sJorffSo, I

A
seems to be the

this

attributive

noun ends

only instances
a

(i.

rule also,

euphonic aJj*+e3+S3,

e.

if

Kannada

115),

the

as

given by the grammarian Kesava are

Wroc&rSo, I (am)
he
for
the plural both
adduces
(although
Other Kannada attributive nouns aud Kannada

weak person, &Oo3oNO,

iiOoSj^and

)0oi>6;3)).

appellative nouns of

may
?So.

o^o

in ofo

not,

e.

g.

^<do

number
or

90) ending in

ao^d^o,

y may

insert the sonne or

(am) a good person,

^dro

or

^r

The adverb zfo^ forms roo^o, I (am) a bewildered person.

Kannada nouns and Samskrita compound bases ending in ra add
by a euphonic .3$? for the first person
(am) a or the wife, ^rofc}*too3oo.

preceded

sSrs 3oi>o, I
Co

For the formation of the

words

suffix

ye*

first

the personal terminations,

e.

g. erorf^6^),
o

W^Oo*, ^zo^Oo*; with regard

is

to

optional, e.g. &0o3o;3) or

e.

//.

and second person plural Samskrita

nominative plural,

(the sign of the

singular,

all

119. 132) before

5
', rfxtiOo*,
3ol>)i36d); erocS^So
w Q
o

Kannada words

^0oiod4, 2-^23^) or

the insertion of

137
or 3e3

ZoF"
or

second person

the

personal

dOo*, ^JSOao* or

singular and the

are

or

third person

attached

singular and

immediately

99

9
Kesava's

in

t*,*

ssotf ^src*

or

terminations

declinable bases, e.g.

Paradigms given

k$,ao' or

ssyo*

orioo*

In the

plural

or 2-SJF

to

the

are:

grammar

Plural.

Singular.
] ,

of

STOrf ^.

9
1st pers.

an elate person.

srod^cSo, I (am)

2nd pers. wud

3rd pers.

^ofc*.

yu

5A)d ^o.

2(\f
Ul
,

1st pers.

z^oo

n e9
ijV

rJ.

CJ.

or ^^dcSo, I (am) a good person.

Zo^o^j or

2nd pers. k^rfok*.

^^Oo*

or

3rd pers.
3,

1st pers.

Sjtt'o

2nd pers.

sSesofc*.

3rd pers.

sSeso.

or SjStSo, j

am )

of

a stranger.

3363*4 or
sSei'O*

4,

or

of

1st pers. &>3Fo or 2o^F?3o, I (am) a single person.

2nd pers. k^rato*.

2*>dr^ or

^SFO*

or

3rd pers.

An

exceptional form

is

sp^j^o (for

The past or preterite tense (imperfect, perfect, aorist)

198.

formed by suffixing the personal terminations

past participle

is

generally

193) to any form of the relative

175. 176).

The exceptions relate only to the third person neuter singular, and
are chiefly the following:
in the ancient and mediaeval dialect it is
optional to suffix the two terminations 'a^o and
directly to the

'a^

short past
dialect

it is

ending in

that participle, but also by

ending

in

r&

168); and in the modern

necessary to suffix the termination 'a^j not only directly to

participle

and

<o (

theme, and then to

all

means

165, a,

-;

166.

of a euphonic o&* to the short participle

10."),

/;.

i)

which

is

identical with the

the relative forms of the past participle formed

18

138
by the removal of

its final eru

(

(as far as they concern the

A paradigm

],

dialect, is

175,

modern

i)

which are treated of

58-164

dialect).

of the past tense of-

t?^,

to

in

hear,

the

ancient

Plural.

Singular.

3e$

Istpers.

in

^^H-^

(i-e-

),

literally 'of the

^<$

o or

169. 179.
having heard-I' (see
194), I have heard, I heard.

2nd

pers.

3rd pers.
masc.

o or

fem.

=?&

o.

or
or

neut.

If the relative past participle is formed by 3, the termination

would seem, is avoided; thus we find sjoortjsk S do, but not
but not ^^^r^O
?orfj but not ^

are allowable forms.

of ^3dc ^o
>

In

164,

6),

it

the third person neuter plural

to scratch,

we have exceptionally

paradigm

of the past tense of pjoQ,

S35J)

instead of

Bu

2,

to

speak,

in the

ancient

dialect, is:
Plural.

Singular.

^j&do

Istpers.

e.

(i.

rfoSrf+iOO),

the having spoken-I

',

literally

'of

or

have spoken,

I spoke.

2nd

pers.

3rd pers.
masc.

or

neut.

A paradigm

3,
:

of the past tense of gjo>do, to sing, in the ancient dialect,

Plural.

Singular.

Istpers.

2nd

or

or

fem.

IS

or

or Fl>&(3,)o.

(i.e.

<0o).

or

pers.

3rd pers.
masc.

or

or

fem.

S3e

neut.

33e>ad>c3o,
e.
(i.

or

or

3333

or
-t-

^1^),

Or 338)8^,

13<J

Other instances of the third person neuter

dodo,

kad^,

ka^o,
(of

tfft^
(of

under No.

to spread).

See instances in

7).

si^dodo,

That of

the ancient dialect,

in

to read);

(of t>do,

to shine);

dtfrto,

?oO?l),

do

ka&k

forms are

in its four

^do, to be)

s,c* (or

and a;&

the

in

is

modern one

(see

366.

The third person singular and plural, excepting its forms with 553^,
and a^o, is used also as a declinable krillinga ( 102, 8, e\
177).

<&^o

The

third

neuter

person

singular

254,

which
(see

e.

remark
is

or

',

'

^dordo means

2).

a having been

313, under

g.

a bhavavacana

en;do is

the past

in

(cf.

200,

see

either 'that which has been' and 'that

and

'

the having been

'

',

ending in

of the verb

expressing the action or state

'

a being ',

'

the being

'

4).

Remarks.

tf&^o
in

s foun a in

a sasana of 866 A. D., tf&AdGo in one of 916 A. D., zo<3dao

one of 929 A. D.; ^09,0*

A. D.;

the

in sutras

179 and 183

5

Further,
in

one of about 750 A. D., *eB*jO*

in

termination 2o occurs
of the

also in the

Sabdamanidarpana

one of 929

2^

is

found

Sabdanusasana.

occurs in a sasana of about 778 A. D.

tfjaSaSjV

in

one between 680 and 696 A.

D., ^Ja&j^o
M

is in

tfofc^o*

is

one of 707 A. D. and

of 887 A. D., tf&^o* in one of 807 A. D., and 3cra>o

in

found
in

one

one of about 750 A. D.

we meet with tf^d) in a sasana of 1123 A. D.,

one of 1182 A. D., and s&aSdtfo i n O ne of 1187 A. D.

In the later ancient dialect

in

4,

A paradigm

dialect in which

of the past tense of t?$*, to hear, in the mediaeval

optionally takes the final

it

sro,

?'.

e.

becomes ^tfj

166), is:
Plural.

Singular.

Istpors.

3{$o

(*<*[,+ 5). or

tf{$

0{$ OF

or

or

or

2nd pers. $$$ or

Q
3rd pers.
masc.

t$Q

^D

or

or

or

or)

^^ do,

or

or

18*

(see

140
Snujitlar.

Plural.

3rd pers.
or

fern.

(^tfv*

or) tf^tf

neut.

3^o CJO

or ^e<c3jdo,

tfo,

i+ 9>),
l

(i.e.

(i.e.

5,

A paradigm

which

it

(^^D*

^e

3^5$

or)

do, or

=g^

or

or

in

3?

3<*

or

*!&).

of the past tense of ??tfj, to hear, iu the

always has the

final

yu (see

166),

Plural.

Singular.

Istpers.

${*zSj&<*d+5!fc)(W${

2nd

^5r3

pers.

3rd pers.
masc.

modern dialect

is:

^z3^)

or

or

^^d^o

or

fern.

neut.

Other verbal themes with

6,

A paradigm

of the

final

are

e.

past tense of the theme

short past participle of which

dialect, is

ro

is

&>Q, to

seize,

(the

identical with the theme), in the modern

Plural.

Singular.

1st pers.

3o^cS^J or 3ocS.

2nd

3o&d

pers.

or

2a&6$

or

&&>.

3rd pers.
masc. oo&rffi) or 2o&c3.
fera.

So^rf^o.

neut.

So^o5o^0

(?'.

e.

&>,

participle that

is

the

short

past

identical with the

theme,

Other verbal themes with

and

s6C3 9

tense in the

Themes with

final

same way, the

final
o,

e.

are e.g. eroCJ 9

g.

3d,

$d and

sUiS?,

form the past

third person neuter singular being

141
In the third person neuter singular of themes with final ^ a
contraction of vowels often takes place in the modern dialect, when, e.g.
ofto^o and 3o5 9 (&>3o appear as

and
pers. plural;

of the past tense of espk

past participle of which is 55^, in the

(*3r&),

modern dialect,

>

3>

second

&

pers.

or

S3?

e?S

o^

or 55X1

e3f3

to 8 &y> the relative

is:

Plural.

Singular.

1st pers. y?S

2nd

205

(</

130, c).

A paradigm

7,

aSCS 9

e5 V

S3)

or

3S

% C).

0.

<3

3rd pers.
masc.

&$&
o

or S3^.

W?3 do.

fern.

neut.

^,

wUj, ewra, vo^,

formed

are,

in the

occasional

as

&

(i.

manner

In the same

etc. is

the past tense of the relative past participles

^ra,

^^,

modern

^,

1^,

dialect.

?j^,

zorf,

^,

*rf,

forms of the third person

neuter

singular,
^O),

From

S^,

zgjs^,

Also in the mediaeval dialect there

and

e.

g.

$3^

5^^j, oi^^o, 3^o, 3?>^ w?i ^o and

$
a
o
o
o
o
o
of the third person neuter singular, by means of syncope,
esji^,
are often formed and used in the modern
33^, ^r^j,, ^c^ and
the full forms

^^

^^

dialect.

The
in

always

third person neuter singular of 'adrfo

I was, is always
(of 'a'tfo),
the modern dialect, and that of ftd^o
I fell,
i?COo),
(of

3^.

Instead of z3^^o
(of
and instead of sSo^a^o

z3e,

to

burn)

the form

to
the form
(of ^oe,
graze)
the modern dialect.
In the

be used in
^^o) may
an
as
occasional
form, zS^oSo^ (=3?o5o^o).
find,

mediaeval one

we

Remarks.

172

has been said that an explanation of

S3^ and i^ different
from that given there, would be offered here.
For this purpose it is required
to consider the third person neuter singular of the
past tense to be a krillinga
1,

In

it

or declinable base

102,

8,

letter

e-,

177), as

it

in reality is;

for like the

142
krillingas oirf^d) (<o^+yyrfo, of the ancient

^ + odo,

erio or

and mediaeval

dialect)

&

and *i^^o or

are krillingas
^^> and <o
o^di (<0c^+
relative
^^
of
the
and
or
composed
past participle
(another form of 'S^.
^ <^^
'of
the
193, remarks), literally meaning
having said-this', 'a having said-this',
and
from which
are formed by syncope.
The final & in &. and oirf,

^^

O f the

modern one)

^^

would be the sign of the accusative of bases with final en> (see
121, letters b
<> or c& ( a ^), <o<&
and c;
122, letters b and c) governed by a following
33 and ojra, would be
331. 332, and some instances in
286.
(<o3oj; see
121, letter c; 122, letter c).
lengthened forms of the accusative (see
In
remark
4
of
196 the opinion has been expressed that
2,

it

is

not

Another
impossible that 53^, 'on dit\ is a form of the present participle.
explanation is that it is the krillinga 53 J&, (i. e a^o, by syncope) with the <o of
.

'of the having said-this-indeed

emphasis, originally meaning

this-indeed

'.

(In

Telugu

^^

appears as

'a saying', the verbal noun of

166

In

199.

are

there

&,

past participles

^js^rf,

c5,

From

and wrf^,

^j

woio^o,

woijjg,

in the

166

participles

176 appear the irregular relative

peftz3,

3o^)^c3,

these irregular past and relative past

is

formed, via. in the ancient

^perfodo and

one either ejdocSo and

in the mediaeval
OJjo^;

and

past

5J^c5, which stand for tJAd,

o^^oJo,
d
Q SoJ^ok.

dialect either tJdorfo

or

'a having said-

probably other forms of

the irregular

participles the third person neuter singular

'.

to say).

adduced

the regular wft, ^J3?h, 3JS^A, and in

woio,
Q

&,

aSjseocb* of aria, ^js^rvo, 3J3erio, which stand instead of

^eok*,

or

or

wd

s^d^,

or WOix

)dodo and

woao^,

modern one only

be seen that there exists also the irregular past

participle esafc* (for wo53*j, used in the formation of the third person
neuter singular s$o3^ ( 196, regarding the past meaning of which used
In

it

will

for the present see

194),

and

participles are also esofc and

(196;

c/.

to

the

180-184.

1,

dialect,

variously

is

is

ssofo^rS, etc.

and

formed

relative

(present-) future

participles

the contingent present-future tense of

of the future tense of tfjc&), to give, in

as follows:

esdpfS, etc.

formed by suffixing the personal terminations

(Remember

191).

A paradigm

5323,

used in

195).

The future tense

200.

(193)

tfd^oin

176 that the irregular relative past

in

the ancient

143
Plural.

Singular.

Istpers.

=g\>c3os3o (i>e>
'

literally

^oC&Sjo or

^^3+<ooj,

we

shall give.

giving-I

185. 18 6), I shall

(see

316, 3).
give (see
2nd pers. ^jd^c&J*, thou wilt give
316,

(see

will give (see

=5^03^

^od))0*, you

will give.

12).

3rd pers.
masc. ^odJSJo or ^odo^po,
fern.

^orfosSs^),

'

of

316,

he

^jdoSJO* or ^JZ^od^D*, they

will

give.

12).

^o^os^D4

or ^o^osSjas?*.

(or

neut.

The whole
185. 186).

'of giving-it',
its

(here

third person (singular

is

the

action) in

100; the
instances are

and plural)

is

a declinable krilliriga

neuter singular, in the present case ^odjs^d), lit.

also used to express the notion (bhava) of the verb

Its

and

present,

quoted in 243;

254,

therefore a bhavavacana

is

remark

1)

meaning

a^rdo,

-gs^dj, giving, tfjas^FCS.), loving,

being,

(cf.

Other

'giving'.

^o d>,
x

Such bhavavacanas are used in the three

saying, dJSiOo
rfj, making.
OJ
Their
use
205.
in
the
dialects.
imperative appears in
Other instances of the first person singular of the future tense in
the ancient dialect are:

3jao), ^jsrs^o

(of

tj$o (of ws*),

4^4),

rSJ3^SjS o

(of

sss^o,

rfjsdj),

<aOs5o or

^s^rlj),

instances in

(of

5&3 s3o (Of S5&5

),

^W),

^JS^o

(of

$do

(of ^d), wf|o

ro (of ^o*), ^JS^ro or Jjs^ ro
5 o or dj5)Co^o
or ?3JS^o^o
(of &edo), djs)^

(of 5AJD*), 3^.o (of ^^3*), ^35ro or

(of |J3^&3*),

s^C^o

S5s3o

^QsS

or tjrbsSo
o (of

'aD^),

(of wrlo).
<o^)33o

or

^?35o

or

<o^^o

(of cO^SjO).

^a^rtjdo (of
See

366.

For the third person masculine singular aca'^po is found in a sasana between
"
597 and 608 A. I)., and for the third person masculine plural -3-3 i^o (of *3zk),
(of 7o^j) occur in a sasana of about 750 A. D.
5

A paradigm

2,
,

of the future tense of

to give, in the mediaeval dialect, is:

Singular.

1st pers.

2nd pers.

&c&

(or

occasionally also

144
Plural.

Singular.

3rd pers.
masc.
fern.

neut.

Another instance of the

s

3&3

sej

sSJ,
(of

A paradigm

3,

person singular in the mediaeval dialect

first

or

3&3jso

3Jj;>

or

53j

tiy, s3^o, sg&a>, to say).

of the future tense of &/9c&>, to give, in the

modern

dialect, is:
Plural.

Singular.
1st pers.

2nd

pers.

3rd pers.
masc.
fem.
neut.

Other instances of the

are

sg^odrfo,
to
,

aS^SJosS

speak),

No.

i;

209,
In

201.

to

(of aS^ajj,

say),

^slcrfoo^ (of

jtfzSofoo;3t&,

o^osjdo,

person singular in the modern dialect

first

^aojOosS^o,

^,

to

^jacrfjo^

walk).

^dojjoddo are bhavavacanas;

jdo^aJJo^cSo,

(of

The forms ^j?

see

under

3.

184 there appears

go as

a substitute of

sJ in

the relative

present-future participle, viz. in 0530 of the ancient and medieval dialect,

and in aa6, ^36, W3o, W3c, zraao, z3?3o, 3oJ3?3o of the mediaeval one.

remark, we have y^j

and

189. 194

in

In

183,

and

S53o as constituents of the present tense.

7,

conjugated form of

330,

viz.

lengthening of the vowels,

of

the

conjugation

of

553^

of

the

into

or

etc.

yaSrio,

a^o,
S3 si,

In

we

find

e33J 5

changed, by metathesis

etc.

(essj),

S3,

195 we have the

and

Here follow the paradigms

and some other
e53o, 'aso,

conjugated forms.
1,

A paradigm

grammatical

conjugation of essJ or essJ

ancient dialect, is:

(eS3j

in
)

the

4f>

Plural.

Singular.

1st pers.

194) or

553^0 (see

literally 'of the

oj

becoming

or being-I' (see
I shall

be,

t9o2o or 053^ o ' e532s3) or $53^ r(j.

J
oj^^"

S53j o,

become,

186),
shall

am).
2nd pers. S53J033* or 5?j oil*.
oj
(I

3rd pers.
masc. 553Jo or

yjj

o,

S5&0* or e5& o*
oj

or

65c^Je)o

ysJo 6 or

53J o*

S5^J)D* or $5^3 o*,

_o

~.
fern.

553J^

01*

neot.

535315 D^.

or

53J

^,

(J5S^e) S?*.

53o)Cjj

or

$33o)

y5)d) or

do.

oJ

A paradigm

2,

of the conjugation of esao, in the mediaeval dialect, is:

I'/ural.

Singular.

1st pers.

?53uo,

S53o^0,

literally 'of the

?52o,

becoming or being-I',

I shall

become,

I shall be.

2nd pers.

S53o.

3rd pers.
masc. S5odo,

S53o?oJ,

s
(S53oD /),
V

(e55oV
\
/

fern,

neut.

Of the above forms we have met with

55360,

S53ds^

and W3ood)

also

in the ancient dialect.

in

195);

(<:/'.

the form of cB^cfo has remained in the

3^,

etc.

ii^o,

etc.,

other forms

appear, as has been stated, in

dialect,

present-future tense
3,

and

A paradigm

its

195); compare the

of the conjugation of

<33oo,

^30(^0,

^36,

being-I', I shall be,

2nd

pers.

modern

ysSfk,

modern present

'stao,

in

(I

am).

tlie

196.

in the mediaeval dialect, is:

I'lunil.

literally 'of

dialect

etc. in this

conjugation of the contingent

Singular.

1st pers.

of

146
Plural.

Singular.

3rd pers.
masc. ^200, 'aso^j,
(-ago).
fern,

ao v 5

(-a

('ssdo*),

'aaotfj.

),

a>3odo.

(<33oD

),

neut.

person singular of the future tense formed

from relative participles with final ao in the mediaeval dialect are 3ao,
'of the bringing-!', I shall bring, eoaSo, 'of the coming-1', I shall come,

Other instances of the

first

83o>3o, 'of the coming-I', I shall come.

The only form

of these left in the

neuter singular of j3o,

modern

viz. eoaoJCfo, it will

dialect

come,

it

is

the third person

comes.

181 the third person singular and the

According to note a of
third person masculine and feminine plural of the future tense occur also
with 80 and i, in the mediaeval and modern dialect, e. g. ,Bd^.>?i> (for
202.

(for

adrtodtfo),

3drU)d>

(for

^crfj^do or

or
(for aSjs^rfos^cfo
sojsertorfcfo), 3oJ3?rU>?do

and according

to

note b of the

person neuter singular of the future tense occurs also with

two dialects, e.g. siraelacSo
siracks^cfc or
(for

203.
s\xo,
Tf

(for

same paragraph the

third

en/3 in those

sJjs^odcSo).

particular third person is formed by the terminations rtJo,

and sb,

tfj.

It

is

used for the present, future and past tense

(cf.

169) without regard to number and gender.

suffixed

rtoo is

vowels,

e.g.

o,

to

es^oo,

most verbal themes

rtaoo,

ending

in

consonants

&o^oo,

vuOrloo, ^o^rioo, ^drioo, sjdrtoo, ?2J3?djrioo, 53>dortoo, ^jljo

According to the Sabdanusasana also

remark), Jjs^rioro (for iJe^eaortoo,

^JSdortooJ,

fSJS^&Jjo

(for

and

t?rlortjo,

and IJS^JFO, see ^j

?3JS^or(jo),

^ertarioo,
),

^J30oo

rtoo,

see

(for

sJoJS^Jo (for rfoJSdortoo) are

in

use.
tfjo,

to 23?CO

according to instances from the Sabdamanidarpana,

(of zS^ci)),

djs5J

(of djsrfo),

^JS^%

'ao*,

is

suffixed

s
3o*, ^o" and uo

and the forms are eS^CO^o, ^5s3e)e*5j,o, Jjse^oro, -s^oFo, ^^JFO, ^^J,o
u"
o"
o"
v
and SJ^JFO; according to the Sabdiinusiisana it is optional to use

147
^0,0 or

or JjsertoFo,

5&e>rao,o or

,
'

or f2J3^o, zreMjjp or
?SJSe^o
A
ff
XT

>ejj o,

siraraoo, rfJSCJ-xo or

&

zSdtf-JFo or

sJ33C3oo,

'

tf

'

or &aerloFo.

From s^rio

Sj/a^oo

is

formed, and from wrto

sasana between 597 and 608 A.

D.),

Verbs formed by means of the

in which case they drop their
3\>o,

a^oo
(of

5^oo (this form

generally ss^xo
o
suffix

final

'ssJo

e.g.

tfj,

,0^00

176).

(cf.

149

(see

in

seq.)

may

use

(of

(of a^

^e*^,

to

The forms with

and ^oo are used

rioo

in the ancient

and mediaeval

dialect.

^j,o, in the ancient dialect, is

an optional termination

for ^foo, the

doubling of the consonant being euphonic,

53-3^^0,0,
Tj

ally in verbs that

If a
is

d&^o,
*M o

^jSu^o,
TS

form

is

O"

(in

^prtG&tf&o:
s^doS^o,,
o"
o

is

=5*0,0

(and
^-^^jo, ^^^oo, ?oJ3^^> ^oo or
^

would be

oJ

=^j ('.

g.

disagreeable to the ear (asravya),

verbs, so that it is improper to use e. g.

produced that

^^^0,0;
oJ
&
rtoo

doe3^o,o.

e.

beautiful (manohara) especi-

come from Samskrita.

Kanuada

not used in

It is

right).

^oo without the sonne) of the ancient dialect is formed in

a sasana of 1084 A. D.) and jSjartototfj, (in a sasana of 1123
e.

A. D.);~in the mediaeval dialect

in

it is

common

O
use,

and we meet therein

In the modern dialect two forms with

es^o,, JJS^OF, 23^(!*3x.
in the mediaeval one, have remained, viz. zS^J (for
also
found
^o,

e.

g. with

316,

4)

and ?oa^j

(for sawo,).

without the sonne)

rtj (i. e. rioo

is

a mediaeval suffix which we see

in

A
,

A'

?3e)rtoF,

e.

g.

Instances see in

366.

Remark.
to sutra 46-1 of the

Sabdanusasana

According
(afcaryas) have employed an additional

and

5\>o,

rtortoo,

dropping

(cf.

rtoo after

472. 498) some savants

the regular terminations

rtJo

theit final sonne, e. g. wriortorfoo (for wriortjo), ld>flortoo, s^orf

^jaESrtortoo. ^js^rfortoc, srarforiortoo, dp'^orfortoo, z^cwrtoo, z3drtjrrt:cs

soorioo,
A
A
A
rtor(oo,

^jarwnoo,

osATooriortoo, ^jj^rtornoo;

w^rtoo,

^(stg'orti

19*

148
etc.

be observed that these savants knew the forms

will

It

sk without the sonne, to which they suffixed their

With regard to the terminations of 203 the question

204.
which of them are radical, rtao, ^oo or rto =5*0?

From

etymological reasons we are inclined to consider

to be original, as they

appear to be nominal

and

e.g. in yxidorio (of eroO)

in

and

Dictionary),

ad&3 9 ^J

with

(of 56C3 ).

rto

mean

=3^

and

(=3)

e.

'a shining',

rta

According

to this

and

ft

&>ri^o

=g&33

(of &,$),

our opinion that the verbal forms

e.

would originally

oi?3rto

g.

'an uttering',

'

a sayi n g'

33^30,
becoming', JJSS^OF, 'an appearing', ft^e&x, 'a requiring'.
^cirta,

occurring

(=ri)

#. in y\j&3o^o (of 5AJ&30),

are nouns (bhavavacanas),

tfo

suffixes

arises,

and ^j

rto

= a aJfcy, see &e3

(of &e3<

?3ef>rio

and

rto

rioo.

/"\

w^i,,
7J

'a

"o

This explanation at once makes

why the forms by themselves

have no reference whatever to tense, number and gender. Compare in
this respect the verbal nouns
194, remark 1,
(bhavavacanas) ewrao in
and

^o^os^)rfo in

200,

and $

i,

it

clear,

those ending in

and ydo

SAJJJO

205, and

in

same paragraph.
ft
But why have ancient grammarians added the sonne? If we take the
forms with rt> and ^o to be nouns, we most probably have to regard the
those ending in

in the

sonne as a conventional sign of the nominative singular

Thus 52^0,0, etc. would be the nominative with the suffix o-

(cf.

114).

rf"

The forms of the imperative (vidhi, etc.,

146) are based partly
on the relative present-future participle, partly on verbal nouns, as will be
205.

seen from the paradigms.

1,

Paradigm

of the forms of the imperative in the ancient dialect:

Plural.

Singular.

eso

Istpers. (The first person singular of the

see

see

according to the Sabdanuiasana's sutra 491, i.e. te>eo

the

future

200,

tense ending in

or ^Jac^o^o, I shall do,

do!

<oo,

i,

3&33?oo;3o, Jet

This rule

is

not

i. e.

let

me worship
in the

(a

short form of tJo, we;

137. 138) suffixed to
relative

participle, e.g..

+y

me

Sabda-

let

s^tio

or

literally

present-future
33rtJ^o (33it)3
(33334- Wo),

'of attacking-we!

',

us attack!

^jado^o or

manidarpana.)

2nd pers.
a) the verbal theme, which
case

is

in this

a verbal noun (bhava-

'So (another form of

?o or
137. 138),
J ou see

3,

149
Plural.

Singular.

vaana, see

used with

100)

theme

suffixed to the verbal

emphasis or the sense of a sign

considered as a verbal noun,

of exclamation, e.g.

e.g.

becoming
ed)

become

(thou)

&t&,

search
rt

blowing (is
blow (thou)!

quested)

wdcCDo or wdcoo.o (Wdofc*

+ ^o), literally

required or re-

(thy)

000^0!

'

'

searching-ye
rtosoo

ye! 'SlOAo!
^0*0! ^no!

35tC3*o!

or
&ti

rfOfi

tfd

^o!

or

theme with

6) the

es

final

^^o), most probably

noun

e.

or

(is

required or requested)

give (thou)

tfdoi^;

cSjstri!

rtoJo,!

verbal

188), e.g. ^ori, (thy)

(see

giving
i.

(thy)

required or request-

(is

e.

z.

*rto,

wad!

wdoi> or

3J3Z3;

206.

see

(for 2Jd,

rtoi>

210).

c)

the third person neuter singular

b)

with

of the present-future tense

the third person neuter singular of the present-future tense

(krillinga

being a verbal noun

and bhavavaeana, see

giving

200,

e.g. *3cfc, (thy) giving

ed)

e/ucfo,

(is

it

1),

required or requested)

give (thou)

mayest

z.

e.

(thou) give

ea;c3o, e.g. ^s^d), (your)

give

required or request-

(is

z. e.

give (ye)

may

(you)

or

3ta>Cl>^)Ck
d-3-

with

s^rfo!

3rd pers.
a)

^,

suffixed in

or optionally

a)

^,

??

o*

the

very same manner as the

terminations

rioo,

s'oo,

203. 204.

(see

thus

produced are
verbal nouns like
etc.-,

etc.;
c.

see

^o,

etc.

ing

in

ed)

ac,

eroz&rt,

*3s|, id<^,

243, A,

rioQ

10. 12),

g. roo^rtofc* -frt), (his, her, its)

doing

(is

required or requested)!

rf

(is
!

/.

the forms being

as

singular, e.g.

The forms
reality

or

same

the

those

^^'

required
e.

(their) do-

or

request-

(they) shall do

(them) do!

may

the

of

(they) do!

let

150
Plural.

Singular.'

i.e.

(him, her,

shall

it)

do!

may

rt3s

do!

it)

it)

she,

(he,

tree*

do!

let

(he, she,

(or

irto

Lariotf;

Or

(or

(or
(of
(of

fr

the third person neuter singular

b) the third person neuter singu-

with

lar of the present-future tense

of the present-future tense

enjd),

let

i. e.

^s3)<3o,

g.

giving

its)

ed)

e.

(he, she or

give

it)

(his,

required or request-

(is

(him, her or

(he, she,

shall give

it)

it)

may

give!

with

erucfo, e. g.

giving
ed)
let

(is

may

(they)

367.

Plural.

Istpers. (The first person singular of the

future tense ending in

see

200,

2,

<o^o

<oo,

eso),

138),

e.g.

(i.

o without the

e.

137.

euphonic sonne, see

utter

2nd

shall give

(they)

(them) give!

Singular.

<^,

(their)

of the forms of the imperative in the mediaeval dialect:

Paradigm

and

3^&>,

required or request-

e.

i.

give

Further instances see in

2,

her or

e.

g.

w?oodoji,

let

us

pers.

a) the

verbal

3COO, rise

theme,
(thou)

e.

&&

aw 5

g.

or 'SdO! wrto! d-3-rjJ!,

in

Or
(

^P'S

c)O*

which

case also themes like ^ao5o, guard

(thou)!

(for

2nd person

^>)

appear

in this

(see

3,

a) Colo),

'SI

speak (thou)!

137.

euphonic sonne, see

138),

'ae

honorific

^,

marks), e.g.

aSw,

+ the

'SO

see

193, re-

*S|0,

be ye! <o^!

paragraph).

final es, e.g.

e.
(i.

the theme with

without the

*go

(i. e.

3oJ3?AO!

151
Plural.

Singular.
c) the third person neuter singular
of the present-future tense with

erucdo

e.g. rSjatcio^jdo,

b) the third person neuter singu-

lar of the present-future tense

with

see(thou)!

e.

e/ucto,

g.

sStco^dj,

solicit (ye)!

3rd pers.
a)

ft,

#, e.g. ^rt,

give!

let

sruciOriort!

(him, her or
sojaes^! (In

83val-raodern works,

the

e.

it)

a)

medi-

g. in

(as in the singular), e. g.

ft,

ssOTiort, let (them)

guard!

the

Ramayana, we find also forms

Ram. 1, 6, for ad.)

like Stwrt,

6) the third

person neuter singular

of the present-future tense

3,

the third person neuter singular of the present-future tense

with

eA)C&>, e.g. yu:3oo.ck, let (him, her

with

or

(them) walk

it)

y0,

c)

b)

eat

for

which see

Paradigm

207,

2,

a.

c)

S3

e.

erocS.)

207,

rfcl^jdo,

g.

let

2, a).

of the forms of the imperative in the modern dialect:

Plural.

Singular.

1st pers.

a) (The first person singular of the

future

tense

ending

in

<o

and

<o&, e.g. 3J3C&3, 3J3C&;3?$0; c&Q

a)

e>,

e.

(i.

e$,

wo without the

euphonic sonne, see

138),

?9jjfo (i.e.

3^

phonic W),
C9C3

(a

&

dental
into

form

(/. e.

let

^o!

has been changed

*)>

e.

Q.

us hear!

(see

202)

note a;

43^-i+W),

which the

in

the cerebral
i,

137.

9owitha eu-

202).

(see

181,

(The forms

^e?rt*?ra, etc. are used also

as verbal nouns; see $ 315,

->,/;

3 16,

10.)

152
Plural.

Singular.

&)

2nd

which see

for

ef>c9,

207,

2, i.

(207,

&)

2, b}.

pers.

a) the verbal theme,

Tfttid

(thou)!

g. <3jado, see

e.

W3C5J

rfoSi!

c^Co!,

a)

in

a, rs.Q, es8 (vulgarly for

or

^J3o3o; (for ^Jsofr

2-033*),
?J3oi3

(for

appear

&

sSjsoDJ.

),

with

see (thou)

198,6)

(see
e.

seq.),

g.

person neuter singu-

6) the third

with

of the present-future tense

lar of the present-future tense

with

g. roJ3$co;3ci), see (thou)!

e.

or

by contraction,
c/.

the third person neuter singular

>

or,

Jsco

(for

final

78

Nudigattu page

c)

cco

48. 54. 92. 93).

(cf.

theme

6) the

be ye!

'|9

e. 0.

which case also the lengthened

themes ^>ofo! (for =53), a-cOo^i (for

2rdako3ck!

0.

6f>c5o

see (ye)

fS-?^3rfj,

g.

3rd pers.
a) the third person neuter singular of the present-future tense

a) the third person neuter singular

of the present-future tense

?9dO,
her or

An

follows

sL?rtad!l),

g.

go

it)

let

with

(him,

let

which see

for

206.

e.

with

207,

list

alphabetical

2, 6.

b)

e>>,

9d3, e.
(them) walk
(

207,

g.
!

2, b).

irregular forms of the imperative is as

of

'S.D

(for

^Q

of rs&, the doubling of the

modern dialect.
(for $>v* or ^JstfJ), take
the ^J3

(cf.

(for &/3?eJo),

^
$ua

^3

(i. e.

(i. e.

ff

+'a,

3?

<r

in

swing (thou)!,

+ 9o,
r

(thou)!, in the mediaeval

187 under

=^^o,
for

q. u.),

Vs being euphonic), be

ye!, in the

and modern

dialect

2).

in the

bring ye

modern
!,

dialect (Nudigattu,

in the mediaeval

page 86).
and modern dialect.

^Oo O f ^o5 the 3s having arisen of the past participle

,

^^ and being euphonically doubled), bring ye! (not in the text of the
Sabdamanidarpana, but) according to the Sabdanusasana (sutras 492.
520 and Candraprabhapurana

(i. e.

^^+^0), bring

3,

46) in the ancient dialect.

ye!, in the (mediaeval and)

modern

dialect (cf. JJ^O).

153
O

^0 of

(for

?
the doubling of the o being euphonic), bring ye!, in

3ti),

the modern dialect.

3d of 3o* or

(for

>

bring

3d)),

(thou)

dialect, and, according to the

!,

the mediaeval and modern

in

Sabdanusasana (sutras 519. 520), also

in the ancient one.

6

(for 3o* O r 3d)), bring (thou)!, in the mediaeval

3e)tfo

dialect.

and modern

however, probable that the instances require ss3 for

(It is,

'

33O6 or 33d); cf. W3C*.)

33 of 3o* or 3d)), bring (thou)!,

(for

and modern

in the mediaeval

dialect-

0^

ZJF^

(i.e.

+ 'S, = eo^o,

come

q. y.),

and modern

ye!, in the mediaeval

dialect.
>

3s having arisen of the past participle ZJ^ and

being euphonically doubled), come ye!, in the ancient dialect according
(i.e. 2Jc3*-f3o,

Sabdanusasana (sutras 470. 492).

to the

0^

WO

(for

the

J3

U53*

(i. e.

jQ

of

sod

9), come ye

sod),

modern

(for

the

of

!,

in the mediaeval

the doubling of the

&

and modern

dialect.

being euphonic), come ye!,

in

dialect.
200*

or

ud)),

and modern

conie (thou)!, in the mediaeval

Nagavarma's Karnatakabhashabhushana (under sutra 27) and according to the Sabdanusasana

dialect,

and, according to an

instance

in

(sutras 41. 385. 400. 519. 520), also in the ancient one.

wsdo
dialect.

(for 200* or 2Jd)),

(It is,

wao* and wad);

(for

come

(thou)!, in the mediaeval

and modern

however, probable that the instances require

^3

for

cf. sso*.)

come

zod of
200*),

(thou)

!,

in the ancient, mediaeval (and

modern)

dialect.

207.

There are three forms connected with the imperative

adduced.

still to

be

They are produced by means of the suffixes ef>>o, e>> and

According to one translation of a rule in Kesava's oabdamanidarpana

(sutra 234, prayoga) which has been adopted by the author of the
Sabdanusasana (see further on under No. i), es&o is used "when (the
1

action of) the second person of the negative (see

209) gets the sense of

the imperative" (madhyamapurushapratisbAlliada vidhiyol or madhyaina-

purushapratishedhada

(3^+ -30)
(see

205,

approach.

kriye

vidhyartham

indicates that the second person plural

i,

plural, a).

Of

this

Let us take

e.

The

adalli).

y. the

is

in

<3o

S5Qo

to be understood

verbal theme

the second person plural of the negative

TTOD*,
is

20

to

154
you do not approach, and ?je>d)o would mean 'you shall not or must not
approach!' (Cf. the use of && under No. 3 of this paragraph.)
But when considering the meaning
mediaeval and modern form of ssSo,

required another translation,

it

S30o

viz.

is

of e3>

under No.

2,

a and

b,

the

might appear as if Kesava's rule

used " when a prohibition (prati-

shedha, given) concerning (the action of) the second person (plural, e.g.
>?o ?3e>u s3?d, you must not approach !) becomes an order or permission
(vidhi)"
'let

in

an indirect form, so that

them approach!', the ^o

meaning of which see

(cf.

the honorific

in

German

'they

may approach!'

of the second person plural in ?je)d5* (the

being retained in an honorific sense

Sie\ they, used for English 'you') in order to
208,

^^dSo means

2)

show that now kind feelings prevail where previously more or less
aversion had obtained; compare with regard to ^o the free use made of
the honorific
to

^0

modern

of the

make Kesava's

dialect (see the Dictionary).

rule in this form fully correspond to No.

2,

In order

a and

&,

we

must, by implication, take for granted that not only the second person
of the plural is to be understood, but also that of the singular, and that
<ao in this case too is honorific, so tha^t
it

may

?je)do

signifies also 'he, she or

approach'.

Kesava's instances, as they are taken and adduced by him out of the
context, mostly allow the meaning of both translations; they are (sutra
234 of the Sabdamanidarpana)

o!

fcJa

L>3oJ3e,

'SkdOo

oS53^C3

5 30
sisaao^^jo**
<^x)
'

Sabdanusasana under

1
'

(page 68, which occurs in the

44 that treats of nipatas, as e3oJ3,

seems ^ show clearly the meaning of the

sutra

its

atfQo 35S5w&3 ^JSoo'S^^ ')

second translation, i.e. "oho,
remain!

(page 258); but his instance

zorlcrfoSd^ ^rt**!

^G5?2o5< oijfc,
O

may

the greatness of other things

also

"

The Sabdanusasana (sutra 529), however, plainly and exclusively

teaches the meaning of the first translation; it says sSrSdo ^do.Oo!
means "you must not trust women!" "do not you (in any way) trust

women

(sarvatrapi striyo

ma

sraddhata)

",

and ej^sojorsjoo sJJS^Oo!

"you must not commit an improper act!" "do not commit an improper
act

(akaryam

"

kurudhvarii)

a) In the mediaeval

2,

?2>o

ma

is

es>> (i.e.

53^+

'S,

(and mediaeval-modern) dialect the form of

see

205,

and

3,

2nd

pers.

plural, a),

or

155
occasionally e>&d, and is used only in the meaning of the second translation of
Kesava's rule (or in the imperative,
205, 2. 3), expressing request, permission,

wish regarding

allowance, concession, and

and plural, e.g.

^sioojQd, ^rfo^rte*

he

is

vile

person;

(but

^ fcOoJo^orV

(39, 47);

<0r^p

what

person or thing, singular

^3o>!

dc3

me! (Basavapurana

feet continually preserve

ad!

a third

27, 72);

that to

is

wsirio;

him

let

us?)

$&&>* 'ad?!

wrttfo

may your

sir,

sjqJsJo^

be!
let

rfskrtsS^tf?

your excellencies always be among you! why should they concern us?
(46, 15);
otao^&i d &3c33J<3* t5rt>! let Yudhishthira become king
(Bharata

zSslj

J, 8, 5);

Oj

ejtfrfrfco

OtfJJ33W#rfjac&Fttf
"

IA\

rfrfoJVoJo!

may

the sun of Painpa's Viriipaksha give us joy! (Cannabasavapurana 1,2);

slrarf

Jort

3JOEoe;rf^o

dU>^do ^o^^orf ^o3o^Q^, a

j?k,

used by elephant-drivers with the object 'may

army!' (Nacirajiya)

;3oaJo

discomfit the hostile

it

siraacS
>}<&,
CJ

3oJ3?3>!

7j

ointment made with the object '(people)

war-cry

may smear

(a pill or)

rfos?ri,

an

the body (with it)!'

(Nacirajiya).

modern

In the

b)

300 has the same forms and meaning as

dialect

in the mediaeval one, with the only difference that

also interrogatively for the first

write! (or he

may

write!

es^j
!

write).

write!

let it (the child)

w6cdo)

let the calf

!

let

those

suck

'ad

^dO!
Sofiod?
^F^,
20

them
(its)

wdojo!

g.

let

let

yo

her write!

them

men

(the

let
let
o,

(him, her,

or them) hold this word in mind!

it

only (thy, your or their) courage remain! k^j??,

how shall I (or we) tell how great the beauty is?

G>

bring four annas? OJailo&^o,

^j^o, ^^^ri aoD^C)?? shall
*VSO
Q
shall

it

be,

'either

See

to the
(it)

cow?

^^o

aoJS^rioDo

go? 'adfSJ^ ora^o djsz^O? shall (or may)

tJrt! means
be

it!',

'let (him, her, it or

and when repeated

or' (see

women)

mother's breast!

iA^, 3^CO)? how shall I (or we) tell how

^dd? whence shall
annoyance is? ^uo,TT aei dJS^e),O" <O^
m

(the children) write!

sjj3?3,

the bread and give

zj^oio

or

who want (them) take these ripe fruits!

may God grant welfare to your children!

djs^

ra

^s^do

let

e.

person,

3d^o 2odoi))

9$, es>e are used

essjfi) 2o8o3o! let him

(i-

I (or

great his
I

(or we)

we) bring

3cJS^ri+ wj

e.

do this?

them) become!', and then also

it

gets the

meaning

ot

'let

the English

317).

316, u.
20*

156
Note.

The Sabdanusasana

(sutras 524. 525. 526. 527. 529) teaches another use

of the ancient e3)o, saying that it may stand for the wo* and & of the infinitive
(see
209,
187) before $& or skc^o, it j s not requested, it must not, etc. (see

note

Its

i).

(under sutra 529) show that

instances

second person plural by the

rf^Co

35c|do
striyo

ma

'So in

aOo,

"you must not

z3do,

it

any way)

(in

it

wants

translates Sjf|c3o
trust

to

express the

N^SO

women"

or

3?

(sarvatrapi

sraddhata).

Instead of the ssOo of No.

3,

for

paragraph Kesava's sutra

that of es>o appearing only and

of this

vritti (234) have the form of ese3*,

alone in the prayoga, i. e. in his first instances, quoted under No.

and

He, no doubt, accepted <&& to be the leading form to which ^o was to

But as to the second instances in the prayoga under his
be suffixed.

he introduces

vritti

again, saying

5553*

sense of permission

(vidliyartha)

in

"when

there does not occur the

the action

when a prohibition

of the negative (prati-

not changed into a permission

shedhakriye) ",
''
or when there is a direct prohibition or interdiction, " y^ is used
(vidhyartham allada pratishedhakriyeyol al akkum). His two instances
i. e.

with

&9* are:-

iS^CS
is

3
,

sSed&fifj^c

is

yr?o urtofoo*!

$3f(

rtd,

&3j3>

z3?63=3o

do not (thou) consider any other thing! verily, thy good disposition
(and so) am I different, (but the good disposition of both

different,

ricso rU>efte3, the male

beyond doubt). zo^cJQf^ o^rto* ^rte! <osl\
c&
tO
cuckoo which said (or says) 'do not enter, do not enter the wood!'. A

of us is

similar

instance

is

the

in

Candraprabhapurana

(2,

after

93),

viz.

the sounds of

the male cuckoo which was in the branches with young leaves, said 'if
he as before enters to-day, it will be improper', and cried out to

Kandarpa as it were 'do not

use made of ydo according
under No.

The
^fdj* -^

ma

enter, do not enter (the wood)!'

to

the first

translation

(cf.

the

of Kesava's rule

i).

Sabdanusasana
SJ^rfoo

pravisata).

o^ria*

$^&

528) has the following instances:

do not enter this wood! (yuyam etad vanaih

(sutra
!

-d*

rfo?3oJoo

(yuyam etad griham ma pasyata).

devotees, do not you engage

madanakriyayaih

ma

in

?SJ3^e3*

do not look at this house!

"

^erfj S5ort^N weJ

1

oJo^rlv*",

?ooo*

Aiigaja's sport! (bho yatayo bhavanto

pravartadhvam).

157

How

208.

arc

207 of esOo,

wo

to

the

explain

of the

possibility

made

in

170. 171. 187. 188.

on the meaning of the infinitive (see

in
which
the present case ends in $30*.
210)
It rests

In the instance

1,

use

and sse>?

S3

^)do

approach!, proder means

shall not or must not

(?je>do*+ "So), you
'to approach, yet to approach', i. e. approaching

has not yet taken place (and shall not do so), and ^o means 'you'.
The primitive sense of Se>d>o, therefore, is 'you are yet to approach',
i. c.
you have not approached yet (and shall not do so).

When TrodOo

or ?je>3>
means 'they
(?je>d^+'So)
(?33Ste+'a)
'let him, her or it approach
the meaning of the
may approach
infinitive jsjsdo* is that of a verbal noun, viz. approaching, combined
with the sense of a sign of exclamation and with the honorific QQ or 'a
2,

'

'

'approaching!'

When

3,
is
is

approach may take place!'

'(his, her, its, or their)

the infinitive with e5J s

without the honorific

ao and

a,

used prohibitively, as in o^rio*, do not enter!, the primitive meaning

r
(analogously to that of ?jsde3*+ ao under No. i) 'yet to enter', i.e.

entering has not yet happened (and shall not do

The conjugated negative (pratishedha,

209.

170. 187,

2,

and note

146) of the verb

193 to the

by suffixing the personal terminations of

(see

so).

infinitive

is

formed

ending in es

of this paragraph), with the exception of

the terminations

difference,

negative

is

however, regarding those terminations in the conjugated

that, instead of ercrio

and

erosj)

&c& and

plural of the ancient dialect,

5>^)

of

the neuter singular and

are used;

singular in the mediaeval dialect, becomes es>c&;

both es>cfo and e>5g) remain).

What has been

170 about the doubling

remains in

stated in

present case.

Cf. 215,

7,

lengthen their y, changing

it

The conjugated negative

according to circumstances

Concerning

of final consonants
effect also

in

the

/.

In the three dialects the themes 3o*, to bring, and

its

the neuter

the modern dialect

(in

in the formation of the negative participle

enicSo,

>a<, to come,

always

into w, in the conjugated negative.

is
(/;/.

used for the present, past, and future tense.

170).

original meaning

^<je

ij

210.

158
1,

of the negative in the ancient dialect:

Paradigms

one of

jJe)do, to see.

Singular.

1st pers.

?SjSzio

Plural.

(5J3^ +

e.

(z*.

do not see,

I
<Oo),

I did

not see, I have not seen), I shall not see.

2nd pers.
3rd pers.
masc.
fem.
neut.

one of
,

to remain.

Singular.

1st pers.

eni09 o3oo
I

(i.

Plural.

e. eajcpoij

did not remain,

+ ^o),

(I

do not remain,

have not remained),

shall not remain.

2nd pers.
3rd pers.
masc.
fem.
neut.

one of

^eJ*, to stand.
Plural.

Singular.

1st pers.

$&o(i.e.

for

S><

aw +.00),

I did not stand, (I

have not

do not stand,
stood), I shall

not stand.

2nd

pers.

}<y 033*.
PO

3rd pers.
masc.

)Oo.

fem.
neut.

one of ^o*, to bring.

Plural.

Singular.

1st pers.

for

not bring,

bring.

2nd

pers.

3rd pers.
masc.
fem.
neut.

(I

3d +

3o),

I do not bring, I did

have not brought).

shall not

159
2,

A paradigm

of the negative of

to see, in the mediaeval

dialect:
Plural.

Singular.

1st pers.

^J3?do, &?ei?k,

f3JS?cS, I

do not see,

etc., etc.

2nd

pers.

jS

(i-

e.

3rd pers.
raasc.
fern.

neut.

Other instances in the

(of

or ^s3

3,

A paradigm

first

ews^);

e.

g.

e/x>0 o3jo,

Wi

(of

tf<

^do3j

3do3o&>,

^z3o3oo,

tfrgj;

(of ^a*); e^do, ra>6?k, zj^6 (of 200*).

r'id

ris3&>,

person singular are

of the negative

of

in

c3j2>d>, to see,

the modern

dialect:
Plural.

Singular.

1st pers.

$JScif3o,

&J3?zi, I

do not

?J3^5^.

see, etc., etc.

2nd

cSJB^O

pers. ^JS^ci.

(i.e.

?2J3e^+^0, see Nudi-

gattu page 78).

3rd pers.
masc.
fern.
neut-.

Other instances in the

o3o

(of e5&^)

^^o3o^o,

^o3o

The conjugated negative

dialect (except in

first

is

The same

for 'ao.

dialect

(of

^d); 3e>6?b, 3D6

somewhat seldom used

proverbs and

second person plural ??J3?c30

person singular are e.g.

is

in the verb

?*&

anomalous,

its

generally

uses

(of

in the

modern

see

316,

termination

the

third

colloquial

12),

and

its

50 standing
neuter

person

200,
singular of the (present-)future tense which is a bhavavacana
or
a
bhavavacana
is
and
which
too
the
infinitive
with
ss^o
1.3),
i

(9j*)

verbal noun

CaOo, the

^^

not give), and the second one for the past

298, 3; 299, i. 2; 316, i. 2-, 368.

etc. shall

See

first

(see note 1), e.g. &t3os3as;,

188), followed by
form for the present and future (I, etc. do not give,
(I, etc.

>

I,

did not give).

160

When

used, the

6) is

211,

the

the ancient dialect repetition of the conjugated negative

in

verb

first

may drop

sutra 398).

its

personal termination and

arado (for aracio We>6o, Sabdanusasana

of the infinitive, e.g. WDO*,

e5

170.

Cf. &zi fijrfd in

Notes.

a peculiarity of the only two defective verbs ^o*, to be fit, and 'SO*
1,
form
of ^o*), to be, that in the three dialects they have the forms 5^
(another
ro
It is

^o

and

is

the following: the infinitives are

added with the regular doubling of the

ing

the personal terminations

all

in

298; 316,

i.

is

CS>e; o,

'SO o

(see e.g.

v6

final

the suffix
of

Sabdanulasana sutra 523

& when

s
into 33 or

^^

w and

may be added

holds good with regard to

e3(JC3

&

of the theme, this

either expressly put or

Occasionally a euphonic sonne

may change

(cf.

The meaning

9).

or subject which

tive

and plural of the conjugated negative.

v and 'QV, to which ^ is

for all persons in the singular

The formation

^
is to

to
;

represent-

243, and see their use

in

depends on their nominabe supplied (see

210).

and '9^, so that we get

298, 4;
300), which (sonne)

meets with a following vowel.

The same
of 23?dj, to be required, and, with the sonne,

it

In the
fcS^CSo (see e.g. Sabdanusasana sutra 524 seq.;
207, note; 316, 5).
modern dialect ?3e> of ti* ( 316, is), to be proper, is another instance of

The Sabdanusasana

this kind.

(sutras 19.

584) introduces also

e3rt or

UAa),

for tfrido.

The grammarian Kesava

calls

nature of a verb (kriyatraaka); see

When

2,

^^

a particle (avyaya) that partakes of the

212,

7-,

298.

the author has stated at the beginning of this paragraph that in

the conjugation of the negative the personal terminations are attached to the

he seems

infinitive with w,

his sutra

216

to

be at variance with what Kesava in and under

writes, viz. that a verb's

a theme ending in

enj)

theme (dhatu, according

appears when one removes

of the conjugated negative (pratishedhakriye), so that

3J3C1),

?rJ8Cl>

are formed from

superficial (see
to students,

that

c5js?^o,

djacfo,

143) and therefore seems

to his instances

the termination (vibhakti)

e.

g. the themes

g\eco; but because

to give

his

^a

e3J3*c&,

rule

is

only a certain practical hint

not lay too much stress on its wording, and not conclude
rtodj + ao, s'js^j + ao showed the exact final rule for the

we must

&3?do+9c,

formation of the negative; we have to take the infinitive with final ^ and the
termination
o, i.e. c3j33+53o, ^rad+ao, 5^-i-eo j n order to get 3J3rio, dra^o,
^Jsdo, and find the theme by removing the termination and by adding

tfu

in

we have

to

the instances given by Kesava.

210.

In examining the origin of the conjugated negative

reject the thought, as

if

the change of the suffixes erudJ and

^rosj;

into

161
and wsj could help us to find it, for already in the ancient
we have, side by side with ?rodo, 533^ (that is another form of
193 under remarks) as a termination of the past tense, and

dialect

the

forms

positive

they scratched

and

person neuter plural of the present, past

200,

198, 4;

201,

2;

2.

and

3),

200,

5;

3).

e^

z3dcs

u S^j

in the third

tense

future

tense (200,3) and

past and future tense

vowel

194;

$&} in the third

future

neuter plural of the

Also the change of the

person

and

i)

modern one

the

in

person neuter singular of the

third

remark

194,

then in the mediaeval one

198, i);

are

they

LJS^,

into

in

})

n tne
198,

and

3"o*

eoc*

(
209) cannot assist us to do so, as some other monosyllabic verbs
52. 53),
appear in their positive forms with long and short vowels (see

we have the

as

3>6
2nd

3d

for

positive

187,

205,

pers., &;

4),

2,

forms 3e)dG*,
33d,

2nd

33, ETC for 3d, zod,

fcred,

pers., b;

negative forms 3dc3, wdd>

That

170).

of time

came

meant

wudd

205.

of the conjugated negative is

as that of the negative

is

participle

(see

was a verbal noun and only in course

meanings ( 188). Thus e.g. f3J3?sg at first

'a seeing', and

'about to see',

'to see',

thereupon

fSjs^cIo (?JU>^+<^o), therefore, signifies 'a yet to see-I',

seeing (is or was) yet to be or (will be) yet be, or my seeing

Regarding the

has been stated in note

their nominative or

subject which

Originally they denote

supplied.

required', 'a yet

209, note

i),

i.

e.

fitting

'

proper

(is,

existing
(will)

not be

or

not
so,

(will)

be

so,

etc.

',

be

so,

requiring

Now

if

for

(is,

being
(is

'

(I

a yet to

be

a yet

(the dashes denoting the

of

was or

'

',

being

will be) yet to

(is,

was

be, being

or was) not really

being
(is
not
or was)
really existing or
fit

(is

or was)

instance

is to

be',

'

fit

will be) yet to be,

will be) yet to be, or

not

(is)

whence we

expressly put or

either

was or

or will be) yet to be, requiring

was or

is

a yet to be

to be proper
(is,

so,

of

of

be

e.

have not seen) ',

meaning
3^, 'ao, e3^ and ?jt>
209 that their meaning depends on
'

to be

/.

'I shall not see'.

i,

and the

184),

i),

170).

not actually existing, (was) not so, or (will) not

arrive at the meaning 'I do not see', I did not see',

it

3V, wtf

1ST,

originally

to get its specific

'seeing',

'yet to see

my

same manner

infinitive

209, on the so-called infinitive ending in

based, as has been stated in

$3 (

todej*

era^ for ws5

206),

for 33dd>,

There can be no doubt that the origin

187) in the

for ^dsj*,

3e>de3*

not really existing or

ydo

(S3s3^j),

he,

(will)

becomes the
21

162
'he

subject, the translation is

be

fit',

'he

is

not

was not

he

fit,

not, he was not, he will not be', 'he

is

was not required, he

will not

of the infinitive with

&&

That S53o and

done to show

off

e^

be required',

is

he will

fit,

not

not required, he

forms

etc. Cf. the prohibitive

208.

in

are suffixed for vurfo and

the use of the infinitive with

eros^)

is

very probably

in the formation

of

the tense.

152

In

211.

165,

(of.

there

170)

&, 1-3;

frequentative or iterative action of the verb

is

is

the statement that

expressed by simple or triple

Without respect to the various meanings created by that

repetition.
process (see
339) we give here a number of instances as they occur
in the three dialects:
1,

doubling the verb

regarding

present, future,

negative)

without

participle, and.

imperative, infinitive,

past,

any alteration

rfj
es^ dd) do (&&
v
oJ
eo-<x}oO

enirso.rso. ( enjrao. eporso.):

v
eo

eo

eo

(in

conjugated

yd) do),
/
<j

wd

(for

tJ^cxSosa

(wrtos^ wrtos^),
.

'

2,

the

(wa

ewrsorso ferorso erureo),1 eo^

/
cao^

&i3);

w^sj^

^,

20^;
'

'

regarding

verb

the

tripling

without

any

alteration

(in

the

imperative, past, and past participle)

eje)

3,
.

e.

4,

WD

trs:

(see

erorao
ca

regarding doubling the verb, dropping aoo (or

of the first one (in the infinitive) 3oJ3?rt aJ3^r(ejJ,
5s3)

sotf

regarding doubling the verb, dropping the termination of the

ro^cSo (see

165,

first
6,

i),

one,

e.

g. 3Q> ^StoJ, vJ&>

and also

105,6,2), to which class

negative participle dropping

(

fenjraj
v
a>

al so

past participle of the

?5?

20^0 20^0 20^0: ^reoraorao

o
o'
o
cacaca

its

its

may

vowel,

e.

^3J
oJ

g.

likewise be

e$c3, viz.

^oSdo,

^do,

*e)0ijj

Jr?

Jrirto

referred the doubled

33i d,'
J

SeJOiJ*"

163
regarding

5,

the termination of the

doubling the verb, dropping

relative present participle or that of the present participle of the first

3jsd rfjsrfod;" 'ad

one, e.g. tfje^d cSjs^o^,

of the first

w)do

this

one, e.g.

(for 2J3do zjsdo

%&>& ^e^o,
or wad srsdo,

j^d
see

wao*
Q totfotf,
O

wtf

^J3?c5o,

209)

regarding doubling the verb, dropping the final syllable of the

7,

one,

e.

g.

3d

^J3w Jjs^rto, doo0o 5i)o0jrto, sSjsrf slertsJo,

and 2 of
165, 6, 3, and cf.
183, i and remark

3drto,

^J3r\^o (see

?oJ3ri

zod

regarding doubling the verb, dropping the personal termination

6,

first

'adj;^,

paragraph;

c/.

also

253,

243, A, ie);

3;

regarding tripling the verb, dropping the termination of the past

participle of the two first ones, e. g. 2oc3 2od sozlcSo ( 165, b, 2, remark,
8,

where
!>,

2oc3 2oc3

'&'&'

adduced as a peculiar form);

regarding tripling the verb, dropping the personal termination

of the two first ones,

e. a.

S53J

s3

x) oO oJ

(
V

essj

<js

oO

,J

e333 o),
/'
:>J

2J?j

wj^ 20^ o;'

C)
O

regarding tripling the verb, dropping the last syllable of the

10,

two

is

first

remark).

ones, e.g.

^J3^ Jj3^ JJS^rto, 23^ 23^

Cf. also $ti

tfti

23^rio

165,

(see

b,

a,

^dorto.

Observe also the curious repetition of verbs wherein the initial

of the second one is changed, e. g. =^J3^o A^os^^o, 33 6 ftrf d. Cf.
303, i,
O
Q
after e. Observe also the colloquial expression )d 3 3>
33
(for
3e>).
11,

Remarks.
1,

Also by setting a sort of adverb which

before the verb and occasionally doubling

;

it

is

same

of the

repetition

aodo soc&s'o;

is

root as the verb,

e.

expressed,

iwrfo sos?i3,

g.

aorfo

W
;

^oes does^ ^esorto;

It is possible

that

sow

SoyfS

^ioeaorio;

aod

sorf;3 iorfos'o,

some of the instances are connected with No.

Of double nouns not seldom verbs are formed by means of 'Slrio

'2,
which
may be regarded as frequentative ones, e. g. ^W 3oUx!o (of
seg.)
d aoarfo, stt ?rO?oo, ^d s'o^o, ^^ *$&, ^"B* 3?^o, e'cs rw?io,

w
<s*

above.
(

149

ri7oo ? rtoQ r!oQ?5o, riodo rtoa?io, rtooo

ds??oj, dtf d??5o, Sort

and s2j?3 might however be tle^dje and SJ?^J?

would be no dropping.

(see

181, note

<)

so that there

164

On adverbs,

VI,

etc,

28 1

(See

In the present paragraph a class of words

212.

words they term also particles (nipata, see remark

would be called adverbs by Europeans.
of

indeclinables

'

is

introduced which

Kannada grammarians; some

are called indeclinables (avyaya) by

The expression

seq.)

'

i).

of the

Many

of the

words

not quite exact, as some admit

is

which the letter d (declinable) in parenthesis will

be added in the alphabetical lists given below.
These alphabetical lists are composed of the adverbs, etc. found in
of being declined, to

the

Sabdamanidarpana and Sabdanusasana.

The adverbs, etc. contained

the ancient dialect and are left unmarked

two works belong to

also in the mediaeval
occur
they

in these
if

in

(mediaeval)

parenthesis;

and

if

marked

they are

one,

med.

with

used also in the modern

they are

with mod. (modern) in the same parenthesis; the additional words

have not been met with in the ancient one. Slight differences

one,

in brackets

of

form

in the three dialects

peculiar meanings

have not been regarded.

Sabdanusasaua.

kdoF, once (med.);

^)J3or,

?ra&;3oF,

times;

to their natural order).

twice; ^OJSSJJF, thrice;

thousand times,

[^^i

thrice, are other forms in the mediaeval dialect;

one.] See

e^, e^o*,

(d\ med., mod.);

2A),

Adverbs

in this

where

^Qo5

z-^

^o^, twice,

Ji>Jaj3o,

occurs also in the mod.

of place.

'3^,,

^o

5
,

intermediate place;

^,

en)^, eru^e*,

^o

4
,

fc^e'o, after,

this direction; in this direction

the front; in the front (d; raed., mod.

'?, here(d; med., mod.);

1

once,

that direction; in that direction (d; raed., mod.)

afterwards; ^eD, there (d;med., mod.);

^W^OF, sometimes; sto^JF,

279.
2,

<odod->)

few words and

Numeral adverbs

1,

arranged according

(exceptionally

several

rest on the

in this

mod. also

"OQcio,

intermediate direction;

what direction?

(d; med., mod.);

*>,

(d; med., mod.); kd?3, together with (med., mod.); ^tfrt, in, within, into

5 J3cl
;

(med., mod.)

together (med., mod.)

^tfrt,

below (med., mod.); ^o^, io^ro*,

the south; in the south (d; med., mod.); 3&>s3, in the middle (med., mod.); 3jC&3,
^j^o*, the west; in the west (d ; med., mod.) ;
behind (mod.) 3jesrl, behind;

^,

^pesrt,

outside (med., mod.

mod.);

(med., mod.)
(d

zStes 8

23(63*,

eorirto*,

the north; in the north (d\ med.,

separately, apart (raed., mod.); 2oo^, in front; forward

so ad, ^jjsdo*, the east; in the east (d; mod., mod.); s3Je^, above
eSto

3o?e3, above (med., mod.); ^J^, around; that surrounds (d

[#$, that side; on that side (d), 3^ this side; on this side (c?),

med., mod.);

med., mod.).

&6esri);

zoc^rt,

165
in

3,

advance,

occur in the mcd. and mod. dialect;

first,

&&,$, &&J&, nearand appear as ^^.d, sS^, in

ness; near, close by (d) belong to the mod. one,

the mod. one.J

Adverbs

3,

^?^i that time; then

0(3^0 = 0^0

e&edcSsOi^o

at the time that,

365; e3ds5,

raed.);

when;

wrtifc,

that time; then

day

little

to

(365); Ity
^Sdo,

?^o

moment; now (d.) ^rtv*, this time now (rf;

wdy, at this intermediate time; "-"o^Sdo,
this intermediate time;
<^^, when? (<7; med., mod.); ^rto,
till what time?; 2^3, forthwith (med.); ^ew^ofc
subsequent

sic^adrto, until this

up

from

*3o, *S|3*,

med., mod.); '^rto, up to this time (in med.);

to-day (d;

med.); ^steo, a

365);

xj5rio

(so that);

until that time, so

med.); o^ado, o^drto,

^0 = 0^0

that time, afterwards (med.);

this time;

o^o,

that time; then (d; med.); wSrto, continually (med.);

rtv*,

(r/);

until, in

365;

(see

long as; odfcdo,

(d; raed., mod.)

of time.

-^rtdj, this

while ago

(d)

time

.o^adrio,

subsequently, afterwards (d; med., mod.);

3$3

dawn; c^ack, the

at

day after to-morrow; on the day after to-morrow (d; mod., mod.);
to-morrow (rf; med., mod.); $c3., yesterday (d; med., mod.); ^P^
P^esS),

daybreak

afterwards

(Joes',

8
,

again (mod.);

some time ago

before yesterday

daybreak

(c?;

that

^JJc3*,

(d)

med.,

dawn

at

zocs 8 ^,

is

mod.);

2JO

zoca'^o,

(rf),

before (d; med., mod.);

the day before

?Wtfc3,

then (d)
[ort, that time;

(d).

sow
;

med., mod.; zoc^^o, zjw?^, wcy^o, med.);

before

sS^c^,

(d)

at daybreak;

daybreak; at

rtos^d,

now

^rt, this time;

dJ3;3oS.x:t>,

on the day

yesterday;

^i3, after

(cf);

this, afterwards, are med. and mod.; s^co^ appears as B&aieM and ^fi^ew (d)
8
in the med. dialect, and as ^Jas^es (^) in the mod. one; ^^6, forthwith,

and ^rt,
n
^^), at

at

dawn, are mod.

words;

regarding

daybreak, early (mod.);

4,

Adverbs

(The meanings given are

to

3oJ3^ora,3,
8
eJ

^^,

in

mod.)

wdo, further;

causelessly;

?^,

which (&,,

excessively, exceedingly (med.)

o^ Ses5

sleeJli

be somewhat modified according to circumstances.)

W^,9^4W^, o^^

manner

3c>e^oz

see Dictionary.]

circumstance and manner.

of

abundantly, exceedingly ; orao, soever

abundantly, exceedingly; o^tf, osnS^Po*, osn^a*
similar to; in the

e.
(z.
^

w^,

still, etc.

ortof^O,

(^qraSabdanusasana),

3oJ3^o

oOsSo,

oaort

o3,

in that

whatsoever

=0^,

manner,

etc.

in like

orfoiido,

orf^,

^,, raed.,

mod.; orfo&o med.);

o3

snicy,

little, to

like;

Wo5^,

some extent

=0^0., etc. (mod.); wrao, soever:

^^rt, woi^, vehemently, quickly; oarrfo,

orfofcjo

manner;

(3

whatsover;

excessively, exceed-

in this manner C3SX med., mod.;

'g^&Jo (tl^o Sabdiinusasana),
also
in
a
med.,
'g^yo,
gs^oUj); 'gdojS,
proper manner; 'gadrt, in this manner

ingly

(med.);

^,

'Srfo,,

ero

reused) do, greatly,

much

ro^,

sro^.,

in this

intermediate manner;

(^$o Sabdanuaasana); Torf^ib, how? (^^o Sabdanusasana)

sro^, silently

how

166
Sabdauusasana)

eroSF^o,. excessively,

=%^ by degrees, slowly, irresolutely,

(eruAi^, med.);
<o^,

how?

how?

eO?k_,
<02otf,

arto, rao st

certainly

sana); ^o3^3, clearly, evidently;

fragrantly, deliciously

suddenly; $'<&

(o. r.

$>&),

exceedingly;

manner;

rttf,

rid,

quickly (raed.;

silently

spaciously, extensively;

^do, certainly (S^ofc^ro Sabdanusa-

s^o,

swiftly (med.); s'siy^

excessively,

(med.)

greatly

^^fS, redly (med., mod.); ^o,

.sowd, in a shrill, piercing, rough

closely, densely;

axo9 ^,

a>c3eJc3,

certainly (rt^, med.,

rttfrttf,

^> excessively,-

(med., mod.)

excessively,

ric3,

^,

en}A5r<3,

med., mod.); lO^ifo, how? (^$0 Sabdanusasana; med.);

(<o3o.,

(med.);

e/uAffo,

exceedingly;

used in emotion and command); rto

spinningly, round and round (med.);

tlcss is

mod.); ^|,^,

ft

3,

^o ^, quickly
9

rioo.irioSoj^ inactively, silently;

tf^$, quickly (med.);

2^04^3

307, a); a3^3, quickly; zS^do, quickly; zS'^cio, manifestly, clearly,

with embarrassment (in speaking, med., mod.); ^^,

quickly (see

^^

certainly; ^SzJCd,

mod.); ^tf^otfo, decisively (SraroJJS3"J Sabdanusasana);

glitteringly (med.); ^W, s&A ^esr^, ^^, whirlingly, round and

coolly, refreshingly (raed.,

S,

59

round (&?, med.); (**j$ see

307, a); *^^, thinly (med., mod.);

^^,

not

^coi?rfo,

by degrees, slowly,
307, a); s ^,
vehemently (med.); (^^fS, see

(^c^cpr^Fo Sabdanusasana)

firmly, irresolutely

irresolutely; Sja^rt, ejs^fS,

rf^6

wearisomely (med., mod.);

?>Ae;(3,

certainly (med.);

with consternation

(med., mod.); 53^, excessively, greatly, further (med.); S^sio, certainly; SSfD*,
ScSrdo, causelessly;
(raed.,

Sdi,

S?rfoo,

extensively, excessively;

mod.); clctfdo, much, exceedingly; ^^^,

^^^

N^^<3, softly

rfora^,

clearly, distinctly, nicely

3

^^. ^^> vehemently (ft'^roa^ro Sabdanusana) ^ea

307, a); ^^ ^^> suddenly (med.,
(med.); (fSja^^, see

(med., mod.)

much

greenly (med.);
&?rfo,

sioJ^cS,

quickly

&9do,

much, further;

profusely,

IjOrfoo,

sf^ri,

s^SfS

ttscfo,

exceedingly
mod.);

^^>

extensively, greatly, further (med.);

(^^j^>

^^j^))

quickly; We3 d, in vain (med., mod.);

much, further;

woi)^

suddenly;

^^,

^^fS, silently.

inactively;

^oj

!,

silently;

23d>yS,

?3e3^,

firmly, tightly;

2^3,

warmly

hotly,

^zdo, quickly; zS^bo, clearly (^S^FO Sabdanusasana); 23^,^0,

6
ti^Vo, timidly, tremblingly; $J3o?r3, swiftly, quickly (med.); ^-o^o^o swiftly,
quickly, without restraint; ^?dj3, swiftly, quickly; sio^N, other, different; ^^,
(med., mod.);

excessively,

much

(med.); ^Jsjrt, ^o^jS, slowly (med., mod.); 3do, deJo, 3^o, deso,

most certainly; clearly; (*^c3, see

sweetly; JkS^rl,

rfoa^cS, silently,

much, more, further;

suddenly (med., mod.),

307, a); 38, perpetually, constantly (med.);

inactively (med., mod.);

wsdo, causelessly; 3oO, how?

qodrH appear also as 353^, S3or5, ootf,

^-ra?^o

[oadrt,

Socor^ in

the

50 ^> 3^ ^ in the
and always so in the mod. one; <oadtf is also ^^j
med. dialect, and always 35^ oo^ort in the modern one.] Regarding <o^rt
^rt,
ouo^_ ooart,
3->c&F,
see
of
327.
a
tadbhava
may be
(;i>?<3,
353^ sari, .ON^ a^

med.

dialect,

adduced here

too, e. g.

&

s3o?d

or

s3o6r^. in this

according to his command. Samskrita

^^Ojs

manner, thus; ^^rf

similarly used,

e.

g.

107
in this manner; ^d
^sd, according to that; ^tf ^^DdO^, in various ways.
Likewise *,:&, *d, 0a, ^tf are used.
6y. also iaaaaoto*,

Conjunctions.

5,

^^,

n>o, and (med.); 2J3, again, further, and; &>', again, further; 3o^o,
again, further, and (med.; 3-i^, mod.; also the form 3j^, is used in the

mod.

dialect);

eo,

further, and, or (mod.),

sfotfs*,

the mediaeval dialect, and generally as

284

See

one.]

seq.:

appears also as

[eruo

A>, exceptionally as

eru

in

A>,

the

in

modern

297.
6,

Postpositions.

Several of the above-mentioned adverbs of place and time and of the

they are adduced under

but
their
without
meaning.
heading again,
Postpositions, i, e. words and letters (particles) placed after, or at
the end of, nouns, pronouns, participles, etc. (see
282), are:
conjunctions are used also as postpositions;

this

a^

^, a particle of emphasis; a vocative particle; ^o;

8
5); e3
O 109, a,7/7

os<3;
esstf^Po*;
_s

3*;

c3
_a

&$_; ^Po*;

yrfo

CO

(w^do,

see

etc.,

yrfo;
ejSrto;
eo*, in:
t
C

to;

when, whilst (med., mod.; see

109, a, 5. 187, 1); ^, (med.,
109. 117 seq.~); 533ort; W, a particle of emphasis; a vocative particle

at the time that,

mod.; see
(med., mod.);

when
when;

286);

there (med., mod.);

'S,

109. 120, a,

see e.g.

enjj;

^Oo^-

3);

by means

),

so that (med.; see

187,

of,
4)

*3o,
'gtfo;

from (see
<o,

interrogation (med., mod.);

(med.);

a-v*, (en>**),

jw^,
3do,

1076 A. D. C9od),

till

and &$

in

$*>,

3);

emphasis; vocative particles;

vocative particles;

of

particles

together with, along with (med., mod.); &^,

e.

g.

109);

ucs-^, jowoioo; doo^, as far as;

^Po^, ^?a*, like; as; in the

[^,

at the time that,

<o,

if,

another form of

one of 1123 A. D.

(Orfcl,

i>$,

wdd),

8-tfrt;

till

tftfrt;

if

&^;

(med., mod.);

manner
in

in

which; so

a sasana of

appears
in one of 1181 A. D.

one of 1182 A. D. (rf^dd); &,d occasionally has the form

$ in the med. one;
in the med. dialect, and always that of
yrftf,

.j^),
23C

uw^o,

242).

^>,

within; into (med.; see

Jidrto, until;

that (mod.; see

of

in,

109, a,

a, particles of

particles of interrogation (med., mod.);

^3,

from that place or time; thence (med.;

stfrto; yy; ewo; wurfoo, at the time that,

and

(med., mod.);

in

wrt,

at the time that,

when

(med., mod.);

$ (see sub

^),

^rt, together with (mod.); i.^ort, Ljforfd, i^d, on account of (med.:

a
i so
mod.); ^rf^, till, until; as far as (med., mod.); ^orij?, for, on account
k?^d
in
order
to (mod.) ;
on account of; concerning; for, in order to (mod.)
of,
20^, zorl,
yzS; ^z3;

dooo'J, previously, before;

3oj^; sart; Ojjs^or, except (mod.).]

7,

Some

verbal forms, etc.

which are classed under thoavyayas by the Sabdanusasana, but of which only
an avyaya by the Sabdamanidarpaun.
i), is called

one, viz. 'Qu, (see $ 209, note

168

They are
J^o

(=an

am

'

a yet to be

209, note

O f eo*,

a bhavavacana

i),

'a not actually being

fit-it',

fit-it',

used

persons singular and plural, expressly pat or not, in the three tenses, viz,)
fit or meant, thou art not fit or meant, he, she or it is not fit or meant

for all
I

ay dodo,

122 or

or verbal noun, (literally

not

we, you or they are not fit or meant; I was not fit or meant, etc., etc. (see
301. 338)5 ***L (' e- 53yi+ o ) am I not fit or meant? etc.-, I am indeed not
fit

or meant, etc.

mod.;

300);

except (see

or,

S|w

Wifco, either

mod.

^^^;

also

293;

see

298,

(or

shall I

z3*

301);

wholly

3o

absence

what

301);

mod.;

209, note

without

of,

301); arfido,

w&o

210; med., mod.;

i;

(med.,

see

301. 338);

in

^^cS,

how? why?

(or

8,
s,

ah!

(in

210;

i;

shall

o3o,
med.,

uitiu., uiou.j

(in affliction

Interjections.

admiration); alas!

affliction or grief,

fin'-

209, note

210; med.,

i;

301. 318,5).

mod.;

grief,

io,

338);

do?

med., mod.

316, 1.2);

1-4;

209, note

see
;

^sJo; see

(or

6
301); S3 what?

do? (med.;

what

eoo;

170. 171

170. 171; med., mod.;

(see
I

301. 338);

<uj3,

(in affliction

med., mod.); ah!

on

wuj^uu,

or grief)

med., mod.);
olocT (in r\am

ws,

^m pamj

ah!

fie!

'Sft,
f\r

aias

(in

wonder or

PAf^

-fio

sro,

PAD 5
,

3o^3, oh

woe

to

me

^in

painj

fie!;

eros,

alas! (in

es^fas,
;

110

med., mod.); alas!

(in surprise,
;

3^J,

surprise, med.)

<-'MI| on

(med., mod.)

cnr r^k\lr^

or grief);

ah! ha!

siup

"i aias

affliction or

(in
(in

pleasure);

aloe* fin T\airi r\r

cnrrricp\'
alas!
(in pain or sorrow);

tOoJ^. \vf>ll

308.

pain, med.). Cf.

9,

Imitative sounds.

Imitative sounds (anukarana, anukaranapada, anukriti), i. e. sounds

used in imitation of the effects of the operations of nature (as the rolling
of thunder, agitations of water,

bodily functions, falling,

Kannada and
any sound
often

in

essential

pattering of hail-stones, voices of birds,

breaking and the

like)

arc very frequent in

parts of the language; in fact there

nature that has not been imitated in

it.

is

scarcely

Such sounds are

idiomatical and therefore strange to the ear of foreigners.

the vast

number

of imitative sounds the Dictionary

is

For

to be consulted.

109
Those mentioned

of khaj.il (in speak ing)

(a particular

sound of the cuckoo)

tho sound of gahagahath

rioorfodo,

sound of

running water); riJu^o

gaj.agaj.a (in

clanging of bracelets);
(in

the Sabdamanidarpana and Sabdunuiiisana are a^sta,

in

kavakava

tho sound of

rbcwrtocw, the

rt-itfortotfj,

sucyt><3
;

(in

with the sound

laughing)

rtorto,

the

no sound of gulgul (e.g. in the

sound of gulugulu or guj.ugulu

the gurgling of water, etc., med., mod.); efJSJ$Jo, the sound of Shataihataih

breaking);

(in

jlium

e^oco??,

with the sound of6hal.il;

oozing); de^w, with the sound of darr

(in

with the sound of

tajatala or

dhamm

with the sound

d^wSo^,

of

belching, med., mod.); #3,y5,

(in

banging, mod.); 3*3tf, ^o^K, 3o^, the sound of

or tal.taj.a (in boiling with a briskly bubbling noise, med.,

tal.atal.a

(in

mod.); cioqksiyS, with the sound of dudhumm (in plumping or plunging into water,
with tho sound of dhal.amra (e.g. of a kettle-drum when beaten, med.):
mod.);
tfosiyS,

mod.);
nej.k

(in

with the sound of

c3c3'w^,

5jC3SJca^,

jumping down suddenly from above, mod.,

(in

nej.il

breaking);

^^(3. with tho sound

breaking);

(in

mod.)

dhumm

with the sound of

ifcs&yS,

with the sound of pal.apaj.a or

2je^G3$,

with the sound of

<3c^3.

of pathill (in banging or slapping,

paj.paj.a

y.

(e.

in

tin-

pattering of hail-stones, mod.); $)AO*, the sound of bhugil (e.g. in the blazing

of flames, med.,

mod.);

streams, -raed., mod.);

sound of surr
(in

(e.

cracking).

*T^<3,

in

g.

$>?o

sound of bhor (e.g. in the

the

with the sound of sigg (in splitting);

flowing or

showering);

&tf><3,

running of
with the

^o^,

with the sound of

hill

309.

Cf.

Remarks.
1,

k,

l>

The Sabdamanidarpana expressly

and

i-c^JS?

nipatas, to
,

C?,

calls only

53&3o. atf,

us,

eru,

<^,

n/a,

cSes*,

cn^s,

J)J^,

oc, <oio,

^03?^,

aoja?,

Kanmtakabhashabhushana has tho following nipatas:

vismaya), ws,
2,

.0,

<oe3,

<053?,

o,

which tho SabdanusA,sana adds o,

^oSjs,, wt^js.s, 55ddo,

a6, we^, wad,

Regarding the formation of adverbs,

j,

<o3,

etc.

it

)e;^
agjs? a&fl?.

^o

Nagavani!
and
(used
in bhi-du

i:!, o, is5js.

may be

stated that not

or ^cS appears at their end, e.g. ^^>T5, f^rt, iSi^rt, T^^rt

e?^
may be the same as wrt, 'so that it becomes'
BrSjjS, ^^j^, tf^tf, Tjodo^jS.
ssrtj and *rto
as
Kannada verbal themes,
(both
17G); ^N may l>r
appearing

unfrequontly

of ^f(

another form

176), or belong (especially in uiuikaraiius

3 or <0c?, e.g. ^-'^
unfrequently are written either with final

to

c^

and

below the
3,

<0c3*,

to

say, and mean

'so that

it

says'.

or

jto*3c3)

281 note

text.

Some

of the adverbs of circumstance

and some imitative sounds exhibit

consonants with strong aspiration or aspirates (mahapninu,

Ja^cS, djqjjrfo^ (see

4,

275;

Cj.

which not

There uro no prepositions

in tnu;

tj

218).

Kaunada.

J?

-'.'),

e.g.

170

VII,

Euphonic junction of

letters,

Euphonic junction of letters (sandhi, samhite) has not un frereferred to in the preceding paragraphs.
It occurs in the
been
quently
The colloancient, mediaeval and modern dialect, especially in poetry.
213.

and modern prose writings often disregard

quial dialect

main follow the Sabdamanidarpana

Generally speaking

(svarayuktavyanjana)
tfJS^Frfo,

oirf.
*C

S3d?oo

it

vowel or consonant,

followed by a vowel,

oiNjtiSjo,

sJwfl

e. g.

^>,S3 5Jo

s.

22e>p*

vurao.

e.

y.

^JS^OF

e$&3o (for
OjsjjrtjrfSSo)

-Sssjo

doo&3
3c;
C
is

becomes

and when a

followed by a

becomes ^rsorso.,
eo

would, therefore, be wrong to use

e.

g. eSrOOJo

^^estftfo

^S5 3

(for

(for

According to the place where euphonic junction of letters takes

214.

it is

place,

it.

vowel (svararahitavyanjana)

final

ii

It

in the

takes place when a consonant with a final vowel

is

\.

consonant without a

in describing

We

it.

stated to be of two kinds, viz.

the junction in the middle of words

(padamadhyasandhi), i. e.
either the junction of a declinable word and a case-termination (namavibbakti), or that of a verbal theme and a personal termination (kriyaa)

vibhakti), e.g.

djs^j+

?3o

122);

(see

becomes

^o&a+SSo becomes

198, 2);

(see

the junction at the end of words (padantyasandhi),

6)

i.

e.

either

the junction of a declinable word (narnapada) and another declinable

word, or that of a conjugated verb (kriyapada) and a declinable word,
e.g.

arf^

50 becomes

becomes
215.
of o&*

?&3dddo s zS^^ddj 0^0

,

top

o.

Euphonic junction takes place by elision (lopa), the insertion

and 53*, the permutation of consonants (ucitfiksharfigama), ;ind

the doubling of final consonants.

Sometimes

it

is

optional whether elision happens or 0&* and

53*

are

inserted, sometimes euphonic junction itself is optional, sometimes also

171
euphonic junction is forbidden, sometimes the permutation of consonants
and sometimes their doubling are necessary, and sometimes do not take
place.

Euphonic junction by

1,

a)

When

elision.

the final vowel of a case-termination (vibhaktisvara), either

a Saiiiskrita declinable base (saihskritaprakriti) or of a Kannada (Or

Tadbluiva) one (karnatakaprakriti), is followed by a vowel, it suffers
of

elision,

e.

o3o^o becomes tf.3ocrso3j3o,

*~>

^riod

g.

&$

ooarfgo

oT\

arf

OJ

OJ

rtvSod
C^zio,'e)

becomes

6)

The same happens when a case-termination, or a conjugated

or the formative -3^0

word ending

in the

150. 151, remarks)

vowel

e.

3,

is

verb,

suffixed to a Saihskrita

y.

wjqS+^o* becomes

or a

Jpe)C)?oO (C/. 2, C).

c)

elision

Likewise a

when

final

es,

Q,

followed by a vowel,

it is

-f

euphonic
e.

y,

S5d?o

en)

96. 98) suffers

as* becomes

Jo
ej

3^

4);

(cf.

-^^kc3o

?5e^tkc5o,

dojafl

'a-5\cSo
S

O"

O"

TT

(c/. 2,
.

(/.

4).
rf)

'.);

213. 214.

cy:

Also

when

the final

vowel

is

that of a

personal

termination

198) or of the participial suffixes ^, ^j and d) (ij 155. 156. 166),

elision

happens,

e.

r/.

^JS^cS^)

z*tf

becomes rfjaaddp^

o:

eroeso

Euphonic junction by the

2,

a)

If

the

of the

genitive

is

insertion of

followed by the

of emphasis, oii%

y tJ^^ + oi becomes tJ^tfol), yd^-(-0

y^v'oSo, yci&3+ j wciSioSo, when, as the Sabdanusasana states (sutra 45).
for ^rcSo, ^foSo and ^>?o5j 3?al>, ^a$j and ^?oij may be put.

generally conies between

(cf. 6, #.), e.

172
the final

If

b)

vowel, o&*

rfeoto

o3o^o,
O
c)

e.

rteorieooSotfo

o?3o

followed

is

212,9)

^o

suffixed

is

(cf.

by

sJCOsjeo oj^o becomes soMsJW

CO

g.

d).
O
Q (cf.
a class of Samskrita and Kannada themes with final

If to

formative

imitative sounds

of.

es

generally put between,

is

5,

i,

and

3,

a),

the

es

comes between,

o&

e.

#.

becomes

the

If

d]

and

b
(c/. s,

woajd^j,

followed by a vowel, o&*

is

^+ j^
o

wo3od,

often inserted

is

^rfr d^eo^ becomes tJ03odr rfows

e*

e.g.

If the letter

e)

letter

e, ft),

151, remarks.

Qf-

^^crfoo 4

187,

of a declinable base is followed by a cases termi-

nation beginning with a vowel, o&* always comes between

w)+S5o becomes
/)
is
r

eoOcdoo,

If the letter

fiO+wsrS?3 AQcrfj^ri)^

of a declinable base

not the initial of a case-termination

followed by a vowel,

is

i),

oi5*

is

(cf.

is
i,

130), e.g.

followed by a vowel that

c),

or

a verb with final

if

generally put between,

e.

g.

becomes

g)

If the letter
e.

(cf. 3, c),
(

130),

^odao*
7i)

is

a vowel, o&*

followed by

is

>d becomes

#.

^^

-ds

^rf^

187,

^c&d^;

187,

i).

mostly inserted

DJS+'S^J

wj?)05asjo

151, a,

5),

i).

If the letter

of a declinable base is followed

,0

nation beginning with a vowel,

oto* is

by a case-termialways put between ( 130), e.g.

becomes Jja
i)

is

If the letter

of a declinable base

x)

not the initial of a case-termination

<o is

followed by a vowel, 0&*

is

(cf.

is
i,

followed by a vowel that

or

c),

a verb with final

if

mostly put between, e.g.

^d) becomes

3JzS

,,

'

tr
(

It)

If

the letter

becomes

>

is

187,

i).

followed by a vowel, o&* cornes between,

^^o5o^o,

do^+'S.^o

^o^oSo^o
(

151
187,

a, 5),

i).

io

e.

g.

oi^o

CO

173
If the letter

followed by a vowel,

is

so

dx

becomes do3j?;d>3o.
_0'

3i

(';/'

the letter k

If

w)

6,

g;

e.

a-^),

mentioned under
e.

#.

c,

2,

the formative 'azoo

3Dd^)^o, s^d)?oJ,

g.

is

151, o,

5),

insertion of 53*.

suffixed,

final

3* comes frequently

See

o5j?tfS?i), oo3d^^io.

a^O^o,

often put between

is

?$JS^o&o?jj

g.

eSioSjOo^o.
~W
ti

Kaunada themes with

the class of Samskrita and

If to

between,

^JS^+^^j becomes

e.

inserted,

'-a

followed by a vowel, Q&*

is

is

<>o>o ?io

<5>

Euphonic junction by the

3,

a)

*o?So d>o3.>?3o,'
Q
Q

o&

151,

remarks.
If

b)

between

If

c)

d;

^5

(c/. 2,

-d?>d> rt.^o,

rt.fi

e.

e, ft),

g),

-ds

g.

e.

g.

If

a radical

by a vowel,

SAJ

d^nejo, ado

becomes
/)
e.g.
(

and

sxjJS

e.

iio

g.

53* is

always inserted,

e.

If the

final

53* is

always put between,

^+*ao

3^FS3e>do, aoJS^+oi ao^^s5,

riJ^^+'a^o
O rU)?3r3o
Ci
If

/O
o

S3

is

followed

becomes ^rfo,

12'J).

flj^+'acS

rtJ3?do,

53*

ft&?

129).

by a vowel,

rr^

5>s^Oc

by a vowel,

of a declinable base is followed

always comes between, e.g. rU>?-fS3o becomes

Z>$,

siijj

g.

129); Ddjs ^rfo sdJSsS^o, S3J3 'a^o adJsa^o, adJS + 'a^ ajjsa?i
g)

followed

129).

are followed by a vowel,

becomes
u^r wdo

y\i is

io^a^oo becomes

^o^oas;, do^j 'ado sjodoadj, ^$0^0 +

^JS+^N Z&dtf

zpj^Odo,
If sjo

'a^do.

ado

-ado aqioado,

M3 is followed by a vowel,

If

rt.rfortv*,
^^9

97. 128) or radically used

(see

aw

e)

which case the

in

dsSsA

always comes between,

53*

followed by a vowel,

becomes

may become

'ado

d?

'asj, is

wxjcrac^o

^Oq>

be shortened, e.g.

rf)

&

does not unfrequently come

53*

becomes

and

'acSo

rt.?iort^

"ad)

^Jqi'

may

snaci^o

t?

which stands for

-d?,

comes between
^J

followed by a vowel,

is

(cf. 2,

+ ^o

rf^^o,

53*

rf3

always comes between,

a?S

rf3

Ofi

e.

g.

174
Cases wherein euphonic

4,

If
is

Kannada words end

sometimes optional

inserted,

e.

g.

or

tf,

If

a)

junction
6)

At

junction

('sc5j

is

+ ^)
in

o&* or

in its stead

e.

i.

elision

P/O,

may be

53*

'Sici-jsS

end of a half

optional,

or *ac,
(ssrfo

=6 (
^d wa*

to

optional, ws.

the

97 and remark thereon),

(c/.

+ (Orfo )

which euphonic junction

added

is

S5o

is

c),

or &sdzi)4|3i&
O

Cases

5,

i,

o, or a euphonically used

(^^

ksl 'aelo may become t&eJo or fc

w
oJo^jra z
jso ^^>o rfj)e;o or
C3

or

(cf.

in

elision is optional.

187,

i)

and
>

(kanda)

esriosS^o or

itself is optional.

sscS

or ? 6ajoe7
!

to

's.d

verse

ao*

yd

170), euphonic

or 'add.

(padyardha)

euphonic

e. fj.

either

||

in the sense 'there is this'

there occur everywhere the words wu ^, z-doi), d^ (243, 5, 20. 23. 36); where
6
comparison in any way takes place among excellent persons, ^<^, 4P?S3 are used ;
1

or

when the female

friend said "Sister, I will go into the

flowers; (go) thou a

little

garden and bring thee a bunch

of nice

quick (and) remain in the dormitory of thy beloved

one", and went away.

In a quotation from Samskrita (vakyaveshtana) euphonic junction
e)
is

optional,

e.

g.

either

?ie33 rtjsy

o,

or

o3o$&>3oo ^^orzso ziae^rUkS,, "who? why

a petitioner? who? a poor man":

how much
either

or

soever,

Dharmaja gave

(it) all

away;

175
d)

a Kannada imitative sound

If

is

euphonic junction

occasionally optional

(cf.

followed by a vowel,

9; is

212,

2, b), e.

y.

either
<od

<oe3 eru
00

or

But
its

if

the imitative sound

original form,
e)

If

optional,

ajj
e.

e-

y. qSriqSri

from Samskrita,

is

it

has always to retain

never becomes qJrtj^rt^ before a vowel.

preceded by a sonne or a vowel, euphonic junction

is

is

y.

cither

or

6,

a)

If

Cases in which euphonic junction

the nipatas ending in

oj,

i),

t^

and

forbidden.

is

t> (

followed by a vowel, they do not form junction with

212, remark
it, e.

y.

i)

are

5d;3j

oS

(or

o!
6)

If

6y.

the vowels

remark

^,

i.

and

to

are used as nipatas, o,

>

expressing

emphasis (avadharana) or doubt (visanke, or also simple question) and

and are followed by a vowel, there is no euphonic junction,
&o, to, doubt,
e.

y.

riort^JSa^rforSiaiJS

did he say

I)

he

>

would certainly protect? Let not thy courage fail on account of Yama's
gruffness! Did he say he would certainly give? That seems to be
scarcely possible.

Gangas?; &a$%

But
-djrfo;

will

what he said

^JS^F?^ tJ^o;

fail

to occur,

^pd^fS? wtf o;

T#aOe>&i^OO&{dG;

'

o best of the

176
c)

used in approval (meccu) or abuse (akshepa) and followed

is no euphonic junction, e. g. <^$
r^? ^8 ^U sSja

If k> is

by a vowel, there

SO

d]

If

and

esoSJSr^

(kheda) and are

3^,be) express 'sorrow, grief

followed by a vowel, there

no euphonic junction,

is

e.

g.

QJ
e)

If o3;jo

212,

used

is

8)

the

in

sense

of

well'

'certainly,

(angikara; cf. another ^do in 137, a, plural) and followed by a vowel,

no euphonic junction takes place, e. g. ^rfort&rfo
U*

/)

If

is

used in the sense of 'indeed' (gada;

is no euphonic junction, e.g.

followed by a vowel, there

^)

the

If the

vowel

of

=5^3
/)

If

nipata,

(cf. 2, a), e. g.

5JOJS3 9 ^0;

^WJ^SJ^^O
e is followed

euphonic junction

(cf. 2,

is

^S3,

by
d;

2o^, ^js?o,

no euphonic junction,

C/

oi^ ?5o^.
k)

246, b;

followed by

tJ is

e.

tJ^

is

Jj3?dcSjsdr^*;

^^3^^X18 SJSS^Oo.

3,

e.

g.

sr

5?

yd?do,

S5oS,

W SD^O^O, W O?^gO,
SO^O^FO,

sia and

><$

are followed by a vowel, there

i&>t3

V&,

g.

247, d,

^ w ^> 3P

euphonic junction takes place,

e.

7*

^^^,

^^

e$&)rb,

5.

a protracted vowel (pluta,

If

and

and y, there is uot unfrequently no

if followed by 53 and 2J, there is
6), and

If

e)

55

always none, the Sabdanusasana says (sutra 43),

i)

4.

the Sabdanusasana says (sutra 45), there

exceptionally no euphonic junction

tJ8

form

of the genitive or its lengthened

212,
53-35:3

g.

20)

=5*0

^J3

is

followed by a vowel, no

^J3? c^^o

^J3ei^

Z3a)

Remarks.
1,

With regard

emphasis
3
nipata
is

to

loses its exact

(

a and 6

e.

it

meaning, e.g.

212, 4; 212, remark

euphonic junction,

oi>sjd -qy

6,

g.

sira^otfrfu

be observed that when the

is

to

in

^wtf

170. 171).

or

>

of

when the

meaning of 'half a thing', there

d 3&n becomes

1)

^srt^rf ^oOrtoJJwQy (see

gets the
f

338 under

177
two rephas come together or in any other way cacophony (srutikashta)
is wrong to form sandhi,
e.g. tJ^osrsDo*; dczdr&Tiort;
EC^U toko*.
a bad notion (dushpratiti) is likely to be produced, sandhi is to be

If

2,

happens,

it

If

3,

avoided, as

e.

pa3soiJ^dd?Wc3? (does he not

g.

may be read 30w3 #

(Cy.241.)

compounds

their doubling

become the

?)

of

consonants: their permutation in the formation

244. 246. 247. 248. 249. 251. 252) and in

when

final.

As a general rule

a)

bring a bodice with flowers

(samasa, see

Euphonic junction

7,

of

tell to

di^o 3jd.
&ti 3oy wdo; ;3otfo&>d
P
t*
to
to

>o*tio

&ri

>rfd;3<Oc3s;
-*

soft

ones

rl,

it

d,

may

be stated that the hard letters ^, ^,

(see

28),

e.

g.

t>

sJW 3$ do becomes

!J

wo; ^oaoiooo

^3

>

Exceptions are

Further

e.

g.

See

AiSoJoo^ e3.
O

243,

^d^eJo,
t3^^J3^, ^^^oi3*, ^dosi^Cj
J

specific exceptions are that after

26.

Oft>^J

^o* (^r), one, and

'a

and after
after a repha
that is a substitute (adesa) of
('ar) two,
(r)
a 0* that is a substitute of
or $* ? the letters ^, ^, si retain their

^,

&

shape,

#.

rtdreo,

^-^3 Si 3 (see under letter

?ra^J^j do; ^^3j?,jS,
OJ
^

and

eJ

always remain as they are, e.g. ^doas^h, ^rs^o,

o,,

b)

^ssJfeSja^rt,

^^2J3?

^<l3^rao.

After vowels and radical consonants (sahajavyanjana)

are generally changed into s^

e.

/.

^^

3J,

to

becomes

sSCS3

:00 doc^i sjoorfdi, siw

*"

oJ

tod ijse^d,

(cf.

6).

234.

53og3

dv^^O

5JOJ3rf^,,

^prto*
Sjoa^o;
oj

55^0^^,

etc. see

z2eo*

20^.

278,

U ^artrfF^.;
CO
i,

doJS^a,

etc. in $ 280).

23

and

178
This rule holds good also in sentences (vakya, i. e. cases of nouns or
the infinitive of verbs to which a relative participle or a conjugated verb
is

suffixed), e.g.

&todJ8flrs8{5J

Exceptions are

Further

e.

g. =o3>>S3

s
,

specific exceptions are that after 'so*, two, the substitute of

and after

the substitute of ^rta, the letters

remain unchanged,

e.

^.

After final consonants the letter

c)

278,

is

20

and do

278,

^j,

e.

g. ^oro*

a).

and ^,
AJ^O becomes

generally becomes

s3

concerned,

?j)^do clfccpF^do

^ja*5

i),

sj,

'awsr^*; ^rfor^; ^-^Jtvci (see sub letter

and when the numeral pro^do

(^

i).

218); further remark

(see

23^ D ^s^O.
Exceptions are ^cl&P^o,
A)
rO
'

Further
retains

its

r\;

specific exceptions are that after

shape,

e.

&

o&* and

the letter

#.

r\)

Another rule
.

e.

z3

or

that

is

e.

ti

after a short vowel sometimes

sJ

becomes double

doo ?3d becomes

2o-

d in

When

d)
c3*,

P*, c*, 030*

278,

the

and

i.

vowel

&

their final consonant

is

monosyllabic declinable bases ending in

and such bases are followed by a vowel,

doubled,

=5^+25

^sy

^s^,
oo

e. a.

^dosJo^^

fifs

S?^

becomes

cc)o

I ea'
;

of

is short,

+ ^^o
^sS^o,
ro
co ro

5jj5

+eroo

SjOOij^+^o ^OOJ^o, ^Oi3+S5o ^OJOoo; 3ojV*

V^eJo, zs?*+ t$S^
Ti

But

if

their vowel

is

^^V
IT

s
;

<^^+ Jo o^o.

'.

(Q/*.

120, a; 247, d, n.)

long, that doubling does not take place,

e.

g.

179

nor

o;
e. rj.

polysyllabic (anekakshara),

nor

vowel meets with a vowel,

When

e)

P*,

c3*,

suffixed

J3
>

and

do,

nant,

?3o&*,

e. (j.

3J3r3e;

s^Cotfor^,

d)do

212,

(see

4).

<=3&^o

there

4),

erufl;

(se3*

no doubling,

is

+ ^rfo) and o

t>tfo&*,

3^dJS,^
a Q

'e.g.

05?&%(do:

^jstfera rfFo,
rO

<.

when such verbal themes end

in o&*, the

Sjoos*

or

e, cj.

and

200^3*,

however, always double their

final conso-

which has a long initial and is dissyllabic, may or may not

consonant before 3^3*, ?323J3i^o, <o, and before a personal

final

termination, e.g. tJdoJoe;oo or e3c&>osx>o;

wdo3j or

tJdoSJo;

tJdoSoo or

In the negative form of the verb, either the conjugation

or the participle
in
,

are

eA)ol>o^>o, rSorfjpWOo.

double the

/)

short

^pai>ejjo (^poJJ* + 5^ + 5^0)

^ako^oo,
the
verbal
themes
or
rtaSoewo
^J3oJJoe;oo,
rtoiowoo;
-0
Q

optional,

or
,

y.

^JSsj^.ricoo,
W
,

doubling

Q.

the formatives S5<3,

<s>

187,

(c/.

is

o,

is

to monosyllabic verbal themes with a short vowel ending in

and

<9*

rldefo

rotfr^c*,

consonant of a monosyllabic avyaya having

the final

if

declinable base

the

if

R,

a*,

209)

themes with a short vowel ending

double
their final, e.cj,
always

170), monosyllabic

o&5 and

s?*

erurso,'

The only exception forms

=5^"*,

e.

g.

^^cS 20^ o.
O

Remark.

When,
3E5* (3co^

in

samasa,

may become

is

&

followed by c^, this

^ifcoo*,

3&

s?o^ ^rl?o s

may

take the form of &*,

^TO* ^J3?yo

*.

^.

222.

^e&a^yc. Gf.

If the
Rules concerning the final sonne (o) are the following:
soune precedes a consonant, it may change into ^ (in the singular), into
8,

z&

or retain its
(in the plural)
or

^1^0

form,

r.

//.

t?^*

^2^, 33?$* zfo^rfo or 3^)0 ?oJti^o;

?ooir(v* or

o rfjjQ^v*, ttrif

^^a

^^J

^e^o*

or

s
or

(XlJSer^o*

or 3^0
23

180
concerning the drtrsJoSask see

$vo
may
in

often changes into

it

^tii
also

r3

become

^3 wo ^do

>>&),

e,

rfj*,

Samskrita and Tadbhava nouns (which are neuter

&

wg-,^ ><*, ssddj^dv*

is

137)

$*,

and rfy
^^o, 33?3s3o,
EQ

when the sonne

it

becomes ^f

it

vowel,

and

=^oo

e.

^,

e.

205.

ftv^)

esdJSrfo are followed

S^tfos&ste*;

Now

as

rloo

w^orsSo

3o

of

and postpositions

eso,

sroo,

and the
e* g.

o*,

(see

215,

5,

euphonic junction of letters

many Samskrita compounds,

the rules of Saihskrita

do>*, e. g.

by a vowel, their sonne becomes d^,

213-215 Kannada

In

is

3^0,

may become e^^&Sdj,

216.

when

>$o;

adverbs of time

207), the

oj

introduced.

and plural

when the ^o and

the copulative conjunctions

etc.,

g.

rtorioJo

riwo,
O

we^odio, the postpositions

o,

e.

of the third person singular meets with a

^JSrtcOjrfortosS^,

the imperative

3Jo,

and

^o

^J53J

g.

203) precede a vowel, their sonne becomes

(w^oFo+oi),

is

117)

in the singular,

rta?3J3dFr3 sa^qSro,

g.

&

in

of the accusative singular

changes into

when the sonne

s^

in the plural, e.g.

&J

becomes ^,

-i

of the pronouns yo,

da^oo

it

^.^JS^o

of the nomi-

esd ?&>, do, ssOnjjSe)^

z3^^o,

g.

when the sonne

followed by a vowel,

e.

followed by a vowel,

it

Ci

becomes

it

Kannada)

when the sonne

and feminines ending

native singular of masculines

followed by a vowel,

in

^^Oorfo;
c^uj^

sl^SocJo,
eK^

e.g.

^A^^^o;

cSJS^Orfo,

^CTd^rasSo^dorfo,

in

opwC>ock,

?3w>jc3o,

s3jd)oc3o,

g.

uses to change into dj* or

of the nominative

Kannada neuter nouns ending in es ( 109) meets with a

^, e. g. dodo 'adordo becomes

singular of
vowel,

when the sonne

220;

d).

has been

joined together according to

grammar, have been borrowed by Kannada scholars and

it
becomes necessary to point out also some of the

used in their writings,

principal

ways

of Saihskrita

no Samskrita rules

euphonic junction of letters.

sandhi
in the Sabdamanidarpana,
of

following alphabetical selection ourselves.

Because there are

etc.,

we make the

181
Junction of vowels (svarasandhi)).

1,

a.
e y
.

33&J

to

<d

w+

ts

*q

e.

o,

+ eru3= i),
aio = wo 5
-i-

<7.

e.

e.g.

e+^

= G.

in

a.

i?

g.

e. ^.

so,

e.

g.

sSoasa

so^oior

e.g

e . a.
7

+'?=*,

e.

fl.

e.

<7.
^

odP,

uirado

(7.

so,

+ w=oJ3,

G=

become

OA&

o.

= ?3D,
=
w+ a=
y + L = 5!,
O

^^^ + L^, Od^ +

y+ i^^o may

?jja

si

'ga*.=

g. ^r.
,

(The

'S)

Tf3dJ.

Sos
t=9

-f

Gnaoior

o.

**

eru-

either

t.

1,34,

and

or S.)

182
en)

+ so = &,

-e.

g.

rfodo

eoo+ero=yio, e.g. $fi

+ sOo =

sJo

adJ3, e.

**

&

~^~

Junction of consonants (vyanjanasandhi).

2,

from a* and V s

arises

g.

+ S^OJOF
=
sro
^30

e.

g.

srio^5

SoiiFs*

adots*,

mains unaltered when no special rule

is

given,
s
before a vowel becomes n

before the consonants

d,

ri,

oJo,

20,

(rf),

u,

d,

rt,

zjj,

3 becomes

e. q

as,

(3o),
n5

e. ^.
4-

art oi>,

+
= ar
art ra

ados*

w),

+ deed =
+ s3?d =
before

and

the

so

consonants

t ?3?o= ^oJ^FZS^^rf

becomes also

jrart

=
&

= nss. do
t>

after

vowels

the

and

n)

becomes

Or

(or

azso^ri

art, ra y),
'

(or

aa

*>

<a

sra^

(or
^

e,

d+

*3*
.

~5 ^

edrf

^, ^^

= es^ d^
-t

rf Jo

^Aepco

',

ri,

ad

e?d,
^J

rt.

ad

s)

^=
.

^arises from
rule

is

ss

in

a
e,)<a
and remains unaltered

when

given.

&* before a vowel becomes

e.

g.

"&&

4- wort

^c^ort,

^b5 --

no

special

183
before the consonants

&

d, d,

r(,

S becomes

d,

a,
s*,

*=

artr

do

and

consonants

the

before

becomes

rf

c.

*,

o,

before a vowel becomes

e.

^.

20,

ijJ,

before

oJj, d,

rt,

3 becomes

^ becomes

13 s

),

+ ^^ =

before the consonants

becoming

(rf

jr.

d,
rtodo

n*, c. y.

Krirfdo,

arts*

+ d^rra = art

art era d, arts*

e.g.

,
'

lo

^before

a becomes

before

& becomes

g. </.

&,

before cJand do becomes 3*,

e.

e.

g.

Krt3

+ 553d=art?3 d,do ora3* +

arts5

w becomes

before

before

tf

becomes

e.

i*,=

a**

becoming

<),

xS-J

(^

eo.

V
before
3,

s,

the
ft

consonants
rf

becomes

4-

--

before

^ becomes

before

a becomes &,

before
before
before

&3

rf

becomes

5
,

&J',

and do becomes
^

becomes

5
,

e.

e.

3*, e.
e.

g.
g.

3o*

+ t333ooioF = 3t3-) 3ooioF.

aoio = 3a o3o, 3cs +
^ = 3a
j

3c*

-(-

"

?5j

3n + t3c^= 3^?^.
5

gr.

^r.

g.

= 3$^, 3w5 + dja3, = 35^3,

3o

3a*

+ Sw=

332$

3z ,?w (i

becoming ^)

a;J

184
(preceded by ^ and
before a vowel becomes

eru)
,

e. a.

wort

2J?odort,

before the vowel

^becomes

So,

e. q.

w,,
before
a,

d,

d,

t>,

the
d,

consonants

3,

20,

^,

$,

3J,

rf,

oh,

becomes

So

e. ^r.

titf

+ dca =

do
dd,

before

the

^>

^>

^5

consonants

^ becomes

^t

&,
s,

e.

g.

j^

(or

+
(preceded
before

the

a,

d,

oJo,

d,

o,

d,

by

'a,

eru,

consonants
a,
2d

^j,

73S-3-

^o^i

L)
^,

do,

becomes o e

e . g.

TJ

+
+ rtora = d^orforcs,

(or
x

(or

185

4- y-S-

^ and $ becomes

before

+ ^dra

^rf^

3*, e. o.
*

^oi:7j f

g^des,

before

the

^>>

^ and

by

becomes

^,
ss

6
,

+ v.3 =

eJjo?^

f . o.
/

TT

W03J07J S

6ft

?io7^

?^

>

vJ3?&3

stfW

That the vowels

,

vowels, in true

does never arise of

53^0

tfoaJ3^&3 (or

= ^jdoeJ (or qJ^o

to

so,

and

are no real diphthongs,

23*

Kannada has been

preceded by

es,

nor

stated in
its t,

they are never formed by Samskrita guna

i.e.

Particulars of some letters, also in prosody,

VIII,

compound

"

^^rjo 3

ej?o^, .^,*
00

C)

rtlA^ ^,

217.

cJ,

eru)

consonants

often

+ t$oi)

t.3

(preceded

does never arise of

'a,

d?

and

>
t

nor

its

they are never formed by Samskrita vriddhi

preceded by

ro

likewise

(22);

of

of

eae and

sro,

22).

>

so,

be written

^jjsdo, =2rJ3?do3jA)do

^J3?d>?oc5o,

J^)OSoA)rfo Js3 x^^o, aoJS^oSj^rfo 3cJ353 x^rfo

PO
n
row
roy

and an e^)

5^o&c!o

23,

e. //.

23o-S-do,

^^jc^o

S3^r?o
^ 22rso,
C3

also customary to write

(see

may

fd

for

be written
^sjpf
Ci
23*,

xpsorfo,

e.

are

Kesava

under remarks);

^^jo^J^* ^po^oS^,

^pS,
^^0^2^ g^o^o
lA

as ^sjuo for

J?doQoroc5o
l^ 1

see

so

23

L>,

es,

its

to,

innate (sahaja) in Kannada or exist therein by nature (svabhava).

states that an yoto* or yoSo may optionally be written so, e.g.

may

i. e.

Kannada

21.

^>dj,

3dtfo

8
.

for

It is

??a^j

21).

218.

In

mentioned,

in

29 letters with strong aspiration or aspirates have been

212, remark 3 it has been stated that som<> Kannada

adverbs of circumstance and some imitative sounds exhibit aspirates;

J4

186
and
is

in

215,

7,

the aspirate

the instance

has been introduced, for which there

33*

sia^roi) 2odo

The grammarian Kesava

Aspirates, however, are rare in pure Kannada.

adduces the following probably for the greatest part uncommon Tadbhava
terms (regarding the form of which MSS. disagree; cf.
370) in which
aspirates are used
(o.
r.

(o.

?jo),

aj

r.

otf,qj3e>ok

cre^J, qS^,

^^), 5?!oij

(o.

r.

dp%^

370),

^Ouo3a*, ^e3cdo,
co

The true place

(212,
and

that

3,

some imitative sounds

in

^?s^ri

o3o,

rio

cpJSsJ

In

33

219.
nasal

and

?3,

it

sometimes

Tadbhava

370)

33\
Zp

^jslj

?3

dptf&?k

212,

words.

220.

vowel

In

may

39

it

SoSJtf,

r.

(o.r.

(?),

d^ (370),

or zsv
sp-s^
of

(370).

circumstance

were imitative sounds), e.g.

9), e. g.

^e3ejj&3o,

r.

(the form of a few of which is doubtful).

Such

is

the

letters cdb,

nsoSort,

3s>o3o,

in ^js^rari,
(V)

o,

53

are not

some Kannada

case in

According to Kesava

and nasal

=5^,

to

has been stated that the

nasal.

(o.

(qJrfrf),

^^o

rodo, sjooiora, ^oJjrs, djsoio;

not nasal in

dp^

some Kannada adverbs

originally

ok^SS,

is

(o.

(?), qSdtf
or

(probably

r.

^o^, ^s^, was^

si rS,

(?),

^o

sp-srf;

of aspirates is in

and remark

r.

(o.

^oio^CS, ^^^rl, $$

d^^

370),

ejte

<o

^o^rS, z^js^rf,
( ?,

aj

(370),

^?3), ^ssid, dp^ (370),

(370), dc^^^o,

(370), dJ3$

^^

risers?
d<5js^),
''
su

370), ^o^pg (o. rs.

=a2p|oaj),

(o.'r.

JSo^re,

qj^sicl

S5s^s?o5o),

(3^70), ^J3e?i, ^?S?o

r.

(o.

r.

^ri (?), ^qs^cdo (o.

530fi

d, arara,

r.

fo.
v

so

U>

^Jud),

ejS&Tfo),

dsrers
slurs'),
''
aj

(o. r.

5J^e>r

ojo

is

not

and

nasal in

wo&s/, and nasal

^> is

in

not nasal in

e5^>r^r(
CO

3d^, ^sj^, and nasal

in

has been shown how the upper nasals without a

40 how

take the form of the circlet called sonne, and in

187
they also in connection with a vowel

may

We

take that form.

give here

an ancient Kanda verse quoted by Kesava in which not the sonne, but
the vargapancama letters ( 28) themselves have been used:

^ZC,C

His further instances refer to final

may

likewise take the form of the

within compounds,

e.

sonne (see

vargapancama

S3do ^ciirt

g.

o or

8)

which

letters without

and

be written

may

=5^3

215,

TT

e
221.

There are

words that in the ancient dialect always have

several

the sonne or bindu

or are

34)

nityabindugal,

e.

g.

^ortj,

^3do^iJ,

s5Ceortj, ^J3^oz3 (IJSi^sSo.), IJS^Q^O, ^JS^o3 (^JS^^), etc. (see SabdaIn the mediaeval and
mariidarpana p. 48; Sabdanusasana p. 69).

modern

dialect this rule is not found; there

is

rather the tendency of

leaving out the sonne, especially in the modern one wherein scarcely

once the sonne

is

employed.

Other words of the ancient dialect optionally appear with the bindu

and

without

sabinduka and

are

or

it

abinduka words,

e.

g-

o),
sT.

Others of the
nityadvitvangal,

regarding the
It

s.-imasas or

e.

This

etc.

222.

same
n.

appear always with double letters or are

dialect
3) 3,'
i

rule

&*& &>, urt, ^J3r( 0,

^sira,
oO C3
A
A
oj

holds

same words as

also

good

215

has been remarked in

compounds

^5*

e.

the

other

(?,

remark

g.

and

dialects

after

/) that in
Such is also

f* may become f*.

when there is no composition

preceded by

the case in the ancient dialect

(asamasa, bhinnapada),

in

far as they occur in them.

^ftf

?SJ?)r5^^o

of words

may become

The change of the letter jj into So has been referred to in

and 184. Kesava teaches that in Kaniuula and Tadbhava words an

64

223.

3J

may

optionally be changed into

sso,

e.

g.

sJFSo"

initial

may become
24*

188
5o>

3J>

CO

this

tivft.

^)Q 3oJ0,
is

change

sd<L>ri,

sJ^?oJ aow?oO (see

and says that

370),

in a provincial or
(especially) beautiful (sundara, celvu)

native dialect (desi).

fj

But the change is bad (dushkara) and as a rule does not occur, if
is not initial and is a double letter (dvitva), e. g.
snirf do,
3%$ do,
0,
O
Oj
we have learned already from

OJ

Howbeit, as

OJ

oj

;>J

essJ

present-future participle

QtJ

184

also

becomes esao,

exceptionally

stands at the end of

the

194),

(cf.

when

it

being such

ss?^, ^r^, STOr^, ^^i

^ii ^
as that, 'Sr^So, being such as this, erur^So, being such as this intermediate one, <o?3 3o, being like what?, which forms occur as well in the
3

as in the ancient one.

(except sro^Soj
mediaeval
has changed WFSO, ^^
the
dialect
Besides,

mediaeval dialect

into

es>5$

and

'SioS

<0o3

Cp

w ith a euphonic a

anc^

and ON
and

3o

into es^o). 'SirSS

CD

co

Cp

which forms exist also in the modern one; at the same time the modern
one

has

See

also

the

mutilated

forms

Kesava says that

224.

ancient dialect become

addition of ?, he, and

es^J

6A)i3
'a^,,
<x/
co

<>Sc3
ois

^cS^,-

He

as that,

223) in the

275), and, with the

(cf-

the sign of the nominative

o,

such a man as this,

^r^o,
intermediate one, cO?lo, what kind of man?

man

o^ad

5^26, 'S^Qo, eru^ao,

o(s

^^- 5^, ^cS^,

55^, -s?^,

224.

115), S5^,o, such

man as this

such a

?rorlo,

gives the following instances in which the genitive precedes

3^

o,

*%.

etc.

*roa<L>3,o

man

koritiz\o

^jrfadd^oQrlrs
rf,^
03
^-

*-

one like a

like a thunder-bolt,

^drooaoo

Narasimha

is

one like the flaming eye of Siva.

lion,

what kind of

^o^n}^^^?^dar3^oij^grf?S^^e) 8(&#tff!f$Ji?^o
person Kama is, such a one is this man what kind of being the beloved
son of Aruna (Jatayu) is, such a one is this man
what kind of being
|

the sun

is,

such a one

The feminine
e. ff.

sJOfgCj&v*,

this

is

of e5?lo

such a

woman, which takes

The neuter is

is

man.

&3v*

woman

as

(^F^+y<ff*. she,
(is

193 under

remarks),,
agreeable to) the heart, a dear

also the form of es^

*/

e.

s3o^c3?l.

g.

suc^ a child, etc. as that.

es^cto (^?l-r^^),

With reference

terms e^, ^rf and <^Z etc.

ca'
qr
9
bo stated that the masculine forms are y?3 SjfjO fw^do
to the

in
/.

4s

e.

223

it is

55^4.

to

189

man

such a

l,

as that,

'arfsjrfj

(.orfrfo),
V
/'

^'

999

?3Fj

the genitive,

woman

e. //.

erf

dtfo,

f?

ones

neuter

the

are added to another word, this

man

such a
Jiflrfdrfo,

is

put

in

as thou, 3)33jcxforf dtfo, such a

as a mother, Stf.dGjorf do, such a thing as sugar, (or also Srf =3-3
J- (a
6
9

c/
330Bjo&c3adtfo, ?j^,6o3j^9c3j,
w"
9
9

drfj,

The

225.

for

137,

^^o,

j,

for slOjo5

as for g^rfjd there

is

likewise

J^oo* ato*, and

3^)D*, for

See the datives plural .o^ori and

^dori and

id^,

for

^drt

304.

ft;

226.

223).

letter 53o appears also as

^15^0^0

?je>>.

iu

esrf

3rfj,

this,

and

(orfsV),

If

such a man as

f'arfrio),
'

CO

what kind of man?, the feminine erf^tfo

A

the

Regarding

accusative and genitive singular

(see

the

of

lengthening

141)

letter

into

the

in

Kesava quotes the following

instances:

3 03,

see

2,

a).

and adds that such a lengthening occurs optionally within some words,
as one

may use

or wdJS^nrodo
In

227.

^f^e ^

'a&jstf or

<ofl^J3r2o or ^rlrHJS>rso
15. 17

(under

<s*)

of

r^oojorto or

and 31 the so-called 3

invention) has been introduced.

A few

?i^ or ^J^,

3^ or ss,

jjtf

or

w^, sj^

?i^w or ^is^,

or aj<y,

^ov or

sjj^,

(a

<tf

instances showing

used for Sariiskrita ^, are the following:

optionally

3w,

(Tadhhava

^^J^

grammatical

how
or

fcjtf

or ^^osj,

rfoo^^ or ^JDD^.

it

may

be

or
fci^, 3tf

^jtf or

^jw,

6/.

231,

239. 370.

also

228.

The

different in

so-called

tfjtf

or the

Kannada

form and sound from the so-called

tf

(that
=

in

fact

is

not

^ of ^ 227) has been

UU)

mentioned
words

in

in

which

15. 17
it

(under ^) and 31. KOsava adduces a few of the

has to occur,

viz.

190

Rustics

use

tf

pronouncing them
3d<s*, yds?*,

or

J3S?

or ^J5?s

ancient

(the

^^j

modern dialect
9

e3C3

or

as

33 do*,

^d<s>

or
)

e.

#.

(&dtfo),

es^d or ese^d,

rlo^O or

^JSrarlj,

rlo^rsi,

ri^ (the ancient rtCO3) or

s^o^e^ or rforaa*,
9

slides,

cOd$ often stands for <ode3.

also represented by ra,

=aJ2^rlj or

2ds?*

(oidtfo),

Kannada

^t)^

^js^di,

ancient

(the

k><i?

or

f\& or A*,
ricl,

^oe*3)

or

235.

Cf.

frequently employed for the ancient C3 in the mediseval and

is

tf

is

tf

^^e^

or ^ra^j.

(z3d^o),

sjods*, ^ds*.

^jsrs,

the

in

Kesava)

2*ds, ^jsoe^, ?odo', <sdo*,

23d<s>

d<s*,

Occasionally

(according to

erroneously

words z3do*, cod^,

e5S?,

32) in which e.g.

(see

-^e^ 9 as

sw^ f

s^$,

ss^y appears as sss

9
w^o, =5^ as ^^, ^pe

as

as

which peculiarity partly dates back about as far as 900 A. D.

As stated in the same paragraph, the letter S^ has
32, note).

3oJ3s?,

(see

has been retained in the present grammar.

ij

About the change of W into ^ see

229, and about that
For words in which <$ or &3 may occur see
232.

of

into

tf

230.

229. Letter W is changed into $ in the following words when they

are in the apabhrarhsa state or are tadbhavas i. e. words corrupted from

Samskrita

^ !&,

in
,

^sj=g, O?eJ^, ^o!3^, dOs)^,

which case their forms are

3J3e^^, ^^^and orfo.W.

See

^j)^,
f(

When

and

)d^ are

See

370.

the

itself; cf.
J)

it

asS^a,

S^rt,

rto^ri,

once appear as
^>^eJ may

370*.

co^arfo,

corrupted from Sariiskrita, their

appear as

>?%f\,

sio^iJ,

9
^JSss^/s, rf ^, rijd, d^rtd, ^i^ori,
apabhramsa state or are tadbhavas i. e. words

the words
in

and

^J^kJ^

230.

sjs?^,

O^^S,

^osl\tf,

(The change

?W,

of

is

usually converted into

&prt

rto^,

into

tf

(tert5?),

tf,

and they

^^ofv, and

takes place also in Samskrita

15.)

As there evidently are a few Tadbhavas (regarding which

seems as

the *o<?)
character.

if,

at least

in this

were considered

to

case,

see
370) among the words,
such words on account of their V* (that was taken for

have become true Kannada

words,

losing their

Tadbhava

191
In the apabhraihsa or tadbhava state the letters

231.

and the

tf tf

(Sjo<3e>o0, o. r. sjje>c3e>o)

to

3,

tf,

fed,

tf,

227) of the words

(see

and ycg^a&d

(e3)??e>uc5

become C3 according

Kesava, in which case the words appear as

and
See

The

370.

Sabdanusasana

*U

it

or zifcorta9

or

tip^

s^oO,
or

5^$

9
(

d^

?^

370),

W
370), ^^oO

370), F^JS^ or

Q/. ^JS^fej^

370).

and o^o y

or

dp^&KJJ,

&G o

w^dJSS? or wCOrfjs
or

rtJ3^

&$&&>
^^J0
O

9
,

in

or

33?

fcortoS or

^e^9

r(

v^

or

229.

Kesava saw the following words with

233.
first

^^r{ or

^j^s3

&p&33

&fSsl>o.S? or t3J3^oo.eo9 ,
Zv

or

13,

"0

or CO; they are

rtj

3JreJ=3o3J

There are twelve words regarding which it is to be remarked

is somewhat doubtful whether they ought to be written
with

232.

tf

adds

140)

370),

(see

that

sutra

its

(under

in the

works of the

great poets:
wrteo'i? (o.

r.

esrlFCO 3

A^j
9

'j^ra^-13
o. r.

*?W,
*

(o.

^oCJ,

^oCO'

3oC3j

^Jt3

^W

r.

see
(o.

o.

r.

3&3

(o.

r.

192

r.

(o.

or

318^3', ^jsrlq^, (3}8C^

c^^, ^.33, ^e^d, ^sc^, c^e^
ZJ^3 9 ^o, 2J^3 9:c?,
r.

(0.

^WJ^W

U!0 9

zo!3 9
^_o,

),

WOMO 0^0,

(o.

rs.

a^

^, fc&^oko,

2J20 9 o

(o

83

^,
9

(^ortoeo*),

sfce^w

To these are

to

be added the tadbhava words of

231, as

not repeated here, and under circumstances the words of

note

there are in the sasanas also

*&

far as

232.

(to be), ^otf, rfcs^, ricao

sJw

they are
In

32,

o f a3J3??r

(for

See also
djs?^).
234; Kesava's Dhatupatha (Sabdanianidarpana
and
330.
331);
regarding the meaning of the terms with C3 the Dictionary.
pp.
S?JS??T,

Concerning the anukarana words that have no aspirate

29. 218) at the

o or &
beginning, Kesava observes that they may appear either with
The Sabdanusasana (under sutra 140) adduces nearly the same terms
which

C3

has

be used, as the Sabdanianidarpana.

to

Besides,

it

in

adds a small

meaning is not given (the work does not give the

meaning of any term with w there) and thus the possibility of explaining them
becomes difficult, as the reading of at least a few may be doubtful, and as the
use of w in a few of them was seemingly wrong at Kesava's time, we mention

number

of others; but as their

them with
t9c

diffidence.

They are the following:

(the act of weeping?),

ero9O(?), yuc:^

= en)^?),

we

^c?c3o

(=

(the act of diving?),

(Otfdo

?),

eua^e*

(?),

act of rising?),
<oe^ (the

5n>C3^o
ae.{?),

not

>

(?),

.M^

in

1QQ
X
U *J
Mr. Rice's Index), s&wsd (=s3p^^?), uc^ (the act of living?), U33 (=u^
storio (=e3tfrt:>; the Index has
do8 (=23tf?), doo* (?),
tfcosS),
z3cs^ (?),

doow (=300^, the state of

being irritated?), ska* (=s3o<?P),

),

a rule of the ancient dialect (and to some extent of the

medieval one too, but which uses
instead of
that a final d)
It

234.

is

&

becomes

under

3*

when

e.

a),

it

3do&^o becomes

g.

S^*)

euphonically joins a following consonant (see

,.

(i

215,

7,

^e

8 58.

e.

formation

the

In

djsdorf

exists, e.g.

of

the present-future

may become

sjj^e^,

58. 183,

similar change of

into

CO^we

The middle d

and o^do may become

similar

rule

4).

^d

ifcdoo

A;

the

in
e>,

appears also as sjorao*,

into

5
,

^3) =

(dative of

Kannada words dod^,

ws. rfo^o*,

o*^may be changed

final

^JS^CJ

find also in

o^^/
235.

participle

r$Ja?cfcs3

ess;53*,

viz.

<oe;23

esCsj* (c/

in

228)

which case the

wwo^, (oi^>D*). sl)^)23

and in the mediaeval and modern dialect as
o*,

SJOOD*,

or

Words

236.

in

which

it

repha (r), are e.g. erutfoF,

^),
,

i?33)r,

^rior

^JS^jr,

was customary at Kesava's time to use a half

32 and
233), etc.;
)3or, r!dr (=rl&2|, cf.

= 3eoo),

etc.;

-S-rtor

(=*Mo),

^orlor

yrfro, ?JS)^FO, ^p^dro,

etc.;

=^oSO^),

etc.;

eruartrv*,

etc.
It will

be observed that in some words

common language

of

that time and

peculiarity we found also

see also

words

32, note;

('SI^F, etc.)

&y had

F had

in the participles

been given up in the

taken its place, which

<oci>F,

3oF, ssrfjF

239 regarding a kind of pra>a).

present no irregularities.

160,

i;

The remaining

25

194
237.

It is

before a
,,

a peculiarity of the modern dialect that

into

tf

5A)dos?o

33

In

may become 55^,

v
^do^o ^o.,
^odj^o tfotfo.
/'

t*tfo,,
oJ'

?3d^o

tftfo,,

sjodo^o

sjotfo,,

sod^o

TJ

has been stated that when

it

changes a middle

it

esd^o

e.g.

3^,
V

238.

2d^j

enitfo.,
iL/'

Sdjtfo

rtodos? r!o#,

sd^o,,

two consonants

are

produced in (about) the same place or by (about) the same organs, they
are called ekasthani in grammar. The ekasthani letters are d and C5,

d and

w and

&3,

<$

Grammars

239.

(see

of the

239).

Kannada language are

standard works, because almost every thing of

the three periods;

in verse in

it is,

based chiefly on poetical

literature

its

was composed

therefore, to be expected that they

contain some terms connected with prosody (chandas) and the

way

of

poetical composition (kavyamarga).

Such terms employed by Kesava are

sy^ (called also
and
)C&>5i> by him),
dJ33J^.
sJe^FS^^, cdo^o^,

o&e)5l> or

in Kannada is an alliteration in which the second

letter
^j
(generally a consonant with or without a vowel) of the first line of a
stanza is set in the same place in every other line.
So>.?o

sJcsaJFSl^ is an additional alliteration in which the prasa letter or

a cognate one is set also in other places in the course of a stanza.
oobo3J^

is

same stanza

the repeating or setting in opposition alliteratively in the

of

words or syllables different in meaning but similar

in

sound (paronomasia).
dJ95j^

is

metaphorical diction.

Kesava, when introducing the first three terms, does so in order to

show the proper use of the ekasthani letters d and 0, t> and ^, d and
&3
<

and

He

238) in them, presupposing that

^, d

and

but that

^)

and ^

d,

and

CO,

w and

C3 arid C3 form regular prasas, etc.

d,

states that

d and

=5^ and =5^

tf

227. 228) form a right prasa, e.g.

cannot form a right one,

e.

g.

^>,

195
as also

^)

and &j<3 cannot

do,

Further d and G3 are wrong

e.

g.

in prasa,

e.

g.

o
as also

^ and J

are wrong,

e.

g.

OJ

Regarding varnavritti Kesava says that

and by

and ec,

cS

and also by

e;

e.

and

tf

it is

properly formed by

d and

^^o^3^rtv

(This

^.

e.

(the kula),

g.

dor, ^b5rfo, w)rfoc5o, =$tfdor

half

Kanda

verse bears various shapes in the MSS.;

its

.
|

purpose, however,

appears "clearly in the present reading.)

C3,

Concerning the vamaka Kesava says that the employment of

d and

& and

wrong

in it (as

tf

in

and d and &3 as

(the kula),

letters of alliteration is

the prasa), and in order to show this brings forward only

the following anomalous instance:

~"

"herein the application of words

be read,

no meaning

is

to

236),

remarking

for ^CSSctfoo

there

is

^8o3oo
not

the

yamaka".

the prasa with &3

(cf.

if

therefore

it

is

Kesava) that a double consonant formed by

be substituted for &3

and

spoiled,

brought about;

characteristic^lakshana) of the

With regard

is

e.

to

be added (according to
of a half repha may

means

g.
*

1 Qfi
X
ty \J

and

Zr

and

6?

The Sabdanusasana remarks that also c^ and ^ may be used as

letters of alliteration in the prasa.

104 with regard to nouns, e.g. ta,

Rupaka has been mentioned in
which are of neuter gender, but receive another gender when they are

There

used metaphorically.
in the

fcsrfrf

sJFrs

(sithila),

there are the instances

Double consonants

240.

20. 38)

in

prosody are sometimes "slack"

lengthening a preceding

they have not the power of

Such double consonants appear

i.

syllable.

e&. s*

the following quotation concerning

Sabdanaanidarpana.

and concerning

1,

is

e.

in the
s
,

nominative plural and dative singular of nouns ending in

and e3, e.g

A
j^^, ^sl^^,

s?,

sjjorto^

etc.

etc.

A
s

^)rto^s?

djorio^s'*;

wdo^,

197
Exceptions are formed by words with a long initial, e. g.
d by some words with final v*, e.g. ^odov
,

though

initial

its

is

generally has a slack

long,

double consonant.
in

2,

the conjugation of verbs ending in

,
'

o;

CO

3rtoo,

'

e.

S3*,

o'

,
'

and

<*, o*,

0',

g.

/i

^5

*\

oo, dj?ktfoo;

Exceptions are formed by verbs with a long intial, e. g. wo*, (5^0*,

and by some verbs with final <^, e. g. Jd'p*, ^jativ5 in which the
,

use of slackness

is

optional.

&

words ending in o and

the first syllable of which is
short and which form the first member of a compound (sarnasa),
3,

in

e.g.

&QF^JoJ o,
'

246, a.

(7/.

4,

in

wadoOF^,

some words
y^orfoF,

belong to No.
5,

in

^Z^F,

which

rfdoFrt),

inherent

waF^o.

e.

vx>3 driF,

g.

in their dative plural

customarily indicated by doubling the

warfsr^F,

under dative).

They

(sahaja).

seems

(ssarfooFl,,

optionally in the dative plural of Samskrita and

"When, however,

viz.

is

are
to

3.)

that are masculine or feminine,

it is

it

awi^r; ^^oioi^r,
Cf.

371,

zooqiriF;

Kannada terms
^e^crijTV,

no "slackness" (sithilatva)
rt

^?cx5or^r;

is to

\^

occur,

of the dative in the ancient dialect,

<o6dr^F; ^ja^oior^r (see

119, a,

1.

Remark.

Some people have thought

that in the elaborate prose composition called

rtc^

which belongs to prosody (chandas) and frequently

allowed to treat a double letter with repha, c. </. '$, ^,,
lengthening a preceding short syllable
241.
according to Kesava.
Cf.

is
*^,

found in poetry, it is
"
as " slack
i. e. as not

but this their thought

is

quite

wrong

198
241.

writing stanzas (pada)

In

the different words unless they fall

Thus one has

it

is

bad to leave no space between

under the rules of sandhi

(213

seq.).

to write:

4.

and not 20^ ctfo^dod^Jkd etc., in this case especially also because the
"0"
obscene word ^doz^o might be thought of in four places (cf.
215, 6,
remark 3).
>-

Likewise one has to write:

and not

eoOro^^^do^o^OrO^OJo

short-vowelled syllables

<j and

A),

etc.,

as the prosodical length of the

o3o results at

once from the following

and h (see 8 20) to an observing eye. Some

3J., &
-~j
o/
wu n is unnecessary. Cf.
^
240, remark.
^v

double letters

use

<p

to write

IX,

On primitive nominal

bases,

Nominal bases (namalingas) or crude nouns in general have

been mentioned in
As slightly indicated there under No. b
68, 4.
242.

by Kesava's introducing the compounds (samasas)

etc.,

they finally include also

all

t3o30e>3jd,

3^3

r\e)ej,

the other true declinable bases, viz.

sankhye and krit, which in

fact are nothing but nominal bases or nouns in their crude state.
In
100 a number of crude nouns has been given that are identical
taddhita, samasa, sarvanama, gunavacana,

with verbal themes (nijadhatu).

bases without

Such

are, therefore,

primitive nominal

suffixes (taddhitas or taddhitapratyayas)

any
simplest bhavavacanas or verbal nouns

(cf.

and also the

243).

Another primitive nominal base, that is a mere verbal theme,

to be adduced, viz- the ancient s3pe3* which has also the forms

is

z3Je>G*,

e3J3e^,

'likeness',

'equivalence'.

forms are ^p?o*, 5^>j*, s^soj,

t^,

5^>o*,

In the mediaeval dialect

i*!*, 2o>o; in the

modern one

still

it

its

has

remained as

k^x),

'bail',

'equivalence':

Its

etc.

form was

original

ojjp^o* (aJ3^*, SoJS^J); the change of sj into s3 or to was done, because

it was originally mostly used as the second member of a compound
(see

215,

In rendering
In

for the omission of

a. &);

7,

it

into English its

the ancient dialect

which

is

t3j3e3*

see Dictionary under

meaning
4?>*

is

often

becomes

&,

its

"without

and

t> 1.

frequently preceded by

the fault of tautology''

meaning remaining the same,

'like', 'as', etc.

nearly identical in meaning, so that the forms become

eSr^sSpeTS

Kesava,

dp?*

or

viz.

(punarukti)

&

SS^^a^,

according to

'as', 'like', etc.

eSja^o*,

are used only in compounds, when they are always preceded by a

euphonic sonne.

Kesava quotes the following instances to elucidate the use of

etc.

The Sabdanusasana has the following additional instances:

Other bhfivavucanas or verbal nouns formed, without taddhita suffixes

243), by a mere change in the verbal theme are tfeJ, S3e)U,
^^>^, 23e^,

s33)kJ, etc. (of

(of -a^o, etc.; see

w^o,

101),

53-3^0, etc.;

tferio, ii^o (of

see

58),

3z&,

*to,

etc.;

see

101).

200
These may perhaps be classed
with the primitive nominal bases; but others are apparently not found
in Kannada.

(f

see

tfozi}, etc.;

101).

On secondary nominal

X,

bases,

Taddhitalingas or taddhitas have been referred to in

243.
99. 100.

68, 2;

They are secondary nominal bases or nouns, as they

102, s,/.

are formed by means of suffixes (taddhita, taddhitapratyaya) from nouns

and verbs.

When

neuters and

derived from verbs,

they express the

notion (bhava) of a verb either as to state or action,

etc.);

200
205,

etc.);
i

and

cf.

(eWo*, e3&3>o
3

i.

i,

(o&3&3^ck,
2.]

A.

The chief

1,

W,
oi,

e. g,
e.

ao^orfrfo,

(gj^zfc, etc.); 205,

316,

2,

194, remark

etc.);

(tfozfcs^do,

g.

sjjsdcjrfj,

suffixes for

242; 254, remarks

etc.);

(floSo,

298,

(erorao.);

atfosjaw

(wcjoae;,

etc.);

forming neuters are:

wco, rty, aetf, ?ray,

^B,, *ae3,

i,

198

203.204 (atfoo,

etc.);

etc.);

rfrt

(of

&eo

(of

^e 3

tf&b.,
3

wa s

the verbs

the verbs

(by altering the vowel of the theme)

see

100

[About bhavavacanas in general see

similar character.
etc.);

are bhavavacanas

when neuters and formed from nouns, they have a

or verbal nouns;

188

i. e.

abstract

cSe3,

*o*,

etc.;
3rfo

(of the

23e3

see

100).

see

100), and

verbs

**,

etc.

101).
3,

ysSo,

4,

54,

i&

rgo*,

5,
etc.).

e. ^.
e.

3&,

^.

awsSJ, ^cdd3 (of the verbs wa^, so*).

siti^,

^^4

2-04

->4

rto^,

uo^, 7^0^

?Jti^,

(of the

verbs

etc.).

^=1, e.^. wo5j^, wd^^, 3j^S^, 20^^^, ^jarfA^ (of the nouns yoi>3,
The Sabdanusasana has ?3UA^, ridj^^, ^doOTf, d^, sae^ (O f t?eJ?^, etc.),

5
^^5363'^, LeSsses'^, ^o^orraes

adduces

os3^,

^^, ^^^

20s?nje3'^

N^^, sgp?^

(O f

(of

^^5363,

In another place

etc.).

the verbs esoao,

^, ?3?S^,

addQ^

(O

etc.),

&31&3, i0^,

the verbs w^^J,

it

etc.),

f the verbs w^o, etc.).

(O

Keiava says that ^$3

has been sufi&xed

which

verb ^5*),

(of

to

^p^#

sec under ^); consequently the Sabdanusasana's

would also be wrong according

Instead of

(of

33$$

sdP^),

(of sciv*) in

verbs ending in consonants, are wrong (dosha;

to

him.

also ^T?, occurs,

-L.

e.

g. in

*J

^^^

(of

ff
,

under sutra 568)

201
0,

e.

Qft,

and 3(Jrt

This

is

37,

verbs

(of the

etc.),

Sabdanusasana, sutra 565.

in

only

Sarfo (of the verbs

erofSrio,

e.g.

SjJSfirt

233rt, SJSts-rS,

saSrt,

verb S&s*).

(of the

si?aj

7,

33Wrt,

g.

Sabdanusasana, sutra

etc.;

578).
8,

e.

eruSjj,

seems

3^03,) ( O f

<7.

ho noun

from the verbs ^o* and

that 3a\>r;3o

it

sutra might have taken notice of ^*->r,

the third person

The Sabdanusasana's

35^).

when
teaches
UD f by means of SAJ^J an j

to refer to this suffix

zotfjr,

572

^-

the insertion of

This

verbal nouns which are used lor

203. 204), to which the

sutra

and JJS^rdj are derived

suffix

ea>3j

would have been

added.
9,
rto

f?,

e.

eructotf

g.

o f the verb swcfc),

having been dropped;

10,

=$,

(of the verbs

^Jsce^,
en)

8^,

(of

c/".

tfofc*, etc.),

sJ^,

5
S&IKO = s&e)

|.

N?<D*,

^Ji^, 3od<^ (of

(O

the verbs 5ara*,

^^ s5^
5Q^r,

etc.),

(of 2A)E5, etc.), -^es^^ (of

),

e>c3',

the final

cSdorfo,

16).

The Sabdanusasana has no 308^,

3j<3, adfi).

SJ3?*

(from the verb

rfcfctf

53
g.
s|, s&e|, JjsssV, 3d<^

the verbs

(of

etc.),

e.

No.

enjc^

c3

Of

wa^, A?^ (O f
ogpra^r,

-S-eao

?3a^r

Sco^

-S-W),

^, A^>^

etc.),

w?3*, etc.),

23Q^r,

f
,

zb&3,

etc.),

aS3#, but adds

(O f

Of

aaj

(of

wv*,

etc.),

(of issw^, etc.).

Compare the termination ^

205.

of the imperative in

11,
rtov, e. </. jSaoij^v* (beating, of the verb
This suffix is given only in the Sabdanusasana.

12,
(of

f\,

5^o s ),

e.g.

ea)d>rt,

sifs^rt,

o^-irt,

^odj^rt,

i^o^rt,

Compare the termination

13,

3,

sb?l>r?,

rf^rt,

23?oort

which the Sabdanusasana adds

to

e.

ft

rfao^rt (of

s&ofc*)

(of the

verbs

wcwrt

?o3
02^, 83tf,

w93, eroesi, ^Q^ (of the verbs oa etc.), oir(

a^ ( = oes^ of ^ss->), ^^ = i-rfo^ of i^0),

g.

^jsesi),

f
O f O'J , etc.).

205.

of the imperative in

(of 3^et)^=

(of

SAJ^J, etc.),

osfcrrt (for

wrtirt,

z&, etc.),

uoJoo^

^6^ = 000),

to

which the

Sabdanusasana adds ^^, ^^, ^30^, ^oi^, rtoi^, ^JaoJ^, ssaoJj., sboJ^ (o f *, ^5^,
3
i.^ (the act of
etc.), <3A, ^es ^, ^orf^, ^0^, z3A^, JlifSo, siJOA^, ^oos^, TJjft^,
loving, of k,

^rf, e. g.

14,
(of the

which

nouns

^^

is

different from Kesava's $3).

w^rf

<o^, etc.).

the nouns ^s?o3j,

that

is

etc.),

(of

rid^^,

rfj3"#^?i

J,

e.

</.

(of

wv)

430

seq.~),

and

(a^,

^tfoi>3rf,

d^^N,

e. g.

t?3

536^33

^>do^rf

ojy^rf (of

Krs p
:

of the verb

O f the verbs

R*3

rfcs

u adtl-

wrong (" uc^);

is

however, expressly teaches how

on'c^, artc^, sSprtc^, sJoorfj^

erurto, etc.),

sJra j,

or^irf, *C^rf,

O f the tadbhavas TldS, etc.).

not suffixed to Samskrita nouns,

the Sabdanusiisaua (sutras

15,

the verb or noun

The Sabdanusasana adduces

to

4
,

etc.),

)-

96

form

202
16,

e.g.*&

3J,

2033, ^6.3 (of the

verbs

3rt,

etc.),

verbs ska,

(of the

3<?3tf

^oasJ, ajQJi,

etc.),

and the instances (except ^33 which is

used also in the Sabdamanidarpana) are mentioned only in the Sabdanusasana.
We adduce still (from the Dictionary) 2033, jjesrf ( O f 206, 2Jes3 ) in which the final
This

(of the verb 3-tf).

<o

theme has been dropped

of the verbal

333

and

e.

&,

under No.

?; see

the nouns

g. tfO,

&3?so

i^

s^so^

etc.).

^J^)

18&,
8

above),

is

dropped

dJa^r

O f the nouns
z3sJo^

),

(of

s
,

Soeaj^, se e
rt->

),

rf^ra^,

noun av*

L$, ^>4,

3rfj),

2Ji>^

^JBsJ-, j33iF (of the

(of the

zStfo

$&),

the noun

The Sabdanusasana adds

5)8-

16).

=;

that

>oeOod) (of

Could ftoaw be a

185.

Cf.

z3v*),

s3J?4 (of the

likewise there are i-0^4,

$5p^rto;

under No.

3&

tfr,

verbs

(of the

being dropped?

the suffix ^o.

e.

(S^o,

c,

19,
STJSO*),

nouns

(of the

^So^

comes from the noun

formation of ^wrto, the

Compare

rto

<3J8cS*).

(of the noun ?rdo), ^rej,

be derived from the verb

is to

the verbs ^.s^rfo,

verbs *o*,

(of the

^^)r,

^BB*, etc.),

nouns stoF, ;3F), 2-%

sj^o^r (of the verb s^JO

s5p^4

>#

the final

18, a).

3J563*), rfdsS (of the verb 3$),

verbs i,

n which

SJ, e.g. 3*3a$ (of the verb 3i), ijse^r,

18a,

(of

60 and the

(cf.

f Sdrio)
(O

suffix &>

Compare the
17,

= la<ifc),

*tfrti

(of

211,

(cf.

suffix

cj.

e.

( sjjj,

s&dso, of the verb 5^3).

?
;

^^, u^
noun 33F), ^dodo, d^oS^

SJ^OF (of the

^jjoo O f the

&

^o

verbs
( O f the

e.g. z-^,

s3o,

^^

seWg of a verb

g.

(of the

noun

y
)-

^JadiF (of the verb

etc.),

nouns ^^J,

etc.),

S3SS (of the

&

noun 233^).

Compare the use of this suffix for the numerals in 279.

The curious form fcs9oi>;3o is found e. g. in Candraprabha

pampa

11

7, after

8,

45; 11, 54.

not knowing', 'absence of knowledge'.

eesoJo, yet to know, t. e. not
would be a negative noun.

given to 553oiodo

21,
mediaeval

e.

(>,

23,

e.

rf^,

3,

<o

e.

0.

3a3rfr5,
dialect,

see under 3.

g.

B. .9.

Cf. the
is

If thus,

(see

e.

it

tit9

(of the

<o

under No.

25.

'9^,

Sabdamanidarpana pp.
of the

Cf. drfrl

verbs

and

c3es*

^ri

is

'the

it

The meaning

and

theme

is

etc.; cf. a$).

219.
sSoa

8
-

387,

Jfceddrt,

Regarding the

under 5).

verb *&), 3$3$, rfo3d?

of the verbal

meaning

possibly wrong.

^Ja0, 20^^ (of the verbs AaesP,

the final

Abhinava-

4, 2;

170. 171) and 3j, so that

g.

^^3

noun

its

would have been formed from

S)3^3, rfrwd, ao^a^od; of the verbs

and modern

dropping of the
22,

g.

(rfrSfl,

know

the Dictionary

in
I

20,

to

quite possible that

It is

utf),

dropped;

(of rfd, etc.).

as^^.

cf.

60.

Observe that

in

203

that in <od4, ^ws^, etc. tho

See

c3a3), sfcad,

233); -*<d,

^u3>? see

(or

^> wo-i, **3.

*si,

-add, *atf,

eess, etc.);
3jtf3>

"^ ecy

* 9-

4,

24,

*k>'3>,

*<3) (of the verbs >,

(of the

verbs

^4

etc.);

*,

?ra^ (of the verbs

c3-e?3>,

(?),

Observe

etc.).

theme has been dropped;

of the verbal

<o

^3), ^w3, *kw3

cf.

60.

r.

)**).

185.

A few nouns ending

25,

e.

3,

Observe that

in

either in

or

&

are given in

96.

sjod (of the verbs *e#, etc.), d

g. *d,
33, 3:a3 the final <o of the verbal theme

(?),

otfd (?

has been dropped;

cf.

60.

may be compared

'9%3> the state of being not,

26,
(of the

with wa'okdJ under No.

rfwsTi). Soo??io (of the verbs siJJ, etc.);

TJO, e.g.

noun

Observe that

3pe3).

verbal theme has been dropped;

3o (c/. d),

27,

Observe that

in

3oo,

g.

Compare the

*S;&,

tftf)

^pt?ij

23<^?iJ;

the final o of the

60.

cf.

2Jda6 (of the verbs o,

"Sl^,
si^ai, ^d3d,
the <o of the verbal theme has been dropped;

rf^, wd^

e.

verb

rfi,

ras$,

^.

the suffix

Compare
28,

P.

(of the

tf?i)

in

19.

cf.

u3).

60.

si.

53odo,

suffix

do?gdo

w?adj,

O f the

verbs

^3,

etc.).

$.

These and others are the

suffixes for forming neuter nouns

(Keiava says).

Remarks.

Kelava

a)

instances

yurio,
A

states that

some taddhitalingas end

ario,
A

a^go, ^odo,

oorto,

not adduced by him.

also in

5TO,

and gives the

Their suffixes (taddhitas) are

rioao.

nominal bases ( 242);

fvn^ may belong
be
connected
seems
to be another form of
with
AS,
perplexity; 3rio^
*rf^ may
the quality of a simpleton;
iesrt<>,
^3o may be *^ and wtij (j=?nj5), 'ear-

breakage'; ^o^j

o and ^J

is

(=^);

optionally take the form of

Their

&^

Other taddhita nouns are

6)

They

to the primitive

final

sru

may become A

The same change

nouns

ktfrto
),

/?.

in

(ktf-f.no),

in

of final
^tfrtj

Acfc,

rto&so

(5j^

(is*

is nots'

+ di)

+ *))

= ^oe3))

and &"

2o^ and ^wrfo^ (^ojjy" f d).

and doo^ (dA>3*^iJ, see 122).
or

which case they appear as &<|

sro

(^tf

into

+ rto),

<o

may

sSorto

(2Q?|),

take place also in the taddhita

^p

(33+rto),

which case they become

The chief

suffixes

for

forming masculines, feminines, (epicenes and

neuters) are
1,

S$iM

(y&J-f3ri, a player, a

man who

busies himself with, one

occupied with), e.g. i^sJ^rt, 3ai3rt,

e . g.

3,

ssar

r.

who

is

204
5050^)

4,

= WC&)y),
See

Sabdanusasana.
e.

5,
g.
WCXJ^,
occurs also as wol>3,

g. 3M3?ooDoeJ,

e,

^JStraoD.)?; in

see Dictionary.

edroosod^, and says that the suffix

WoSoo

6,

Kannada and

cow appears

Sarhskrita

as tadbbava of

tJ

7,

z3diA, rfjs^on

^oorfo-3-;

Nos.

e.

v&3,

g.

NASr, 13333^.

which drops
10,

(o. r.

e.

^ri,

s^An;

and

is

r.

used

dA^

a^

also

as

33<^A (33KOA),
s^orirf, a&>3cS, Tj^rortodo

28);

g.

masculine and neuter

suffix)

e.g.

(an epicene suffix) e.g.

The Sabdanusasana has

wsa^.

r. 2oAi^),

to suffix ^,

e.

etc.),

No. 266);

(see

used

teaching that

it is

formed of

24.

s^rf, ^J3?^rt, ?ods^rt, Aonort, sj^ss

ts^art,
2J3?oDoar>,

The Sabdanusasana has

^3^or<, s'dgo^ri
d-^rf,

r.

?rart, adoArl;

^pys^r!;

- j3?riort,

the following series:

^^r(;
3

wsArf,

(see Dictionary),

fcsjsro-s,

odA;_( a

syllable; see No.

^^Drt;

^raOri),

^Ds^,

it refers

its final

ri^rt, djaAri,

wo^

Lro3 ^do.

n.

16.

tfjavso^, ad^osoo^;

<^ o

(adhikrita).

moves, plays, performs', etc.; see

sid^S, (o. r. 30^533$), ^rasas?,

'that

^tS3<S>.

i-roS -^s^,

(c/.

'

3^'JS ?&3d,E d.

9,

controller

!>233cOjy, sp'JS^aoD.xjj, s^naroDosj

feminine suffix added to wri,

(a

only in the

In the Sabdamanidarpana p. 30 s^-e^s

nouns.

S-nsS,

^o,

kcraS
g.

'a

8,

e.

'

forms epicene nouns which occasionally are

It

Steps'!?, Ans^?.

coy,

form of ^^,

(another

Dictionary), e.g. ae^sS,

neuters,

'

has also the form of

It

is

d^tf^cfo, ri-fSKpaoi^. It
The Sabdanusasana adds W3A<D3o^,

means superintendent ',

tsc33

cooe;), e. g.

6?aJ3oDow.

^n^oSow),
for

This

oWs;, 3Jdc&>i>.

^donsoi^, Srosoi^,

t5t^93cb,

yco3;

Dictionary.

rt,

rfSTi

e3-5\rt,'

33A

rf,*

233

c:^5ri, jfjso^ori^-^ojsort, s'ooosarf,

art,
z-^Qrt,
The
3y9^,
Sabdanusasana
has
l n some
^j5C3^.
11,
'S.^, e.g.
s^fial
instances a preceding vowel is shortened, e. g. ^ooS^ (for ^syjse^).
The
?ooo-3-rt,

Sabdanusasana adduces also ^#0,9^

(for

W3S^),
12,

^^

'Sj

(for

(a

^s^), ^dgde^

(for

(for

a-^3^),

The Sabdanusasana has

e3?3S3*Als,

(for

?rdS3S^).

feminine suffix added to

W^ESA^, ^^(SAIs,
d^A^,
l

^ot)o5^

*3|rt,

etc.),

SJo^SJAS. ^><o AS

e.

^.

?55)
'

AS,

also

Als,

Occasionally

is

suffixed to simple

or to tadbhavas,

e.

Kannada nouns,

g. a>^7J30lt

c.

g.

205
or to secondary forms of tadbhavas, e.g.

O.a,

Sarhskrita nouns,

13

'&>,

e.

^t>

(a

a,

13k
and No.

e.

^<&>S,

g.

3ft3

#.

c&jy,

rf,5S*,

aa^d*.

^tfoDjy

(?>,

negative form

sdosow,

^o 5 ),

of

^So^S, tfoao^A,
nasw,
Z03ru.

e.g.

32^0.

or also to

eoooo

(Cf.

209, note

cy.

J,

14.

14,
neuters),
15,

form of *$&, used

(a negative

'3,

9^

g. a/IOC,

e.

e.

ero^,

wraji^,

for

masculines,

and

feminines

^jaOO, 33^6, tftfnC.

<D,

^sdo^,

tfifoar,

The

are:^, ^arfj^, ^re^tf.

^SJoiSr,

Sabdanusasana has also

16,

e.g.

eA)r<,

The Sabdanusasana has

Cf. No.

This

sa^ort

odotfort,

*w,r<,

8.

(a feminine

Ajh

17,

also

suffix),

e.g. sa<fcA (33MJA),

only in the Sabdanusasana. Cf. No. 8.

verb eross*, a masculine, feminine and

is

enjr3 (of

18,

The Sabdanusasana adds

orf.

neuter

55dt>jrf,

suffix),

g.

idwirf,

wudjrf,

eorao rf.

<&

= en>cyrt),
(

n)S?rf

19,

The Sabdanusasana has

deirf, dora^rt.

e . g.

also

u
20,
after 6

may

which

?A)^,,

215,

is

and by adding the

s, 6),

suffixes eo,

be used to form masculines, ferninines and

Kesava's instances are

eroto'rt

22,

oi (a

(=

<or,

215,
:

(o. r.

25,

2srid.Qi33Jj,

Its

5, 4.
i

24,

e.
,

g.

(W^rfo,

wd^o, ed)>
185.

neuters (see

186).

273.

See

A^?rt in Dictionary?),
74),

c/.

^JJ,

e.

g.

i?33,

e. g.

^3,

&acJ, 333^,

ui, z3, &fi, sioo,

e.

23?3oJ53is,

jSu^jaclaJo

S33e?.ed5oj),

feminine

&&&,

wtf*).

5)S5,
,

is

A^rt.

z-ras',

-S-do^,

^J3s?r

a,

^oiJrl,

sasana makes

it

following words:

e.

( 8e e

^rt^?^3C3

g. tfo^Urt,

rto&Sri

g.

?),
r

under 9
srac^rao, Urtvses,

'siiSSiO, ^oioo_53e3, rtKSsjes, rfrt^ss,

ktf^a^a,

e.

(Mdb.

(^o^

The Sabdanusasana has ^0^

</.

The

dootl, wrt.

*-d3.

(o. r.

ri^jo, ^oasses, Sojfaj wes, dJ3?7j?3e3.

26

*, enjrfj,

remark

ZwdoJo (a noun of the masculine gender preceded by the genitive),

23,

7?js^o3jadojj,

See

en)ri; cf.

feminine suffix

Sabdanusasana adds

180,

(see

the masculine gender, viz.

all of

?3N,3oo^o, Tiiradjo^o, Lcio^o, J&5doos^o.

21,

wv

of

the present participle

tfaSrfoMrt,

(according

to

#ol>o63rt, nwSrto&Srt,

(y. No.
jattforUrt,

the sandhi

cs

The Sabdanusasana has

Nrtsia^r*).

'-9.

dod^Wrt.

rule

in

The Sabdanu-

215,

7,

a) in the

206
26 i,
See No.

&J&.
^JS?

27,
3\>v*

used with the application of the saudhi rule in

It is

215,

= ^J395

to

28,

<?.

ri,

under No.

#.

e.

etc.),

probably of

c&3to, yco^s?, SJaoo^ (see $ 58), sa

also

-o^rt,

#.

suffix

t?oJj

l^oSrJs?,

s^rf,

rfdArt.

tfQrf,

w.e3.>rt,

The Sabdanusasana adduces

8.

and neuter

a masculine, feminine

rtj$,

seize,

The Sabdanusasana has

dra^rt,

tfjs^rf,

= ^3i

When

nsea

wwTooonDea,
(for

is

preceded by

the

AJ

ns of n33, so that they

^o^Jj drop the

rio^

= ^J*,

(a

feminine

e.

g. wfcJoitiS, 2ro^ortJ?

e.

suffix),

also ^acrfM *,

Jd3, ^es^,

y.

);

w^^aaF,

r^ra^, ?Jd^,

3
(of ^e3 nce3, etc.,

e.

g.

-e.

g.

&otf

(a, =S,
dl3rt,

Sabdanusasana.

e.

e.

wy5;a,

rfart,

e.

g.

35,

5Jrf,

e.

^.

36,

sjjd

rtC3aMrt,

rtd3&3ri

s'oo^rfan,

fcrid^

e.g.

rtds^rt,

(Regarding

34,

r.

215,

^o^ortj*),

sJrso

a,

^pud (with the

etc.,

7,

sjreorbs,

elision

wy^^r,

with the elision

J323onD^r, zjs?rn>3F,

with the elision of final

).

3$S, ^poO, with the dropping of

g.

^.

^os^es.

(see under No. 29);

''

Of

(of 55drfd^, etc., with the elision of final

^d

See

^O^TO^F, zsDuns^F,

t-es'ns^F,

fiu^t*J^
23^^>r

'~d

rra<a53^F, rfrtss^r, rfoQ^sSr,

33,

be dropped,

become ^do^a,

of finals); s3ra^, ^cSS, 333sr^, ^&3.g; Sr^io^i, ?rOdo,33

32,

may

a),

7,

w,

put after the

is

with the application of the sandhi rule in

The Sabdanusasana has

oorforto*. ?J30or!o?.

of final

215,

^o^onsa).

preceded by a euphonic sonne),

31,

a euphonic sonne

sru,

ajsdoortses, sss^onses, or

lodjcnses,

^^and
30,

See

?o&3rt.

also

with the application of the sandhi rule in

e.g. ^aSnaea, rtsinae, zjtfnas, 3of3na, dra^nsa.
rTe>&3

29,

njes

a.

7,

8.

(o.

it

srtrttri.

i).

This suffix

is

only

in

the

rtd

says

^w dSri.

r.

final

The Sabdanusasana has

aoj^rf.),

A03^, aojs^d^

r.

215, 6^i.
37,

d^,

e.

38,

3*3

(= a* ),

0.
1

tf

^r.

ec^dtf.,

These and others are the

wdJd^,

<

etc.

suffixes for forming

masculine, feminine (and

neuter) nouns (Kosava says).

The taddhita nouns mentioned under

in the three dialects.

letters

A and B are more

or less used

207
Remark.

115

(cf.
According to
249) masculine nominal bases are frequently
formed by the addition of the suffixes J, he, and o, the grammatical sign of the
nominative, to the genitive. Kosava adduces the following additional instances:

usudo (uyd-f
udrireo,

man

+o), a

of the right, Sotfreo (So^rao-W + o), a

srfriJdreo, docrtrao, ^tfrtreo,

w + o, see
139), ^okreo,
o + o), fc^reo, ss^reo, ^reo.

man

of the south,

rfdosreo, z-tfrireo, sgpwrtra

<ooi>reo, tfcSofcreo (see $ 139),

SoV&v6 (io&n+ssv6 ), a woman

3 (33^)
of the south, zodrtrav", Nriodrev*, 3rCoi)rev.
J n the modern dialect
3tfo
ioSrred
and
are added to the genitive, e. g.
(Soarrsask), a man of the south,
^c3oi>3, ktfnrfS, aoj^cte, a^otoi; s'zlojjdtfo, a woman of the side, etc.
The feminine forms

when in the ancient dialect ci and o are

)0, vJ2. w ^,^o, a man of that place, ^^c,
eruC, and
eweD^do, a man of this intermediate place, ^^,^. a man of

strange form, however, appears,

suffixed to

in the ancient dialect are

man

%, -gC,

of this place,

what place,

<?.

A d and

g.

o are found in the attributive nouns ^*,do,

stoo^do,

Cdc

How

is

the do

in

^^,do,

etc.

modern form w^oJoSrfo, a man

that place,

ois*,

273. 274. 276).

to be explained? Let us take the corresponding
It is composed of
of that place, as our guide.
(

a euphonic letter to connect the

of the genitive with the

109 under genitive; 130; 141, remark under dative),

(
the genitive,
3, he, and ?k, the grammatical sign of the
j g a substitute
for the
It is evident that the o* in ^eS^

crude base of the noun

w, the termination of

nominative

114).

yeoi>3NJ, which connects the & of the genitive with 53^,, so that
he, and o. the grammatical sign of the
^>,ak) is obtained, to which
are
suffixed.
under
276.)
nominative,
(See
fc^do in
6
euphonic vb

esOd

in

(for

The feminine forms

of *2,d, etc. are

XL
244.
102.
for a

8,

Compound
d; 215, 7, a

meaning

dv*,

On compound

S|0d9 s

dv*

^0 dv5

seq.

"When

bases,
cj

(IS,

s;

(two or more) nominal bases (etc.) seek

augments and terminations)

as a calf does for the close union of its mother, a

says.

en>C

bases (samfisuliugas) have been mentioned in

(directly, without intermediate

In

compound

is

produced'',

such a case intervening augments (Agamas) and tcnni-

208
nations

^,0 Jo^sj^o
introduced, e. g.

tfi^Arfj^
248,

3o0 &

246,

i),

Compounds

215,

(cf.

6),

^dck

|j3"3oJj

g.

Jjazloij

7,

tfJSSSosJ^

&),

OS

cSo

^os^a

^oos;* 'adoroi:4

are used more or

247,

248,

to be

rules about euphonic

t?tfr\s

11).

^J33oo.

sSjsd^' SosSjar

2).

is

to be consulted.

in

(sandhi)

215,

7,

are

seq.

remembered.
First there are six

245.

Samskrita, viz. 3^>

spud.

junction

are

(adesas)

^^j

is),

i),

tbe three dialects; about the

in

less

247,

extent of their use in each dialect the Dictionary

The

278,

and also substitutes

a becomes sSo^a
9

e.

(i.

33, IJS^^^,, ^sloio

O
TJ

3J33C3

sjj)^oeje;2do,

w^3oo

e.

elided,

&GS 3 si535g),

becomes

c5-j*

are

(vibhaktis)

compounds

tfSjorqraCcdo, arto, W2oj>^oo,

^~^
<3

dossi,

About three other Kannada compounds

The

246.

Kannada compound

first

Kannada

in

is

which are

3
j

also

in

and yslo5J3

o3

253.

see

33j do^.

It

called

is

so,

because the leading instance of this class in Samskrita is tatpurusha,

'the servant of him', indicating that the last word 'purusha' governs
the preceding one 'tat', requiring in this case (and in Kannada, it may

be

said, generally) the genitive.

Instances in which the

a)

253,

Cf.
first

member

2.

of the

compound

is

unaltered,

iJS&^slras^, a mango of a river (i.e. a mango grown near a river),

a word of inferiority, sjjs^odo, a tree of the mango,

are:

e5??orlira.

"

O.^,

..

M*

tJ

o)

^,

eo

nl

O.

In such

e.g.

compounds a double letter

^h FSoJj
r\

may appear

^DTT^F^.
**

See

compound such a doubling happens,

e.g.

ewas3?r),
^e^F^j),
IT
j

(for

after a repha
(F),

^?s^F^?S,
j

371,4.

Also where there

dative).

See

371,

4.

is

no

209
Instances in which the

6)

letter

geneous

homogeneous

without elision comes

homo-

loses its last syllable, or a

with

together

(uditakshara)

letter

member

first

elision

arc

in,

is

or

introduced,

fco^j^fi

= 2otfrb
(

or

or
or

wddorS (=yrf^oor ssdAo^

Or 3o3to <0^0S
CTSortaa
),

or rfjeO^
53333*),
or

3j

tfrl

=
(

or

(i.e

C3e>r3^
(

= t?4

or

=^^rto or

or ^^rtre

tiU+O-^JBoiJA,

w^orto^

-^^o;

),

(i.e
(i.e.
^

otf

Or

wortvistfrti

a&^jSrfjoi

i;3o^o*

);

orrsS

(i.e

tj5\

which finally is=

1*

or
(see

Observe that there

a vowel, e.g.

no sandhi when 1*$ and ^jG5 are followed by

esU.o, ^{8&3

5^; see

215,

6, z.

The second compound is tfo3JFq3o>da>. Kesava says that

members of a) tatpurusha are in the same relationship

247.

"when

is

234).

the (two

That is to say, in a karmadharaya

(ekasraya), it is a karmadharaya ".
the component words stand in the same case (as two nouns in apposition),

word being but the predicate of the second one or expressing a

Kesava elucidates this by saying that
peculiar quality of it.
means
253, 2.
=5^, an eye that is like a flower. Cf.
the first

y^d^si

a)

Instances in which the

rra^o, a burning-wild (a wild

first

word remains unaltered, are:

sJ

where corpses are burnt), ^orkdC^ boilingan opening-eye (an eye that is
4

rice (rice that has been

boiled), ^j^jrl?^,

opened),

oJ

6)

Instances in which a euphonic sonne

is

are:

inserted after the first word,

,

vu^oF,
C3

27

CJ

210
N
".0

..
a

6J

(^+^ra+o

).
/'

a&3

odijs3JS,e*3o
-B

Of.

tO

(o/.251)

(here:

tftf.ortrid,

under

23tfj,rfj.&

sj^rioft

No.

d,

23.

In them

273. 277) are used.

(cf.

&tio, e g.

tO

sj^ortoij 5

Or

s5c^de3

$3

or

<o% retains

2,

s5^ or

w^siiaka*
& to

put before that sonne, are: k

en) is

becomes

3je3rto

1,

Instances in which substitutes

d)

eSeJo^ja.&S

^j

'

Instances in which an

c)

^&f)ooti5JNo,

Je>etfo,

tO

,'

hill-like load), c3^j,rfe3, 3c>e3j;jO N &3

do

33s>5305&

Jja^JSSXef,
U

^3

form or becomes

its

e.

266),

(c/.

g. ^s^^acxJjro or
"

o or
^3cS OJJO 5 or

OJOD e

^^3ro ^3^_

3,

^oao^ becomes

4,

Us&S becomes
1

jambolana tree

is

ZJ^^^O; e>d^J

gf.

appears as ^3^,

no sandhi; see

sto:i>

dtfsSe';

215,

3d, e . g. esdcSees^, a kingly

b about 53d30(3)

as

Eugenia

^prf^j as $3?o? <o^do as ^*,

sJcs,

e.

g.

sypeJ,

an d i^are followed by a vowel, there

sico

(if ^prf,

6, z);

2J^^o appears as 2^,

6,

or

s&a, e.

20^, e.

sSjsrto, sicartc^do, ^p^sdia,

246 under

(c/ .

$J<u d)

5,

<ou^)dj^o

oo^d^o, oO^^^o or <oo^^^o,

as

23fe|^o

s5^

No.

(c/.

21),

cd^^o as dUj,

e.

^.

doo?

e.

g.

dy.d.;
uWdjail,
eSU^TJrt,
eJ
&3
&J
V
appears as ^9

^^j

7,

^^n<*
rf,c^o

a^'eJ

W.Ae*

Jtfctooo,
(c/.

No.

11)

8,

z3^^o appears as

*.

<;.

23raJ3f3,

iort^^, 'go^do

e.

ej^oQ,
< *

',

umrtov 6
e

3$&

>&*,
e3fSjs

es

(regarding

before consonants

si?*,
?
,

5jg s

ff

&*,

it

oo

^sJ3 do 6
&

s
,

(^v

take dvirbhava,

i.

e.

^?;o as

ira,

^ora

R,'

rforado,
ta

^do

$v 5

as

&Ao*, 23^^, zS^oJoo*,

siko*, e . ^. SjDDcS,

&&,

23),

rfora

e.

8,

g.

uo*,

double their

final

is to

it

Nos.

(cf.

z3tfo

also as

see No.

a$

",

'g^oo^,
w

of ^S^o, see No.

may appear

'

tj

10. 11)

as wa*, ^jsD ^j as

'

^s,

as

^csjoso5
.

No.

( C/.

'

sS^rdo, sS^jar^o, z3^ortv

^?6j^o

11,

W9 ^o

^s?6

&0do, before vowels, appears as

10,

and 53^

^<?^ as

before consonants, appears as *>&,

Ij9d3,

g. Sj^Jsrd,

3j?dQ,

e.
etc.),
/'

9,

ff

a3tf

10.

n),

0;

sjdds, rf^JSfl^o*,
be remarked that

^oz^do,

s3s?

s!oo s

s
,

(see Nos. 7.8.9)

before a vowel,

c.

g.

V
12,
final &>*

^Qrf->,

before vowels, appears as

being doubled, e.^.

^^. ^oi)o,

ff
,

S><Sdo

tffa^^,

as

S^,

rf^s^ as

^^^^ ^^

tf&J*,

the

211
s* and a*os
151, 6, 2; No.
e9do, before vowels, appears as
(cf.
s
3
the final
being doubled, e. g. -3-^Q, ^tf, -^riv*, a^Q, tfo^v*, a'o^io;

13,

14,

2oojrloi35

dd3, ^z^^,

15,

^orts8

^o

tfo,

( c/.

^rfj^i as

ftdo,

251),

^o^^, ^rf?o^,
&

T?o?tod,

??ortoe,

as

$;do appears also as S^i

appear as So,

z3^f3

^crt9,

rfPo*.

^J, ^Qdj

before consonants, appears as

Brfido,

14),

e.

g.

<r.

y.

^dj,8.,
tJ eu

3^0*;

^fS

appears also as

17,

^c3,

18,

tftf

before vowels, appears as ^?*i (^trf), e.g. ^??j

5
23d j3
also as *?i), ^^, e. ^. $ibrtt$r\&, -J^orto

19

s>t3

16,

aSo, e. ^.

tO

lo

appear

<3,

cS,

before vowels, appears also as

20,

^^^

21,

2361^0

22,

^Jsoa^o

23

239*,

(see

No.

6)

appears as

3e

The

248.

*j?to

appears also as

(see

third

e.

compound

(3Jtsf),e..
v
tor

..

tfew, e. ^.

e. ^r.

23ew^poiw,

may be

No. H)

to

followed by a euphonic sonne,

appears also as

&J&,

^J

is

followed by a euphonic

QcO rtj,

e.

i.

an example after which

en>o, e. g.

(worth) two cows, this word

whole class of compounds

Kesava says that "when (the last word of) a tatpurusha is
is called.
The
s.-u'ikhyfipurvaka, i. e. preceded by a numeral, it becomes a dvigu".
numeral is the predicate of the noun which follows. Also ^w^j and

being in Saiiiskrita

3j^>^)

are reckoned

among

the numerals

278,

90;

(cf.

forms are often employed

Substitutive

this

in

dvigus,

4).

especially

in

the

ancient dialect:
as
2*3^ often appears

1,
,

2,

a-o*,

e.g.

2-rforQ (for

2-^

2-&r, 2-^jF^, and as io* before vowels,

278, 1 and Dictionary under 2-^* 1.

Sec
<odcoo

5
often appears as -ida
,

or as ^o*

a-^d

2oi!JSFde^,

(c/.

215,

7,

under

rfoQ),

.oti^do,

before vowels,

e.

Bjdwsew, or as 'lO

g.

^doiw^, ^dfi^.

a; 234),

c.

(for
e.

g.

c. ^r.

See ^ 278,

and Dictionary

^.
Sojsoo often
appears us 30J?,

e.

</.

87

91X 9
l

or sometimes as

^^

e.

Soo&^cf,

sSW^Sj.,

after -which the consonants

rfoo^^Q,
fa
is

;3oo2f 6,
la

e.

doubled,

g.

Dictionary under 3oo, and

and Dictionary under

5

See

era

is

it

^J

3-io^o,

doubled,

gets an

e.

are doubled,
doodra^Bi,

e.

g.

sojzSja^&Jo,

See

coioto^S.

or

between which

ofc*

278,

33 w^ often appears as sao*.

4,

6
,

and

278.

in

300^^

cf.

when

3AX>So tQ*,

dwoJ^a,

sfcocQ^o*,

and

*3*

or before vowels,

siootspo*
la

$6

^jo^coe^,

sooa^u*,

sjjorjo^,

sometimes before Xs which then becomes

n6

*,

^.

33%^,

See

33<^8, crae^do

278,

2.

yoba&do,

wofc^ often appears as ^0*5*, e .^. eoi^Q, yoJorsorto,

under woft* 5.
278, 1 and

Dictionary

we,) often

6,

See

278,

appears as &),
and Dictionary under

e.

g.

&>

3.

r
acw often appears as
e.
7,
^.
<^C3*
1
See
4.
278, and Dictionary under
,

8,

<ors^

often appears as

and Dictionary under

<03J S

2-^^i appears

9,

before

rfjaeaJ

and

<0ra

^ra,^, <ora^^do, cO^^.

g.

See

278,

2.

as

^dJ*

before si^,

?ra^^ (sacQ-xi, sa^d), vj^.

v/0.

^S^oJ^esj,

and as ^J^ois5

i^^^,

See

Zorf^oijsArfo.

278,

and Dictionary under &;&*.

sd^ appears as irfcOJ^ before ?33Ai, v^. rfcOooepaftdo, as si^ (^3^> ao^^
and <oci^o, viz. rf-S^^, ^fS^d^o, as srfa (aoQ) before siwseji and
before

10,
aoc3^)

^^

J330J,
viz.
tJ

and as ^3c^
^a^Jsesj, 5J933WA,
TT

yJ2. sdOrfoi)^, 3ia?52e30, 5ja(3?63J, 5iQ^fso

11,

^esj and

12,

^eJsS

?33^d

.
(

See

before wcxJw,
(ada^)
*
O

278,

appear also as stee

wesi, aaj,

i.

and

51

(rfJ8F)

?J3A

toepsrado, ?raadJFS, saAdrdoJoo, ?33AdJ3?r^o, TJaftSro'.

249.
to

and

srfwsS

appear also as

The fourth compound

some subject or

is

^ and

eoSoJoDi&>. It

bahuvrihi, 'possessing
this class of

is

See

TT>>, ^dot^sh,

i.

g,

a predicate referring

much

rice'

is,

102,

8,

The word

d).

in Sariiskrita, the instance

compounds has been named.

and ^.
53
(S5o)

Bahuvrihi compounds terminate in

Instances are:

278,

other, or serves to qualify or define another word,

sometimes being so to say an adjective (see

which

e.

sjw,

(55^0) C)^o^rfo<,

(^rf'ff )

SsJowrfoS,

(ssrfo)

s^^s^a, s5o?lr$,
"

(c/.

243, B,

s),

after

213
w^^oioo,
O

$:2o3r$oi>o,

Jirionratfo,

rfjeSj&zk&o
,

243,

(c/.

a>rto)

In mutually fighting with

formed
suffix

(rt^), srcraO

swords,

""

fo

are

The

fifth

compound

flJ

g.

e.

final

is

one taking the

g.

aoe)f5s)ao)r
dsy-jCSsQ),
'

SU

e.

adds

a kind of bahuvrihi

suffix a,

. r.
(0.
v

<

("0.

SJ

T.

The Sabdanusasana has

250.

g^
etc.

fists,

and the preceding one taking the

,
'

243, B, w),

e/.

(sSps*,

which the same word occurs twice, the

in

eftO

(^reoi:*),

which the Sabdanusasana

to

.#, a),

Feminines with

sras^rto.

>)

esWrtd, ^rozjsa, zow&oft,

ofljaetf), tftfA

B, remark),

243,

115;

(e/.

sSe^&

esrt^oddo,
O

is

unites two or

It

c$<$

more words

oJ O(i3

unconipounded, would be in the same case and connected by

'and' the last word frequently taking the
en:o
(?AJ5)
terminations of the plural, e.g. ygASrtv*, ^O^odriortvS 3?3 3e>o3o <*,
which,

if

the conjunction

,rao*.

but being also in the singular, e.g.

See

When
syllable^
6y.

3s3o.
e.

g.

354,

II,

and ^rfare joined, the

^^rfo^ &e>g> ^^do^

137, a, genitive plural;

The

251.

sixth

^>s3d>

si>rfft3ao,

do,

4.

304,

compound

is

first

Ol^J3>S,

3rfj.

may drop

^dv^SjJ, 2Je;o,

last

its

^dOgSJo^

o)D.

a. b.

Samskrita

In

es53nOSJ5>a3Q>53.

this

is formed by joining an indeclinable particle

with another
word, the resulting compound, in which the indeclinable particle forms

compound

In Kannada the first is

again indeclinable.
a substituted form of a noun, which form by itself is indeclinable; but the
compound is declinable, and may be said to be identical in quality with

always the

first

tutpurusha

element,

(cf.

is

Kesava's &33j^s3oo N
7T

etc. in

I**

The substituted form

of

&?& &

of =^^rio

^W

of
4
,

53

is

^oorfj,rto*,

^?o,

of sfcsrto
of g)^o z3o
o^f^,

e.g. yorioi:*, ^orrao*, sj^oflatt*",

dooo^S3or(j,

so,

246).

of sSj^rlo

(c/.

oork
247,

^o^orraa*, ^ooo^aSi*
^ioodjs^h,

^jorraa*

(o.

r.

rf,

dooo,
is.

is),

214
,

OJ

"O"

6y. also the substitute 3^^ or gSrfo of sSesrto in

compounds that occur

After the six

252.

Saihskrita, have been treated

remains

it

of,

Kannada

the rules which exist in

in
to

247, d,

i.

Kannada as well as in
draw attention towards

as to choosing words for them which

are congruous.

The general

1,

Kannada words, as

rule

will

Kannada words may form compounds with

240-251.

that

is

appear from

Another general rule is that Samasamskrita words ( 70) are not to be

compounded with Kannada words (see the few exceptions under No. n. a). It
2,

is

therefore

wrong

say s^^ooo, dJoajsssd, and to use such compounds as

to

in the following part of a verse:

appear

(Regarding odtfoskslrado see under No.

^dro.
In such cases there occurs

what

is

called

7.)

an arisamasa or viruddhasamasa,

compound (cf. No. 11).

The
mentioned
in
71 may be compounded with Tatsama,
Tatsamas
3,
3
Samasamskrita, Tadbhava (No. 4), and Kannada words, e.g. wo^o ao^s^o,
i. e.

unsuitable, incongruous

d-raao^o, ztarrao^o, 3, ^300*0;

wortresjejcrfjo, esoriraaaa,

eori?e;3L

il assort

Si

D3ojjrlj3c6.,

eo

ncsri,
a

rirart^ro,
CA

rscssjc^o^,

ricsrtorao,

o o:
An

tf

eJ

(US SQdo

rts?rra^o,

'

.,

&i

2^02220^0,

^Jjaejyo,

ri

Wtf OO.

dradroo

.,

cssdd^o,
eJ
'

e^

333oJo^ $J.o;'

2JS rt.aoreo,'

a^

eJ

6J

23dJ3rfd?J3
cidOO),
T
" 2JW?) 53630:

(or 3j20rs;o),

^UrWO,

iJS?^

SJO,

(or

^D

rto;

Two Tadbhavas

4,

^tfrf^rt,
,

jo

3=^r\J3{S;
60

'

<odrra^o,

'

.,

ao^o^JS?^.,
^
w

rfre

370) may be compounded,

wsraadrao, awrta

g^^jdo, ^^driddri, ^d?33^,

d?r3-3r ^fej
^J2&J3.do,
w
*
*'
td

rf?oAdo, 063. 23?oo,

e.

fti

215
,

o^,

The

5,

Tadbhava,

The

6,

-eJ

word may be
eru^ddcsio,

first

word may be

ydriortocso,

7,

b)

Samasamskrita

^dreziad, ^J3?oojdo,

<a

70) and the second

one

CD?i?J3d,

Tadbhava and the second one a Samasamskrita,

.os^xido,
TT

g^rasiuo,
C^
?,

rfortdcsatfo, ToeSsado, ?jjij

do^ddo, ao^csdo, dotfuado,

-i-

first

y.

risk drtdtfo, rtddrfo,'

d&.reo, riuwsrreo.
Tausirfreo,
*
lO
b)

e.

>rf4do,

e. g.

03oi>rtJ8?y,

d^d&Jjrt,
?j?3

stecadio, zrarSoiiOTdo, ura 3)do, ura rfdo,

Samasamskrita term

of

combined with a Tadbhava term,

rraddsio,

d^rtorao,

sa^o, ^ds'drao, ridroQ,

which

?i3c3?^3,

Tadbhava exists should not be

g. the poet Hariraja's 3d3(C3 SJarf^ra^d^

adrfo^o^Jado (under No. 2)
4&3^rttfo should be 3d;3?C3* djarf^^g drf ^^^rt's'o.
e.

ouglit to be odsiorto^do.

Remark by the author of the present grammar: It seems that Kesava

means a generally known and as such used Tadbhava, not one which is less
known and seldom used, as 533ojj for he himself (under No. 5) uses ssarfdx^, cad
?

533?oo,

and

53ad?oo3re3

a Tadbbava of
It

8,
e. a.

353^).

allowed to compound a Tadbhava and a Kannada (deslya) term,

is

tsdn*. 3d3j{3,
It is

9,

sjcj;3a$?jo.

10,

11,

No.

2)

term to a Tatsama compound

TjUtfrfc^redo5
^y.o^rfycso,
iprfJa^dosjrSjj,
M
10
&
to

Of old a number of incongruous compounds

in use and may still be used, viz.

were

a)

yc^Krfo

eight compounds of

(see

(arisamasas,

see

under

Kannada and Samasamskrita words:

oeya^Q), s^c^a^o, ^dodsiro

(o. r.

titles

g.

5
dwo, doort^^es

b)

=1

e.

allowed to add a Kannada

It is

e. a.
3),
/ '
a

s&^rftfo.
?o^^c3, Aortd?eS.,
^Adjstfs.o.
"t CO
SO
K,
W

allowed to add a Kannada term to a Tadbhava compound,

5
^js^&rire v saraa^srtdtfrto.

s!<9Sod tfdaorfo*,
o

No.

instead of soaakd^, 35aoi)oa?jo, and sjsojjrios'd (ssaoii being

(o. r.

^^J^sJo

and

(birudu) or a string of titles (birudavali),

compounds may

etc.

In such

titles

bo used at pleasure (^o^d^).

e. a.

or string

of titles incongruous

216
In the compounds under

an

initial

As stated

253.
viz.

numbers

consonant of a compound

10 and 11 a change of

3. 4. 5. 6. 8. 9.

member may

occur according to

215,

a. b.

7,

245, there are three other samasas in Kannada,

in

rtsktfris&sriorts*,

^oSrarisisssSortv*,

and

They

D^SSeirislrarictte.

are found more or less in the three dialects.

The kriyasamasa

1,

compound's

or

verbal

member a noun

first

is

compound

formed "when as the

that has a certain relation to the verb

344) and a verb are placed together (sannida),

(karaka,

so as to give a distinct

In forming

such

i. e.

compounded,

meaning (arthavyakti).

verbal

compounds

sonne must be

added

to

Samskrita nouns ending in ss, whereas concerning such Kannada (or

tadbhava) nouns this is optional; Kannada and Samskrita nouns ending
in ero optionally insert a sonne; in some cases the final syllable of the
first

member

consonants, w, or

(i. e.

215,

7,

a. b.

Kannada (or tadbhava) noun (ending either in ^,

has the meaning of the accusative, are e.g. zotfde^o

Instances wherein the

a)
s,

See the sandhi rules in

is elided.

zotfoko

skes^Sio
^

Jjs^o),

enj)

^s?rli3fSK3

(z.

({. e.
V

SrtOF<Sdo

(i.

e.

?>?tio

^<$oi>o

saso^fido,
^odrfo sjaoioov
/'

e . ies'oiio

i^o),

10

riJ3^oortofe3.rfo
So

SodrfQcfo,

^o3^

ejrrado,
oj

sJ3cj3?o, sroo.o

Ado or ^do^JS^Ado,

(i.

gj

oja wonsdo or

jstso,

or

^jsr^o), ie^cS^o

sksdo),

o a. e
co

or

e.

woJ e#rfo&3.d

3oe3 oi>o s^Sro),"

/
"QT

sjdoftffi&Jo
eo

or

or
or sra^jrtj^.do, ^a^oortra o or ^s^ortra o, Adoo
H
A
til

rtsdo or ftdortQdo,

r
3ii)!jAfl^o or 0cfo4P8^o, o^ooi^jst^o O e>?forU>?|o, ^rf:ort^o
or ^d^rtra^o; liOQ?^io (&0do ^jjo) is an instance in which the initial of the verb is
a vowel (in which case the accusative is generally used; see
346).

however, distinctness of meaning (arthavyakti) is injured, the insertion of

the sonne after nouns with final ^ is requisite (Kesava says), e. g.
If,

As remarked above, Samskrita nouns with

insertion of the sonne,

a. rforeotfjacs o,
e. *7
c&

final

^ always

qS^do.ddo,
^.oJJo^oQdo,
*-^
W

require

t3orte3j3.5-,o,
w

the

z^oijo

niO
Instances

6)

a
y

in

which the noun has the meaning of the instrumental, are

oi>o. rio^rtrao,
SKd&Ftfdo, storeo.
na' ^odjrlracdjsnco'
ca'
;

^J2?c3jfc3,dodo,
-i-bi

^?rtzorfo,

^20.

ca

an instance in which the noun has the meaning of the dative, is

(=^iaJje3 sp?do); an d an instance in which the noun has the

meaning

of the locative, is 3oc&oz3o o O r rfoc&ac^o.

In the kriyasamasa, as the instances show, an arisamasa

(nirdosha).

Kesava's special instance

is:

252)

is

faultless

217

271).

(see

Instances in which the final syllable of the first word is elided, are
woh rf o (for woioo ^rfo), tftfsadro (for^rt-J zradro),

c)

35p:33o (for^ptrto 3$o),

4d / '

e. a.
r

(for s'tfrto

(for

"When

2,
is

o33r

^ CO
odw^o

"^

C3

>3o or

(for

Sw^o), o3rfo

arf

of a case

numeral (sankhya), or a

pronoun

seq.\

185. 18G), a gamakasamasa

may

be translated

cutive

its

is

or

(sarvana,ma),

an

G8; 177

Gamakasainusa

formed", Kesavajsays.

having this name probably

another without alteration. Conse-

'consecutive compound',

members succeed one

compounds "may be", Kesava

and occasionally may be

which belong to which.

says,

"a

class of

he does,

tatpurushas";

Instances regarding numerals

a)

the kartri)

i. e.

(karaka,

attributive noun (so-called adjectives, gunavacaua), or a krit

because

a^tfr

(for

s^s^do).

noun with the notion

by a

preceded

sio^do),

karmadharayas,

however, not

244. 248. 278,

(cf.

i)

state

"3if

are:

^oiw, cicewrf^, 3Ji333^o (aoJw, rf^, wai being the karaka nouns). We
may perhaps say that such instances are tatpurushas, the first word expressing
the connection which

it

genitive

^F^ciu (TSiri g^ +

See

246), e.g.

are) five,

i. e.

has with the second one,

twenty-five.

e.

i.

aotar), of

the connection of the

above) twenty (there

(/.<?.

(Would such compounds

not be rather dvandva<:

250.)
6)

265)

Instances regarding pronouns viz. &3,

(oirajj),

w, ^, SAW (see

264.

are:
t
.

words are
c)

in the

may

say, the

same relationship (ekasraya) and form karmadharayas

Instances
)F,

Here, we

regarding

artributive

$3oJ.>33Cr!, 2)3o3oajrto.

If

two

247).

nouns are:

we consider these instances

to

bo compounds,

they are karmadharayas', but they are in reality no compounds, and ought not
to be written as such (cf.
241).
They are genitives combined with nominatives, e. g.

d)

w&ok

is

the genitive of

w*

(c/.

273).

Instances regarding verbal declinable bases (krillingas) are:

(see

(see
364);
363); artdessioFo, ^J3dd^oi3 (see

179).

If

we

consider th

instances of compounds, they are karmailhurayas; but, as stated by us

IT

in

28

218
179. 185. 186, their

first

words are very probably genitives of the so-called

See
254.
present-future and past participles combined with nominatives.
As will be learned from the instances, an arisamasa is faultless in consecutive

compounds.

Remark.
Such instances as are adduced under number 2
commonly, and we think quite

The

3,

is

and d are

c,

has

(which

repetition-compound

303. 307. 308. 309)

meanings, vide

i,

be compounds.

justly, not considered to

or

vipsasamasa

letters

various

formed by repeating adverbs,

interjections, imitative sounds, and nouns, the final syllable of the first

word being often dropped or also changed,

e.

vt>

g.

starts') ;-3tftfrt

of verbs see

254.

positive

(=^fl

oi

f3),

tftffl),

Regarding the repetition

^3J e^).
7

On verbal

declinable bases

are formed from the so-called

seen,

and negative (bhutavatikrit,

relative

present-future

participle

^<^, (wsj**), W^,

enirto,

S3s^o, S5^5^o,

es,

68,

i;

past

S5^,

8, e),

as

participle

180-186) by

(bhavishyantikrit,

Swrto, S5D*,

102,

relative

175-179) and from the so-called

pronominal forms and pronouns yo,

dialect, or <9?&,

363. 364).

(cf.

Verbal declinable bases (krits, krillingas,

suffixing the

3t>

211. 339.

XII,

we have

=^sJ <^

OJ

^.3 ( = ^s^?3

oD*,

W5^)

fcoo,

(cf.

(S5do),

tJ^o,

$5$*,

193) in the ancient

w^o, w^?do, w3, wdv*, ws^^o,

^,

in the mediaeval one, or S5d?jj,

in the

under

3;

200,

i;

267; 273; 316,

i;

modern one

Instances are:

253,

2,

certain

10

^,
,

aoJ3adv% ^ocs-d^,

2053^??,

'cJ

2jdo?rjddd), ^dj^i^), aSjjta^i; c4>a<rijdo, watfdodo,

o

198

330).

d; 363; 364) and

(
to
of participles.
are
suffixed
both
kinds
(postpositions)
Similarly any nouns

(see

adverbs

219
An explanation

of the structure of verbal declinable bases has been

178. 179. 185. 186.

given in

aro combined with pronominal forms or pronouns,

1,

If the participles

a)

the declinable bases

something or somebody,

e.

she that sang, wfidodo,

g.

it

may stand by themselves without reference to

w$do, he that played, 333&do, n e that sang, tfSdv*,

that played, saaQdodo,

it

that

sang;

&eadcfc

(or

generally N-OeSd^, see remark 3), it that saw, ^3_zk> (or generally ^^j^), it that
brought ; 43^o, he that nourishes or will nourish, ^p33o*, they that nourish or
will nourish,

that which is;

wutf^do,

esoasd^tfj, she

who

is

3^,

he that does not or did not stand,

not or was not afraid, ywahd,}do, that which does not or

did not perish, wsddj^, they that do not or did not come, siradddo (or generally
ajaddo^,

see remark 3), that which does not or did not make, 'gw ddo (or generally

^d^),

that which does not or did not exist;

may bo preceded by a nominative, e. g. ?k 3. 3J* Lrioado, he whoso

was removed, rtr^rf.) To^tfo, she whose husband died, J3?3j3* z-c33%j,
he whom God was or is pleased with; Sj^tf.) wsaoidtfo, she whose children are
s
he to whom
alive, d^UjQ Soortojjrfrfo, he whose firm mind fails, 3333
ero^o,
they

6)

affliction

wealth belongs (i. e. he who possesses wealth), rfocw^o, he to whom neatness

who is neat), u^ccoaddrfo, he to whom nakedness belongs
(i. e. he

belongs
(i. e.

he who

is

"

gold)

naked), ^prfo.^,^0, he to

5ae>s 'go d3o,

ho

to

whom

feet

or a cripple), $5^3* es^d^c, he that

they to

whom

a son

is

not or

was not a devotee, 5^rfo aoJ&^dad),

not or was not born, so^tfo U3'^dstfj, she

her children by death,

which there is no refuge;
lost

is

whom gold belongs (i. e. he who possesses

do not belong (/. e. he who is without feet

Qt^ddo

(or

a
c
generally
^^, ^

who

loses or

see remark 3),

it

for

may govern the accusative, as the verbs do from which they are
<od^o zortas^o, he who intended two
g.
things, cra^SJo z3fido, he that

they

c)

formed,

r.

asked a boon, J^rttfsk ^J3^jj&, he that killed enemies; ^Jscsja* efodo^, ho that
)y So Ssl> 3o, ho that eats all

eats boiled rice, 3-raorid 3rfj a, he that eats flesh,

W

tO

'

5
kinds of food, WfSoiJcS oeaosa^, ho

who mounts an

elephant,

^d

watfoijo rioO^zio

33^o he that patiently endures the pain of austerities, ft* AatSMfrt**! females
that scare away parrots, ridFdjs*
he that possesses pride, c&ra^ avv^o,
sns^Ji,
s

ho that possesses neatness,

Jift^jtMftaJig*

eru^arfo,

he that possesses acute

discernment (regarding the accusative see

316. i); zjJ^^artrScS* efe'abd3<&,
ho that does not or did not know devotodnoss, doesrrfcirf^ ^?dd^ he that does not
?

or did not join bad

el)

they

are formed,

went

to the

may

e.

men;

be joined also to other cases just as the verbs from which they

^rude^dro, he that was

in

the

a&a?dad),

that

they
a^rt
a lotus,
from
he
that
sprang
^fe^do,
he that was born of a female servant, ^^Q^ rf*dAds?io, he that

g.

field,

hamlet, 333<3rt or sadfoJjsv*

,

88*

220
is

emaciated by sickness, 33ft

(i. e.

3Sc3

that which grows by its own force

sdo&Jo^ck,
he that came from the village, rid^osSd^flo

spontaneously), uva9^ 20^3^0,

he that sprang from a good family

^fc^do,

loves (his) mother-,

from a

is

be preceded by an infinitive,

may

cannot be gone to (or reached),

2,

If the participles are

tfa'oi)

u^do,

to those of

^rJ3C3

TO*, wind that

is

violent; ^etfd rfre^Oj a

Observe also

(with his wife).

waddodJ, that which

cEUisrt

g.

number

rice that was or is boiled,

53^
3<Sd
w n d that blew; (3.oe&Jd<D)
Oftuo,
bad,
garden), ^o^j)7o3c, a chair on which one sits,

a)

e.

that which

is

harmony

wstfd^NO,

came

to one's

knowledge.

combined with nouns, the rules regarding the thus

formed declinable bases are similar

^jsdd

3^3^

not serviceable.

they

e)

Sradoddrfo, he that

they that do not or did not recede

^ortowd^do,

^s^rtd^e^

^e3 SyS

aJdra^oKdrfd), they that are not afraid of death,

fight,

he that

3303^

3'tf.

1,

a. b.

^3sb, penance that was or

waa, a we ll that is (in the

-3<jo;j

&&3

sUes5

a stream that runs,

husband that

>ra^do (for

is

not or was not in

3^3) rt^o. a room

which

in

(one) bathes, and rfst^C^, in the place where (one) walks (or in walking),

^eO?^

30, in the place where (one) compares (or in comparing), z3d^rt, to the place
where (one) has fallen, ^^^i to the place where (one) falls (or to his falling).
Regarding the 'one'
6)

in parenthesis see

358.

an ox whose horns were or are broken, tftf 33^d ^ad),

which wild fire broke out,
20^ ^3, a house to which the father

^J3doo\ sJoiOd^,

a jungle in

came, or a house from which the father came, 330 20^ ^soSoro, the business for
3& &e$d eadre, the reason for which he went; 33od: ^s^os
which he came,
which
the mother brings up, ^a.)^, a place where there is mud;
a child
ff

ss&J,

a garden

in

which the cuckoo does not or did not

a village in which ripe

cry,

do not grow, cradode$oi>Ooii)d ^o,"

a case in which the conventional meaning of a word is not or was not damaged,
docScOoo d zoonsdo, gold that is not of use (i. e. is valueless), &3fo ao^rtd adcjj^),
J,

fruits

a jungle which people do not or did not enter, 2t^0y djsdj, a village
there are no tenants.
It is to

krillinga
to

be remarked that

and the verb used

be supplied mentally

(people) tied,

drum

c&oj^

315,

2, fc),

is

e.

g.

transitive, the subject

^fi

^J3e$, the

is

young

woman) has given

where (somebody) gives;

See

not cultivate.

3^d

to

(a child)

28

kettle3,

3o3,

Sfo^o^d, a place

^0^3*, a piece of land that (people) do not or did

358.

^odotfoi)^ oes'd oa^^o,

a

birth

somehow
bull that

^P^d $0, the

that (warriors) struck, ^*oA> 53^0, the foot that (somebody) cutoff,

the room in which (a

c)

formation

the place that (somebody) struck,

ejcy,

which

a nominative (a subject) does not precede the

if

in its

(cf.

in

a horseman that mounted a

whip with which (people) beat horses

etc.,

horse;

so^

221
a cup from which (people) drink spirituous liquor; 33o3i WO'oi)^ en>O'oJjd

a calf that does not or did not leave

dd&p "add

d)

saoj^r,

an

mother's place.

(its)

affair that

does not suit to one's wish,

a black colour that (people) apply to grey hair, cCds'd^ tftoja zn>&, a
sinner that falls into hell, aodde?* ?o3\)d eoe^rf, a decorated seat that was
^5&F~,

made

of wood, to^orf^o iotfAd-Qrirs *, villages that are surrounded by gardens,

1

d6J ,d3

rfrf

to

3^J"> rt<? 5 stones that

yudotf

roll

down from a mountain.

Regarding krillingas formed by suffixing declinable postpositions the

may be adduced: oa&tfo zJdoa^ (os>zs;3o sodo^s a^), ^wod

3,

following instances
3"o<*j

(33

ao?<0?i

jjrf

Qrf),

OTdd

ydrfo

aojozS

(warfo

uadd

Concerning the general use of postpositions after krits seo

3,wo"Jrf

282,

?$aooi>).

i.

Remarks.

As seen from the remark

1,

200 under

in

the verbal declinable base

(krillinga) formed from the so-called present-future relative participle is used

also as the third person singular neuter of the future tense and as a hhava-

vacana

Thus staw^cb,

243).

rfjado^io, srerfjado

means

'that which

makes

make'; 'it will make'; and 'a making', 'the making', 'the act of
making', 'to make'.

or will

Regarding
d<?fo

we adduce the following instances:

make beautiful, sj^o JJJ3^J^)do, the act of making
&0do SJa^o^do, to make large what is small, wS^obo ^pz2 SJa^j
use as a bhavavacana

its

djso^do, the making or to

e3'do

subject,

3do, to

honour a guest,

^^^arS*^

^doo

is

jlo^y

dJsdoSdo, to embellish the

^^

^Jaz^osdj
to
R^, ^Js^oddo, to sleep,
ajra^oi),
^rarort ^^KO,
injustice, -^^)do
giving (was) an innate quality of Karna,

body by means of sandal

deceive

sSOtddoo

?j5^do

Brrarotf

grant the wish (of another) was Karna's

birth, 2-^ tfaibj ^i^ ^JsSoo^do, to give one thing and

zss^^o,

vowed observance from

take another thing

etc.,

(in its stead),

to

our going, SK^ ^JS^orfdo,

,

to play incessantly,

come after (i. e. to follow), 33^

your giving, W33J cOiorfdo, their coming,

20

Sic^

o&d

^"do,

to

'gdosdj^ to be fearless.

The bhavavacana may be declined, e. g. c33doi>o B^&3cM&z&otabo SoaQo,

means to stop the boat, sa^rf^ ^c^jad^ i)^^^, I am come to
see you, wsdo rfrfrt TOSSOJJ ajadoadis'oS ^u^ ?33rto^d, because they assist me,

contrive ye a

the business advances,

(the time of)

my

33^

zodoado'jatfrt wSrtoissndC, lot dinner

be ready within

coming.

Likewise the third person neuter singular of the past tense in the
2,
ancient and mediaeval dialect ending in 5A)do (see
198 under 3), the krillingas

formed from the relative past participle by means of the suffix tJ do in the modern
dialect, and the krillingas formed from the relative negative participle when
used

for the past

209) by means of the

suffix erodo in the ancient

and mediaeval

222
3i in the modern one, have been used as bhavavacanas
expressing

and

dialect

the action or state of the verb in the past.

a having given-it

(i. e,

osasd)

gift),

a liberal person

lit.

a,eddo,

^3,

83)

the king's departure),

(i. e.

having gone-it

E. g. tsaAoSJ^do,

a liberal person's

the king a

lit.

your having come

(i. e.

your arrival), 33030 ri^do, the mother's having died (i. e. the mother's death),
5\G7l> 3j3s3oi>oredo, the child's
having drunk milk, wstoj fSJSS&ddo, their having
seen; w^o* 5i>redodo their having not seen,

?3d) watiddo, their having not come,

See S^&Addo in the portion of a verse

eddj j&adddo,
in

thoir having not done.

258.

Also this kind

,

of

bhavavacana

because
fSJ

(their)

T&/3SJ dijr

is

declined,

e.

sscoo

g.

ri^da^ do^srt u^tf

mother died, the children grieved very much;

because the father gave (him) two ripe

dorto^j SoA ^j }

adodortcio 3& sari

(his) little boy rejoiced;
^Ooiiddey;^ sJ&fi^a aSi^
because the boys had not learned or did not learn their lesson, the
schoolmaster became angry; rfc^ s^To^d ;3o?$3 3JA tfddrf^ s'rao esoi^ctodi rfrfrt

mangoes,
3J3<SdK$o ?

A&J^ dJaSddo, the schoolmaster

on

fallen)

my

saw the having

d>

(i.

e.

that ink

bad

book and became angry with me.

It is a peculiarity of the

3,

fallen of ink

when

modern

dialect to double, almost generally,

^^

the suffix of a bhavavadana of the past, e. g.

5C5j,
5;J3ddj
w'ddo
if such a
(for
sorfdo),
(for
aojseddo),
ri^do,
v
v
/'
/'
- a' eruradj,
co
<a
u co'
a a ^e&J.do,
ca
sn)
bhavavacana is formed from verbal themes with final
166. 175, 2) or
(

the

in

is

it

from the so-called negative

rfo (cf.

122),

e.

175,

3),

the suffix tsrfo almost generally becomes

S^Sddo), ^Qd^, tf^d^, sijsddo

g. ^IraSd^ (for

^; also forms like 3<cl> (for

^?ddo

(for

^^dd^), ^dd^ (for

This peculiarity holds good, of
yddo), sSjstd^ (for ^addo) are used.
course, also with regard to the similarly formed krillingas, e. g. in No. 1, a. b.
It may be remarked here too that in adding ^do to the genitive of neuter
(for

nouns ending

in o, its initial

is

?i?o,
,

The pronouns are declinable bases

^1^0,

tf\id> (see

wdo, ^rfo,
d^o,

265): t>^,

(for

90). e?o,

erus^o,

reflexive (reciprocal)

122;

w &, y^,

es^o, 'ad^o,

'ad^o, 32&5v*; w^o,

^5=^,

^wrid^

are called (by Europeans) personal pronouns, and

33 ^ called (by them) the

'ado,

^.

On pronouns,

XIII,
255.

e.

generally elided,

enja

-d?^o,

pronoun (see

?A)^o

erf,

272),

arf,

erua^o,

w^^o,

8,

a).

^3^0,

s3&5o;

^ are demonstrative pronouns; and

102,

es^v*,

-ds^^o,

ws^^

265.

223
269),

The
102, a, b).
interrogative pronouns (sec
of
dialectical
forms
arc
later
cjs
time; es3?l), 'aj,
;trc

odJS and

initials
WSjtfo,

W^ffo, -di^fjO,

'SSJtfj,

030e>r&,

modern forms with a euphonic

final

O&e^tfo,

CjeJSJtfo,

vu

112); wsjtfo,

>?& are

OeJSJtfo,

appear

'asStfj

also in the mediaeval dialect.

The declension of the personal pronouns

256.

?3e>o,

>e&, $?, thou, and of the reflexive pronoun 3^3, sa^o, 3e>, he, he
137, and their probable
himself, she, she herself, it, it itself, is given in
>?o,

138.

origin appears in

In

138, remark, their connection with the personal terminations of

the verb is alluded to (cf.
193 and remarks thereon). They express,

Kesava says, the meaning of the three persons of the verb

(
,

know, we cannot
,

thou

3>c3

the state of the king.

tell

wentst

me

before

to

dra^

the

>?o

f3

battle,

193),

e.

</.

though we
(or

^^o (or

=0^0 ^^^o^dasDSo^crfoo, he threw arrows at the

tn
tr
If

>

enemy's army (or river) which was no river. 330 (or g^do*") ?3c?7323
3d)P^5 9 OJOD*, they met even Arjuna, (but) did not pierce.
o,

yo 3^$ 4;
O

^?c5*

<^

oi^, ^?o

the remarks on the final sonne in

(c/.

Their gender

noun

Wo

to

is

shown

which they

Tf^O,

Wo $$

357,

(see

^o
3);

in $

refer,

i.

e.

102,

7.

^d

s
;

C5

215,
8 to

r
gc3* aciro, 33^0* ^dro*

8).

be depending on that of the

viseshyadhina,

e.

g.

Wo

(or

(or

(or

257.
$*>) (the plural) is generally used for ^>^j (the singular) in
modern Kannada when people of some standing speak of themselves,

e.g.

<33wz3

expression

>&

rfjsdo^O, what will you do without

occasionally

c3s>^>^?jo rfJSVr ^,
1

appears

^^o^)^4,

also

I will

in

the

me?

medieval

This

way

dialort,

e.

of
g.

send this one to the world of mortals.

Also in the oblique cases this holds good in the modern dialect, e. g.
come to my house!, and in the mediaeval one wherein
20^,

224
e.

g.

girl

and: ^sj^ddo (<oskt esddo,

oi&tssrttf

S)?SJ

ridcS?l>3o

'of

lit.

and:

alri^

<odo

rtarfjdo^dJSs*

says:

'S.d^d^o

(i.

e.

i. e. our people, my
parents)
In the last three sentences the girl

us they',

^s?d&.

intends to honour her master and parents by using the plural of the

pronoun (i.
the modern
354,

II,

e.

<O^J, for o}<3

e.

dialect,

to be

g.

before them, a practice that obtains also in

fdsjo,

^o, ask my mother!

3e>0&iCdoN^

(Is

compared?).

(sta wdCo, =

In the Southern Mahratta country ^o,3d:>

i^o.sJ^o,

our people, he that is mine) is often used by native women when speaking of their husbands, while the husband when speaking of his wife says

^JeX-^

(r$s&i,

258.

e?^, of us she, she that is mine).

In the ancient dialect

of disrespect,

in

$o,

thou,

a person

addressing

is

used, without the least savour

of respectability,

e.

g.

(See translation in

||

360)

and

23rfrlJ3rao.

that

Muni and said

"

moved three times round

(him),

bowed several

Regarding
dialect,

e.

o,

man

venerable

(?)

thou

art,

the king having seen

nothing else!", lovingly

(him) with the right side turned towards (him), praised

times, and worshipped (him) with devotion.

thou, such,

is

often

g.

t,

and
2073303233

and
t>

fttcSt

fe,

--3

the case also

in

the

mediaeval

225
But the mediaeval
plural

dialect, in accosting a single person,

>?s3 ft^Ojoortcrfjo

,{;& e.g.

uses also the

even thou having gone.

In the modern colloquial dialect the following distinction is

made between

>?s3):_when addressing a person of some respectability, the

followed by a
^PS^) (also in its oblique cases) is always used,

and

^o

plural

verb in the plural (cf. 3-353- in

261); and when addressing a person
of low rank, or a child, the singular >??uO is always used.
Further, in the modern dialect of conversation
to say even to a little child

expected to say

^d^

sister, the father, the

in

the plural;

it

e.

>s^

es^,,

mother,

g.

$$

gtf,,

e53^,

0^

W4

it is

esz^,

etc ''

becomes particularly

is

'

honorific,

e.

c,

g.

When

131,

e,

its

)^3)G*,

oblique cases

c^j nj5Jo

with

wd,, 3s)03o,

are in

y^c!o

themselves

he of the spear, literally 'they of

is

always used in the three dialects,

_ do3o

rtorl^^*,

ydoaoi)!

In the three dialects 3^0, 3e>f&,

259.

their plural

when

sentence,

said

e.

g^o (SD^),
they,

in the

g. rfj^o^.o

"Manu and

2,

not unfrequent in

e.

riois*

^3, d?w, d

355,

Cf.

I,

i,

where

verb in the singular.

its

in a

one says

if

#.

The pronoun may also be omitted, e.g.

it is

e.

i),

(Vishnu), ^e rfwa^j oi^!

1,

is

addressing a deity (or God) in prayer, the singular

or one of

has

it

Similar plural forms are met with also in

e30jOof3sj&>.

the ancient dialect, e.g.

the spear'.)

i;

(Plurals that are formed

etc.

cdosjtfo,

119,

94, and

uncivil, even abusive,

It
Sorg 3, instead of ^asjj, 3oo^3.
$N.
v
<a
such polite language to add y^jdo to the words

(see

because tne

require to be honoured by the pronoun

etc.

to another

S'oh, etc.

considered uncivil

when

SDS^),

he, he liimself, etc.,

3e>,

and

they, they themselves, are used

nominative, refer

3*^00 ?o^ O^o*

to the subject mentioned in a

o^?r

?roujo3JS>^ c

he (are) virtuous people".

o,

of

Udayaditya

J^WS3?rfo?

they, in the nominative, refer to a

sentence, but understood to be the

subject,

noun that
c. //.

is

3>c3*

not mentioned
<O23o.

29

226

o.
20
co

WSdFoNO,
oo
Q'

3e>

Co,'

when

3,

fcoW,
tJ

3e>

&<!?* ?do?l

Na

5 , 3-33*

TJ-W

fact', etc.,

of a sentence

W3oo^i

e.g.

Samskrita (words used

for

'aw,

accompany the subject

they, in the nominative,

and may occasionally be translated 'indeed', 'in

SJ3"

srf r Ds

33 Si?

OrUSW.dSoO^OZoOado.
to

in

ojj^

Kannada)

-D-

in fact
with regard to (the euphonic insertion of) o&* and
no muchness (i. e- o&* and
are always inserted, 33^ referring to

there

is

&

referring to

wo.

z3?aiSS^rcSE5o Se)^

Instances by which the use of go>o, etc.

4,

oblique cases, are:

?5^^o

<.

own trouble

^r<^CM f3

3$

'

T#3^[

his

own

joy

(is)

tfe9F<$Jd%?ot

that ruler

?OJID^?

=*

the world's joy,

&

^^rtcSo

%,

w D^oD^oSJS ^,

are in

'

the world's trouble.

(is)

shown when these

^, birds build their nests.

dJ3^d
^.^?
to
his

is

^.rfo 3e>o.

w^^^o.t 3oJ3^oij03r) ^, he beats his cow.

eJj.^
ej-

<=

rissi^

S55j?oCo.

became famous on

earth,

^dJsri

when that

Karna became his (itfrt) property.

sJdOn^fii
^^AsjddfiJ
\
/
OO
who
others?
to
has
what
he
should
nothing himself,
give
^be),^,
u
sidOrl ^^dj Sjjsa a(fjrt e3^?oo djs^ ^J3^oad, to cause evil to others and

true speech of

to cause welfare to
c^J3'S3

5030,00,

^A

himself.

for their

=5^30^ 3s>5^

own quarrel (there

hundred and five.

sidd ^t)36^

S50^J do,

are) they

five,

for the quarrel

of others (there are) one

person (for

belly.

it).

^or(^

one's

own

own

wife

is

one's

state.

not present.

3$ ^ ^

^^ ^d^^CS, he who follows

of one's own accord.
3*?}?$,

will.

'

t<r

^c^d^)
"*

3oJ^6s)^^o, he who nourishes (only) his own

3, one's daughter's husband.
s^oSo si^o^ie;d ^s3,

^^ aorfw

play at which one's

^rf, 'S.sl,
**

he broke his tooth himself, and blamed another

self.

his

own

own

wife.

likings.

lo-

^CJ

(sister) older than one's

one's

^pi>N ooOoio^o,
-^O

Srf,rfOfi5p ^^ri Wfosrtorf

>P3, fear that

w
9
from his very own people.
=afidd NO&
(^^jri)
9
O3o
not
it
enough,
3#Cjo, ^?2JS,^o s'rf. SJS^rf rt0 ^o ^JSrsd ?js)odp, is
a
^
if one learns
to
the
in
Kannada
language, and
(the way
beatitude)
*-

arises

in

himself

even

t-

(thereby) acquires his beatitude in himself?

33

33^5*

227
if

one knows himself,

&>, ^Fl 3>r3o sJoCiS'u

to

if

succeed;
dori

3->?k

;fcaati

3o3

if

ought
that)
bestow benefits on him.

To

260.

a wise person.
if

is

to

likely

3$ft

&>

give

$^

ruler of the town!

rs^o, he

either

(cf.

282).

(is)

this business!

art ) Sankara!

Instances of the second kind are

read the letter myself.

fSJS^oip^,

tSs>$t

=>?>?

e.

brother, see thou thyself.

^{1

it is

'S.cSsSf,

33

g.

s^Jsad^o,

$$$$
I

made

3$^- ^0=0,^^ ^J3^c3

o"

superior (to others).

(is)

-5?

33^

^JS^dol^rS,
esEss,

3a>^?

^?1

I shall

myself.

(it)

^j?

she ate
wra^o,
^
tj

^WOri

3;?S sioo^^)^,

w&S9 OJac3, he (the mad elephant) being angry himself at

3s)?5*

(it)

g>(3 dj?e3rfoo v c5o, to

herself without giving (anything) to her children.

say that one's self

(am) the

3s?3

see to this business myself.

I shall

c3e)?S,

a distinguished teacher in the world!

sio^d^o c^sS?, thou

we!

eAfl&fczSo&a

verily, thou (art) Siva!

3rf?tee>,

thou who hast done

is

it

5JJe)Sa.

kind are e.g.

first

the

them

the meaning of emphasis or also to express the 'self quite distinctly

Instances of the

(he

will certainly

their plural

are often added in order to

e)

likely

rfje>cao<l>,

and

?&>, 3>o, 3>rl>

is

go (without gain).

he bestows benefits on others, God

212,

&z

one knows himself, he

d?3d.>

5>iotfo;3s>r\
IT

(Sao, fJe)rfo, $?o,

&Jo,

o or

particles

(is)

3e>?fo 3oJS?C3Srl>,

one forgets himself, he

know

to

lie

his

(own) shadow, (and) not knowing himself (any longer).

3"^ ^Orl 3t>&
if
one
himself
as
^JSrs
?idrao dosa 3oOA;
gave protection
coDrt, (it is)
to his

own

how by

feet

and blessed himself

the verb

=^ja^, see

(you yourself) w6<36

2^

Occasionally 3o>^ or

(this

'himself being expressed some-

ssok^, woJo^e, ac^oeSo^

341).

3o>c3(j

denotes also 'of itself, 'spontaneously',

or 3353?, 'of themselves', 'spontaneously',

,

^d?

no thing whatsoever comes of

e.

g. c&ysd

and

itself into existence.

3?sS =$d>j qjsrfoort^o, plants which die of

thcinsi-lvt-s after

they have had fruit and have become ripe (k3Srttfo).

The same meaning33F3,

^a,rf
*\.

CO

is

not unfrequently expressed

3^S?, ^^,r^
sasS?,
C* O

ing instances

^o,^,
G*

^^OJ^dftV* ^?^
,

!yj

e.

g.

by 3"^

3^c5, 3$f(

sad?, as shown by the follow-

"^

3D?S

&S>6

^JJrp^lo

saying: "of thf-o

^S^^^Nfi'

<tfii)

*a^o

sons oiu> \\ho

228
has of himself

me

to

(i.

(s^ri)",

which grows of

accidentally) been found, a genuine son

e.

he

up with joy.

lifted (him)

&

itself.

?1&,

s'a.rf

ej

e)

come into

something that has

s^ri

3Dr3e wcScS

4.o
existence

3e>?3

,
'

of itself,

that

SoofcJo^cSo,

creation

this

one

this

(is)

is

not

ej

)nJ0?S
s^rttfo
3"d>? ^sScSo, those eggs having opened of themselves (i. e.
^o, do?So3J3tftf
having been hatched) by the heat of the sun.
%>

^ejOri

3">o,^

Zwddrttfo yurao; s55So s'Oo,^ 3s>s3? whsSoSjs^? in your

CO
O
^j
are
house there
cooking vessels, stools and other things; have they all
dor?!

53ooc3ex.cS
**
"

come

*2*

into existence of themselves?

^ododrt^o ^s3o,3l

5\

3e>53?

>

the horses will stop of themselves.

wh

Further, by suffixing
3o)^)
e.

g.

they

33e>h

o3J9c^?S

own

express 'of one's

(of his

accord', 'of their

own accord)

E^o

r^orfjrf-S-cloJo^*

o
^
accord at once gave a fee to
(of itself,

own accord)

166), 'having become', to

own accord',

wrf^.ara^A

20^

'spontaneously',

yB>.

g^;3

^JSdojSsd, when he himself

(his)

guru.

^c)^

&$

of

o&>0?3

3^)^^
own

his

ejjs

* a<

>^

s^jSe)^ (of her

spontaneously) eS^OJood OJo^s^S^.

Ss)n>h

own accord)

their

(of

ol3e)&riJJj

enjSJc5,5J
*

261.
its

In the

modern

when speaking

dialect,

oblique cases are often used as a term of great respect

258) being equivalent to 'your honour', 'your lordship',

dojo

262.

djs^ao?

The declension

pronouns ending
119.

in

their plural in

in

of the singular of the masculine demonstrative

of the

ws?*

and

in

117.

singular

and that of their plural

in

of the feminine demonstrative

?5^o appears in

134; the singular of

120. 121,

and that

of

declined in

w^, -d?^, SAJS^

The declension of the singular
the neuter demonstrative pronouns is given in
122, and that of

130, and their plural in

of

(cf.

etc., e. g.

when did your honour come?).

e.

w appears

The declension

pronouns ending

(i

SQ)^ and

to a superior,

their plural in

136.

131. 132.

is

229
The declension
pronouns with

the

of

final

is

of

singular

masculine

the

interrogative

117, that of the singular of their

given in

f'eminines in

120. 121, and that of the plural of both masculines and

feminines in

135; the declension of the singular of the neuter interro-

gative pronouns appears in

&$*
(s.

(>fl>)

is

declined in

sutra 112) says that

and that of

122,

their plural in

[Regarding
nominative is also

its

136.

>^* the Sabdamanidarpana

125.

>^S3*

and gives

(sic!),

a dubious instance.]

The gender

of

demonstrative

the

and

pronouns

interrogative

is

viseshyudhina ( 102, 8) with the exception of >^* when it is not declined,

which in that case is added to masculines, feminines and neuters in the
singular and plural,

e.

g.

(271).
In the following verse

Q^O5 S3^0d?rJK^OOO 33^00

V
rtosado*

.o^s* wdccbs&^o.

according to Kesava 33* means -o^ao^rirv^ (Orf^

translation, therefore, would be:

Manu and he (are) virtous men, the

and he

5f ao

esartrv*),

what persons!

greatness which speaks of what persons!

celestial tree and he (are) donors, the ocean

(Thus) Udayaditya causes himself to be called

(are) deep.

e.

(i.

such

is

Udayaditya's fame).

The demonstrative pronouns are remote, intermediate, and

proximate, viz. ?5;3o (wsj^j, W5J), that man, he; eAido, this intermediate
263.

<a,do ("asSr*), 'asj), this man, he;

ero^s*, this intermediate woman, she;

man, he;
she;

w^o (w^^o, w3),

she;

e5rf<s*

(y^tfo),

Q^*?* (^rfs^o),

that

woman,

this

woman,

that man, he; erua^o, this intermediate man, he;

d?^o (^ffo, -d?^), this man, he;

^^, that woman, she; yv5^, this
intermediate woman, she; ^^, this woman, she;
55^0* (ss^rfj), those

men

or

women;

these

men

^^o,

this;

or

erodo*, these intermediate

women;

the neuters

men

or

ejtfo, that, it;

and their plurals yj^, VD^,

^.

women;

'asJo* ('addJ),

vudo, this intermediate;

262.
Cf.

The intermediate forms have mostly disappeared

in

the

mediaeval

dialect except erorfo for the third person singular of the verb (sec

the
its

modern one has abandoned them altogether,

g^do, which stands

for W3oJc3J

201).

if

193);

one does not consider

230
Remark.
Regarding the occasional forms ^3o, a^b,
2, remark.

^,

3j,

122.

eru^o etc. see

d>,

272,

When

264.
their

^ck, rudo become demonstrative adjective pronouns,

final <3o and with the demonstrative vowels

escfo,

forms (without the

lengthened) are

ervs

3s,

Such adjective

(this in the ancient dialect).

vowel-pronouns are used before masculine, feminine and neuter nouns

and plural.

in the singular

&

3r3,
cr

erua ^yS,

sjjs^^o;

y\j=>

o'

3s 5$s3,

35 eotfo, eru3

w^o,

The following are some instances:

dorfs*,

&3o; w o^SJOs^o*,
253,

(see

263) and the interrogative

27
271 ) come from
c5o,

(see

3s
2,

&

Kesava says that the demostrative pronouns ado,

265.

y ^?,

3s sort's*

(c

pronouns

This statement

Let

rather unsatisfactory.

is

pronominal forms e3o, he, wp*, she, S3o

ancient dialect were used in krillingas (

it

be

said

that

the

they, which especially in the

177. 185. 254) and only in

course of time were superseded by the demonstrative pronouns

(ssdo,
and which appear as the personal terminations of the verb ( 193),

etc.)

are, together with the demonstrative vowels

forms w,

'a,

ere

and

their lengthened

the elements of the remote, proximate and intermediate

3s, erja,

Thus 55^0

pronouns.

=5,

is

5>s* 3+

$3+ euphonic j3*+S3o,

S3*

+$<?*,

a+

is

an

?5

+ cj

object, see

3s,

eru3

(see

w+^j

Regarding

primitive sign which in a general way points to

(the

122)
:

is

3*+ euphonic

(or

t*^,

euphonic eru, <az3o 'a+cf+ero, vud

137, a under nominative plural), ^5^

3? #,

erus^

either with the suffix

the suffix

in

243, A,. No.

10.

so

ero)

sso

mention I'd

in $

138, d,

3),

stated that they are

w,

(see

much may be

^ + S3*

109, a,

122;

4,

or perhaps with

231
The interrogative pronouns
wo* (c&sdo, Gsdj), t>44 (os:rest on the interrogative &, that becomes od3e> in the oblique
cases of the mediaeval and modern dialect, which is another form of y
>),

Thus s;jo

41. 125. 138. 209).

(see

is

4.

euphonic r/+^o,

The modern forms with

show that

far interesting as they

(as in

having become

23*;

z!U>eA=o3j8?r\,

and

may

be

made

initial 033*

c5^e?oo occurs as

Tulu, wherein

see

that in

141,

may become

remark under

i,

where?

,0

are in so

tf in

Kannada

Ss>?2, initial

Kannada tadbhava terms Cjd?d=

the

cf. e. g.

cra?S,

CJT>

initial

and also as

which comes from

and mediaeval

138, c);

(cf.

<o

appears also as ws3)

o^:

oJo^?o,

The remark

dative).

CO

has become short

cc:

the
>+S3),
CO
in the

&

ancient

dialect.

The forms ad, CJJS^,

which appear in the so-called gamaka

compounds ( 253, 2, &, only before consonants in the ancient dialect, as
it would seem according to the instances given
there), are nothing but
a substitute of

(see

269).

C3s>d

Some

additional instances are:

wsj

203, remark)?

eruado?

Regarding the meaning see

271.

255

has been stated that 33j3o,

and cO^CoJ are classed with the (demonstrative) pronouns by the

266.

In

102,

8, b;

it

grammarians Kesava and Nagavanna.

t3o is s2&3 (the being on the outer side or foreign) +S5o, another
he or another man, 33^3$* 35S3+yp* another she or another woman,

s!3^j s23+25^J
it

(see

remark under

or another thing, r^ic"

~'.'i'

jj

2G3) or 353cl) s3t5+ S3oJ, anutln'r

S50, other

men

or

women,

3C!f'S3;

232
he who is
tfdSs&a^o sSeSs* ssOe^ctf wHe^C^o,
called Arjuna, is no stranger; he (lit. this man) must become (the
w^o o3S3$J3 ?^o, that man (is) one who is attached to a
leader?),
55^, ot her things,

foreign
it

e.

g.

another) woman.

(or

Z3t3

be other persons'?
introduced even

^3rtF^V&>,
TJ

bosJ&tfOTS&rfo&sSorittaa,
SJ
Ty

Rama's who has no equal

(the victory?) will be

in the world; will

it

Je^a^o
^o,
Q having mannerly
Q

qJrfororttfiS

laws of other things.

sSt^o

(with an

initial

is

53*)

same form and 5o3o occur in the mediaeval dialect; sC3o

the only modern form.
oiodo (which is classed also with the nouns that express indefinite

ancient; the
is

90.

quantity,

278, 3.4)

(men or women),
of

^wco + esrfi,

is

&}>

<0>s3)

+ S3^,

it all,

is

53*

'

etc. (see

278,
212,

adverbially (see

osj

(nominative

present paragraph when

suffixes, see it

it

(i.e.
V

d, a)

oio
to

*,

e.0.

e3orisjj

s
.

<O^^>C&>FO;
ro
in

used

is

cO>)

33*

in

also

all

with suffixes at the close of the

end of nouns),

stands at the

karmadharaya compounds wherein

(247,

o}>53D*

euphonic like the

of

all

7).

(here without

all

oi^o

4).

In

the things, etc.

all

ancient dialect the

the

(dw + 530*, they

oiwo*
co
co

ways)

it

may

take

the

also

is

used

in

form

^
<

The modern

dialect

03

uses

also

In the

coo^cjo and <oa)do for <o^>do and

modern

dialect ,3573 by itself is used for the

accusative, and then,

<oejs

e.g.

(*. e.

at least often,

the whole earth)

nominative and

conveys an emphatical meaning,

tert)053c)cS6

[3edd

^2

whole body)
(the
^

as accusative of oejs), occurs also in that dialect.

(V)'

PO

^(y^
Concerning the use of oe;
01'
o-

etc.

at the end of

nouns observe

the following instances:

^

The compound-rule regarding

instances.

>}

and

o^o^ has been retained

only

in

Kosava's

233

tf

124 after No.

(see
v

213^3,.

6).

S3e>?3o,o fc

&

-6

do.

The Niuligattu has:

174 it has been stated that there are no relative pronouns

and
their place is somehow supplied by the so-calk-d
Kiinnada,
relative participles; from the translation of the instances concerning
267.

In

in

and 254

179, 186

these in

Occasionally,

there

however,

occur

which might suggest the thought as

as relative

e.

ones,

tJd^

y.

righteous man, he indeed

leading;

the

correct

man? he indeed

is

explained

by

of

S5rf?3

a very

(is)

this translation is mis-

'who

'is

who

^?^o,

But

venerable.
translation

a very righteous

(is)

the above and similar sentences

pronoun followed

of questioning

*3do

0&s>3:3^?

elephant('s head)?

the interrogative pronouns were used

if

in instances taken

dialect the vowel

dialects

venerable'.

interrogative

becomes plainer

rfjjsjjs.rt

(is)

three

the

in

sentences

tsQv ^r?^^

literal

That the meaning

the

has already become evident.

this peculiarity

it

(is)

CW

by

thus to be

is

from the modern dialect,

(

212,

6)

what

spsjrf,

the dantabhaga.

often used,

is

the

(is)

one

demonstrative

s?2afc

c. //.

fore-part

o^'ssirf^o (*

which

in

of

an

e.

o,

who does

often

march out with

the very object of vanquishing an

enemy? such a one (is) an abhyamitrya.

who does work? he shall have a
,

Pel

wno

whom

thou canst trust?

.,

dinner,

such people choose

are )
(

tlie

people

for thy friends!

<
S^fc,

in

what manner

do they wish that other people should treat them? in that very manner
271
they should treat other people.
Cf.
(w^j cjGoJo^ etc.).
In
330 this paragraph will be adverted to again.
30

234
In the present dialect of the Southern Mahratta country the singular

268.

of es>53cfo, 'Sl53ci3, ef>53tfj, 'SSStfj is not used in speaking of

whom

grown up persons

one considers respectable; the plural of the pronouns

(yd do,

with the verb in the plural) or the singular of w^o, -&^o,

In writing
354, II, and about ^?fo
being used instead (cf.
258).

about such persons this custom

they are

if

appear),

is

generally observed only (as

alive at the writer's time

still

Fourth Book, Mangalore, Basel Mission Press,

it

(see

would

Bombay

e. g.

884, lessons 2. 4. 36. 38. 105).

In the modern dialect of the Mysore country (according to the Rev. Th.

Grammar

Hodson's

209) "the singular ysj^o, e3Sj^o

speaking of an equal or an inferior. The plural esddo
honorific singular

when speaking

of a superior,

are used of an equal or superior when respect

is

used

is

as

-ds^o,

J^,

w^?$o,

when

used

is

arfo, vo^o,

was apparently not connected

?s;3s>*, 'ads*, erod's*

way with disrespect,

e.

yds*

ssdo 3doe;s3G3,

g.

yds*

sfos^sSfs*,

d?dd iae^.

-ads*

sssJo

ydo,

in

any

&0o3oo, ssdcS* So^do,

^ciod; kni>$o3odo,

Regarding a rather

use of sj^o observe the sentence todc^o

&$

intended".

In the ancient dialect the use of the singular of the pronouns

r

an

2oric3s>^f$oo

z3?rfc5'

'ado,

disrespectful

c^

tfrfcfco?

The mediaeval dialect does not seem to

ancient one (see

e.

g. the

of essJs* in Jaimini 30,

use of

Q^O

a^o,

-ds^o

i);

certain degree of disrespect,

e.

differ in this respect

from the

in Basavapurana 47, 33 and that

may be used therein also with a

g.
.

eo

w^

Likewise

3jv3^{&.

S5d^o are found

that smell of dishonour, e.g. d^,rfd

^F>|^/ Ooioo
48-50

3*3$

to

in

Basavapurana

use,

six

times,

may

not do so on account

more expressive on

regarding him, they

265

In

it

e^rf^F

or

sound.

178);

we remark

this

optionally

177.

its

may

has been stated that the origin of tt^tfo

Concerning

(sutras

one another of Basava and

they perhaps thought the term to be

'adfS)

account of the fullness of

that

When

sJdd^^o.

jjdcsa)'^.

vJ

of respect;

269.

passages

WO

zJridrf^j. vudri^?2J3^2oSJoo

women speak

(for

in

dxrfdoo sidcjS^. w^odd

77

5,

promiscuously

appears as

(the

that
>ir

is

Sabdanusasana says
ij^^r and e^do as

the

and

Sabdamanidarpana derives

j>3,

^^^r

or

235
directly from oj^y, sutras

wd

e>o for

112.

used usJ, e.g.

is

114).

Jesao (&abdamanidarpana); a ~ja3o

for tjd

rfjs^j (Naga-

varma's Chandas); ^s^cSjfor wsjdj (AbhinaTapampa); i^jJOoSjav* for wjj

is used for
The accusative
(see Dictionary).
t?^jdo or o^o,
e. //.

ws^rfo or

for

>;3?Cjj3
J

or

>#

meaning of

e.

#.

JsJv*

&3^r

for

>

About the

or &tf zjpJo.

271.

The interrogative

270.

the dative

S^C^o;

>d?*o for w^rftfr,

Q

see

>;s

>?3o

the

5O* (wcto, odboxjoj,

pronoun
has been mentioned in

plural

of

2G5 wherein

(03ue)^^> O30e)rf^o),

from tJ^rio, as does also Bhattakalanka: we have

stated there that eo* is
272 under No. 2).
+53* + yo*.
(Cf.

Kesava derives

it

used for the masculine and feminine gender singular and plural,
^iJOfiJSD*", who is a poet? 'arf^s*' Wo*, who (is) this man?

It is
e. {).

203)

what

shall

do

||

who do not

to people

reflect

tt

will he of the

inroad of Kala swallow and

devour (us) to-morrow or the day after to-morrow? who

preserver?",

say

"destined

life

(there

be our)

(will

and are conceited

for us)",

is

0* $3ft, who
?&&$? wo* 3$O o*, who brought this? ge>o3c
6
wo*? $$f( rfe;^^' ^O who (art) thou? who (is)
thy mother?

and elated?
is

^^

thy husband? ^mjScd)?^ 2jy?s*

ro
^i

wd ^^JS^^, whose daughter

of whom (is) this horse (i.

Wo*",

(art)
e.

thou?

^&?,

^erfo o33e)0o,

0,

(is)

my

is

this)?

(art)

thou?

command?

(=wda
woJJoS* wo*

who (my) mother?

(my) son, who (am) I?

father?

rfori^, f3i;^o oiJeido,

who

Siva's

3^r ^odorlo

whose horse

wo*, who

who (my) grandfather?

who knows

?i^j

O53e)d ^ort^o,

whose son

thou? 'arfdo oirado, who (are) these men (or women)?

(art)

it to

gave

w
you? &,wrfj
IJ

oi3)do ^JS^do,
eJ
Soe)dorf^

this

knife

^rfoO^ w?^,
CJ

is

^erfo

very

-d?

nice,

oiradoij?
7)

who

i^,
G

somebody met the Brahmana and asked "who (art) thou. rir?"
oije)dj aoJSertj
sdo, who made the sun? ?5
,

who goes

<r

there? 53^; oi3?)0 JjS^eJrtc'O SooeJoX^,

i' 1

whose

(in

30*

what

236
people's) gardens do they- (the

that house

(is)

this

e.

(i.

mangoes) grow?

whose house

man? vfc &3ddo

is

that)?

-d?

odJddrfo, of

sjj?5

whom

o&>dj, who

^orfossloNO

(is)

djJ3C3J ;!>$ rt&fttfrt? ^raOo!?? qradorlc&o?

><3ri

eoW$3cS roOo3JS, which of (these) three people (is) thy friend (fo^ddo,
honorific plural)? (is it) woman? (or) land? (or) the beauty of great
riches? ^s; Dh^ fc^rt o&e>do SoJS^rtodtfo, which (what one) will go faster
than all?

were swimming?

w6JS?

gdoqJo*

arfd/3tffl

the instances given above

&O6

pronoun

a note under

In

No.

masculine

&

8,

is

ssrfo

This

terms.

be seen that the interrogative

102

of

it

occasionally

when

occurs

escfo

has

In

Nudigattu

is

that?

has:

is

(who

,c&>Fk,

the

modern

there?)

fteld

sSrs

is

been stated that the

combination with

used in

^ri

a^ar

20^0?

the

dialect

the

precedes

pleonastically

interrogatives essSo and eso* (esdj), e.g. <3ne>^$*

who

my

lover?

means 'who' and occasionally 'which'.

(esbj, odbo>do)

demonstrative pronoun

will

it

which

sjogdora^* wsj&fc,

(are) Siva's attendants? (and) which of these (is)

From

which of these boys

3ojdjrfd> o&sdo oksdo 3s?kvlc5do,

- O
ro

question

now and then heard.

The

A wcrado ria?

Regarding the interrog-atives e5Si, CXJbo>53, C35)5j in the so-called

b;
gamaka compounds some instances have been adduced in $ 253,
271.

'->,

265.

From

those instances

it

appears that their meaning

is

'what', 'what

and 'which' according to circumstances.

The use of wsSo, e553S7*, es^c^o; odbo>53c&, C3o>53oi3, odbsss^j

kind',

crasstfj), odbo)53c^, C3o>53c5o; 6553)5$,

OJbo>5353)

(crasSig))

(odbo>53S^,

has been alluded

267 where instances are given that might be supposed

relative ones.
Here follows a number of various instances:

to in

sJoodNO

^J3^o?

overwhelmed

Wdo

and

Ljtftfo?ft?e3rWt3

disgraced
,

Baka,

S5C3y?3do,

Kaiiisa,

(and)

except thee, Arhat, who

ricSriJ5s?

re^'FTTei^o

who

(is)

00?

killed

to

be

s^o

Mura? who

KOsi? ^^e>CT?^c5s
excellent on earth?

when a Jaina

237
when Arjuna seizes (his) bow, when Indra
thunderbolt, when Krishna seizes (his) discus, when Bhima
what woman
club, who will stand to fight?
>35x)oo3Je)5jS?<

seixes (his)
sci/es

pot-stone pencil,

(his)

seizes (his)

my

"U

from desire? 'ad&tesr*

free

(is)

lover?

what

what

what

what

(is)

the business (you) have

(is)

w^)C3o?

who know
come

his profession?

^U
rfo,

(is)

thy distress?

"if
||

(one)

large and these make themselves to be

Which do suit you?
are) small; even this (is) the difference.

those (pearls are)

considers,
called

(is)

wdo

53

^o^eJo ^f>, what

ysJjrfj

it?

(for)?

the substance of your qualities?

(is)

which of these

ws3?2J3,

^zb dd3 zorad^

w
ro

S^nvsls*
w

the colour of sin (and) virtue?

(is)

srasj

Sjjclrforafs*

(i. e.

them choose with pleasure", (thus) saying (he exhibited) all the nine
which of you goes? ^^dS
>do) otos^fl) 3oJ3fr(j3)
precious gems.
~~^ ^,
<Sco

(or

**)

which of these

^^^.,

c&j>rf<i?j)

?S,

-d?

rfo^o^tf
<O

erected

know which
the

for

o&rarfrfo? w^rioi:* o&ssjdj,

thy) right

hand?

-d?

thy

which of these men?

which

house?

do?Sri^C>

PO

of travellers?
left

thy

(is)

a^^

^JSP^orl^

&

the palace (and) which

(is)

accommodation

CO

of shoes (is) thine?

(is)

OJae)d^J,

fix

rfj^ro^ zodo^cS, which of these books doest thou like?

doest thou even not

building

co

your elder sister?

on which (person) of these didst thou

(thine) eye?

(is)

>?3

<

?^3l3Jc33q$FrW0

(is

Oi3e)^c3o.

which of these pairs

S^JN 03Je)5Jdo

which of these houses

^oosjo

^oJSG5o

^JS^rlv'o

which (are) the

to

the

<oc3rto&'

hand? (and) which

G^

>?!

(is)

three

oiJDSjSj?

principal

branches of created things? the animal branch, the vegetable branch

er\)3 G&&73d tfci
wrf)
(and) the mineral branch.
Osp^rirtv'j,
^
O CD
in North India
what
(are) they?
(there are) six divisions;

wo

,,

(are)

the

chief

rules

instances quoted above

I'm
it

forming
will

the

plural

be seen that

the

of

IIOUIH'.-'

meaning

of

From

tilt-

o3o,

etc.

238
'who', 'what person',

is

About

'which'.

(,

<

which person', and that

the plural of wrfo,

e^o*, etc.,
>

269),

&c& mean

etc.

of e353)<3J,

'what',

270.

etc., see

'what', 'what kind or manner of; 'why',

'how', when they might be taken also as exclamatory words (cf.

262).
doubt (is there)? ^dc5?3 o =5e)dr3o, what (is) the
>o ?j?3 oJoo, what

reason so that (thou) delayest (i.

&3o sjjs&d dJS^sJo 5
o, what

of thy delay),
esd^o, what (is) that?
the fault he has done? gtitt
>o
(is)

e.

what reason

religious austerity (for)

SeJdrao, (your)

manner

ascetics)? e5sj?S^o, what

of woman (is) she?

man

(i.

why are you

what manner

e.

he? essjs^o,
what
(do) the discourses of
a^Otd^eJ^ssJorl^^o,

(be)

(is)

oi^dod^ 53 ^rsr^^i 6^0 ^Aris?*, how (could)

Karna? ^35e>dsiiO&>Je> airfare >S&* S5c3^s

those attendants (mean)?

all

of

liberal persons like

C-3

ojroad>FdQ

sj^slseia.c&fas*, 0,
Icr

how that mass

of bright fog shines on

^o&oArfordp ^-iOftagtlsv* abort's 0, how

the birds crowd on the highest branch
ao^>^) slraJeo, why many words?
'acteS ssqJrsS^rfo, what (is) the meaning of this? w ?A^D^ 3o?d6??i>, what
the name of that town?
^j ^^o dJS^o^e, what doest thou make?
(is)

the western mountain!

>o

$3ft ii^J zS^o, what doest thou want? ysjfii

he ask?
art

what did he

>&> Po^k^J,

frequently used

in

the sense

of 'of what',

^$

e.

word on earth!

of

>sd $ofc!or{f3J3,

snake

what

(is)

(is)

g.

of

>Fl>

eru^rf

what

'of

&3&3

3=r

3$

33

what', 'wherefore', 'why',

do not know why.

e.

^=
O*

>3

^^p

g.

why

is this

this

word

ora

art!

o3re^&3

>^

what kind

Soe)^j,

oi3e>^^

sl>o>?l>,

3oJ3oJo^o* orf,o,
O
\.

wherefore
for

what)

<s,c3o

what

(is)

these

D,

o33)^

is)

means

why

'for

why passion?

why do you beat me?

various

'srfo

of

he?

(high)

ranks?

the staying in this man's fort?

(or speech)?

required? o&s>3

what

he?

(is)

this? 'adrfo oS3e)^S355^J, of what caste (or profession

The dative

(made)?

'of

kind',

sira

what caste

a^GS^^fS^
0, what kind of paramour thou

this pitcher

yd y^

monthly pay?

3
riorso, what quality of devotion (is) that? y^Sf) rfo.rforttfc
o^^o, what greatness (is) the excessive killing of beasts?
what kind of country? >3e3 rfjs^o, what kinti of word?

G5cSo, of

what does

?S,

The genitive of So, &^o (^^S

substance, caste, etc.', 'what kind', 'what',

what kind

^^03^

>ck

his
(is)

find there? wrf^o ^(dri

what answer does he give thee?

is

what

5^^rl ^ort^ri sisJo^sS^o,

bJ

oiJe)^^ z3^o, why

did you

come?

-d?

(or for

239
In

272.

102,

remark

8, b,

possessive pronouns

There are no distinct possessive pronouns

supplied

1,

by the genitive

pronoun and

of

case

of the

the demonstrative

in

have been mentioned.

Kannada, but

personal

their place

pronouns, of the

is

reflexive

pronouns, and 2, by the addition of the

demonstrative pronouns to the genitive case of the mentioned ones.

The

first

class corresponds

my, thy,

adjectives

his,

her,

the

to

English

our, your,

its,

represents the English possessive pronouns

pronominal
one

possessive
their;

the second

mine, thine,

his, hers, its,

ours, yours, theirs.

The possessive pronominal adjectives are formed by the genitives.

1,

^N, *^, 33, 33^

oiSU, oirf^,

3&>, 33^, and a following noun, e.g.

the house of me, i. e. my house;
,

^si^^ocSoS,

the horse of us,

/'.

e.

our horse;
tf,

$3^,

ftsjo,

and a following noun,

$>rf^,

e.g.

3j?3,

tforiod,
d^tfoci>5, your horse;
33, 33^ 3s3o, ^si^ (reflexive) and a following noun,
,

^rfo?2,

^o

thy house;

his house;

3s&

e.

g.

^ocioS, 3rfo ^orfod, their horse;

(demonstrative masculine) and a following noun, e.g.

o?5,

his house;

^odod, their horse;

a^s^,

-d5=aoio,

(demonstrative feminine) and a following noun, e.g.

ht-r

house;

a^C

JC3e3,

^c3S3,

^orf^d, etc., their horse;

y\)C3S3,

sje3,

^^3,

ensrf^, S5^rt^,

and a following noun, e.g. S5d3

strative neuter)

^rftf (demon-

rfo^, etc., its

house;

55S3&3 ^ocSod, etc., their horse.

Remark.
Occasionally a possessive pronoun of the second class (i.e. one of No. 2)
used for the first class, e.g. in the following instance of tin- unou'iit dialect:
dcScz^do
(cf.

No.

3rf^
'2).

(his)

#03 &

fc?d^

e^

-3-?rfortoo,

tho forester thus scrapinl

liis

is

bow

240
The possessive pronouns are formed by the genitives adduced above
under No. i and a following demonstrative pronoun, e. g. oificoo
2,

(<0rl+

esd>),

NfidJ

^^

Sl]lJlHir K

of

me

S5oj^),

^j

3oJO

-4-

(NN.+ y Sj^?*)

(\jfi.ojs?*

mine (referring
instances
(is)

<vfj,ojvo f^^~t~ S53vo), ot

t?

daughter

mine;

(is)

y ^J^D*

ijrl^o,
),

man

&

dj?3o3jf3 do,
rfo

c^c^

^oris?*

ours.

she,

-ds

to

25

a neuter

The following

do^S ?3?ldo,
<$!$

mine

i. e.

this

house

^^o, this son

sjorts^o

r^plois'o,

is

this

t>

^^

< i

t&O&fiAylv*

*^

3f$j$) (reflexive),

these oxen (are) his;

those horses (are) theirs.

that ornament
(is)

a neuter

<$&*$) (r^rl+S5^)),

etc., etc.

s^orl^o

F^'^^S?*,

i?ldD*,

-dso&e)^ s

-ds

these servants (are) mine;

),

this

^f^o^S

^orto

to

oOr3.s

me

mine (referring

i.e.

they,

-d?

-d?

sljrlrSf^ sjo,

Sjjris

^)fl^) (&i^+S3^)),

masculine or feminine plural),

those sons (are) mine;

),

me

of

may show the use:

mine;

mine;

to a

masculine singular),

to a

(referring to a feminine singular);

f^fWjri^o (r^?l+e5^r(^o),

mine (referring

i.e.

it,

o^O

c3r^

mine (referring

i. e.

he,

<0r3

me

of

(F^+^do),

(is)

hers.

F3^cSe3s)

s d&
v

?o,c3e,

a^

^^?3* oidja^o, of these

S*

ne

(i- e

a ^ tnat

men

thine indeed.

The possessive pronouns

his,

appear,

in

<o?|cl>,

the ancient

mine,

rifirio,

dialect, also as

^?^do, thine,

<o^j
or as

when

(he)

said

"Firmness of character

(is)

thine, valour (is) mine, to the king (belongs)

his great

No.

i,

courage"

(cf.

remark),
or

passion

(is)

thine, patience (is)

her conciliatory appearance.

Also
(}$+&, see

oj^

j), his,

mine, to the female companion (belongs)

122), mine,

$&> (^?s+^o),

thine,

^^

are occasional, though undesirable, forms in that dialect,

241
as iu the

modern one

as

The plural

3F&

si>^o

There

is,

of

and

}#&,

>3^->,

e.

and
affix

j^,

jtfd)

33j

c$3j,

is

as

?>

<^i?A S^^ii ^^fe-

oirf^4i

however, the rule in the ancient dialect that

of

,0^00^0

nouns

^sjoo 3j before the appellative

of

number

278,

(see

and before the numerals from two

except, of course, joWFo, etc.)

nine,

as

may appear

take the forms

3rf^J may

o^o,

4,

or

$$&

to

g.

The

rfo^rlv*.
.irfo^ES^ ^0^5*, ^^OJ^3e)^o AOrts?*, ^d^ojjo
vo^j is the intermediate demonstrative pronoun used for

?roc5j

The meaning of the instances is 'we five (persons)', 'we

(cf.
173).
seven (persons)', etc., and 'us eight children', etc.
The same meaning
be expressed by the genitive, e.g.
ois^oioo* (<0^+S5o3o c*) fci|si,
we five came, ^sJo^oio.D* ^Je>>o*, you five went, or by the nominative, e.g,

may

e^o and

Instances with the suffixes

do not seem

ero^o

occur in

to

the mediaeval dialect in which the forms with the genitive and nominative
e.

^s^z^o* (^e^-fa^D "), 3D3^o', 3s>4 doJS^o*, ^^~>&? ^sord^o,

Regarding the declension we find therein e.g.
In
the
modern
dialect we
rt.

prevail,
do.

have

e.

It

g.

may

g.

<3e>)2o do,

-*

>

10

Si

v--,

tJ

v-\

10

.-

be remarked that regarding the appellative nouns of indefinite

quantity e5>soo*, ^200* ( ^78,

find e. g. in the mediaeval dialect

(^^+^5)200*); $aoji&)do,

a similar practice

*)

is
),

&

6. n.

>.(j.

in

oj^racij (lO^rs-j.

H^rtolSJ
of the

&

^ocSodoiisdcio,
tin-

is

this',

'whose ripe fruits

with regard

what, direction

s3cio),

where

to

(is)

it?'

263, remark):
'where (is) itr' may be rendered

which appears also as

(is)

270.)

^ (see

oO^^^ra^sr^Jr)*, rfSFdoio ^3oo,

compass?

Troches oi3>dcio?

ancient dialect e?dd> becomes also

t>^?r ^odo/lo? (See

Remark
'Of what, or
6

we

expressed by adcSo

O33e)d5^rt^o? In

by

observed;

Jirf^c

'Whose', in questions like 'whose horse

are those',

is

the sky?

"

where

^^^^

in

(*J^B5

+ ^)

what direction

(is)

the earth?"

&

g-

3^-^f,

(are) the

(thus)

points

making
31

242
(people) say (i. e. in such a manner that people uttered the above questions)
darkness spread about,
"i^ra is the genitive of &,, a declinable adverb of place

(212,25

123).

XIV,

On

adjectives,

90 adjectives or attributive nouns (gunavacanas) are introIn

273.
duced as declinable bases, and their gender has been stated, in
102,
be vacya or viseshyadhina, in which place it has also been
8, c, to

by means of pronominal

remarked that they are formed from nouns

suffixes (see

In

276).

Kannada and

ancient

other books thirty-three attributive nouns

they are, in their singular neuter forms,

are usually employed;

the

following:

e5>>,
-'

or

or itfJ30j
-*'
or

JOo

;S?.o

or ?loc^) n
to

^r^o
_o'
c

or

eoS5

z^o
J

Wrjrfo,

will

so
rorj,
-' 3)
da

dx

or

or

j3&3o or

w.3o

or

eo

eo

soJ or

so)o-o'

PD

y^odo,

o,

ro

zoOo
M

122), of which

^rl 3o.
eroa^o, wUso, sSoO^o,
co
co

of the first class is

,

that of the second class

is

e.g.

ra

e.

S-e^aioo, ^aai)o,

5J^ 3

appellative nouns of

e.

number

$s?oa3oo,

in

or ^e3orfo, 20rOOJoo, a^crfoo (see

The feminine singular

(see

136);

(see

117);

136 )-

see

class

278,

is

2323rfo,

e.

g.

fco^

sSoScio

^crioo, oi^ojoo, ^SoJoo, ^DoJoo,

^OoJoo, ^s^riao
u

OJoo,

S3rco&rf),

of the first

g.

finals.

Sc3o,
that of the second class

g.

The masculine singular

or

o
TO

be seen, they form two classes according to their

The neuter plural

or

s^cfc,

2S^do (see their declension in

viz.

or

ca

w.j

eJ

four are tadbhavas (8 370),

As

do

z.^j_s'n

or

122);

rfj,

<a

O^j or ^o^j,,

(see their declension in

rtordaJ or

j3DsJ

or

^0,^0
e

to$.o or &$,&.,
en;>3o or eroa&y,
-"
Q o
V
%'

(cf.

the formation of the

and the modern

3o02o),

117).

of the first class

(see

is

e.

g.

120); that of the second class

243

(sec

The epicene plural

of the first class is

119); that of the second class e.g.

(see

e.

g. to^cicr, f3?OCo*,

"aao&o*,

Some

instances regarding- their use in the ancient and

sweet milk.

^Orfo

a severe disease of the uvula,

Aorta's?),

see

s&sdrtv',

(for

354,

s,

I,

&0&)

e3 do ^JStio, a small quantity.

'S.^oJos

^023^ ?oOs3p^, the sweet pleasures of the

3Slal>?ooJor^)

(for

?2?QCo^) zSdej* (for

'a^oJov* ^DCid, a sweet paramour.

straight fingers.
siosjo

^jOcioO, a large

&>0do si4o, great vigour.

big buttocks.

slxj^, a white pearl.

ftScSo

great liberality.

25;r(c,

a ado

round breasts.

6),

black musk.

^^O,

great desire.
flame.

mediaeval dialect

276):

(cf.

tSU^ortj^ (t3!3^o
;3je>e3

^oioo*

119. 134).

SiOoioo', 318*3^0*, wWjrfo*, aSaJjtfo* (see

arc the following

120).

objects of sense (are) like the sweetness of poison.

But though such instances

connected

immediately
mentioned two dialects,

with

doing
53o,

so, viz.

after No.

7.

184. 223),

is

also another

esao,

is

'being'

about the possibility of

wd

the

instead of which (the so-called

also

participles

'who

is',

the

'of

in

more common way of

and esd between them,

e53o

being used

of the

'that

circumstances,

are

occur

'of the

(literally

remark

becoming

tJ/io

176),

having become or being';

for

into

the

tense see

present

English

'which

is',

essi

183,

the past relative participle of

(literally

The translation

adjectives

unfrequently

'becoming', 'being'

186), and tJd

'having become',

169).

there

so-called

are the present relative participles of wrfo

tJ3o

or being',

to

not

nouns,

595}

by putting

which the

in

is,
l

are',

Kannada) adjectives alone

may

according

who

are',

be used in

rendering.
Instances

sound that

in
is

qj

ancient and

the

soft soles of the feet

a, a melodious tone.

supremacy.
daughter.

mediaeval

dialect

are:

s3e3.3zi

qJ

\9

harsh or a harsh sound.

ooOcrfjrfsJ
oj

wOdosJ
M

^d>^

>^

9
.

sJsij,

and very rough hands,

a young cow.

large fishes.

3oOdsJ

os?o3jtf

C^zdo"", powerful demons.

oJ

3o30, a young

o^^3o b^,o
V

3&\, great
a precious
31*

244
^$.330 sd^o, a good cow.
V

pearl.

an excellent

^sOg^cS

gift.

and sharp point

of corn.

a sharp smell.

rlfd o,

*7

extreme astonishment.

?j^js?jo

in which

extensive.

compounds are

great desire,

6)

the small
qjDF^od 3oS,

e5 3o

s^.

>orf5o

oaOcisd

3o5;^)

various verses

3jc3rt<j,

be remarked that also words which do not belong to the

above-mentioned thirty-three so-called adjectives (as Samskrita adjectives,
It

to

is

made such

be

may

etc.),

Kaunada by

in

the addition of

6.
'

}J

oo

1)

ssj

wrf,

530,

oO

to

Instead of 53i, ya6 and wrf also eA, 'having become', together with
a

form

of

is

'ao*, to be,

that

is

brown;
,

wL

she

stout

of

capital

and

Also

e.

g.

FS^o^^j^hcSordj
that

s3??rrsr>3;FCJo,

who

a long desolate road.

brated

the

used,

is

is

(*.

e.

jd^o^sjoo^

3dtf

excellent;

shrewd and clever;

jscS33ft36

A3o o^taqx^^o^wo, the celerfUdjsA ^o^orfjsA 'ac3e)^^o, he who is

Sss^tt

Kuntala.

fine.

erutf.,

'being', 'possessing' (literally 'of the being', etc.,

relative

present

participle

of

yx>^

180, remark

after

which has been mentioned as one of the taddhita suffixes

No.

may be

20),

nouns are formed by means

of

it,

well

accusative
being'

studying,

with

supplied

sses^'r'o*, wise

men

(see

see ibid.).

175,
i. e.

3),

The

which

in

man who has riches

g. qStfs&otf.o,
man; rtoradjo^o, a man endowed
a

man

186),

No.

6),

243, B,

introduced here again, as similar adjectives or attributive

e.

wh

cxjooo

it

or a rich

with

signifies

'who

has', etc.,

a studying
Lrfj^o,

man;

good qualities;
a

charming woman;
ZoJSwrta'^s?*,
in
combination
with the
i; eni^
contrary may be expressed by *ae>c5, 'not
grain;

316 under

'not having',

a not-studying

e.

g.

ia^do,

man

in

whom

a stupid
man; 22)^^jsjdo,
co

is

no

316 under

i).

there

man;

fSp

a crook-armed man; di36o3oe;c3

ro
CSorfo,

eaotfo

22o7Te>3o, worthless gold.

*

that which has no terminations (see

s^o^^^rf
n

do^odoo

*5^,e5

^<3

^4&

'acl)

sJwderfo.

ro
O
tf
t
though there be a village in which there are no tenants, a house in
which there are no children, one's own people who have no love, what
-rf-

(is

their)

worth?

(see

275).

245
the mediaeval dialect

in

Prominently

participle of -so*

184),

used like

is

'being', present

*aao,

when

A>V>

nouns which

the original forms of the thirty-three attributive

adduced presently,
stones;

&&
It

y. dJSftao <o^,, a large

e.

ox; cSjsa

one of
will be

tf^jrttfo large

3o

good speech; ^j3PD3o =8^3*, swelling udders; zoliao

rfoa.

2oS?,3o

rol

suffixed to

it is

'-

round leprosy.
remains to be stated that the above-mentioned thirty-three adjectives

or attributive nouns possess what

we may

call original forms.

eroa^o),

2uV*

Those of

the first class are

A)d (for

(for yriO^o),

102,

cf.

jls?.^)),

JjSi^d

(for Jj?)0^j),

(for z3j3&^j), j3op* (for foorS^o), ?2?o* (for

)?* (for t^r^^o),

&^o),

(for

(for ?or$^j).

(2^^

is

form did no longer

)&3o

2s?;^j),

for

^JSD* (for ^jao^o), (rtarso

9),

Jv* (for

(for

riorS^o), ^f5* (for

dfcj

^six (for

(for

wkj. (for

^O^o),

(for iS^^o), does* (for

also ancient, though

would seem, as

it

if its

longer

exist.)

Those of the second class are

S5^o
<otf
Eci \

(for <o^di),
of
f*
v/LL/.

^t^

oJo

JJrO

5A)C3o), Qftf,

(for

/TOT*
( i\JL

^f^fj Cjvj

(for COrOClj), ^1^,

^\ o

23^

(f

^D*

\T^ \
rJCoO

*\ ft

^ \

j&jO.,

ff

^c^j (for ^arfj),

^^o,
Q O-O.Q y^

<.$ (for ^)Ck), adj (Qttf, for

fJ^

(for ^Oc3o),

/ Tr4T
I

Ifl

*\ ^^ T^

rOCaC-JO

\
I

-r^ &

&j\jj

/tV^I*
I IvJl

)$rfj).

We

have already met with these original forms in karmadharaya

247, d, 5 seg., where they are regarded as substitutes
compounds, in

by native grammarians.

244 (doo*,
^03*).

Cf. also

Regarding 55^0, &, 5^0, ^i^ there is the ancient rule

that where they form so-called consecutive compounds
they insert

ojj, viz.

ft^crio^s^F,

to

wAooioNd-),

which

>ao3j$e>t>rt, obOo5orforio(o.

Kesava adds also

no

3J2oc3o (but
apparently
sj^j).
253 that this oJo is o&*4-S5, i.

It
e.

253,

2, c)

r.

though there
CO
remarked already

is

sjrocdosors o,

has been

the genitive.

in

Instead of y^ooijpi^o

the Jaimiui Bharata and the modern dialect have yAo^cl); the Jaimini
])harata has also esAjsSder for 55A}OJo z33ej*.
The same Bharata uses
'
1

for

the

)&0oj ^oCo^r*,

modern

and

jrjcSj?)ojo* for 3JAjodo

dialect uses 3ui3Sjort.

and

1'or

For 5jO

^vJ)^o*.

t^tfcrfo'S'diF

it

has

;l

246
or

tw

would be regular
3$^o*';

karmadharaya compounds

cf. 'CTOOC^ in

the ancient

like

the Nacirajia.

tiQ (both mediaeval and modern) and aot^S (ancient?, mediaeval

and modern) often follow the ancient rule regarding e$2o, etc., that is to
<>}$,

say suffix the

&

means

of the genitive by

of a euphonic

o&

130,

b, c),

e.
2o#0co (or
#. t^cdo (or o^e) &ao&e>F2, a young she-elephant;
&&?)
3
a
the
old
ade^ctfo
good business;
garment of a
Sr^Zo,
(or so&S ?) A.^6,

female.
274.

If

nouns or pronouns with

attributive nouns do not precede the

which they are connected, but follow them, they appear e.g. as follows:
the poetry became good. PJSJ^ ao$,cSo, he (is a) good
tfu^sfo* fcftseXrij^,
ysj<s*

(man).

a^dv',

she

a)

(is

good

e3s3o* toQcoo*,

(the pearls are) large.

54

(woman).

&0o3os3),

they

they (are) able (persons).

observed that in such a case the attributive noun agrees

in gender with the nominative to which it is added.
It

will be

Samskrita adjectives are

used similarly,

Grammars and other books

adjectives or attributive nouns,

e.

^20 o

g.

tJ

O
f>

^Q

o,'

tirfo^o,

275.

e.

g.

of the

modern

dialect adduce various

esowowjdo^, vucS,

<o^.<3,

*}$,

&,,

^3o,

etc.

(Nudigattu p. 58; Anglo-Kanarese Translation Series I, pp. 39/41. 42:

etc.), of which several are known to be ordinary nouns (cf.
277).
Their use may be learned from the following instances (cf.
316, 2):
^o)
rid.

rtoa,

bunch.

large

=^c

ra

eruado.

eS^sl. sl^osj

sSjae&S

3.

^^JJ Acra^o. c3^

rfort.

eo

dorio.

to^ oi&i.

a*

t3)0.

?^ra

F*i6ri^o.

(The instances are taken from

ados^o

South-Mahratta school-books

that were composed by natives.)

that
,

is

necessary,

ey

do^ssle^

oi^,d

247
Wtfo 'ad

ws3.

00419

aorwrttfo 3Sx> 'add).

o si.

ra

C9

oi^rt

eS^ostodtfo.
^

C6

yd.
nre? aora^a
?jrs^)

a6ro^

aoo^

wra 43

w^)^^) ^dej

'S.dj^sS.

(cloudless)

t>
CO

Csi

^oA?^ <^^rr)o2J3^r\fi Ji^do

dr3do.
r

(see

355,

s).

(Instances from

3o0^oijc3

wd.

ao^do

3oJ3rt^o

S.-Mhr.

^J3?fe3

aoodowdo^o

school-books.

sID 'ado

zosotf

It

'adosjdo.
is

to

be

remarked that there are instances among them in which other authors
would perhaps prefer to use wft and a form of ^do, instead of <aoj
alone, after the attributive nouns,

e.

g.

dCjj3>ftt3; see further

wgn^s^

on in this paragraph, and cf. the forms with ^20 suffixed to the original
forms of attributive nouns in
In the mediaeval Basavapurfma
273.
there occurs once zo^^OdrsS^), 29, 28.)

broad walls,

,.
a-

aOrt^o.

De)rfo^o.

36^3 d
tv

3ar35^.

(Instances

from

S.-Mlir.

books.)

false

friend,

d^^tf,
sS.

r^3o?5rij.

^jaoioo^.
%*
9

school-

248
treeless deserts.

zjo>5L>d
ro

co

co

(Instances from the same.)

d?3e>odorf.

Instead of esd also &f\^

participle of

ddJ),

dodrftfo.

to be, is used, e.g. W3atf

<s,do,

r^osftdodddo,
a Mysore book.)

the

to

(for

w^tfna

remark made above

some authors would perhaps prefer

^s3o

(Instances from the same and from

illustrious persons.

With reference

e^^sftdoddo

^dcssssAdod ^o/rsd, ornamental gold.

excessive.

(it is)

together with a relative

'having become',

to use

yA

in this

and a form

paragraph that
of

^do, instead

of -sdj alone, after attributive nouns, the following instances, taken from

may be

S.-Mhr. school-books,
ero&?

given:

ro

9
CS

a^)

Occasionally
e.

<&

e.

(i.

e^+^ao,

g.

(beautiful)
?^jNds3e)d^
S.-Mhr. school-book.)

Frequently this

&$

appears as

$v

sl>3
-

rf,
<-

school-books.)

223. 224)

(cf.

?A)S)OWJ,

3tf.fi ^rtdo.
V
.

QeJ.?4

e.

g.

and

55^ without

g. erodfl

rfs5,fi

S5t5

sS,

z3tf,?
,

(Instances from S.-Mhr.

O^

5^,

e.

2osS,

^osieOJ: or sn;c3^ ^JSctoo, etc.

O

3^ occurs also as

and

t?rf

(Instance from a

formation of so-called adjectives,

in the
rf

is suffixed to

tc^Sjrt^o.

i^sjsj^

Cp

longhair, ^ra

223)

{5

and

20^3,,

t>?3,

e.

^.

a
Lastly also forms with
called

adjectives,

black.

3oort^

e.

g.

yri

212, remark

^^rttfo

3t3f\

sia

^JSd^o ^&3rtd.

h^rttfo

w^o ^ds)A

53^

2)

have been used as

'adj^sS,

mineral

coals

so-

are

crfoo

fi

ir

^do^Q ^.

(Instances from

S.-Mhr. school-books.)

Also

so-called

modern grammars,

relative
e.

participles

g. 3oJ3s?ol>J53

have been

^^rl^j,
^
sA

called

adjectives

bright stars, ^ej

in

249
bad servants (Anglo-Kanarese Translation Series, Book

and even plain

genitives, us A;IJ, &>3\rj,

To express

may

be used, e.g.

very great;
dJ3^,
Cd
ing 'very' see
e.

'very',

before an

'very'
833

20360

c3si

^od,
Q

?dre,

adjective,

(Nudigattu,

Z3)F3,

very clever;

is

do^o^^

^^d

<3,

10260

W3ctf

employed
35=>tf

used for

is

also to express

^rco^sS, monkeys

343. 348,

7.

349,

8.

273 we find that the

so-called adjectives

the ancient and mediaeval dialect consist of original forms

(as
etc.,

and

toootf

zj^o,

p. 58).

About another way of render-

very clean.

very small, which 3?d

Looking back at

83 A),

pp. 39. 40),

men.

like

On comparison see
276.

eo^j

very thick;

'quite', 'wholly', e.g. sjjortritfo 3eoe>

appear quite

833,

I,

In the case of inferiority also

305, a.

g. o^tf

SosS^oSo

etc.)

combined with certain

suffixes.

What

eo<^.

in

3J3O*,

are these?

d> of the neuter singular introThey are the pronominal forms &>, 3b
in S 122, so that e. a. ^$.^0 or Zu&^o would be the original form
V
V "^
or
a
the
^
aoV*+'a+^o
being
euphonic addition (cf.
168), and the
^j^
is
not
form
To
assume
that
the
<&.
primitive
euphonic, and
being a^tfc
,

duced

are the suffixes added to ^v*, seems to be excluded

'S.s^ (for ^cjo_)
on account of the absence of analogy, as ss^j,
would have been the
83^,
and the masculine
proper suffixes, and the neuter plural

^o,

Lo^dj^

singular ^^rfo would raise insuperable difficulties.

in
suffix

is

immediately

In the masculine

and

no euphonic

letter,

joined to the original

forms

$3?o&>, 'SX^rfj, etc. there is

d)

cs*

form

z^do

we

are euphonic (about the euphonic

further on in the present
cf.
2^rfo^)
is

'a^, etc.

believe, Sotfo) the

n* see
119, a, $Jj 132. l-'J-l.

(originally,

136, and
therefore,

but the pronominal

83 A),

E^ + 'a+c^ + eSo

the

paragraph);

yo

meaning

to^cSo,
'he' (see

(or 83)
(or 53),
is t*v*
115. 177. 193, under remarks).
The feminine form
Eu^rfv
in i
C3*-f 83V'*, the 85V* meaning 'she' (see e.g.
177).
(830 Co

might be explained similarly as 83

nation seems to recommend itself.)
In the masculines

dropped, and

85o

to the original
etc.

CO

+ ^+c3* + 85o, but

the

eJc,

are 83AiOoOt5v

^^,
etc.

etc. (see

given cxpia-

the neuter suffix Co has beeu

83A)OJJo, 'a^oijo, etc.

has been joined, by means of the genitivr

forms

+ 'a

jj

1K>).

130),

The feminine forms

85 Aj

250
The neuter plural
of
e.

e.

g. of e5^odo is e3roo3o;J,

i. e.

is e. g.

is

a^do*,

i.

136, a); the neuter plural

and

eros^)

ss?o)

the S5o

see ibid-)'

209. 210).

ys^) in

an(i

^odotf,

meaning 'they'

(see e.g.

mentioned so-called adjectives

suffixes of the

the ancient and partly in the mediaeval dialect are ^o,

^_J C ,

in

do, e5o,

+ e34

ao^+'Si+^+^o*

e.

+ e3&*,

anc* tnis consists

a^do;^,

of
(the genitive

vos^) (cf.

'S.^ol) (the genitive of '3i)

Thus the pronominal

&,.^

n*+sro^j (see

ej^oojo

having taken the place of

The epicene plural

e,

&,$,& or

^+ euphonic

20^ + euphonic

S5SJ)

of

g.

In the modern dialect the suffixes are partly the pronouns ydo,
(or sss^rttfo),

djs^d)
a>^

zSjarirftfo,
a>

2^=^,

do

etc.

The

g.

dJSddo (dJ3d + s3do),

dJS

djs^sjdj: rirado Vf^ra+^do),

a
ra
TO
'

4),

etc.;

the pronouns being added to the

273); partly the pronominal forms do, es^o

(=S5^), wdo (=S5c),

estfo

277.

124,

(see

short original forms (see

(=o),

e.

d^dj/^j),
^
<a

for
V

(2^^+S5do),

ssddo,

e.

$r.

-S-ef)

^e^oio^o,

do,

nouns

so-called adjectives or attributive

-&&39 oJo^o,

Kannada are

in

partly ordinary nouns and partly pronominal nouns.

The
*3r(>;

are represented by their short original forms

first

At

3ro.

least

273 are declined,

some of the forms

of the first class

273),

instance

g.

e39 odo,

e5A)OJo,

g.

mentioned in

yrlw^, esrtad, ssrl^d;

erucS^,, srodd,
co'
Q
Q &
ijs^dd, Jj3^ddJSs^; rS^rlFS?*; and some of the second class
e.

e.

ewddO:
Q ro

too,

for

3odo, iD^odo.

The pronominal nouns are represented by the forms composed of the

and the suffixes ^o, alo^, etc. They are used also

short original forms

from the following instances:

just like ordinary nouns, as will be seen

bdo3dr3o^

he who brings
(^CO'cSC^JS^, i. e. in a few words,
,

short

to

make
a

right.

man who

^wtt

9
loOdoddFcrt^) o&3 3^
about to make known great things even

(for

is)

z%.3o doDCO
utters

in

wiser than that man.

5Jo,

man who

pleasantness

(i.

e.

causes welfare.

pleasing words).

d^o good (and) bad.

>Do3oo, a Brahmana.
eminent persons who have (or wear) the jate. SoOoJoQri
&e3 9 do &0do
rising (from a sitting posture) before elders.
to make a small thing an extensive one.
e
a>0oos>
(

paramour

indeed a

(is)

man

sweeter than jaggory.

^f\

zo)c3o*

art

can rustics become persons of (greater) ability than IV

*,

Such compounds as totfo^;&,

s?i^fo

247, d, n),

a goodness-food
(ibid. 8) are, therefore, to be translated literally:
a
a
sweet
a
sweetness-meal
a
good food),
(i.e.
meal),
(i.
largeness-bunch
(i.e. a large bunch), the sweetness-sea (i.e. the sweet or milk sea);
and such as zSlUortoS, &OcTO?3, &3?0cfcs3) fc^rfo ( 273), a severitye.

it-disease

(2.

u
a severe disease) of the eyes, a greatness-it-desire

e.

a great

big buttocks).
desire), bigness-they-buttocks
instances bear the character of karniadharaya compounds,
the

three dialects:

the

of

compounds

e.

these

as do also

c3jscs)?3 '

2$3,2J3Pz3rt,

(i.

All

(i. e.

Zorsrretf
ro

ca

a littleness-wonder, a greatness-elephant, a smallness-fishing hook.

In
275 it has been remarked that modern Kannada grammars and
other books adduce and

use several ordinary nouns as adjectives, e.g.

o^d, ^&, &dca, $^od,

ssofciozjodo^, timid,

a so-called adjective

Occasionally

an adverb, e.g.

OJ

^oodj^,

A)?,

360230

fcy

form

neutral

its

burn greatly;

to

>Oc3oO,

in

3s3oj

e>

3oOdo

used as

is

to be greatly

zfo,

disturbed in thought.

XV,

On numerals,

Numerals are declinable

278.

and comprise also appellative

bases,

nouns of number and words that express indefinite quantity

Their declension
indicated in

102,

122. 131

given in

is
,

354,

(cf.

and their figures appear

#,

The not compounded cardinal numbers up

1,

2,
7,

rfoJSCflo 3,
ojcso.

ira wo, 4, *3o3oo

(yoSod),
al so

s^ (2%,

8,

also

mediaeval)

1, &),

their

90).

gender

is

44.

in

ten

to

are:

mediaeval)
10.

e^o

5,

0^%,

9,

1,

3o

6,

is

compounded cardinal number, consisting of ^^" (another form of ^pjo)

and si^ or ad^ (see further on in the present paragraph).
with a preceding
5jc3* or

3053*,

30^

or

So^

55Q or a6Q,

Thus we get
,

;)

The numberu

Ci

215,

(c/.

also mediaeval) 12,

in

dialect alono,

10, this

parent
if

lu\-i>

jj^

SjQ^* or 3oSc^

3J&f?\?fc
v.

modern

numbers are compounded

or
takes the forms

nineteen, the mentioned cardinal

When, up to

is

d;

248

>

3of3jB.rfo,
C

10

)>

as occur,

not added,

except before

also mediaeval) 11,

nasJoJS^o (Soa^oJseSo)

an such

'also mediaeval'

7,

aosfo^

13,

ria^

the
partly as additional forms, in

252
sja^ojoo (soa^crfoj, also mediseval) 15,

14,

also mediseval) 16,

soacfcw,, also mediaeval)

From twenty up
or

compounds
248,

to

^sjrjjs
-* ?k

20,

27,

-aso

^sJFeSo

25,

.,

ft

gj

also

oJ

's.sj

Jj?

6J/

a3i.^

s3^^,

-'

up to ninety-nine the compounds have as their first members

248, 3), stoJ (cf. 248, 3, other forms of ^jjse3o), &?>& ( 248, 4),
thirty

forms of

oi5*

of
<ora:>.),

forms of

(other

and

(see

215,

^jas^J*
is

sj^

30,
(dojrfsl^)
o3

<>5>9

36^,

^e)t^%
o^*

(i^^,)

>

9,

<0ra*

248,

forms of
(

esofo (other forms of

5),

248,

t3*

w&3o),
8),

^^^A

(^^^i,*

oioi5* (other

oo

^Jo'

40

forms

a ^ so

ijs^j, Jjs rfj ^j

60,

edrs^)

mediaeval) 80,

^C^s^,

0^%

gjssjot^ 90, to which

same way as

to

31,

3>\&>
^_B^_oVcijsdo.^
O>^9tO
v

sjjjs^j

^crfj^,
(esoaod^,, also mediaeval^
o^

>

mediaeval,

doJSd^^cfo
^ o

e. q.

7),

about which see further on); their

the cardinal numbers from one to nine are added in the

f

248,

joined according to the rules of euphony

(c^ewrf'^i,)

S5e5j^% (^^3^%, a l so
70

(other

iiSJo),

248,

or

The forms produced are the following:

a. &).

7,

wodb*

$e>e;o,),

24.8, e), esss,

member

39,

26,

29.

second

50,

'asJr^Srfj
*

t>0

South-Mahratta

5-^^^^A%,;

S30JOJ), es!5o
,

^SJF^

21,

atf ^,djJ8C5o,
>
^scl^J^o, occasionally

"aroSoo

-asJFc&o

(other

oi!^

member

OJ

first

Thus:

their

'asjr

From

as

f'a^Jjs^o)
- Q'
^

CO

asJFSf^rfoJaedo
23,

have

a)

which are other forms of ^dz^o.

<

22,

2,

19.

compounds (a kind of gamaka

the

253,

tatpurushas,

also mediaeval)
30,
-*
'

24,

sJl^sS^a^ (^Jjs^o^)

twenty-nine

or 'as*,

2)

18,

sja^-gtSo (5o>

also mediaeval) 17,

sJa^eW- (^a^?i3o,

,
'

e^sjssii^
ijs^j,^
"J c

the

being the genitive, see further on under ?$j?C3j) 99.

100
the

is

^J3C5o,

which the other cardinal numbers are suffixed in

to

manner indicated above,

e.

g.

^JSe^JS^o

101, ^J5CS 3 d^o 102,

150; but this manner has been generally given

up in the modern dialect, wherein ^JSC5J becomes fl&3^) (the short

sj^

110,

fjjsesorfo

genitive of rfJSCSo,
101,

tfjat3*e>

120, a,

^D^O,
rf-

104,

6,

instead of

fiJSS^S

fteCSSS+a),

3o?l%^0
t o

111,

e.

<tetZ<rd

^0
KZ>-)"

120,

253
134, FlOCS^e) S3O}j

&

..

150,

.5ix&
|J8SkXed
O-o
O -o

or &J8G533

*~

oJ

190.

preceded by not compounded numbers, these numbers

The other forms are
greatest part appear in another form.

If ^JSSOo is

for

the

248,

248,4),

(for

(for

2),

TJ^

<3o>

(for ,}ack),

g.

Zorfo^s^),

^>,

also

900,

jJ#3j),

(for

248,5), os&> (248,

fcsto odb<

7),

mediaeval)

400, eoijjspo 500,

also

248,

&>$<

3),

248,

9),

e),

ZoSS^oSj

^J3e3o, one 100, oiOCJ^eao (-a^^&3o) 200,

^^o

(rfjo^J^CSo,

248,

esodb* (for ^crfjo,

(for traew,),

eOo), b$3< (for

e.

5>J3

300,

?5e5j^jse5o

GOO,

(erfjareao)

mediaeval) 700, ^rao^^jse^o 800,

sj^^jsefij 10,00.

Observe also

e.

g.

248, ^oo^J^&3 (for ^oo^J^&S^e), Basavapurana) y^firf^ 360,

estarfa^ 56

The Kannada language has no own special word for 1,000; the ancient
dialect uses prorod and zroOSod, the mediaeval one 753^3 and ?j3>d, and
the modern one

from

Sariiskrita

?^Od,
?J3d?o

?jD^C3

and

When

^-s

numbers (mostly) change

these

'ao* (for

(for &,&>), oi8C#,

(for t3e>ew,),

ssoi^

(for ^J5&3o,

248, n).

a^rAjb

2000, Soo^^Aid
4,000,

6,000,

(c/.

wo&ed

i^O^^d

their

form

^ddo),

(for

numbers precede

the ancient dialect,

in

^oo (for rfjj&&3o, see

e^^^),

tw^rarAid

215,

7, c),

215,

7,

c;

it,

viz.

248,

3),

^i3* (for
(wCS*, only mediaeval),

3JoSo^ (for

Thus we have, together with

modern forms, the following:

one 1000,

not compounded

(for woJoo),

to^o^

(for ^>ra^),

All these terms are corrupted

^Sdo.

(see

odO)rod

J,he

215,7,

^5*

SJ^OB)'

(mediaeval and)

c),

(&?&

?3e)Od)

also mediaeval)
(<^d^o?jaiC)d,

sSjJSCSosraOd) 3,000,

^ejs^j

(yodoo^-s^d 5,000, (tJTrorSd, mediaeval,

(>tfo7ra3d) 7,000,

oiRAod

215,7,

c;

oireoatf)

8,000,

Od, also mediaeval) 9,000,

10,000,

(JjS^^^Dd,

also mediaeval) 90,000,

Some

riJSeSo^raSd) 100,000.
the use of the genitive of

tfJS^F^d

215,

7,

c;

instances of the modern dialect regarding

75Dd

will

prove useful:

ao?Sj?.^ 1,111;
1,001; 20^0Q ?ro^Jdc5 to^o^JSii^
< O
C3
'S.wo,

3,234;

^-3^!.^^ JWOdol-WOJAe3l t5e>i^cso

*

42,548.

254

&!^owtf d
e.

-,

g.

S50JJJ

(3e>&w,wtf,c3
TJ

XJ

sjooo
^sjooo

&s3o

tj

TT

Kannada by Samskrita w&

?ro3dera skJSsJs^SSo 7,05,036, or by its tadbhava

very frequently expressed in

is

100,000
.

before

vowel gets

,,

-dsdoJoa

10,

e.

Ld>?k,
U

g.

-SSD^J

each,

12,

53JJ9C3J before a vowel becomes

16;
6,

JSCfr are

vowel lengthened,

its

each man, as does 'ao*, e.g.

4,96,000 songs;

for

-dsdrso

3J ;!je>3rfc3z3s;33)ortorV, 4,90,000 immoveable sivalingas.

and

Aborts?

G3o?3e>>tf
s3o^s3 &>>o.3;?>
W ~

As shown above, the short forms

14,

sjooo3o<,^* 21

248,

(see

i.

2.

Such compounds do

3).

not occur in the modern dialect.

means

9, literally

ten.

Regarding

2J

'one-ten',

ancient

Jj3s3o 3.x

^.

e.

one to ten or one before

state that

grammars

is

Jjsrfj*

(Sabdmanidarpana sutra 190; Sabdanusasana

siitras 90. 361; Nagavarma sutra 166, formed in order to distinguish 90
from 9; see
248, 9); according to them Jjsjij* probably signifies 'the
substitute (adesa) of ttzStf

and Jjs^o 3o
'the ninth
-*

But one may think that

is another form of 3o& or
^o^ ( 253, 3, which appears also as
would signify
meaning 'point 'upper', 'first', 'prior', so that Ijgsjo

ninth',

ten'.

ij

upper ten', or 'the ten that is foregoing' (one hundred).

The compounded numbers from 11 to 19, having si^ (ao^) at their

'the

beginning, might be called dvandva compounds ( 250), as they are

formed by means of addition, requiring an 'and' between; but Kesava
terms them dvigu compounds ( 248, 10). In those from 20 to 100,000 the
first member of the compounds denotes that the second member is to be

added
too

is

to itself as

many times

a sort of addition

which

as
in

it

(the first

Kesava classes the numerals from 20

compounds.
The mentioned multiplication
o
oJ3i s dc^
(=3sdo3jy) 10,
,

This

indicates.

to 100,000

is

used likewise

6,

yoJjddo

10,

e.

also with the dvigu

g. in

io^%

^Ccid^j

4,

f&vj, 36

otf

(see

above); odc^oJoo, however, in an additional way, means also

and
Further when the meaning of 'or'
sso&eOo 11 (5 + 6),
5)
etc.

7 (2

member)

course of time was called multiplication.

is

tJ^f 3

8,

ojdw^J^CflJ denotes also 2 or 3,

<odcsd>o

2 or 5,

^^

Besides,

compounds like
'one and one'

expressed,

4 or

^0 O

or

10 or

;j| rso

7;

8.

Co

ao,,
_B

'two and two',

each one,

'three and three',

306 a;

etc. (

a number

If

added

is

303,

cf.

to

mean

and ten'

'ten

also

in a distributive sense:

8).

may be done by means

it

f&3j,

of the

would appear from Kesava's instance

?ta>33
3^ (HO) that forms the compound jlfcOosJaj ($244), a
gamakasamasa ( 253, 2, a); instead of this full form of the genitive its
genitive in the ancient dialect too, as

abbreviated form ^J3M 3

^JSS5 +

e.

>

(i-

The genitive

above under ^J33j.

tJ)

came

we have seen

into use, as

?je)>dc$ or

j^Ddcra

of

^Sd

is

That the genitive may be used

3^ (ao^oj follows from the instances

similarly used; see above under ?jgid.

also

when a number
modern

of the

29,

is

added to

<&3
oi-5

dialect quoted above:

isfidaXedSjasJiak,,

^do

ij?)
x

^O ^O
N

99.

That cardinal numbers were optionally used

plural

131)

the

in

ancient

or
^rk^j
o
#

instances:

dialect

the singular and

in

appears

from

the

following

cardinal

numbers

<^ddo5jj or
o

2<&o ?5e)^riv*
x

-6

or oJs^f&s&Sorl*?*.

In

connection

nouns of any

with

remain unchanged, e.g.

?je>o5jd

gender

the

zraoSjd 33c3o*,

rtr3D%

jsjsofod

9
(cf.

102,

s ,.

7).

Concerning the occasional place of cardinal numbers observe

for one day, (daily, cf.
303, i, a, foot-note),
w

e.

g.

(J

in one day,

sjdj3^ c&S9>), a

The modes

of

hundred years.

expressing 'times' in the multiplication-table

The first mode, used in

nowadays are two.
the
in
the" nominative and the
done
by putting
multiplicand
Mysore,
multiplier in the locative formed from the short genitive (without the
3l^,
CO

rfohrl^ ^JS?3S[^)
'
f\
ftj

is

augment

wW)

by means of y^>J (see e.g.

109, a,

2X1=
2X2=
2X4=

iddj,

330$,

>,

2
4
8

6X7 = 42.

7),

for instance:

256
The second mode, used

&

done by giving a

in South-Mahratta, is

final

the form of the short genitive instead of 53^3) to the multiplicand

putting the multiplier in the locative formed by ys3 or & I. e.

e.
(i.

and

S5^>o+<o, 00 +

<o,

form of

exceptionally in its fuller

i. e.

55&3s3,

$$

For instance:

10

7J

It

is

to

be remarked that in South-Mahratta also

such forms

as

are used.

The ordinal numbers

2,

are formed by suffixing

numbers in the three dialects,

g.

&o?3;3o3o,

In the modern dialect

^jsctoFScrfj,

frequently used instead of ^?3C5 fSoio.

In the ancient dialect

e.g.

134),

115),

es$

v&

he', 'she',

second,

13G),

the

second

noun ^

e.^r.

lorf ?Soijo,

first

persons,

'they', expressed

ydo

(e.

the

g.
first

122), oo<

by suffixing
177),

(e..?.

man, .oc^^oioo, the

woman, oOCc^OJo^ the second woman,

Si^^ajo^; 2oF3^0Jodo, the

,

of the

Instances are:

'it',

177),

(e. ff.

second man; ^^fSodo ^, the

women,

^d^ofo,

SJ^F

SoJj

first,

third,

..
is

e.

e>^cx> to the cardinal

first thing, etc.,

sS^crfoo*;

oirf^?So2o^ o*,

<odta^OJoc5j

the

second

3oJSe3f2o3oS?tf, si^^odj^D*; &ON ?2oio4, the first things, etc.

257
modern dialect the pronouns

In the (mediaeval and)

S55J3J,

the third

The modern
130,

c,

arc used as suffixes, e.g.

53SJ)

man;

dialect
e.

genitive),

changes the

often

suffix

into

eSFjOJj

g.

Examining the meaning of e5F2o& we come to the conclusion that the

original form was 3?j i.e. &3 (of esrta
176) and the formative taddhita
?

syllable

.<>}

243, A,

or being', to which

'a state of having

meaning

the sign of the genitive

3,

The declension,

3,

o>3o which

originally

2),

was

130),

suffixed.

in the singular, of the nouns

are

express indefinite quantity or

drao

z.

w
See the

<*J

(to

become

which ai^d) also belongs, see

122.

90. 266), appears in

epicene plural of the appellative nouns of indefinite quantity derived

from them, under No.

S5)^o,

much

The

much

mediaeval

the

in

dialect;

so

substitutional forms

one

S5oJoo,

occur in the ancient and

in

J?5o;

^nlo,

esojoo,

erii'Srio,

instances are:

much

^>^

?5^J

belonging

i5e>oo,

land; ^3^0 3oJ5^o

so

much time
o^3^o.
SO

&J
,

e.

e.

g.

modern one

The Sabdauu-

'SvSlo^

w>3^o

i3^o

^^^o

how many

numbers

a-

man

of that or

how

s&3o,

many

houses.

(see No.

"a^^fSoJo, ^^^f5ooJ, S53i?3oij,

u
same pronominal forms and pronouns

Some

ancient dialect.

as this; esssU ^aoorls?*, so

^o^rftfo,

like the cardinal

S5^^?2crfoo,

In the
>fc3o.

as that;

g. e5>gf3ak,

any noun) the

plural,

much time

so

are also fre-

-s?fo;

the

122,

>?!)

eJ

terms as those; oj&j ^o?2 or

etc.,

to

are often

So

fiJ

the modern one

as

oi^o,

^3Slo,

e53S[j.,

sutras 238. 441) S5^j,

its

much, so

an intermediate

(in

quently used in the two last mentioned dialects.

there are likewise yeJ, S5eJo, eseJo tJ^Jo; ^AJ, -dskta;

sasana introduces (under

this

>

as this

generally done

is

3 ^)^,

(srads*),

how much (&o3o3*)

<o>3o,

substituted for them, as

b, c).

as that

(^ojos*), SAJ^^O,

^^ds*),

mediaeval

much

that much, so

as this

sense,

4.

and

'->),

also suffix

to this (besides

in the singular

such a place, or

and

state,

or

degree; a>3?2o3oo, a man of this or such a place, or state, or degree;

vu)3?2cdoo, a man of this intermediate place, etc.; }>^a3jo, a man of
<

what place, or

state, or

degree;

es^FSoiov*;

S2a?3ol)0*;

S5

33

258
or

4,

their

Ancient appellative nouns of number of which a few instances in

119, are e. g.
epicene nominative plural have been given in
or &JFO, one man; SoZOFs* or
one woman; oazoFo' or

two men or women; dojado* or

or

g F<S'*,

<y<j)e;,

men

four

three

or

women;

>3

o*

five
,

men
men

or

women:

or

women;

men

or

women;

men

six

or
f

SJarfo^O* Or

to

women;

seven

or

1^

272,

(c/.

The mediaeval
and

<SlW

The modern

310,

i;

^OJ3do

dialect has

ssodido

dialect uses
s

or

e.

2).

and

g. &C#JFO,

also

or

ao

See

or

S5cdAdo,

also

311, remark.

Frequently the modern dialect, and occasionally also the mediseval

one, express such appellative nouns of number by adding s3o
(or

persons, to cardinal numbers,

e.

doJ3&3o

g.

do>

three persons

Other ancient appellative nouns of number are

(of T?ws3j),
cf.

90;

men

or

248,

women.

some men or women;

and as

12,

In

the

o*,

In

or 5o>s

form

are

So^o*,

modern

the

may

as these,

or

(ero^eocf),

and

dialect

in the

=^^dj sjj^

(cf.

c055) do,

eA)^^o,

women

^^^o, oio

as those,

rfj

s^&jo

appears

(see

so

under No.

many men

3),

or

how many men or women, o^do s

all men or women, all of
266), <os>o*,

272 under No.

in the

or
etc.

being euphonic, see

(the
which are found also in the mediaeval dialect with

.o^do*
ro

^dao*,

of indefinite quantity in their epicene

<>}>2JO

;3

and

or several

modern one

be used instead of

$3 j, 'S^o,

many men

5)20D*, s

women

55

ri^o* (of

in

The ancient appellative nouns

plural, derived from

o*,

s^djo*
273), many
mediaeval dialect they are =^200*,

to

ads;wo*,

td^dj

=^200*,

siwdo

SJ^SOD^,

2).
Only <>j^o
<n
modern one.

s
,

in

the

exception of

the forms of

259
The epicene nominative plural of $53^0 and 'agio (see above under
No. 3) in the modern dialect is ssssl.do, so many men or women as those.
and

's.ssl
eJ

many

many men

so

do

03fo

^o^

or

^^

as

how

j3iCo

used.

is

form of a cardinal number

278,

ancient dialect that express 'time' or 'times',

in the

e.

i)

g.

one time or turn, once; -ador, two times, twice; doJ3s3jF,

three times,

thrice;

For instance

for the letter s3j once the letter

we

In the medisoval dialect

and

a.55oF),

(for

Instead of

these.

fcifStfo

suffixing sSj to the short

By

words are formed

,

women

tj

persons,

279.

or

in the

find

used.

ao>j

ZwsSoF,

modern one ^s5o

is

(See

some times, and SJO^OF

(from

4),

or several times,

e.

is

212,

i; cf.

SJSJD*

and
306,

b.)

f
(from 3^c*
of
sj^sj), many

g.

(See translation in

The ^o

EodJjF)

^S&F

In the ancient dialect there are formed also

w^), see 278,

(for

one of the taddhita suffixes

243, A,

10),

258.)

and only

in

course of time got the meaning of time or turn.

and mediaeval

the ancient

In

expressed also by

w)0

Zof^o

oidc^o

?jjs&,3

(j&aejj)

zj>0: in the

or wsO,

To form words expressing

a fold,

used 53JI,
(

278,

i),

e.

g.

suffixed

'S.doFa,

e.

^JSSo*, oidrfo sJJ3^3*,

g. a^^j

modern one the terms used are

,

280.

or 'times' used to be

dialect 'time'

to

etc., e. g.

'fold'

the

the ancient dialect frequently

forms

short

of

sfoJS+s&a), three-fold, three times as much,

(i.e.
,

wok a

(i.

e.

eso&'-f 30&),

eC?oda

numbers

cardinal

much, s^jJSdoFa or

two-fold, twice as

(i.e.

fjs^a

eCSo+aoa,

(i.e.

215,

Instances are:

z3dd

oio^Q

3rtc:oJodfcJd zp^Soo

||

a terrible

man

of the heroes
33*

260
much as Arjuna
much as Karna, five

of eminent

of fame on earth (be was): twice as

as

much

as Bhima, four times as

343,

(Qf.

thrice

valour,

much

times as

as Krishna.

3.)

Nripatunga (was) in
on
Bali
two
Dadhfei
three
earth
times, also Indra, if
times,
liberality
surpassing
a
thousand
times. (Cf.
Sibi
one considers, a hundred times, (and) indeed also
343,i.)

and modern

In the mediaeval

doJa^orS),

(for
,

and

To form

in the

we

dialect

modern one

30^0

modern

multiplication numbers in the

si)Je>&f)3ao

erurf.

o'

thrice as long

(cf. 8

XVI,
281.

212

In

lists

of

310,

533^0.),

again so

'

>-

So

as that,

^a^&o., four
1

as broad again,
'S^^yssrta,

?rta or

as that; e.g. dj^s^o

y^j and

dialect

(S&aS^-f
or

much

twice as

much

(for

the mediaeval one

in

(278,3) are frequently used, e.g. do^^o

much as that, sjo.1 ;&},, again so much as this,
times as

^^0,^

find

i).

On adverbs,

avyaya and nipata) have

their so-called gender has been adverted to.

adverbs

(particles,

been given, and in

102, 9
Kesava calls such as are particularly used to modify the action of a verb
'

kriyaviseshanas

',

and gives the instance

3 20 do Sort ado do essrl djeJ&do.

277

In

32o.o djs&rfo, explaining

w
it

it

by

has been remarked that some

adjectives or attributive nouns in their neuter forms are used as adverbs.

It

remains

to be stated that in

mediaeval and modern

the ancient,

dialect adverbs are frequently formed by adding-

S3o3o<3Jo5)h or

e.g.

The author thinks

*)

or

became or

is'

(cf.

esh, 'having

^dJS^FS^oiraA, faultlessly;

that this

fc?ft

212, remark

^tfo&dft

originally was, at least often,

2).

This, certainly,

is

become 51)

^sd
*v

oO

wrt, 'so that

it

533>W
becomes

the case in our present Sabda-

manidarpana's i3^C3vjJe>A SjsacSo, he made (a thing) level (by crushing), and

3JG3>rio, he trampled (a thing) into a moss of small particles, wherein the forms

and
S3

sSrs sJjsrt

only give the required meaning.

sins' pi), WJoJ

&

"i-ojV

intended, viz.
clean.

?S

it

is

WV

syaft 'aWj, ^J8V*\

proper

to

tJp^o,

in

Observe also the

which onlv

X&

^3r1

modern instance
can

srive

the meanincr

oofif)

keep the books and clothes so that they be (or remain) very

261
one who
sjfk, one who loves constantly; rio^Eejft rkScfoot^oJoneJ^,
cannot speak distinctly; SoOcraft &fQ?oJ53)CiJ, to distress greatly;
the trees bear fruit abundantly;
w4<&>i&

#3^

S^osejpfS,
),

our master fosters us very well; i$3vr

speak properly; sssjrf^ k$3>r> ^?A)d?i>, he beat him soundly;

thou
he cried out loudly;
erfo
tfzSotfjj^?,

to

^edft

walkcst quickly;
ri

correctly;

d^

3oo3orf?l>

kd

sissft

z3^o, (you) must read

she walked becomingly.

,

s3r5

chieily;

(=e5r\)

and

166

appears that in the ancient dialect esoir

were once suffixed to nouns of direction, e. g.

?o&

s3oJ5(3o,

(=WA)

in order to

it

make them

adverbs, became

meaning 'southward, toward the south', and

'eastward, toward the east'.
o53,

Adverbs are expressed

e.

a^ao,

g.

optionally;

To express

may
in

^^^ao,

^J^^SN,

six^^a^,

foolishly;

nimbly.

express 'very' see

calls

?iosjarf, happily.

adverbs

20^0,

3,

33 dJSCteh, very far;

e.

(cf. % 275),
g.
a very formidable manner;

Kesava

gladly, willingly: zS^rlao,

'very', 'in a hig-h degree' before

be used

very

slxfccsoi

in the three dialects also by the instrumental,

quickly; vwdti&ti, merrily;

a5d^ash,

steft, exceedingly; s^^sidraSeJA, generally;

the foot-note of

Jo^o and

distinctly;

Others are doC^Cd^A, covertly;

etc.

abundantly;

From

2060^003^ ?3, your boy writes

2>od S33ft

sjsotf

very cruelly;
^JS.ds^A,
^>

About the use

of

repetition

adverbs

of

to

307, a.

adverbs also avyayalingas

90, likewise avyayapadas),

adverbial declinable bases, his reason for doing so beipg the circumstance
that in a few instances adverbs show case-terminations, as sjo3
of

sjoJj, e5^e5

When

o (ablative of

j3

(genitive

ss^ee^).

adverbs are in connection with verbs, they generally precede the

verb immediately or the subject and

gender and number,

e. //.

its predicate,

olo o SJJS^cSo;
to

undergoing no change of

de^3oo3o ^t3 o

(see

327);

ta-

^jse^rf'?*,

^o^

rloearfodo;

^jseo^^^ro w

If something is put between

?l>arfo*; f3eiri^>doo ^^cSo*.
the subject and predicate, it is to be done so that the adverb stands where
it

clearly modifies the sense of the predicate, as in the following instance:

262

may be sometimes

however, the position

In a stanza,

chosen at the convenience of

author, as ^rbtfoo

its

wri>oJooo

slsfcsfca okortorttfjss* grfoOtfsfc*

a
A
homogeneousness takes place faultlessly everywhere
<r>

j,

well-known couples (of vowels, e.g.

=&J3^oo S^e;

es

>o,'

7$$

sj^d'gr,

known

letter

S3).

instead of the generally

those

in

ad^sdo

be optionally used.

may

Regarding the adverbs which have been called postpositions by

282.

us and regarding the adverbs of place and time

instances

be

may

^e$o),

in

given

from the tree;

&$

212,

2. 3.

the following

e)

which they govern the genitive:

^do,^^

(^^j, ^fo^*)j

rfjdd^rlo
their

side;

like a hill;
5^,),

like

Karna; AOoJo?^ (A0o3o

young shoots; 3>&$ like me; zosDofor^o^fae^,
SrSj,
in the tree; e3^>, in him;
Bali; ycSrdo*, i n ^ ne meaning; rfodd,
CO
CO
from the village; 3$
like
i,
(one's) words; eruaOo (erusd
(^rsrfi

d),

like

like

"

'So),

in front of

him;

s;jc&>d

^^J3^?S, with thee;

parrot;

water; 33po>^d
\
}

from
($o3od <^Y

^dJS>^r?, in the

s^o?So3J3^, in the house;

under a large banyan tree;

=^^r5,

A^o3j3^^, with a

fear;

outside the village;

esddo?3o3j

553^

5^oo?5,

5j?S,

after him-

before the palace;

\ on an elephant; fcs^aoi) ^p?e^, like the ocean; e3d?S

like

him;

JjaSiSo^^

a ripe fruit;

with the father;

^rS cdo roortd

except this;
33^
s Dr3
-* FJ
:

s^do^rt^ doocsl, some years ago;

^sjj^)

e3d3 ^o^o^, on account of that;

the army;

on the other side of a stream; aor^ ^

^jd,

dp^d

ZO^P,
"u

^JSd,

s3SJf3

r^,

with

with him;

concerning God; 'a.dCS 3oJ3^oF,

about me; zxdftv ^o^d, near the door;

5o^ d, near me,

_,_s_s

near a lover;

^^

r3jic3j&J}

ao^ri,

round

<^^>

ti

sJdn

A -ii

till

to-day;

_>

<,) rf SrS^,
o

i-ii

till to-

day; ^^>^ a^^rls^ ^^3os3)OJo, after some days.

Instances in which some of them govern the dative, are:
f
,

in front of a

yzloJo

d^,

in front

bindu;
the

of the

SoOokQrt

'saDDft,

country beyond

theme

of the

his

)jdo

before elder people;

DoA

country;

negative;

^^>s;

some years ago;

before bringing forth;

-dsoJoosJd^ doooz,
e^rijSProorl. on account of washing the feet; B e>$rtl&&P?id, on account
o"
TJ
of battle;
^F3'& ^o^d, near the
ed>%??oorid, on account of that;
r

mountain.

263
Instances in which some of them govern the instrumental
are:

dors ^>a?S
->

>o3

anally;

<*roao5j;3

ablative).

beyond the province of

wd^ri

from that (time),

doj<S,

from that (time); w^)o six>?i

^sjJeJajSp^O^^rttfo &?3, behind the noun- and verbthat;

before that time;

See

S&C9 t>o. a province

below the waist;

tftfrt,

more remote than

suffixes.

CftSctfo

(i. e.

352,

yrfWo

rfootf

Instances in which one

'of

them

is

used with the dative

verbal

of

'a^ (another form of 7*^, the termination of the

nouns combined with

instrumental

i. e.
SS>NO wdo^Ci-S-,^ six)oz,
ablative; cf. 343, 2), are:
he
of
the
before
he comes. SD^J
it-from
e>t^j
(lit.
coming-to
before),
he
it-from
before
he
of
the
jumping-to
before),
3dti\r^ doooz, (lit.

oiradJS

jumps.

^oooz,

v^rfrf-Skr^

(lit.

any one

known or

of the having

5>?1}
knowing-to it-from before), before anybody knew or knows.
or
not
come
he
of
the
not
coming-to itZJe>d<3-v3 riooosS, (lit.
having
Tf
from before), as long as he did not or does not come.
C-J

Instances in which they are used immediately

in connection

with nouns,

pronouns, so-called adjectives, adverbs, inflected forms of the verb, imperatives,

infinitives

187. 188), past participles

relative participles

*a#

a)

^^,

like Indra.

'a&ddo,

and the so-called

up

to this time.

d^JSeSoa^

v.

7/J

as far as the sea.

oe>^rdoofe3,
Ay

for three days.

of the

compass!

(is

an elephant?

it)

seg.),

175-186), are:

53J3 V 5J*,

OJ

154

Rama!

D^^J^),

^^.,

grandeur indeed!

y^ole,

See

even that manner.

sJ^dsSf,
s^

53

directions

c3?5rts?d,

287,

regarding numerals.
b)

^?d?, even you!

even he.

W^?3,

that very thiug.

what (could)

^c3?FSJ5?,

sorrowful thoughts?

y^NOSj, even of him.

S3c3?,

^^

why

this (be)?

Cf.

260. 283. 312.

black?

&$z3,

About

oSja^^JS?,

ewo,

50,

en),

wa

284. 285.

see
c)

=3^oO

(is

it)

indeed! yu25^de, (could

d)

goe)r\, just

manner; (or could

299,

Cf.
e)

1.2. 3;

so;
it

it

(it

is)

even white!

difficult

be) proper V

(or

could

it

be)

thus?

be) thus? S3r3.?=ooe>r^.

in this

SofrioSo?,

=^^3^dJS,

am

not

^jA?o3oz3S33s)COj;3, could this poverty have befallen you ?

3oJ5iic3?3j??,

very

ruined?

300, 3.4.

do you not ask? oi^S3 9 u>?3JS, did he behave dishonestly?

fall?

^Srs^?.

did

beat?

jj>

crs,

have you come

=^es?3,

Srff2-9f, did ho

(in

questioning

264
politely)? aoJe^rto^os, do

ask

(one)

o3o,

does a fool

know

dJ3d SA)^3 o5o^o, should

come

zo^d,

?3j&?rf

f)

go

to see!

3$fcJtfo2?io3o3J3

e5=s7>,

'3,0

younger

SJsri

#)

sruras:*

(erufsf

(they) eat or ate.

when

cf.

a drop of

283).

ooft?,

+ ss^), when

(he)

came

it is

(they)

eats or ate,

she, it)

(he,

not allowed to speak at

when

^o^oJoe3jido,

when

speaks or spoke, when (they)

it)

t?^s3^ We>dd),

when

me

elder sister, give

(he, she, it) sings or sang,

was destroyed

(it)

directly

3,

^s?J3, do?dj^?3e, hear, hear,

^s?j?>,

^o&c&3, when (he, she,

speak or spoke,

ztr(

come here!

when

(33e>z3o+j),

sing or sang.

when

sister,

3390&,

say?

being here used in addressing a female,

>

zj?6?,

ro

tiQ>f(

remained far behind.

shall I

aS^&sA?,

^jssi?,

oO

"O"

honey (the

wisdom?

to the fold? that

protect, lord of the universe!

man!

churning?

the firm devotion of

would
3cp ^^orfdopS.,
6*J

doq^soCj

you go?

for a tale at the time of

all.

spoke

(he)

365).

(see

having even caused to confide.

fi)
j3So.?oo3j,
wAoSo?, having indeed
tw
become.
^Jd^ddd?, not seeing
>oc3?, not standing (or waiting) at all.

&&

at all (about the

er\>

286. 287,

see

siws^o

i)

About

see the end of this paragraph).

TO O

an(l

5.

sSoCOrfopAfifCiei 6,

having been threaded thus) as

pearls and pepper corns

(lit.

of the

pearls and pepper corns were threaded

if

rta wic; ^, (lit. of the having won or of the winning after),

after having won or after winning.
So^5 9 ?,
eseSrAoao
9

(together),

(lit.

of the

having worshipped-from

do3A)fl

Wri

was or

is fit

(Ht. of the

5oe>ri,

(about

having been or of the being

298,

cf.

oo^fi,

(esz&Frod+'ao)
had worshipped.

after), after (he, etc.)

5;

300,

2).

fit

3^4

3oJSd
having come or of the coining after), after coming.
when
the
of
seen
going; ^resrf, (lit.
having
(he,
then),

thus), as

(lit.

of the

s3j?s3,

after

etc.)

saw.

Cv

ecofl),
Q

(lit.

or makes.

when

(he,

become or

of the having

became or when

(he, etc.)

3j6^Cbo, when

(it,

enters

when

etc.)

or

S?SjfSrlo, till (or so that he, etc.)

when

(it)

is

finished.

of the

dispersed (see

etc.)

(we,

is likely to
till

W3ir?)j =eorfo;3e>rt.

be ruined.

(he,

she,

you,

it)

they)

might give (see

comes or when (we, you, they) come.

he

coming then), when

5Jj3&c3 e$??Gf, as

becomes.

^eJo.

obtains or

till

made

s^rta^o,
3G5).
enter (see
3G5).

365).

aoJSfrfosS
(it)

^johoJjo^ejrt,

when

wdo;3e>rt,

rfj^doo N rijS3^, so that

(he, etc.)

if (he,
etc.)

aosr^

(he,
'a

enters the

(we, you, they) obtain,

etc.)

6033^,
mind.

265
till

in

(ho,

becomes or

etc.)

order to drink.

(they) listen.

was not found or so that (we,

finding thus), so that (he, etc.)

not found.

c3J3?o30rodf5

of the not having found or of the not

(lit.

35>ri,

were

etc.)

so that (it) did not or does not pain.

at the time that Aja

fc}>nju^,

so that (he, etc.) listens OF so that

^?o%

era^Ttorf

Ai^d

(we, etc.) become.

till

ssfcj

and Hari had not been born.

aoO

Ws>d

dooosl, as long as (he, etc.) does not come or (we, etc.) do not come or
as long as (he, etc., we, etc.) did not come.
if
(he, etc.) is (or
ero&/s,d,
be), if (we, etc.) are (or be).

if

S5^d6,

(he, etc.)

measures (or measure),

if
z3^Sd 3oJ5^or, unless (he, etc.) prays (or pray),
(we, etc.) measure,
unless (we, etc.) pray,
sjjsrfrf dU)^or, unless (he, etc.) does or makes
do
or
363. 364.
Cf.
make), unless (we, etc.) do or make.
(or

287, 5; 314.
Regarding the subjunctive see
About the different meanings of the adverbs of question as
in ancient grammars see Dictionary, and also
283.

Occasionally a euphonic
dialect to suffix the

ojck3d, ^J3^s3,

or

,0

tfj9ri?3?

ej*

used in the medieval and modern

is

of emphasis,

>

(cf.

the

&

e.

9
g. zjCO

e.g.

&>edcjd

('.

fSj^rf+eseS), tfJ3^rf$3?

(i.

after

e.

&joa<&)3>, fcdsixrk^

g.

&3 io3j?3 e3,

In "he

286>

appears also as eso*,

The

tfJ5ric$-fed?).

may

(cf.

3o^s3,

285.

&
e-

of emphasis in combination with euphonic eso*

modern poetry,

^,

before y\J3 in

negative participle of the modern dialect this

e.

specified

,>:>

take the form of *a in

109, l,c, instr.;

362,

c).

Some peculiar instances of the modern dialect regarding the use of

and 1>, added to the interrogative pronouns ^o,

283.

the adverbial suffixes

and

o&s^tfo

oiisd^o,

Ofos^cl),

278, s),
quantity
(
female or asking a female,

what, eh?

i. e.

>?3J5e,

the

are:

oi3^o

whatsoever

e.

>$?,

^e,

g.

g. sJuSJ^ra,

>$&$
does not

of

indefinite

o3

>(3?

'atiO)

in

what?

noun

what? eh? (used in calling to a

esra?
282, /);
?2e, 3oA?? cf.

asking males contemptuously); 0! (used in

what? what could it be? (e. g.
g. SfSj^, tfj^df^?);

what? (used

addressing males,

(e.

e.

interrogative

do not know (e.g. question: 3o?&39 d tfwrisaO&iisfctf answer:

what? one
or question: ^js^z^ Sj^oSj^JSe? answer:
>&&??);
I

know what?

i.e.

something one does not know

(e.

g.

34

266
what?

something one does not know, a certain (object,

with or without 2*^0, e.g. o&>rfdJ3 W^J, a certain play; o&>^c3J5? Swfii
O
O
who? i. e. a certain man, a certain
c3?^res;oJo); oira^JS?, ojjsd&o?,
i. e.

woman

(generally with &ZJv<fc,

see

2w2o.^j;

remark under

who?

i. e.

^^

# o&e>d&?

J,

ctfrarf&a?

292);

oirsdJS?,

*Wv^o,

a certain person, somebody (with or without

touti), e.g.

how many? how very many! very many!

3,^,

20

(e.g.

tf

3.?
60

how

'
);

much

or

many! one does not know how much or many

Concerning questions in general in the same dialect

(e.g. tf

may

it

here that in such questions as 'ado

may be

used.

The

suffixed

)fo

to&lci&ec, did he give four

be stated

^dLo?, is this thine?

may also become >&?,

'ado ^?lcS^o

&&
&$$&?,
Q

she rise early

Annas?

z3^ri c
1j

e.

g.

^ejsxf!

morning? At the same time, in common conversation, the sign of

question is sometimes entirely omitted and the question shown by the

in the

tone of the voice,

e.

Jj^tJ^

g.

goJS^rtos^rS,

does he go to the garden?

^JS^os^d, does he give the (promised) money? ^e>^ wdosjdo, will

they come to-morrow? If there is an interrogative in the question, the
Huccu,
question simply is e.g. 3oj^?>, ^ si>^fl 03J353 wU wdo3o z3.
SQFS

Zr

what play do you like? See cOScio

CO

265. 271; regarding questions in general

etc.
,

Of the conjunctions mentioned

284.
eru, en/a,

regarding wrf

243, remark;

in

are postpositions

212,

in

212,

5,

356,

II,

12.

four, viz. eso, eA)o,

G).

which uniting is called samuccaya.

called also umuvidhi (i. e. urn + vidhi, the u after

First they serve to unite words,

The way of doing

so is

urn being euphonic), 'the copulative method or rule'.

In this respect ?9o and en^o are suffixed to case-terminations of words

except in

.the

instrumental
accusative, in

genitive
en}

alone

(see
is

which case

351,

remark).

used; and again

it is

sroo

In the

alone

nominative and
is

suffixed to the

inserted before the case-termination.

In

267
the locative

and

$o

and

eso

is

generally preferred to

apply to the ancient

QTUO

snio

express 'and', the

first

These rules about eo

voo.

and mediaeval

yo

dialect.

or eruo being not translated

into English.

Instances regarding the nominative are:

^d^oo 3333t$&o

rtados^o,

sdOc&oo 3od^oo, Hari and Hara.

Arjuna and Abliimanyu and Drona.
Jinendras and Ganendras,
Kevalis and Srutakevalis.

'sdoo

^cjosfo*

that and this.

a pleasure ground where king and

tJ0drf^^j^js

queen are together.

stones and

fire-flies

izti tfjs?3Jdojo

showered from the sky.

hail-

;%J32oci^^ao,

above

s3j^s3cdooo ^tffio3ooo,

and below.
on the elephants and on the soldiers
^^(S^Di)^Oc3e),
and on the horses rushed the one elephant of Bhuvanaikarama.
rteo

siOdodjS^

are:
&0d>
^rSclol^^
^kfos^cS
O
2j
a
one
tie
a
brown
must
and
cow
in
largo tiger
S^dodJ-i^oo ^^dOuOjrfoo,
the same place? esrfjiirforfj* w^odoorfoo, him and her.
the accusative

Instances regarding

and

fruit

them

mass

Occasionally the

(the females).

2^23cdodoo

esd&dosfo* tf^ri^odoo, them (the males) and

flower,

d^oJo^ioodoo
and a mass of

of water

$o

is

omitted, as in

^3^*,

pearls.

0*00

=5e>?3 oJooo

he struck with his feet and hands.

srfoD^ si>oo
O

regarding

the

wt;^^

like the ocean containing a

are:

Instances

$0?l)rf

first

instrumental

^oSOr^

3j)35l

oJ

he worshipped with fruits and flowers.

Instances regarding the dative are:

are Drona and you quite equal in the

skill of

archery?

321).

(cf.

i^orlo3joo ^j^rioJooo ?o2otdo, cheating naturally belongs to

and you.

fcJ^ortd/

e5d?orto

^.sj^c^oJo^o

sS^,rfo

^j^^o z&v^o

him

<^JS^^>

dJ3s?* wrtrsi^ wp^o, Vikhyatiyasa was born to him and the queen,
superior to all in the world as to family and firmness of character

343,

(cf.

i,

&).

composition for

An

=g^^o 3o?l^,o ^do^^Oo^,

(i. e.

of)

(generally there)

oO

no

Kannada and Samskrita words.

instance regarding the ablative is:

jasiuino

is

fragrance

ts^aak^rcrSclJoo ^rfrtofo^
proceeded from the great-flowered

and the screw-pine.

34*

268
Instances regarding the locative* are
,

<oe3do3^)^dj*
d^rfoodjTS*
T
en

e;
PO

<

every wise

55
CO

in

and every

<s>,
0V

tO

The Sabdanu-

o>oi)Jo.
^oiojo,
oo
ro
'

sd&0^oo and

sasana has

sometimes omitted in the nominative of the ancient dialect

is

348,

8;

354, u,

foot-note; 357,

ablative (see the verse quoted in

cording

ro

give (us) all kinds of riches in all places

when case-termination in the locative),
(also
'
V

uses to be suffixed, as S5oj^oo,

co

(see

Jtsdja^o ^odorido, 0,

<OPJ

may he

To

manner.
eA)o

firmness of character, and in good behaviour, and in valour.

in

352,

Nudigattu, p. 185) likewise

to

and

in its instrumental or

2,

d)

4,

a sjo^ao^rt^

erua

and

etc.);

in the locative of the

(ac-

modern

(according to the same), at the end of past participles, e. g. siod Se>ft ?o 3^

S3DA ^^rjjrf^, kadi (cf.
286), and in the nominative, when a series
of nouns is introduced, which last practice appears also in the other two

354, n, remarks

dialects (see
285.

Wo and

and mediaeval

eroo

a.

6).

appear, as stated in

284, only in the ancient

dialect.

In addition to

them

and

the mediaeval dialect uses en)

en/a,

e.

g.

when embarrassment and shame were

arising,

they have nothing to eat and to put on.

?os>s;3

=^J5do,d^JS)

a lender of money and- a borrower of

See the close of this paragraph.

money.

In the modern dialect

dialects

it

does

not

ea/a

suffix

alone
it

generally used.

is

the genitive;

to

to

As the two other

the

other cases

it

immediately (sometimes with the application of euphonic elision,

215)
adds it, except to the instrumental and ablative in which it puts a
6
in
282, and or^ex
euphonic G between (cf. the close of
286).
sorfosD 6 Rama and Krishna come.
o"9^o^ ^^^J3
pa
^OrfoddclO 5c^ ^JddodSj^ ^sldJatfr^ s>o3jjds3&Q, he who

Instances are:

e;

>&

teaches

knowledge, and he who gives food, and he who saves from

trouble.
2ori
fv

&o?S?3
~n

3J3^rlosJc5J3 zjdosjtfja, going

and coming.

a^

sk&SMtfri do?3

30rrad)^cSJ3 55e>5 J az3os3c3J3 e3e^o, to walk and jump about

at pleasure is the desire of

large and powerful.

young

goats.

Sorf^JS 'Sido^JS,

in that

way and

c3J3^ciJ3

day and night,

in this

way

^r^^rfja,

y^j^

that

*&&&,,

(is)

=5\>

the children of Kunti do

269

d^&^* aJSz3dcia

not get a kingdom,

cattle

^-

know when they are beaten and know when they are treated
g^oto

kindly.

3?3rte

3&3d

abundantly).

that island,

^^j^

(i-

e.

to

5^o, (we)

others.

off

zond do,

(there)

ts

came people from

villages

between Hindusthan and

?ido^,

^^sd^JS,

&3$

sSo^rlj3 zjj3?torf steasodtfo,

and
his
to
children
eat.
ZodoJo^ s5J3^S5 3 oio ^cSr(J3
Ningappa

3$r\&

^ortsi^rtjs

v3

f3e)OSor(^

n^idj^

them

I love

Wfido

2o^o ^73

(is)

waotf,

^.?s$j
^^

*^

abundant

pigs and dogs.

2x(&<A>?( CX0
serve God with love and devotion.
a6tf

?3e>?oJ,

skedafoft

J^crfo?!^ "AiSJ^adsteJ^ djsrf

3o?e3

wolves use to carry

and towns.

love

my

must show love and kindness

CO

O 3^

wrfo

d>ee3akJ3

on (my) parents and relatives

the attention of dogs

z3,

is

the face and towards the words of (their) master.

he gave

^J)3^

(directed) towards

sJofSrt'&Q^ri

zodO^JS,

3oJ3ert^J5, We>ne;jri^^s),^ So^o^do, doors are put for coming

if
O
a
into
house and for going out.
Q&Xfl
t^eSriOokJa
TTaQ&ticdod
v
ro
ro
3oJ3C3ri

jg.

cif^,

(=

^e)Oioo3^?S,

rfr^rf

Ls^cJ^JS,

crioJa)

rt^jatfrtJS

God preserves

thee in waking and deep sleep.

in the teeth

and

lips.

?3s^q5ris?JS^riJ3

siwe)?^

into
?o^d 3oe)^03^d, they frequently put sugar

^3do^d3e)ft

medicines and dishes.

Instances of the conjunction

modern
286.

en)o

and

ero

being exceptionally used also

drawn attention

dialect will be
eA/3

are in

copulative

in. the

295.

to in

sense suffixed, also to

past

disappearing in an English translation, e. gajScrahodwsfr o^ao&Dfto&j;!/ Jj^sAoJooo 3>?foCO o, he is a fish and a

participles, the first

crab and

all

'and'

(whatever it

may

09
o

be).

^S3oS75>c>oo ?oo3o?i>o
o

.,,
V

s3

successive order there arc eight topics in the

fl

Sabdamanidarpana

(r/:.)

sandhi (literally 'and sandhi a having said'), and nama (lit. 'and uanut
a having said'), [and samasa, and taddhita, and akhyata, and dhatu and

apabhramsa, and avyaya.

3

^o^rf

sioo sJzSdorf^ vti

-B

rf

od/sesjoo
'0

s3o^

zo^rfoo

Saihskrita nominal themes ending in consonants become declinable bases

(in

Kannada) when

they

receive

an

55,

and when they receive an

yv>

270
with doubling of the final consonant, and, further, when they receive

when

(i. e.

end-dropping

their final

?o 33i

s3>Ao&JS

in

of the guards of

champions

we->c3oJOJ3, thus and further.

kdj, read so that thou canst be

a pure manner and in an intelligible manner.

,

that paper

is

thick

thou

aa?.
O

stupid.

names

y^si?

T^tfroosdjSB

SO

d$d 5e>rforf>d 3?odo

dropped).

erorao,' the

C3

are savyeshtha and dakshinastha.

heard

is

and rough.

art

and

little

very

rre$ol> rfewsraftolxfl zStfatf staosDhodoja do^ri fratriifcx

<*

a^o
-o

they use to furnish a house with windows on account of air and

rfdo,

on account of

?je>riod Sodrfo

oSo?i

&

light.

2o^riori^0 rres?c&>^ ?jsrio^ so^rfo oiflwJS

u
ro

^^SJJS

by means of a euphonic
in
285 and the
in

(in

o<,

&

oid^o ^drl^orao,,

M'

the modern dialect

c/.

the

gj*

362 after

c;

enJ3 is

vuh

^^

suffixed to

of the instrumental

and ablative

remark

about

see

198,

i)

of these vessels there are two kinds (viz.] vessels that

move forwards by wind and vessels that move forwards by steam. 3v

w
^^>ddj erf^^
enjgd ^^ro 3oJ3S5^ soe)^ zS^^sx
aoodortrf^

some said

"it

is

to

necessary

remove the boy from the village and cast (him) out", and some "it is
sSfao z3&,r{ =ff5^)o o^J3 rir^ri Ws)^
good, if one puts him into prison".
CS
Q
CO
GF
a
female
cat
kami and a male one bavuga.
call
o?^JS 55^3*^6, they
In the ancient dialect this copulative sense holds good also when e/Do
is

added to the

crfooo

infinitive

with

final

a -?ore$Fo ^JSe^ 3 OJoosJ^

j

oi
S5

3
iJS^CS
gq^rfjsqiro
C3J36 ^JSrao 'avo^o, when the
ca

187,
3S[&i

ro

sense of the nominative appears and

appears, the genitive

4),

e.

g.

when the sense

of the accusative

be used there (instead; see

may

352,

a.

b).

^^^
^dorir^sl^
when (in a sentence) they (the three pronouns) are enumerated together
in their order (as
ts^o, >o, Wo) and when they are (enumerated together)
'adofooo oJojrtsJdo-S^ri ero^rfo^do^lo sjdo,

'adoioodo*

ad libitum (as ^o, w^c,

e?o)

the

The same meaning obtains

Zod, 'if, this

3$
if

Wdftdrij*

there

if it

is

is

first

also

person follows (them, see

when eso

is suffixed

being at the end of a relative participle,

3^cOJO^
"

WzSJSdrfj*

a preceding long

(letter),

ddy
"4

55fS??re>^

and

if

355, n,

i).

to the postposition
e.

g.

s^sira^r

WCSJS^O a^sl3* "SO,

M

the word

j^

is

an avyaya, and

polysyllabic, there is no doubling (of the final consonant),

si

271

rs

ojo
,

^*

if

^PO,

slv^

follows the verbal theme,

negation,
similar
is

e.

ef>3

g.

be remarked here that

dfl^dtf

g.

more

it

this

are

tf

always doubled.

modern dialect when ea^

stands at the end of a relative
in the

t^rfd

J3?s3tf{3rf tfja

tftfctfo

may

50 in the last-mentioned connection

if

occasionally be translated 'furthermore', 'and',

oariea^s?* a^atforfj 6 ero$JS,rio

(there) is

if

OoJ

dogs are well known as faithful servants and as true

M
man.

may

rs

^soBooiw rfo^s^rt rfa^rtofo

occurs but once,

e.

$
and

(=tzS, yd)

?ie;o dcSo,

friends of

wd> which in the past participle expresses

if

we meet with

of expression

way

participle,

It

and

follows, (the letters)

suffixed to

33Q dJ3

in the very sense of the negative a personal termination

further-

^oJoao ^rfor^cio,

any mistake in this (Sabdamanidarpana), correct (it)

The same takes place sometimes when in the

with friendly disposition.

modern dialect esdJS

is added to a relative participle and
(yd+erus)
occurs but once, the meaning being 'and', 'also', e.g. t3ez&3c3e ^^
6J'

tte^bfjcb ^^sl,

iStAtida

(somebody) begs, to say "no

esd<!?

lift

up the

sleep (but)

-d?

^sdw'S^rrarfdJS

soil

at the bottom of

little.

(and) milk also these

wwrf
M lAflJrlcb

3otirf zoo^^,
,1

remain

5,

eo

b; cf.

in force,

e.

is

like

also

g.

^ddo^o

33e>3?3

destroyed

(lit.

and

horses

also

a^o and

287,

6. 7.

donkeys

wdJS

in the

8).

suffixed to ?$, by the insertion of

is

to the verbal theme, the

Soi^o)

the duck-weed

and put seasoning drugs.

trees

>d ^J^i^j^d,

287,

Also when in such a case

(e523*

mango

(About the general meaning of

mentioned combination see

if

if

iXfPA) S^o?j8)de 008)^03^6, also in this district intelligent gardeners

tfociodrts^ tf^rtvxS&fl ^o?fo

S5o

and

indeed;

(I

5oe>>o sarscldJS ^)^e wrsCo^), cotton

P5

(are) of a white colour,

5^0C90

affliction

(is)

do or can not give you anything" is) an

j^rreddJS escS^ z3^o, also I want the very same

excessive affliction.
thing.

begging

if

moaning

of 'and'

?o< 3s?d)&> (o. r.

seems to

3cSJdo), and

the duck-weed a being destroyed),

the water becomes clear, though

Kesava says that essSJStio is a substitute

of the o of satisaptami and means 'when' (
187, 4; 188; see
365).
The conjunction

meaning

erucfoo

of tho above

which

3&c3o,

Kesava adduces as a suHix with the

'at the time that',

is in

fact the personal

termination of the present-future in the neuter singular and

eroo, 'and'.

272
This third person neuter singular, as we have seen in
as a krillinga or bhavavacana.

sod^eo4

365):

200,

is

i,

used

Kesava's instances are the following (see

Vott&ySiVti

ttirio^dosk*

3p& 3cl^ ^siFdoa^J^d

d<3o, and a saying (i. e. and when he said) "tell Vishnu to come (him)
who appears and is coming (there) like the Anjanacala!" io^rio 3^8^)

&>SJ3S

t?s3J5^^^

and the assembly a dispersing

^i5-,o,

a>

he began to consider.

the assembly dispersed),

e.

(i.

>cdo^

and when

&33 ,o3J3<$*
^

and the

companion a going away

(i.e. and when the female companion went away) having said "remain
near thy sweatheart". Similar instances are frequently met with in

^do!

oic^o

?3jO ^JS^>rio^)C5oo,

fejnale

ancient narration.
287.

If

and

9o, en)o, en)

eo/a

do not join two or more words, they have

the following meanings:

'also',

1,

'likewise',

?dsJ

ysjdodo^

^>O rioo,

all

the

eo^oroSo

esr^c^

at once tasted also them.

all

o
D rfsfo
(v)

e.g.

'and',

'too',

when Yama

^OorldJ^^o
^^9
A)

case-terminations

seven

manner

are joined also in the feminine gender in the same

as in the

rtod c^o^OortoOoJoJo
?34,$^rt^o
~^
co
ro

masculine gender,

"~

C^

djarloo,

when they are used as masculines, all

(in the same manner as in the masculine

also in (originally) neuter terms

the seven case-terminations join

6?j3 ustf o^JSii
O

gender).
raji
2o

TS>^
rfy^arW
W v*\

rekhe and
s3oqkd^J3
w
O eirfido,
w

denote likewise the middle of a row of trees and other things.

also he came,

U fi>,

yrfjs

are you also

,

fit

to

^^ri sSf^o,

go?

also written

it is

Wowo^do,

if

want that

ssoSori^

rtadorf^JS

if

others are not agreeable to us,

2ooz3

3e>^J3

Zy

fool too laughed.

nouns.
o,'

^=3

when

we
all

oi<3d;3ol>3ori ^^do

22>3o3oe;rf0alx>o, also where (there) are no collective

also where (there) is no negative sense,
l

^3&(5lol>e)rtdC&Oo
and thus. <3?i) sij* wocS. in
CO

S3e)0?o

53&>tfo

shall (their)

-0

this

'

how

too are not agreeable t3 rthers.

without exception laughed, the

manner and

further.

e$FS ^>c3
CO

^jo^^, and besides, e. g. do^JS^ aired O33>d

and
whose commands have (we) to obey?
besides
zS^o,

thus and further,

3J

"one must not

sssjs^o&arfd

religious teachers too do not fear sin,

disciples fear it? oid^FSododdo $z>if{ ?3edac56 ^e>s&>

,
'

too.

5J

therein (in the book)

transgress the words of one's parents".

3oe)ori

also other,

e.

g.

Q&d&3dC3&0(b

sine)qJrrf)

273
if

anything

becomes too much

for one ant, also some other ants join, drag it, etc.
and
e. g.
still,
sii^J^,
^j^ sjjses 9 do^^ tfoz3, he sold even (his) oxen,
and still (there was only) rice gruel. 35-3 rtJS, and likewise. 'Sif^o, also
,

to the present time,

up

e.

g. e3^6j3<p

<

^3Cl)3
a^o.o
"**
v

with them also up to the present time.

essjdo

not come also up to the present time.

wd6

'a^Ja,

e>?$j

jd^>,

<3f3ri

3,^J3,

ess3>fl

sent

tfo3o?oc3r$o,
ero^dsS?
but up to the present time indeed no answer was

a tfja., and
^

e.

yet,

^JS,C

g.

tJAaej,
Ci CO

fitifi
ftj

he

oO,FO,

is

fighting

tod)>, they did

^rt^f^

0dc$o

him two

letters,

received by me.
had made various

(they

and yet he had not become better.

Occasionally the
of
'and'
and
be
translated
'still', e. g.
<&$& may
meaning
disappears,
9
3o^ ft ftJSAab., he knew still more than
wd<3o ao^ c3-S\^
sssJ^ri a?i%
Q
"^
Q
IT
what he said.
d^o wd^, ^fiJS, rte^rH oiddo rtCsS9 ^ e5SJi5)^^c3, there
endeavours),

'CT

<-

or

is

(one) galige, or two galiges, of time

still

?oo?jsd^do,

mundane

get over the ocean of

r

We>, a^J3

some

(or

2,

ne>U

Soso)?Je)r(ddJ3^h?5

SoJS^rt

till

he comes.

'S^A

>??&

thou hast
^^,^^0,
&

still

to

affairs,

oirssj^ ^djsrsrt^j ^aS^FSJS??

all
the
are
these
arguments? No, there are still
^e;^) erorso,

some more).

'even',

'indeed',

even in the two

first

e.

s3jsris3d&>

g.

cases eso
),*

is

used

0$^c3J3^o

(doja^e?*, etc.).

even regarding these two compound words

and

(i.

e-

is no option (allowed).
^r|oiowe)do, there)
oddessjatfo rfdsS^ 'sad^v* 'ad ^spS^^d^o
-B

-o

<^

when even

in both,

^^. \^
^J^d^o
^'a)jir

>

Samskrita and Karnataka, a vowel

follows, elision takes place regarding the vowels of the case-terminations

and regarding the vowels of uninflected words.

SDCS^j6

eA)doS-)3J

wcio^ij,

mentioned eight are the places where the

even nine (letters

it
,

(the

346).

(see

arms appear

karma

&W

nJrfoj^ oiSejdrzSjav*

^C^rao,^
w^ddJ*
Q
SO

are)

not

letters originate.

classified.

escSo

"O"

33) even these

o^a.^sij*

oraeAo

2^Cj$'"

or objective noun) is (first) even of four kinds

c3>eMo
TJ

nicely on

(the throat, the palate, etc.,

^dsk"

Vishnu,

S3o eroo

o?5a^OFo

wsir

vudo*

^clfseddort,
(OC)o N

even these two are

sSo^J^

even four
e3^or(oro

used in the sense of

to-

conjunction,

srorf

^
d^d Cto,W
60

dOsJ3C3oo

pada, deva, bhattilraka, even these three, are

33^d tfaQ&O^O ^tJS^^fSo,

titles of respect at

the end
35

274
eSSjJa&S 9

of names.

^'

(=9ri?oJ3&3

rfs3p,

mediaeval)
possible to perform together a
^ct^os^cSr^scod),
king's service and devotion (to a deity), thus even two?

bow

do^oo ^JSS

baving taken

(=

SwSSojQJooo,

the wife of another.

oath

the

2pe)3,

is it

even the two

(cadjan leaves).
do not even once look on
^^
FSjs^ado,
mediaeval)

tfo^rao

sJdnafcrttf 3*

SJOEO

tzh&x

of even at once defeating controversialists

?loe>?l>d

who show

9
enmity by sophistry, o};^ dje)*3
sjo^, rfoZo, he sold even
s^orfrrtrsSri.) s3j3?^
oxen, and still (there was only) rice gruel.

(their)
(his)

CS

djarirtjaad

q$oF

a$e

tfs^o e3q$Frttfo jraexf#J5,

T3
IT

one name for moksha, dharma,

C5

kama and

even

artha,

(these)

Bala (and) Narayana, even both.

,o*,

if

(one)

compares (them),

even both of them.

even both of us.

iJS^ri^ ^oSjSo^ri

men

even

^JSpraa

get

into the

s3?acS6

C3

even

essJSuOrU),'

^^2J

sometimes

roriosjdorso.,

power of wolves,

=jaddOf&5

^drl,

if

doOo3o?k.,

four.

S^O&iS^aQ

(one)

ao^j^da

happens that

it

the very

to

and

praises

end.

solicits

<d

(them),
they do not give even one ruvvi.
v
(there)

the

is

both (are) good men.

even to both of them.

even both of you.

dJ3,

*"^A

3?odo, caturvarga

is

not even one thing that

3J3^^o, Wrfd S30

00
TJ-

God

2wO dJ3 ^a^,

O co'

not even one person inside.

cSf^do

vs

does not know.

entered the house, but (there) was

#3o,ud
6U

oo

kW^Ja
iJ

not even
^^)3e)dOs;,
W1

one of us two spoke.

meaning of a peculiar emphasis, namely emphasis to express

whole of a definite number of things which either naturally belong

the

3,

that the

together or are considered to belong together,

,

is

understood,

both arms, the two arms (that a person has;

if

e.

g. ao^orts?

we say ad^orf^

means 'two arms', 'two of the arms', for instance of Caturbhuja

Vishnu who is considered to have four arms). cOdd)o ^ras*, both
it

or

two eyes (that a man or animal has; if we say ^d^o ^r?^*,

means 'two eyes', for instance of Caturanana or Brahma who is

eyes, the
it

considered to have eight eyes). e5&ri$ddodoo 38> ^&d>, having cut

the two feet (he had), ao^oio ^e3ctfjjdoo ?3?c3s>Fr(v~, when (he) cut
the tenth

head

ten heads),

(of Dasasira or Ravana, who

^e^nsaodflr^o

&>

3os3r3*

oo

instances of them (of tadbhavas and their

the two forms

(Sariiskrita

and Kannada).

is

off
off

considered to have had

<odci> sSooioo,'

shall utter

A
compounds) with regard

to

sjoJ?C5o ^^rfori^oo, the three

vedas (omitting the atharva veda).

s3oJ39oo d^e^ortv*, the three worlds
and
earth
the
lower
ejftSoo do^oris?*, the six seasons
(heaven,
region).
}r3o d^rt^j* todododo, the guardians for the
(which Hindus accept).
cardinal
of
the
<odrfo ^ytf (for <odzl/3 tfofc*,
eight
points
compass.

medieval), the two hands (he had),

bring the two oxen (which are in the shed,

3s),
o,

directions

3> would mean

south,

(north,

two oxen').

'bring

east,

or

west)

etc.;

3d, the four

(of a thing).

c3>xf3,

the four sides

a country,

to or on the four sides (of

),

etc.).

'together', 'without exception', 'in concert', e.g.

4,

away

how much

&^rU)^

o,

321).

tfjB&ortrtv^

(cf.

the boilers without exception.

spe)rf,

sJoJo.

Dharmaja gave

soever,

!53os3oo 3d

x3d

zp-asJs&^orttftS*

altogether

(it)

tell to

a?Wo,

bring

all

woii^tfFsfc* arfo

having chosen Samskrita abstract verbal nouns (e.g.

and having added even the suffix ^^j to all (of them)

sd^* ro,

3^,pCdo^o?S
\*^s
^j
ejiort,

2pe>r!)

without exception,

rf9 ^ ^sJro^^o y^i^j (for

when the Gaula

do?ir!e3j3^^,

mediaeval) rtjrlo^s^o

5^1^00,

mendicants put away

religious

frankincense without exception,

let

rlU

^oto

<od&J3

Bjaohodorfo,

^JSCQJ, having firmly seized the branch with both (his) hands.

3oc3o

all

the

ss^todo^j

us altogether in union attack Phalguna!

you without exception

all of

tell!

Arjuna overcame alone

33e>q$Fo,

?rarfFo

all

e.

nouns) without exception,

sweet.

came

3&> y^Jii

sSe^o,

all

w.

all

wdc^

together became
f
ghee, curds, and

esssl

that w.

i^dooo

level with the

e.

e. is

them w.

went,

cio 8",

all

w.

liberal persons like that

e.

do otosdo,

o00 dJ3,

afraid of sin

e.

w.

e.

you w.

e.

if all

all of

e5?3,

wanted.

?2e;?oOOJo^ ^o,

sit in

to

.oodoslr
ro

Karna?

sin)

honey w.

all

MO
dJ3

?33^

e. is

ZJ^ do, they

the whole forest

till

army

e.

together.

w ^rerrf^Sfo
**

will be the

owPO OrU>

doo

<0e>

issftrtv, are all

<o^dJ3 srao*?
ro

a palanquin, who

333 jJ3, wotarfrfdo

commit

fight.

furthermore

^ozj

ground,

-Q-

(i. e.

?j>

the other things (made of milk) w.

all

in

have a long penultimate.

S53^J3

Jds'o^cl), a moving forward of the whole

of

rfjdJ3si$,

U
e.

^FO^OO, to all (of the abstract verbal

^o^j^osi

e.

3e>O?)^oo

these w.

all

you here w.

the gathered kings w.

oi&o^o
CM

3j8dFo ...

?j)rfFo
),

^j?>^dro

FSdddJojrts^zjdorfoo ?fs>a
all

^J3^d

3oJ

bearers?

eofcjJ37>.6,

who are

are afraid of all persons w.

e.

35

not

276
health indeed

(is)

),

w.

,aw 'S'zirteOcriojs, on all sides w.

CO
00

e.

5,

'though', 'although'

a,

to past participles, e.g.

all

e.

when they are

314),

happiness that exceeds

suffixed
6

whodooo

eri^^ws^uortv* A^sraa^sk

though the terms

sStfo,

are feminine nouns (and) the terms &^, eSja^ are masculine

sj^o

nouns, (they are used as) neuters,

wdosj, though 3J$^o, 33?$tf

tfo^crfs?*

they are terms with the ^otf

^ftofojo
is

3$5J5f

fcJOSo^o,

long, 'slackness' occurs

15, 229).

?$f(

eJ5e)d^,
"u"

3^)11

ofooo

letter

fcj,

^adwrtF^rfot

though
240,

o^oo

i).

have arisen of the

the initial

of the

term

^>ojjjo z3^,eo*
v
Q

though hot water gets however so hot, a house does not take fire (on
account of it).
3\3jo z3>o.C3oo cSJ3rf!3.cdx>o w)do, although the king
followed and the female messenger pursued, he did not come.

=5^0 d^3*
wj

S5&3rOOJoj (=?5&3r003ooo, mediaeval) ^^racS, not seeing the tuck, though he

sought
?oD,
it is

(there)

is

?o

&&A{rt)e>az3d
-O
ttroo ^^d ^sj.rl^j

's^d
oro

^rfJ3

sosri

no health in the body, though (there) are other comforts,

in fact so as if they did not exist.

connection with 3od,

to relative past participles in

b,
e-

2>o?di3

(it).

if

iSaddodo^
Zw

*&$&

g- e3fl
"^

(there)

w^

not the fault of tautology.

^df( 3e>^ 'S.^daood,

cSeidj

oioo,

coS3de3dJ3^o t3?GcSJ8^

skqJo53(3*

though (one)

repeatedly

^drWd

you).
,

tfzij

(or

cuckoo,

is

^Jis)rf6oioo

D-srtdQ
co

O
there no difference

is

= wd6oioJS,
weak, does

23erf^i^s3?,
ro
*

in (their)

mediaeval)
it

God

sees us always.

drop)
last?

though the crow

sound?

s3en>

^rfo^

3$ri3^sc3dJS

^oSo^cS?

not cut a tree?

see us,

(or

sweet at

gave) riches and eats (or ate) together (with

though the middle of a saw

35e>ftridJS

drops

&g$&?tic&f&>Rd d&l!

(='S 3^cSj3doJoJ5, mediaeval)

though (he) gives

556,

(and) ^350* are uttered together,

honey (thereon), could the fibres in the neem become

$?to3ekc3jsclo3oo

and

*~"^

'aej, though the very two (words)

is

ssci

o^j djsa ^eoSjsdo ^^dj^djsessl^

O
O

is

=&df{

like

rforfo^dj

j5JS?rf

though men do

$&$

the

not

fiU?3?, though

he knows the vedas, does pain leave him?

IJS^OJoarf 6 cJe)5j3e 'a a ?i?, though it is (or be) a Brahmana's
?$
O
O
O
does it not stink, if it is not washed with water.

face,

277

though diluted, (it is) buttermilk, though stupid, (it is)

3r3 zdofcJ.dJS does TkrfOw, though the corpse is burned,

3eX&j,

the mother.

<*>

eo

debts are not burned.

Regarding the meaning of 'furthermore', 'and', 'also' which

may have in the same combination, see 286.
6,

a relative past participle,

to

combination with Sod,

'at least', 'at any rate' in

e.

g.

i*>&
CD

$5c3

n>o,

and wd added
(of the

i3tf sJorl^scSj^do z3^o,

ten kinds of sons) at least a son of one kind

is

CAfl

rfs&rraddo&o

required,

must tell
(= CJd6a&J3, mediseval) ^csod rfcScrio ^etfo, at least us (you)
what you have seen (i. e. the truth), 'a^ra.rfclaku (=
a^cizloioJS,
r

w wadarid
o

hence at any rate give up (your) obstinacy,

s^3,

)i3o

mediaeval)

who does not know a a

Amarakosa"

least the

^N^Cdo^jcl)
7,

e3ert,

wd

first

(the

is

it
,
'

letters

much

(as

of the alphabet), "repeat at

still

^s>cSdJ?)
Hari!

to be expected' in connection with

was not

as', 'as

(somebody) said to one

if

you certainly know

suffixed to a relative past participle,

SeiejcS? 3J?oo3rreddo
(=wrfziJ3, mediaeval)
if

as

more).
thou
at
least
merciful
be
quickly,
3oOo3o^,

'even', 'so

Ewd, ezl,

So^sk-ri
ti-6

(>3si>ds-3ridJ?>

^^

e.

g.

zj^s^ffo &>SCcl

cSjSd^ortj, is

not enough'

it

one utters "Basava"? even a beast will (thereby) obtain devotion.

wrlrfo

e
Jesi/

do,

it

is

impossible in the world to remove by scorn what

destination, even for a king (or a god),

"watert^

-&^3~^ d,

like'

earth, water, etc.) are useful in various

ways

0?3o&irf Zjacirt^
WMKJoSjsert^,
'
CJ
**

^5

is

called pre-

Sosj^

oosrt sss3e>cidJ3

even they (stones,

plants

to living beings.

even
,

at that time, just as nowadays,

boat,

wdftfj $3ft Eo^o

C3

farthing (see
8,

zlav*"

e.

'acSjsr^o

among

g.

sj^^tforttfjas*

kd^

5cS,

(ww'si-^eroerus^j
same

'Sid djs AjD, (it is)

tfm

even one

^sSJ^y*

s>jJ3

^),

whether

a relative

e3^odfe?do

^ztrtoo, those

they two

by two

regular order or out of the usual order, bear

in

class

the

me

suffixed to

^ddd^do

(is

21).

same whether a

^js?3o5j^

^ddJS
no
man

eruaSfiS
wrasJ\
sJ
re

o
an army,

yd

OdA^slidAV 'sid^r^o ^sjcsr^o^oioo

themselves are

the sign of the

to cross the river in a

8).

or' in combination with

'whether

ten letters

was necessary

'sa^sddJS ^J3^e;, he did not give

CO

remark under No.

past participle,

it

useless

is in

zto,

drJfSO

a town or

in

^oddjs zoodapi 3oe$dfc ?jS ti5e, whether

CJ
.^
CJ
CO

278
eats

(one)

sweetness

from the top or eats

sugar-cane

from the bottom,

(its)

the very same. rfjsdo^teddJS ^Oo3o?, &do3c3>c;dJ3 ?dOo3oe

is

be right whether you do

(it will)

(it)

or let

it

it

alone

319.

Cf.

(Hodson).

Remark.
It seems to

be a grammatical anomaly,

553C^J, WCSb/d, literally 'a having

become

if

wdfcdo,

e33c3o, e3c3dai>:>,

if

and', are combined

or a

being

with the accusative; but there are sentences like the following:
^odosQdj
^doDO'Jd
s3g srftS*
to a
has
to
whatsover
3rJ3dJ~oJj^
yjS-iscio, (one)
30^3
give

woman whom
yddo s'tfdo

(one) respects deceitlessly

a
^J3<^d, (he) taking not even

arf^ddoiw

of about A. D. 1200).

ssrt^s5

(Sabdamanidarpana Mdb. Ms.),

in

a sasana

23?ct>,

hereafter

haga (from the devotees;

(=arf;33dcioi>J3) six)^ rfocfcdsS,

'

we

shall give (thee) whatsoever; pray!

w&ess^o

^c^ oddaakcS*

(Basavapurana).

3O

<o3

?s

cS

*i3so, zoc^

^t^ skrf&etfo (StSo^Q^, except always upon me, he does

^oi^

W$J

not think even upon (my) high rank (Bp.).

must burn up even Poona (South-Mahratta schoolbook).

o^o8dc5^drfe Lde^^, I have not read either Veda or Purana (Hodson's Grammar;
about either
292. 317).
or see
(A similar seeming anomaly is found in the
I

use of

eo,

under

*5

300,

1,

remark

b, in

in that of

ew

338

cS,

^, 3).

In Ko. 7 of the present paragraph there

z-rf^

317, and

that of wrtD,

^J3t3o, he did not give me

es3^*A otedd
23o& 3v$ assddo ^rfo,3
"I

=?3Ai3ddJ3

instance

however, the instance 933o c3rftf

even one farthing, and a similar

is,

is-

d;2dj rf^ ac^^oi) sojs^r\

oisSrts?^ rfd^O^cdroft ^js^n?^, though at times the desire arises

to eat whatsoever, God has abundantly given me roots and fruits and leaves of
^cifl^ ^Jorttf c^j^

The

the jungle.

^^

53?io or

instance no doubt requires the accusative, which

first

may

be

122, C); the second instance one might translate 'though at

times the desire arises to eat
God etc., the 'whatsoever
whatsoever it may
,
it

(see

be' being not governed by 'to eat', but being an insertion standing by

may

But 3?3dtfJ3 may be, and most probably

itself.

125,

<j)

One

is,

therefore, constrained to think that

When

288.

added

to

'although',
rtJS

tJ

arfo or

a3

(accusative, see

+ *Hto*.

by an accusative, they have

is

is,

e.

3J3C

in the

lost their

modern

dialect

;3oo53

3do,
<S

Id

o3o>^

etc.

are preceded

original meaning and become mere adverbs.

e$^,

a relative past participle,

g. kt3j3,^ N dj

when w&orio,

it

then, receives the sufllx eo/o

gets the

meaning

and

of 'though',

si&ra^oo 3o$ ^JooO^Q o&4<* 3^acra

2^7

though they one by one put their kuee

(the bundle of sticks) and with

bundle did not break.

(all

their)

strength made

to

effort, that

279
,

near.

though there be a pearl

^sijOcJs rt% tfOarto&id

hood of the cobra, nobody goes

in the

though the sectarian (Vaishuava)

3{tf o,

mark be

(put to the forehead), faithfulness

314.
be put away by the bearer). Cf.
If e5C3a>rt./a<,

289.
of

very wholesome.

tddJ3

'however', 'but',
2J3oJ wajsert,;^,

c3e>rtJ3o

SoOJjjj &?*},

necessary

(i.

not

is

e.

to

and eJGidJS are used by themselves at the beginning

they mean

sentence,

tftftf

is

3d3d

rfoiio3a<5<&

'notwithstanding',

the milk of cows

,

3W

353^

jslrts?ri eSe^sktfjtfo,

2J&
~^t o3oo

Cp

e.g.

but

sJjsrf uv^j.
&3rttf(&%
co
O
t

sJeraEje-rttftfja.

ft

'yet',

is little,

man
ed^nw,
^

can make

various things and (draw various) pictures, but he has not the power of
giving them

life.

W3ci>

tJrtdJS essj^o 2036^

he

to^OwO^^o,

notwithstanding he

is

3ojjijrt^o

V
'Sl^A
1

3^f\

^rfCJJS
cp

),

eara

eruo,

eso,

z3tf,;3<&
TT

TT

-aero 3,
<j>

I,

&

5JJ^ W

learning English these two years, yet he

is

cannot pronounce v and w well.

290.

three or four years younger than

is

very good.

that boy

33 wo, d3$F&

rfJJSSSo

tftfftN.

and

296. 314.

Cf.

when summed

eru,

to the interrogatives 'who',

'what', 'where', 'whither', 'when', 'how', express 'soever', and are used
so to say to form also indefinite pronouns (see

The translation

102,

and the next four paragraphs

of this paragraph

s,

b,

remark).

into English of such pronouns, etc. in the instances

student will be able to turn

into

it

quite literal, but the

is

The

proper English for himself.

instances of this paragraph are:

tocSs'saD*,

*3d?o?

^7>e3jsv*

become poor,
king? you walk on
none is with you), edo^oo s^rto*

foot,

if it

is fit to

SAJSOri
is

woman.

^d^o.

not

(i.

e.

yrWd

is)

is),

not with you

you
(/.

e.

is

called

pramadavana.

superior to whomsoever in the world.

SjJ3^o3je

nobody

for a village in

^JO^oSo,
o'

the washermen's Male

S5 9 oiodo,

o&e>dJ3

is

a^>,

does not allow whomsoever to

be the gynecaeum, that garden

rird^ yp^o, (he

whosoever

whosoever

have

-dscrfocS

^
enter and

Zwd^dj^j*

tfzld&o*,

whosoever

does

is

which

the respectable

not

know

this.

<=<.

OiJeido ^t3?)6? o3J)dJ3 'S^,

not whosoever
seen

(/.

whomsoever

e.

o
none at

(i.

e.

nr

all),

^ysffo

have seen

who

is

in the

COndflQ

nobody).

J.

room?

?5J3?d)t>,
CO

(there)
I

is

have not

280
do not entertain malice against whomsoever.

tf&Sktf

sJJsStfoao.

'S

CO

CO

here no fault whatsoever.

one who does not know

S3&3 9 afcc3s3ffo,

>fij?>

king, your queen hasTcommitted

S3d3 S^odo^

>&> rU)^^, he has no knowledge

this umbrella is
whatsoever regarding that,
-d? ^JSdcdoo
>?!
^rjrf<y,
O CO
of no use whatsoever.
5^>tf -ds 3J3&>
>c3J3
rforsC)^, in his health
whatsoever,

pjsj^fi

ov

there

to-day no improvement whatever.

is

e3vejd>,
co

^J3?l>

the child will not eat whatsoever to-day.

^5>0&o

o&ei^Je), 23^d, pickles absent at dinner are not good for whatso-

ever,

gora^ ftdrt&stffl

'd'

'assL*.

ro

among

(as plantain trees).

zS^rt

20

fruit-trees there are

>(&&

cjto

wOorfs^

^->^A
"~"^

none whatsoever which bear

^e)rfsj

o&SjC^JS,

3oP?3,

otorfrfp

&),
f1!

fruits so quickly

he who has nothing

whatsoever, does not feel aversion to whatsoever.

<o>3oo xfsoioo o 23a,^os ^o?S njjddo, though hot water gets hot how
*v
O

much

soever, a house does not take fire (on account of

there

o,

is

no disaster in what manner soever

5pdo,

to

it).

a poet.

we have not seen whensoever such a wonderful

rioiOod 2pJSo, a piece of land that is not cultivated at

thing.

what time

dC^rf, a horseman
O doa^A
O
who did not mount (a horse) at what time soever, mounted the horse in
a reversed way.
<>}> rU> 3$ ssoSorl^ dj)^j ^)J)S3 eradcSo, one must not
O
O
word
of (one's) parents at what time soever,
the
w^rio rio3o,
transgress
soever.

oi^JB

D>4^ ^obod^

>S3c3

Cj

CJ

as?.

a piece of land that

whensoever.
^SSi

time soever

>&;
u

is

^^

3o&>

not cultivated at what time soever.

aSort?^)

^{i r!re?^J3,
=<ca

<.

who has learned

Sj^roJ^^o, a female

slJ^ciA
rf'

03J?)SD

">-

science, will at

what

make her husband and children happy, to^j^ s3o^?io o&e)57S>

a miser's mind is whensoever base. aoe)rlJ3 3oU cSjS^ri S3o3jj
?,
("0

howsoever on the feast there will be no school for five

orfa^),
CO
days.

s3s3$J3drs?o

e.

(i.

essJs^+ero

mediseval

+ ^dr^o) 2^^^

s5ojc3oT&-

whatsoever a
^33e)gaJo^ o^^siorto,
female is somewhat old and has put on a cloth dyed with red ochre, is
called katyayani.
^Oofcosi^ 'aQakosij* <o>odooo ^^o, there and here
oiraA

=5)>o3o

^?6crfo?5*

eroy,^ ^o

oo

co

<r>

(and) wheresoever (is) Arjuna.

it does not stand wheresoever.

55c3oioo (=<o)oJoJS, medieval)

a?i< Sdje)?i
">

<a?i
V

rf

sJdrtJS

tO>o3uJ?>

xfeiraOo,

wheresoever

have not seen such a

co'

c*>

beautiful bird as thee

So^C5 dssari sJ^oiJci

<M

up

to this very time,

oi^

281

WS &>_ 3
.

with
SN.SO^^FV*,
O^

3 o ?3e>dro*

hands he attacked, there

lifted

(and) here (and) in the intermediate places wheresoever the enemies

not waiting approached.
291.

'Soever'

is

likewise expressed by suffixing

past relative participle

ed

(of

and

esrta)

to the

erus

combined with w3> and

es6,

and

adding the thus obtained forms yc3.s>c$o and wc3dJ3 to interrogatives.

g. WD)dj53o, whosoever.
^^cSjs^o, in what manner soever. assort

e.

O33s>:3j3:$o,

howsoever.

e^SrraQCJS s^sdr^dor

actions done in a

c$c5j,

former state of existence do not leave whomsoever (Dasapada).

oi3e)Ce>
ottsOrrecidJe), to whomsoever.
o33e>s3c3>ddJ3, whosoCSdJS, whosoever.
ever, whichsoever.

whatsoever.

whatsoever, whichsoever.

o33->5jC5->c3dJS,

}35->,c3CJ3,

however so much.

rr)dCJS,

up

to

whensoever.
soever.

what time soever,

3oe> Q rrec3dJS!,

at

what time soever.

howsoever.

whithersoever.
*)rrsc30J3,
co

O CdJ3,

oi){3->
"

where-

<^27scJdJ5.

o}>o&e>c3dJe>,
co

PO

whencesoever.

o&

or to whatsoever, extent,
^JS^^sciCJS, whatsoever,
in

whensoever.

(0;ys
Qdjji,
^

aJ

whatsoever manner.

The same meaning is obtained

participle combined with e6 and ?AJ3
5^ and

?3o

(.

interrogatives,

e.

e.

g.

yc^o),

=5^

wd and

fraoajrts^o

also
e.

(i-

erua

W3oo

by

adding any past relative

ssdJS), aozl

or

x>

(i.

3?^^e>h

e.

and eo
escifc

(i-

or

io^jds^), ^>fio

e.

w^o),

$$&;),

to

^Jsa^dJS

jungle dogs run very fast; whatsoever one does, they

>,
cannot be caught,
how much soever
^sslo 3je>acjdJ3
f^srsrtcj? ^c^cio,
(he) does, loss will never fail.

^Q

c$j^Sc3dJ3

ffe)i^o,

wheresoever one

a wilderness.
<o^ ^JS^cSdJ3 do^o* t^ddo, whithersoever (he)
death
not
does
leave
goes,
>jk slrearidJS siort
(him).
aoDoSa^o^sJdji^
Oz^, whatsoever (they) may do, (their) son does not leave to say 'Hari'.
sees, (is)

^^ ^lrf
rf ??* 3>o, whatsoever one
^tfdj
(medisevalj jsss,cteo
O
xO
&J
says (and) however so much, a vile man does not give up his ways.
howsoever one reads. l)
>ff

l)

Instances in which the conjunction

&o

is

not suffixed in such u case, occur in the

following verse of the Jaimini Bharata (16, 43):

oiO^

&a&a:3

iC

36

282

to

form

an interrogative, the meaning of 'soever' is produced,

in
>s3o3ooo, when whatsoever vowels stand

front.

if sroo is

suffixed to the infinitive with

Another way of expressing

292.

and

(=eroo),

<o

is

'soever'

e.

to suffix

is

added

g.

e5cfoo

is composed of tJ^
176) and
(see
means having become though', 'though having

This suffix

to interrogatives.
src

and

this

Also

literally

become'. E. g. wos^oo, whosoever.

^^3^00, whatsoever. ^^-s^o^JS^J
whatsoever
a
state.
iD^-s^o (=>{Se>c&o, mediaeval), whatsoever.
o,
oo, in what place soever, occasionally,
oi^s^oo, howsoever.
whensoever.

<oo3ra^oo, wheresoever. w^jcje)^j, whatsoever,

the removal from whatsoever a thing;
os^)c5o,

on whatsoever a (piece
ws5(3e)f3J3Ucfo whosoever a. man.
u
,

e.

g.

When
little',

fcjffoo,

wood, ws^cjs^o, whosoever.

are not suffixed to interrogatives, they signify 'a

e?f^w

'moderate',

of)

e.

e.

g.

^^?je)^jo

c3^ric3J3s?*,

in

this

much

little

or

moderate haste;
or 'a certain', e.g. 2w),^o, a certain one, in 2oM?).fSJ3
&\f$o, a certain one man (i.e. some one man, some man); &t3a.
a certain

woman;

lowi) ?J3Eo.

a certain husbandman;

&oT5\)rt?i),

a certain one (neuter), in 2;3)F2J3rfo sSe^odoO, at a certain one time

f
Q
CJ
in repetition 'either
at some time or other);
or' (cf.
317), e. g.
(e. e.
oSrerforfj
doJS^sjej^oo ^rtejSf&o, either east or north; ?s)
ro

^^^^f

either there or here;

idse)^o,
'about' in

3 <|3>ffoo, either then or now;

1

either one or two;

sjg^rfoo

^JSCS^^o,

oj^jSreOj (oif5|j^o+iraOj),

either ten or hundred;

about eight.

Remark.
In the modern dialect

(see

boatman.

293.

and

this

283),

e.

g.

a certain

w^ odnd&ac

Cf. also

The y^oo
t?C3o

'

310,

2 at

&>

'

expressed also by the interrogative suffix

^ra^ she (is) the wife of a certain
ea^rtrf
is

the end.

292 appears also as

again appears with a short
of

5ra (for
?5^)4-e5o.

for io^rarao, ^jdrcio,

wrao, S5C3o
e.

g.

mean

CO

(there)

is

is

(see

'soever',

rtara^ wra^j

ever. ^ejoJord^ sscadj* <ae>, (there)

esrao,

i. e.

fcjf

(for

176) as esrao,

i.

e.

'whatsoever', elliptically

*ae;,
(there) is
CO

no merit whatso-

no business whatsoever.

no doubt whatsoever.

283
If the interrogatives

294.

a following noun,
e.

'soever',

y.

a^^^^

o&e>s3

wxo are suffixed to this noun in order to express

roo,

wd

in whatsoever direction.
d?5oio>ofojo,
f*5

foolish
>JS

,,

to

sense,

3o, do?e3

g.

do

&,<, you

55 e>rt

whatsoever

for

good

manner

Also

(i.e.

the genitive

if

to

suffixed

3^

this

noun

business.

in

noway).
(&&}
same

oiJSd
in the

annoyance of whomsoever

ffskJo^P *3e>rtck,

djsSoSck

oSistf

sl)^?ortj3

t.

mind

no book

wdd^k^ro

"jy

of whomsoever.

QV

(About

298.

see

300).

If &?3o is

&

is

'arf^o.

this will not suit the

about &<

a.

o\a (sroo)

o&>d

23

is

3s?tf?a3oOti)rtdj otos^j

whatsoever

in

whatsoever extent.

not come upon you.

will

not

*-

e.

not

(i. e.

XSoX

sSof^N &>e*3

there

are

boys

S5^,
M'

stands before a noun,

e.

ede$dbr&a

^f^o oJJ5>3

not have to suffer whatsoever distress.

will

to

not whatsoever book

is

'S^, (there)

on the table,

at all)

are connected with

odJsrf, <03^, etc.

w3,

used instead of

^JSjiodoo ^?iJ3

oirsrf, the eru5 is

commonly

^?odej this umbrella

Q ro'

(there)

suffixed to ajfo,

of no use whatsoever.

is

was no money whatsoever about him.

Osj

But on the other hand there

your

is

285

In

also in the

it

modern one

cr.

committed here

has

queen

about
295.

e.

no

fault

whatsoever.

no doubt whatsoever.

this there is

has been stated that besides in the medieval dialect

en> is

used instead of

Thus we

erua.

find e.g.

(for oD{3s)C3dJe>), 0&'e)Os)C3dO (tor 0&e)0'3C3dJ3)

O3j3s3z3e>t3do

(for oSi^OrracSd.),

(for

CJdJ (for o^SJS CJdJS), (03oi3)t3dj (for <>}0&e>J3dvO), 033s)3>rtaj (for

289

In

296.
of 'but'.

It

may

escdbJS) ('

5Jje)Qrf

^e

wd+wd+axe)

get also that of 'also', e.g.

^NrrscSdJS S5)^o3o^ sL&eeS

appear also

e.

^,

if

to thee in that very

rt^fio, ^^)OrotSf^J,

till

appears

3w

(thou) reflectest a

manner.

now

&5s>d

put

the meaning

djsa ?5J)?aa6

little, it is

likely

to

rfuri

wrf?l>

up with the

faults

(5t)^c$dv>

also

in

'3t?>(3

committed by him.
36*

284

A remark
means

literally

when (there
,

becomes or

'if

sJSo&o oa^aC)

if

3?^,

is)

no

if it

is

silver,
if

&j

are no children,
black,

(there

is)

(it

it

e.

which

JcS+ss6),

tsrfd

aS-^,

sorrowful thought',

is)

eS^

thought.

not agreeable to the thief?

when

(there) are children, (it is) trouble;

trouble,

milk black?

(is its)

sorrowful

is)

(i.

are', e.g. ?o3o3oj

a wife, (there

is)

is

ejc3i3

become or

'if

is',

(there

wife,

3Sl.,

is

made regarding

here to be

is

e*^sk

goe>7Te>c36,

^S3^> ri6 35e>wo

if

is so.

(it)

^53

?,

if

23^e>c36,

(there)

cow

the
if

(it)

is

required.
e?c36,

>^J3 rtrf^> 5&3<3 z3?&0,

O

CO

somewhat

often used

is

head of a sentence, e.g. $e53odfi>

ro

at the

however,

must not make any noise

there.

ejrfdJS, 'but', if it

sicfoeieSoSJS^rt

stands

wrfd

SoJ^AQ,

you into the veranda, but you

of

all

go

like

irvz$ ft^rt<& ^033*

a5e)aJc3 ^J3r3e3

dOoSJ
jj

some

V
plants, as soon as they are touched, close, but do not experience joy

sorrow like living beings.

&

and

ssei^^soSJa h^rl^o
cS^cSOro =^dj ?j<^rte>
oo
<p

C3o,.

wrf6 S5oio

6J'

nutmeg

places

The

297.
,

trees,

but

in this country there are in some

wrtodas;,
n*

(their) nuts

314 and see the use of

Cf.

place.

So3?^ ^6)030

conjunctions

w^,

wW

tjtfd in

9
,

(fceO'tfo,

334.
etc.

212,

a),

again, further, and, are used in adducing something additional,

e.g. sii^

(>c3*

.o^o^cSo)

^333d 4>0&ft^
5rfj^)?d

is

do not become like (those) of that

composed

of

530^+

sjoi

6.

(.

it

e50e)rt5JOC5j

cSjsc^

sS^rfo,

so that
S5o,

&e?3o ^3oosj^^e)qJr^o^

OS

originally

w^^

VD fi Sl> 3-> =5*0,0.

rfods^rtosa^drap?
PO

sjj^ o

means 'and further'

v,
O,
a iJ3?e3'3o5*
fj

etc.

dj?s3

etc.

like

285
An

means

instance in which ;5or3*

is

the following:

(which we met with already in multipli280) is used like

In the modern dialect do^)

cative

'or'

and additional numbers at the close of

310),

(ef.

e.

g.

(v

289

See an instance in

&>&* w )In the same dialect

3o"srtJ3

used in the sense of 'and',

e.

(35e5orlJ<)),

^d) (=#^d^)

g.

The Sabdamanidarpana

298.

so also, likewise also, has been

toSotf

QV

states that

tS^oiwrfa^,

("of

35e>rU>

ao* = '3vD')

is

kriyatmakavyaya, i. e. a particle (avyaya) that partakes of the nature

of a verb.
Its formation has been shown in
209, note i (see also

^dc3^,

(i.

e.

^F^ri^osis* 'S^o,

g.

as

o+w)

When
e.

appears also with a final euphonic sonne as 'S^o,

's.ej

210).

-ao^

and

in

the modern

209, note

i;

212,

'SsSpS*

CO rta,

215,

(cf.

CO

2 15,

>

'Sie;
CO

or a euphonic

i),

g,

7).

followed by a vowel, the final letter of

^573

e.

dialect with a euphonic

53*

either disappears,
is

inserted,

e.

g.

3).

used either by itself, or in combination with nouns, pronouns,

In combination with bhavavacanas, i. e. verbal nouns ending e. gis

etc.

in y\)c5o

in 55^0

and yrfo
187,

200,

i;

i.

3,

188. 209,

once also in

s),

it

3o, see

is

wwo

conventionally convey the meaning of the past

changed into the dative

i)

or

forms so to say a third person in the

conjugation of the negative.

In the modern dialect bhavava&anas with

remark

194,

(=#,,

>) and

(the nominative)
(

209,

'at* is suffixed,

s).

and

If ess;o

the meaning

of the past disappears.

In the
1,

same

'aw by

dialect

^^

is

joined also to past participles.

itself.

'

'so, and
the victory)? (No), he
,

is

not.

${&

ever having seen a ripe

is

(king)

Nilagriva able (to gain

sorro

(3e>cSOJ& tf^ortSe
water-melon art thou?

am

not

286
hast thou ever seen a ripe water-melon? No,

(i.e.

have not),

'aw
having become (i.e. have become andi
ro'

^)0?3 3Ds3? t5h^o3J3e ?

<S,Q

are all those (things in the house) of themselves? (No), they are not.
3eJ

>^>Cj&

$?ck

Wri^rt

w<aae? aw,

sira^o

CO

abused him in any way? No,

They were not

"

is

is

had

upon the cocoa-nut

^,o
tJO

rjo?o,

tree?''

(There)

316,

(cf.

e.

i).

CO'

CO

and das), a
/
*

rtotio)r3 ;3ori>w

the son of

Drona

is

is

no

^cdozosfo*

is

it is

not

Drona

is

(i.

me

for

&o$^j* cSoJo^w.
oo'

e.

(i.

in

fault).

no doubt).

is

Karna

not whosoever

is

not a pot (i.e.

is

an eating and a putting on (there)

&Q

^$f(

there

is

still

(there

dorf^f^ 5$j?s3

not

is

^&oj w,
oo"

53^^

Yama's messengers whatever mercy

all).

S$J3^ 'adOw,
(there) is not

(i. e.

VJB 33$ *aw

near

is

no stay for a moment).

me whatsoever book

there

(there) is not

d s3oee3
tO
moment a

^^^

f$j$

(there) is not

is

&>30fi

^j)o,

co

after the period (of life) has expired, for a

there

e.
(i.
^

(there) is not a

no fault on Madana).

Yama's messengers have no mercy at

Sj)?o

not (present),

is

(there)

s^kJDow,
(there)
CO

great trouble

no longer great trouble for me),

on Madana

0, there

2c^)C,))OW,
oo

with you).

no

it is

they have nothing to eat and to put on).

(i. e.

a?Xw
Lco'

(i. e.

not (present),

is

py

not

e.

vurswoc^wo ^sl)hw

pot).

not for them

fault

not (present).

with (you,
i.e. nobody
*

(i. e.

"

asked the gardener.

is

0, doubt (there)

fault

adow.)

s3j?s3

AjS^Je)?oDow. (generally
there) is not a composition
V

TT

is

sdodri

JoFic3

no composition) of Kannada and Samskrita words.

^sJCJo ^d^v%dds3J3^o z3J5^3SlOjw, also if a Samskrita word follows

generally there

(the terms ^s;

(V)

there

myself), I

T7

-rf-

(i. e.

<oejs>

anywhere on the body?

with nouns and pronouns

in combination

^ric^o
l

zScfSoflftrarttfo s3oo3o

come down", replied he (i.

(to
that very reason I come down, replied he).

not; and for

*aw

2,

not, sir (i.e. hadst thou

r\

not, (thus) saying indeed

is

was

not, sir).

no, they did not).

(i. e.

(there) grass

no, there

did the bees sting (you)

'at),
ro

^^dsS^o?

rfdJS

having spoken

733,033,
oJ

whatever bad words to him wast thou?

(i. e.

s3rs

stay

o&>si

have no

(is)

Sunday,

or,'

book at

all

with me),
'

school (there)/
\.

for those
is

is

not

-ds

3J3^J
-* tJa^S3e>d

?ros3

-0

(i. e.
\

there

is

no school).
j

who have no understanding, fortune

no fortune).

^f(

draosS? 'aw, for

me

'aw to-day
co'
ta3

'awc^Stf

(there) is not

(the sun, there)

(i. e.

is

rt3

'aw,
there

not fatigue

287
indeed

knowledge

never suffer fatigue),

e.

(i.

is

not

do not know

I
(i. e.

esck N?$rt

to say

not

is

3&?COjd

>:&

me

'aw, that to

^w?tow,
***

thou doest not want

(i. e.

greater than
3o^dO^,
J^dhji
3o5jW,
ro
co
^

aDoBjftrf

anything).

$jl>

that).

thou whatever saying a business (there)

rtJSaO,,

**

mother benefactors (there) are not, greater than sugar sweetness (there)
not (i. e. there are no greater benefactors than a mother, there is no

is

than

sweetness

greater

that

of

f>

3^3
*~*

sugar).

sSo^wo

wcrrsdOw,
PO

better than pure gold (there) is not, better

^jacSOw
5Jo^?r?$
"~^ sSo^wj
^
than cliildren lisping (there) is not (i. e. there is no gold better than
*3"

no lisping better than that of children), 'a^w, ^rt?

Q oo
^Wn)^ ^OJOJ? & wdosjdo, to-day it is not, but to-morrow that

pure gold, there

ej

oi3e>c$dJ?>

is

work will be accomplished (i. e. to-day it is not likely to be accomplished,

but to-morrow that work will be accomplished).
$3f{ 33Q SDOforttfoflJS??
cj
'aw/to thee father and mother are (there)? Whosoever (there)
are not (i. e. hast thou still thy parents? No, I have nobody).
$f( -d?
oiiscSJS

oirstfo
,

O"

o3:s)dJ?)

^js^do?
who gave thee

aw;

this knife?

having opened the bundle of Narayana

^Oo^dcS?
(there)
3,

is

ii^J5 'aw, is (there)

not any

ste;

in

(i.

e.

^^

c^c^oj^rs^ rtc^
Whosoever not (i.e. nobod
took

ghee near you

'arffi^

it

to myself.

e.

(i.

^^

adf^S

have you some ghee)?

have none).

combination with verbal nouns

316,2.12)

(cf.

participles (which are finally also verbal nouns, see

and

past

169).

'Sc^do rta^o&^rfoao Tjsj^J^d^doJ^WDrssdsSri,

till

now

(he)

is

not

a having become an object of aim to a stroke of an arrow discharged by

the hand of Kama (I. e. till now he has not become an object etc.).

11

in

not

and

mango

troe

among a

was not able) to

open and shut (its)

(i. e.

to

flock of crows in the

wood a having been able

and go away, and also at night to cry,

eyelids, (in short) to do anything on account

rise

of fear.

<as?

the young cuckoo

gtliidofcd&tte&o

>

288

the month Mage

^^,s3^Ds?o3j3^* ||
appearance so that in the covering cold the points of

dj3^

slrafl

grandly made

its

the compass, the sky, the earth, mountains (and)

having been able not to be seen

which

known

is

(i.

for (its) misty heat

could not be seen) on the earth

fruits are growing fully ripe.

e.

when

e.

(i.

the queen has not committed any fault here).

some monkeys a

to

(there)

some monkeys have no tail). 23^

(i.
(there) is no knowledge, honour a coming

not

is

if
(i.

e. -honour

is

not obtained).

boys are good for nothing).

(she) an appearing

(i.

me).

being

co

where
'ans&oe? =f>rajda^,
co'

<>}

(i. e.

3^3

^e>ssl

not

is

not for whatsoever work

(i. e.

3orco

<s?se)

is

3o^>

<w

^e>>033q$r

is

me

not pleasant to
(he)

do3o>^,

&

having sat

not a being pleasant to

eat such good ripe fruits alone

^odoO^,

she?

pa

Jrio5J>o, so that (I)

N^ri

35e>tf

stupid
is

she does not appear).

down and

tfsikj

(there)

is

eat such (good) ripe fruits alone

to sit

e.

not

is

ioU^e =3^^)

rtv^

tail

e.

stupid boys a coming (there)

down

made

the queen a having

not any fault here

howsoever, a

forests,

having

abandoned not deceit (and other) sin, (and) a having obtained not the
desired object (i. e. he has not abandoned deceit and other sin, and has
not obtained the desired object).

tJ^^ 3e)03o z3^-sd3SL> o^ro So^C^rfdJa

though his mother having made

^tfOw,
CO
much as was necessary, (he) a hearing was
clearly told

3o&3 9 rio

tftfo^

stones

not

him

(i.

(and)

told (him)
his

e.

so

mother

though
(i.
was necessary, he did not hear). =3^0
sJoo^rt
^ e having trodden on
wddO CTSO

all that

^ri%,

23??i^^o,

(and) thorns grew fatigued, but the way a being found was
he trod on stones and thorns and grew fatigued, but the
e.

way was not found).

he

clear

not

does

not

intend

ss^^
to

SoJ3?rt

t>,

~y CO

go or probably

he to a going

will

not go).

wl

is

&>?ri

not

(i.

e.

3jQc3d

^^rtJ5
(you) do so, his
>etf*,t>,
"
U
anger will be assuaged, and blows to a falling on thee are not
and blows will not fall on thee).
c^ wd^JS^^^,
(i.e.
^,^,
v
7
=L
< attack

e^tf

?oUo.

atfofcostej.

if

-3-

(T)

-55-00'

whosoever are not to an allowing thee to come near

allow thee to come near).

^j^

3o>rte

s3o?>tf

yet writing on thy board a having been finished (see

(i. e.

zodad

nobody

will

3?0w^se,

168. 169)

is

not?

289
has writing on thy board not yet been finished Vj.
cks&tfj dJ3Q^, men a having made the sun are not (i.

(i.e.

*U

is

man

has not

"**>

d^sjrf^j, G33e>&> ?5J3^ao, whosoever a having seen

the sun),

not

(i. e.

SS ^

"SSJ)

C5

&

nobody has seen God),

cra.3

^"\

ok

aorso rttfo aootf

ra

grapes are

these

z3^e)Auf>
me having become are not

?tetf

requiring for

sour,

therefore

^, then Gurupada was beaten (by

(and)

),

his

in

e3, eci
these

t;rf

his schoolmaster).

In his inkstand ink a having been was not (i.e.

Why?

God

therefore these are not

(i.e.

do not want these).

required for me, that is to say: I

ink

e.

mado

bundle a pen and paper

there was no

a having been were not

there was not a pen or paper).

(i. e.

about 'ae)

4,

53).

<*>

si>Oc3e>rtsJ3

ri&ft

future happiness

(i.

?JS$f3)>s3j, a means (there) is not for (obtaining)

e. there is no means for obtaining future
happiness).

however so much (the fox) jumped

(the bunches of grapes) a coming in reach for (his) mouth were not
could not be reached with his mouth).
See also Dasapadas
(i. e.
j3Sls>

23,

z3ftzrartJ^

W303ort

48, 2; 148,

i;

^os'O^ke;

;$,

7.

about the combination of 'ae) with

5,

CO

wile;

rfooosl

z3^o; orlo

jsdo!

^J3^o! dJS3)do^
wy,o)
6j

3,35lo

SiwosJ Soe)At>, mother, mother,

ro
co

Why so much hurry, Rama?

(it) quickly!
a
a
basin!
staying thus (quite literally: of the
(Mother) give (me)
staying in this wise, see
186) talking (there) is not (i. e. there is no
a basin

is

required; give
first

time for

me

to stay

and talk now),

^ra^

the millet-stalks a reaching thus for

millet-stalks

>J>3 9

3oJ3?03oJ^J.d

1,

or

hands (there)

my
my

hands),

of <0,

&>,

i,

with

(i.

e.

the

s3oio?j?c$dJ3

'ae^.

is

combined with

and

,0

CO

ftffi

not

^t>n 5.

In these two forms 'at>

interrogation

is

prime of life has passed''

'ao, "also
not (i. e. you cannot say that also my prime

is

About the combination

'aej> s5

my

with

So^rS

a saying thus (there)

of life has
passed).
299.

reached

cannot be

^tx^o^ aoSAo

=$ol>

^fl

212,

and
meaning of ^o^S
CO

e),

suffixed

by

means

two particles of

euphonic zf. The

not?" "are (there) not?",

of

is first "is (there)

<at)s3^
CO

),

37

290
&i&Atffteft (&)>

e.g.

there no

Se, is

the gingely-oil seed? (answer:

oil in

zXS^xs* Slori^ 3j>>o ;3, if one flower fades,

is).
5^5^CW sSj3^j
CO
Q
7J
are there no flowers for the black humble bee? (answer: yes, there
yes, there

are).

This meaning, however, often changes into 'or', literally l; is it not

(this)?", i. e. if this is not the case, then it may be also this, e.g. $ft

when thou
i.

e.

any pain,

getst

is

or)

known by

his words, is

not (this?

it

or) by (his) conduct.

e.

is

rSdc&J^

is

will

parents

3$oi>o;lc3, man's

not by his words?

it

rreokdfl^ftrf

not pain? then also

it

thy

thee),

(to

^^s3
co

rfj^Sjj wsjrf tfoaoBotf

s&cte^tf
rO
1)
G>

i.

not (this?

it

when sickness happens

grieve.

mind

is

then also

3rtdd

S^ca

O^^

if
^JsS.oao^ ?ioej.6
rreokrf&i.
^C5orfay,
(one) removes
c*.
f
Q
6J
V
the blood out of the wound (made by the teeth of a snake), the poison
?

take no

will

then also

is

effect,

i. e.

not (this?

it

or) if that

wound

is

is it

not the removal of the blood?

cauterised, the poison will take no

effect.

2,

or
'aoE^p
CO ^

When

the interrogative particles

by means

of a euphonic

occasionally one of

more

53*

it
,

^ and

conveys

t,

212,

e)

are suffixed to

the meaning of a question,

first

or less displeasure, e.g.

ttft

z$3t%f\ r5{Cb55De>
M
23

5^,

does buttermilk not agree with thee?

S3d3 wi^oJo

efte>3t> $8{,

wCS9 ?;^^, has that milk not got

cool?
wdrfo ZJd0tk)dpe, will he not come?
$$^ aoOri^ do^S^
on
board
not
finished
has
been
eodao 3^0o ^p^,
writing
thy
yet (i.e.
r
doest thou still write on thy board)?
ssd^o a^J3 SoJ^riOodx, nas ue

is

there no sack near

him?

ooe)OO

^3^

not yet gone?

^o

WtiirfOw

3(Jf ,

wilt thou not

But then ^^)d(5, 'aw^? frequently mean

CO
CO
be?', 'was it not?', i.e. 'or not?', e.g.
a having strained the water of Siva, or not?
strained, or not?).

come?
is it

(i.

=3^ siraSd dod^ eSA^o, do

e.

not?

Siva's

'will

it

not

water was
Co

aiora drt sS8CSF?rarl)rfGw

C

O
O)
a pruned tree will sprout and grow, (and) become a large tree, or not?

The moon that

full

lost its

on the day of

&$?:

full

splendour on the day of new moon, will become

moon, or not?

sS^f^j, ^cs ^rsrfF2^>

&tf^ skozd

^JS^cdoo 3od^dcSo2J8e?
CO

^QoJo so^dtfo, he (the boy)

said,

291
"is

my

To <ao
f>
its

new axe sharp?

(literally: his)

down

to cut

form

is

the

'aw an
at>>P
CO

of emphasis has been suffixed to

>

CO

&

of a euphonic
it is

'certainly

or 'certainly

In <%&t
CO

and *aw has been repeated;

oo

was

awCO

not' (or 'certainly

it is

not,

it

&

it

all.

drado 'aao&D?

a.

XK&,OJJ>
tto3jdPrl;3dC$&rtd)
co
SJ &j
<0

there are unsuitable things not at all

no unsuitable things, none at

In

212,

est>

etc.,

'is

is

will not be,

not equivalent',

'is

to',

it

'aeSe
ro

(i.

expressed.

co

in the

<aw

PO

art thou tired?

in
*aw,
co

'asSe,
e.

aww'

<

is

will not be',

all' is

the universe

universe there are

209, note

not

'is

(cf.
*

tfddtfctfctoei{tfOofcJdo

stranger he did not answer to

a form of the negative of the verbal

it is

'is

In

fit',

'are not

fit',

'was not

fit',

not becoming', 'does not answer to',

not according to facts', 'is opposite to', etc.

takes also the form of eso

riofcpoko

meaning

all).

'fits not',

not corresponding

'is

literal

introduced as an avyaya.

210 we have seen that

in

theme e5^, meaning

its

not'), by which 'not at

(fi

and

by means

of emphasis has been joined to the first

e.

53*,

was

it

not,

the

without a euphonic

300.

awCO

'ao.
ro

or 'aeBe
n

Not at

and then

'a&fce..
co
r*">

In

also bo added without a euphonic

may

L>

'aorfe 'ao
ro

3,

or not? let (me) see", and began

he saw.

all

'awo
PO

in

298),

e.

g. zo^ae.rtv*

It

^&3^wo

^S&riwio, now came Bhimasena, a

e. he was no stranger), invincible,
(i.

pre-eminent in the lotus-pond of the Kaurava race. (^cSo)

(this) does not correspond to justice (i. e. this is no justice),
3Jk3;l5* eswo, (this) does not answer to silk (i. e. this is no silk).

For the existence

the author

When
appears,

is

of

unable to

y^ro d)
cite

in the

modern

dialect (cf. 'a.wrfj in

V
ro

followed immediately by a vowel, the final of

e.

e3^*, or a euphonic zf is put after

(j.

298,

4)

an instance.

it,

ww

either dis-

e.g. wwsjsrfo.

Instances are:
1,

regarding

wo.

to

(i.

become
this is

to a

Arjuna

e.

Arjuna a stranger does not answer

no stranger), he to become is required (i. e. he must
,

to

is

does not correspond to a pot (/. t\

('ad)) ^kJdow, (this)
no pot), ('ado) eruarfw, wdSoJoaooaj, (this) does not correspond
.

town

.).

(/.

c.

is

no town),

it is

a wild.

drfordwC)CSo, this

is

opposite
37*

292
virtue

to

no

is

this

e.

(i.

iotejSjawu,

virtue).

3oJSt3

a teacher

corres-

no farmer), a goglet is not fit (to be ranked)

no pot), glass is not fit amongst metals (i. e.
no metal), indeed porridge is not fit (for) a dinner (i. e. certainly is

ponding

a farmer

not

is

to

in the class of pots

is

is
(i. e.
is

(i. e.

a^

no proper dinner).

E3^o>

rt?lra?z3o,
^

rf"

SomCo&w.
M oS&ok

WN

A<3d)

o"

do

*a3) ^OJ3C3o sS^cSJSs'rtw, a peasant's reading is not proper, a cat

5
not corresponding to a royal tiger (i. e. is no royal tiger), a swallow-

is

wort shrub

not corresponding to a garden (i.e.

is

three are not

fit

in account

e.

(i.

is

no garden); these

much

are unworthy of

3otK

notice).

wherein there are no birds,

not

is

-55-

answering to a garden; wherein there are no children,

to a house (i. e. a garden wherein there are no birds,
house wherein there are no children,
wherein there

coOo3oQs;z3 dofSoJoo,
ro
ro

matha; wherein there are no elders,

matha without a guru

ro

gj

not answering

no garden; a
rfodo)^>
sJoddo.
PO
C*>'

no house).
J

is

is

no guru,

is

not answering to a house

not answering to a

is

no matha, a house without elders

is

sfos&3odcto
ri&oSJeJtfTtoUo.
s
oo

is

is

Otf^rS ^ra^orf). Vithala's

(i.

e.

no house).

is

name ....

in

wheresover a putting and selling is not equal to (i. e. Vithala's

name is not such a thing as is put and sold somewhere in a fair), ^ffo
^flcto, (man's) body his is not according to facts (i. e- man's body is

fair

not his own),

'asj^o, e5sj^j z3^o, this

man, but) that man

all

is

wanted.

3o^SP

man

tora
TO

is

not

fit

(i. e.

not this

d> 3J3$o3oodc3o Wo/r)drfe),

f
n*
c>

that shines (with) yellow colour gold does not answer to

(i.

e. is

not

hast thou perhaps

gold).
ac3;| L{(& ^odirto djsSac&Q?? ^o^orio? ese^
stolen this? Stolen property? certainly it is not answering to (i. e. cer,

tainly

milk so

it

is

oi^j,oJo

not).

much wholesome

So>^ WS^

as cow's milk

not so wholesome as cow's milk).

d6

55e))^3Slo.
is

O323Do5)0

not

fit

sJeJ.fQ
6J

wd^rUrfw,
(i.

e.

buffalo's

buffalo's milk is

3oo?Se>
-"n c$

si

^rts^O
M ro^,

IT

to^^ se3JSeci^, they manufacture sugar

6oJo^ sjjsdos^d,
but its great goodness is
(also) at Rajapura, Pattana and other places,
wcJo

not according to facts (i.e. but

addiction to opium

is

it

is

not very good).

a very bad thing; on account of it they do harm

much is not corresponding (i. e. not only this,

to (their) property, this

but) also to (their)

life.

'S,3l

e5o, this

much

is

not corresponding to

293
facts

^e>^)
it is

this is not all).

'

e.

(i.
v

erorsj

not

this a

so),

there are

one

^cto,
or>>

rf-

to

corresponding

it is

not

*5sj

in

nr

are:

)tfJ3

fit

(i.

others.

not

rloc3c3>

-dj

CJ

**>

not

fit

fit

(i. e.

(i. e.

no,

?3drfj?3aJoJ,

this is not

a poor-

^c$rttf?k,

si>JrlJ3,e3o
L

*t

not only one, not only

in

this hill.

e?l>

thou in this way a making a proper thing

it is

3ofrt

not

not right for thee to do so; cf.

316, 9).
(i.
of
use
remark
umbrella
this
any
(see
6)?
=t>?jC$^, (is)
e.

it

is

umbrella

this

e.

(i.

e.

oiOca^,
W

Jo^e;,
Qf

two are not

fit,

is

'adiqJ^oFSDe3oio^,

hundred mines they have dug

two, but) three

d? T?J8zSoko

not corresponding to facts

is

is

some

still

asylum, but) a palace,

rf3e>J&s3&i

are these all the arguments? (this much)

poor-asylum

Whack g e^ 6,

o3rasteo

whatever manner

it is

good for nothing). o&e>3 ^5e>rfa?j e>>

not fit (i. e. in no way). Other instances

is

-acio doo&3<y, dtfaorttfo.

asjjij

5&<&&cto,

Remarks.
a)

in the use of 'Ssj

Regarding the practical difference

298) and

may be said that ^^ expresses positive non-existence and positive

^ w relative negation and negation of quality, nature or character.
4)

It

not impossible that

is

formed an answer

show

to

^^ when

following a noun,

denial,

etc.,

it

and

originally

Let us take a few of the above-mentioned

a question.

sSesrfy
might be translated '(is) Arjuna a
S>d33J3^o
Likewise
C9&>) 3^3o<
not)'.
'(is this) a pot? No (it is
(he
stranger?
wctooJjsdod)
C9ck) A/3du,
'(is this) a town? No, it is a wilderness'.
not)'.

instances to

No

To

this.

is

give this

meaning

to

ww, would recommend

when ^J

itself,

^^\

is

sometimes

&&,, jfcJ^isiyJf^
(Bombay schoolput after an accusative, e.g.
3, 6), 'me (i. e.. did I beat me)? No, I beat my younger brother'.
'Sd^y,
aSjaddrfj

book

e3rfc^ ^3 (Rev. F. Ziegler in his Practical Key, page 27),

man? No,

call

that roan'.

Cf. the accusative after

W %c3

'(shall I call) this

in

338, and see

287, remark.
Sutra 47

of the

is

of

composed
and O( 3

called negative participle, see

171
rt-cddrfy
and
the
instance
3,
gives

e5
% c3, when it denotes
y ^,^, = aui> + *>i or is the so-

Sabdamanidarpana teaches that

emphasis (nirdharamirtha, and

$2Prtc:

in

338), occasionally drops

which stands

for rlad3rf<u

its

d 4P^*'-.

fit indeed (or a

being not meant
do not praise anybody but Gorava)'.
Thus the

translation would be 'Oorava a being not

indeed) I do not praise

(t. e.

instance appears in Lingayta manuscripts; a Jaina manuscript of Mudabidaru

has w3?53dw

^pnc*o which stands for c3?3d?ie;d

c3?3do before

"

s&rfc^o,

d, but cS^do*, the nominative, before

putting the accusative

wThe Mudabidaru

294
MS.'s writing
is

in this case

may be wrong,

may be

or

not, so far as the accusative

concerned.
in combination

regarding ese>

2,

35>rio, thus (as you think)

ododoJo
hoof of horses

tfjatfftrf

cosrto,

r!l3oJoJ3
iO

not

is

(=^33 ri^o)

fit

A^Sdo^d,

is split.

it

wo,

e.

(or es^,).

(i. e.

thus

^orfo^cdo

beautiful

amongst beasts there are none

Ojs^orl^o

?d

so

5oe>ri

is

v3

and strong
beautiful and

assflecfc
aB^fl wrfj^ejejess&e,

as fishes cannot leave water

these (frogs) are not according to facts

not),

the hoof of cows

(i. e.

horse

&L

it is

the hoof of cows so as the

3Js!or1$J3^ri

the

like
wo,
^ amongst beasts

(any) are not fit (i.

strong as the horse).

^^

35 o>^

not corresponding to facts

is

unlike the hoof of horses),

ds

it

with

and

so

live,

anyhow

so these frogs are in no

(i. e.

way).
s5
regarding ese;
o5, eso
C">
f*>

3,

These forms bear the

tJrlodjrfo,

augment

ris*

oJ

?o

not?).

of question

suffixes

E.

instead

e3>s3,
CO

doocte

sSsk,

g. Strsrtrfo

is

not fit?

it

co
f>
li
^p
9
ojoo^? a living being that says "this

man

person, or not? an apathetic

unwise person, or not?

six

days

sscS?

that

(or six

SoDS,
(is)

days hence

is)

and thine
wwsSf?
PO

rf$>e>rl;&o

(i. e.

is it

(life)

is

unstable",

not so? or
fcjrirftsaa
v
r=r>

a wise

(is)

(is)

the same road, or not?

(is)

an

a^^S a?rf*^ 3oU, wosS?? to-day

3e3j3

CO

e.

es&o? the

25^dj^D^^^S3? Vyoma

g. s^P^rfo
(i.

>0e>rtdoort$

the last

>?ic3J3

3^0 rta>

N ,

S5e3e,'
en

a sparrow, or not?

being in the affirmative; in

fit?

53*,

^d^odorf doead

5.

In these three forms the suffixes of question ?,

E.

expecting an

the illumination-festival, or not?

or
regarding e$odp,
esosfo?,
CO
CO

4,

>,

that forgets the fear of hell,

C3o

rt

and

augments 'So* and Oof the

the

of

t3e)?icioos3?
v

5es

<^

two insert a euphonic

first

used ad libitum,

is

5.

f*l

answer in the affirmative; the

one adds
immediately to wo.
S'S'o B?S

esd

or

is it

not so?

or not?).

ig

appear, the answer

is joined immediately to
50.
a well-behaved man, is it not

to

(is)

^3^)

^jdf^a^dosS^? we

are

mortals, or not?

301.

woo

we3
-3BI

and
'sod
wod.
PO
fo

avyayas by the Sabdanusasana

place

338. 316,

5).

t3erf

which are classed under the

'

212,

7),

will

be treated of in another

295

AVO
CO

In the Sabdanusasana's

212,

the nominative of oio

7)

(266)

has been used adverbially (see the verse quoted under No. 17 in
348);
in its
>* the same has happened regarding this interrogative pronoun
Its ortosSo and
255).
see
125) and curtailed

>;3o

regarding the way

1,

is

&

peculiarities

modern dialect

expressing certain English adverbs:

expressed by means of the instrumental

>?jo

Stiitf

rftxtfj

352,

ablative,

adotf ?oOo&s>rt

since

days there existed in the

many

become

jfo^sjo^da^

like

ss>

mind

of a fox

$$
%$Ci w^do

esSSorf^

a^zo.
1J

d s3o?dJ3U do
VJ

since (or from) that time they began to love each other.
his or her or its or their)

(my or thy or

since

a),

this

rf^Fatf, since
^dirf^x r3ja?S^, I have not seen

tiger.

^ra^o

brother since Monday.

>?$,

tO

the haughty desire to

sixty years.

skr$rCr3J3tfrt

(i. e.

how many days has

DC&C&o C9ro DtfFtrfftA{, since

Siva not dined? &,<&

my

(chiefly) of the

Since (with regard to time).

This
e.g.

of

(the accusative,

I shall do.

flo3o,o,

Here follow some

302.

what?

are compounds of

23\3

youth (or from my,

etc. youth)-.

But there

is

another

namely by means
e.

participle,

this

&

g.

of expressing 'since' (in the

way

of the verb

oxoOrt

yrto

in

srfffo

i. e.

dodrftfo 20^0 <03SU

r3^

how many days

3

'

>

t>%

since the

3do3Sls3303j3.>,

died twenty years ago).

how many months

is it

is

it

it is

dialect),

combination with a so-called past

town the gentleman a having come

passed,

modern

&tt

wo5j^>, literally: to

(
169) how many days have
gentleman came to this town?

twenty years since he died (or he

336^

3oJa?rt^,v 3o3"^D o^o,

W
since you began to go to school?
??&

sr>

^o^^do

crawj^eoo ^djsSrtv)C5^),

now about 400 years since the art of printing became known.
3oJS 3
^ o3o^o, much time has passed since he got up

it

is

(or he

got up long ago).

Also tha past participle of

s5;S)ciejo^ja^

manner,

e.g.

may

$ ^ a^j^ sSJSci^o^J3o^o, since that day.

The Samskrita wdde

is

used so too,

e.

g.

y^

rf

Hence (with regard to time).

2,
This may be rendered in the following manner:
zo^,

be used in a similar

to-day six days

(will be)

yd^, since
*a

fl

that time.

S3J arf^

}?$

the illumination festival, or six days

296
hence

months

month.

this

&

illumination festival.

the

(will be)

348,

Cf.

six

vlorftfo,

Before (previous to).

3,

282, as will be seen, some instances in which this adverb

In

fojo, have been given.

expressed by
rendered also by siodew, e.g.

it is

ddo
Q

before you

si>F2

^kk sJdtK;?^

who were

is to

It

s3J3dew <ag o&e>d>

^doftr^

living here?

esd-ck?$

is

be remarked here that

s3J3doo

^do^

prior to that.

<3

a house

sSjBcSwo

e3^h

&?j

3<?s>

also:

slod^j

zted3>f\

rred, eaokJ^,

slQd^o

TO*

words a proverb

(is fit),

In connection with
participle

en)& ?tee)05o. previous

oj

previous to dinner pickles (are

rfoo?lo,

also used, e.g.

is

before building

^s^rto^d,

necessary to clear the foundation properly.

it is

Thus
to

WC3j

3ort$rl

29.

SJOOF^

&$dF

fit).

before, previous to, the negative

riJS^e^oJo

d> &>rUirid

S&OF^O,

before

the neighing sound of the mares entered the ear; ^^1 ^jsd^fi 3*$ zjsrfd
oO

before the black colour

sjoo?4,

came

in connection with rfooos, e.g. s$s3do

^ooosl,
sdrf^i?!
O O

etc. in

to thy throat.

wsdrf s&oosS, before they

'As usual', 'as on previous occasions'

e.

3oe>ri,

as usual

3J3^o

(cf.

may be

or

a^d^

expressed by

335^0

g.

Sama may have annoyed

thee somehow.

as usual the servant came at dinner-timeW^^j,

o
as before; and in the mediaeval dialect: <>j) ^, 0?> 3

Wrie;o S5e)^d^o

sSjsd^,

'As
become,

him he

may be rendered by means

to', 'as for'

e.

g.

cannot do

^3e>534>d6

will

wd6,

if

becomes,

if

^JSc^do (Hodson's grammar), as for us we

essj^add aJa?rto3^,?S (Ziegler's Practical Key), as to

or, as in the South- Mahratta country, by means of
go;

(^rkfi),

d
g. 3o3j
Ow

as to ghee

sjoe)^

of

(so),

ff-

^s^odo^,
Q

>3S[oJJ

or by

cradci

means

of

^A

o^^o,

impossible to say

it is
i

er,

e^

^kto 2o^s3rl^o

not required for me;

e.

done

As.

4,

w^

is

came

282).

*"

Also:

The same

^^Sjj^cS,

as to him.

he

33ft 23^, as for toys they are

Samskrita
fij

how much
is

3s!odj,

regard, concern,

^e5 9 ?lrfjo^dj

aS^W ^JS^do,

fcAj

it

will

still

anxious concerning

rise in
(his)

esdS3 O^oJos^h, as for that. (Cf.

price.

moksha.
348,

17).

297
'As if

rendered by means of the relative

is

(or y^,), e.g.

?jse3ri

past

participle

with

wcks3d3\

3oJ3?rtc3,

jtfj.

V
if
>,

(we) do

not go to school, stay (at home) to play, and when on the next day the
teacher asks (the reason), say that a fever had befallen (us), it is as if
(we) had told a lie if (we) steal the books etc. of others, it is (the same)
as if (we) acted feloniously.
'As long as' is expressed in the ancient dialect as follows: <3$ rfdo
;

as long as they possess

^dortora^ddo ?jjotfe^ to^doo,

roO

riches, will

not also scoundrels be honourable persons?

'As soon

rendered by means of the relative participle combined

as' is

& of emphasis is joined, e. g.

33
&3f$
WcS3 rt3?
aJ3e3U?$j, as soon as he had

with an adverb of time to which the

W^NO

or grfjfc

20?) c3

come, his father started,

soon

as
,

close of

&tfrt

rtorforttfj

guru came

the

or

2otfjrf?3

See also the

rose.

all

inside,

349.

At

5,

as

or

^>

This

least (with

is

regard to a sum),

expressed by

if

>is3?3dJ3,

it

(one) says

is

nothing,

e.

g.
.

V
,

out of all those mines silver

of one lac of rupees a week,

ji),

^rs^j

&

is

put at least to the amount

>e3tfdJ?> SDd>

32!3.rifl
eo

shall get at least five rupees for this box.

Just, precisely, exactly (as to a standard or fact).

6,

These terms may occasionally be rendered by

'arf

e.

g. 'Stj&.d
O
o"

9
!

oi^

ad^kcj

a&Dri

O Tf Q
being being thus,
(/.
rfrsF?S dJs><3>0, you have described him exactly.
e.

corresponding

to)

its

For.

7,

If

aoe)^),
ase)/

to

a person wants to adduce the reason (or cause) of something he

'for', 'because' are expressed
by o&es^rf 6, if I

writes or speaks about,

say (or

if

one says) why?

z3?rf!

Giis^^ 6

^J3oSJSg?pleN^?
mangoes of this tree?

ripe

^4

e.g.

It

^4
is

not

3?

jirf^rfg),
fit,

use

much shrewdness

in

any

Add

affair, for all

"ata^
shall

5&O(3

3orsj

we cut some

rttftf^

(of the)

for they are not ours.

Tado3s) 6, deceitful

men must

beings are watchful, lest they

38

298
be deceived,

-,

<,

we must

men do perhaps not see us, God sees

further e. g. Bombay school-books, 2, 1.

not (or should not) steal, for though

us always.
10.

322, and see

Cf.

3, 38. 105; 4, 10. 16. 20. 52. 98. 111. 141.

48;

In

Tor', 'on account', 'because of.

282 we have L^ort,

t>?oor(d,

L&3

with the genitive to express these adverbs; similarly are used also
lit.

53e>A,

the reason a becoming or a having become, e.g.

lit.

c3?5o3orf,
O

The same

from the

side,

Xv

ro^53"d?\

e.g.
^o?^^, on that account;
on account of him.
e.g.
d?2o5j^,
O

on that account; ^osSo^, (reason?),

and

5c3C3

$5c5C3

&$

expressed also simply by the dative, e. g. zstiHk, on that

because
account; irvti^, on account of (a) work or (a) business; 3oW1J
!$
is

of the feast;

for requesting or begging;

aS^dcS*,
1

's

for readtjdo^rf^L
"a

e5?\ a having become, to the

or by adding

for buying;

^js^^,
G

ing;

if

e.

dative,

g.

>?frTe>A,

for thee a having become,

lit.

i. e.

on thy account;

23e&3o3o aljsez^cJA for search (or in search) of game; ^3 o

O
O*
on account of the father's word; t? ^u?o^%T\, for that business;

in order
d^sxh,
57

to buy.

'For', 'therefore',

instrumental

(i. e.

monkeys walk
like man.

(Regarding the use of the dative see

'on account'

ablative

like

352,

348.)

are frequently to be rendered by the

a) of ^cfo,

us even on two

e.

g. doortrt^o

therefore they appear quite

feet;

honour thy mother and father; for it (on its

account) their blessing will come upon you. 'Therefore' is often rendered
3
also by wc5d&5s ^
(Wd+5^5 ^ ), and sometimes also by Samskrita
,

the genitive),
^P (with
(or w)

^sdraa^,

JiOo^ (with the genitive),

wrf ?radC3.

322.)

(CJf.

'For', 'in order', 'for the purpose'.

Above

it

has been stated that

these adverbs are partly expressed by the dative or by the dative with
;

but there

is still

a having

said, to the dative (see

another way to express them, namely

e3&dortttOoJ$l ^^dol)

'S.arfjSo^},

to

for battle, in the proper place;

oSjari^^o
for

sacrifice;

rffprielrfj

^oS^oijo

first

by adding-

^s^rt^^oo ?o?lc3do3o
o
^
place the army that is ready

332), e.g.

slreSd

tirtO,

*%.

an altar prepared

>>^> ^JSraj, having bought a sheep

299
for

the

purpose of killing;

>&

c3e>3rt?& 5^0

3d ^oCS9

?W

(Cpr.
to

after

3,

^33

63);

187. 188), e.g.

burn a dead man;

*Uri ^Qfi> wooc^ p ^ e(* up

?iode3f$j

jjsJod

^l/sS^oto ^tfdO
PO

r$kJ.
gj

a threshing-floor for the purpose of binding cattle to; ^d&tfrt

WwA;ci^

manner
*

n or(* er

si>o&3oo-3-,

a prayer muttered for the removal

jsis^),

of all sins

i2

rtore.rf),
^ a post fixed in
ej

eJ

tzo

and secondly by

order to comfort the queen he spoke in this

in
rSpN o,

oSo^e3>

es>u*

sheep

there was a pupil with him for reading;

335tp)C5NO,
O
7^
in

the

5!^)f> td) i?,?l)

o
TJ

which you have bought and brought for the deity;

adding <0ok to the infinitive ending

when one has immersed himself

into water.

For' (with regard to exchange or price), e.g.

I

this for ten

bought

dialect,

by the dative,

e.

g.

acrartoo

348,

(See

19).

>o>rt5i>orf$ rt^rtrfoo

instead of the augments ao* and

libitum.

348,

rupees (see

These adverbs used to be rendered,

'For', 'instead of.

>o*

the

augment

in the ancient

z>3v
OJ

rl?* is

a?2

wrto

used ad

is.)

with yf\
In the modern dialect the Hindusthani toeto*
(wriex)), change,
is

very frequently used,

g.

S^^^d^o, ^JSi^^o, instead of

3J3?o

book; ojd^,
"o"

wdosA,

of, in

instead of that (in

The Samskrita

instead of writing.
place

e.

combination with t?h

is

his old book I gave

its

stead); w6aJoodrf^,
o

9
(Tadbhava sj^, SCO ),
used in the same manner.

jj

'For', expressing time, e.g. ^rf^o rfs^r^, for

D"
'For',

when

it

him a new

two years.

denotes privilege, duty or assigning,

in.

the

Cf.

348,29.

may be

rendered

^^s^rdo u^oijdo (or ^z>f( ^^.di), it is

sS^oosio^crio
for the poet to sit in the principal row. 555^0
*&& ^53^ 23^0, it is for
him to do that work, g; ^js^)^ aorso cra^orfrfj this mango (is) for Rama.

as follows:

ro

view of which anything is done, e.g. c^JSOoOoo^s*

9
G3 o&e>ft ^JS^o, he gave a plot of ground for a rent-free grant.
CO

'For', denoting that in

sJ

he
JSkl^o,
CJ
'For'

when

it

gave for (or as) a present.

expresses that in the character of which anything

e.g. S5d?io oe>do?3?&O 3^:3^0,

8,

Enough,

S? docfoioo

large enough,

e.

is

regarded,

took him for Rama.

g.

tf^ddsUw
fjrfori

(i.e.
v

tSf^o

cSe^rfssU cU

ii,

wd

d^dcicj,
ws^o)
a
eo'

this

house

wd, we have bread enough.

is

300
See Dictionary under 753^0

have money enough.

sdrs ?5C3,

6J

and

XVII,

On the

repetition of nouns, pronouns, adjectives,

numerals, adverbs, interjections, and imitative sounds

253,

(cf.

152 and 211

In

303.
is

Kannada

used in

3).

has been stated that repetition of verbs

339); such a repetition (vipsa) obtains in the

(see

it

three dialects also

common nouns when

1,

regarding

a)

to express simple regular

intended

it is

succession (vipsa, anupurvya), 'one after

the other', that occasionally signifies totality,

o3J3?

sSoC^do,

do<3

every street);
dJ3s?*

in

he appeared with
rfoFSri^

&o&
QkJ

=?0

^Q

(or in

house after house shone;

yxsOJS

pomp

dos^),

'all', 'every', e. g.

after street

in

street

so that one could say (there was) auspiciousness

^.i^J^ddj^oo,
after town; ^ 3=5=3 ozfjs^^o

town

rfo^

do?3rtJ5dJ3Qri

<oeje>
eo

when Karikalacola went from house

to house,
to

from village

to village for the

perform press-service;

I will

just

S5d^c55^),

^J5f^^*

now sow gold

direction
6

d?3

flower;
dzorf^
began
compass after the other (i. e. at
:3?3

doj?jo, when

d?3ri^o

5e>o;3oe^o

=$d<**o,

and whilst spark

&a

after

3?

^v^^od?^

coins in all these streets;

after

direction

in

to

purpose of ordering

-Ssris?

his

$}&

(i.

?oo^,

e.

in

all

looking

all points of the

all

people

d?3

c3?3ri

lotuses

directions)

at one point of the

compass)

renown covered region

S3s3f3

after

&^F

region;

began to rage,
-S-a^tf ?SJ3^, Kalamegha
spark (of anger) was emitted (from his eyes),
.

looked.
OJ

on table-land after table-land (as to the Kannada form see

253, s)
and there (i. e. everywhere) the host of Sabaras came like a

there

301
spreading out of very black hills on which fog appeared, holding the

accompanying and accompanying (i. e. the many accompanying) dogs by

the collars; then beating bush after bush of abundant foliage they
discharged, never failing to

sound of falling blows

I

=>

say?

arrow after arrow, and with the repeated

hit,

felled all sorts of

^eSftcSo. he made

game

What

in the wood.

obeisance to stone after stone

shall

e.
(i.
v

to

^o^tf ?oc3o, having eaten mouthful after mouthful;

the beauty of river after river (i. e. of all rivers

every stone); ^o^o

or of every river); Wfcjfcdo (S3& e5fcjdo) s3>?jo, greet elder after elder
(i.

e.

every elder)

to'ok &&5 9 o3odo

man

ask young

z3^riJ3v*,

after

there
young man (i.e. all young men or every young man)! esOrt,
ro
ro
and there (here and there or everywhere, also 5^O); 3&rt8rt, step
PO

after step

e.

(i.

repeatedly or again and again);

itfrfo SJOOF5^)^J^J o,

once and once

son to his breast)

and caressing (him);

see

253,

(the tree

(i.

&)> ^oaolos*
dfla^J,
<3

3)

once) at every

e.

is)

zSj^ssz&^tf^sS,
tree
wave
leaves every one
plantain
there)
daily time after time

riz&ssh

and used

disposition,

3orf

Borts?fl

trees get

SoJ^tf

SoJasijj,

to

(as

to give

or

of which (is) a

(of the

fathom long;
(to school)

w^tfo &)a6o
mild in

milk at the proper times; 3oA?$

ktfrts?rt

^jarfj^^,

form see

a^

arf

^do3*

every day, daily;

w)Q

year, yearly; We>t>

time, e.g. repeatedly

,

ar?3 sk^sS

small;

253,
after

s)

ggjs3 adjs^

month
a

(i.e.

>zl>^;3,

cocoa-nut

every month, monthly);

magazine that

is

published

a monthly magazine); 33^0 Sejro^, hour after hour,

(i.e.

a^ a^

roots

the cow was very

3ori 3orti?rt 3oJ3e3z^3 ^sJ^iSeJo^)^^,

hourly;

(its)

around the stem

aoJS^rto^d z3^o, (you) must go

3oe>oo

new flowers month

every month

(it is)

at all the definite points of time);

(i. e.

form

"3

all

(zTejdtf)

(his

to

(as

every one of

in

rice o,

oidrttfo

aorawo SO^JD SoJ^ri

?!><atfJSdJ?>F;3oF

word taking

sSjscS sSJSrf&Os?*

stout, in every one of (its) tops

sjjsdo siradori

n'

?&&

^,

s3do3St

)^?o

as^^ or asi?o

or eroO wsOri, repeatedly;

l)
;

arf^^,,

day by day,

or ddo3^ drfos*^,, year by year,

wrT)rt,

(also with regard to the interrogative

what time-what time-soever,

i.e.

every

that time-that
<>}&>,

as

at all times, ever, continually);

Remark.
As
somehow
')

to the repetition of

obtained

nouns of time

it

is

to be

observed that the intended meaning

is

the following way:

wcfcrt 3ontfrt Xoavs5$f3o, what is his
VJSCSwfi* W63J Son?rtjBs5j wao^zSo, he cut the hair of the tuft once
monthly pay? tfrfrfolj
&
t.
also

in six months.

tft>5S

in

rsaoScn<?rt

302
to express a distributive sense (pratyekartha),

6)

^dflr

3s rtcrSv/en?*

^oc^o, give

give each of these

place with regard to =$<rio and

takes

g.

tjj^o

pc^o

each of these persons a gold coin out of this purse

persons a gold coin out of this bag!;

which

e.

do^rb also in close

^ft
253, 3), e. g. =$<
proximity (samipya, pratyasatti; as to form cf.
FjO^ftooris"", the pits of hell (are) lower and lower, i. e. each at a small
1

distance below the other;

preceding,

$<$
i. e.

?o
o3

sSo^tf

and higher,

of heaven (are) higher

the other;

>o

e.

i.

times
do^r^o,
^A

$$f(

rtF3JeJe>orts*, the (various) regions

each at a small distance above

famine

of

preceded each other at small intervals;

times of plenty (were) following and following,

at small intervals;
to express previousness (anyatotisaya),

c)

(were)

form

s3J3c3

<&?*

first

of all; doddJ3<$

(as to

cf.

253,

^dc*

siorf

e.

s^^acSo,

3)

dJScSd^

i.

g.

e.

preceding and

s3o^ 3>^f\

zij^o,
^A

followed each other

sj^^^JSs^

S3?ootf

sSjsd

the Asoka tree flowered

<osoO. these shot

first

of

Zcr

all in the battle;

d)

to express high

degree, excellence,

visesha, adhikya, prakarsha), e.g.

,

excessive pleasantness, etc.;

intensity or emphasis (atisaya,

^^0*

^oG-^o*, great valour;

toS? rf^?* to^.ds?*,

,

a very good

woman;

taking (his son) completely inside

eroD^)6, when the soil burnt

deeply inside; vd>& ?SJ5e^^ &$fo Sod A 2oK)jC5 36cjtfo, in order to see
<A

into himself (from love);

So^tfjS^tf

^-

?2o?s*

TJ

that people assembled in large crowds; dosSrloSo

tfoz

So^pfi?

sdo^ 'S.do^^,

what

the taste of buttermilk?

is

s&ovh

the sige

it

is full

WS^)

a5o^

(the buttermilk)

of thorns;

is

very sour;

A)?tf

s^d)

^"S^J =5e)O3hdj^do, the elementary substance (of camphor)

oJ

zS^.rt

white and consists of

^oo^ricS,

is

^cio

many small

2tfJ5do 2J3o->rta;^53, if

break and become

bits

grains; zijv^riofo^ 3JS>c!c>6 B'swri^o

(one) beats (them) with a hammer, stones

and pieces;

slfcctoo

a^iS,

some clocks are

3->A>rtJS?jj
C2

is)

the

same amount of

is
e.

every day.

siookJ,

at the very first

^^, S3^

eJ

it

-rf-

used to be

be wound up every day, some once a week, some

if she bears a child every hour, (there
'aj 5S Sj 2CeOd
aS^So^ (instead of sSS^ sSS^)

*JB^J s53' 5 ^-A)?^J SooSj

kisses.

sJ^

acSs^oi^

every day they print from ten to twenty thousand papers,

expressed also by ftcrat^j, a contraction of O?i3e>r!jo, 'when a day becomes'?

SsXJ^Xos-ijtf,

i.

to

^J3rfe;o

v->

once a month.

(=3^ dc5)

303
postage according to the measured

necessary to pay

place to which letters had to go;

more and more, excessively;

i,

3*3

form see

(as to

irtift

253,

great calamity or sin;

?3d ?3drtj,

great shine; ;&>{

oJ3

c& fico^, in the very middle;

having cut (the sugar-cane) into very small bits;

On>,

ca

(as to

;3oe,rt>,

s^do,

s)

s3tf zStfrto,

a^;3
first,

for a while, quarrels with old people

253,

3d

to

(as

form see 8253,3)

having taken the high-road;

^20

0^0

may

dJSP^d
very point;

?iP^

tJ

$k$

up and up;

so

at

^t)^
the very

arise;

sSwrfeS.

^dotf<J3rcU, even at last

ca'

eJ

tfiitfdedJ

word; 3ti 3dft, at the very end, at

the very centre of energies;

s),

3tf 3tftfo,

^J3> ;3jad

Si^d ^JS^ Odft^^Hl^rl W3ooci>, by doing

Id

letter of a

excessive lustre;

si3e)ckstai5

3o?tf

36C^ 3

15,
eJ

he went down and down;

251 and

form see

great dumbness;

sJoJSrto,

distance of the

r$ck;3,

W^ dsj,

last;

the very last

do3o3orttf tfU.

iu the very middle;

^oaoioo, thou rosest to the world's far-stretched

3o^

tift

n)?3e>^ao^J

3d{O??3
rtoo.

6J

.^(273^3, there always shone

as the chief (town) for the inhabited countries

that were situated on the south bank of the Sita river 1 );
Lilavati at the very

first,

to express variety, e.g.

e)

cats of various colour

various form;

3d ^dcS wra

ti dtfo,rftfj

there are

^d ^dc$ tJSDdrf^) ^dods^, leaves are of

oidrtsk

^^^Jrt^ ^ wri wrioJo S^ciorttfo

Q
1

tffej
eJ

'adj^,

aorfrtoSl

3, by bad deeds

various evils are produced;

they

saw various creepers

they

felled

all

sorts of

in the

garden;

game; cS^ de^cS

kinds of things of various countries;

SoFso

ro^^p

^JSoinjrfdJ, the

^orso

ao^)^)

3or3j

^dc3

2od;3rttfj,

many

^JS^

3&reo

dJSdritfo

&

various petty chieftains came together ami

assembled an army that formed a miscellaneous mass;

)

curious

dialect iu

^a^O**!

way

of expressing No. d

which the action of the verb

nctfnjjj old

(or vehemently) beat (his)

his

is
is

found in the following instances of the modern

by the repetition of nouns, viz.

intensified

mother saying '-my son dies", began repeatedly (or vehemently)

mother,

if

<&

id io3 Aecs ^o, because the buffalo died, the cowherd repeatedly
breast; w3?5 3so5o, Son ^BOdoos^fJ^ , ic5 .id u>3 ^JBV. aB^dtfo,
to beat (her) breast;

thou hadst repeatedly (or soundly) beat my head at the very time when I
(thee) the chain (that had been stolen by me), why should I have got into

brought and gave

this (miserable) lot?

304

u&

3oSck,
corn-land

..

3JZ3e>$Fritfo,

ejarioSoN

seized this cow,

and beat

(it)

things of various sweetness

In addressing a person repetition of

who watched the

they

Q soSddo,

with various clubs;

(i. e.

?oD ?o>

various sweet things).

nouns may convey the following

meanings:
1.

envy (asuye),

e. g.

2.

approval (sammati),

3.

anger (kopa), e.g.

e.

g. 3orfc3,

wara&rt,. &K>ra&ri,

4.

reproach (kutsana, ninde), e.#.

5.

menace (bhartsana),

tf&oSo,

e.g.

d>do,

To

ckditf,

Instead of repeating the same noun for the sake of intensity, variety,
also duplication and reiteration are used more or

and comprehensiveness
less in the three

the use of a couple of nouns that are not

Duplication denotes

i.

the

dialects.

same as

to

form and often also as to meaning,

excessive tickling;

33

<D S3023&, all sorts of cloth;

=5^ ^>?^, a

e.g.

wSCSo

vei

weariness;

2rio>o^, abundance;

=56)050 3JWp,

pod and leaf vegetable; Ac^rtrS (-tfe&),

&&$

zd^^,

z3^?o3o, great

profligate

fellow

kinds of small

all

and thorny shrubs; d^ ^Cf) cattle and calves; ^os3o c^oC5 9

ments and bits; to^o ZJ^ri, all sorts of kinsmen;
if
Cp
children and grandchildren; sjj?^o ^Jp, words and speech;
trees

narrow ways and nooks;

sjoo^, the state of being

^JosJo^

all

frag-

around

(roundabout).
Reiteration denotes the use of a couple of

2.

nouns

meaningless by itself, forming a sort of

alliteration, e.g. 5^,8 ^^3, fraud in weighing; ^^> d>>, prodigality;
Q
LJ
3O"
^)^, great tumult; >& 33^do, considerable unevenness in scales;
the first of which

a)

is

(-dofej), great fraud;

the

I)

second

which

of

alliterative formation, e.g.

T^ro

is

&Q>

meaningless by
?o&

opposition;

being a mere

itself,

tenants;
ao^^j
rf^^o,
v
TT

t3jsri?o, all sorts of

do are do,
C3

all

work; dj^o^J dja^^o, great crookedness; c3f>

kinds of deities for idols); dj^cS )c3. inarticulate, stammerO'
O

ing speech; eS^srad

expense;

aSrso
P3

?jSo3e)d,

ao^o^o.
oJ

reiteration the syllables

P\

trade of

all

and

different

kinds;

s3z
id

sorts
sj

of

fruits.

In

this

^23,

various

Za

second

kind of

are often used, being put instead of the

305
the

first syllable of

to express intensity or abundance, e.g.

breasts of the lotus-eyed

it

(ever) so

30>tid

it

if

the

&tf,

intended

it is

more) the plump

(one) cuts

so

much

his

bow;

sugar-cane be

not very sweet?

how many, how many

(are) the cakes;

so large, so large

when

increased, so much,
wood thus scraped that

esrtrt skqSoCsrortzS,
is

e.

(i.

3)

woman

Kirata

the forester in the

much, so much,

^oa?,
Q

)?3e?jO

278,

how much, how much

&e?iortoo,

rf

ft;

a)

the more)

T^

regarding nouns of indefinite quantity

(i. e.

f\>,

2,

e^

SO

noun, e.g. ytfo Aetfo,

first

canst thou eat?

to express a not specially mentioned amount, e.g.

b)

13"

fixed that in such

to be done, a

that limit.

V03icx2ja?r(^sdc3j,
Q

and such a time

watch

is

is

it

has been

and so many (various) works are

finish those (various) works within

so

of great use to

This *a.3fo

when

similarly rendered by

e.g.

D 3fo,,

CO

&J

regarding appellative nouns of number

3,

278,

4)

when

it is

intended

to express a distributive sense as to persons: 'each', 'every', 'each severally',

'one

by one',

etc.,

e.g. LdJSsjrorl

Ss)SJJe)oqjr^ooioc3

tnjp^Fq&^Q&OV*

WAJ^O ^JS^oBtiex>, when Basava with unparalleled affection granted every

one numbers of things desired; &&ie>,u aso^ortr^o ti&fo&
iO

^tJ^c^

e5CJ3

and

wqJrrfii^

aS^WJS^

aoJ5?rt

t3e^J,

each boy must read every term

tell its

meaniug; 3^&> ze3J? N to, a6oriorl^^ ^> g^rttf?

the teacher must put these questions to each boy; &oc3J?\2o
to

t<J

)^,

near each lady (there

,

is)

a servant-maid;

when each

(or

23^3 do

every one) of the

Bedas rose with commotion and spoke arrogantly; zjredor^3tf^ *&&f(d

cSo 6

tt3js.w.dfi)c^

each one to a side;

TS

^^, tne y (two)

^tlo.uf^o
tO tO

fell

headlong on the ground

each one
3&H 3rf.3l*
< 80 T 3)?Se -SidosD^,
39

306
remains for himself
give

them two Rupees each;

.,

one by one, by ones;

2-o23J3.2j.do,

to

do

'aft. 20
.

to ii

two and two, two by two, by twos; doorf ;3oo>do, three and three, three
he sent
by three, by threes; yd^o wsjbtfo. ^.).eo.Di>ft ^tfo&n)
>fcl?fo,
tJ

*>

5j

them away two by two;

>,do -6?

3J,

o e>d 3oJ3ri

him by ones, by twos, (and)

=$0 ^otodj means 'some here and there'.

3v,do,
Q"

manner;

in this

by threes,

we are

to go to

Remarks on No.
Samskrita 3lo

a)

3.

also used to express distributiveness,

is

^ 3d

e.

g.

each boy must bring his own book;

j^J d every man has his failing's.
23?rO,
7

iotfjaar, t-s3r, 22jr,

2-^

^^

'One another', 'each other' in a reciprocal relation

b)

declension of

Q&
Q&

O r 2-^ in the plural,

e. g.

rendered by the
5
3;k 3djrt
)

is

(eiJj3oJJ0

s^^rt^ Kyortes* LdJS^ro* Ldjsdro 5 ^o?d AS^rfosnTl^, when (the

females) went to some distance from one another, and besprinkled one another
^essdj ^JSESJ

2*3?" 2jjrrtr

with various kinds of scented water;

one another; 3^do

t^d

93do

each other);

^ooo^j^jd), (to try) to surpass

slxd/s^do i^& sJrec&s^S, they love one another

(or

^dosaw,

they are not in peace with one another;

^^Ortjs^d.)
^ud
^Jsd ^udJ &.?^oDoj^
left one another;
2-2Jd&3,udo
wrtCddJ,
they
^
w
w
to
Q 'gd 23^0,
tO
^

(they)

<J

must be on friendly terms with one another.

The nominative
others',

i.e.

all,

plural

e.g.

assembled Jangamas

^o^O

f)^',

c)

come you

2-aJj

c3dd
all

all

ksorSjazordo,

clapped

and

sit

^^

2-^z^do
to be invited.

one or two women;

still

Cf.

278,

^oio^oOido

hands and laughed;

rfrtwo,

when the

^utf-o^dj

u^

down!

in connection with

^ortrid,),

(their)

'these and the

z^d-Q^do expresses

aori^jo5 kzordjszjrdj

e. g.
2-^2^ do, denotes 'one or two',
ao?G3 zS^o, one or two are
'S^ t-^^Ort

J , i.e.

(<oda^e:>, etc.).

292, mean 'a certain

e-ug^ja^rfo, z-w^js^^o, as we have seen in
man', 'a certain woman'. About another way to express the indeterminate
d)

'certain' see

304.
a)

283.

Repetition of pronouns
to express 'respective',
c3 do,

is

used in the three dialects

'several',

e.g.

a#(k isii

3fcix

the people were sleeping in their several tents;

rf$Aftf ScJS^CSdo, even they two rose, and went

>

into their respective rooms;

03o <3c* ^rfj 3s3o, 3o?Sris?rt, they

several houses;

(a

tttf ^^o,

respective kingdom;

&#

33

dvandva compound,
sJJFSoio

250)

went to their
os&ioo, their

asuae S^aoioos^d, they take the

307
S3

to their several houses;

way

&>v*

^2~>O(3*

the

originates

VUGS. 3d

S^ssri

respective

(or

3o3odJo

objects

zS^o, (one) must do every work

aSjs^rt

klld JitaFdUodAV1 tfllOoftdJT

w
w
O OeJCratf,
assembled mass of deities who are those each severally by them-

at (its) respective time;

in

the

>

w ^f^

selves that stand just opposite? o3j>d otosd

when severally mentioned have

(

theirs
all

the loud cry 'the victory

(is)

command?

when they

<0>orU>

e.

(i.

ours)';

$ii3 z3e3JS^c5o

to express reciprocality, e.g.

them having taken pleasure

23&3rrari, all the

to express emphasis,

reciting

mean?
is

even to

^rso^d,

one another;

s^dfcjfidt)

doo

3;

towns-people looking astonished at one another;

daily they used to figh't with each
),

c)

respectively

g)^) 3 do

in

other; esddo ^do, 3dJ3,V^ &,3oSOf3

^ f
c/
^

of pain

3drt

3dJ 3dort 3t3 9 &> ^J^rao, having gone

some distance from one another;

all of

3d

ours), the victory (is)

^do^ ^d^
their respective behaviour appears to be nice;
(i.

6)

to

e.

theirs

whom

z3^o, of

?3e>>?o

obey the

to

(I)

&ajO fcjoioo3j>d dd>dso$e>riJS>)OF;3ej<,

225)

raised

who

excellent goddess Speech

of sense in the ear by words;

yotos ^rodrfo^ drarfo^

=5-,

the

?C>,

o&e>)

)f3?&0,

very excellent!

e,

g. SJ^F?J

La^ dO
C)c5e^J5

perform the least work; ^^dj

6 they love one another;

'Sine)

ddo*

sd^?^*, what

s3?oo

s3?Ajj,

erudLfcoPrt

^>?5e^J3 *3&

does this cry

what! the way of

dj^ciodao,
(they) do not
oo

s\^>,
<*>

as for

me

there

is

not

the least hinderance (or objection).

305.
Repetition of
three dialects
a)

so-called

273)

takes

to express excess, intensity or emphasis (adhikya),

doos^riv*, very large pearls;

round female breasts;

cSJScS

adjectives

>$o3o

zokj

zoftj

247,

(see

>s?o3oortv>*

very

e.

d, e)

place in the

g.

3J3?d

dJSdrtv*,

white swans;

&d
very
djsz3

WrSrtv*, very big elephants (these four instances according to sutra

391 of the Sabdanusasana); Jjs^d ^J^^dci ^j^riv*, very large morsels

(in which Jj3?d appears as a noun); &0 &OC50, that is very large; &Ci
ca

very extensive plains;

WOJoort^o,
'*>

towns; aS^,
"0"

2^^
~O

cSJSrf

djad deJ

cs

36^rto, a very small vessel (a boat);

rtv*o,

very large

wOCSOdo, that

very wonderful (also thrice repeated: WDdOCiDcSo); dJS)6 c5J88rtv o

f

39*

is

308
.

>,

seeing that chiefs after chiefs

(J

had fainted pierced by many long arrows;

eoc3

very fine;

rfjsd rfjsd, very far;

20 1, very poor or feeble;

to express variety,

e.

g.

wd^

?j?3 sJra,
ro
ro

very small;

si

(?^8crfj^)

z3e^ ^zfog^d, they send that (sugar) to various distant

countries in order to sell (it); cSjad dJ5d rotfri^ri 3J^ ^^o3onS zS^^dd
vj
9
q5r dJ3S3e)03j, 5&o^e>jS*i dJ333s>o3j, a^c^ dJ333?o3o ^=3* 6{&<3&, if (in
ciJ3d

by-gone times one) had to send letters to various distant places, the postage
was half a rupee, three-fourth of a rupee, up to one rupee; s3JS>c3^
^ra ^S)

fcj^do rore

P9

"L

commit various small

crimes) people use to

do^s^o he has six

sirs
r

?ors

at first
sjjejc^os^
- 6,'

rl^;dj

oJ

little

(before they

commit great

35J>

faults;

children of various size;

?3

-rf-

?ora

^^or(^ri^J3

how many small

ero?oo^^ a?lritfja ysS,

4.

sandbanks of various

there

size

are in the sea

(but

islands

also

e.

and

g. sure

to a division of the terrestrial

many

globe belong

small and large countries);

various chief officers of the army;

C3e)ddJ, the

doo^rfsjd^ dJ?dCS

cSjSCo
oi

*-

sroJ3jSo^ri?od^j,C
7)

^raa, having made Amritarava,

cp

Govindaravakale and others various eminent officials. (All the instances

under letter 6 are from South-Mahratta school-books.)
c)

to express separateness, otherness,

e.

g.

sStfiS

t3?S3

separate,

different, several; a6oOodo &Ort<s*o --SS vc3e)A c3J3d

dJ3d ^do^^), the

ears are small and far from one ano'ther; 3j?>^j~

Wf3

ao"e)r\

aJ3S

3oJ3?i

I steal

etc., as shown in

place,

e.

306.
a)

g.

trick", said the fox;

of 'very' (adhikya)

w3

may

likewise be expressed by

275.

Also reiteration

2,

ur^, (a)

303,

i,

after e,

2,

of so-called

ty

adjectives takes

very poor (male person).

Repetition of numerals takes place in the three dialects

in a distributive sense,

2re4ortto0ri&&&0

'each', 'every', 'each severally' (c/.

30&>3B

g.
A (3 $0(3
o
o
(and) separating each one; zjSaoSJ3?SjaO <3O =#,o

e.

"according to

we see new strange things.

&?t3rtrttfc^ rSJSfrfo^^, daily
Remarks.

The meaning

1,

away by another

3oJ3?o oioo

GJ

>,

each occasion

3J3^

tiger's

searching

the

278,

i),

vegetables

309
he brought one excellent linga to every basti

o,

each of the different persons separately

3o3o
-

officers

3o3o

^^^j^fi

(*

la

discharged each ten arrows; B^s^p^

e-

si.AocS

u?j

j^a*, then the ten renowned chief

Zo^rdtesJrD*

ao^siurttftS*
-*

he gave one balla of pearls to

^^i

'

Br,

5=^3^

day they print from ten to twenty thousand papers;

e s &rttfo

fccSJSffc

Q O

is

Tf

and

ri?rco

O O
Zf
jj
9
9
e3eS3 ^Jsa sJooC5 oio 3o?^ c3cio, he made (them) untie that bundle,

told (them) to

make each

35^ 30^0^0
36>rtcrfj

00

lo^JS^j
o o

sSo^s3

53r3Fortv*

each form a

class,

^^i Q,?^ rf^f

&3 drf^JkL

a{5ja^
CO
O
V

w6, write even each letter on

<^N

dJSsraoSo

^J3^o,

sjrirsjj^ri rfrlrsjj*

wofo^j.o, as

five letters

there are five classes;

3e^o^ &tf

^^n*

C5oo dj%rt^< w^o.o,

oitfo,

six seasons,

two

namely vasanta,

'adoddj, there are five

formed; zS^o/i^ ^eiOrt

U
claws on each foot of the cat;

OrU) <odddct) tfMrU?(ix ^JSiic3^?5,

co
*L
O

CO

man; 3e?jdd

if

(and) sisira are

grishma, varsha, sarad, hemanta,

to every

give a rupee to each;

TJ-

and two months are taken together, the

erortodo

(it);

^do^sS, on each bunch of the plantain

clusters, each cluster has from ten to twelve

w3^s3rl ^^J3?^

(thy) board;

wood separate and break

(piece of)

5e)OS)ort^o

there are from ten to fifteen

fruits;

^J8rte;tJsd)Ort^

each wing of the flying fox

vod aOoidl,
B
Q
3
3
3oJ3Sf oJo iiea Ao wdCi JS^^^ a^JSrio ^Urtoiorlx

^^0,Tj

four spans long;

23e&5

363^ 363^)

(*

s ^^o) s^tf TOrtdrttf?^ 3oja,&3^d, every

rtzfrttftfi
^
C3

God has given two eyes

^dzld^o ^JSS*3d y^ldd

B

sSo?e3

saw

2oSdo 302^03^6, they plant the bulbs of saffron in rows at the distance
of two cubits each
toflo <3e> A, each separately; (jfo^o) {iia rkartJS
once at ever y wor ^ taking (his
dJSr^oF ( 279) l/^do sJojR?>zi)^OB
;

>

son to his breast) and caressing

rt&5*f(f( ^do^o
(him) e3SriSflo3J3?$JS> ?i>
thus without
which
mountains
woo
a^Sje) si%sl>,
d^^JSC^^ AOrtv*.
a
;

ceasing again and again once at each galige sounded loudly;

6)

in

indicating

'certain', e. g.

thing, etc. as not

known more

0^=^.0 ^v*rfoo3j* Wtfo.o L>dJ3?Sclo3JS9*

o
-a

see

3cO* 2*>?$J3>
Q
*t)

248,

i),

Q zj^Qj orttf^*

aud

becomes

9
Wobr^^eS
O

Sifi* CCio.6,
~~^

or

v*

specifically,

(Commentator:
some places;

in

when the minister

mounted some excellent elephant and followed:

'some',

valiantly

310
,

on the body of certain cobras hair has grown;

^
^w
^ a^,

oCS'rtv

said

swallow whole chickens;

to

^s^

=$^>

occasionally;

~48.

c
( /-

words) have an optional bindu;

3w

^^ri^O"o

$ws3)

t&orto^d?^, some frogs are

ao?l
12

^$0

some

s3?$, at

rfj

(Kannada
some few days hence;

=5^

in one place or

fcs^do o&e>^&,ritf rjAiri^rix 3o2^03s)o 6,'

4.

s>

time, at times,

qir^^ort^*, diverse

^3-

{j-

cardamom; $v $<&z$
some few fruits had become ripe and

other (or somewhere) people plant seedlings of

aorsosj&ci)

?oJ35lj7>
oJ

PQ

looked fine;

Jj5P&5o3
-*> c3si.

0^="

tod>sSor

279), sometimes;

above under a:

etc.

in multiplication, e.g. cOdddct}, four

c)

also

Compare the instance

occasionally.

sometimes;

aosl/w^i,,

278,

i).

Remarks.
Distributiveness

1,

reciprocal relation

2,

^SooAoAej

also expressed

^<
craej^

is

?53Qrf

&&O

e.

sra?io, cirilli, timi,

is

si >,

e.

^.

people of each country.

expressed by declension,

^^^^ 2oOo3o3^

s80ii>i^
W

by Samskrita

zs^do, the

four are fishes of which the one

these

i3CO

is

each village; S.^olerf^

vusdo,

&&&,

g.

timingila, timingilagila

larger than the other

t?
;

ajrs^ritfoa

those divisions of the terrestrial o

globe join one another;
r

s
houses that are near each other; tf (i3c>C3 ) ^drt*
So^js rfo aJ8^ TOOK' aw.)^ d, between those (plantain) leaves
_
\r
Ca <a

kc^tfj^cfo^ ad^dsarf SOcSrt^J,

rfSod Addjatfnrf

(there) rise

There

still

is

Co

es

folded leaves one after the other out of the tree.

the following curious instance in the Sabdamanidarpana, called an

instance of itaretara or anyonya:

where one

(party) takes up

k&o ;^M

-^oSooi)^

i>3-Q rfo

#o3js rao arado^doSjsv*,

and performs the same action of another (party,

in

mutual fighting).
Also z-cS^fSvOj^ uses to express 'a certain', as a-fJa^jarf^ ds?, a certain
292 and
time, at some time or other; a-^itoeto 3tt, a certain country (see
3,

283).

cf.

307.

Repetition of adverbs

212. 253,

3.

281) in

.the

three dialects

expresses

=3^ 3t> 3, very blackly; 33^$ ^si)j3

or ^^j ^^A?S, very fragrantly; grs ^ irsjS or 3re ^rs ^, very coolly
re
re
or s3j
sSo^fS, very gently, etc.; ?j?j ^
c2, very insipidly,
a)

'very' (atisayatara), e.g.

'

'

OsJ

etc.;

3JCO

^C3fS,

brightly, etc.;

&<j ti*33, dazzlingly;

quickly; AG5C9 3C3f5,

very quickiy;
69

^^

^?S,

rapidly;

J^

&

^^?2,

ver y

3$, vehe-

311
mently (as to form
orto

thus

g.

s,^B ?^ ^J5?Csj^o w6,

308.

is

e.

g.

very abundantly;

was seeing thus-

(he)

si>rb&3j

o^r^^a,

that?); Oh,

tell (it)

the three dialects,

e.

212,

8)

happens

g. etffejtffej, w^osjo, oi^sfos^P,

Repetition of imitative sounds

how-how (.

sS?^*,

e.

again!

Repetition of interjections (see

309.

when

mental excitement,

that? how

is

Sort,

these various objects);

e.

(i,

>jrt

e.

variousness,

c)

how

very quickly

e>rto,

6)

303, i,e, reiteration);

cf.

}s3e3, a&s '-is.

**&,

212, 9; 253,

in intensity in

takes place in

3)

the three dialects, when the sounds occur more than once or repeatedly at
short intervals, or also continually,

e.

2&OS3*

the repeated sound

iJ3^?2 (with
Such a repetition may be used also thrice, e. g. 20$
?3J3rtoSo^jr{oo;

of falling blows).

2&os3*

rto

g.

^0^

rtao*

On the expression of

XVIII,

and on the expression of

The pronoun

article,

'only', 'alone',

^3

in
(3o3), other,
266
neuter forms, has been introduced in

310.

on the

'other',

its
;

masculine, feminine and

another way of expressing

the English 'other' we find in the reciprocal use of appellative nouns of

number

303,

numerals
It

again,

is

3,

necessary

viz.

1,

to

6),

2).

bring

of reflexive
Cf. also
in

is

pronouns

305,

manner

the

in the sense of 'additional',

in English 'other'

words

remark

306, remark

and

304,

6),

and of

c.

of rendering
2, in

here

'other'

that of 'different'.

As

used in both of the said senses, so also the Kanuada

be given below admit both of them, according as the circum-

to

stances require, in the three dialects.

1,
f

The meaning
<i

a^('3f3

),

is

afterwards, further, zS^ei

again, to appellative
one,
t^j,
CJ

of 'additional'

separate, and

nouns of number

e.g. 'a&iSj^ro,
*4.

another man;

expressed by prefixing

a?3j3^tfo,

(lit.

278,

*)

rf^
and

the;

(dJ^o*

to the

adverbs
^97),

numeral

afterward s-a-man). another man; 'S&C'tio,

^- V*

another woman:

another thing; 'a&S>jf$o

3e;?j,

aj?ju

tfo,

another business;

another thief;

312
another

separate-a-man),

(lit.

man;

3 J3

23^C

20.^0,

another woman;

&%

another place; e3?&33 Ji<3o a^, another

esSjSck, another thing; e^w^fSzt,
3
day; (${&&&<&) c3e>o3o, another dog; g^GS 3o^>s3do, some other persons
;

;3oJj3 dro, (lit. again-a-man), another man; sJo^J^sJrs *, another woman

0, another
sjo&J^rk, another thing; s&Jjj^fSd, another place; doij^^j
3

manner;

!oiJ3* ?i)

sJToo

another country;

s&Jj^o

some other persons.

The same

is

another thing, a substitute;

^ofc*',

(About

expressed

s3oJj

another (or the other) hand;

280.)

rfjs5o^ c/.

(especially in

South-Mahratta) by
another man;

second (278,2), e.g. o}3<i?3ok^?fo,

(itfdf3{),

another woman; ^ddrSc^osJdo, other people; oidc^fSoiodo, another thing;

?o

tOd^?3e

o, another place.

The meaning of 'different' is, as remarked above, also expressed

by prefixing the same adverbs to the same appellative nouns of number
and to fcjfc. a3^53 separate, different, may be prefixed immediately to
2,

a following noun, e.g.

T5^?j, different

work.

Both numbers,

(*.

e.

and

2, are

expressed also without the mentioned pre-

to^ &053oo.cl>, to give one thing and take another

od^o

t^u

bartering),

rtrso,

&lta

torS

fixes, e.g.

z^es3

another or a different village;

z^eSJSo*,

2o?3J
to^o
-acS^,
^o^tfo
V ^
w rtxS5?o$>rt
O
O 3rao,
"o
Q
P9
a gentleman had two children, the one (was) a girl
(and) the other

a boy.

wddo

s3o?s3oiJJ3

rto^S

?oQoireA

^odoloio^ dj^^d,

EoZ^sJ^

sJJS^jg^d, they (the parents) do not equally love

us two, (but do one thing to the one and another thing to the other.
toU E^JS^A fcJC56 &o^ 2JS?A, if one (is) a sensualist, the other (is) an
ri^S^o

2oU3>rtJ5f5o

ascetic.

&^J e^?

tfejo, &j^J

?3JS>?5?

ffe>e;,

one, and the daughter-in-law's time

si,

one

(i.

To
one

e.

not, one,

i. e.

zo^tf dje)3)^jsjc3ft39

talking

another

(i.

e.

one business, (and) that

this (is)

(is)

^d)

different),

another

(is)

a different one).

this belongs also

it is

(is)

the mother-in-law's time

the expression 1*$

^O

if it
&>

much some kind

ro3jo o>

s3ja rfj
C
CO

some day or

other.

is

not

dflrfo

of

this,

it is

&ooo ^oo
v

f^^j
V
o

'Sie;
po

^^oO/'
),
'

another, some or other,

3dcS wsJosqtoriC)

^^J3

*aOcSo,

lit.
e.

g.

by

offence or other always happens,

arf WeJOio^,?
sSp^o.
--

a born living being must die

313
There are no articles

311.

and eye; both the English

the sensible speech of Karna.

tfreFcSJStf^a,

sun rose brightly,

dodo, the

tJ

w^wJS^tf

the

tf&x&A&ga
^^ (fttib

indefinite

3"^ ^!0^ ^^C3* six/aa

^?A,

poetry

gone into the

having

become good.

has

Sr

he descended from the

of

and the English

definite article 'the'

('an') are mentally to be supplied, e.g.

article 'a'

garden.

Kannada that are perceivable by the ear

in

aoodort^o

Mallikarjuna.

tree.

sjoc^fcjorrfi^o^o
<*
the

kdogj)^,

ox.
ufcokosekf?, he beats the
teaches the boy.
ydrfo rood's

^tfo

boy

3oo&>rt>fl

am

reads.

the son

^N^

SJ^NJ

^zkse)

3, the teacher

^*A

Jojog^>
si&ctfo
- 6, they fear the lion,
-^
the
hair
of
the
head,
tfodotfoioo
^JSd^o,
1

'

Tt

the bird's nest.

the horse

3"e3co

white.

is

ge>o3oo3o ;|jz!o3o

=^JS?io

^o^e3

55^03^

the child

yc3,

is

weeping.

the child sits on the lap of the

'ES'JSrfo.^rS,

&A{G5'&<^tS tfS, I am showing the way.

Jj5f23ri^ ^ort^o 3oJ3 ^jscxioool^rf s^o, the daughter of the gardener was
the dog and the
gathering flowers.
^soSjC^oja 300JOJ3 totf?
H rfrird^),
fox are of one genus.
^j ad dOD^o, the word you spoke. =5rl<3
(or its) mother.

Kannada language.

the

3oe>ft

-3^0

3o?l)^^do, the Hindus.

the philanthropic Karna.

the rich,

the sky

(i.

(is)
is

^s?^^

So^o^ cfs^oioorao.,
aooi^ort^o

s^^^d^

hear a noise.

^etfo^??8,

the

wrt?d^Eii,

sends a servant.

a new book.

great.

gem

of

ui

the boy reads a book.

toCiog^^,

dJ3^
ca

^^sJog^cS, the master

we see a ship. 3oJ3?d

^d^rfo^

dod

>&3J7T3$,

sSliri,'

a big box.

what a great storm!

how useful an instrument! 'a^

crfooqi^),

garden
he has a

^rs sSo^, a small

you have an inkstand,

oJofcjrfoD^o

^Se)
^

df^o, a

dOdcSjs^ 'adr

^js^o, a good child,

a bad boy.

e5

30^ d ^^cli^ojoorso,,

e3SJ?3

^4 Sod^rffSJS^j^e^,

&,S?P

a learned man.

eruaOort

at a distance from a town.

house,

^ d^o, Alexander the

a fort with a choultry.

this (is)

tn)^o5jdo,
a respectable woman.

pen.

3JdJ8^3J ffe)Ooi;e5rf

the sun).

e.

a head-tie,
^d^&io.,
So

that

3e)o3'ro 5

3J

the river Ganges.

rtorre^a,

a village-chief.
that

w?3,

ti

such an

*J"

elephant.

Remark.

The
o

appellative nouns of

278,

i)

number ^Sr

in its different

when used

Z-UF,

5
forms (fcW, t-w

e-to^ (

278,

&,*, t,g*,

4)

8-35*.

and the numeral

^u

ff
,

-^J*, fc,o,

so to say as adjectives, cannot be used as articles; they denote

40

314
'

a certain', 'a particular kind

one

'

'

single

',

',

'

(nearly equivalent to the indefinite

I>ur3d3o, a certain king. ri^arle^F rWrazjio 33^00 d<$

Rao dSc&es * oa^dJ ^^3?, and when one proud king treats an excellent

article 'a' or 'an')

ofcarto*

poet stingily, will not continually liberal persons be born on earth?

oi3^drfo

)^^, (there) was a certain boy of five years called Sivu.

d?W 20eytf SojstA, a certain bad scholar having gone
&&> ^3^,
Socc^rfdo^ arfo JJ.)do, multaga is a certain tree.
one
QdToo, one day, on a certain day.
night,
z-rf^ 03%,
z-cfo
in a certain night.
So-io^,^ 23?e3.cOrt aSjsxrfonart e>3o3.fctfrt
Q >3 2-U
a
tj
Jdjdd ^tfri
ado? soes'oJoo do^A^. when one day a certain man went to a
a certain king.

to

a certain crow.

W^

z^

2*^

was the young of a certain tiger lying under a certain tree.

2-U ws.sdcs^
had one bov.
thev
*
W
*
v O dOcSoJodco Zs,rfo y^o^^j,
u
(0
&on ?3J ztid S3f3?fo3 c3,
the house of a certain Brahmana there was one cow.
CO

foreign town, there

eaort

3orf?k

2*20

eroraj.,

Os>

in

there a singletree appears.

i3^

OsJrfjJjjV*

^^^ he came in one daysr^

^^ 33d?33A &u sortrfjs

^sir^jdro, he stayed one year.

2-^ ^3d?j
a certain gentleman had a certain son called Candranatha,
^*^:0 ^^
^^j^
and a certain daughter called Subhadra.

^^^

312.
>;>

or

'Only',

to

odF,

'

my

down

sat

2^o,
Ci'

o2or, &,&>
tJ

man

not the only powerful

he not

are expressed

'alone'

in the

e. g.

by

suffixing

Eo5Jr?5

world?

the

postpositions

rlra^d
tirio^^dJSs?*,
C3

is

'cwr?S zdj^fto ^rfrtid, "0,

he
is

only son?" (thus he, the father) not saying. ^ZA?^ ^JS^^, he
alone.
^zo
do^odoO ^do ^J3rarfo, he lay down alone in
s

w ^odo^
^tf &uaflp
V

the house,
that horse.

S5?o

o
^J3^,^-,^,
v

ssddJSud? w^CJ bo, they

saw the king was alone,

came

alone cannot

manage

alone.

t\J

I
,

eo

he alone has to build the house, great

if
,

come

to pass,

^j 3^

took to heart the advice

,

she alone.
,

and

cf.

this is

^ 145):

We

^a?
O

sfcs>&

toil will

wdtSJSUiSe
=a?V^^o, he alone
IJ

sDoS-fc^F^, the mother alone.

gave.

this is the only way.

sdJSR>e
a sjjsrtr,
a single town.
$ ^kJ

his only son.

^v

(See

212,

c,

282.)

XIX,
313.

On

additional tense-forms of the verb,

Ancient Kannada grammarians enumerate three tenses

the

present

have seen

that

194), the

both

future

the two

(jj

200),

(kalatraya,
and the past ( 198).

forms of the present tense of the

315
modern

dialect differ from the form of the ancient one

modern

the contingent present-future of the

Besides,

196).

dialect has been introduced

195).

On examination

it

found that the ancient form

will be

of the present

compound-tense, and that the two forms of the present and the form of

is a

the contingent present-future of the modern dialect are also compound-tenses.

Analogously also other compound-tenses

are

362), although they are not specified in ancient

1,

am,

i.e.

196,

sort of

am

continuative

writing

172;

(see

3 wsSja^&g^,

2).

Present, e.g.

196,

Kannada

formed in

grammars,

^^3^,
Q

zodojjos^
i),

(cf.

vi/.

writing

or

esdtfo 35300 tfo&ctfoo^cy?) 3.

"anas?,

ar?or(j>.oirart> rto^o rto&o&srl

till

^w,

re>

needles become ready and can be sold, (there) being are not,

i.e. (there) are not, required for any other "work so

are required for the work of making them.
It

is

remarked that

to be

present participle

combined with the

is

when

Vo ^rfo ?oo3oiaioo,

meaning of
remark

i).

Firto3rf

t3?^,

infinitive or

which as a
i.e.

is,

also used,

expresses,

daughter,

g.

'the half of a thing'.

215,

laugh,

(continually)

^^

c.

adverb) has the

(or

(you) must not (continually)

rSeO&^Co,

as

when the

with the imperative,

particle

mother-in-law and (your) mother's brother.

let

is

euphonic combination (see

(the rules regarding]

s3js3> ti&

55^

e5d

'a little', expressing

partakes of

it

continuation

this

many persons

e.

rfort^f,

serve

(your)

&?kJc3<D tJJ&

us play in the garden.

A
V^CTS
2,

sort of contingent present

(fo,

likewise formed,

is

writing he may be now,

i.

The continuative Imperfect,

e.

c.

he
y.

may

e.

g.

wdji)

-dsrt

be writing now.

%rt.)3j3orfro,

entering he was,

he was entering, tf&qi tao >$, cirfSFZoJSb 06, when the monkeyo
banner rose to its full height and repelling was, i. e. was repelling, (the
i.

e.

oC5

foe,

the idea of the past arising from the past participle

whilst he crush d (them, see $ 362,

2, 6).

$,).

E^JS^o^jS d?dn) ?o3oc

then the Apsaras, saying

"huzza,
40'

316
huzza", quickly brought waving-platters and holding (them)

were holding (them) up.

e.

i.

washerman washing was,

33

was

e.

i.

art?o?k

up were,

sse^sSrt^fl^ kfioJoo^rffi),

the

^e^j e^os^rt ^N
when thou (as a

washing, clothes,

'alb, 5?1 sdrfjsne)^ sirarfoA-CS^o,

^y^rttfck,^ fco^ljfi
*
x
O
gj
ij

o(_

little

was,

e. was comforting
srorao 3c cS <&, when

i.

work

weptest, (thy) father laid his

child)

(or used to

comfort)
went, dining he was,

i.

o
(Sain
a^ojoo^a^;
*L^ tdjc3rl Btfdrttfo
^A\
2J
O C^

when reading the

a,
C3
not known
i. e. were

were not,
wast,

e.

i.

thou

C3->y t3? 5s)r1o |D ^o

:

(to thee)

(or used to become) necessary to

The

3,

well

continuative

(Sabdamanidarpana sutra
employ (or use to employ

14),
;

sit in

^JS&

k&?Se
OO
O
known well

dS59 fd

even

=$J3e^

it

was,

each

letter

aSJSC^oior^
it

i. e.

became

a boat and cross the river.

Future,

employing they

vritti

3oJS?C3e>rt

he was dining.

therefore reading thou

now becoming

habitual)

(or

to read),

-dsft^aSo? TraScSja^ri

also then just as

<3e)3o
e.

book, the letters being

wast reading (or usedst

e^ddjs

separately,

first

and comforting

aside,

thee.

e.

g.

will

go&Qcft&do*).
(Smd.

be,

i.

they will

e.

?oo3olo5j5^
s.

59),

in

?idd3o^

euphonic

combination of letters consonants without a vowel uniting will be with,

unite with (or use to unite with), a following letter (vritti
i. e. will
.

Q
O
W
it' thou
comest at five o'clock, most probably writing I shall be,
^OosSrdo,
i. e. I shall most
3ocrWdo w^drsrt^^j
probably be writing, a letter.
O

eSei&^dosick,
366,

Qf.

women asking

i.

use to ask

e.

for,

ornaments.

c.

The Perfect,

4,

for will be,

e.

having quite swallowed

moon.

g.

33

es^Frforttfo

is (see

fkoft^oro

^o^^, darkness

203), i.e. has quite swallowed, sun and

Wto9 e9rl)^^V9J&Q^o ^^a^oro, know the last

rfrtFCS^orttfcS*
of the (five) classes; having got they are, i. e. they have got, the
;

letters

name
i.

e.

^0$^ ofi 'AJJS^J td^drsJFS, having been born is a son,

has a son been born, to Kulinda. ^zrorici)
^O^^sdrrt^^^ d?5
of nasals.

poetry.

Kalidasa having composed

5ojz3ortd->

?3~e>e3fi

^JSehn'S

is,

dJ3f,

have the boys gone, to school? n^D

i.
e. has
composed, charming
having gone are the boys, i e.

W^,
"

05'S
1

zodSsj

=$

'

317
9.<3

(i.e.
v

U
*J3^>

e.

(i.

6).

196)._

fc.

315,

Gy.

w3, see

>eJj,

J.

2,

may convey the meaning

3333 o^a^oro jjdj^ddort, four

In the ancient dialect this so-called Perfect

of the present,

e.

$&&

g.

f3e>oj,o

arms having nicely appeared

when the common future of
holds good,

are,

i.

is

ratf

Also

nicely appear, on Vishnu.

e.

used

33 OFo),

(like

this

meaning

wr3o3oddj oiJSdJS&^r^ rfor^rre&d .... rtrasreSe^ortv*

will be, i. e. nicely
WSj^orts?, nicely having appeared and having shone
of
and
even
the
numberless
shine,
appear
jewellers, etc. 'adoFCjfS*
shops
e.

g.

a substitute having destroyed

wi^a^FdOodo ^po* wcS^o,

i.

e.

the

in

is

destroys, like

e.

infinitive,

do
g. =5^3^
"^

was,

e.

i.

foe, that which

is

198 under

If

3).

will

be,

the final verb

meaning of the imperfect too is produced,

when the ear-ornament having shone beautifully

the

o!e3 ?3a6,
<>3

when the ear-ornanrent shone

beautifully.

formed by the combination of the past participle

and a verbal noun of the past, again the present may be represented
Perfect

If this

169 and

(see

is

198 under

e.

3),

g.

,3vB

Do X
union of two words which consist of a base (and) a suffix, having
desired by having been (or by being), i. e. when a union of two words

which consist of a base and a

desired (or

suffix, is

to take place),

is

euphonic combinations .are formed by the learned,

(and) final one ( 214).
2jre3c&?orijFrij
0zp>?o

(viz.)

two

the internal

tf$03o3,

TraqJgSi^
tyrfd) fcirtcSjSv* j3?do7Te)c3v0^o, it is impossible also for a king to remove

by slight what having been called has been,

It

may
be,

C^JS^ri

i.

c3e>s^j

what

is

be mentioned that this kind of Perfect

still

the imperative,

become

e.

i.

e.

e.

g.

33 <&

ZJ&SosJdef)3

^^^

dinner be ready, within

3oJ^hdJSCc>, having gone

w3ri

may be

whb,

arrival!

my
let

called, destiny.

us be,

rtodorW.J

i. e.

used in

dinner having

let

udorfd

us be gone,

within the guru's arrival.

It

is

scarcely necessary to state that this Perfect

the participle
since

a negative one,

how many days has

5,

i. e.

e.

g.

when

how many

come

&

this Siva not

The future Perfect, e.g. $>&>

,

be,

is

to thee

Stitf

used also when

&T&

dined?
tfdrt !Uc3rt

how many

letters shalt

is

letters

having written thou shall

thou have written?

318
when

3Je>eAtfo;3fk,

have gone

out

I shall be,

$f\

$& yafi

my

cooking having become will be,

i. e.

has struck

it

I shall

out.

$$

tJhdo^rfo, whilst thy worship

\,

i. e.

The contingent future Perfect,

6,

when thou comest,

a 5^0,
may have been
this letter

may

i. e.

%_

of

the gods takes

have been done.

^^

g.

having gone

c3?533s>$F$ wrtorfd&3s JS>

w^s rt

work having been

my

oiratfo

finished

may

i. e.

be,

3J^

eJ

The Pluperfect,

e.

having written I was,

g.

i.e.

may

sss^j wdosjritivl dooosS ^)^j SJSA sodacS^o,

O
^LJ
"C
I had written, the letter, before he came.

i. e.

>&.ri <3j,

S3d?$o do??

the house before ten o'clock,

left,

rfoofta

$vti^

rf^

e3&^ 5*fta{&, at that time dinner having become may be,

have become ready.
7,

place,

2j6ae3>tfo, who having written

who can have written this letter? esslo. 3J33 f\

finished,

be,

e.

will

five o'clock,

he was,

left

having

i. e.

he had

ysj^j ud)s3d-8\?iB rf.os

TS

having sat writing letters I was,

J,

writing

he came.

before

letters,

$5;^

^s)^j

S5^^o wOcSo3J3% rias;,

Q ro having gone
but
he
was not at home.
his house,

was, i.e.

dJS^

dofSri

i. e.

>^o

?j3s3ri

had been

(or went), to

o5:5>

20^

*-

why having come thou wast

not,

why hadst thou not come

e.

i.

3oJS?ftaol??
O

>

CJ <*>'

(or didst

&

thou not come), to school the day before yesterday?

Q

wrf6

SoJS^AcS^j,

had gone

having gone thou wast ever,

slfc?! 3oJS?hc33j,
*t
CJ

didst thou ever go, to the house of this old man?

Having gone I
I
the
before
i.
did
e.
sJodrf
$$f(
was,
day
yesterday,
j^o
2^j 3oJ0^
go,

^. e.

sJo&S

under a certain

dooh^,

down was,

i. e.

had lain down,

^rW

having sat was,

i.

e.

itself

sSo^d

sat,

certain tiger-cub having lain

sdatf ^e>r! &of&

O

a certain snake having coiled

foot of a kite.

tree a

was,

aSceo

i. e.

rioA

^JSosI^,

on the eggs.

?o0^o

aoe>&&>,
^"^
5'
O 3oe>d)
had coiled itself, round the

the female sparrow

e3^o^DD03o^j ^3* Jjaok^ftji

^odrs 3oJ3^ ^^ ^ D 8 Acyuta having died was, i. e. had died,

O O
before king Krishna.
L.CJJSJ
c^^dJS^AcddJS^j ^^ aoC5a^, one leaf
sjoooz?

>

within the reading book having been torn

0}

dJ553s)05o

<d>

'o'rso

ro

this

my

a>

^J3rS ?
a-

rupee? Having fallen

house.

it

$&*
was,

was,

SjO^cdo
<r>

i.

e.

it

i.

e.

had been

where did you

^ia^o,
Q -o'

torn.
find

had fallen (or was lying)

in

3o4,&>tfP^ 5JJ5)^)(d si>drf ^o?s3 ^?^J 'S'^^j

^
mother, in our back-yard on the mango tree (bees) honey having put
aotj. r033e>oaoOwOO
was, i. e. honey had been put (by bees),
es3>,
j

c$>0:

319

a native soldier having

,
.

had caused, a certain very sharp sword for going to

when he came to see me,
war.
*353rl> $$
zo^rt
^ $11^
Q ^>^o yur3at>,
Ci Q PO
CO
dined.
I
was
I
had
not
dined
i.
e.
not,
having
Already from the instances quoted above it will appear that this
caused was,

i.

e.

kind of Pluperfect, though in form a pluperfect, does not always clearly

it.
Thus in the ancient dialect it may simply
djs
sl^ftriorcjo sjjstf, the month Mage grandly
aorist, e.g.
298 under 3), or the present in the instance
appearance (see

express the meaning of

denote the

made

its

?)eao)bdjrs2;d^ yc3??3* (O^arfordJS sJ^siraa.oSJlv*? and in the instance

wi

ix

fto

315,

&

).

Compare

(about the passive).

2,

271 under

>3oorto? (see

&e$jAckr;3jj ^oarioecifcs?*

Remark.
Also relative compound-participles may be formed, e. g. the contlnuative
5333o u3oio^cb3 KJS^; the continuative imperfect one
3arfo
present one:
sisJ3S)#
&>u.rfo
otojj&at
^do^a
zjrfrfo; the
ajjrfrfo, t3J3&3crart
perfect one:
r
*
<a
w
a
:

Q353r

d^oAoJj ^do

the

S3f?tf, (let

bosses (be taken) for a club

wood

cennangi tree ornamented with

of) that

241); rto^ So^detfrt

Here may also be introduced, especially if the compound-forms

of the modern dialect given in the remark on this paragraph are
considered, what is called the Conditional or Subjunctive by Europeans.
314.

Does

exist in

it

in

is

the

contingency;

added

suffixes

as
(

Kannada?

no subjunctive mode (mood) or particular form of the verb

Kannada, which is used to express condition, hypothesis and

There

to

Kannada

seq.)

i.

e.

to

formed simply by

is

such parts of the verb in

we do already know,
180

conditional

its

indicative tense (see

and past relative participle

suffixes

144)

the present-future relative participle

175

seq.) in

the ancient and

modern

mediaeval dialect, and to the latter participle in the

The

certain

or postpositions for expressing 'if

212,

dialect.
e)

are t^d

(in the ancient and mediaeval dialect), && (in the mediaeval one), and
536 (in the mediaeval and modern one), z*d being the original form.

very probably
to
,

({<;<

187,

4;

be,

is

see

iocr

194,

(which we believe to be another form of

remark

i)

and the

188, which o means 'at the time

at the time that, or when, (I) go

of

the

that', 'when'), e.g.

(=the English

'if

infinitive

320
the grammarian Kesava says the following:
About aod (=e$d,
j6)
"The word Sod which expresses a case (or supposition, paksba) and

ends in (the vowel) -o, is added to the end of verbs (dhatu), it being
connected with the three genders, the three numbers (and) the three
1

persons'

9
rfste* 3-5 o3ov*,
e.g. jlafW'.ft
*O

for inquiring), she (is) the junior;

properly

(i.e.

if
,

(he) fights

(i.

(they) speak, all of

if

they (are)

one;

^jsgpzS

sp^D^cs^* Sw^^o,

kills;

if

^dos^

alone

compare

(they)

(is)
(i.

e.

oue
for

if

he ceased;

t&A^zS ^JS^oSoo

3.
oj

A&F^icteidftftddf,

?*

^sis*
(I)

it'

&>,z3oi3*,
%

consider,

(thou)

(you) give,
a good one;

am

(It will

English by

if

if

fcfrao*,

we are good ones.

be observed

'for', 'to', 'in', as

mediaeval dialect.)

used", Kesava adds, e.g. ^rodoci

3Jtfo?$d|5zS &>?3o, if (he) opposes, he

"Also for the three tenses a^d

lied,

(he) speaks

^oadpdo tfoo

zS^uu

r^Ss^zSe)^ 2s?.$o3), (we) serve,

that tod may sometimes be translated_into
also sscS, es6 may get that meaning in the
if (he)

(is)

a good one;

(is)

if

>feio,

if

the senior;

in fighting), he

persons;

good ones;

thou (art) a good

you are good ones;

&t)o3oo,

them do not know (proper) words;

he approaches, he

(they) correct,
solicitest,

fit

e.

^^o*,
IT

possesses skill; Aj$>jl)sfeas$Fd>o

$#30,

^o^^^^o

?jdjo

(or inquires, i.e.

blows, a fragrant breeze blows there;

(it)

comparing), even both (are)

if

sees

(she)

for, or in, speaking properly), he

if

who

if

is

(he) will paint,

if

^OnJo^o,

he

will

have a brush

brought.

Another instance of Kesava's

is

the following verse:

C*j

r\
v
s3o ^J3^d, 2,ys^j^^J323D?

|]

(See

its

translation in

360.)

Instances from other sources:

3)o

^r?i3i^ri

kills,

i. e.

3odra^.

for protecting

(^ ne protects and)

SD^^
and

^^orf^ d

killing)

(if

^
if

It

may

we

be remarked that the Tulu

make, seems

to

have originated from

after a preceding vowel.

shall give,

in the

&3

i. e.

to give etc.).

so-called subjunctive,

wd) by the euphonic

e.

g. in

elision of initial

<a

321

lt>oBj,
A)

wd

Sod and
participle

W 10
ars3.

tJ

PO

td

ca

are suffixed also

these being joined to a preceding

wd (170),

it

e.

e.g.

'aodd,
co

wherein e$8

g.

PO

In the modern

takes the place of

*acJ

^doioacSO 6,

'

'

<r>

in

gerund ending

a^adjSFd cawd+

(w^d+'adJSFd),

w arfO 6,

arf 6,'
O

'SicSF,

so-called negative

employed and

is

as 'adJSrd and

iS5 3 oJoadJ3rd, ^ja^adjsrd.

^O^adJSFd,

'sdJSFd),

are

e3<L>ad&Fd

relative

negative

aodaziS,
175), e.g. tfodretfdazS,
ss^djsd,
co
r\J
ro

but they are chiefly suffixed to a following

dialect

the

to

immediately

djsdad

there

adr,

instead of

6:'

uses also aojs^csd

(3J3?c$+e30), e.g. sjjsj^d

Also Samskrita si^ has been used by Kesava in the so-called condi"A

tional instead of

Bed, (eszl

and

negative relative participle,

tional

of a

meaning

word

viz.

In

287,

5,

t)

a. b

expressed by kz$,

it

yd

9
j3)SJodJ3^oJo^ a5oci 3J^
^A o,

not destroyed,

is

well-known meaning of a word

CO, commentator),

his three instances referring to the

6),

sas&siroa

has been

seen that

(sutr'a 235).

'though',

connection with

in

gerund

154

the

^A

seq.),

are

'although'

joined to

sso, eroo, SAfl

the past relative participle, and without those postpositions by

joined to the so-called

if

sJ^o,'

not destroyed

is

tdrfd 3J^o
sJ3^^qi^aodjdj*
-x
v^

and 56

-S-^rf

*J

the conven-

if

a,o,

oxa

288 by wrUv joined

and in

to the past relative participle.

According to

added

287,

tod, S3d

and

connection with

556 in

to past relative participles express 'whether

tod and 556 in connection with yo,

to

According

287,

6. 7

tod,

ed

erua

least', 'at

WddJS

express 'however', 'but', etc.

or

t>C3e>rij3(,

in

stated that

In

338

it

connection with

yd

the

eao

mean

will be stated that

tod, etc.,

e3t>d,
get the
ro

modern

"

dialect

meaning

'unless',

by agjs^oF (aJt>&3&) following a

tftto

are

289
According to
According to 291 tod

rate', 'even', etc.

'soever';

joined to the past relative participle

and followed by
In

o,

wv&

e$o,

286 we see that

in connection with eo,

used to express 'at

and w6

In

are used also in a copulative sense.

and wd

any

or'.

and

296

in

wd, expresses

it

is

'but'.

when added to a past participle

of 'except'.

'except'

relative past

are frequently
participle

expre->e.t

282, i),e.y,
41

322

o&orf

^ra^, ggSSstotfo,
<

unless

>^ol>;3e)h o-3-rod.i,

unless (the guru) initiates, final

',

beatitude does not come,

take

(you)

SoJS^JF 3S3dd:>

>^

3^0,
e

<=(.

notice

other

of

persons certainly do not take notice of you.

^oirara

other

persons,
sira^rt

aJ3&r

urao&e>a ^?tf, except (one) makes a legal complaint, the kinsman does

not hear.
'Lest'

to be expressed in a particular
way, viz.

is

by &&f( (or &$ )

>si\ s^Sri =0^0

in connection with the relative

negative participle, e.g.

rUi^o

3e>tfcS aoe)fl

by the sickle.
not eat

83$?$Cd3e>A&, take care

dori

sl&^js^

many pungent

wrfrf

substances

o
use

much shrewdness

in

(or be) hit

is

3^

zratfcfc,

your stomach pains

do

(or pain).

deceitful men must

- 6

^3-

affair, for all

any

t^d

waStf

csisri

lest

your foot

lest

'

beings are watchful lest they be

deceived.

Remark.

Some pertinent instances from the modern

:^f( w6ofc.
"

was in company with

in

company with

^J3&
are

e.

if

i.

thee.

v$

is

e. if I

South-Mahratta
in'

the

zodo^a ^>^o
me

to
is)

could write,

so-called
ftrf,,

to write, writing

should write (here)

vfy g^a, y^d^? wdj^dd ^3<>

rf^cjj

3J3pr(os3e),

(i.

thee,

was (or

if it

coming

(literally)

),

of

dialect

school-books) with regard to the use of

conditional are the
following
(S.-Mhr.

mine not the same road

(to school)?

you come), come even to-morrow!

Let

Coming
us

if

era!

(you)

go together.

the sun not being if

w,
~
CO
on
all
the
sides
coldness
e. if there were not
falling was
sun),
would be cold everywhere), darkness would cover, trees and

was
(i.

(i.

e.

it

creepers would not grow at

all,

and we should not

live,

V
,

ships not being

if

were

(i.

e. if

ships had not existed),

coming not was to men (2. e. it would have been impossible for men) to
3e>c&>
go to and to come from one country to another country.
mother's
word
s&s^j ^S?Co6 & 530514 33ft o&e)^ ucfc^,^,, my
having

heard

if

misfortune
befallen

(I)

was

why

me)?

(i.

e.

if

befalling

$tf

rfor(?2?,

had listened

me was
>jdc5

(i.

e.

3o?>(3

mother's word), this

why should this misfortune have
to

)Drf6

my

S^

ScJS^o^a, my

son,

328
from the tree having fallen if (thou) wast, having died going thou wast,
if thou hadst fallen from the tree, thou wouldst liave
(i. e. my son,
died).

&

ftdrfji),
Oej, fifty
< 33^0 o&e>orU> &zi>3
-*On'
was
one
e.
had
though (i.
though
given fifty
rupees (one) having given
rupees), this tree to whomsoever giving I was not (i. e. I should not have
o rfoC^cdoo 3rf, 33C&JS dJ5^o tfe$c$3 53,
given this tree to anybody),

escrij^y, dJ333e>o3o T&sUritivfl

6JQ

CJ

^-

the young one its mother's word having heard if was

wrfolo a w
Q co'
if
the
e.
young one had listened to its mother's word), to it disaster
(/'.
becoming was not (i. e. no disaster would have happened to it), Retfpdi

^ae;
Q

garding

see

316,

f*l

The author

2.

of the present

grammar has

The Rev. Mr. Hodson

the ancient and mediaeval dialect.

of the
" JK^O
djs^

grammar
I

Kannada language

^wd3

Sc^ udisSifo,

met with similar instances

not

in

writes in his elementary

(second edition, Bangalore, 1864):

if

you had told

me

the day before yesterday,

should have come yesterday."

"This sentence may with equal propriety be expressed by:

Be?. zj<oc33o. or stci) ztoeS. aotwdd && Uiodjdrfo. or Strfo

d<3

"

05

o.'

or

"The

negative

SXrfj rqeD "Sldd

PO
R?rfJ

^3oi)d

rfrf,

^ ai
CD

or

is

**

$3

'grfS

rsidodrfo,

if

similarly expressed by the use of the negative mood, as:

7j3od3dc5rfj TOOJjrfj,
?jaoJ3?ddrfo

^^ ^doS rfCO 6

or eNifo

thou hadst been here,

-jca**1

my

*"*

TisoiwS

vacya in Samskrita,

may

be

classed

">

brother would not have died."

Also what has been called the Passive

315.

rfrf,

or

148),

named karmani-

with the compound verbal

forms

of

Kannada.
1,

The term

of karmaniprayoga, or the use of the passive voice,

distinctly used in Kannada

1604 A. D.

8, note);

grammar

first

was

by Bhattakalanka in the year

long before his time both Nagavarrna and Kesava

had not yet given that name to the peculiar compound-verbal form and
Sutra 251 I about karmaniits use which he designated by that term.
prayoga that has got into Kesava's Sabdamanidarpana, is not found in
our best MSS., and in those wherein it is found, it is called an anuktasutra or interpolation; it is based on Bhattakalanka's Sabdunusasana.
Bhattakalanka's instances regarding the karmaniprayoga under his
sutras 443 seq. are the following:

41*

324
dor =
003335% ofoo

do

33SJgOo

60

under his sutra 530:

sfcsris?
,

u
under his sutra

oO

532:

3&?d

d55ii
55ii si^o or rf.ro^e^ sj^.o:
w
or

sJUo^:

-S-^?os3*

jiW.o or

w
and under

eo

his sutra 209:

-6

ado
..
6J

Now

us see how Nagavarma and Kesava introduced the form of

let

the verb which Bhattakalanka says that

it

belongs to the karmaniprayoga

or the use of the passive.

N&gavarma introduces

may

(kartri)

it

under

his sutra

80 when he writes, the agent

be expressed by the instrumental

(tritiye), e. g.

ej

Kesava introduces

under

it

his sutras 126

and 128 saying:

the agent has the meaning of the instrumental

tive

(prathame) occurs,

there

may

e.

g.

for

5sj>o

be used 55^0 ^JS^do;

and ste^) sJUo.do; ^ejd-sij

"0

'60

slracl

sJrf^sJJ^
5

347,

(c/.

9)

r.

dJ3^3*)
edj>s3oaoo ^33^5^
(o.

oia.o

when

also

the nomina3jfcJo.c$o

(o.

rs.

60

*%.

In other places of the Sabdamanidarpana we find:

and 128, where the commentator has ^^COej*

(sutras 51

WOJJ^
O

&>,4);
*
(vritti

to

From

3Jji4c5j (vritti to sutra 127);

sutra 272);

and

the above instanc.es

3J.o3J5?P>7o

it is

3s 33^*3 53*

sjdrtao (sutra

learned that what

110,

is

commentator

termed karmani-

prayoga by Bhattakalanka, is the use of the infinitive ending in ^5^, o

and es ( 187) followed by the verbs sido or 3J:. Instead of oo* the
mediaeval dialect frequently has 55^0
sub
c3o
(see Dictionary
i), e.g.
rtoo
!kb.c5o. The initial sj of sjd) may be changed into to e. ^.
U

zotiodo
10

nouns.

(c/.

215,

?,

a).

According to

188 the said

infinitives are verbal

325
Both

sjrfj

and t>d mean

get or obtain';

'to experience', 'to suffer';

Nagavarma's instances under his

by Devadatta a making

are therefore to be translated literally:

perienced

(i.

experienced

e.

it

(i.e.

'to acquire', 'to

sutra 80 (see above)

it

ex-

was made by Devadatta) by Yajnadatta a saying it

it was said
and Kesava's instances
by Yajnadatta);
;

under his sutras 126 and 128: by him a making it experienced (i. e. it
was made by him); a padaka by the goldsmith a making experienced
e. a padaka was made by the
a poem by me a saying
(i.
goldsmith)
;

a poem was said or told by me).

Let also some of Bhattakalaiika's above instances be translated
(i. e.

experienced

ally:

by a Brahmana the king a

village) experienced (i.e. the king

village a begging

was asked

liter-

(the begging of a

for a village

by a Brahmana);

by the cowherd a buffalo milk a milking (the milking of milk) experienced

(i.e.

a buffalo was milked by the cowherd);

food a causing to

king
to

prepare experienced

(i.

by the king by the cook

food was ordered by the

e.

be prepared by the cook); by Hari by Arjuna Karna a causing

experienced (i. e. Karna was ordered by Hari to be killed by

to

kill

Arjuna).

The
is

so-called

passive, especially in the instances of Bhattakalanka,

rather queer and clumsy in character to a European's idea; but as

was used

it

That

has been used also

it

and mediaeval period.

in the literature of the ancient

stated,

in the

modern written

dialect will

appear

e.

g.

from the following instance met with in a South-Mahratta school-book:

if
,

experiences
ture,

and

no sickness of any kind in the body, that a saying

that is called) health;
but it is rare in modern litera-

(there) is
(i.

e.

in colloquial

language
understood by the populace.

peculiar

instances 33$*

way

it is

of expression

^de^ ~kl>

(/.

e.

they were), etc.

present case the simple verb

This

(i.

may

and

found

is

arask* 'ado*

translated 'he a being experienced'

enced'

avoided,

if

used,

generally not

Bhattakalanka's

in

s^o*,

is

etc.,

first

which are to be

he was), 'they a being experibe called periphrastic, as in the

e.

<ac*, to be, is expressed

by

'ac*

and

sjcio.

similar expression presents itself in the following instance from an

ancient classical work:

sfctfJo

do^SJ^o, Cupido will

skSftdodo f(v&

lose his wits,

sizSofccre

not an overcoming obtain-

not overcoming) that Nayaktrti, the chief of those

ing (i.
after mukti.
e.

who

strive

326
modes

Other

2,

Kannada are

mode

the

a)

get a

fit

idea

or

force

the

of

of joining the verhs 5>c& or 5>c3 to nouns,

to be

e.

i.

state,

made ready;

^D^

to be loved;

the

expressing

to get surprise, i.e. to be surprised;

lit.

(-3Jz2o),

of

passive

in

the following:

^&3d

to be cut off;

(-33:3),

dooS^dd (-^),

to be struck;

to be

sJc&>,

to be

bound;

lit.

to

3Jz&, to be wearied;

ashamed; ^sjo

v&^d

be powdered;

(-3JjS),to

e$^ Os3<ij

g.

e5^dct> (-3J^oV

sjc^o, to be

^fcjo

e.

broken or defeated. Cf.

(-zJiS),

letter n.

that of joining the verb SjS3*

to get, to receive, to nouns;
(^S5o),
in the ancient and mediaeval dialect, e. g. SsSrCS*, lit. to get a wound or
&)

wounds,
order;

to be

e.

wounded; L>2^^5

3&3Z3* (-^5*),

to go a cutting

cut

to be

(-33S3*),

e5s3^

lost;

&&Q

C&

i3

g.

tfas^rb

to the past participle or

(-S^rto),

of verbs

gerund

^JS^ddo, that is past,

^JS?ds, his two legs were

g. ^<s*ck

e.

^^ort^o ^ad)

^JSrsd
dreowsa.?*)
~~^

off.

e.

Cf, letter o.

off.

as transitives,

titi&

arranged in proper

Cf. letter n.

to be cut

e.

aJSrto

commonly used

that are
is

i.

off,

that of joining

d)

that

to be cut.

that of joining the verh ^perto to nouns,

c)
lit.

i.

SoJ^rfo^A

if

(I)

buy sweetmeats, they

will be eaten.

that of using the causative verh

e)

to cause (one's self) to be

call,

frequently in the three dialects,

,

and the
,

first

the

to

make say

(see Dictionary sub voce),

waoJo

g.

3J^

or

very

^dsl^o
v

ten letters are called monophthongs;

the mother of the Danavas

Joo,

wife

that

S^ONO^O 3s>?ko ?o2^0^Q

tj*

"Manu and

e.

(2^0),

<o$?&>

called

is

is

called

Danu; ttl{iF(5{9$&

called the half body

(of

o^^

her husband).

of Udayaditya
^j^r!^ y\>rio&e)>;^o,
^J

it is

said

he (are) virtuous people".

In the ancient, and especially in the mediaeval and modern dialect,

any causative verh in the past participle followed by the verb
also expresses the force of the passive,
o,

sampradana

(i.

what one

e. is

one who is
^^,^^0,
Tf
one who is fettered;
,

one who

C3

one who

any object which

is

fit

calls

is

e.

g-

called a recipient,

sampradana)

fit

^eSoJo^

(is)

a saying

?50rvj

beheaded; ^ySo 2o
who is pushed away;
one
^jsra^^o,

(or deserves) to be

^JS-S-A;

calumniated;

"2.

is

(or deserves)

to be

whipped;

wo$J

32?
one who

manner

of the sastras

DOSo

3J3eJ.dJ8

eooJotf

respectfully saluted

is

according to the

tfjaskcfc

rO

3><D,
oJ
W

though

(one) gives the desired object, (one) does not go without being abused;
.

however so much (one) beats (the dog) one has reared, it

quietly allows itself to be beaten and does also not become inwardly
,

angry.

341.

Cf.

that of adding the verb

/)

in all dialects,

e.

place... a saying

5^O* ^^0,0,

^r^

e^

z&O

said (or used);

are printed;

e.

yrf^

carrying such a burden

can

be

carried;

having become

it

^exxo

3)ro&stfrt

sheets

'a^o.

?3>>3

(of

and

by him a

by him no such burden

a bringing the books

e.

s^^^rt^?!) ^dJS^Sei^d, lit.

is, i. e. the books have been brought;

$y
ej

siredod

^U

losfo =$2;?orf^o ?j3o

T?^^ris?^

are

becomes,

it

lit.

sp^dd aoJS&^JS^^^rtrfo,
i.

s^o*

sfcoa ?3J3?r33e>rtoic3,
"
*-*

3e>s3)

paper) a printing

does not become,

it

w^

i.e.

s^ej* becomes,

(and)

one hour four thousand

in
i.

le>>

becomes a using, i. e. it is
lit. where comparison takes

lit. it

g. slo3Je>eP>?l)di33oorio,

used; o^SsjjsJ^

more or

to a verbal noun used

esrtj

O9^osrl)^|,

^s;^)PO
9

also good 'deeds

one performs in an improper place, a considering bad deeds

e. are considered bad deeds;
yrfj So^CC3 J3^rase)05j^i or

becomes,

it

i.

that

verbal nouns see

s,

or verbal

aiwsii^j*

^redOj^
(or

may

dialect wrta

be)
is

g)

with

the

also

found the following sentence in which

tfjsa

cO^^^o

in

joined to a verbal

noun

5^5*

stands in the dative:

the term

ffcaofcWjT#o.o,

and uttered

contracted,

^^c^;

in the past,

e.

and
g.

o^redo
same

the

in

3s3

the writing on his forehead will be wiped out.

be was beaten,
noun

wd3

(or

Gurupada was beaten,

ti)

is

noun ending

that of using the verb

,

(About
etc. see

pers. plural.)

infinitive

is

wtfo$

243; about verbal nouns like s3ooy?3J5r3,

In the aucient dialect there

the

^crari^

said;

drama Sakuntala was composed by Kalidasa-

the

205,

was

lit.

vS^j*

lit.

(3) with

the noun Sufcb,,

g.

he ate blows; or the verb

wrf^ (or
to (or on) Gurupada blows fell.

o^),

e.

g. rt>dJ33e>art

that of using such transitive verbs as are

intransitives, in

e.

the three dialects, e.g.

more or

kddodo,

less

that

is

commonly
broken;

328
,

a window that

a cow that has been covered by the bull;

is

sie^d)^, the

^eJo.rWo

opened;

ties

were torn;

the Gauda's house was burnt.

i)

that of using such transitive verbs as do commonly not allow an

intransitive

e.

sense,

g.

must not say that thus

aa* deS3J3<g*

^s^^od
"D

s^SOsStte*

(you)

23?^,

'Sf

(or letters) are not

in this (section) all signs

mentioned (Sabdamanidarpana sutra 51);

g$dj s^Zprrtv* ?iJ3jcSJ3v*
the
iu the rule (s. 140,
nominative
and
dative
are
mentioned
sS^jS^),

3 3o
^^docoOs)A
^
W

vritti);

was

arbour

the

3JrsrSe)s3,

fc3

in

built

wonderful manner.
k)

that of using transitive verbs which are

not accompanied by an

agent, but to

under
the

which the agent has to be supplied mentally (cf.

254, 2,
in
e.
used
the
three
dialects,
&$ asp^rt^,
very frequently
g.

6),

mentioned

lit.

terminations,

which

terminations

the

have

(I)

mentioned (see another ancient instance in 351, remark); 3d^rt;3c3o3oo

SiJS^rodoaos^P, was Siva's offering of water not filtered? lit. Siva's
offering of water (I) a having filtered

was

aa

not?

it

zS^rorf

<oddc3o3o

wsl^, a revised and enlarged second edition, lit. a second edition which
(the author) has revised and enlarged; rod sJJSSd tfrds^), a prepared
fluid, lit. a fluid that (people) have prepared; 3oJ3o3oc3 53J5S?rWo, cast
types that (workmen) have cast; e52*o 35>&C$ s^^^rl^j, printed
books, lit. books that (people) have printed; wdrf SJ)^^, a written book,
lit. a book that
(somebody) has written; s^^do zro'S'o, what was (or

types,

lit.

has been) said

is

what

sufficient, lit.

(the

man)

said

is sufficient;

Q&fi

sJJBSd S5ddo?3, a palace made (or built) of bricks and

other things, lit. a palace which (they) have made of bricks etc.;
Swf^oSoo ^J3t>o* ^^,sj^o, one who deserves to be killed with a club, lit.
9
s3j3Z3ejsc3ot3eS o

^y

one who deserves (people) killing (him) with a club; ??so3o ^J3e->
a^,^c-o,
one who deserves to be slain so that (he) dies, lit. one who deserves
(people) slaying (him) etc.

358.

Cf.

Very often the present-future relative participle of

to

is

call,

met with as an

3>oiosJ

instance

endowed with the quality which

ri Iri,

lit.

55

<a,

this

the goddess

Se)^,^ c^i,

(people) call speech etc.;

of

is

ero

lit.

is

called splendour,
sri.) <

(^c^_),

to

^DoSooSo

called speech
lit.

the goddess

say^
rfora

and

the chief

etc.;

whom

=5^0?$

(they)

=5^

call

^^

is

whom

<oOo.^), these (vowels) called a

tw

these (vowels) which (they) call a,

the chief called Kulindaka,

e.g.

rule,

who

0^53*

dJ36,

Kulindaka;

329
*jdoo ck, a grihasta
x

(they) a calling

'enough',

^sodoo

(i.

call

is

they call)
lit.

called,

etc.;

whom

(they)

mentally supplied to the participle, as

oSo^O3

ctoJfi

adoorfs??)

"o

PQ

a matre (they) a calling

lit.

letter &,

Zsdossxdssjft sSr^adJ^.sS,

lit-

4),
e.

332.

the agent being

g.

rU>rforttf J

^J3

nests (birds) having

'O

skilfully knit (them) with hair, wool, threads

are skilfully knit

313,

(cf.

under

it

two children

^^^

<0^o.

that of using the compound perfect

1)

^OT

rfo^j,
Doddappa (and) Cikkappa, See

call,

called

is

0?kd3j

wz3

called that length of time in which

^^^

dj3^3^

a grihasta

lit.

^^d-ndo, what

'enough'; .odrfoo rfoofcj^^ic3*

v

sireJ oSjrfoj d>, a matre

called a snataka,

they call) a snataka;

e.

pronounces even two consonants,

(one)
(i.e.

it

what (they)

lit.

is

^JS^^, 3^0

We>r\>

etc.;

and grass
Soe>&c3

are,

(-^d),

nests

i. e.

lit.

to

the

upstair house the key (the owner) having

house

is

locked; aosoo ^^c3,

lit.

put (it) is, i. e. the upstair

milk (people) having brought (it) is, i.e.

& 3^ =5^

milk has been brought;

i3&.P.$

&J8?s3rfri

how many wonderful things (somebody) having written in this

book are, i. e. how many wonderful things are written in this book;
^

;3 5 lit-

tJ^dOftf 3orttfri>. DsJSJo^ sdort^ri

daughter to Rama's son

it

^e^c3,

is,

i. e.

lit.

(they) having given Bhima's

Bhima's daughter has been given to

Rama's son; o^rj^rf^o, ^N zS, lit. (somebody) having brought the books
it is, i.e. the books have been brought;
or also the compound pluperfect
rU>a?d> S&J3S30 ^rttfo SoS&ri^, in the nest three
eggs (a bird) having laid (them) were, i. e. three eggs had been laid in
the nest (by a bird);
lit.
(they) having given
313,

(cf.

Site to

7),

e.

Rama

it

g.

was,

A^Jofcc^Odo&^rt 'tfjsU.a^,
Site had been given to Rama.

i. e.

a curious way in which the verb z3^ with an infinitive is used

to express a sort of passive in the ancient and mediaeval dialect, may

m)

also be mentioned here, e.g.

w^rfo dja^o* d?adocl>,

esd>;3 tfskro, that

toward which an activity is directed, is the object (of a transitive verb),

that which desires a doing (concerning itself) is the object; siree^o*

lit.

sS^a esortSoio

wants a

selling)

happen, what
n)

is

and

is

about to

be,

lit.

what begs

to become.

&v*

then the frequent use (in the three dialects) of the verb
to take, to get, in combination with nouns is also to be adduced

(^JS^J,),
letters

(cf.

a substance that is to be sold (li f that

<3,^5^,
spread out in a shop; tJrtaj fcS^&ckck, what will

ro0roc3

a and

6), e.g.

qSoJooT^v* (-^JSv*), to become or be alarmed,

42

330
lit.

to get alarm;

surprised,

lit.

&$ odor^JS^o

become surprised, to begin to be

Jjs^rU^o., to get or become embarrassed;
to

"

to get surprise;

CS

to get or

the verb

lastly

o)

become wearied.

s^rto

(cf.

letter

remains to be mentioned, e.g. -^^odp^rf

in the

e)

(-^Qjs^rf)

of 'to

sense

become'

^J^), a stalk that has

become dry.
All the modes of expressing, somehow, the force of the passive, mentioned under Nos. i and 2, go to show that the Kannada language is
destitute of a passive

which as to form and idea corresponds to the

Samskrita and English one.

XX,

On

so-called auxiliary verbs,

In English there are some verbs that are called auxiliaries, as

316.

such, in a strict sense of the word, are not in

have, be, shall, will;

Kannada.

however, not only instructive, but necessary to learn

It is,

how Kannada does express them.

The English auxiliary verb
1,

'have',

expressed by the aorist (imperfect, perfect),

198,

se#.),
5,

the

seq.

he has (or

compound

had died

have heard

is)

7;

2,

'I

^^o

313,

4;

cf.

315,

9#0o3o30di<i> djdrs

315,

cf.

g.

in

have seen',

is

^s?d^o,

(^s?do,

heard), or by the compound perfect, e.g.

gone

pluperfect, e.g.

313,

(I

e.g.

e.

Cf.

1).

also

2,

I),

-and

'had' by

d^j, king Acyuta

3oJ3

314, remark; and

155

about the past participles.

The English verb 'to

eruv* (
194, remark i), to

have',

'to

by the verbs

possess' is expressed

be, or 'ao*

(^do),

to be, or esd,

is,

essS,

are

!** renown
(
196) preceded by the dative case, etc., e. g. &?jrfj vuc|e^o^,
y^rtrrso c&P^ofi, lit. floweris to him, i. e. he has or possesses renown,

pa

lit.

he has flower-like eyes,

wiort ^ociodrfv* ktfsj,
to him horses are, i. e. he possesses horses.
e553>rt 3o?3 sroreo

like eyes are to

him,

i. e.

he has money, wdtf

i. e. he has five cows.

3ol>o
co

e5s3?$

w^tforao,,

lit.

with him

five

cows are,

e3'

3od

a"3 *!

erorso.,

lit.

near him an inkstand

he has (or has got) an inkstand.

$$ &53 9 ok ^eX^oreo lit. in
is,
my vicinity corn is, i. e. I have (or have got) corn, w^fl ^w do 3o^
&>u rlao?orl azo.ck sii^dri). a certain
dtfo, he had two sons.
w e) 9
Q
o"
gentleman had two children. 2wU rtdtfrt^ to^oioO of& <os3j,
i.

e.

tj

a certain cowherd had one she-buffalo,

CO

CS

<S>

331
snakes have two pointed

;5,

hollow

&3* o

teeth.

*\.

headache,
sssS,

tfrtft

have

yd,

5e>rtci

>?da3

him.

uS^ok^

the

Regarding

so-called

relative

ne wno nas riches,

*.

SoS^C sdrs

3d *

^cso adca)

have money

yd,

., she who

participles

175

^^.ojjo^

he who has nakedness,

the negative

or

he

'ad^e^

may

who

possesses gold.

a man who
wa^radd)^,
i*
v ok#03^;&,
an insect that has wings. 20^ e3 '336^^0,

SooCO,

he

i. e.

who

naked.

is

209, under No.

are used,

note

3)

e.

g.

hump.

w^^>^ SoraOdOe;

^co'
,

wtf'S'rt

^ci^e

that
ie3rt^^>,
CO

she has no needles.

wd?i

acS ^do^ae;, cows have no

co'

at that time he

had no money.

to so-called negative relative participles the following are instances

jr>^(Doc3o, he

273):

(cf.

<

?oJS23r'. S

he has no sack.
^^o^isj,
M'

S3fi)

As

esd^ ao^ d

298) or

i;

d?dd^,

y A^^,
"Q"

ro

3$j, he who has money.

sofas

Devadatta, thou possessest nothing,

no leaves,

seq.;

be given

esqJrdj* erovUck, that has meaning.

to bs expressed, 'ao, 'Siw o ($ 209,

PV
<*>

is

180

seq.;

has love,

has authority,

zoe^oio

re

he has a watch with

they who have knowledge,

tree has

rfaoiJt>d '-Ai^u,,

^oiitfrfo,

she who has beauty.

If

3d

r>ji

d; 254. 267. 273. 330. 364) the following instances

2,

*o,

lit.

thirst.

she has a

e$c3,

360.

Cf.

253,

have got
Also:

fruits.

&$

by (or about) me.

tJhc3,

thou hast eight ripe

v3$f( ^s3r$JSf4

fine paper.

has no

who has no knowledge,

he who has no
^o^
-o Oorisj^o.

feet,

sickness.

co

^^ddo,

he who

who

she

<a^c3dv
o,
co
f

s&S 'S.^cS^O^
^^O^rf
$JS)0, soil destitute of water.
co
n
those who have no understanding, have no happiness.

has nothing.

It is

r?3

a very curious fact that, in the ancient and mediaeval dialect,

the present participle of

rov ( 180, remark), may be used transitive,

he
who
possesses gentleness ^instead of i&rsjv'o).
e.g. riora^^* vo^o,
Wc3* eruv* w^v'o, a cow which has swelling udders (instead of
Z^
2*T
V
that which
^tf, w^^o). There is also Stf*
~ cxJb?3* *sioc3oc3j,
o
to . V.
i
has no terminations (Sabdamanidarpana sutra 72 and vritti; see
338
,

'

under 'awd).
/
CO

For

'to

under No.
2,

way

The

have' followed by an infinitive,

e.

g.

he has

to

learn,

see

of this paragraph.

English

verb

<to

of expressing it therein in

be'

is

auxiliary

Kannada has been

in

the

passive,

treated of in
42*

the

315.

332

When

'to be'

is

no auxiliary,

ewv* (kS?*) and <&o* (^tfo)

it is

in
in the negative, frequently forms
'ao*)

and ysS,

also used
'arf, are, being

2w<s*6

196),

e.

g.

e$d (eso?^), ^z3,

is,

jfcortos^sk* fctfsjdi?

are also swallowing fishes in the ocean.

(there)

rf<s*.

Kannada;

are (there) any protectors in the

SJOrocrodrscSJSs *,
5

y^$* lo^o, he is (present or he exists).

3^* 'adro, he
was (present or he existed). See some sentences in 275, and regarding
359.
'ao*
being omitted when a mere copula see
base world?

('ado)

If

y\jS?"',

are connected with a dative,

etc.

English 'to have', 'to possess'; see No.

About the negative <QV

=
(of 'ao*

etc-

'3>o*)

am

(I)

they express the

not, (thou) art not, (he, she, it) is not

209, note

see

etc.,

of this paragraph.

298.

It

298

has been stated in

used by itself, in connection with nouns and pronouns, and

in combination with
verbal nouns (see
243) with which also the
so-called past participles or gerunds are classed by the author of the
that

it is

present

grammar

154

seq.;

In paragraph

169).

there are

298,

given as instances the forms

Forms

like

e53orQoro'

wcfoQe; 1
,

mediaeval dialect, stand for the simple form

express the

past tense of the negative in a clear

occur rare exceptions, as

used for
bej>,

'I

in

negative

I did

CO

Forms

modern

the

express the

$3S39 c5oa^

^3^

do not know').

wrtJSjQt),
to

in the ancient and

n'
of the negative (
209) to

533Q>Q5fobfc>

co

manner (though there

not know, has been once

^3)CW53
'adJ53bo.
wdJoSQw,
ro
r^

like

dialect,

take

the place

of

the

simple

a clear way,

of the negative in

present tense

3jdoi>>e>. etf>e>, &r()v are used iu the modern dialect

tftfodb^o,
n'
n'
n
n*
to express clearly the past tense of the simple negative, which use however
conventional (see

is

in

we^

originally

abandoning,
appears
298,

in
(cf.

Forms

298 just before No.

rather

sJjSoJotw,
their

No.

like

an obtaining.

dative,

12

denote the

when

e.

in the present

which

aw

),

because verbal nouns ending

present

This

it is,

tense,

their

as

^s?oJot>o,

primitive

an

meaning

as in the instances quoted in

followed by ^^>.
CO

ehocV 'afto
(3J5>?ae>,
fir
o oo
has been suffixed to short past participles

,^80,
rV siraao,
n'

dialect are such in

g.

i),

of the

modern

333

which we know also to be verbal nouns from

case 3^0, SjJsS, fSjS^a, Wh.

use

their

By

(168). 169, in the present

it

intended

is

to

express

the

past tense of the negative in a very conspicuous manner. Other instances

are:
ad fix <3e>c$o zotfae;, I have not written (or did not write) this.

he has not yet eaten (or did not eat yet). wd<3
sd?ozfc&>radj 'aftodrae, was n t his turban of a green colour?
o M^
ro o
joa^a^, he was not happy. See the instances quoted in
eroCe>>,
ro

298,

313, 7; 314, remark.

s;

The English auxiliary verb

3,

futurity, as in 'I shall give',

is

I shall

not', as in the future

shall not give',

e.

g.

3ido or

which 'aw

is

00

under No.

When

added,

of this

.e.g.

No.

not give

$&&

200;
is

cf.

No.

of this

12

expressed by

shall

'Shall

).

the

negative,

noun

209), or by a verbal

^\>z&dao,
CO

be expressed by

may

e;3) 3oJSert zSe^o.

t3^o;

to

not give (see also

).

In a question 'shall'
a. b; cf.

shall

give

indicates a duty or necessity, as in 'he shall go', 'you

'shall'

shall go', it
acJS^rt

^jszSci),

implies a simple

it

expressed by the future tense in Kannada,

e.g. tfocksSo or ^js^o^^j,

;

when

'shall',

e.

10),

g.

is

la

4.

expressed by the suffix e$

<3e>r3?ri>

Shall I go? 3o?5A?S.^j

*

&3&

(zS^CAxp, z3?&%), ri^o, e.g.

Cf. No.

rfJS^O?

So^3, what

3oJS?rt)o3:e>?

shall I say

or

es9^ ( 207, 2,
what shall I do?

more?

y.
fij

s?? doest thou give

advice? Shall

ledge? Would

this not

e.g. c3e>(&

take

such a bad

the money of (my) mother without her knowbe the same as stealing?
or also by a verbal noun,

away

^ood&o??

The way

me

3oJ3?rtadt3jS? shall I stand? (or) go?

of expressing 'should', the imperfect of 'shall', by

z3^3V), z3^o will be seen from the following instances; fSJS^a

you should read carefully.
>^o ^ aorerff^ ^JSrieS =J3^ ^3^ a J, you
:

should pay this

money immediately,

we do? ?S6oJo^d s3o^3

^3> sijsd
bours.

See Nos.

About 'should
4,

4.

9;

^s^j

t3?T#j,

'is

expressed by

not' see Nos.

necessary',
23^C3o,o,

s^jsd zS^o, what should

(we) should love (our)

neigh-

314, remark.
5. e. s. 9.

The English auxiliary 'must'

required',

>fl>

'ought',

23?C3o,,

('is

'should',

d^o

solicited',
'is

203),

e.

'is

desired',

probable or evident')
g.

sJ

'is
is

334
tStfofcrfd

eCAxo

in

(-ritf^o),

(i.

e.

for)

the verb which expresses the growing of corn etc. and that of trees and

_,
"

(and not v>$] must (or

23s?

creepers,

you must

am

(or

learn grammar.

to)

you should make cool what

z3*tfo,

to town (or abroad),

come?

to)

oi>) 2030^ 23$

>ao
Q

CO

Pune.

03Ce>Oe>c3tiJ3

esrffk
23e^o,

in

or

its

must learn

'Must',

aojserl

otossrart 2od t3^o,

<3e>?i)

when must

3j^Atf 28^0, he must have gone, -gsrt Sjfl

it must be very cold now at (the town of)

d^rslis^ ^^roO
vti^ft ^t 3sslo3jrf)
CO

d?^. somebody

to him.

dative
to

may

know

also precede eS^o, e.g. 'S.d^^*

this

also expressed

is

when denoting

infinitive

ol>^o

in

ending
:

23e 3 o,

man.

by

zS^CJo^cJo,

a verbal noun of

23^c2o, e.

obligation, has been expressed in the

dialect also by the infinitive ending in ese3*,

(

enaart

are used before dfc3j,o, z3?&3j, and 23^0; the

esew and

Must'

^ras^

>2oo&e>d>

be seen from the above instances that infinitives ending

It will

We

hot.

is

must have communicated these tidings

4

to be) uttered.

(or please) put up with this mistake,

23^0, he must (or has

we must go

is

ef>e>o,

modern

followed by
being
eru^.,

and a demonstrative pronoun, e. g. $a>c&

^^oo^s^j
Forms
I must give, lit. I to give a being-he.
'ado^d^o),
=j3c3)^,

180, remark),

(c/.

>odo>0ntaotf occur also occasionally in the mediaeval dialect

as T?j3^^>o^.
%>

(e. ^r.

of the Vivekacintamani),

and may denote the simple relative present-

future participle, as they do likewise in the modern dialect,

a
without causing pain.

worm

e.

g. i^dfij,
that sucks (or abstracts) blood

z^^s,h 3oJS&3X>v*

aodo6, a horse which carries

nicely.

To e3^J the verb

e*rto,

to

become,

is

frequently added, (when

u^o

considered a verbal noun, see

tfj

is

3of5>r<
204), e.g. ao^e ^sX&ori^o
two
months
are
about
3o2^o^ado
>Sor1^o
oidck
required
23^)rto^
),#
- z5,
tcfor cotton pods to become full-grown and ripe.
'

335
rw tfOok Zo^rbsiao, it is necessary for you henceforth to
C3
^0 ^ JV^ djS3>S z2ec, S&e>3e>acj6, rT>ck
yourself to learn.
TT

exert

thou must not (or shall not) utter falsehood,

if

thou utterest,
,

Rama was

brother, a

n%,

zbM

t>3
>_>

<a

Ty

wanted by

(or is)

little

33, ?jtfd

eJ

be obliged to punish

I shall

all.

grass was required

wo^dd doused

tlice.

w?^e>

iw

c)rfo^j

fcriJS

z!e

^t3o)rt ^j?o aSto

d>d^-

for the calf.

soSro^o

&sz* z3?7>rt>3B ^>,

at

to pay postage according

it was
(or used to be) necessary
measured distance of the place to which letters had to go.
5^ .Sorttfortv* $<3f( 3&ti e3^>A%, you ought to have given

the very first

to

the

c^c&
(it)

months ago.

six

how was

2v5cdo z3?^e)A^,

aoefcrt

it

to be written?

he had to go.
zS^dido, that is needed,
O^ d^* s^o, he gave as much money as was desired.
as much as is needed or required.
^TS^J siojsixOuort 3oJ3ert

fy

3oJS?rt 23?Tff308J^>,
r

,,

must go

to

Bombay,

these fruits are sour, therefore these have not

(by me),

*.

e.

therefore I do not want these,

you want (some) rice?

(any).
5,

^^ wtf^
'Must not'

or wanted',
(

zS^arkdaw, you need

not

('is

212,

i;

7;

203).

do not

(cf.

(thou)

must not

No.

is)

z3?T?Je>?

has not become wanted,

It

cf. e3??rsr!odae->

209, note

y?^

become desired

i. e.

t3fffe)Aej,
I

do not want

Cf. No.

not come.

do

5.

'shall not', 'should not', 'is not desired

fit',

under No. 4)

etc.
,

301; and

cf.

No.

is

e),

commonly expressed by

e.g.

aa^o.o
&

one must not (or should not) say

tod

XT

$S^xo

^,

(thouj must not

(or

t3^S, you must not

(or

g3ed! <o^>^)?, 3JS^rlo,

*a^
come this side! 0, go away!

(or shalt not) use

-3-a*o,o

bad words.

thou must not (or shalt not)

lie.

should not) utter falsehood.

=5-3^0

rfotfo,

3e^

sira^o

wc3 z5?d,

^a^Ozlrt

3J3?rt

z3?rf, (thou) shalt not utter perverse words, (and) shalt not learn from

feJ^rraSSc^ft 3&rt t2^, (thou) shalt not wander about as a

deceiver,
tforiod^ 3o^ ^d tS?d, eddo<Soio riooji d z3?d, (you) should
rogues.

not be behind a horse (and)

I

do not want

should not be before a royal mansion.

c&3 s3?^, (I) do not want anything.

this.

f
>

sna ^ we cut some

not right, for they are not ours.

(f

tne ) r ip e

mango

fruits?

(No)

it

is

336
preceded by the infinitive with

is also

eso* or

final

ese>o,

e.

g.

^
The idea
the verb

of eJ^cS can also bs expressed by the negative participle and

'ado, to be, e.g.

=$&&z>3\< sira^ado, 33e>,

rt&PG&rarfftCto.

-a-

See under No.

and

13.

As frequently to z3^o (No.

is

added,

so also occasionally to e3?d the verb

4)

e.g.

The English auxiliary 'ought

6,

'should not',

Nos. 5.7.8.9.11)

etc.; cf.

of zoo*,
zotfo), e.g.

not' ('is not becoming',

is

^5^0 (tSdef, =&>df)

'must not',

expressed by wadcto (the negative

&3tf<&>,

^jadtfrfo.^, eni^0?o

(one) ought not to pronounce (or should not pronounce) these

dja^ddo

=$J3do*) z3dtfo, ^J3d^o.

?ora

rfjs^jrt^^

persons ought not to listen to insignificant words,

business that (one) ought not to do.
not steal and (thus) eat.

doeJo.

^^

z^ddo, eminent

djs^ eradd

=$>?o,

^J3rso 3?1 ersdrfo, (one) should

*>
O
C3

^do

3oJod

ing propriety (one) ought not to speak.

siragD^ w)dcjj, without know-

33

g'dOSjrt^ sjjs^o

03303

&3->d

of (one's)
j3o
(one) ought not to (or should not) transgress the word
3oz&rt> SJJSrf w->Cd>, (you) ought not to (or should not) commit
parents.
?

theft,

rfre

torment
there.

(you)

33^rfr{^f^ Sj^as

little

$^

creatures.
zod arsdcSo,

>&

steal.

q5

&>f(

(one) ought not to (or should not)

aJ?)

:3e)drfj

you are not .permitted

must not remain here.

should not)

^ddo,

^>^ 33z&

thou shouldst not

to come.

djsc^ wudrfj, we must not (or

Jrtdo Lti

j
,

(you)

must not drawl

in reading, when reading (you) should not hurry, (you) must not read
too loud, (you) must not read too low.
$k3 ^sj^ri^fsa s&ad tjadci),
^
W
^rf djsdrfddo erors We>dd.>, those
(you) ought not to do evil deeds,
r*3

that will not work (or have not worked) shall not eat.

$deo3o

20^3-3 ri

jScsd

337
The idea

of aradcto

also be expressed by the negative participle and

may

the verb 'adj, to be, e.g.

3^

<&<$

See under Nos.

speak such words.

and

The English auxiliary 'must

7,

not to
^aO,, you ought

sfcs&rttf?^
is.

not' ('ought not', 'is not

sometimes expressed by ^ac3cl>, e.g. e2c3?& *$&*

is

),

shall allow thee to

go to play with thy play-fellows, but thou

and come at night.

loiter

The English auxiliary 'must

8,

or forbidden')

must not

(one)

-^ ^^

),

ofoadJS)

go.

expressed by

ought

to

rt^^Oi

do

33

uti

(3tfj,c5o,

?5^dj

so.

d?2ic3

S)A

fit,

CO

esrs

W Sj^^ri^

('should';

^e^o

here.

Nos.

cf.

3oeri

you

wrtcSo,

(Cf. No.
3.

4)

is

11.)

also

5JJS3 ^,rfj, thou

'

q)

CO

Soerl

S5f5^

&>ud
O

3rfo,>dJ

a?S3

30A

^o?s3J5w,do
2i,?A sJJ)^
IJ

^,c5j,

3^0 3J3?r1 ^g^as^, he should have

you ought to have told him so.

brothers ought to love each other.

?;!>

aoJ^rt^

they should come here,

^^do,
^"

&

^\

vti^ft

^^

nobody must come

etc.), e.g.

^7^ wO

to enter palaces.

3JO?^?o ^^sJOuSDd, they should sow and try those

seeds in this country,

>^

&$O tfsl?

euphonic combination

spoil

kill (it).

sodes'srtcj^,

CO

gone.

i&t$,
*v

The English auxiliary 'ought'

9,

'improper

for

must not allow inimical women

alas, (you) ought not to

must not

esrtcii, e.g.

unfit to be uttered.

is

(one)

),

3-&roSJdrfcl>,

by using

(for instance)

not' ('ought not', 'is unfit',

not unfrequently expressed by

is

?o>o3jo
o}?fo
o 9

a word that

must

^JSrfd), (one)

jj^o &&ert ^JS^cb, you must not go.

not kill that,

must not

further

fit')

^^a^,,
jsc3

^a%,

thou shouldst have returned

that book to him long ago.

'Ought not' ('should not')

*9>,
***
done

&

e.g.

^of^. ^?1>

so (see

298,

is,

sister,
^^,aat>,
Q 1
Tf
about ^t), and No. 2 of this

V
almira at so high a price.
v.

go (see
10,

300,

^aa^,
TJ

Ci co

^^

See Nos.

The English auxiliary 'may'

etc.) is expressed

you may

about w^>).
CO'

'ao

or

thou shouldst not hav>

f*

^sSsiUsJFlx Jie^) ^JSrso ^JS^,

(3

this

in this case, expressed by suffixing

3oe)^ SJJ5i^

in.

^35U Me)0f

you ought not

3oJ3?r(

to

^OJOTJ,

have bought

thou ought not to

^^>de>,
co
rf-

s. e. 7. s.

('is

is

(*<).

allowed',

by waojci) (of :oo*), to come, e.g.

(or are allowed to) come

).

>??!>

'is possible',

?sj

&^

^^

is tit'.

2o3jjCX.

SJ>?rt U3ooc3o, thou uaayest

43

338
(or art allowed to) go.
203oJdo,

be

may

it

yi^^o

?5d^

less) be

known

2j6ad

to all.

us.

So^ftC

z^sJd ri$ol> *sd fcaood), he

may be

oiQ^JS rUi^d
^0$ d

'a

g^d)

V*

may have

he

iisdjcl),

you may stay with

zosdorfo,

^
sls^

so.

thy true friend.

(more or

<3sjoj

waoorio, his tale

you may

w^djrfj,

written

may
here.

sit

this.

$5ddo
you might have given more than this.
eod 203c023e>A%, they might have come last year.
,

Another way of expressing 'may'

ation, or possibility)

is

(in desire, wish,

by using the imperative

ma y

e.g. sSdddJSxs* So^craoioo ^rfrt^,,

Q

permission, expect-

205,

No. H;

i; cf.

367),

the age which prevails in the veda

1J

one hundred years), become thine!

(i.e.

slBSOS

may

make!

they make!

t?^o sisarfos^dj or

or by using the suffix

may you become happy! &

true! essS^j

&d,

&&

very well)!

(?'.

-ad, may

present-future tense

come now.

<s,c$o

c3e>ffo

it,

it

>^C36

might beat (us).

-dsrt

S5SJ

if

3o5>ri?

she

fci^ejv'o,

may

(i.e.

know

zo^C3s)^o, if (he) learned to

rfoCO3

come,

20?)
63

(i.e.

(it)

be

it,

i.e.

is

likely to)

this,

father

rain this evening.

may

it

5^0,

may come,

may

wrt),

become

(it)

I go, sir?

may

or by using the contingent

very well)!

it,

tfe^C9397lO,

that news prove

^)r(, may

wrt, may

very well)!

be (be

^jsoJoo^e)^)^,
o

w?33 zojS^j,

>3or?

e.#.

him so?

I tell

may

195), e.g.

a. 6),

2,

he come! na^ro, ^3s^J 3J3?riCo3:e),

may

so be

e.

207,

;3^F>3e>f$53) nj^c

),

become so

may he give! ysJo*

w^o dj)0ooO d>, may he

essjo ^odotf,

may come (perhaps

come).
'May' in a question has also been expressed by a verbal noun,

3oJ3wdJ)^r\^
this field?

11,

)S3)

aSjft^2^A(tl^,

may we

(i. e.

(regarding the form 3JS^js^ra see

The English auxiliary

'can'

is

are
205,

we allowed

e.

g.

&

to) cross

s).

expressed by

toafocto,

wtij^rf

and other forms of the verb 200*

No. io\ to come, preceded by
(zodo, cf.
the infinitive ending in ss or
this
last
termination being put in the
e3sx>,
dative

(ss^,),

e.

5e>ra aoaoocjj,

g.

WorTe)^^, 3oJ8?r( eoaoorfj,

if

what can be

(there)

is

power

(one) can go to Bengal.

(one)

^j3C3a^O tfidoiotfo.
^
^
throw out darkness with the bamboo fan?

he can do work.
this?

$$f(

LciO*
IT

035c)do

'acS^j

ZJdolcS,

can

seen.

e5orra)tf

g^cs^ci

in (one's) sole of the foot,

sSJ3C3

358^ wadod?, can

^IraSd wao^dJ, who can have done

read.

$$f( &*)$..
tr

wdo^

can

339
swim.

S^,

&3$A

can we cross

he can write.

^tfcdo tododdj,

Hanumanta

3c&)3ort 35>e3>*

could jump.

this field

is

e.

(i.

oiJ>Otf to^a^o, who can have written

2o6o3o#,
Q O
Tf
'Can'

is

also expressed by the verb erto,

he can do this work.

^otts

r^

much

as

3ofc3

fl

>

a?o z3?tfo,

e.

&

g.

we should make happy others as

we can.

'Cannot'

is

?5

^tfs^f
o"

udodBw),

(or

wo

'Cannot'

is

(Cf. No.

do

^do

work,

this

e5^?i

^O&P
-o

c^0

tf^

3;& ^O^OP,

woS-JSo?,

315,

d^^

stay (or stand),

a diamond with anything,

tell his joy.

OXJ^^&S ^

ysj^

^^

do (anything).
Cannot'

y.

wrido, he cannot do

tJrido, I

it.

cannot go

v&

^)rcO

'Sfi

in

such a heat
canst not

cannot cut
^JSOiJgSTsrido, (one)

&&^(3^ ^{OMparili),

one ) cannot

yrii^aw (or wrtdo), he cannot do this work.

wsj?jrf 3?
a business that cannot be effected,
t^dorl ^^oiod 3&e>r
without the knowledge of God we can never

^crartdj,
'

e.

^^^ tfO $&&PO ^rs^^rtdo, thou

/).

2,

letters.

you cannot do

alas,

SoJSfrbrfdo (or ^J8f^J8(C85JJ

of the sun (see also

yv>s3

e.)

ertdo,

t)

g.

such as cannot be uttered, are no

expressed also by the negative of e$rtj,

rrortdo, I cannot

e.

(sod)),
that boy cannot write.

that cannot he counted.

wo*

expressed by the negative of

w>3dJ

'Sr,

this,

thisV

canst thou do it?

^rio^d?,

^J^essl

there a road for us to cross this field)?

may

(Cf. No.

8.)

further be expressed by tfja&cto

(cf.

No.

7),

e.g. tufSoSJSd
<M

can break a rock, (but)

zjaoodo, dfle
A sJorf^JS^oJo ^JSc^do, (one)
cannot break the mind of a whore. soS^^oSod O w>3 2J3codo, t^^P
>ij
oio

CJ co

?o05^?d

^J8^do, (one) can

live

stand the trouble of cold.

where familiar intercourse

aSpj^

^JSdd^o.
6J

cannot be told has befallen (me).

For 'cannot'
?oo (see Dictionary)
occasionally used, e.g.

sjojadd

in

^js^)^

3co e^CeiAcS, so

is,

(but) cannot

much

pain as

combination with eso

3o?Cs3ae>?oe>
00

is

also

(one) cannot

tell

the lamentation of those three.

There are some special terms in Kannada which directly denote 'to can', viz.
a)

e9C5, e.g.
if
,

<&aoka* e&^okd.$&& se^oiod adr^

(a man) cannot speak (and) cannot hear, he

is

C)dsJoJS^c3

called
43*

dumb

and

dojsajrtfo

deal',

340
rte^rio4 es&^Oootfo, fools cannot gain

*?3roi)^

fame.
es&S*,

6)

e.

abler than I?

$ft wSUSo"' wrlo"

g.

aoj^orfdo wqJrrfrf

stand the meaning.

3J3

^ori ao^o

3rfS3 Os&rfo^j. cra?i>

Zy

"&

about

6 (=

Je3s3*

it.

a surety,

rf.3o?o5*
.

ijatfji) Tfs^rtrf

rustics

wet3 f^o,
3

die.

^e>^o SoJS^rteraSS ?^,

^^grsS5

s rfo.

cannot

if

become

have gold

cannot go.

you more

tell

(thou) canst pay, become

r6) 3oJ3clo&>rto,
sirej3o>rk, a valiant

man can

fight,

we cannot hide anything from God.

he who cannot write

sl,

who

wCSOo, the boys cannot under-

Sofi>sreo. *$$fi, ?raa<oo*

cannot

(and other) property,

W3Jr6 nei^oa4 can

inferior to one

is

feeds sheep.

we,

c)

e. ?.

recite the vedas?

he can write,

^JS^ra

ww

^5^0

-^!?o

^art^o

dl

sSecSdjSJB^a sirfw^, can the

riR^rW?^

can swim.

2os3^o,
CO

?3^^o

male buffalo

tododj

uwrfj,
CO

can depict objects.

rfrlr?o 200 do, poets

'will' when it implies a simple

the
future tense in Ka'nnada, e. g.
expressed by

The English auxiliary verb

12,

futurity

No

(cf.

is

a),

or ^J3^od^o, he will give.

^o^oDo* or ^jsr&ao, you

will give.

200. 203). The future 'will

0,0 or ?5^o, or artorfcSo, it will become (
o"
o
not' is expressed by the negative, e.g. ^o^o or ^JS^^o, he will not give;
or by a verbal
will not give

noun

Regarding the

noun ending

to

which

209. 298,
suffix

in est>J

<ae;

is

suffixed,

g.

^^

^J^cijrfao

you

3).

with the dative

'sto in its connection

(wo*,

e.

298)

to be

it is

of a verbal

remarked that South-Mahratta

people, at least sometimes, attach the idea of doubt (samsaya, Nudigattu

p.

135) to

i. e.

it,

e.g.

he
?5^^o <$$ ^6a3o>3\w
CO
1

*\.

she will (probably) not eat.

S.-Mhr. shool-books, may, or

not to invite

is

me

(to dinner),

-jj

he will (probably) not invite me.

w^

erora
re

O^w,
tr^

she

is

not to eat,

i. e.

Other instances chosen at random from

may

not, express doubt:

V
T3
See also some instances in
298,

3,

and

c/.

No.

The English verb

ZoO*

of

2 in

the present paragraph.

'to will',

which fte3o),
toe3^o,
^
0^
M
'

'to be pleased', 'to desire' is expressed by

tce3,
CO

vulgarly

s^e3
CO

persons of the negative are in every body's mouth,

I will not,
e.

g.

and other

eror&ee3(& or

341
vors de3,
W'
03

or tfjszS 3<L>, he will not give.

$>&&&&&

not eat.

will

ro

or

0(^&A>{b

will not hear.

T?^ d^>do, they

The English auxiliary verbal forms 'does not', 'do not', 'did not'
2j6c&o,
are expressed by the negative or a verbal noun with -3,^ e. g.
13,

w^o
&$? e53 ol>o,
&3edo fcd-i^aw, Soma does not
^JSdo, he does (or did) not make.
come.
tcrs^o3j> flea's-, We>do, why does Bacayya not come here?
I

do (or did) not write.

do (or did) not know,

wd>e>, why did the boys not come

to

play?

ff
,

do not cry

(see under Nos.

x>?l3s>3

ado;

(cf.

and

No.

e)

is

Also the following way of expression

s).

to5 9 d acJSs^

to be paid attention to:

s&s^ado, do not spend (your) time

tftfoij

do not desire

idly!

great things!

The English

'does', 'do', 'did' in questions is

,

The writ on

come?

his forehead will be

wdr&

zorf^JS^, did he

wiped

come?

o
^?1^^ Zo^aoi:^,

he go abroad?

sssj^o

zo

do 3?^ ?&>, does he

a^^rtos^-^fi), does
brother, didst thou break the

ys^j

S5f5)

&3$r ^p^do, why

looking-glass?

out.

expressed as follows:

did he become dishonest?

erxoOrt

did he go?

rfodj^jOj.rtv*
e^kre,
O W
T3

ii^ ^^riJSrss^) ^^rSo^ao, alas, why did the mad black

risl^rtrWto**
bees become inimical to campaka trees?
o3J3^ 20^ do, why did they

come?

otostf

beat thee?

who

do you go? A)?3, oi3e>= wlSo

SoJS^rtj^^d^, father, why
Did somebody
Site, why doest thou weep?
iOrf
CO O

did kill

2j?d o,

Mura?

see that sparrow?

whence did he come?

^0

rfo^oio^o,

ws^o 3J3^rl)ddo

v>3&>
033)^, why did you come?
^0
come?

The English

may

be

expressed

repetition, e.g.
14,

'do'

When

in

in

wo! or

Oi3e>s:-)r1

O
FSJSe^a,

when did you

whither does he go?

i0ri,
CO

^jj

v>$ ^-sdre^e^o,
O

connection with the imperative, as

Kannada by
206

the

simple

did you

why

imperative

do
or

write!',

by

its

u8!, zo6o3oO! or ^6o&>0 zodc&oo!

the English 'let'

is

used as an auxiliary in the imper-

ative, denoting 'exhortation', etc., it is expressed simply by the imperative

(

205;

go!

walk!

cf.

No.

gsrtosjo,

10-,

see

let

us attack!

aojs^^^ra,

367), e.g.

let us go!

rto3o, let

en)&&s3,

let

(him) do!
us utter!

^3,

let

^oiood,

(him)
let

us

also the forms with

Compare
in

207,

2,

342
and modern dialect

of the mediaeval

55

a. b.

The English verb

'to let',

the verbs gr, to give,

i. e.

'to allow', 'to permit', is expressed

to give,

&ci>,

etc.;

and by

etc.-,

their

by

causatives

&T&

and &/sQ&>.
The first syllable of &&> is exceptionally
shortened by some writers so tbat it becomes QT& (in imitation of
(

151)

*SL^O, to permit, of its

Telugu

&, to give;

Zy

The mediaeval

dialect has, e.g.

151,

cf.

?d 3oOo3osj

b, 3).

-dscriod

S-J

a structure which does

adhara (dam);

and ^d)rV es>

not allow
sj^e) o3o v>o
r\

there do not let (their)

ripe

a cow that allows

itself to be

me

he does not allow

he does not

The modern

e.

let

to

come.

him

enter.

g.

fail.

35e>t>j

milked with ease.

Thus

also does

-^JS^o),

he does not

him go

me

let

(or

come,

a^j, e.g

and ^js&Zoo,
allow him to go)!

f^.rfa
C <=L

a
co

Q'

S3s3;3o

dialect generally uses ^J3^o

let

called

occasionally

-g??oo

?fo^$S3e>A

is

the trees

^eSo,

fteoSoej*

c\

and nuts

fruits

occurs also in the modern dialect,

water to flow,

e.

g.

let
?iw7^J3a?oj,
v

me

stav

co

here!

ey ^ociod
oiJstf^J^ ^?^ ao^d wdrijaa^Joda^ (or sjd^js^osja^),
that horse lets no one come near it.
5ort^c3sj> rf> So^O >Oe>rt> aJ3e;^o
CO

PO

'S.dAjad tjsrfdo, one ought not to let filth lie either in front of a house
or in

(its)

See an instance under No.

back-yard.

Also the verb

modern dialect

ci>,

for

to let loose, has

'to

let'

>&, let the cattle go!

SoJS^rt

^oao&3ste$rfja
drink (do so).
o2o,

It is still to

15,

proper',

cf.

33U3oPO

fi)rf,

in

7.

been used in the mediaeval and

instances like the

c^c^

5o-?rt

zi>, let

following:

me

ne neither drinks himself nor

go!

lets

him who

will

be mentioned that the English 'ought not' ('is imunder No. 9) is also expressed by ?ow ( 209, note i)
ro

Tf

preceded by an infinitive generally ending in

e$, e.

g.

rtado

(Dasapada 157), (one) ought not to abuse those that are

guru and elders; a very handsome woman ought not to become

Se;

CO

(one's)

the wife of a blind

enemies.

man

(one)

ought not to court the friendship of

343

XXL
On

or

either

the (320); as

the

follows
325);

nor

neither

317);

as (321);

(
323); what is that?
in this manner
326);

-so much, how many

be

it

so

it

as

205,

316, Nos.

so

or'

3$^j

53=5;,

TS

the back part

either before

(i.

r or r

1, 1,
e.

10.

u),

g.

be

it

command

and have

207,

2, b,

either thou or he

z3^J,

e3rtrs

their

ft

(syllable)

short in

240) takes place

or

also

by

the modern dialect uses

may

must do

start

e.

or',

agreeable to me.

g.

^d^j,

$& S3e>d

this,

either on Friday or Saturday.

^doa y^floSj^ ^ra^e^j,

if

nominal

of the dative;

they

either good or bad

o
at night either cats or the

them), owls will peck (their) eyes and

kill

your

$3ft t3?5e)dd> do

Tff?rtri;3>rt>

either paper or whatever thou

buy

If

are

(there)

first

e^rtC) $$ft

,,

rV

siwcS

when

3J33kje)do,

is

lit.

"a

to express 'either

it,

es??,,

292.

As has been remarked in

be

when? (329);

e.

the beginning), slackness

in

5oko, as appears in

lit.

how much

expressed by ts$

9^0,0,

or further before the

rts?*

namely, as

is

oJ

in

327);

(328);

eoriortsd

rfdc&?<irttzi

themes that end

319);

(330).

i; ef.

rtee>dsl3

($

what happened?

324);

many

In the ancient dialect 'either

317.

be

etc.

for ($322);

who -he,

whether -or

($ HIS);

wantest.

re

young of

them.

cats are

met (by

33

o3o ^3s!OJJ ^oScdoos's 8, either for vomiting or for bile they drink

*T

a decoction

of cinnamon,

Q
dvX),

having

done service

in

an

excellent

O
a present got either by

manner or by having

afforded

friendly aid to others,

5lrado3
they used to travel
-on c5do,
o
either on foot or on horseback or also by means of carriages.
si 53-33

Ad

v_;

the house

(i.

e.

by living

abroad

e.

such people will subsist eithor having entered

in the

house) of relations or by what has been

344
acquired by

fathers.

(their)

and

sjjdrte*

SoJ3C$u3ort$23e>rt)

rU)^: sel T&orej 'adoisS, parrots build their

<3
6J

rUedctfj adotforttferart
co
nests

ASrftfo

live either in tufts

of trees or fissures of dilapidated walls.

weo9 ^ j^dafctfo.\ za?&*rteatfrrart

CO
dj?odo&e>rt)
A

.sJzS

fe3,dos3

""

&?e>tlo3Sdrt> eoisiorioJo
J

^JScfcS'&jsi.tfcJ

3oti>rtz2

a building that has been erected either on an open

sJOcS,

eruraj

warring,
praise

sJJsdosJCm'exh

ofoocS

a bastion of a fort or behind a palace for the purpose of

on

hall or

into boxes or sacks.

either

the sugar

fill

they

God

kjo2o&s)rt

3ti3,

ro

vora

sSo^sjsri

cs

d^rfdrl),
"^

either before (thou) eatest or after (thou) hast eaten.

from the instance quoted above

(^srirfsra
be
&OC3J ^J8?) wrt
wri
23e^5Cick s&l^^tjri&fc wri
(be it

As

then

^OAS^S,
tO

z*?wrt^ft^n^rt6

"Q*

will be learned

it)

is

might appear, with the nominative after a transitive

verb; but sentences in which the accusative occurs in such a case, are
as

constructed,

not rare,

e.

g.

eos3J3^So^ 3ow^s3)rttfo

rt

^ooriosJS^),

occasionally boas will swallow either people

that have reclined in the jungle or calves,

rf^rtO
\.

jys^j

?oodj,^

take away either thy book

thee,

telling

^j

^^JS,ra6
o CS

^>r1ddc5-3.ri
*T

do^Ad dj^s^d^ri

S5(3>o3o

>^ri

^^c3

'adoDoSjs?,

if I,

>?!

^^^

without

s
or paper, shalt thou remain

quiet? Regarding this see what has been stated in

287, remark.

The Rev. Mr. Hodson, according to 287, remark, has used wcSdJS
or'.
He has the following additional
yrfdjs also in the sense of 'either
sentence:

&

tf^^ddJ?)
TT

e>

?3tfff3jC$dJS
<a

3oJS>ert

dezi do not go to either

-rf-

this place or that.

3180)o,

The English

9o and

o3i dood^

for

flower, ssddosjjstf

these persons.

of

284

eo/9-(

'S.o

'neither

nor'

may

se#.) followed

be expressed by the copulatives

by a negative,

the worship of idols (there)

'addodoo

3JOepC)?j^o,

e.

is

#.

^dri

^ejsj^o

neither fruit nor

he disrespects neither those nor

&irA w^oiojo ^ras^^oJojdj'"

Qv

she has neither a sense

shame nor modesty.

w
bundle (there) was neither pen nor paper.
neither in that nor in this manner (there) is a kingdom
rfo^ffrt De)fcioOe;,
for the children of Kunti.
SD^JS 3oao3o, ^oaoJoJSJd^r(J3 fi)rf, he neither
in his

drinks himself nor

ti5fli,

lets

him who

will

drink (do

so),

y^o

Doe>3rU) 3od&3^o, he fears neither tigers nor snakes,

ador1J3

3oCj

345
?3CjJvU>.

he

will

do

dors s&odJ*

?3s;,
f*1

Wf2o3je,

,7>^)rfo^a^>,
***"

tJ

i"

neither

nor

this

that

(Hodson).

ew, d^cS
v

z5y.

*>

ft

it is

neither a

hill

nor the headless body of a demon,

(but) an elephant,
it
so&ojj
is
neither
a rope nor a snake, (but)
ao^^a ww,
3Jfc3.o3of,
long piece of cloth.
neither

<acSo tfrfojciab
^-/

a sea nor a river,

(but)

WidOri So^s;,
O&w,
co'
ro co'

^aoJoJ8
S5^,
OO

ew,
CO'

a lake (Hodson).

35s oi>e,

this

:i

is

835k;to6rtJ3e
^^

)^s3?,* these are neither balls of white

sugar nor

fallen out teeth,

(but) hail-stones.

The English 'whether

319.
'if,

in

combination

instances in

287,

with the

or'

may

copulatives

be expressed by a,d, esrf and

eso and

for

e/u,

w8,

which see the

8.

In the verse quoted below the five times

repeated
do&J?), wdtfjs) may be translated
or' would also not be

though' (see

&&&&&*)

287,

B,

6),

but

(=wz3>

whether

wrong:

oj

"whether he gives (you) riches, or eats together (with you), or also gives
his own daughters, or follows and
joins (you) without weariness, or utters
novel wisdom,
Cf.

it is

proper to keep down a hostile king" said that Sakuni.

334.

Another way of rendering 'whether

or' occurs in the following
modern sentence wherein 'add
be it, is used:
?ra?l)
'S.dd, be it
whether

4
have committed, or have not committed,

command
320.

a fault. I

have to honour the

of Badasaha.

The English

'the

the' before comparatives ran be expressed only

by paraphrasing, see e. g. the ancient instance quoted in

303, 2, a. SouthMahratta school-book instances are e.g. the following:
^^j efsp^c^

you study, the more you

will learn.

ssa^zSjatfftfS

'tfrjdo

3rt

^rld
44

346
more

the

remove the impurities

(they)

of

the

<

syrup, the whiter the sugar will become,

aodrf^ ^o^ra^, 20^O 2o3Q 5oD^

"o"

T^fl 'Su39 c3r3B

ZjJ^rffto 3^3$

The English

321.

man

this

^3\p,
TJ
rio

>3i>

<as

may

as'

be expressed as follows:

doest thou

much

348, H).

~-~

as well as Drona?

as he had.

having given betel as much as possible.

much

man

know archery

tO^^o^

dative).

Yudhishthira lavished as

applied as

go down.

to

as deserving as that

(is)

rl^o&do ^^J^ON,

284 under

(cf.

^KO^d,

more the polar star seems

south, the

more a ship approaches the

the

Sjj^doo S^A), having

t3j3fc3.^>3o

^o.d^
=^.0

ashes as a (forehead) circlet,

2&JS?lo
<*

TJ

do

not pour out gold as high as thou art?

^r^3Slo.
balls.

$Je)3or3Je)d <03o.

called Cohinor

is

ripe

mango

as sweet as sugar.

is

^r^ wdj^?^,

do, rfj?3e

^o3je>d
CO

long

started.

ska

much

^oa^do, as

come as

is

a large diamond;

^Q^?^,
far as

&
o

"o

***

as far as this

your house.

;ys$>F

he came as far as the

v>3

sjooej,

as possible.

rfooijo,^
eJ-

saw him.

(he

&)ddrt, as far as

as soon as the king came, they

as soon as that news arrived,

e3,

it

far as the end.

SovOiSkido,

ejfse>rte3^

as soon as

3,

diamond

ftj

S3d?oO

^j?3

as

do^^,

as I live.

the ear.

escS,

is

l ' as far as the ocean.

as

y^rci^j

*3

5*J

house.

OJJ

the

no diamond on the whole earth as large as that.

& sjj5)>r$ 3o?w ^^,60^0^0,
wd^^j, he (is) as poor as I.

S5djl) 3?l3S!o.
C

place.

^3

as large as

by degrees,

with the king of Portugal there

people say there

this

dz^.^j 'S&le^So^

vS^fS

as large as the half of a hen's egg.

6,

^0,

become,

poppy pods

cSjSc^cTOrljrfs^),

sod

^e)OS,)

is)

A0o3o?2

as big as a

hill,

)rJ
oj

e^rfo

do i&d^Oak

as strong as an elephant

&J)o&eL^{a( ^atfcra^, he
'adod^do, as many persons as are
w

as

of the gods, as deep as the ocean.

(is)

liberal as Bali.

in the

house.

grain as

s3o;3o3J?)tftf

sijSS^y^, 3$ =ffe)^?$o, =#J3r30ca $&&&, he bought as much

was brought for sale, wdjl) oi3^o. pp%o^^CJ9rSjd$, 553^0
Q
50
(J
A
,^
he is as virtuous as he is learned. See an instance in
?2,
,

e)

327 (d>!3 'e3oo3o&>?&

'Such

as* is

etc.).

expressed as follows:

rtfSrfc

cv

uodi?io^?d
-

90

tfo,

such

347
husband

wife as a

(proper) way.

'Not so
e.

wti
aorfc'ortvb,
co-*

sirartr

such as know the

such a mother as thou.

3e>o&j,

expressed by adding the negative e5^

is

t^ ^
3

he

,r

>r^?3

as'

wsjtfo

g.

desires,

he

ejzirf?to,

not so poor as

(is)

300,

(see

erfo

I.

sirartr

not such a one as knows the (proper) way.

(is)

2J3f2to,,

the elder brother

not so clever as (his) younger

(is)

brother.

322.

In

302,

introduced.
if

what,

o&s)^O 6, why

if I

i. e.

say,

because, has been

for,

be added that SrsdeasS^pJ 3, the reason (or cause)

may

It

say (or one says), and 5a>drao3?5JQ>o8j3oJ6, the reason

o

cause) what has

similarly

used,

become

it

e.

what

(or

y.

is

it),

if I

(or

say (or one says), are

>

VldC9$t(&3O (3, parents must teach good conduct

children from (their) youth, for
".

their

to

,3

l3,

honour, for
?5e)0ao^^6,
says,
(or

is

why
331

see

323.

death appears preferable to a

Tulapura means the town

did

get this

it

[lit.

name?)

Tulapura,
it

if

got

(one)

name?

this

Regarding the verbs e5$* and 0}$*

seq.
If a

writer or speaker wants to adduce something that

expressed by adding

pronoun esd),
or

of weight

town of weight]; what was the cause that

said or that happens or happened,

clfSzl

without

life

>$$J3> rf,

the English

$3 6,

if I

'namely',

wz3?^6,

is

boy speaks as follows.

guru has given

me

the

to say.
rt;dorttfo

following

was

say (or one says) what, to the

or to a conjugated verb, or to a verbal noun,

that

or

is

'as follows' are

e.

g.

^Stfus^,

>cW6, the

w^f! s&s>an^6,

C>r^6, the

3oo^ort^o
3f$f(

command.

&,u
t<0

wsdjirt

^.eoo^fi)
*v

him courage
(lit. told)
zj^ojor Soe^ri^o,
9
with the following words
what that prince
w Wij^o^orlri) 3o^ c3^r3
O
O 6,
said was this
(or that prince spoke as follows).
>r^3, a certain friend gave
,

^S,

N^6,

Mr. HvaranAtha spoke as follows,

the

guru instructed him as follows

oSozS^rfriS,
this

what the mendicant represented respectfully

to the

judge was

e3C359 f3 wrtorfc3^36, thereby happens the following

O
O
^ 6, afterwards (there) happened the following
C/.
.

3tSo
3'J5.

348
To

belong also oJjddcW

this class

one says)

tfS^sScSJSd,
O

woman

which

if I

say

etc.)

etc.) if I

five

if I

say

know what

be expressed by

may

that?'

is

says) what, e.g.

y^

cattle are?

3?j

rfrf estf

gs&^, $$f\

^>J

tJfl?

What

stones (the father says).

father?

is that,

e$33>

$?&,

say (or one

if I

brother, do you

flj3jz3o8je>?,

esrf

$3^6^,

they (are) hail-

tfjs^d

e3?3

6^j, what

a gopura?

'What happened?'

325.

or speaker himself,

may

what happened,

g.

luck?

following manner'

'in the

e3cS?J
-o rift zS.

the

is

say (or one says),

if I

he told

is

i,rttfo

manner

expressed by

e.

g.

^d^^^sJocloSo^

7^^} zx$

00
cjj

aoe)r1rf
-0

^J3?Jdorl^^

So^ri^d,
1)0

the

g^drsrioo

53e)D>ddj 33s>ori^
>3^cdoci>

fcji>
ea

(I shall tell) in

wdo^o^sS

cats

3o?ri^6,

dialect

'

the following

r^fS,

frequently suffixes
that story

in
(is told)

o^rS, that

The English

327.

manner
if,

to

(lit.

how)

is

&3

say (one says), to

the following
is

manner

as follows

rash, so he

as

is

is

a story

of

sscSr^lS,

Kannada by

manner,

e.

e.

it is

g. <$ =&$

thus

an interrogative

g.

made (=32Jo

faultless,

it,

so' is expressed in

o,

following.

ancient and mediaeval

how, the

<o?l^,

manner followed by a demonstrative

as

con-

}$, when

dogma

'as

live

tJ^

regarding this (there)

tfqtoorcj,
o
w ao?rt^d,
<b

'

they got out of (their) strait in this manner

6,

Instead of suffixing 1*$,

ave

needles

CJ

6 we came in this manner

of refining gold is the

way

ao

called Vivekacintarnani in

tinually (by stealth) on milk and curds in this manner

ood

3ortoJ6.
O

<0c39
n c3jsc3,

j&azSrttfiiy sissdorfrfo SoeJorftfd

35e)^o

c^cS

or one sa.y s )

the manner in which something

tell

-U

in this

or was, the English 'in this manner',

wrote) the treatise

(i.e.

manner

following

made

sa y

what happened meanwhile?

writer or speaker wants to

If a

^*

k^oJOfo^odd,

dtf&rsjari ij^DOSo^ 6, what happened through bad

was done or how something

or

how

e.

followed by an answer of the writer

if

323),

(cf.

be expressed by

ess^&f^JS^rle D03j^?i 6,

326.

of

'What

324.

3?

say (or

say.

who

ad?3J3ct or o&Ddcd6,

rto ^JS^

3of?o

PS

is

if

efddo o&>d?36, Dasaratha had

wcdoo
o^,$ddo,
o
o
o
-o
and
children including females
males, they are the following.

ari

is

which (thing,

6,

which (things,

so he

;lra<3c5o).

spoke (=

349
33?3o).

l,

remembrance

the

rU/fl

as

oSjo^riaoortaojdadofl,

Oaaoodj

as

is

fit,

so

is

it

according to

is

(=o3oq3e>?oo).

^jJ-ecSo^c,

^3ortsort,

as

(i.

such a form Siva will gra-

e.

a?rt d3r?j z3^J3f, sosrt

^^d

?ior(z

as thou wouldst that others should behave towards thee,

&?,

so behave thou

2odoc!dJ3e,

(=

333*

a wonder that as the devotee thinks, so

&&

$$ ^ort^

ciously assume)?
(3rf

?3^33)

(is), so.

Siva will graciously assume that form

o^tfo

fitness, so

sSo^ zksi^ wadd

towards others.

W^?rU> wdj^d,

ao->tf

as thou becomest angry,

thee quite causelessly, so does a cow too.

wrlo^

j?,

c3

IT

$tff(

Ajfejo

$$f(

aoe^rt

if

(one) beats

So?vfl

as thou feelest pain, so does this

fly too.

ww,
do^7e>W&?i 8rte?i> ^^rt^o
ro
oO

ao^ri
*0

cannot leave the water and

live,

as

so are frogs not at all.

fishes

as clay

(is

the material cause) for a pot, so (one)

to be a substance

(it)

which

is

must consider

the material cause for the origin of sounds

as represented by letters.

o
ta fid

s^ajo^o
<

as a stack that is piled

?3e)^Se)rioddo,
v

up as high as a big hill, if one spark flies from a fire and falls (upon it),
burns and is reduced to ashes in half a moment, even so all happiness
of (one's) life is destroyed by a small act done (lit. that one
does) in
violent passion.

$t$t

<&$

3oee3

vldorral>3Cj3
o

dJ3 ea-do*
it

^ei^orfa^,
comes from above

so does also a

328.

man

as an ant that walks about on an orange, though

to the bottom,

on the earth not

The English 'how much

does not roll

roll

so much',

'how many

pressed by an interrogative noun of indefinite quantity

such

demonstrative noun, e.g.

elephants how many, even in so

suras in union (i. e. seven times

t?

sj^dJS^

osSj ^oioo

rts?*

*jdd

many

down (from

it),

even

down.

Zd

so many'

278,

is

ex-

s) followed by

d3o3J2v* tfOrt^^^e^JStf,

(places there occurs) a

number

^uu; Chandas under kusumasara).

of

350
.

A)

how many arrows

s&^rtv* erc3o)3corO ci>o ^J3^o,
o
O

>?!>

many arrows he caused

men; how many weapons entered

shot,

the warriors

appear in the body of those valiant

that force, so many weapons he stopped

so

to

how many elephants (and) horses

how many chariots came on with impetuosity,

altogether by cutting (them down);

attacked, so

many he

split;

the vehemence of so
so

many he

&&

killed.

(thou) wantest, so

broke; how

many he

SoQrfs?* eSe^o,

many

is

to

be

(and)

supplied)

his capital

was

spent

d/sd

how many horses

s^^j^
Q

S3&F?l)3d^o 33

13333 ?odo&>e;o, when he was offering

how much it was, (so much, w?oo, which

5&Jto0f$3f&f|,j3w.^5^$cd)
sandalwood,

-gssSo,

>3rto3o^

shall give thee.

people rushed on, even

many

all

in

succession

craOcrfo^Ok ^ctodoo*

how much

far

(i.e. so) distant

(i.

e,

a road

how

far) a horse

es3l>,

wSidU)?,

saudalwood.

for the

can journey

in

djsdri

eJ

a day, so

much

o?2o3o

(=w^tf).

how much we laugh

at the

v
of the Egyptians to have (their) whole

custom

a dog dies in the house, even so much foreigners laugh

when they see that in our country a woman whose husband has died,

body shaved,

if

has (her) head shaved.

ero

how much money we have,

so

Where a

329.

relative

eJ

much

eo

ty

calculation

participle

with a

we

have.

demonstrative adverb of

when thou comest, when

(&Co^+wrt), when I come,
comes, when we, you, they come ( 282, i), is commonly used,

time, as zodo^ejrt
he, she,

it

the 'when'

by

is

occasionally expressed by an interrogative adverb of time followed

a demonstrative one,

e.

g.

o&33>ri

^)clo3o?i

,. 0, when you come back from Pune,

30ft
visit

JOftaciosjdJSe,

wri

aOorradO^

3oJ3?rt

2J3ooc3j,

hast prepared thy lesson, thou mayest go out for a walk.

say,

an imitation of Sariiskrita oJons, when, and

then.

him.

Cy: the close of

its

when thou

This

is,

so to

correlative

330.

Regarding the translation into English of the relative past

179. 254,
participle followed by nouns and demonstrative pronouns see
330.

and regarding that of the relative present-future participle followed by

351
such terms

186. 254.

remains to refer

It
it

might appear, as

tives in

Kannada

to

282 the use of those

In

363. 364.

Cf.

participles in connection with

adverbs .has been adduced.

267

which

in

has been

it

that

stated

there existed relative pronouns and their correla-

if

That such an appearance

(just as in Sariiskrita).

is

not

based upon idiom, has been indicated in that place, though in English the

instances given there, would natural I} suggest the existence of relatives

7

and

their correlatives, e.g.

pronouns

'who

'who

he',

she',

resembling relative ones are interrogates,

However the

etc.

and the correlatives

are demonstratives, and therefore the instances quoted in

ones

additional
follows:

rich

this

man

who

(in English:

has an (always) bent bow? he

who

(is)

the

is

a prince indeed).

is

man

are

paragraph

^N

qStfs&otf^ wrfc^? w^F?

a prince

(is)

in

o,

to

literally

who

(is)

man?

a rich

a rich man, he indeed

^JSo&rf

23*
CO

Kama.

(is)

267 and some

be translated as

is

wsJorjeiS'o

he indeed

a prince, or a

who
^o^jd^o
M
'

zo^dFSda^d^

mind the

that only once contemplates joyfully in (his)

three syllables Ba-sa-va? the lotus of his countenance indeed will remain
jc3o3J3v*

steady.

yrf^j

f3?2dj3

^doo^s^*?

estfjsS

330 20^3-30^0, who

does think of us in his heart? (Siva asks) that one (or he) even is a part
of Basava.
ys3v* ri^si^odiSJS? 5JJ3&, who is a wife faithful to her
\^S

husband?

she indeed
fi),

f"3

who does work? he

S3s3?i) rioaj

53JKkrf?Sj8{?

actions? he

is

'Q

a venerable woman.

is

shall

have a dinner.

sidose^, who does perform

happy,

what man does desire welfare? he must be kind

to all

men

as

much

as

oira33?i> aorio^odd^j,*C rtaj^cte%ho3o? waotfsraft 3J3S3:1>3!>

^*
CO
"0"

possible.

?2j3^? *3f$ djdo

w^rOj^

P,

who

does frequently march out with the very

purpose of overcoming an enemy? such a one

is

^adoddisS ^doro, what

is

WS^d)
activity

virtuous*

is

dJs)rfe;*

directed? even that

,

s575)d)C$o? wrfo

being seen,

wqrado

is

what

the object (see

is in

^)uio?

that towards which an

315,

is

beautiful? that

wdo w^tfdrso, what

(forms) the sense of the locative case.

2, 7)?).

customary usage? even that

d^r^o&o, what

3a>cS"

an abhyaniitrya.

is

is

is fit.

worthy of

location? that

352
k^o 203oJX?3o
there also a bahuvrihi
S2d>

o3Je>3dJt>??

(there)

is

treat

rf^2pe>rl,

no happy

them?

what

formed.

is

249)

tJ?2o3o

doosija

an elephant's forepart? that

is

>&>

fci^d)

CO

a combination of mutual action?

is

'0

^>0ujo3a^W dp??

what country do people not study science?

in

what

compound

oirad zSfaJd

dantabhaga.

>&>)>.
OO

^rtotfoo,

(is)

rts3)

the

d^tf f ^SJ.<Q

in that

country

state,

in

IT

in that very

what manner do they desire that others should

manner they should

treat others.

who are
some friends of the bridegroom? they are called janyas.
ojjsdo ^f#,^6j?)^? e?^rfrf^o,
"*
S>

If

Jifi
"t

4^ So ^ D ^

WDrio,

*\.

who

(are)

fit

for thee to

trust? such people choose for thy friends!

^^or?-s4^) 5ktftfe3>5$;3)? es-iW

Ty

^ S3dc3*

which (pearls)
woijo,*^J3.o,
v
TX

do suit you? them choose with pleasure! (See

271.)
Such sentences appear to have originally been formed in imitation of
Samskrita ones with the relatives 0&>C3<, o&s>^C3*, ofojpe) and their correlatives ^D*,

3)dn*, ^zp>

(cf.

329).

Their translation, as given above,

can be easily changed into proper English.

XXII,
331.
oic3

In

302,

7;

On

the verbs

A&

and ^^.

322. 323. 324. 325. 326 the peculiar use of the verbs

ojfkj, -ic3* (53cii, ^rf^)

participle (in the sense of the present)
(*}(&,

to

sav

'

wnen

tneir P ast

relative

combination with ^d, (SSK),

is in

and ^6 and an interrogative

been introduced.
appears from those paragraphs that if a person wants to state the
reason (or cause) of something he writes or speaks about, if a writer or
It

adduces something that

happened, if a writer or speaker
speaker

himself, and

if

is
is

or was said or

going to answer a question put by

tell the manner in which

is or was done or how something

mentioned combination are employed.

is

Before expatiating on the other use

we have

happens or

a speaker or writer wants to

something

332.

that

to give

their past participles

or was, those verbs in the

made

oic&>,

of the

WE&

verbs <3$ f and

155) and their

substitutes

o^

and

&$,

172 and

are often followed by AfS*,

(occasionally also Zod)

say either 3ja?foo,

053*,

353

198,

e/u&o*

:,

remark

Sue^* or aoe!^,

cfca,

(erosJoo*),

combined with their past

as the said verbs

i),

participles, for

or also

3J3?2&>, toJSjfc;

o,

'he said
It

gave' or 'he said

may

we may

all

meaning

will give'.

be said about the use of ^^s6 and es^s*

in

their simple

and

combined form that they generally introduce a statement by words or on

paper (or on cadjan leaves, copper plates and stone tablets), this being
either a statement

made by somebody regarding himself or another, or one

what another has

said or written, or

when

of

one of command, or one of message,

may be said to answer to the English conjunction 'that' or the

oiF^s *, she said "I bring
quotation marks in English, e.g. ^jsrt^o ^32^*
O
O
flowers".
tjf3* 'acSo sfe>^
O^NO, he said "I shall do this".
&^pd
it

he said
him.
l

"sir,

wrt

this (is)

my

^cSo

it

^r^ri
C srawj,

tfrf.

to

it fell

share,

zod^,

q3)oridO

they

me".

did not come to

would become thus,

fate

you

give,

(are)

CO

gj

3oo?3

^J, then the lion said

^rt
3oerriaei^o,
o

rt3

tfrf,^

my mind

^^o w

e^

^00^,^0

?!?1

at that time that hereafter

eruaOri

he said "I go to that town and return", and started.

"elder sister," prayed she, "kindly give

good ones".

you (are) a great hero and fear nobody", and (thus) praised

^o3o4

my

said "if (you)

me

55=3^,
o

a drop of honey!

Cfe

God

SDh

make

will

thee happy",

atft frto^DtS rfo

CO

Q',

sjdd sSj^ dJ5ac5 tfu^tee^

53otfA)?2j3tfrt
A)

rfjsa ^JSrsjio, he arrived at

^sioJo
V
C3

certain decision that help afforded

to others

would never be

"ha, what

in

vain.

oJ
,

tlu-

is

this?" cried he, "in this

is

preferable to a dishonorable

^tra\\

there appears a

deer to be hidden",
J

it

appears that death

0dotf3cy' -dsclrfv*
,

when they

life,

^Nj

told (the king) that

tlio

florist,

say-

ing "she tasted the flower (and) fragrance with which Kara should Iv
worshipped", cut off the nose of this queen at that moment.
;^

4:.

354
tftfrt

^D>

3s?c&>^>

w^j^rtatfoaorf es^^o, he said hastily

}&,

"the meaning of your word

is

known

perfectly

me".

to

sS^es* tfucl^e>3c, having said even "this worldly

3fa^stee>dres3o?5
existence-removing-story (shall become) a cause of pleasure for the ear",
I endeavoured to tell
a
(it).
adrerftfj, ^?o &>r?o
,

she said

"he took

all the

3o?0

cb

money and went away".

me

they told

C>dJ,

that the decision thou madest,

was not proper,

B
the ox said "thou canst not be saved from

his

hand".
CO

Qj

"

o ?ta&do,

I shall

tfa <o^, ^J-S-ed^o

didst call

me",
^fS

when

S3?l>o,

3^

^^0!

^^

^JS^orte

certainly give" king Simhala said.

Phakira said "uncle, thou

rf^o,

$)&

"a^Jl^fix

(the wolf) said (to the wild hog) "give

it

up anxious thought as to those (your) little ones! I shall sit near (them)
9
guarding them with care". 33^0 s&ack^rStf co^ rf^o, he said "I will
do

it".
,

the son took to

heart that (his) father had given him the advice that it was much
to bear with than to punish, and pardoned
the boy.
rd
<oarU> 3s>o5o

fitter

"U

-*n

<=Cco

a)

eJ

PO

it is

written

(viz. in the old or former book) that (you) should never transgress

in it

word of (your) parents and that God created man, beasts, birds, trees,
the earth, the sky, the sun, the moon, and all the other things.
the

to

dogs

a tree and go!". wota?>

O
3o?u3

proper language

&&

^?irf

subject to

c^oTTe)

(is)

Cj?i>,

tf

first

transport

<0^o, when he
see,

he exhorted him "the habit of using im-

o,

?5?jjao3o Assart

that Kulinda told his son

all

the king
his

23^

"do not become

S&F,

S53J fl^ rfjsarffio,

oJ

should

6J

very bad; remember this well!".

^o^?i o 35?^

envy!",

he said "tie the

<N

commanded

the boatmen that they

soldiers over (the river),

said "let us see!".

$j3{c8j3re,

w>

w^rfo &>?cl>3

oitftfo,

he said "let us

come!".
9

D,

what

am

to tell

him?

355
must come

Tell (him) he

&
to

?3?i),
o

3^>

1 cSrltfo,
*x.

o*

will

to his

ova

house

tf\aeJ&

me

to say that he

this evening.

the messenger went to the ruler

come

33o Z&ft

djsd, ;sj>coo^e>(L>ri

your house to dinner

to

^^o&rorfdo, the gentleman sent

<

er

(him) that

tell

W^C ;&rt

73>c:>o9e>^C$>

aoJS^A,

and

wdJ3^f$?k 3o^o, go,

dinner this evening,

would come

my

me.

to

and

said

"0

king,

master has sent you these things as a present".

The verbs ^$5* and

o

cp

shall

come

e.

2Ju

s^^^o^d^o, when

oifdo,

to thy

the

what doest thou say that (we) shall play?

treated this tree in this

"how

they asked

"when

he asked

osy-j

o.
^.

cripple said

help?" and was sorrowful,

he called the servants that were in the garden and asked

who have

y.

he said "why hast thou ascended the tree?".

35%^

"how

used in questions,

also

Jire

es^s*

manner?".

did you
wilt

know

-d?

"who are

they

>;3ort

(that)?",

thou bring (it)?".

(9<&. he asked Ramacandra "why

doest thou

weep?".
Further the baid verbs are used to express 'for the purpose', regarding
which some instances have been given in
302 under No. 7.

Then the

said verbs are also used to give an explanation of nouns,

verbs or adverbs,

(people)

e.

having said

means a certain
,

g. tf&J^ofofl)

tree.

(is)

an

ass],

3\J3i3?3?3

rt o,

in water'.

ass

O^JS^o

sjotio,

rfoji^rtsir'

is

given ^^5* or

$<

is

used,

kalte

multai:;i

c-^r3cS^ do, aguldan

kalkane means suddenly.

tJ^rO-^o

Also when a series of

rfWrtW^oSjffo d^rto, galagalane means quickly.

nouns

[lit.

55rbtJf5^o

TteAfJoJorfo

means an

kula means a rude man.

oA
tegaldan means 'he reviled'.

means 'he sank

kalte

ricSrqio,

e.

g.
.

to

..}

Also when imitative sounds, feeling, etc. are to be expressed, the said
are used, e. ff. 5&3CM siW Wo3ofj-s0^^ v6 wuador^) rfzjiao,
'

verbs

*^

liailstones fell

down from

the sky

C3

with the sound of palapala palpala.

,

the

fly

sings

gumyi gumyi.
Ho'

?Sr^

356
fcjos&*

S3?&Az3, the paltn of

my hand

has the sensation of

jum

(from cold).
relative participles of the said verbs are used similarly (cf. the

The

o^jto

use of

the passive, S 315,

in

2,

Regarding o5foa) when forming

k).

noun in combination with erodo or e5d>, the following instances

adridtfftck siwozSokdo^zicS* 23aioado, do not say
may
"this investiture with the sacred thread is sapless to me".
^JS^ 20^0
a verbal

be given

CO

Sosoo assrio* o}3oacS?}o, does the cat know (the difference between

common) milk (and)

that which

vowed? s>^o

aoJa^

-ds

aoJSrtaDft co^o,

23^0, he must daily examine "how much

gviatf fifc^^d
learned to-day?",
s&'&Scra,

^^s&eScfc^
more have

is

53oooa&^533ft wrirfo, ^jsdjsjrfss9 ^

^
O
oi&xrirfj.

fcj

^iz^sc!

^rsrsjsft

^jsa

before

children,

j3J8?a8,

apply (your) hand to anything, examine thoroughly whether

way

^s

useful to you or not.

cSdjj sdcS^,
W
"o"

t^oO

rijsjjjS
<&

c3J3^ ^ejrfredjreo,, there is

C5
&j

it is

in

^JS3)^

w^oSoTH uji ooei^

O

you

any
tjsd

an eminent reason, why we

should not vainly (and) inconsiderately speak,

,

written (therein) that you should read

Ci

60

that

in

book there are ethic rules;

it

is

and remember them carefully and

walk accordingly. $^^0, =5*3^ 3o?ri s&3cid:> craft W?d &&>d>, calling
eJ TJ
to
<SP
aJ3^r> pdo^fi},
(one's) servant and ordering "do thus".
^Ocdoo, esfoe)
N

<=<.

aoj;S5^3^J, the fox said

oi^J, *2rjc3? (past relative participle)

dJ8^Sd

with emphasis (to the fowl) "elder brother, I go (now) and shall return.
(Your) favour remain (on me)!", and started.
333.

<0p5

or *9c3

are frequently used after a conjugated verb to express

would

the meaning which that verb

nation with

es>3

[lit.

"daily

become able

come"

to write like

master has come

[lit.

^oJo sSj^ ^J33^^6

sits

on that egg

warmth

give,

if its

<s>>?3
cv-

Co

come

if

were used, e.g.

[lit.

of its body,

if

*,

if

fc?3e> zoCo^ as
hence thou daily

you

will probably

^^o^rarlo^d,

0#

6.'

oioj

e?

dU>Ci ZON

(one) says "master has come"].

if

combi-

Tzs&ft

even in one or two months.

wrfS3 d.>o&!>,0ori

"sat"

TT

33^

(one) says] to our school,

me
if

??&

relative participle in

if

(one) says], a young will be

rfo

the sparrow

bom

by the

357

"you must
take care of the poor
if
(one) says] as much as you can, God will be
kind towards you.
?o>rt> rre$rtJS ed$ ttfh#
^oSorttfo SoF5?)d3tf6
Q
ro
you take care

io, if

of the poor

[(lit.

"

3o3

3oJ3C3rt fcdj^

of sunshine

c3,

the pods are ripe, they will open by the effect

if

and wind, and the cotton that

inside, will

is

come

out.

Co

thou goest to the town called Riimapura, thou wilt get a cocoa-

if
,

nut

two duddus.

for

33

a
ro

if

darkness sets in here,

we two divide

if
,

ereoao^rfd 33ft

& rto^&fctfrt
O

shall not find the

this costly pearl

way

among

cisO JortO&w,
(V>
TT

in this hilly country.

us,

poverty of

(our)

Observe also the following instance

birth will cease.

QQ

stossd^f^ 55^6 2^j s>d ^o3o^o, the gentleman came last

a do;
Saturday; (from that time) till this Saturday, if one says, it is a week.
2o

-d?

It is to

be remarked here that

the English 'that

is

to say',

e.

oic3

6 or

esctf

is

also

used to express

g.

from A.I). 1490

1687, that

is to

A. D.

till

say for about 200 years.

.

?o

the area of the united

Co

as that of Ceylon, that

a-

is

kingdom of Great Britain is about as great

25000 square miles, -g?

to say

iff

about, the sea swells and increases, that

With regard to the use

333 the remark is

334.

adduced

in

the verse in

(cf.

if this fish

w
is to

say such a big

tSJdzi,

or v^d after a conjugated

O
O
made that wdrad, ec3d or

319) are similarly used, e.g.

thou knowest Siva's mantra.

your service undone.

left

ODrict,

if

thou goest to Pune.

3oJS&3

Also

they touch.

Cf.

^^j

^doJ^J
QdradAlS,
u>

^3

^J3^o^ 3$
^^^

verb

e5S5'

^^^d^adAlli if ne
Aid
they escaped.
3$
v
o

rtd
if

^dri aJ3?rl)dCTsdd,

if

to-morrow

296.

In the modern dialect

'intentionally'
having said "it must"), c. g.

335.
(lit,

fish.

of <o?i3
to be

if

moves

is

expressed by
'

have not broken the looking-glass intentionally; (and 'unintentionally

may

be translated

7^^

or

358
In the same dialect 'they say', 'on dit'

336-

196, remark

198,

4;

7,

remark

is

337)

(see
^

expressed by adding

2) to a sentence,

g.

j3>ota#6e,

Brahmana went

the

e.

to that

money-changer and said "sir, they (people) say you have a certain
^^o t3>3odo
large metal vessel into which water uses to be filled",

*J?We

-a^e

tfs^rttfo

s^SS 9

^;^

they say that a sort of

^oorb^?^

^dos^d^,, "they are coming" they

"they are come", I am told.

frogs swallows a whole chicken,

am

(or I

say

told),

From

337-

aorfds^,

the instances in

332

generally placed at the end of a statement,

etc.; it

put them also before

it,

oco

3?3,ci>ofl
%.
,

aSfcs

order to introduce

it in

9
,

wririj

O Q

dotf^Ois,
o

o^

appears that

it

e.

^DudJS
tO

v^s

are

however, allowed to

is,

g.

or

3$Q o?oo

'S.w
to

d^xv ^6c$o

a 33 wo ^rlfce ^J^ckseL
*

'S.O, etc., the father called both (his children), told them to stand before
"
him, and said (lit. a having said)
children, daily look on the looking-

to

2o^J

glass".

tO
O
CJ
933?*
zfoiLftS, on a certain day an old man said
3?(ij,
Q
^*A
some boys "children, I desire your welfare". C^dcS^^J ^DaoJo

W^rio 2J3cod?rfd? CT30, the god said to Nambiyanna

rsotf

(are) even the manifold vedas the road".

9

?i&3 o3)^o

v!a?orf

<?*

'SvfSoJOo^

"always
esS^oSo

wife told the beloved one "I do not know, I do

2^-^aJoo, the

know devotion".

not

In such a case

or

.053*

w^oJodj

5555*

may

be preceded by

'3^

c/-

326

sscS

"

rfrlabj&fSfio.
thereupon, in order
^*
O
to appease the queen, he spoke thus
sjo^^j* ssd?^' 'SrS^o, again
?5

" f2jscS),
O

e.g.

tfdroo&o

/"O

the kiug spoke thus

'a^^ V again she spoke thus

r
she
thus-.
a?S
ws3c
s^
spoke
they spoke thus.
-*a ^v*,
-* ?^D*,
o
o
he spoke thus to (his) father. $$& $$ $ Q f{
3$J2t&33
to the

do^^is*

G
Qy
son of the king the son of Patimohi spoke thus

There
form of
e.g.

essiv*

Also:

having spoken thus (with reference to preceding words).

Or *ac3o, this, may be put after ,055*, e. g. &$<
spoke this

'

^^

sacio,

he

is

still

a verbal

to be

mentioned the use of a

noun to introduce a statement,

relative

etc.,

participle in

without

0^55* or

the

^c3*)

359
ne reflected "what she says

),

of

said "all of you

certainly

supplied, for which see

know".

212, No.

science)?

the

meaning

not

without the

(i. e.

a^asS^o*

fctfd,

letters

or

without thee are

all

of

knowledge

^c&^cktJS),

Karna?

jji^O&j

^oCiw d?

'aw

originally

<adorfcio

23^j,

many men

much

(viz.

a strong king,

o&3&e>&{3Fd,

(i.e. if thereafter
if
,

diwrwrfj*

etc.) is

33)^3* vo^oo, doff^ ^d?3*

the best; and if not being he

fcffo^o

is

(i. e.

he did not

if

tliereafter not being

exist).

gofoa^ft

e.

which

23d^

one's self

^3CO

(is)

eS&rgo*
'

IA\

anything to eat here if is

sjoS

'a^add ^^3

no right behaviour.

3cvO?rlj^=# rfoOjj^tS r>^>^cl>,

(*.

's.w

cf.

in

called weak.

there were nothing to eat here).

to a useful pur-

spending even for no use

being thus originally a negative participle or gerund, forms

also the relative participle

who have no sorrow.

$J3o>rf
VJ CO

is

170;

a kingdom

siwdo^, a son generated by

pose even not being a spending a going

or without use) is called vyaya.

awd

^^^o,

not existing,

(there) is no understanding, (there) is

3{

f3,'

the negative participle of 'ao*, not being present

c5 is

a^Swaso Oe^o

298), e.g.

oi

like to live without labour.

or not having been present, not being, not having been (see

so

wsS

without intermission.

even
delay? Ji52oode
n

without

a^^WfSort tfalOwtS
But

do distinguished people

<r>

even

appear

-rf-

TJ-

letters

without devotion thou wilt be ruined.

come

be

of 'in absence of, 'without'

these (valuable things) in existence (for me),

SoJSPcS,

w^

170. 361) and

(c/

'S.ocS ^3*o* W^OySj,

ro

rf-

originate

to

is

Z><$33

by the Sabdanusasna.

w^ddJ*

without

owrf

'awrf,

has
a^cS
CO

(vimirtharii), e.g.

such a case

In

the lion

On

as classed" with the adverbs

In that case

the bag

(is)

323.

XXIII,
In

a bag of black seed,

$t$vco &> 3$Cdd? ^a?0,

<p

Ajo^dj 3?i3 CkQ

gunpowder".

338.

is

i^jB',

'aejtf (see
f>

,o^c3S5ao^

^wc5
CO

273), e.g.
?3)ftW,

an ox that has no horns.

has no understanding.

cSo8Sj)> do*, those

0^

a line that has no break.

a
Q ^ejcSdrfo.

jjj&

man who

ft)

'aodocSo, that

is

not

existing.

It

is

to

be

360
remarked that 'Sfycl

like

eni^,.

V*

316 under No.

*>$,, Ouo>z3ocSo (see

?so
esocS

may govern

cS

300,

(c/.

when considered

remark
212,

7)

(vinartham, Sabdanusasana), and occasionally

f

earth?

a).

means 'excepting',

Jinapa, who

except thee,

is

do^^> cS^rsij* 'sad^s?*

sj^JSo^ort'?
m
u

except at night

fire-flies

e.

'but',

'except'

g.

^^

are (there any) gods except Jina?

>,

e. a.

i).

i,

as an adverb

also the accusative,

an excellent person

on

5oo5j3

O ^ro5o^c3* tJ^oroSo,
shine); let the sun

(have not the ability to

shine in front, what ability (to shine) have they?

?i

^osjosJjsoiooqS,

!5>&^>, Kama, except among females, thou hast no

<x)

power,

^^?3* esoSs;
fo

k>m

in

ro'

an alliteration wherein the kula (the Kannada

the optional use of the letter Q* for the kshala (the Samskrita

never occur; an optional use, excepting (that of) the kshala,

occur (in such a case).
<roo&* ?3o&< ?ooo&* 2o&*

V6 )

is,

does
<s*)

is

not to

as,5&*
oJ >J
no other

zps^jri^JSv*

S5t)

Bo

use

themes uy ney suy 6y (there)

>^exo, in the verbal

doubling (of their final letter when

the

except

excepting the terms that end in

when

it

its suffix)

e.

(i.

ao^jF rfo,

it

ye^^^

Cio2oloJoo

a devotee of Adisiva,
zS^sSd

w
3\32odjtf
W
O w

(there) is

for the dative

^^osj^ -^ccko'
but how will it be
c3

wa^s^^ori sJocksSok^ adda

c3e>

rfJ3

03osd3>,
f except through

for

(i.

e.

the grace of

God

Soa^J ^J3^De)rtjrfde;d dJS^do

of) sin.

except that milk becomes curds, could curds become milk?

Occasionally Zorf or

shall get

tf

suffixed).

2^^^ ^JSzIo, except I reverently marry (her) to

do not give this (my) daughter to a worldling.
^y

no forgiveness
,

body?

srasJT?,

cS

^odoe>J ws^FCto

q^sj$

possible to offer (one's) riches,

is

possible to offer (one's)

&S*jtf

(there) is (the suffix)

is

follows the rest (viz.) those that end in (other)

vowels and in consonants.

53^?^

55,

55^

is

esd (or

556)

may

do&)^ SWiOAQf^awtoJ,
my curse,

no deliverance from

precede ese^cS, e. #. ^rfo^ tf oSog

except he die by your hand, I

^do^.do

S^e>t3A)c5^e;cS

2^^

cSjsd

ojodo, except one adores me, devotion will not be obtained.

e9e>rf sometimes

that

it is

added to

loses

so

much

of its

relative past participle

originally

verbal character

(unless the rule in

1G7 be

361

?^o fioeadwd (=jicad

except I see thee. 23tfr\d;c3, except

dOao&o

ortsjjsrtdo

become

it

?2.

bright.

3tfd%d (Commentary: do;>d<d) tf^ri

a term with final $33* may well form a word in
rSeS

afcjao,

oo

or perhaps

^zS,

applied), e.g.

compound, but in (true) Kannada does not become a

nominal theme by itself.
eruaOfl 20^ sissO erors>>d> 3oJaertdo, Mari that
a

Samskrita

a oo
o
On the other
has come to a town, does never go away except she eats.
hand we have also:
3<d 3e>A?jc5ejc3 (=3e)A?odo w^d) u^a treddo,
^
/
co
a
a
9
he
knock
head
except
(his)
(against something), understanding will not
be obtained (by him).
<r>

Likewise this disappearance of

when we)

rf

si^rijtf #^3(3* w^n)do^^*

know and love nobody.

C5e>3o

<3&3

(see

eswrf may
^>cS,
'
co

300,

i,

remark

e.

6),

g.

we

oi>33F?34, except devotees of Siva

S&ft
At&gf W^cS ?j^o, fcCO'^?^ 3JdOo3oc3*
287, remark) &<$ do?ic3js^j F^fSs^a^, except always upon

me, he does not think even upon

besides
'acted,
co

him some others came.

Oioo3ddoc3
-a<r>

(high) rank.

my

also get the meaning- of 'besides'

besides that,

besides

original character seems to occur

its

followed by an accusative (see

is

^JSrart^o

?3J3r1A)

^8 ^J3V^.3
a^,
V'-BOCO'

a^d tfw^d4?**
=O
a

ytf

g.

w^^

this,

^5^0,

e.

(sSo^, sjolj,

the

flies

spent

(their) time by joyfully flying about, besides (that) they did not do any
work useful to themselves. c3?5foe>fcjcl) rf^-ra^, ^cl Ue)2a?d^j, 23$2odt>c$

WU^dd
^^

*
o PO
^)
*f
V l
DevanYja,
*ft^*ftfBol) sSdrUlo^t&lC ^^J5,ra?l>,
Ci
^

St3e)5j)dcS^d

c*i

kingdom much towards the south,

besides enlarging his

took,

in

the

north, the district of Hosakote of the Vijapura people.

besides a rich

d^jpsi jrohn^ j5
9
9

cS

The original verbal character

he

is

of t9e>rf as a

in the following instances:

still

man

gerund

^ adj* S5>c3
CO
fi)

who,

stosdod^

CO

a mango
not

tree).
it

being

3lo3o3L5l>>
C

<wJ

effort (to

co

is

>F

^rt)JoJ rf ^jO^odj^ae),
ro
co
co
not

(i.

(or

it

e.

is

300) appears

^,eao sJJSCO

ot

not

^^o, a man

in his affection).

(i. e.

it

certainly

is

a jasmine of rich fragrance

a jasmine of rich fragrance).

respectability that requires no (particular)

certainly

rtodj^ dJ3v*, in

is

acknowledge).

The relative participle

that

it

CO

(cf.

man unsteady

being steady, loves (i. e. a

5s;aej, a mango tree not being

(his love) not

4

a very liberal man.

thus),

of

w^dodo,

eso
rf
r>
that

is

est> cJ,
r>

e.

'

is

improper.

</.

e5de; zlezS, if
co

3^^* eodf^o,

it

be not

another
46

362
who

not he.

is

?3

d rioS, speech that

ssLs&w
oo

wm d

not distinct.

is

oJ aj

acts that are not proper,

rV,

such an

sio*

where there

also

In

212,

is

ese^

is

w655s3J&'8\

Ci

classed with the adverbs that are verbal forms;

see
55^ (which

used, like

w^

no negative sense.

a bhavavacana of the verb

it is

g)<&aofl
Q

as does not stand for the bindu.

/x>z3

to

TT

553*

in

and another form

of

&vCO dodo.

300), in pratishedha, negativing,

0?oo* w)d.do^) sstfJds&f

S5^

It is

etc.,

e.g.

(sounds) that are written

"0"

(but) cannot be read (except in an inarticulate manner, as sounds for

thunder, etc.), are no letters (lit. letters a being not),
ssdftoo not he!
,

not she!

is

it

^de^,

we have no (such a thing as can be

him.

escS^, not that!

d?3e>, ^oSo^etf

3*

oi^jo

^^^

^sij*

is

not

fit.

sjjo^rf^do

called) anger against

tfw^,

king, Siriihalendra

one who has never paid tribute.

i. e.

is sufiixed, is

eso^ to which the

used as follows
:

^^d?5

rl^JSV^

20?1)

33e)0^00

CO

do

<o

of inferential interrogation
i

ois3e,

ad^

>

^) W*J9

?SjS?CSe)^S2irlorTSfci^O,

212,

e)

?cS?^zi)^drt?TOji5
look, is not this

Ganges that runs swiftly down on the tablelands of the snowy mountain?
o doraoo,
^js^ co ?o^o^^!orio^j esd
^^ Scrso
rs
r
are not women and lands acquired by means of gold? (Cf. ese;^
300, 3).

the water of the celestial

XXIV,

On

the repetition of verbs, and on the combination

of certain verbs,
The

339.

interjections

In

152

repetition of nouns, pronouns, adjectives, numerals, adverbs,

and imitative sounds has been treated of

it

in

303

309.

has been stated that there are no true frequentative or

Kannada, but that a kind of iterative verbs may be

iterative verbs in

formed by simple repetition (yugaloccarana, dvihprayoga) or

tition

triple repe-

(triprayoga).

Instances of such iterative verbs elucidating their forms are given in

165,

where

b,

all

4,

where short participles are concerned, and

in

211,

n,

the various repetitions are given, but without the respective

various meanings conveyed by them.

(Cf.

361.)

363
In the present paragraph the meanings are adduced.

They are the

following:
1,

the

directing

of others to a distant object or affair

attention

(dura, Sabdaraanidarpana),

e.

w iJS^Fcrs ^JS^rcSj

g.

w-j&oev*

$&
+f

sieJo, there in the sky

2,

Smd.),

(lit.

that sky) appears, appears the banner!

in that

directing the attention of others to a near object or affair (samipa,

e.

^d

<ac5

g.

(them) approach,
(them) approach!
blage of astrologers.
3,

$&

TTO^F JTO^F rtre^dtf

let

own

repeatedly directing one's

(it is)

s&oadja^Fo,

lo,

lo!

let

the time told by the assem.

face or attention towards an object

or affair (abhikshana, abhikshna, pratimukhavalokana, Smd.), a person's

own

repetition of action or experiencing (abhikshanya, Sabdanusasana),

read and read

||

e.

g,

having

having repeatedly read) with parrots and (thus)

learned speech, having played and played with the assemblage of flamingoes
e.
(i.

languid with passion and (thus) learned walking, having inquisitively

and carefully seen and seen the dance of peacocks and (thus) having
learned to dance well, the females with (their innate) taste for the
beautiful continually grew
fine

arts

boiling

went.

?>J3a c3J3?&

s,

>si>rt

f33\o,
O

what

(is)

he

^^do,

(3

??e>drso,

repeatedly

ate and (then)

he was and was

(i.e.

continued

the cause? (Basavapurana).

and read, and became

played, and

3o

i3

development of the excellence of

he lowered (the pot) after continual

he looked on and looked on and (then) laughed

vo?o^^acS?o

(Sabdanusasana).

he read

yuraocso

contents),

to be) silent;

to the

e5eJ,yeOo&c3o,

(Smd.).

(its

up

tired.

ejj3e>a

he played and
tflWo,
Co

(at last) was ruined (Nudigattu).

be much wearied,

sat and sat in one place you will

O ^>?^, having
i^do tSd) c^^,^, he fell and fell and laughed (*. e.
O
O
^f

W3oS? e3?ni&3

he rolled with laughter).

he died and died

(/'.

c.

&

z3?F2o&o?$

^3^ 7$^ eni^d^o,

was on the brink

of death)

and

of that disease

(still)

remained

alive.
4,

enjoining on others the repetition of an act in order to encourage

or incite them (Kriyasamabhihara, Smd.),

e.

g.

?&S

r^zSoJofii

46*

364
"walk, walk!"
"

withstand, withstand
5,

fcsfcjsaJoo,

when Jatayu

or

agitation,

an

hurrying

give up, give

up

3J8S

g.

k>& ?oJS&

?i>

with handsome teeth!

(your) doubt! ^<d

zo?3rf,

J3<&>

tfjacii

gold of the box! (Basavapurana)^

all the

^OO^O^OSDO

sSjetfdsSi?'

e.

aJe>ertako, go> go, sir!

SoJserfo

Basava, give, give

woman

the

deliver

be manly, be manly! (Smd.).

expressing

action;

anxiety, (capalate, Smd.; sambhrama, Sabdanusasana),

?jjd3oJoo, deliver,

said

"

with

ordering

^aeSrasSFfS

said.

they

^osj $Aj :3pojo<j7

j
o

the female

buffoon saying "resist, resist, resist!" resisted, gathered saffron water

and threw

(it,

a^

Smd.).

"3^

ays,

era,

'a 3^

w>, come this way, come

ZJ^onsrS ZJ^orfo, an elephant has

way, come this way! y?S wrfoc3)rS
C3
Cv
O
come! an elephant has come! an elephant has come! rfr?o
CS
Q c3?W,

this

w^

to^Jc3?O,
(30

the

u^tSfC^,
0^0

rfraj

rfraj

army has come, arise! the army has

come, arise! the army has come, arise! (Sabdanusasana).

6,

continuous,

action

unceasing

Sabdanusasana), e. g.
he went and went, tfrso

(satatya,

he came and came. 'SJ^cJo ^js^rfo,

O w^O o,
Cd
saw
and saw. zjtfdd
when (it) came and came (Rsv.).
he
^cso,
(-^6),
zodo^ acJSerfo;^, wdj^ SoJS^rto^ ^c3e)?S, he is coming and going, coming
2J?3o

and going (Nudigattu).

king's horse

wdos^

20^03^

that emperor pursued the

marching on) arrived in the midst of

^^

foes,

their

the

o5o^o,

coming and coming (nearer) was (but) a donkey.

wU.
,

(i. e.

-usoJo^ ^0^06

tJ

2^

and going and going

country.

=5\>S3o2j6^>

when
w M totfoo c3jseQc$8
'a^,
shepherds
en
and
came
there
and
was
no wolf.
running
looked, (there)
running
to^jiJ5
-*n
- n ^ji)^

do?i)3sUori
,

and coming
=58)02)0

sSjsrf^o

(i.

e.

in course of time)

-"aw
e^d^^o,

cS-fcrf

first

tod

wdos^

become attached

aJ8?rt

the

(see

172)

are afraid of men, coming

ne>r(o^c5j. the

a>

course of time as big as balls.

^cSsynrartJB-

though the ribfaced deer at

zod zodo3>

all

pods of

SoJSertos^

(to them),

v^tf

opium become

cssOoSJS^^

in

5sJOtadJ3

wdJS5*rodC5 ^ocSd, proceeding and proceeding on the road both

of

them

reflected as follows.
7,

completeness of an action (kriyasakalya, Sabdanusasana), e. g.

he said (to himself and another) "reap,
,

365

reap!" and (thus) reaped (the whole harvest).

^jaoJoo, saying (to himself and another) "beat, beat!"

WD

(consummately).
and (thus) came.

zreoS-irfoi^ totf o,

Sabdanusasana), e. g.
has been done! oi^jort^ cSs&rf^ do,

intensity, emphasis, high degree (adhikya,

8,

has been done,

it

tJd)C3e:ti)c3o,

sank rapidly.

must become ours!

it

ours,
<tf

became very

eStfftdocfc, it

;3J30 ;3J33Aci)Cfo,

it will

it

become,

it

it is

ij^tf

s3oo3o siw^jftciocl),

WgrfojS^rf

the unborn one (Rudra)

i^e3oC)W,
co'

be so),

may

become

it

(so)!

53$

ma J

wtf<2J5rt0,

3^
in

is

is,

let it

shone

much (Sabdanusasana).

(so), it is (so)!

vessel! (there) is not the least doubt.

X)

it

^^ftriod),

bright,

roared very

become!

will

Siva drank poison,

.,

it

xi

must become

very much.
it

saying (to himself) "come, come!"

The Nudigattu has the following instances:

it

he (thus) beat

it

this

become

earthen
or

(so,

3
F3&3

z&&js?dA (Ud&Q&ftfo
V

having dipped well, having dipped well in the ocean of

excellent joy (Basavapurana).

a6rt$3o

'aC^sSrttfo

ants work and work and exert themselves the whole day.

$vti&
for the chase.

craoSorttfo

T?flo3o e3 ^o^,? Airlo^

^ O
T^

found,
tp^rttfj
abandon sensual
,

O^OJo^osud^

not

fit,

it is

it

c3,

^i3,e

a red water-lily will certainly be

^^03^6,
it

<&>% 'S.tfo^d,
certainly do this.

enjoyment.

you
,

not required,

dogs are absolutely required

z3^e 83^0,

will

this is not, is not the

not required.

is

23^

proper way.

sSr(v'o

not.

'S,e3? 'S,^,

is.

t3?z3

'S,d?$o

?3?rf,

e5?yevaJ>irf

of

TTO^J

(i.

e.

73s>T5\),

it is

he said "it
Q Oanido,

not fit!" and loosened (him).

I will

certainly

*3?zSck

we absolutely do not want money

I will not,

the wise will decidedly

is

3oras^) ?lrfo^ z3ecS?

acquired by) injustice.

enough, enough!

^.Ji

certainly (there) are no useless things

in creation.

^3J d 25d ^dort^o Jrld^J^, taking arrow after arrow and shooto
j
^
o )^>c3, without waiting in the least.
)ri
ing without ever failing.

3si

?S^d

^d ^^

>^3rttfo,

In intensity,

waves that came incessantly.

etc. triple

repetition

he came, he came, he came,

also

occurs,

e.

g.

torf

D$O

torfo,

yursorsorso sSftedo, he ate and ate and

366
and (then) went. Jjstf Jj5^ iJS^AS^, it shone excessively.
it became excessively bright
(Sabdanusasana).

ate,

trembling excessively.)

pain or trouble (abadha, pide, Sabdanusasana), e.g.

9,

do, alas, he went.

I

do not come.

zo?3

s^sj

the child, called

23^S?C0 x!cS^

women who one

MSD*

)c3do,

after the other

=5^ tfrarfOtfsrs 3osx>

near),

(it

rt

thou hast come.

oh,

2J5>6o,

3j8?s3o, oh, I shall go.

the

=^6 's'ddo*,

Cv

succession (one after the other): totality, e.g.

10,

ft

zorioto*, alas,

sbdo =5^ ^rs

5

happened

Ca

to see

-3-OddJ?) rtrs

ca

ca

though the widow whose husband has died, grins

at all she sees, they do not let her be unshaved.

.

if all

who come

&

revile (her), will the grief

caused by (her) husband's death leave (her)?

^rs ^rsdtf?3,e; njdjsqje)^

the endeavour
ojo^^) ^oiousd^,
**>
A

a sioorfo^^o dro^d
djs^j^rf^^A
"a
made by the old man to please all he
,

he was cutting down every thing he saw.

tfW rtrttf^ e3J3?rf (see

<=C
50
rfooCS

saw, was unsuccessful,

181, note c;

211,

5,

t? rt

foot-note)

ss^-S-d^, then (after the bundle of sticks had been untied)

they broke the sticks one after the other as they saw them.
1],

variety, e.g.
,

much

pleased with the courteous

attachment to the ruler, showed

ssd?do (Oe>dODs>&&>)

3J3?^

he (the Prince of Wales) was

hospitality

which the people, from

which he went.

in the various places to

3oJ3?rf

he (Ramaraja)
rijSearttf^ ^Srorfrfc,

destroyed the mosques in the various places to which he went.

a
,

man

of good conduct

which he goes, he
Oj

is

is

welcome

to all; in the various places to

respected.

23^0

zS^ffejrf ao^fl

^JSSiSdi -S-a&e

^^ rfoo^ds^rlv ^
1

that sheet of glass they cut according to the various require-

ments, and

make window-panes,

etc. (of it).

wa^oJo^^o

'fffclflrt^ffo
&j

J3

^-

the carpenter has to

^3,, z3?^j 23?5)d So)tf ?SjJ?a^ =^J3^ t3?^o,
cut the pieces of wood, to plane (them) and to join (them) according to

C^do

the various requirements.

^osfcSe 3o^dcS

3o^crfoddo S&A7&f14<&V

367
rf

&, the

villagers near Karaei used to worship alligators;

they

took, according to the various circumstances, different sweet eatables to

them and presented them as

340.

Certain verbs

combined with others,

are

offerings.
often

placed

being

their

after

the colloquial

in

(especially

past

dialect)

(gerund).

participle

They are principally the following:

1,

which gives the preceding verb the meaning of

to play,

5c3o,

playful motion or action,

a)

$?

3,

cfrredi^zS,

when the dry

32js3o3oo*

Aj6J5PrfdcSJ3^*

laugh.

immersed themselves

joyfully

aoodorftfo

g.

^oclicj^^os^d,
2c3F\d <os3
boys dance, cry and scream.

^03^6,

3oA)o3os3

IP

e.

leaves drop, the green leaves

the

women

3oJ8ds?e>^o^c3,

the ass

dooiOo'SejScSo'

f$z>>3

in the pond.

^^

wallows.

moving here and there or about,

&)

serpent creeps about.

5,

^e>oSJ3

to

young dogs begin

those

5,

thieves

e.

people wander

roam about,

suspended, oscillation, waving,

moves

to

and

fro.
I,

JfSr^o

ao^

(or walk)

SGsJ&S^cli^S,

e.

aad

birds

os3c3e>co^

about.

body

the swing

the ears of corn move.

sf>,

is

c3,

^tfdo

fly

as

fro

^J3^Ds3 ^JS/TS^JS

g.

does that which

to

about.

poised, oscillate?

=s\>cte
j

reciprocal motion done by one (or each) to the other: mutuality,

d)

^JSr^oSJSv* 22dA) Sjpo&Dacjo*. they

Q

e.g.

other.

DS)>O

another.

o^^rsrij

esdOudo

(his)

'Stcti,

van and beat each

Rama and Havana

aos&dcrs^oSe) 6,

here that t?do

kingdom
I),

5,

in the

fcJO&e>zl)3e>
- 6,'

may be remarked

Nala made

met

they revile each other.

Q
one thing
for another: to sell).
exchange
**
**
/
ti

^e>&3^e)C^), to

say,

the

a pendulous ornament depending from the neck.

5,

2,

c3,

^o^rt^o 2*?o ddo ooris?ri 23jro.h Lcssc*

run about well in one or two months.

moving backward and forward, moving

c)

It

ao?^ 3oOc3s)CJ^

g.

complete,

e.

g.

go (L

e.

(i. e.

is

also suffixed to the infinitive

lost his

lost his)

one

(Peculiar

kingdom) by gambling.

the chariots struck one against the other.

he made to go
to put,

to

is

beat

dJS^Jio

honour.

which makes the idea of the preceding verb, so to

ssjgra^rt^o

3c3o03o?3o.

^^ozS ciiss 6, stupid

persons

368
from

completely hide learning

^oeo d>

sight.

33

greedy persons bury (their) money,

&

he wrote down with deliberation what he saw and heard.

3,

which occasionally, to some extent, complete

tfjck, t?J3ci>, to give,

the idea of the preceding verb, e.g. zJcSdJSs* ^drqSrsijo

^si^siypFfi)
rtarcdJdft SspsArO tfockstasyo OS%rt$$ortJo, from separating the

meaning which

in

is

into species

word,

according to their various

purposes, the vibhaktis (inflections) have got their name (Sabdamanidarpana, vritti to sutra 35 ; in this case ^oc^j is superfluous, as is shown

by Kesava's
>?.*

oitfrt

which has only stoqSr^oo aqraft&dGCyfS

$&).
3 ?jJ22$rO
the
thou
indicatedst
^S
^JSelcxtf,
sWr^rartdocSdo
siitra

arrival of spring to

me

Rama made known

arithmetic to Krishna.

very nicely.

oarfotf
'o*

he

^ododc&o ^rasSodo^o, to^JSjU^j

<
W
V 6J

tells thee.

horse threw the double bag

off

(from

its

wdj

to come,

(wo*),

idea of the preceding verb,

e.

5c5o

&3

the
^JS^so),
W -"

(W e3o) ^o^o i^o

(the piece of jaggory was)

it

which sometimes
g.

a8?Ci3*

&oflc3o

(for
v

back).

a^do, &ti&^ ^0 ^JS^l^o, he thought that

small, and threw it away.
4,

^^^

e5;3j3o

is

used to complete the

it

has appeared that the

w&osj

which barley ripens in sixty days.

soil in

fci

-9

0-0n

CO

some places

depth of the ocean in

p
is

'

nine miles.

s3o35t>rD>rtdcSol>

tSkl

co

eo

the tops of
todo^sS,
*

mountains in the ocean

It

may

in

5,

it is

g. esdj^,

SoJ^rtal^,

is

unidiomatic

3cJ3^ zodol^, mother,

go

which also makes the idea of the preceding verb

>c&, to leave,
e.

g.

^O^o
9

kill

Rama

learned

O^4),
it.
e^j^ aJ3e^

left (his) wife.

grammar.

wcS^

he went away.
aU.fi),
U

^U,i). be sold the horse.

80

<=C

350)^0, to

)&. ^U.^J, he
w
w

30&C&.v
yrf^o 3ors
c&

I shall

put,

to

throw,

preceding verb somehow complete,

j

e.

to be wdJeX,

(back).

somehow complete,

6,

places appear above the water.

be remarked that to say

in colloquial language,

and come

many

which
e.

also

makes the idea of the

Jr^cio
g. 'arf^fk.c Sjrtrc$JS^A?3
o

they removed him out of the class.

369
great talkers remove the things of others by stealing.

Bhima

oos>&ri<&,

7,

aoJSertJ,

which likewise makes the idea of the preceding

to go,

g. s3tf.d) 3Z>

e.

"

TT

bad people

CD

^jdjd

and

rfjs^o wyj^

comes on, even he

he

is

>ck

tftftfdfttfrt

died,

is

aoJSfOBo^j, the
will be

sJ>?ds$, the duddus

>dJ

ditch

^U.^

6J

verb somehow complete,

pocket,

Kauravas.

tf

killed the

353&i3d.>, they broke the pieces of wood.

they tied the dogs to a tree.

sJootS 9 cl>

a wise

?^

&c$&

rt

account

wrong.

ruined.

out of a hole in (his)

fell

sJ3eo&o&, the horse

acJB^rtodrfrS? ?3sca,

man who

is

fell

into a

when a dispute

submits.

likely to be ruined.

&fcv*

what may be called

In order to form

341.

(TJTJSV^),

to take,

sort of reflexive verb,

added to the past participle of a preceding verb

is

(to that of =&><$* itself too), also

if

this

participle

is

a short

one

(see

We

have already met with this kind of

cf.
169).
formation in the passive (see
This so-called
315, 2, e; cf. also
260).
reflexive verb is used to denote that the action takes place in behalf of
165, a,

7,

and

the subject (agent), regarding the subject's good or damage, and so on

as circumstances require;

meaning

&v*,

of

explanation of

its

will

it

not

will

be seen that 'to take', the original

unfrequently

offer

sufficiently

clear

meaning.

The following instances taken from the three

its

dialects will elucidate

use:

w3

d?

wife,

Bo,

understand

(the
ij

may learn to know

^rfo^doo^, 3$d> =5rJ3tfjc3r^p3o

in this order one

ck

^JS$,
i^skacS*
terminations of the instrumental).

foolish people think that the

maid-servant thought,

woaSo^bo

^Qrso 3orfe5o3)

<?

evil will

s3o3

dandaka metre) even through my rule.

aB^do 3$odoo3*^6; wcsesr^cfo? 3 Sjas^

thus also this

3tf

(the

ca

rtjsflrltfj

6, foolish

happen, and are afraid.

dumb
^JShdCi

are tricksters:
^eOs)rtj^cS^o

persons think that

&;d&tfrt Qe>S

if

owls erv.

3cSc5o,

dodd

who had

travelled in the hot sun,

felt

Brahmana

fatigued uiul luul become thirsty,

47

went to the shade of a wild date

milk that was in

370

to drink the

other travellers saw

copper vessel;

(his)

down and began

tree, sat

it,

thought

Brahmana drinks toddy", and spread the news in the town. &$
as o) &?8 o*. even they blamed themselves that they
3\33e>^<J>fl6?i> ^
v
-o^o
ca

"this

(were) destitute of pity.

sjdotf

causing damage

a friend that one has acquired,

.,

himself a knife,

ejsjji) 3?$ri

even himself.

arf<i>

djs^^oJ^

ty

house?

he
^JB^^nsjS,
^
-

toe>a

is

hurting

^raa

oiO ^OF

has built
eo^;3rttf&,

^rso

T&srao

^do^d?

^dv^^ojSoio
that sparrow
where
has
'ado^d,

nest on the balustrade of the

(its)

^J&3

&

jewels and (thus) made money.

C&

*>

"T

rio^

it

roof of our house.

made

^sOfi ii^o stoS &or$, Rama, what hast thou

o5
GeJ&^&^OJjffc, ;i>ci>3 sirefc tfjsretfo, he married

s3o?3 rtJSdo ^b3

^0^5

(its)

sireS

e3e&>

to one's self.

&,?> =5^ siraS ^JSra^o, he

3>?3e SJS^sJ

a king's daughter,

3$f(

?!
C

ODSJJS),

done to thy foot?

made

e&e>a

tf^ri

and causing welfare

to others

s&e>8 ^jaretfo, be sold

Ci

3of3

flat

(his)

aoo^ort^j ^rs ado^ortd?^^ ri^oJod^

djsa

W3oo w^od sJ^o^rf^o, this boy felt great desire to

^J3^ zS^^o
make all the boys he saw his friends.
^JSP^a^ ^J3d^0 3vCO
sjros^sg)^
PO
O
Q
N>, the river which became a hundred
)

Q
O
branches when the son
neck and

from sorrow, tied a stone to

of Vasishtha,

fell (into
it),

zi^a

?sirltf o 3ti

^JSrso

divisions of the terrestrial world his own.

,

he who has

self).

&,2^

merchant

Trarf^racJrfo

Rama

^2S

his knife

you had

a camel.

lost

IT

^^J3,fl^o,
ta

^fcl

e?

(to myself).

^doJo

5J^

oo

^JSCSJ

SSSFfc ^rf,rle
<*.
c

wdo^^o,

^JSreo
dfl^tfjsfejo.
A
V
9*

wastefully spend

money

(in

'ssir

^JSrso

3J3C93o,

a certain

aof^c
3Jddq$rs3 ?3$c3o

&$

Oe>3o?k
Se)c&

-ds

opened the bundle of Narayana

TT

3oe)t)J

^JSSS9 ^J3rao

erf?io

satisfied the

wants of

he sold that milk and (thus)

return.

3$

reads a book (for his own benefit).

rtrao.

himself.

2of3

he who confesses his being overcome.

,

stomach.

if

(his)

the seven

^JS^oao, grasping (for one's

's'tfck

Ce^sraddJS^ oi^
money in trade.

seems as

it

(his) face.

the sin of robbing the things of others.

and took

up

^^

s&Onjori^*

^ *&

lost all (his)

c3,

lifted

having made

3o?rl

dj?S5

shall

3J3ii
(his)

at last he sold even

^JSrs^o,
ca

buy a book

(for

=#a^c36 ^dort? ^?do,

your own behalf),

it

will

myself) and
if

you thus

be even our ruin.

<

3?i

^JSoJuzl)

23J2kJo.

off

^o

made them

sheep to the jungle and

and

lions

tigers see

their respective dens,

the

the

me

e5S5

and

e5o^a 'aa

s3

(his)
cS?

v ~~
then beat (with its)
,

hands and

tail

on

(its)

rise

an
Zo^rt

(to sleep)

t3?rt

in

(my)

feet,

quickly (early)

quickly (early) at dawn.

e3rt

self.

^3^0 JJ3^ ^J3* .O^^cS^o,

the master

feet.

drives the

It

now and

the cow

why does

'JJJS^o,^B d,

body?

flies

away.

the breeze joined a riock of

is

Q
because

could not go to school for eight days and

yrio 33)rfsjbo
cp

that

^Wo

tfjatfj.rfdTOjft

rtpg^ij

ej^ra

rt

tfUd d

TT

a house built with the object that travellers

therein).

CiWo

he had no cloth whatever to cover

had got pain

young black bees and came along (with them).

remained at home.

A>oa6

wrapped round one's

is

down

lie

to

tttSh

(IfSfSe)

dawn he drove

the whole day in

tfJScs^

s3o^>ft

z2prt
r*i

very salutary to

o3ofc!;3JS3?k ^oij*

wash

stood up to

you

z3?ri,

PO

down

lie

(the sun), they

a garment that

n)?d,

O
V
himself with.

doing so)

(in

rfjscs

part of the night

sharp

eat the shrubs therein.

&

aprfrro^oio
o

it is

2o^5^),

first

it)

s3of05jroc3?3o, at

eo

ddo-2jad^

took

beat your chest and grieve.

(thus)

in

IT

Co

when

la

and

fcd ^Jareo z3;l

ojtf

ca

(his)

son

soldier's

mince vegetables (with

to

one of his fingers.

must not

native

<*>

(A

<a

sword of his father, went

cut

the

ir'JSre rfj,

ej

=<.

17

may

eJ

alight (or lodge

en>e3o

do you know any means by which one

may

escape when

danger

proaches.

-a

the king took a seat on an elephant and

came

to Vijayanagara.

aj>-

si>dc3 <5d

he went to the shadow of a tree and sat down.

o
,

circo
lie

he who
^JScsd,
ca

had a knife made

he ruined himself.
,

zSrfrf

is

exhausted by sickness.

(for
himself).
^

3o^^rO

^JS5#j3o,

^?i?jj 3>?3e
t

c^

obtiiining permission,

he got evidence (in his own interest).

a kind of leopard lives on the sea-coast, and eats decayed flesh and other
47*

372
thins.

tfdi

sl> $

jra

sisj?ol3

tfjsa,

3oe>^ 3o&rido, four thieves united,

rfo?So3

made a

hole (in the wall) of

the house of the chief merchant, stole all the valuable things that were
(there),

and took the road

(them among themselves).

to divide

o&

30023

fos)&

333 Xi

3oJe>C$?fo,

3s3oi>

3ori?fo

died

woman

tfJStftf^J

do?e3

><3o

soJasj^

3J3^^o, he called

3oJS>&3ei>

^ocktf ^rso

(with her).

^J3Cc)
ca

<a

6JS,

^jarso

(his)

^orfod

eJ

this

horse?

what does

todos^s?,

Co

sBraoOio^o ^ ^dcia
Co

and went abroad

wife

did they find the horse?

where did she hoard it?

aUo, ^JSra^o,
ca
you going to keep

three

and divide them (among themselves), and

etc.

carry on (her) head and comes (here)?

en^D^
^J3rw,
A

make

the merchant told his three children to

equal parts of the cattle

that

a dilapidated temple in the jungle in order

to

^UoJ

arf^.)
ff
<

*.

>

^JS^o.A8 e6^o, are

v*-

dJSrf 3oocorlf3o ^JsUo, =^J3o^ ?5oh, the

<3
SO

jacket which the big boy had put on.

?

seized (i.e. with)

who are you,

mad dogs? &oa?

w

the

seized the axe, and went to the garden.

hold

sDsScrfo

of).

must conduct
o

co

sir?

Sod ^J3r?o

"0

one's self according to the

^d ^^,v

-rf-

Ijs^y*
-rf

&&&&,

command

d =^J3d &.e3c&>3

a'

So^o

rfoSo?!
woJOo^rfd esi
<x>

where do you go having

2Jri?i>,

he

seizing (laying

zS^j, at school (one)

of the master.

^JS^. z3?^o

^^

we must

converse in love with (our) parents, sisters and brothers.

o,

obey him and the

officers

),

follow

its

over them all rules one king; they must

appointed by him

a chief horse

is

with

and devotion.

fear

in front of the herd, all the horses

guidance.

to the

house of a physician,

a son of mine
please to

lies

come

to

fell

prostrate in the

at his

hands and

feet,

house from sickness;

Niugappa went
and spoke
if

"sir,

therefore you

(my) house, examine him and give (him) medicine,

373

your kindness as long as

shall not forget

was not

Honna

"doctor",

I live".

SoJSr^o

who

(Nirigappa's son

but nearly starved, as he refused to take any food himself

sick,

poor father, brothers and sisters might have something

;t
why do you send for medicines (on my account)?

in order that his

to eat) said positively,

I

Then the physician asked "why

them".

shall never take

Honna answered

take (them)?"

"please, do not ask

so.

you not

will

cannot

tell

Thereupon the physician said "sir, what

(you)", and became silent.
obstacle is there to telling (me)? You seem to be a perfect obstinate
fellow".
Then Honna entreated (him) with humility, saying "0 sir,
only

please,

speak to him.
ef^a &)f3o

ca

do not think so!"

ao^C^

3rf. ZJSdock,
t

receive alms)

this

(the

may

?je)0

your belly
36 A.

&3$ 3$oJ

^JSreo,
ca

30h

oJo^

to say clouds,

^Je)^^^,

aoJS^oSja^rt
SJ

6>c2rtotf aJ3?drfo,

he mounted that elephant and returned to Auegundi.

is

(and

eat.

conceal and forgive

(i. e.

3&ft XiS^

(to you).

solicit

sun says) "I having put a

adJ3?ij

w w3o&<&. &3&

one time.

one

eraddo,

rfjsa

J5f, please, put his fault in

Soe)^-

you should

23?^o,

(but) by stealing one should not

cSoJo

^^

have something to say

arf,<.

ca

eat,

0?kJ 35e>& ^JSraj,

diadem on (my) head".

it)

&rej

icSo

and (thus)

^ys?5o ^e3oi) &>?e3

^ sira^d,

^PV*

3o?W

yrf&fl

sSj^rf^sJJ.

^^

(the sun says) "I put a muslin cloth, that

round (my) head".

For comparison's sake the following instances which contain verbs without
(and of which some show at first sight a not easily perceivable difference
meaning from the above-given ones) may here be introduced:

rfjsv*

in

33oo

eosfi

(commentator **rt), those

3^*.
ready nouns are of three kinds, viz. rudha, anvartba, ankita; know!
^oArt
beloved woman, I seize thy feet; know!
dodrfo S*do Madana perceived that this man (was) a suitable husband
d-Btp^zpSFo-d-^aj*

.053^

SoJscJesdJ*,

^ 3W

for

(his)

younger

sister.

33O3*

with tremulous eyes understood

whilst yet living learn the

it

oi>d^ aoSj^rf 2?n3,oio^Jo i$dv*,

differently.

marked

sas^*"

'gdwo

peculiarities of final

the

^^

liberation!

woman

374:

wsi* <o^ o* ^rte* e^djttfjjo draitjdo, let all of us

he made a house,
now make a horse-sacrifice! ^3 JjaQfija zsn^lxztfrdC, bathe in the sacred
water of knowledge!

3or3

3^

fSjstdo,

build a house and

marry (i.e. unite in wedlock) and (then) see! &>c|i3o3ja* tfSJ^d fcOofc
^oiwajo, must (one) tie a royal tiger and a brown cow in one place?

(then) see,

one
rg-^ddrSj cs^,

d?5o, S'JSGO

one who has distributed boiled rice

,

draQ

riodo^S

r3.?cl),

I shall not
,

lift

up

head and walk

(ray)

23<rf fc?3d

given, have diet prescribed,

(is)

who has

a donor.
in

enlisted soldiers

(is)

3-5333 30to3js9*

wo

a king,

uncle's house.

my

will

?rtfoi>o3d>,

they
z33oke^
and quickly remove their

have proper medicine

wareztoo ;3<do,

sickness.

the truth!
having pulled an arrow (out of his quiver).
rf^stoo &e, speak
he who acknowledges that (he) has been overcome.
irtdoij*
he who has read the vedas.
djscs^d zo^o&o, thou tookest the

road of

final

life into

a corpse.

3o&3<&& sr^raio ^3o^3 ^3->ir#, power which

a house in which toddy is sold.
r^ad,

liberation.

djaes

you should not

he who borrows.
3J^3

oi330rfjs

s3?S9,

sell

^^

^rorfjd $J8tf,

ca

fills

3J3aJ3

?3
these elephants to anybody.
where spirits are bought.

53 ^ a place

must buy a horse.

23?ro, I

<odo doS

as^yo ^-ere^o, he
c*

rf

^JSO^T^ritfo Sro^j^do, granting the things desired.

SOdJ 2jdj-&d3sw, (there) is none who has given (alms, etc.) and
^vcii^ ^^35^,
(thus) been ruined, (there) is none who has (idly) roamed about (in quest of alms)

bought milk

and
does

(thus)
it

two duddus.

for

*ok

lived (happily).

waorf^ 33Cdo 3rf3c?fc?

30

matter whether a dog eats the leg that has been cut

jackal eats

"though

(it)?

3xario tfjao&jd&a Sojsnrf

(one's) nose

be cut

off,

^<5<c&? what

off,

or whether a

as

S53(^'

&e^ SA)^^,? ^
do not the nostrils remain?"

one ) sa ^

3\e5se3-$o
i*>ty

sf^ aSf^SoJjrf^ ens?^ Jj&o3w35k, a day-labourer used to beat his (quarrelsome)

wife repeatedly.

tf^d

ac^3dj oojsddd

sSkb^

the blows with a cane, do they not pain?

,

an infant that cannot

Sodd
jungle under a
a blanket

tree.

(yet) sit

fSjs^oJod?,

sk^d^es'o^d

up and

lies

aooC? doe^oSw

#tfrt ^?fo

with

if (one's)

parents apply

sSostu ^JartdJaA

(its)

face turned upwards.

dosJA^, a young

wortSt aroe^, tfjaortQ?

he sold
aSja^,

SjyAao

(his)

tiger lay in the

shop and put on

ca

gave him six duddus, saying "buy something to eat!"

S^oJoo itfA, rfjsrtdjstfrfj, 3oj^?Ado, Candrahasa quitted sleep, washed (his)
w^rf ^3? Saccorts^rf^ zssQ^drfo, I dusted away the
face, and rinsed his mouth.

his father

head

insects of his

(i.e.

I beat

and the

letter

stands.

$3

vb 6

him soundly).

23tfjQcritfjs3;3

s'jsQd

sdotfo,

deaddjsv 5 SsfiSd

as^ddJ* W^AO,
crfj^sd^o Pj^d
Srf
combined with c* becomes
'gdrd, a man who

night united with moonlight,

man who

he came down from the

^odd^rfac^do,
CO

tree.

5"eM ssoio ajc'oij^

a place where an army is encamped.
355<3.0rt
a calf does not leave the company of (its) mother.

en; a*

o,

00
rf

a
w,

stands.

375

even he who has remained alive,

tfo^dro, he sat down

nds*

eru

&orf,

is

the chief officer of the ruined village.

in the basket-boat.

^3,

tf3,ota>rtji

^J^,

z3<ri^?*, the wife sat in distress, performed several

meritorious acts of devotion, and became dispirited (as these proved useless).
3odd ^tfrt ^J53j
<? ^oSd ssrt, as if
(one) sits under a wild date tree and

and

3W &>,

3to*>

rSra rfj

drinks buttermilk.

3d>n

aSort^o

^^

was ruined, the female roamed about and

(thus)

the raale 8at

(thus)

was ruined.

3c^

udjs'j 33StJ,3
tf^rfo aodrfa
that even
tfjsre^ tfotfSddo, they thought
both of them should take this property to themselves, and sat (there in the
<oj3a;3{ rg^,
kQ L3 edjdirf drfddja
though the boy ran and ran
jungle).

^^

and became

AEDcOJoiu

tired, (his) father did not care at all.

sstfrt^

2-10^

giotrt

U I must
23?tf^J k(3o uata addjssd 3^ dwQ&drfj, a native soldier
having said
go
wdrfo a&otd
to war", had had a very sharp sword made.

wherever he went, he destroyed the mosques.

(one) causing ruin to the man who has ruined him.
he had a poetic composition
rfrfrt

me

^3^, give

what

if

is it,

U^eScOodrd^, she who

told.

the stale-food (thou) hast.

thief's

word

(once)

man who
know

lives

^ ^^^

by carrying loads.

musk

eat.

the fragrance of the

^Scdo

SNPS^^ so^

23?s\>,

s'tfdj,

^sk ^so

tfjscsj 133
^oao,
W
&

rtoSjs^rt R?do

til

it

naked.

5^ 3^

become true?

g^3, even brothers divide a ripe fruit and eat.

eroreo

is

aojjea'ol)

^^Ooi)
^3dd

a^js^

carries?

a6jj^ ydj^JS^rfj, a

3i33otf 3, does

a donkey

if (one) invites (thee),

efura.^,

(you) should invite people to dinner.

ojrfj

C5

Botcydtfj,

^^

trtfo

she called her servant

water into a brass vessel and bring (it) ".

ifs>3J3o &b&3 sses^eJ;,
does an owl see the sun?
&J^S&Jj ^<tfo3do, to apply the mind to and listen.

and said

"fill

VdU^riaje^

Aj^^dio AortOA, having put on trowsers and embellished

-geJ^,

helmets.

^N^^s^doo ^eW^, ssu^s^^^JcS* ^y^, having invested

themselves with shining golden coats of mail and put on trowsers.
&(2rtal>o
he put on (his) ornaments, rfrfjdoftoioo
he put on a green coat.
ia&Jjrfo,
(their)

u3, a net with which wild animals are caught.

ne walked three leagues.

J3orfo^,rfJ

zJdi-8-

rsid)^

do63.rU

z-<?.{

to

a person should walk very properly as long as he lives.

doJjjsdo, if (they) learn knowledge, they will walk properly. See

an instance
dorao^rf
will

in this

paragraph under
if

(he) tells the

^^fSt,
he not count the mounds?
e33^

8 he

requested "mother,

'to

maniyagara
3300J5,
tell

sorfakruia&rt dosaj

fear'.

(his)

R?33ddJ3

?ioA) a5eN>d53

bad and good circumstances,

^rfo
00

even you a means

(to

me)!"

23?ado ddoiodojjo, Vishnu asked the half of the land of the lord of the Kurus.

so^do^

z3i^

grain

(to his

hand

into (his)

z3Q 5SOJ idos^,

man solicits alms and (thus) brings

&e?duj 3*3^1)0 o, when (he) put (his)
wstf rtd wrf oioo
pocket and examined, (there) was no money.

house).

this old

**o5js^rt tfofc* ass*

376
he who mounts a war-chariot and drives.

Sod

ascend the fort,

26^0^,
tree? ^o^JCioijrfi01 ^3,>3
siasd, a horseman
-*
ioftci

WA^

ofcs??

why

I shall
^JJ?s|o3io rf^sSo,

doest thou ascend the cocoa-nut

who mounts a

horse.

v4

afraid of the bridle,

the other

if
,

348,

come!"

the wolf has

has come,

On

s5d d?s

Agni surrounded the women of that place.

?o0^rfo,

The terms that express 'to fear' generally appear without

a worthy person fears sin. 5* aoJjiirtjfc

is

o3j

Jj3

hand there are

(we) fear

t?J5>S7*,

e.g.

&e?tf

S5oz2,

the boy feared, and cried "the wolf

^oc3o6 ^Qs3)C3& SS^o^o^cS, the horse

3od3 9 c$^j that servant-maid was afraid.

also instances like the following one

God and always behave

properly,

He

will help us.

Cf.

e.

For the sake

342-

of emphasis erura^

is, is

occasionally added to the

end

fij

of a verb which appears in the form of a verbal noun, e. g.

also of the bark of some trees
?o3o 'g'srid dJsdjddoKO,,

(they)

make

'adjtfo

paper,

d&,rlvaif)
.,

u'

at night cats

are met (by them), owls will peck (their) eyes and
ISio
S5{&jrfd)P30, (they) use to say "the pupil
oi?^

^^v

Mdv

z5*,rf dj&^rts'^rl
if

kill

or

young cats

them.

(is) like (his) spiritual

^d ^dc3 sd^jrf^o
o
various objects of commerce come from foreign countries to India.

teacher".

3ood)nje)

if

SsoSossJo.

3odd>p^r1s?c3

o^J)^j &ir3c>c53Je>
CO

Zv

?3rfo.<D?o,>rfc3jofc3je>,

metal pot brings forth young?

w,3a?l) ^jploioS

Brahma has

will the writing that

XXV.
In

343.

Kannada

in the following

a)

&)^^*

jjjj

On comparison.

348,

(cf.

man

es^uo, this

the timingila

SJejrfo

to the one,

i. e.

toOd lodao ^^jj^ckfl^,

written on the forehead, fail?

7),

(is)

most excellent in the world.

oJ

ever happen that a

way:

by the simple dative

(is)

it

the comparative and superlative degrees are expressed

1,

man

does

w<J

of

which

fishes of

and

so

on are

e.

g.

excellent to the world,

-BoDooftas&rtv*
fishes of

is

this

tfdJe)^ ^JS,r3o

&0

which the one

one is larger than the other.

which one

e.

larger than the other.

i.

is

io^=#J3,^

large

higher than

M.'-ru.

377

man

this

great (or high) to Meru,

(is)

srfrsi? tfS^o, superior

wtfo 2jj>3tfclv<

tfo^tfo

i. e.

and firmness of character (see

284).
9
e3 ctfo SD;^ dw Ort SoOok, the small one, if
ro

to all in the world as to family

&sJo

etoSri^

oo

S3ij

d>j2

(he) speaks discriminate^,

the greatest of

all),

Eugenia jambolana
6rt

^jd)6

?if^

verse in

dJ3c3rio,

thy horse

the cobra

(is)

(is)

this.

^rtd

s^

3oe>OFi

rl^ d>fe3

the worst of all.

'SicS,

('S^ being another form of r&ti, cf.

109 seq.; 352, 4,
instrumental, see
TS^OWO*

'ari.

00

oiw*

=&%

$$

(C^. the

tfodo

second

much more

^U.zSo, the poison of

-osj^j^, sSo^sjscirfo,

a^

or)

(*arf

wheaten

(^c^), 'from'

282), suffixes of the ablative (or

a), e.g.

FftFfS ^-sdJS^.^o, a jungle

in wliich (there) are envious people,

in

larger than mine.

the

fruit of

ripe

efo zS^^^j, he said he wanted

by the dative combined with

a}

the best of all.

(is)

2,

^s$

the

280.)

jaggory than even

bread

greater than all (or

(is)

blacker than, the crow.

/. e.

to,

i. e.

all,

aoreo

>?!d^

black

(is)

3(3rt 'scS^JSj eo3otf

c)

great to

(is)

^rttf

a jungle

i. e.

good to-from a town

(is)

(is)

better than a

town

which envious people are.

&)

w???)^?^

o^d^^, E^OOon^

wrl^Oe;, (there)

is

no height

to-

from the sky, (there) is no breadth to-from the earth, i. e. (there) is

nothing higher than the sky, (there) is nothing broader than the earth.
9
food

science,

knowledge
is

gold

much

ox
(is)

(is)

erf,

t>'

intellect

'

far better than intellect.

'

(is)

^cSoOJoo
<

far

better

than the

beautiful than this.

*)o3o3-A 3oJOoioo

lion,

^atk?^
9

than

ri.rfo-8-jrf
-

greater than wealth.

dearer than copper.

fiercer

^e^,

2J3o ^

^d^i,

the tiger

tsdo ddor^oiosyaddo, that

(is)

(is)

more

knows nothing
^zS, he who
BD^^,^
^y
wc3o d^c5o, that (is) larger than this.

>3o S3C5 oi:cid

<>3

(is)

viler

sptf&A
c)

than a dog.
3orfo

'a^^K^

^3^n)Cirfo

oi3e)SJc3j,

3e)05onrfJ So^rfOo,
?te,dF>?l
^^
CO
Tfy

ficial

than a mother, (there)

e3??oo,

is

death

-O^rfg

than the ears of the horse.

what

(is)

3O ao,
CO

more dear than knowledge?

(there) are none

nothing sweeter than sugar.

(is)

better than

wdJ, the ears

Si?e

of the

life

more bene5J33ri^c3

without honour.

donkey (are) longer

378
white bears are bigger than bears of brown colour,

53,

he

(is)

'O

your

girl

more clever than that

(is)

iron

;,

useful than the other metals.

the seed of the Banian tree

much

(is)

other snakes.

the

^&j. 3oe>3Atf

more wrath than the

OJ3 y=^^

B^Oh^OJS

boas (are)

much

awe>

larger than

have

cobras

35>>r{ rolk, waotf,

(so-called) vicious snakes.

^Onb cSJS^S^, wolves (are) a

Ci

is

e>rtd

(is)

smaller than poppy-seed.

,

girl.

much more

9
ffs>0 ftcl eo^dj rira do,

>is3) ^?o^ro

t?s;rf

I.

deeper than that well.

this well is

four years younger than

wa?i

little

larger than dogs.

35D^>o sjo^sjsh A)^>

'Sdo^d, the milk of goats

and the milk of cows.

thicker and sweeter than the milk of sheep

4^$^

s3o?*wworradaw, rfj^Sftji d3?e<J&d>w, (there) is no gold

than
better
pure gold, (there) is no lisping nicer than (that of) children.

on earth even

?30rffc3.

make equal

^33

sj&rttftf

sun, am) the most beautiful

I (the

^STdrirftfc^
to

of all the beautiful

c3e)rS^,

(?oJ30JoPc3e)C3)

23?=$^j. aor33osSo,,

^JS^

to one's self those

and

and

brilliant,

^do^

d,

some

one's

rfj3&9o ds/Sss^oSoA^

less

^^^o,
3o^o,

(abundant) in Ceylon than with us.

aSjs^

=&>rco a8J5^

>J3

*&&

23?^d6 ^ilsdrt^nrf^

more than

more

(is)

C3e)Oo3oFi

CO

CJ

C3

t4

oo2*o,

season

rainy

rto^dJ3^h?3

^o^j

have more

a hundred ^rupees.

than

the

self,

animals

3
fc7
understanding than other animals. rfoJSCSo SeJrkr^hFS
three hours.

^s&hr^,

the vain pride that wants

who are greater than

3J&rt$ft?l 3o2^o zooD

brilliant things

^Irls?^
tf^o,
"~^

if

(it)

OJ3
is

necessary to carry burdens over mountains and stony roads, donkeys

are more desirable (or useful) than horses.
d)

zze>$$) 2&2^^rfo, knowledge (is) something greater

Worred^A<x>
IT
u
}> Oh^sjJS d^sdo c3jS^ rf^o, God (is) greater than all. l)

than even gold.

3,

by the ablative and

a)

'Sx^

It

is

to

^^e$o

substitute the instrumental

its

2J;Jjiclo

&0o3oo, Balabhadra

(is)

old

352,

4,

a), e. g.

from Krishna,

be remarked that uneducated people occasionally use such sentences as

touS^fct^,

assO^*^ xc

zieo^ aSjs^Srd*^

^o

-st^.

eruiS^

siwozaci*^ i3?^ft.

'arfo^d.

ecdw^eso tfjasracOjns?^^

They evidently think that v^tf,

separate suffixes which require the genitive case.

or

s*^

are

older than Krishna,

i. e.

379

fd^jwcg^ c$o

younger than Nakula.

^zfod^fs*

eifcjJFffr^r^o

more excellent than Arjuna. &3f$3

- r3>^o
o
8.
man.
than that
See
349,
T5r,3S[

b)

rioo3j?)F$^o

than Duryodhana.

sra^CJorf

without knowledge
verse in

first

man

(is)

(is)

clever

old from Krishna,

Dussale
cksL^
O

3o><3vJ>c5

more

i. e.

younger

(is)

rjs?i>o ^zlo3o, a body

(Cf. the

<

dooo$c3oi3*, thou art

>?o

(i. e.

thou excellest
<o>o,;3

me

more

excelling than

in respect of

war

in war).

dj* 'S.s^oS^^o $z*$) 3o^^o, you (are)

mean from us

indeed,

indeed meaner than we, on earth.

i. e.

33&30?3

e)

man who

sSo?e3rfo o,

"better than others".

i.e.

than poverty.

5)rto5o?i

jambolana

blacker

>3

(is)

utters low

^?l^^)
LO

SoOodo^o, a

appear
4,

words

(In these

sister).

better from others"

death

SoS?.cSo,

(is)

better

the ripe fruit of the Eugenia

(is)

worse than a

male older from him,

fool.

i.e.

older than him

two instances the

s^p

an d

>>, 'also', 'even',

to be redundant.)

by the locative

^^ta6J3^*

a)

youngest son.

350,

(cf.

in
23=2r,>o,
a

zS^dJSv*

the guiltless one,

i. e.

>,

,o
V -

he who runs

(or

e.

g.

among) sons the young one,

the guiltless one

the ruby

>ex)^c3o,

UV

2),

)dF&o&e>3^o,

s3oo,

&)

=^S)

am

^^?os>J3 3oOa?otfo, a female older than her (or

an elder brother).

an elder

than the crow.

man who

/)

5&3ra

>?&3t> SoCSJ

CJ

says

C3s)0d. o>rf
v-x'u

(or

(is)

(is)

z3o>?3
(
a>o&o), a (or my) paramour
v
ro
ca
Q
sweet from jaggory, i. e. sweeter than jaggory.
drs^,

^.?S

d)

man

even worse than a village in ruins.

23oQ>>o3oo
co

a>o3oc2

indeed a

(is)

(is)

-S-Gf^ofov*

?fe>oi)53i

S3$tfo,

this

Sahadeva

Vasudeva

280.)

c)

sjfcjo,

$o &0o3oo zo^clo, Balabhaclra

older than Krishna.

&S39 G3oo

zdaodfsio

(is)

(is)

fit

the

one among princes

(is)

the fittest of princes,

the best of precious stones.

of cows the black

white cloth

(is)

the

i. e.

(is)

d^ort

3o3o

cow has most milk.

the best cloth,

the quickest of them.

^e;
SSSlilrt^ ffod)drt^J&^
CO

3J5S)srarfrf ^ocSjdrts'o
(Q

Soewj, Arabian

horses (are) the best horses of all countries.

ero^ do, the

brown cow

(is)

the best of cows,

48

380
rid

Rama

Dei^orfo ts^rSrl),

CO

diamond

the

i,

(is)

most clever

the

(is)

the diamond

all

^^^.
*J^

w ^.

<

the most excellent of precious stones.

w
most formidable of

of the boys.

^vCO

wild beasts,

the hardest of all things.

(is)

house

(is)

the oldest of all houses.

352, i, c), e. g.
by the genitive as a substitute of the locative (see
of
liberal
the
best
-d?dd
to^aoo,
persons.
dedo, the most emi-

5,

co

nent of donors,

dro^d

3^o ^or,

the most splendid

of the witty.
x

XXVI,

On Syntax,

The ancient Kaunada grammars which the author of the present

grammar has consulted, do not use a particular word to express syntax
344.

however the Samskrita term vakyavinyasa

or the construction of sentences;

which expresses

it,

may

be adopted.

Regarding the construction

relation of the

karaka

is

noun

(namavibhaktis)

(karakavasadim).
354,

to the verb,

is

sentence (vakya) karaka, i. e. the

to be considered.
Kesava says that

on account of the verb

terminations

also

of a

3,

are

(kriyanimitta),
suffixed

(Regarding karaka

see

the

by

and that the case

power

253,2; 357,

of
i. 2,

karaka
a).

Cf.

a.

There are six such karakas or relations,

viz.

the doer of an action, the active noun, the agent (cf.

in
connection with a transitive or active verb (sakarmakaj
used
150),
or if expressing the agent's circumstances or state, in connection with
1,

kartri,

an intransitive (akarmaka, see

It stands in the nominative case
148).
and is the subject of the verb (cf.
347, 9; 357, 2).
2,

karma, the object on which the action of the kartri

falls,

i. e.

the

idea expressed by the accusative case.

3,

karana, the instrument,

i. e.

the idea expressed by the instrumental

case.
4,
i. e.

sampradana, the recipient of the object of giving or of the

gift,

the idea expressed by the dative case.

5,

apadana, ablation,

coming from,

i. e.

i. e.

departure or removal from a fixed point,

the idea expressed by the ablative case.

i.

the locative case.

the idea expressed by

e.

The idea

of the

or state of the agent,

action

place of the

adhikarana, location,

6,

381

genitive case

not considered a karaka, because

is

expresses the relation of two nouns to each other (sambandhartha),

not the relation of a noun and verb

The nominative

345.

{3,

a.

6,

e.g.

numeration,

e.

When
are

it

fttfd),

it
e.

milk

>ac&o,

^crfjo;

g. &,{&,
O <oddo,

i.

kJSS3o,

(mere grammatical) number,

e.

edro,
i.

arfro', s&J3do*;

addressing (see

e.

140),

e.

g.

becomes the agent or subject (kartri), simple sentences formed

g.

d^$*

the following:
white,

(is)

thou (art) Kama.

,

oj

Doric;

sambodhane, abhimukhikarana,

4,

do^^oo

'arf o,

o,

oj

vacana, vacanamatra, ganane,

3,

considered by itself expresses

6)

sort or kind, state of being, e.g.

i. e.

es?oo3oo,

351).

ftci), jj-Sr,,

tfj&>6, rfjdo,

koodoo,

e,

specification,

artha, bhuva,

2,

by

i.e.

liiiga,

1,

352,

(cf.

it

but

ssdo Odosj^Ovl, he

t?o ^?i, I

these (are)

males,

the sun rose,

two persons spoke.

fco^do,
(is)

(am) Nandi.

the king

good,

(is)

?o

pure-minded.

3^^

wdo,

(is) he.

it

usjo* ^cSo*, those (are) females.

O

todro

ZOF^ o,

c3?sJo s3o^ c5c,

one

man came,

the king

was

'asjr
esrio

pleased,

C*T

he

w^o*

killed,

^JS'^3,, let

them make!

Jj^FJii,

^?V,

bear,

para-

'o'

mount
It

lord!
is

to

be remarked that when the subject

often omitted, as

it is

193

verb (see

seg.)> e. g.

3^f8, he comes;
,

she uttered;

346.
2, a

it is

is a personal pronoun,
contained in the personal terminations of the

-adFcSo, 'adtfS, 'szfc^ftS,

?j8?c5oa3, SJ^ecS, 3oJ?)?a,

?SzlcJo*,

r^rlrfdo,

am

thou wentest;

they walked.

In sentences in which the accusative or object (karma,

seq.; 6,6. 6,&),

i. e.

ishta,

i. e.

^oSriGuOo iJSeJ
Co

in the hair.

o,

cf.

352,

the case of tilings (vastu), etc. on which the action

of the verb falls, occurs, the things, etc.

1,

wished

for, e.g.

may

be said to be:

^fdv'doo Jrtdo, he took the necklace;

he put on the ornament; Sjprfo s&oacSo, he

set flowers

382
In such a case also a double accusative (dvikarma) uses to take place,

be asked
zS^rijsrso,
C4

s^rfoo

e.g. rtodosjo

>

o^

he begged a

,23?&c5o,

idododotfoo,

gift of the liberal

man;

^Cf s

cio,

>so

^odosJvBcrfoo

Vishnu asked the king of the Kurus

333^0

sjsbsjo

land;

(his)

wisdom of the guru; cra^ofco

half of

for the

he extracted milk from the cow;

?3sj

he made them devotees.

Regarding a double accusative with causal verbs the following sentences

may be adduced: wd 3o ^^rS^ eixod^ 903jroc5o, the king caused
servant to go to the town;

(his)

rU^^o

^>S3orttfo

the cowherd caused the cows to enter the house;

o&*

>&3 roc3o,

the teacher caused

!>3^f$o sssjo'tfdrssi^ Larorfo,

the

grammar
2,

149

(see

anishta,

the elephant;

(his)

disciple to read

seq.).

not wished for,

i- e.

U>

mount

the driver caused the king to

si)?3o3oo

e.

g.

33-5)^0

he crossed a
crad.do,
Gw

snake.
3,

sl3e>&rio,
4,

be produced (as something new),

cio,

i. e.

vikarya,

s^js^o, he

^oJoo

i. e.

prapya,

to be transformed,

e.g. 3JOos3o ^3rfo,

i. e.

vaishayika,

he smelt a flower;
i. e.

kala,

to

at,

e.

be observed by the senses,

ft^si>o

g.

time

e.

eaod
tree.
g.

he heard a song;

^^o,

sfrf^o c^O^cJo,

relating to

he cut down

split the fruit.

to be reached or arrived

he. saw the sun;

7,

5jo?5ako

g.

'

he reached the town; dod^o ?rorfro, he approached the

6,

e.

he built a house; ^e^cS&o 35e&3o, he told a poem.

o
w

the forest;
5,

to

i.e.

nivartya,

he saw him.
348,

(cf.

29), e. g.

e3&3oaorftfo

3$
.

he lingered six months;

.

adhva,

i.

half a league;
347.

rfo,

he remained three nights;

he wandered about a nisht-watch; ^j^sS^oo

e.

relating

to space,

doJ37Te)^)CS^oo rfrirfo,

^eJ^drs
v
TJ

wdrnj^rfs&o sJQcio, he ran

he walked three leagues.
e.

g.

which the instrumental case (karana, cf.

352,
used, the following specific meanings are considered to be

In sentences in

2,6. 3. 4, a. 4, 6) is

expressed by
1,

'S.cJro.

he studied (grammar) for a month.

8,

vlo^sl}^
o o

it:

karana,

i.e.

an instrument, e.g. ^JSddoSoo ^ario, he cut with

383
an axe;

with (his) eyes

hetu,

2,

3^0

^J3?ado, he struck with a club;

rtcSoSoo

&o3o o,

tfozijrtJ3?o

&6>v &do,

he saw

the cut off with a sickle.

cause, instrumentality, means, e.g. kj^>rlao 3JcSdo, he

i. e.

obtained through service; ^rtSoo r00,rfo, he was impeded by an obstacle;

O"

z&rfao totOo, he lived by fate;

d<3ao tfjwo, by wealth high station

)2otoo fc^o, by learning fame

acquired);

acquired);

(is

"*

by the knowledge of truth final liberation

o,

(is

obtained).

(is

To this class of sentences may be added the following instances with

causative verbs taken from the Sabdanusasana:

^0

rfodo

mar read by

ploughed by the

field

LaA)3o, the teacher had the gram-

a^dre^o^*
association,

e.

i.

company (Sabdamanidarpana);
by

given by the king;

(his) pupil.

samyoga,

3,

gift

had the

the king

gavuda;

had a

the domestic priest

v&

(his) son;

e.

^ortrfao

g.

"&$

sjort^o T$<)&> fcJ^o, he

he came

o,

came accompanied

3o0o3js> rf^o, Hari shone joined by Lakshmt;

,o5oo z3dAj

vusSooSoo ^ort^ro sSoS^do 33^rf?3oJoo, he on whose forehead

(i. e.

(Sabdanusasana).

^OJoo,

Siva)

siddhi,^.

5,

(cf.

350,

9), e.

dodDo

g.

rfjscss)

elephant of wood!

accomplishment (within a time, within a distance), e.g.

e.

s^o^drso

sJJeJroSo

material cause

i.e.

upadana,

make an

a cres-

is

assumed an ostentatious appearance accompanied by

cent

Ume
4,

in

the

S^8r3Fs3Je)03o^j,

a month; 2jO?o3o 3^3 o ^oohtktSo,

*_

grammar became complete

within

the treaty was finished in the rainy

if

season; ^js
^ao sS^ddjs* t>>rfo, he read the veda within a cos;
s-X
>o

doo

SDS!
*=}

siQrorfo,

rre^d

he recited the treatise in the course of a league

(Sabdanusasana).
6,

bheda, prakara,

^Dcio tfodoc^o, he
ro

in

(his)

(is)

i.

e.

legs; ^o50oo s3j3?Uo, he

a>dFo, he

(is)

particular

speciality,

blind of (both his) eyes;

Brahmana

(is)

^sio

sign

or mark, e.g.

tfora.o,

he

deprived of a forearm;

as to (his) caste;

(is)

lame

tjslo^oo

3^3050$' k$C$o,

he

(is)

good as to (his) nature (Sabdanusasaua).

7,

(vidhi,

manner; 2^^

i. e.

manner,

a^ Lad^o,

e.

g.

he read

he walked in a quick
o fi^d^o,

doSjrf

in

a beautiful manner; t3)rfo5jFi

384
he spoke in a clever mauner).
instrumental in
281.
itthambhutalaksbana, a

8,

so

adverbs expressed by the

Cf.

circumstanced

characteristic mark,

characterised in such manner, characterised by, e.g.

^dora^o
Q>

S'rso, he discerned the pupil by the (characteristic) water-pot;

he knew the boy by the tuft of hair (Sabdanusasana).

S3t3 c3o,

53feJos3{3*

kartri

9,

called

344),

(cf.

passive,

the

d^

e.

315),

poem was

told

cause of a thing (in the so-

efficient

t>ti3&f

g.

made by

breast-ornament was

the

i. e.

3jsd

ss^?ros3o3oo

the goldsmith;

^^sis*

the

^rfo,
%t$ sJlk,

<o

by me.

In such a case also instances with a double instrumental case occur,

e$d?oio ws^rorl^c^

e.g.

v&o
9,

s&sario*

by the king

Sjfeis.do,

was

rice

jo

caused to be made by the cook;

$&&$&

3rsFo
adOoSo^^r^^o
Ci

PO

sSfelo,
40

by Hari Karna was caused to be killed by Arjuna.

In sentences in which the dative case (sampradana,

348.
5,

a.

5, b.

5, c)

352,

used, the following specific meanings are considered to

is

2 c.

be

it:

expressed by
1,

cf.

sampradana,

i. e.

zj^aapao^ rU)?do ^J3^o,

o&3ri tp^s&s* 'SxkcSo, he gave alms

(simple) bestowing,

he gave a cow to the Brahmana;

to the religious

e.

g.

^A

7?

1
mendicant; zjSjD^ Z&tiSd&vk-tf

a^B o, he

gave a garland

of flowers to the temple.

2,

ruci,

i. e.

being pleasurable or palatable,

(are)

agreeable to the taste of Ganesa.

dtt&o&itao, alms-giving
d
3,

irshe,

i. e.

g. ^jaA)o

agreeable to the taste of a child;

sweet-meat balls (are)

rice-cakes

e.

jealousy,

e.

is

g.

a pleasure to the pious man.

3>f>

3>

doo^^o, a poet uses to be

a bad man cannot bear
?3c&i?3'o,

displeased with a poet; ^owfSo rdo&Notf

a good man.
4,

matsara, i

e.

envy, e.g. ?orf3rl

to envy a rival wife;

to

envy men
5,

hita,

&dr?F

ftdoric

^^^

S^rfoasj^, a rival wife uses

r3rl?jo^D*,

men

of distinction use

of distinction.
i.

e.

suitableness, etc.

desirableness), e.g.

zJsioOori

7fa 3Sldo

So^o, medicine

heaven

(is)

(is)

fit

(the

Sabdanusasana has

good
s^reo 3o3o, grass (is)
for a sick person; oiisz3 3of(

an object of desire for the

ishta,

for cows;

oP

sacrificer.

n5

i.

e.

335
i.

bhiti,

6,

e.

fear

349,

(cf.

e.

2),

tttt

g.

--u.r^z 3*,e, a good

TT
W
ajjOrt^o-rtoo <L&, a female elephant fears tigers.
Tf
_

person fears sin;

i.e.

unnati, adhikya, (gurutva),

7,

parison,

343,

cf.

man

(is)

this

man

i.

349,

greater than

2;

Mem;

than Hari; r?rf^j8,rfj 3oOo3o

L
Q
^- o
larger than the other; sUiclOrt

^J

respectable

od&rl 3odc3*

^j^tfjOoftt^^S* 'Jrirtfo,

VQ^o, Hara

tefc;uO,

e,

^fifi

Sudras;

this

greater

(is)

CwSrk, (various) fishes of which one

w->,3q,fSCj

-^

than

33o,
d/a^^i^
o

e.g.

2, c),

all (or the greatest of all);

higher than

(is)

352,

s;

greatness, superiority (age, in com-

5^>

aorso

Brahmanas
the

33)

more

(are)

ripe

is

fruit

of

?*3

Eugenia jambolana (is) blacker than a crow; Oe>^o>r\ ^si

Krishna (is) younger than Rama].

-S-tt OuOciJ,

'

8,

i. e.

svasti,

well-wish,

e.

g.

^rt^SoJoj^v?
PO

?JdJ^^jr^

w^j^So,
5J

"0"

=5

I-V

siodv^, uo^oo, zpsjs^^o (Ngv. ^sj^o), ^^o3oo, ^do, 2b;o, ^A^, ^ioortVo,

^o?prso
p. 105),

(a quotation of

Kesava from Nagavarma's nighantu, our MS.

may everywhere

accrue to the world desired objects, a state of

well-being, happiness, prosperity,

bliss,

luck, joy,

auspiciousness (and)

good fortune.
9,

svabhava,

i.e.

natural disposition, nature, e.g. AJOSO^, s^oi-^c.

TT

to the lion

monkey
10,

(is)

(i.

e.

the lion possesses valour); 3&fl ^33j^>^, the

possesses agility.
hetu,

i. e.

(are obtained);
11,

valour

cause

^oWM

(cf.

349,

sJoofto*,

namaskara, i.e.

ro3rto&fl?rto, by wealth offices

6), e. g.

clouds (are the cause) of rain.

obeisance,

c3?jr\r

e.g.

made obeisance

obeisance to the king; rfodjOori^SriCjo, he

o

he

made

to the

guru:

^^do^.o,
6J

he made obeisance to the Jina.

tr

12,

pranyanadarasmarana, i

or contemptuous mentioning

of,

e.

contemptuous thought concerning,

beings,

e.

g.

^je^Sdo
count men

when misery happens (to him), he will

^slslrarl fij&Jjo, when misery happens (to him), he
rfo,

the goddess of fortune (Sabdamanidarpana)

he counted him (but) straw;

jej^o

ss^ff

-&>^& 3^W3

c)s3

^3^

/^

s^jgrt

(but) straw:
will

^o

^^dri

^^^

zortuio,

nusasana).

may

be

used.

^ c3o

>

Saumitri

Laksbmana) counted the rogue (but) a worm-eaten cowrie;

6
ZS^tifS ION^^^ wridojo*, thou countedst him (but) an areca nut

accusative

AoSri

speak against

(a. e.

In such sentences also a double

?2fS

vsi

e. //.

49

386
he Counted him (but) straw;

writfo

Credos wrtcSc,
regarded him as (mere) straw.

0^*'

i.e.

anishta,

13,

hatred,

^&,Sc, he poisoned him;

sword against him;

(is)

s^ori

vO

"w

>2a

the vajramushti-weapon

w&3o, famine

^JS^^S^.o

tJ^ofi

do?3do, he whetted (his)

s^oko

Zo^^o., SjfcJ^jo&

^>vof\

noxious to wrestlers;

undesirableness, e.g.

dislike,

^^CJD, he

4%o

(is)

disagreeable

this

man

to the world.
14,

i.e.

sadrisya,

as

deserving

Supratika

(is)

that

similarity,

man;

^&of\^o ^TO,
o

e.g.

Zoosia^^

SDODrf^t*

equal to the (elephant) Airavata;

the (ox) Gayal likens a cow;

z^

oft

the

k>Cri,

(is)

as

(elephant)

rlfcfOofl rtsjoko

?o>j>3o s&osjo, a face

?o<3x2!o,

(is)

like

the moon.

the

pratinidhi, i.e. substitution,

15,

place of another,

e.

"O]

WOuOSo,

been

has

being

put
for

or coming in the

honey sugar

may

for that poetical composition

this

^^.^
rj^do,
~C
o3

*J

^uzU

composition

poetical

?$

g.

w vto^t
^T

be used;

3^ ^>

substituted;

S5=aO % o,

sis*
rt3^,tihil,ebf8
'
rr

ca

-o-

-a-

costus is used instead of Ricinus.

^^o, he gave a boon

ToF^doo dj^^do, he made (his) friend glad.

ishta, i.e. love, e.g.

16,

the devotee;
17,

prati,

=$$o3oori
i. e.

dddo^'"

S^of)

to

regard, with regard to, as to, e.g.

o

Kannada which

that in
jj

(according to the opinion of some)

is

wholly insufficient with regard to

and bedande, the ancient poets have proved

(its) words, (there is) jattana
284
by (their) renowned poetical works that now still exist. See
(under dative

^o^o ^w^o);
"O"

under

(^d^o ^ooioo).
(gamana,

18,

i.e.

'

Cf.

going

287, under

=$,

3dQoijo^

>,

(<odzl) ?o^.re?ji3s\o);
~

287,

'

302,
to,

4.

the point toward which

directed, e.g. jsj?5o srusDri 3oJSec5?l>,

*

movement

is

he went to the town;

rivers flow into the sea;

ou^ri)

^^

^^df^o,

Rama

>

walked to the
19,

forest).

[arghya,
I
,

i.

e.

price

or exchange,

gave this for ten rupees;

tk>8>f(

e.

g.

3Jos^do, five sers for a duddu;

387
waStf 3ol3, CjC^csj,

very

clear,

one ser

give

(it)

ed?o?$.:,

21,

you give

two rupees].

oidzt)

tfJSCo^f?S, I will

22,

352,

cf.

[dura,

that village

is

352,
23,

4, a.

distance,

352,

cf.
e.

qrad;:^^
4,

22<$Ai>

only as to

Belgaum

srof^C,

a. 3).

zpsidss)^, sS^rraO

g.

sixteen haradaris from

3o>^;SdJ

Dharwar;

three miles from this village;

(is)

the distance between Bangalore and

(is)

Mysore?

cf.

4].

sakti, i.e.

for a wrestler;

man

direction, e.g.

Dharwar;

i. e.

dOd, what

<03^o.

man

4, 6).

i.e.

(dikku,

Belgaum

WcS,

^JSj^o^
^* ^c

i.

302,

Cf.

CJat-aOScfl

a king only as to name; dJS3rl SDfS^j, a wise

to the north of

(is)

(it)?

(is)

>j3^

(matra, i.e. mereness, the one thing and no more, e.g. ^^Jort

20,

words;

for

will

&*

or eight rupees;

^-

how much

for

sold for seven

is

^fdo rfjeO^d, opium

dJ333e>cort lo^o

$33oA?3o

0^

s3os;o7*>

power, e.g.

man

?i^oqip"c, this

^^,
is

a wrestler

(is)

a match

able to mate with that

(Sabdanusasana).

24,

asuye, i.e. detraction, e.g. ^sjorort

^0^^

tt^JBoSortofioo,

the

Kaurava takes away from the reputation of Dharma; c^^oo^ zredrso

z3jl^^^* t?6J3?^)roc3o. Ravana ascribes vice to Rama (Sabdanusasana).
25,

droha,

i.

mischief,

e.

e.

adSoAe^o

g.

c3j3,^3o,

man

this

ZorSoioortSj^O ^i>?S?dc, the servant does

traitor to the king;

ill

(is)

to (his)

master (Sabdanusasana).
26,

svaha, svadha, vashatkara,

and prayer,

hail

*3f\f{

e.g.

benison to the manes!

rj^gss^Co,
oo

ori s33S^jT.do,

O)

27,

tadarthya,

e. e.

the three

i. e.

ritual invocations of

hail to Agni!

&3,rttf

si
y ^ ^^^^'SDo,
vashat to Indra! (Sabdanusasana).

"3-

sake, purpose, material cause, e.g.

Z2^NO, for final liberation

knowledge

of the truth

(is

^^
sSjS^^,
^*A ^
^3
^ors

necessary);

CS

'SP

^
rf-

(is

for
2^r^s,
e^-

an earring gold

required);

(is

tts:3y^)i^J5,^,
'U'

taken)
for

;i?7^ siodc, for a chariot

pounding

pestle

(is

wood

required)

(Sabdanusasana).
28,

utpata,

^. e.

portents,

e.

g.

zot3^

(lit.

"0^

white flashes of lightning (portend) famine;

frogs'

tufts

regarding famine) ^s^cjj,

*a

Afi^^si*

(portend) the ruin of the world;

flashes, of lightning (portend) excessive

^?5,oij
OJ

2or? e,

^::os3 =3*^0^0,

heat of the sun

v3

red

(Sabdanusasana).
49*

388
29,
5.

e,c), e.#.

302,

(cf.

rtfl

352,

346, 7;

in the evening

month; &sb

3ort^?^, next

sptfosj

303, i,a;

2. 7;

^rsoioo^e)^,

to-day;

*aci rt,

two years;

for

time

e.

i.

[TOW,

4,

a.

at seven o'clock].

he who
^=^d^j,
deserves honour; ^dsoO^so^Srfd^o s&drs^ 333:^0, she who cannot bear
^
d
30,

e. e.

(o3J^rt c i,

deserving

state,

drag's-,

e.g.

patiently deserves death).

$d,

31,

(there

difference, e.#.

e.

>

a great difference betwixt this and that;

is)

32,

j.

(trades,

why

e.

cause, purpose, end, see

come? TW?O&

didst thou

"O"

3oJ3?cS^j, I

went to

352,

cf.

302,

352,

7;

a. 2).

4,
4,

a. 11; e. g.

came on business;

I
so?2^o,
G

see).

Remarks.

316

In

1,

it is

stated that

'to have',

2,

Regarding adverbs used with the dative see

3,

Some verbs are

is

expressed by

because

stdmach".

rfstf

coScOo^o, he

my

master

**.>,

get light and

*>&

heat;

**^

is

found

poor,

rfrfrt

(it),
x
'

oJodo,

Ci

do not get

know

not.

tame cow
to

my

fill

3sr

aoo^o
C3

went mad.

In sentences in which the ablative case (apadana,

349.

the

food

sufficient
I

dative.

rJj8oi>r

lu

CO

"

said

282 under

often used with the dative, e.g.

from the sun we

is

'to possess'

preceded by the dative case.

etc.

352,

cf.

used, the following specific meanings are considered

to

2,

d.

4,

a)

be expressed

byit:apadana,

1,

from, e.g.

i.e.

(simple) separation from, coming from, going

sSodc^rSo

3Jrco

fruits

fell

away

from the tree; F\o

adjr^}, ripe
down from the mountain: ^Si 3 c3o^
co
_o

OJo^
-" stones rolled
-* cSo ^e;oCo^od;,
en

eo^o, he

'

came from the tank;

ioCsud ^orfododo^ fSo u)i^ o ' he fell

horse which was running; sjQd torSodo^ rs^o dj^o, he rolled from
ca
o
ca

(his)

'

the cart which was moving rapidly; eniSj^cra-aJo^^rJo

hid himself from the teacher;
rlodort^J^o ^e>ola.W,o,
the

from

Cl

way

of the

guru; S&Jftw^do ^Jo^j DJO^^O, a

^J" s oi:Dao,

he

he went out of

flash of lightning

flashed from the cloud.

bhaya,

2,
,

i.e.

fear

(cf.

;-J48.

e;

352,

4,

a. 6),

e..//.

9
wUSj^fSo c)^;

an inroad arose from the king: ^jSKSo^rS^csSdo, he was afraid

389
of the tiger;
sgCcii^rfo

i. e.

svikara,

3,

^sreraSsij*

acquired knowledge from

i. e.

ishta,

wdodo, from

(his)

agreeableness, pleasure

he saved from sin;

anishta,

i. e.

king the achievement

C>t3o02oc3*

he

'Stfjrtffljsrso,

(his) teacher.

nbajo sra^rododo, from

5,

one's own, (acquiring for one's self),

was got; cn)33BraC&>f&eSo

(of his object)

4,

making

adoption,

TO 3<>C(ba^e3o

j^o

fear (proceeding) from a tiger;

srssid^c^o

anxiety (coming) from sin.

32tfG3o,

e.g.

$?,

352,

(cf.

4,

a. 7), e.g.

tisS^aij

Rambhe

zo3d^

pleasure was obtained; srosjd^rlo

rto ?oe;3odo. he saved from famine.

disagreeableness

352,

(cf.

4, a.

e.

8),

g.

imprisonment came from the enemy; srasSd

he suffered bewilderment from

sin.

hetu, i.e. cause, means, e.g.

6,

came from

office.

i.e.

udaya,

7,

348,

Cf.

wealth
vodJSoertd^Ecio roO zo?i>do,

352,

10;

a.

4,

9.

springing from, originating

352, 4,a.

(cf.

he sprang from a good family;

e.

10),

g.

^skg, the Ganges rose from the Himavat mountain;

wdodo, the sprout arose from the seed; &o7tc$^c$o
the water proceeded from the top of the mountain.

gurutva,

8,

perme,

i.e.

Vasudeva

oJoo,

z&o

fci?)

343,

s;

348,

7;

3. 5, c. 6,

expressed by

2,

Sahadeva

more excellent than Arjuna;

younger than Nakula;

smarter than that man.
343,
(//".

(is)

(is)

2,

is

a)

down

it:

i.e.

in the basket-boat;

the house;

cf.

used, the following- specific meanings are considered to be

(simple) relation to

c3flo5oo, he slept on the bed;

33e>n) &*'*''

a;

a-c.

adhikarana, adhara,

1,

sat

350,

(is)

(is)

comparison), e.g.

older than Krishna;

In sentences in which the locative case (adhikarana, fulhara,

350.

352,

man

this

3Jfe3o,

dignity, age (in

Balabhadra

dodd

do>

dc3j3v*

SoOoJjsrttSjas'* vureo,

site,

sSSSjtfj^dJSs*
^oSSorK"*, the

place, e.g.

^o^dro,

he

cows (are) in

he ate from a plate of wood;

Cl

.cSJSs

born

^^tao,

(there
in

is)

(there

is)

splendour in the disk of the sun;

white colour in the flower;

a lotus (or sprung from a lotus);

3s)$36o3J2v*

e^dJSV*

he was
Sgl3do,
(J

he
[s3o?2o&S:3> N,

is

in the

390

sdo3j M

house;

eSrtrfri.U.do.
L tj
t

they cooked rice in the jungle;

^;3os3c3, (there) is strength in (his) body].

nirdharana,

2,

343,

4.

e.

i.

specifying one out

among

(comparison, see

many

352, 1,0).

5;

as to quality (guna), e.g.

a)

of

cS^dJSv'

princes (or the fittest one of princes

,

among

c3J3v*

?o

one

C3,orf

^oCSort

precious;

(is)

among

zS^fcloSJS'S.gj,.,

fit

the guiltless one;

is)

jewels the ruby

among cows the black cow

o,

has (most) milk;

SidJSer&o&sjs^o,

that which

(is)

cloth white cloth

(is)

good;
as to action or

6)

among

the runners this

being (kriye), e.g. rlO^s^Sd-Qv* -3^o ?s>^Sc3o,

co

man

(is)

a strong-footed one (or this

^?c3o3dv* -^o

most strong-footed one of the runners):

among

who

those

sSo 5e>s3^A,

fight this

man

(is)

man

**.

is

the

sSocxl.)

),

a strong-bodied one;

among them he who runs

(is)

a swift-footed one;

which drops (from the tree is)

C;^o eta o^Sj^', among
OJ
a mature fruit (or the most mature fruit of ripe fruits is that which
ripe fruits that

drops from the tree);

as

c)

men males

race

to

dravya,

i.

among

^,

among

these persons this one

those persons this one

pujyasadhunipuna,

4,

e. g.
dJSrfd&QS'* a^Cj^c* "JU^^JD*, among
males are the most eminent of men)

Co*, among males Kshatriyas (are) valiant men.

e. a fit
object (considered by itself), e. g.

3,

(jati),

(are) chiefs (or

i.

e.

(is)

the

ours;

(is)

the hero

(Sabdanusasana).
of

introduction

persons

who are

good to praiseworthy people or are skilful in praiseworthy things, e. g.

3s>o3J3s?
3to3j3s?'
(he is)
Se>qk, (he is) kind to (his) mother;

^3o,

to

good

(his)

^eSc&ffi^'

rtaoo^JS;^

mother;
(he

23e>K!o,

is)

proficient

(he is) expert in (drawing) pictures

5,

i.

vishaya,

C3o,

6,

mouth

[o.

e.

.,

i.

e.

adoration;

is)

e.

g.

sl/sri^JSv* cS^o, he was suspended by

CD

inherent property

(there

true to (his) guru;

is)

(Sabdanusasana).

^j;o, he chewed with

r.

vyupaka,

in

(he

a peculiar province or place,

he whispered in the ear:

(his)

^Sofcio,

(his)

or

mouth].

substance

fragrance in flowers;

(cf.

No.

i),

^Sr&JSv* 3^,

e.

g.

(there

391
is)

juice in the sugar-cane;

do$Jdo, (there
i.e.

vyavahara,

7,

engaging

himself in (the department

kala,

i.e.

time

oil in

is)

the oil-plant;

sweetness in milk.

is)

in,

conduct or action

in, e.g.

^sdU/s*

he distinguished

he engaged in austerities;

8,

(there

ojf$,

oitfj^v*

<o?oCjo,

3z3,v*

of) valour.

348,

(cf.

29;

352,

6,

a. e, c),

sj

e.g.

slddjav"
fcekd),
mangoes appeared in spring:
O
universal conquest (is) proper in autumn;
(&o?ij
,

he read through the grammar in one month;

one day the work

in

u pad ana,

9,

i.e.

^C3

Cjo^drSoJOcS"

will be done).

cause

material

347,

(cf.

4),

cJo,

made even

that which (they) have

[;3js?jC3 d3e>&u>d),

wood;

e.g.

made

he ascended the decorated seat that was

of

of curdled

milk].
10,

[karana,

of (our) feet;

i.

means,

e.

=5?d)

e.

r&&)|^A

The genitive case that

351.

53^

g.

is

we

NjloJool

see

w ith

?s$,

we walk by means

(our) eyes].

not classed with the six karakas (see

344), expresses the connection (sambandha) of nouns to nouns

5,

following kinds

the chief of the town;

i.e.

T, the
'

of the

connection of ownership, e.g. c

f5e)(iJ3zlo^oo,

the house of the king;

is

svamisambandha,

1,

35'J,

(cf.

282), which connection

adverbs with the genitive see

a; for

the chief of the district;

o^okd

books of the boys;

^ucjjd, the horse of the raja;

^osifoSSrf 36ra^, the wife of the

potter).
2,

kulasambandha,

i.

e.

,,

our son-in-law;
,

3,

connection

a Sudra's son;

jatisambandha,

^ra tS^o

^JS?S^3

g.

jo,

our face;

our younger brother:

^do^o,
(3J3d^
^rcsSrf^ S^Jrlvo, a merchant's daughter).

/. e.

connection of genus, class or kind, e.g. w?!

vJCSodoJo

a flock of parrots;

the white of the eve:

0'

tamarind;

ojsl).

e.

caste,

<o^j,

a troop of elephants;

C^>

family or

of

the property of us (i.e. our property);

5de; ^SJoo
O^
(

a multitude of horses;

ZjSiJo.,
SO

3oorsAooij

the fragrance of flowers:

3ur?J
FO

wsC^ 3 o3j ^>o3j, the

the ripe fruit of the

fruit of the plantain;

C^vVdd, the

leaf

392
of the betel plant;

9
$D05ool> s3oS3

a dog's puppy;

the cry of cocks).

avayavasambandha, i. e. connection of membership, e. g.

the branch of a tree; ^?SA}S*, the petal of a flower;
o.,

4,

lu

the stick of

^j,

lakshanasambandha,

5,

&

an umbrella.

dje>?jo a

ol>

plexity

(i.e.

man

connection of distinctive marks,

i. e.

with a cap;

a perplexed horseman,
a horse of Sindh;

ful person; cjsjrd SorsFSo, a

v*cS

o. r.

g.

Oe>s^o, a horseman of per-

^tfcj

or

CD

(^o^cS^o,

proud

e.

^s^

a person of power, a power-

soldier; cosri

yx>3dd>^, friendly advice).

W
6,
sannidhanasambandha, i. e. connection of proximity or vicinity,
3 o3o
e.g. ^
=&>?&, an outlet (in the proximity) of a tank; r\J3d ^oo^o,

the place in front of a town;

*$dS3 ^oo, the vicinity of that

(i.e.

its

vicinity).

samsparsasambandha,

7,

^$0%

i.e.

connection of close contact, e.g.

young foliage on a threshing floor;

^JSe^ &j>, an ornamental

Q

tie

>^d oo"5^?3,

^d

duck-weed on water;

on the arm.

sambandhasambandha, i. e. connection of connection (occurring

8,
when two genitives precede a noun), e.g. ^J3^j^ ^rs z3^o, the god of an
eye of the forehead

(i.e.

the god

who has an

eye on the forehead); Jj3tf

sword of the arm; ^oDcdo

2Js)^ S'Sc^, the lustre of the

^^j,0

3)dd, the

lotus of the navel of Hari.

seshasambandha,

9,

do

9
,

i.e.

connection of remainder or rest, e.g.

the substance that remains in a balla; e5rf^3 doS59

(which was
10,

left) to

ijtf

the young one

it.

vikarasambandha,

i.e.

connection of change of form, e.g.

^JS^e*, a staff of gold; (tJ^c3oortd,-a ring of gold).

11,

(sthalasambandha,

sojourning in the forest;

i.e.

connection of place, e.g.

^t^oij s-)^, dwelling

in

Kasi;

dinner at one's house).

Remark.
It

may be

stated here that several genitives, one after the other, in

connection with only one noun, are sometimes used in the following

(from which use will also appear that the conjunctions

suffixed to the genitive, see

284):

?roo, etc.

manner

are never

393
riorid

rtdotiat

%-/

rodd

ajoSfi
-

awd

9
Sodd arerf^d j&tfa

gttfjjFoarttfo

125

a
(Candraprabhapurana vn). They discharged the shining syringes of emeralds,
pearls, sapphires, diamonds (and) rubies which (artificers) had made (i. e. which

had been made, see

315,

2,

under

k) like parrots,

swans, cuckoos, partridges

(and) ruddy geese, against themselves, and besprinkled one another with water

of various fragrance.

crarfrfdrf

to

Rd add
The goddess

<3uAZif4fl

friendly words,

is

addicted to chase,

grateful,
is

rich

is

is

intent upon giving,

is

kind

67

of fortune continually remains in the house

in Jaimini v

||.

him who utters

of

to others' wives, is not

honour, associates with worthy persons, never utters

proper works, does not hide (his) doings, engages in abundant

agreeable things on earth (and) performs various virtuous acts.

false witness, does

Compare

also ^OJJo 5s>> cO^>o

the radius of the

(i.e.

ljs?Si
23
j

arm and

arm

a)

Ce>ON

show (me) the children of Rama (and) Krishna;

there is enmity between thee (and) him (Nudigattu).

and tfcs3rka$d ?3j?o^ stand

of the present

grammar

253,

i,

a. 6),

aiotf(&)o

considers this statement of Kesava

and

and ^J3 ^; see

188. (365).
The Sabdanusasana has the instance

?t 3ot3

earnest, the proof for the correctness of

stand before the nouns

thou

^o zorfodc*,
O
O
which must be left to Bhatta^-

zo^oJi* for

kalanka deva.
the genitive

stands for

and 3o^s><3

rfoeS 3

the

accusative,

e. y'.

oit)

^o?io ^J^OP-^J stand for

oiod^Jo
O
-5

^JS^cCj*,
ca

^^N

Q
v
aJo^O&io lsio 3SC^3 and iz.

for

to be erroneous, as the genitives flsj^

I)

^\3^

?oo,

(SS&tS,

The author

(and) of the leg

the skin-bone, Halayudha).

The seven cases sometimes change places (cf. also

the genitive stands for the nominative, e. y.

352.
1

the bone of the

,

thou killedst me, and io^c3D^o

50

394
does

it

ever come to (my) mind to forget the southern

country?

The author

of the present

accusatives with final y, as he has indicated in

wej35o stands for ?3-$T\T\$&&

23^;3>lF

u^dJSs

cS^do,

2,

d>3d^<

(resting on

^orsoVo

d?3d^

instead of

^SFo,

See

flowers in worship.

-sriro.

is

No.

343,

6, &),

^jra

e.g.

also 'to possess'),

also the instance:

346. 348,

Cf.

s^^

12.

?32Fo

w^FAjdo, he presented

j^sjjs*"

for the dative

eJ

eSjs^sJj^*

(cf.

instrumental, e.g.

zoSoSoc ^JSelc stands for rte?lo 20&

=^

sbe8

3A;

347.

stands

the accusative

second sentence

See

witty.

5""

do, he worshipped with flowers, stands for

ca

among donors;

eros
meaning
The Sabdanusasana has

the accusative stands for the

interest;

liberal

a.

o stands for

c)

a prince

the accusative stands for the nominative

a)

b)

one who possesses fineness.

?3^)Tfo

for

ri

(cf.

No.

5,

6),

e.

^JS^.o, he lent gold

g.

^fi&o

coins on

dJS^^^^o,
tr

from the Sabdanusasana;

the greatest of all

348,

cf.

(this

(d^dfl^o

7);

3>

for

sSjs^. aJ>

for

d)

2.

122, a,

2;

a supreme one among

woado,
co

cAo^dJSv zoster, a king among the

for

350,

cf,

2,

c3?s3o for

-Sirfd

persons;

and

117, a,

^7>d are

the genitive stands for the locative (in comparison), e.g. 23>Ar(^

c)

=gO

o?l and

thinks that

grammar

the accusative

TJO

thus also

stands for

^^

sjddo^^

the ablative,

e.g.

he demanded business of the lad, for ^jsrs^te?^

- r3o
See

iJSr?.o.

3,

349.

the locative stands for the instrumental,

stands for ^js^OoSoo

.(aoJoo:'

^^do,

^^oSjSs'*

CJ

for =j^jriJSe)o
4, a)

=^^c
Q

=jSO&c.
a

for

<Do5jo

343 ablative and instrumental

^JSdOoSJSV'

^^do

ricSoiiSv* ^jsoJoc for

=^^o;
Q

'

tfjdaA*e3J8V'

See 8 350.

the instrumental stands for the ablative

for 'since';

e.g.

he cut with the axe;

in

(cf.

comparison;

282 adverbs with the instrumental).

17, a, 5; see

302,

349;

instrumental

395
in

i.

simple apadana,

e.

^5

g.

stands for

2o?3o

^OSdDo

he came from the tank;

o'

3 ooo

for
3oo3ja
- ^Jt-di

from the head of the elephant pearls dropped;

sjjdc33 c?23 CiSJoao. a leaf fell from the tree.

^Je^vV^),
for

Qj

aw

erosi DrtoSorf

c3?i);

&>siraexxka?i

rtcrt

Oj

||
v

women

who were gathering

of the Sabaras

mad

loosened from the heads of the

by the beloved

the fine pearls which were

elephants, from the bamboos, from

the heads of the cobras (and) from the tusks of the formidable hogs, and
dropped on the massy rocks.
.

2.

[in

bheda,

from

this (is) different

3.

rtaj,

dikku,

(in

Belgaum

that village

the jungle
5-

direction, quarter,

distance,

i.e.

time,

(in

tiger;

302,

bhaya,

i.e.

349,

cf.

7.

c3<do,

cf.

youth;

6.

he saved

8.

Dharwar;

e.g.

office;

behaviour;

cf.

348,

cf.

22).

c5^r^S3DOSj^j,

(is)

it

is

poor from

29].

SojQcOj^ ^o^rf^o,

he was afraid of the

pleasure, e.g. f^^J, srariarf

349, 4).

sin;

cf.

disagreeableness,

349,

siOO&o^

c^^o

20?^^3f)03J^j,

s).

cause, means, e.g. eroc3%?rt>?3 AiO

JJf^Oj.,

wealth

adUoajfl O?So3j zjdo^d, from learning comes good

349,

udaya,

cf.

e.g.

e).

i.e.

springing

from,

originating

WotfoCsrarto^ d, the sprout arises from seed;

j.

21).

^=a ^ ^^ wd?i) d3d.?i), he

>-^
Q Q

348,

i;

i.e.

(in hetu, i.e.

[in

348,

i.e. agreeableness,

came from

10.

cf.

t?

*-^

imprisonment came from the enemy;

9.

g.

2J3oJ3e>Da^wi ^do

e.g.

fear, e.g.

me from

anifehta,

(in

e.

2).

ishta,

(in

e.g.

miles from this place;

long since you visited (me)

(his)

31),

a loud cry distant from the town;

kala,

[in

348,

(cf.

to the north of
(is)

is five

is

that].

i. e.

(in dura, i.e.

4.

difference

i. e.

Kama was

horn

ot'

349,

(cf.

7),

Lakshmi].
50*

e.g.

396
ii.

sld

?3

jdj,

302,

7;
is

cause,

348,

32;

cf.

also:

already) a full-grown

>^&>, on account of (his) right conduct (he

y^eida^

person;

reason, see

on account of (his) wisdom (he

SDdra,

[in

is)

good person].
[the instrumental

6)

3?oOr{

is)

(he

is)

an ascetic (only)

$0, (he is)

&

(only) for (his) sacrificial thread;

for (his)

matted hair;

sjjs^

a gentle person (only) in (his) words].

the chief of the district;

the lord of the umbrella;

^JSzlrtJSciOwOo for =j3cSo3J3zio3oo,

ojdrrrer^o for oidro&Drao, a heart's ruler;

the lord of the world;

for &rfd>JSz!o3oo,

the dative stands for the accusative

(cf.

No.

see

dJS^^,

e?=$ri

he informed her;

(desJOrt
rf$ ?*>3B P?S for
v

C9rb3

for

^?S

TT

3^oofl

e.g.

2, c),

stands for ^^,,^0 ^.AiCo, he ordered the pupil;

for

^S

vl^^Cjo for

sj-scSsj

tnus also

291).

the dative stands for the locative

c)

*30rWj for

Observe also:

the dative stands for the genitive, e.g. (Sd&dS&tlQ&o stands for
'3'

a)

Sajzijazicrioo,

6)

3;30^o

20.

348,

cf.

JSjaapfl), (be

5,

Brahmana

3e>3J*)rfo,
"

stands for the dative, e.g.

S33?ONO, a king (only) in name;

stands for 3s>6o3JS<$>*

for 2S^J cSJ5^ ^?^o,
U
N

^6J3^

for

e3s?o
<O

for
cO^j^s^'
for ^?

^^,

y\^d

aj

^^^0,
&J

(there
t3^j

(there

is) oil in

w as wo,XT

i.

e),

e. ^r

in the disk of the

splendour

is)

(there
V

OJ

350,

(cf.

he sprang from a lotus;

is)

sun;

white colour in the flower;

the oil-plant;

(-d!

sJoJSiurDrl

^33rt^orao.;
eo

yxoOF^ ^rawo,
for
eooaoaoo
co

9
6,

the nominative stands for the locative

a)

rjo 2Jr-o for tcrfo

6)

adrocSJSv*

o
the nominative

2~r3 o

stands

for

'

he came
the

in

(cf.

No.

6,

c),

e.

one day.

accusative

No, 2, c), e. g.
20^0 d^F5JOc3* "S^Fo, he stayed one
Q
sjjsado for ^kj^oo dorado he made a water-vessel (the
(cf.

stands for

year; ^^J
first

instance

is

Sabdanusasana).

from the Sabdamanidarpana, the second one from the

397
There may be adduced the following ancieut additional instances (see
sJJS^" 9 oioo, if (they) speak, all of them
i20, a, 2):

ci>a4^%&o

do not know (proper) words [Sabdamanidarpana sub sutra 250 where

the Mudabidar MS. has
zh^^pdv doo slwtf t3 9 o3oc', if (they) grow

know what

passionate, they do not

son, thou didst

son,

'',

^j ^S^oios^ Uti

399).

to come].

is

what

is

sjjrf?3,

he came to milk the

t
cow; d3oc3 c&aerfo*

o,

(a

know

not

also

339,

c]

did not

know

dialect

for the accusative,

it is
e.

348,

350,

29;

8,

^rso,

eight days

362,

$vA

o,

who

person)

2,

who did not know

place,

did

See

(3aa3J3%).

to use the

crude base of a

eru&U s&sz&j

>:!>;

and No.

^30^3330

6,

a^

>3?3,

&

aj3e>doj

to

do^oioQoS^
to

a present

aji),,
^* ^rtji),
Ci
and remained even

to school

'

go
he lived here two (or for two)
zodod^o, early on the day of the feast he

dtfo3Si 'aci^o,

s3ooo23)c3^

sSj^^, to-day

on this day;

si^D

^make
come

SS^rts

will

7&R -aoJS^s^^^

oid^J

'3,

SoU3 adrf

come;

^ra^o

e.g. a-0?d

a),

doorttfo

(or for eight days) I could not

home; esd^j

years;

S3

ways

wSos^d, on Thursday the gentleman

of books;

will

^3

of beasts (Sind. p. 127).

common

very

g.

etc.;

he came last Saturday;

at

sutra

[the nominative is used to express time instead of the dative, etc.

(cf.

^c3^,

the three

(tfjotforfjsraO tfo^SrO),

modem

In the

noun

who did not know the

the direction,

who

s.

good (Sabdanusasana

woman (Sabdauusasana).

he came to see the

the side,

^f3o, to-day; 35ri>d-tfo, by day and night:

?lo^3>d

ad?o, on Monday;

*&> arfrf, one day,

on a certain day].
353.

The instances

are taken chiefly

in

345

seq.,

as far as they

from the ancient dialect (as

it

are not

appears

in parenthesis,

in the

Sabdamani-

darpana, Sabdanusasana, etc.), which regarding the meaning, use and

interchange of the cases does not materially differ from the mediaeval

and modern one.

of the seven

The instances

cases in the
of the

Kannada grammar
354.

That there

Some

modern

is

some

difference

concerning the

three dialects, has been shown in

dialect in parenthesis

of the Southern

form

109

seq.

belong- mostly to a small

Muhratta country,

called Nudigattu.

special rules regarding the use of the singular and plural of

nouns, etc. in or without sentences are to bo

givi'ii.

viz.

398
The singular stands or may stand for the plural in nouns. Cf.
133.
For the plural that conveys the meaning of a pair (yugala) the

I.

1,

is

singular

e.

used,

g. for ^ftcdoorlortv* there occurs

c3o3oorto,

a couple

of verse-lines.

Further, the singular

2,

linga,

noun

rV
or

when the base

e.

^3orV

gsirarco (for
refers

it

of a

used instead of the plural

noun

(in

an

avishta-

inflected state) refers to a

gsoJ^rsort^),

the (four) vedas (are) proof;

a number of nouns which are connected by the

to

"

conjunction

sJ.^oJJoSj
^-J

e.g.

ruo,

^)lr

o3ors3oco

in

plural which comprises more things than a pair, e.g. d^cjo

in the

when

is

^e>dCco (for.

ssasv^sjooo
"u

^dJesSoJJoo
rv

^>3 Q 0a

o3

the service
^e>cr3ort$*), genius, exercise,

and the acquaintance with poems

means

for

(That the interrogative pronoun s?^ which has no form of the plural,
meaning of the plural, appears in
262.)

may

of the learned

(are)

the

poetical composition.

get the

An

3,

nouns

optional use of the singular for the plural occurs regarding

of race, species or kind

e.

?, etc.,

(jati),

or ^sjs)^ v 8", foot-soldiers,

=aDe3-3^

^.

elephants; similarly also ^f^D

355,
a)
is,

so

noun,

I, 3. 4.

If

to
cf.

such as

or

^rs^D,

y?5

or

the pupil of the eye.

See

But

jati

say, its

noun

in the

karaka

355, IV,

5),

singular

preceded by an adjective which

is

determinating the case and number of the

always has the meaning of the singular, e. g.

(i. e.

it

such an elephant;
^N^^ra?2,
^j^eJo ^oCo6, such ahorse;
a straight finger; ggf&g^CM sfLrs?^ 2 a beautiful face).

(3e>%

23do,

6)

If jati

nouns stand

tive in the plural,

in the singular

and are preceded by an adjec-

they always convey the meaning of the plural, e.g.

22ds*, straight fingers;

ijs^ozijsj fci^o, big buttocks;

zSfelcSj
cj

stout breasts.

Observe the following sentences in which, either by a preceding

by a following demonstrative pronoun in the plural
the plural number of a jati noun is indicated:
c)

noun

in the plural or

e.

(i.

^^rl^^)

^se
fisiJOj

(i.e.
v

399
.

e.

An

4,

when
or

optional use of the singular for the plural further takes place

objects are to be counted (sankhyeya, sarikhyavastu),

2^ d^rts*,

the ten points of the compass;

;lx?o

eSj-s^orK"*, the (mentioned) three worlds; dcj3C5o

the (mentioned) three genders;

rts?*,

^^o,u

the (mentioned) four ages of the world;

*

lori^ or

or conditions; (^-sixx,
""

An

oioorto

one fours

ten); sis^
~ ^J3&f)j or

278,

ort

or ^ra^

the ten states

cp

3orttfj7Wj, four months;

^35^0,

ifc

is ^our

months).

(i.e. four);

3J^

-^doioo

^J5S5or1v^',

or

e.

g.

>W> or

i*&
>

3?tfo3oort<g>'

O
ten hundreds

two

fives

CJ

(/.

e.

one thousand).

optional use of the singular for the plural further takes place

with regard to nouns of quality (bhava), such as ^JS^r,

c*

oJe>C3o

i.

An

6,

c3;3

optional use of the singular for the plural further takes place

e/.

or

orto or ;3oJd3o

when numerals are counted (sankhyana, sankhyeya),

(i. e.

d>^o

or -e^doioo^ris *,

09

or fjsi^o, 3ort^ort^j tJC5^,

5,

3^

g.

^6f03j dJSf^o or

?dcdod^

the fourteen worlds;

e.

^^r,

e.g. ^re

^jg^c" or ?cs^ ^JS^rrtv*, the penetrating looks of the eyes;,

or
II.

1,

z^jrs'*;
oJ

The plural
in

of

^odj^s ^djr or
A

nouns stands for the singular

spontaneous respect

(i.e. in

respect that proceeds alone from

natural feeling, ayatnakritagurutva, prayatnam alladirpa gurutva), e.g.

<0^j, d^sjlriv*, our deity;
j^o, 33r\&, our father; oirfj 3>cxb<ff*, our
6e
ft
A
o
he made obeisance
our master;
mother:

^sJ^o^orteS

to the king).

Cf.

(j3fd^f

^t^dj^o,

257. 258. 261. 268.

The modern dialect when

referring- to

'God' uses ri53&> (see

355,

I, i).

(considering) the excellence of gums, munisvaras etc. (and

or
writing of them), e.g. rijujrts?*, guru; ^sOjrfv*, master (lord
speaking
2,

in

or guru);

400
illustrious svami Samantabhadra, of the world-famed poet svami
Parameshthi (and) of svami Pujyapada give perpetual protection.
Instead of the singular & tjosj^o, the three worlds, its plural 3. $o
3,
^-/
\^)

the

'

Corf's?

has been used in Kannada.

two or more nouns

If

4,

'and'

in the singular

284) are formed into a dvandva

connected by

compound

(srus),

250), the plural

generally used, e.g. SJO^NJO ftdos^o become dodA^orl^,

trees

is

and shrubs,

father and mother,

33 OJooo SDOJJOO become &$ 3-3 ojj tf,

o
o
A
become ossl^T?

eruo

Rama and Lakshmana,

,rso*

i-Oifi/

d&3jo sJtKpoOJo

)ortrfooo

become
and antelopes;

trees, shrubs, creepers, grass, bushes, birds

^oJooo become zo^oro^^ri^,

who subdued Baka,

wsjo

e.^r.

Wl^o^^rl^

and Kesi?

Kariisa

Likewise in the modern dialect there frequently are sentences like the
3o!^ 9 oiJ03e> 6, only stupid persons
Odn&wart^rf^ 3dca do rfjfe^,
vJ
9
6rf
knowledge (and) wisdom;
e)lD-soJo^^ DSrfotf^
y co

following:

<-

>

revile

two sons,
rfo^yo, Kasiraja (had)
old (and)

young persons;

S3e)A 'aiio.

^J3^ ^^,do,

^jjj^

it is

Rama

(and) Krishna;

Ce>rtrfS

proper to keep (our) paper, pens, books (and)

clothes so that they remain very clean; 3B03osF3r!jdjoJotdC5JS?dOo

^w^rfrf^ ^JS^df ^33^

23?^J,

mother, father, teacher

^JSersrt^o sorl
Ca

3oWc3

(we) must do at once the work which

(and)

master order

(us to do);

(our)"

^o^odoSo^

oxen (and) buffaloes draw carriages;

oiC^cdoj^
-* si horses,

^^j.oi^D^^ori^o 3o>oo 60^:0^^, female buffaloes (and) cows give milk.

Exceptionally also the singular is used instead, of the plural, as
appears from
250; thus there occurs in the modern dialect e.g. aoo^orfdo

^djt 330&o33rtjrt3
told (them)
l)

It

III, U;

may

by

3o?63

ks>3o

^tf

z3?^o, hoys

must

their mothers, fathers (and) teachers

be stated here that occasionally

355, IV, 5;

357,

2,

cf,

eruo (srva)

is

listen to the

words

'.

omitted, see end of

284;

355,

and compare also the following verse:

cSo ri s: rf 54 c5 JB ?
cS ^3 o5 j
e^

X$ t s3fl^5?vijr3337iO3 ? will a night without the moon, a

a flower without sweet nectar, a meal without curds (and) a
II

loojpOej^zS

play

without one's

congregation

own

without

wife,

intelligent

persons

be pleasant.

Sarasvatimanihara?

The modern

401
Remarks.

modern

If in the

a)

more nouns occur one

dialect two or

after the

the singular or promiscuously in both numbers,

other without

erua

their plural

indicated by a demonstrative pronoun in the plural added

to

is

them with

in

the proper inflection, e.g.

yds? 3os^>o

dressed cotton (and) milk (are) of a white colour;

male buffaloes (and) female

is&k 'as^rtStf C$N w^s^d, oxen, cows,
buffaloes are called cattle.
^dd?!) Wdf^ rfodorttfo
tfdo
v

sssrsddJ
'addodfii
co
C3

the Pandavas overcame

fcscfcoAoddo,

<*.

the Kaurava, his gurus, (his) younger brothers, (his) friends (and) them
who desired the welfare of those friends.
Similarly the mediseval dialect

has

sssd dedzpfo^ds
m

e.g.

under
&)

&

3oJ3e3oo

^gp&ad&^o

tfzSo3J3tfo

(see

287

2).

If (especially in the ancient

nouns are enumerated without

'having become the

first',

and mediseval

eroo or STL

'and so forth',

as

dialect)

two or more

mere terms, and

is

'etc.',

dJSCisTsrf,

placed at the end, a

demonstrative pronoun in the plural (always neuter also when masculine

or feminine terms are concerned) follows the nouns and another one in
the plural

suffixed

is

&3

omitted), e.g.

Sarikara,

to

sio^tf

sSjscJerecS

usdo

Rama, Bhima,

%^

king,

etc.;

(the first
S5d?3

^4

iu!^3^

pronoun being sometimes

Si y a,
(siwrttfo) dJ3cSoe>5ii^),
9

^j!^)

e^C^

^^

*as3)

s5J3d

khalilene, chalilene, ghalilene, etc. (are)

<2jsrfod) si)aBe33S.We>?i>^d?9ort^*)
s^-/
imitative sounds with hard breathing;

;3j3Cte3Ckd?s*

^\
77

goduve, hesaru,

dialect has

e.

g.

erodor ^de3 ^orlO ^JS?c5osS ^?JS5o

vti. rfjgWa*, food prepared of urdu, kadale, togari,

W

etc.;

$eAcxij$?3 Ss?odoas3f3? Sios^, he

who

does not

know

justice (and) injustice

M **)> n^^Rrf,oij ^ ftrtcC (4* rf$SSo 'fftioijjira ?J, God protects tbee
JQ
(thy) waking, dreaming (and) soundly sleeping.
The following additional verses may be quoted from the Sabdamanidarpana:
(is)

a beast.

iKS estf

in

ScJJo3o

in

272, 2 (fc?J3J tSusJj* etc.) and the verse in

364 (CT3JS3

So^

See also the half terse

etc.).

51

402
milk of cows, curds,

d>

etc.

are called, gavya.

=^>?GCl>do, leaves, fruits, etc.

mixed with curdled milk.

<r>

In the modern dialect

in

more generally used instead

the following manner:

doo^^d

such a case, in

c;

d Sj do

If

a noun follows

of

is

sfUicSsjarf or doo^j) ci, the

way

as follows

is

S3)

Occasionally the pronoun suffixed to

dJSrfej'sd

doo^^d) may

(or

y^rtdJS^i S3s5^ doo^dd).

Sometimes only a single noun precedes doociSpCS, e. g.

stand in the singular,

2^S^OF

J30=^0 sjjso^

e.

sJoo^d

ilesh (and) other things.

III.
1

g.

aSsSdd o^^,^

one

zsDvloJo

^JSra 6.

'

enio,

an(i

'*

an(i

they are referred to and are to be

demonstrative pronoun, the second one has to stand

both are demonstrative pronouns,

if

in the plural, preponderating as to

oo

doj^ds^rt^^ tfzfc

The plural of pronouns stands for the singular.

Where two words are connected by the conjunction

expressed by

?o^J

a kind of leopard eats decayed

vs^o^cS,

form and gender, e.g.

become

2,

When two words

are connected by the conjunction

is

a noun and the other a demonstrative pronoun,

to

and are

to be expressed

and one

they are referred

by one word, the plural of the pronoun has

to occur, preponderating as to gender,

3,

if

eroo,

e.

g.

^ododoSooo t?^^oo become

When two words

personal

are connected by the conjunction en>o, and are

or reflexive pronouns, if they are referred to and are to be

expressed by one word, the second pronoun has to be in the plural,

become ^5&*, ^etfosis* wj^oo tJsis*.

Where two words are connected by the conjunction

33^00

e.

g.

$>?<&o

eroo,

and the

first

a noun and the second one a personal or reflexive pronoun, if

are
referred to and are to be expressed by one word, the pronoun
they

one

is

403
has to be in the plural, e.g. sSRcS^cksk* ts^oo become

355.

Peculiarities regarding the use of the singular and plural of verhs

are the following:

in a sentence

On the use

I.

the singular or plural of verbs

of

in

connection with

nouns.
If c5?o3il), 'God', the honorific

1,

d^S

plural of

II, i), is

354,

(see

258 where instances of prayer

used by people of the present day (cf.
are given), they put the verb in the singular, e. g. d?s50c3-> 3, (there) is
God; d?rf& ske^OktfceWESA sira^os^, God causes

God created

the world; z3?ddo

God has made

c^

^f(

how

look,

tf

erases

wise,

(is)

great;

tjJ

the terrestrial globe on which

become even through Him;

to rain;

c3^do dorfsj^o, God

God may make thee happy;

UJ

even

it

we

are; all things have

how powerful, how good God

Regarding the use of the singular of a demonstrative pronoun

(is)!

referring to

d^do,

observe also the following instance:

v

341 under 'to fear').

(see

Exceptionally, however, a person says

If

derfdo

is

used instead of cSd

as

is

occasionally done in vulgar

oJ

speech, the verb

an
tjdo^cS,
2,

is

also put in the singular,

evil spirit enters his

If a person is

e.

g. esrf^

;3oc&P0 d^sjdo

body.

addressed in the vocative singular, the verb

may

r.
stand in the plural, e. g. zSea^ods&o
(o.
an)^oddoo)
O king, did you (or do you) not ask the kingly Asura? $5S 9 o&>o*

wsioo^
not

know

2r^J5Pai3s353oo.c5rS

that

W
you and we ran

era
03

r.
(o.
v

ssra),
=

elder brother, do

you

together?
the
in disgustful conduct, i. e. in order to
case
especially
ridicule a person for such conduct, when the personal pronouns relating

Such

to

him

is

also stand in the plural,

e.

g.

||

51*

king,

404
you have become poor; you walk on foor; nobody is with you; why (are)
small thorny twigs in your pouch? what (is) the place of the temple
where you repose? Could have befallen even you who do not give (alms),
this indigency?

seems as

[It

when

thing,

the small

if

says that

it

called Nudigattu, wants to express a similar

grammar

an act of the subject

if

is

verb

(holla), the

improper

may stand in the third person plural instead of the second person.
8<3> wtiriosri ;3o?e3 ^ra
are the following
3d>rto33, after

Its instances

you have become

king, should they

(i. e.

Oking, should they

do they

(i. e.

If

3,

whenever

is

it

is in

make

ascended;

by

tJ

zo^o

c5;3)

s^),

thus?]

it

i. e.

^&>o3), the

foot-soldiers attacked;

&zSd;$;

=5^

^wo

dd^u

s$);

when preceded
went:

deer

3so5ode3

these antelopes came.

uncommon

in the

eri^ &?&<36 We>ok>

mouth
,

(i. e.

when
,

modern

idj

if

is

sssS,

the water

sees

(one)

waters);

A^

in the respective sentences,

vu^o,^

(I) see them, eye-water

the water runs;

^1

estk

e?s5,

esf^,

^J^o3jsc5^),
buttermilk is very sour;
fever comes;
fever

those clouds;

ceased;

5i)s3 ri

tdd
^jl
**
3

mediaeval dialect).

will

=5^

(i.

P3

?tfj

shed tears);

e.

o^rrao3j3^ft3 ^^Oo W3oJ

very sweet;

^3)C^o, here

$5t^

^^^),

w^ds^,
o

is rice,

dozjtf

^oU ojje>cJs^,
w
cook

3oo

buttermilk was

yesterday fever

^4^^J3d sra^
milk come forth?

rice

'

(it);

sdoS?

spilt;

&d

had come;

todo

&

,3

sX^^rfrt^ ^o^2 c^03o^55;

fc^dorttfo

tees with (his) nails,

boiling;

'a.ddf&xt ?l>^053e>rt

comes

corn became very dear;

eo3otf

is

water comes

that,

ty

became dear;

some

dialect to use the singular of

ajtfj^sS,

mouth

one's

the water in a young cocoanut

^^4,

^ e Corses

<j20o

also

those

nouns which seem to allow no plural meaning

^d,

354,

(see

fi>eAi^,s3; wtfo wrf

ao3od?3 ^js?rio^,

with the verb in the plural, e.g. ^^do

to the

noun

jati

S^doJ^j,
ti& JjSOcl>4, tne fingers (are) big; ^oS ZoJSdj^S'*, the

264), e.g.

It is not
jati

conveys the meaning of the plural,

>oo?^ 3dfi fSjs^adtf ^E$? ^o^v^sS;

ro
o*

&

or

3o?rt

the elephants pushed; tfjcSodo&eSS'djs^,

words (are) imprecating;

9

B3o

connected with a verb in the plural, e.g. wfS ^JSo&rios^)

'crserav*

the oxen went;

SCc

3d?33,

shouldst) thou become bewildered?

the singular,

(=t??Sr1^ cifco&cSos^),

dooS5

libitum }

a noun of race, species or kind,

as subject

I, 3)

(i.e.

doest) thou

roam about ad

you)

erurto^d?,

rain falls from

if

(he) cut devo-

(this sentence is

from the

405

On

find

e.

became

the water

^o* B$dodo,

g.

3^rfo^j ^rtrs?*, the waters (in tanks, etc.) became clear;

clear;

z3s?;3

water of rain;

9533, ^oSoko^d'S-,

runs;

;3X

drink;

sJoC^5

$J5>o, land (the crop of) which grows by means of the

?do ^rfrfo, he brought water so that (his) eyes
tfra^sjo
eyes became full of tears);

(i.e. his

tilled

we

the other hand

>edo

mother, give (me) water to

&zi),

?&>

?0rl

?do fteJo, si>oz3<$

the water

aoOodoo^zS,

3o&< 2&c5

353 rt,

he

left

the

water of rain and held the joined palms of the hand to the water of dew
buttermilk was
(i.e. so as to catch the water of dew);
doz3^ sSO^o,
<**
tj

^rt<$

d^SofcitfrfcS*

spilt;

o3

remove the fever of (my) body!

a young crop without rain

s&CJ^oSj^

o3oo.

cS

v>

co

(is like)

guru, at once

excellent

^a?^, ?ockdo;3e,
**

a motherless child;

Sos)^o

if

eodo^d,

makes

(one)

incisions

with a knife into that tree, white milk will come forth.
If

4,

however a

jati

noun as subject stands

in the singular

and

is

connected with a verb in the singular,

the singular, e.g.
?3j3?tf,

^dciocSo

hummed;

tw

=^0s3 z3$d>c3o, the (crop of) kalave grew;

the wheat was destroyed;

JjaeO^, the
5,

36o?3,

a (or the) peacock cried;

it always conveys the meaning of

a (or the) swan walked;
^AdocSo
ssaSdorfo ^J)O N a (or the) black bee

finger

(is)

big;

qra^o
j&S ^J3do^,

Also where the noun

noun as subject

that such a

rU>?a

sS^r^o, the corn increased;

no

is

jati

the

noun,

word
it

imprecating.

(is)

occasionally happens

used in the singular in the sense of the

plural, in which case the verb is to be in the plural, e. g. 53o?$o 3o$

^siF
6,

wcSos^),

An

the minds became fickle.

optional use of the plural of the verb

some neuter nouns

srua

fereo),
\
/

c&Jr$

ed,

is

in

'and', e.g.

^JS^^a

may

the singular are combined by

cSJSdoioo^cS

or

o3JS?rtoioioJ3

cSjsdodoo^sS, by learning

if

conjunction

O*0

a&o&otf srDfSdp ^r$Sr$

v
O oT
f

take place,

the

wisdom

o3jser^i
v
is

obtain-

by wisdom propriety, by propriety honour.

II.

On the use

of the plural of verbs in connection

with pronouns.

If some pronouns as subjects of a sentence are joined together

1,
the
conjunction 5A)o (5AJ3), and the last one is &tf (Wo, $e>c3*, c3"3fk),
by
'I' has the pre-emiI, the first person plural of the verb is used or the

nence (mukhyatva),

e.g. t^rijo ^tfjsfo* w?l>o

406
,

he and thou and

as regards) the king.

w^j&sjtf Wrlio

riisis*

^JS

e5^^J5

pronouns are

If the

were not connected with the slanderers of

<ra<&3 3oJ3?j3^.

in reversed order, the

same takes

place,

e.

)8^s$, thou and he and

rfoeStfJSfeJcSrttf^,
TT

go to the town of Manikuta;

(lit.

w^osis*"

?l>o

>^Jo

^fciri

i&tf

g.

I shall

esi3

d>

tu

he and I and thou knew and told the manner of the affair;

si^ w^cfoo zSro^oSo,^, I and thou and he shall worship.

tij

If

2,

two pronouns as subjects are joined by the conjunction

and the second one

(erus),

plural of the verb

is

$?r&o ^Jsaac*'

oJ

joined;

when

w &$oo
to

gsftazlajrasorfsr,

(it)

eroo

the second person

(^?o, >^u), thou,
used or 'thou' has the pre-eminence, e.g. w^^oo
is

happened,

(it

was) as

rratfoJooo ^jsacSfi,
if fire

he and thou

and wind joined

for battle.

two pronouns are in reversed order, the same takes place, e.g.
^dJS)^ 5ffosi3* e?3f&o ^JS&d&o*, to-morrow thou and he will

If the

on.

On the use

III.

of the plural of the verb, especially of its gender,

combined with nouns of

nouns of

when

different gender.

conies last,

is

by the conjuncthe chief one, and the

verb in the plural has to conform itself to

it

as to gender,

If

1,

tion eroo

(erus),

that

o&osis* Mtfroctfoas^

different gender are joined together

noun which

3tf?o^oo fcJr^D*,

the

vfitf^tt ^d^osis* tftfAioJoJo to^o*,

phants) and the king and the queen came;

),

2,

es

some neuter (here compound) nouns

(without the conjunction

eroo,

see

?3^?S

the elephant (or the ele-

the king and the queen and the complete

If

g.

army and the queen and the king

came;

the king and the queen came;

e.

II. 4,

354,

army came;

in the nominative singular

foot-note) precede the verb,

stand in the neuter form of the plural at the end of them,

all the nouns having to be supplied (adhyaharya, see
357, 2, &) for it, e.g.
this has to

o.

......

IJ

the beating of the blue lotus-

407
garland, the band of the gold-zone, the striking of the pleasant

foot

left

with the anklet's sound, the excessive threatening of the points of the

raoving-about creeper-like eyebrows (and) the tremulous red lower lip (of
the woman) gave pleasure to the king.
IV.

On

the use of the singular and plural of Samskrita adjectives and

their agreement with nouns.

a Samskrita adjective is preceded by a neuter noun in the

103 about Kannada gender), it may stand in the singular,
plural (see
If

1,

si>2o?3 5Jo3od2>oJoForf<s>

e.g.

-ade^o*

esqkj^o, the great riches of the

great Indra these all (are) impermanent.

If

2,

a Samkrita noun in the singular is followed by an adjective in

it gets a plural meaning, e.g. sosi OJJFSJJ*
riches
ts$3
'^ riorts*,
3

the plural,

impermanent.

(are)

a Samskrita adjective precedes a neuter noun in the plural, it

may stand in the plural, e.g. rte3r?3 fc^c$$ori$>5 rteortv*, when the
313, 4
cloud-resembling elephants roared. See an instance in
3,

If

etc.).

OJ

Regarding Samskrita adjectives and their use in general (and

273.
regarding so-called Kannada adjectives and their use) see
4,

274. 275.

Samskrita adjectives (viseshanapadas, appositional nouns, without the conjunction AJO, see
354, II, 4, foot-note) in the nominative
5,

If

precede their ruling noun (karakapada,

in construing (anvayisuvalli,

cf.

357,

s),

of
|i

s:

cf.

354,

a),

I, s,

they receive,

the case of that noun, e.g.

which the construction (anvaya)

x

.
,

wo* o}3rto*, to Nripatuiiga,

who

is

to the hero,

to the liberal one, to the

him who possesses

profound
the lord of them who carry weapons who

one, to the

one, to

*C3Fofl, of

political
will not

which the construction

wisdom,

pure

him

to

make obeisance?

is:

^ort^^^dorl
3

to
,

of the Kurus.

Karna,

to the quick

one

in friendship, to the

king

408
On the order

356.

From

I.

349.

it

350,

of

words

in sentences.

sentences

the

simple
appears that

the

345. 346. 347. 348.

quoted in
nominative (subject), the accusative

the ablative and the locative precede

(object), the instrumental, the dative,
In
or
that
the verb
the verb stands at the end.
350, 8 there is a

sentence in which the order

one in which the order

with

it,

the order

and

locative, subject, verb;

in

350,

351 shows that the genitive precedes the noun

connected.

it is

352,

a adduces two instances

4,

in

which

(instrumental or) ablative, subject, verb, and two in which

is:

order

is:

locative, the relative past participle connected

accusative, verb.

with which

the

is:

is:

(instrumental

or)

ablative,

verb,

and exceptionally

the

subject at the end.

Sentences in which the order

subject, object, verb, are e.g.

is:

The vocative begins a sentence, or stands at

e>

its end, e.g.

c>o3o,

n.

The

will serve to
in sentences

following- instances, quoted

show the order

of

from the prose

of the

modern

dialect,

words, when there are more component parts

than subject, object and verb;

it

must however not be expected

use more or less slight

to find uniformity, as every author is apt to

variations according to circumstances.

1,

Regarding the accusative:

a?i^

<=<.

2,

Regarding the instrumental:

-*Q

3,

o
Regarding the

dative:

C"3

*-

Cj)

t9-

^-Ai

409
4,

ablative (in the

Regarding the

form of the instrumental):

9
kJ

5,

e.

to-

Regarding the

locative:

aSfssi?ty

to

6,

C&

Xj

^yw

323o

arf

re

eo

Regarding

site (expressed

2zoN

by adverbs):

U
-6*

tJ

7,

w wCO9 ^ ^s3j3^A^
ro
o

Regarding time:

^zS.re ^JS^Aj iricdo

IJ

0-3-0
t3^J3,

2^o ^QOJJJS ^JS^ ^J3^4-

3oJ3^0
- &>,&
aj

Z&

8&

eJ

3e)-0-^0.
.

above sub No.

i;

s.
s.

8,

wrrefl

No.

5;

s.

oi^

No.

Q riJ3,

2;

-^

^5?

oi3e)S3s)rt^J3

s.

No.

s;

further on

(Cf.

203oja^?3arf
s.

No.

s;

^s?

s.

s.

No. u.)

Regarding reason and purpose:

t3?r(

azSjsiaw,

S5c3

t?

52

No.

4;

No.

9;

410
Regarding condition:

9,

2oto.^e

tT

10,

Regarding the verbs

1 1

Regarding past

dJSnSdo

3dti3 dft

zododrfo.

><i

&&* (3%, w

^55*,

participles (or

gerunds,

^.)
1

54

332

see
seq.)

^.^,or u3\.
-

rtrasJ3o3o

*3

sraoo

=<-

3 rf^J.

c5 s^o.

ts

o
e5dw^j ^ododoJo

wrf^o S5^
- ^j.

t ^rso,
ca'

escj^o.

^zSrt

^?2 cdo

^JS^arf^o.

(Regard ing the present

ca

participle see e.g. the ancient sentence in

339,5:

etc.)

cs ca

Regarding questions:

12,

43 o5)^?

rtorra,

-d?

?ox^,

e)

<>:>>

ri?

,~

>,

3?

~^.

questions see also

13,

erusDri

djsdri^o

-33*01,

ad?o

^3^0.

(how old art thou)? Regarding

265. 271. 283.

Regarding exclamations:
eJ

eo?3o

-S?

3ooc^>)r\ oisslo

2J3^?io ^ejrario^d!

aJ

ca

'

'9

<i'

'

411

As

III.

the works of the ancient dialect are principally in verse,

obvious that the order of words in them often varies considerably.

the grammarian, also wrote his

it

that, as the

is

Kesava,

and says

in verse,

Sabdamanidarpana

it

in

words in the verses of his grammar may be in irregular

order on account of the requirements of alliteration (prasa), poetical

measure (chaudas) and construction (anvaya), he has added an explaprose (vritti) to each verse, to which explanations we must
readers
refer our
regarding his order of words in prose.
nation in

Here follow some quotations made by Kesava from ancient poems

which we give in order to show something of the license taken by their
authors as to the order of words:
The subject

1,

when

j^rf>$crtv' ri&ort^,

the horses

elephants roared.

resembling

Bhima was

like

aaolis&o^

manner
gently.

^rf^&SsSjs.ej*

wsOrOCii;^

^^JStdd Je3?3*

y^Fc&rf^o

up

the sun and moon.

that town (there)

doo^do

?2?Sjt5

o^d^*

Pandu.
^sS

3?3, this

3o3oa?3
o

)P?^rtoo

woman knew
rftf

S^ddJS^ ^3JF^ a^^owa^sio ^S^ogss^o,

the light of the solar race, one of great valour.

is

?3zic$ocSo 3oo?3,

The accusative

is

army
^

the swan walked.

placed after the verb,

3p23
&T

e.

g. ^odori^odoo

though we know

to^p^ ri^oo
H

3^0

d?acio

for the half of (his)

wt) dO^sSo^OJoo, he shot arrows at the enemy's

<*5

(or river) that was" no river,

rioOJoo,

ruler,

<023 o
IT

cried 'ah'.

a dazzling red colour spread about

qidoJodoioo, Vishnu asked the king of the Kurus

6

the whole

^ooA^oro ^C^eS, darkness had quite swallowed

s^fS

J?t3o,

dado, the wind blew

Bhishma was astonished and

land.

>^

the sunshine increased, the forest-conflagration died away.

in

2,

cloud-

adro

menaced and checked.

obtained the three worlds,

of the sons of

in the east.

rte3r?3

that king was famous on the earth,

the

blacksmith who plied the bellows.

Brahma
f\,

adoioortv*,

neighed (and) when

the sylvan deities continually

&s?33

placed after the verb, e.g.

is

&0?fc3

(it),

ysjj*"

we cannot

aC3^|d^ whti&
tell

esS^S"?)^
(you) the condition of the

^drftj^doo, Arjuna quite alone overcame

52*

412
the force of the Kauravas.

rfooSforfoO^o siraracS^ $* S50s3e>So>o3oo,

till

Za

(he, or

when

he) suffered distress, he shot arrows at the enemy's army.

The dative

3,

zS^iotfoo*

dozS

is

placed after the accusative and also after the verb,

g.

the gods were pleased and gave a

S3d?joft3 o*

s3ds3?5*

e.

to

boon

to the king.
o,

AOoJooo ^Octfooo

**&

^J8?W

sJOsJoosjrf

j*

&3$

the mountains and the elephants do not stand the point of the

thunderbolt's bead and his sword.

Observe also the following verse

The genitive

4,

is

after

placed

241):

(cf.

the noun

it

w^ojo do^doJood^ w^

world,
r?Wo

be called Rudra, the

itself to

2^osJ^^Oe)Sjo?5e),
U

elephants, and

the

of

combined

in

that

is

g.

arm

of

to destroy the

Bhuvanaikarama ran upon the

upon the warriors, and upon the

As the words

357.

dialect are

fire

e.

do^cioJojo ^orfodoio ^o^s3ojooo sJOcJorfo

elephant

Regarding time observe

5,

connected with,

the sword of the

wsJS's

Tailapa caused

is

horses.

e.g.

metrical

the

compositions

of the

strictly to the rules of euphonic junction

ancient

213

seq.)

and therefore are separated with some difficulty by a common reader,

it has been thought necessary
by commentators when commenting on
verse, first to offer a padacche'da or resolving a verse into its elementary
parts, as has been

done

e.

g.

by the commentator on the Sabdamani3 of this

or arrangement of
(cf. No.
)

Thereupon an anvaya

darpana.
the words in their prose-order, without regard to euphonic junction, is
adduced by them, and then they give the tiku or explanation. The

grammarian Kesava, as
on his sutras

356, III, wrote an explanation in prose

told in

in verse himself.

In reading poetry the following

1

neya,

remarks of Kesava are

It is required to use adhyaropa,

i. e.

logical inference,

e.

i. e.

to

be noticed:

attributing or assigning, with

g. in the half-verse
9

^j ne>c3jcse>rt?oo

the
|

sky became reddish

413
and became equal

appearance to (the colour of a ripe

in

fruit

of)

the Eugenia jambolana, one has to assign as the cause the redness of
evening and not red dust, though also red dust might (under circum-

adhyaropa becomes wanting in

precision (asamartha), being referable to two or more things, there is
no (definite) neya (possible, as perhaps in the half-verse quoted above).
stances) be assigned

Adhyaropa
(

as the cause.

If

also needed regarding the six karakas

is

and the genitive

344) in verses like the following one:

wherein t^o, the nominative,

to be attributed to ^rforfS;

is

accusative, to ?3r3?kd $eJOe>c*";

^o,

w^tfo, the

the instrumental, to &ocSol>ort33o353

De>cf; tf^otf, the dative, to qkd'&^rfrta^osio*; e^^eSo, the ablative,

to JjsddJSrcl $orfo W^OFO; w3<3, the genitive, to
3drtc33oc3o; tj^&Ov*,

the locative, to &o3osi> s3oS 3 ^dj:

do envy (him)?

Who

(He

(are all) they that (through

friends to (our) king?

Who

come

will

him).

(is)

to the karaka, in this case the kartri or subject

liberal person
to

and

is

not, allam).

case ye3o
(wS5o*)

speaks?

i;

345),

g.

TSy*^

this

which case j3>i

man

too

(is

the kriye or verb, e.g.

which case ysjo

is

344,

o is to be supplied (adyaharya)

Why?

in

b)

will it (the kritibandham, ever) be accomplished,

have
promised the composition of the poem?
(you)

subject:

though

the grandeur (of

supplying, which refers

a)

e.

If (they)

Boppala!

It is required to use adhyahara,

which case

he

him became) intimate

2,

or also to a predicate of the subject,

as

This

Know

(in him).
i. e.

warriors

war (against him)?

to

attack (him), defeat will come (from him).

Indeed victory will appear

What

a great hero.

is)

(is)

to be supplied:

qjo^al
is

to be

is

to be supplied:

Karna

3$do3L^rfoo ^rfj^o^JS^dj?, in
(Is) Purushottama a mere man? (no,

o cfoacre^F^? 3oO

supplied: (Is)

355,

a daui).

Sjidorio^^FN?

III, 2;

in

which

Dhritarashtra able, when he

Hari able, when he hastens? (no, they are not

(See wqra5 55noi>F also in

(is)

358.)

able).

414
adverb

to the

c)

in the initial

we not hesitate?
we not bow to

to the conjunction

d)

which has disappeared

of en}&5 3 &>

we not fear?

shall

the injunction,

is to

shall

be sup-

we not be

king?

g. SJG&OO AjO 3>o3ooo 33 ^rso o rt3c&>

e.

rv>o,

which case

in

'

<!A>ei3 sl>o2;3o?

g.

final

shall

frightened?

e.

on account of euphonic junction,

of e3o2s3o

$5

Shall

plied:

of doubt,

which case the

in

sSo, c3?s5?.

is to

SAJO

be supplied for

3$Q

AoO.

-"A

and

King Simbasena causes himself

rf,a:

be

to

called

wealth and mother and father and eye and refuge.

(our)

(See

life

354,

and
II, 4,

foot-note.)

to vakyadipaka,

e)

sentence,

e.

g.

tort o,

It is

3,

that person

up

clearing

zo?3 o,

in

came, wrfO o

is

es^?foo

that each one (pratyeka)

esdf&o

the

e.

i.

w^rfosSsS*"

came and

the meaning) of a

(of

which case,
to

order to show

in

be supplied;

w^&>o

tort zs6

that person came.

needed to use proper construction of words (vakyanvaya,

and

the beginning of the present

9G&>, S553S?*,

3$)Cfo, that

e353S7*,

355, IV,
is

to

5)

cf.

regarding essjo, S953V*,

say regarding their use in so-

called relative sentences.

S5SJo,

are

5di (and their plurals)

es^s?*,

independent of another word,

e.

g.

she who possesses beauty

(is)

ysjo

s!ta?i),tf,;

<v

a woman, and not

fcj

and not

(is) fit,

(and their plurals) are anvayaparatantras,

dependent on another word,

(is)

(is)

woman

e,

267. 316,

Also 3e)^ (and

tantras, as
its

it is

gender, e.g.
,

she

(is)

es^u S^rSoc?

wsicS ^?sJoo,

who

(is) to be served;

do sSG^ckrfdi C^F^O&o, what

j
See

g.

i. e.

ws3<* sj^d,^ &<$

faithful to her husband, she (is) to be honoured;

very virtuous, even he

who

dJS&oJOri^o.C) e3e?ix that which has customary usage,

,./;

gj

i. e.

^ja^^sj^ ^oO^o, he who has gold

well born, in which case one cannot say

(is)

anvayasvatantras,

i.

(is)

beautiful,

it

(is)

worthy

to be seen.

330.

its

plural)

Kesava

classes

with

the anvayapara-

by a demonstrative pronoun which shows

23dodo, he (is) a clever man; 33^* esds*

to be followed
3e)c3

wdo

a clever woman; 33^5*

About 330 (33?S*,

33rfo, 3D)

escto

256. 259.

^Sdo, that

(is)

a large thing.

415
In

358.

grammarian Kesava's rules about adhyahara

it remains to be shown how it is to be

the

357,

or supplying have

been given;

used also elsewhere, that

to

is

where pronouns

say

(or their

nouns or 'one') are to be supplied (see e. g.

254, 2, a
d;
This can be best shown by citing some instances,
parenthesis the words to be supplied,

do.
Iw

whom

the goddess

z3?>,

2,

k. I).

putting

into

viz.

the terminations which

rtv*

respective

315,

have mentioned,

(I)

aJ3)c$

(people) call speech.

the threads which (people) have sewed, will be torn

j-

and the leaves become loose

(people) having said

&&^pdv doo

(proper) words (see

,

rfo0

S.kJo ?ookJo

Iw

&J

means a donkey, see 332).

of them do not know
speak,

(i. e.

(they)

kalte

all

id$OJo SooWJ sjoo^oejej^datf

314).

made

pit

with both the

if

in the

have made

which (people)

3o ^J3&

radcd

sstfcSd

w
thumb and

'

forefinger,

<o?l)rto,

it is

for
if

catching

called a pradesa.

s^ak

the temple where

the place of

(is)

a6rso

if (it)

comes, (he

is) like

elephants.

(one) measures

the body) to which (somebody) has applied a blow,

what

djsSckcS

form of buds.

w^3, a road which (people) are unable to go.

rtcir^o, kalte

^S^aSo^o

I).

a cloth which (they) have woven after separating what

silk-worms have
9

a donkey

(is)

sira^&i'o&D*,

CO

315, k.

(see

(a span)

aJ3^r( sjsdQ

2JC09 , a place (of

sji&

rest?

(you)

a stone,

if (it)

comes,

goes, (it is)

o
Q
TO
a
what
in
one's giving, is a mere stone; what
fruit
ripe
(i.e.
goes
is)
comes for it, is a ripe fruit). 2jdos3>rt aooOoio Sositf, 3J3rtos3e>rt 'SsOoio
35e>ri,

when

mouse.

(he)

>&*C

^JScse)

<3>s?

WN6
O

a tiger;

tfr^ck

3:3c36 ^kJo

S5>ri

to

z3pl

if

3JS?rio^),
zodorfcl),

^^

eaten.

tS^o,

must do
,

&>rt3t,

tetfti

if

(one)

so with

(we)

^Jar^

wan test

son, if (thou)

much

ad?orf

tck

like a

is)

5>ex>^d,
co^^

if (I)

will

churns curds, butter

if (I)

f($3$
to

is

produced.

buy sweetmeats, they

dJsadS

^3oo

oi^esarf
-y

will be
si^)rf

C3

form friendship with people, (thou)

caution.

must converse
if
,

(he) goes, (he

be interrupted for four days.

(thou) behavest thus, thou wilt be ruined.

JSrad ^^o 3oJ3^o^c3,

"^"^
O
Cd

crawo,

>-

come with thee to-morrow, my study

when

(it

in love with (our) brothers.

(you) teach (them) words, parrots will quickly

416
See e.g. also

learn (them).

323

302,

326 (o^&iszl,

(fccSjiszi, etc.).

(o&eJ^S).

332. 333

(^6, etc.).
rtodj 33^0 ssao^dre

etc.).

(he is) good to (his) mother,

*D
V
the teacher caused (his) disciple to read the

o^.tfo,
,

come

2oO,
o please

,j

hands and

feet.

younger
the

(his)

^90

sister".

of

man

(is)

a suitable husband for (my)

3e>o3o to&^ojj^* vu&^OJocSo, a calf does not leave

mother.

(its)

head?

(her)

perceived "this

rtodoOrfr^

3^0,

the pupil

like

(is)

(his)

?3J3do^;3, we see with (our) eyes.

^cis wC3o vlorl^orl^ ^s^f^ &&ri zS^sshaj^, you ought to have given
i.e. the money) six months ago.
w ;3jd(&, o&s^ ^j5,^sja^> tOf^o,

spiritual teacher.

(it,

wash

to

up

oktss&s

3ori?io

Madana

company

as far as (my) house.

the master stood

1j

grammar.

-JJ-

what does that woman carry on

?$o .BScSo,

314 (the conditional).

^CQ

when that physician asked "why will you not take (them, i. e.
the medicines)?" The grammar called Nudigattu adduces also the follow^5^e;o,

ing instances:

not beat

esd?l> ero^^o^j, 3oJ3jlcdo zS^rf, he (is) a

good fellow, do

T^^cra??,

=^JSdo,

(him),

Brahmana

is

zj^Sorafio

dJ335s)OuO

an honest man, give (him) ten rupees.

(some) sugar (into

&

it)!

sharp; cut the wood (with

275 there

In

?o

?1

aodcSsftzS, ^y.^oio
^a,
SO

=j?>c2

the

33e)OO

insipid milk does not agree with

359.

ao^o,.

me; put
axe

this

is

it)!

instances

various

are

of

modern

the

dialect

in

which the verb 'ado, to be, is the verb of a sentence, e.g. w^rt^o ^^ ^dJ
o*i
are black; 253=^0 2^e3js^rfo S3C>, the penknife is beautiful;
jj^sS, elephants

W
in

women are

ro^oJodo 2S^,^Qcra6, those

"O"

t=9

On the other hand we

which the verb 'ado

nice boy;
instances

small:

aoJSrttfo

2oSids)

5^,

<J)

the flowers are green.

035^^

it

rfj^

is

omitted,

dJS^do,

might appear

as

if

e.

his

g.

various instances

find there

arf^j ss3j3? sdj^ori^o, he

house

(is)

etc.

large;

(is)

From such

the insertion and omission of the verb 'ado

were arbitrary.
But the above instances belong to the present modern dialect;
the ancient and

mediaeval dialect the verb 'acr*

('ado)

and never expressed,

predicate,

e.

if
6

g. vtifS

it

is

ado,

is

always understood

a mere copula to connect a subject with

he

(is)

a good man.

in

es^s?*

fcdv*,

she

its
(is)

417
a good woman.

milk

}1?cio,

oLiOCXJo^j,

>o

d^.ort&fSs*

350,

2,

a. b.

354,

c;

the mother

3
,

5.

349,

7;

as to generosity
(is)

am )

a servant.

one

r^O,

among
among men males

348,

I, 2;

jewels the ruby

ero^doo,

enj^sioo*,

man

this

$?>& wv*,

thou (art) Kama.

T5>s3oo,

3)dj3StO*

the king's maid-servant.

(is)

ZO^CJD*, they (are) able persons.

slracStfo^j*

sjjs^ddJS^

precious.

chiefs (see

a servant.

(is)

(am) Gauri.

(is)

wdc'

white.

(is)

she

iJS'^o,,,

they (the pearls, are) large.

'ado, he
I

jSfdd

'arfv*

(i.e.

(is)

(are)

357,

s;

s).

a Mandhata.

the same), the father

3?F ^odorio, whose horse (is) this?

whose daughter (art) thou? Instances like these are the rule and -quite
different.

(is)

idiomatic.

Kannadu

In sentences like the following

scarcely use the verb

d*^ o&?>d SorsS, whose wife

t4
elder sister?

she not?

'S.rfdo Jirfo,

yrQ

esrfdo

'arfdo

'S.dj:

(is)

pe.iple

would also nowadays

who

o&e)d\>,

these persons?

(are)

o&sJSe)^ ?>^^i, which

TS

she?

y^^pe,

3)05joJo^do,

this

(is)

your

your mother;

(is)

is

odo, they (are) brothers.

eori

^sjo,?i

ro

In the following instance of the present modern dialect also the past
tense of the verb

'ado,

when a mere copula,

is

be understood:

to

the original language of the Aryas (was) Samskrita; from that, in course

came

of time, several languages

360.

It is a different thing,

but expresses 'to

and the forms

i.

2),

into existence.

if

the verb 'to be'

exist', 'to be', 'to have',

esoSOg,

5c3,

'azS,

ws3,

not a mere copula,

is

when the verbs

*asS,

are used

vu<s*, -ao*

(see

316,

e.g.

if
is

(ado)

196.

an empire;

thou art, (there)

thou art, (there) are the insignia of royalty and (there)

if

are boxes (with money);

thou art (or be) not, will
(there)

if

thou art, (there)

is

the white

umbrella;

if

all these (things) exist?

is

(there) is

money,

fame

to

^ododrts?* ^^s^j, (there) are horses.

him

(i.

e.

he has fame),

ssrfo*'

53

418
they are present.

north of

the

to

36^ d

6J'

that forest

&?&

We>

60

(there) are

s3,

many
is

God.

is

(there)

with

that gentleman,

no water in the well.

man

Aiijanagiri.

in the boat.

o> ^rftfOddo,

were

(there)

?& ^o,
CO

erd>o3Je>^fi

tf

So^dO^,
ro'

3e)03oft?3

of

tigers in this jungle.

many

ortc3 uaotf

rlx3o?o^

servants

was even one

(there)

'S.cS^o.

fjjp

mountain

a well near that house,

is

(there)

erucso.,

the

is

(there)

Jfa,6ftti ?toc>j^,
mr
^

(there)

(there)

are no greater benefactors than a mother, (there) is nothing sweeter

than sugar.
rtxSpcSjSv* 'adrsSs?*, she is in the house,
o^l^do roO ^do
e>

t.

r3^de3
rfore^'^do
W ^-

lu^doo, as long as they possess riches, will not also

scoundrels be honourable persons?

In such instances the verb
=5^00
s)

(there

fragrance in flowers.

is)

white colour in the flower.

milk.

>;!>

cSj3^

zo

7$$ o3or?j
cp

(he

i^Wo, (there

(there

is)

s3tfo

g.

(there

sweetness in

splendour in the disk of the sun.

is)

is)

rtodoD^JSs?* ^3o^o, (he

is)

proficient in adoration,

mouse

the cat

(it is)

22^> rf^}
r

knowledge
s&e^^do,
j^-

ap

sJoqiodo,

eodJSs?*

e.

^orsdsirrscSjs^ (there are) eight chapters in the Sabda-

manidarpana.
23e)C?o,

srs&iSv*

not expressed,

sJso

etc. are often also

e/u$*,

play, for the

rra3do, (there were)

many

(is)

true to

s33r.fi

(his)

s>)fi

wU,

extreme

(it is)

guru.
for

ss^rs^o^ej,

distress,

superior to gold.

55
PO

players there.

have been observed from the above sentences that the English
terms 'there', 'there is', 'there are', 'there were', etc., used to begin
It will

cannot be expressed in Kannada, to which

sentences,
5

ej^ortsjj

y^rlo Os3)o^cdoSo

g;^3 Coo,
BJ

(there)

ssd^re^^o cjs^ w^3

Vikhyatayasa.

do,

may be added

was born
(there)

to

him and

e.

g.

her

to

occurred an inroad

from the side of the king.

Notice also the following:
or jrasS^,

say

so.

361.

is

we.

^^ <ad

esdd, ^sS^

aojc^oh -acrss? or adj^jn,

154170

In

been given

(cf.

339).
It is used

'S^cS,
ro

soar?
it is

the forms

W^tS
ro

of

in 8 338,

?j

or ^Sr2,

ss^esS,
a

it is I.

it is

we, not they,

who

girl.

the

past

verbal

participle

have

and the repetition of verbs

in

419

e.

tw^do

g.

the actions having the

in simple succession of actions,

1,

jjfej o,

he was delighted (and) gave.

JO

he saw (and) made obeisance.

tfoac5orto&3

he ate (and)
en)f|js5r\c5o,
Cd

he drank (and)

o.'

eoScdo

made

the

iJS&S^O*

women

went

DO^J rao
o ca

spit.
o
he bathed, ate, drank (and) turned back,
55)dro

s3oa&

w&3rO ^rso, he sought (and) found.

Ci

he begged (and) received.

sior^cio,

subject,

S^rtCOO o, he was
IT
he
danced.
sraa ^orSdo,
sang (and)

pleased (and) praised.

to sleep.

same

d33ac3o, he ruined the country of Malava (and)

of

its

(town

S3e>3

of)

Dharapura

maid-servants.

(his)

^ecSo t e^o, like a gold-coloured

young

antelope the white (horse) rolled about, sprang (and) went.

sv?ft

en>reo
CS

^^rttf^q,

books (and) come,

ui&kis

wdo3
^%t&>
o O

e?2,

dJS^ wdo^^,

I will eat

go home, eat, take (my)

(and) come.

"0"

;3,

the water in the sea

is

heated by the sunshine,

becomes vapour, rises up, joins together in the air (and) becomes clouds.
sSJSJoOo 3dtii sdo^floktfj, dJS^os^d, they churn curds (and) make
^
^*
sjjsri:3
rtd^SQcjs^osJo, he seizes the pole (and) plays.
he did not make (it and) went. tiZSd ^"sD ^rfjdo, he did not

buttermilk.

^?do,

run away, fought (and) overcame.

(It will be seen that in translating the past participle the verb
in combination with 'and' has been used.)
in

2,

manner, the actions having the same subject,

he walked .stoopingly.
tied
c&ro

firmly.

(it)

^dc3o 2J^

3ori.3oA)

\^

to6do, he wrote

(it)

o,

he came on

w6c3o, he wrote

commentatorially.

(it)

in

e.

g.

>fio

foot.

?fc3rfo,

an abridged way.

3^oioc3

finite

siJe)3-)C3

he

k3;j
>j

wsddo, do

not speak without understanding.

in means, the actions

3,

having the same subject,

ate by wandering in quest of alms.

3?1

We>dc3o,

stealing.

(one)

may

?&>

e.

g.

he
^Odjrso,
B

^jsreo 3fl ZJ3oorfj,

*
t&

TfcSo
CJ

J3rsj
Ci>

eat by begging, (but one) ought not to live by

he drove the cattle

ri^ritfF^aoJSdcSj kaA)dFl>,

away by

beating.

in cause, the actions having the same subject, e. g. wt afcc3 ^U,o,

4,
because he did not know, he was ruined.
3oodort?3o tCic5 ^Ur&, the boy

M
was ruined, because he did not study. rir??3o ^-C^o
ij
3oorto 30A
Cd
cJ
the husband was ruined, because he sat (lazily); the woman was
,

53'

420
she rambled

ruined, because
35e>tf,

as

5cSt3 3

s&C^fi

springs into the river, because he

if (one)

When

about.

from that

different subject

of

the

3oJSo3 fi

35e>fc3 c3

afraid of the rain.

is

last verb

occurs, it

used

is

chiefly

in cause, e.g. sSra^o

1,

^rao cSosiusi^ wcSodo, grief originated, because

CA

&o3o^o ^rao

(he)

saw the corpse,

(he)

saw the beloved woman.

wind blew,
because

rTDS?

money

(his)

his head).

a6rao

tree,

went, he became poor.

dodd Sbaofosf &C3

vocS

ascended the top of a high tree,

3Jsj?>

cSjS^d

care of the

it

fruit,

)^o

-*'.

because the

sor? 2oJd

aoe>;j)

3t&

>35l;3?&3

to

(people) wrote (with

,,

>CoJ

^.A,
*
~"^

as

if

it),

SJ^rfo ?os3oSo^o, the lead-pencil wore,

ssd^fo t3?^ eo?i^

?5e3rio

g^*

ro^,^,

days since he went.

O ^jradfttfA^
cd

wOfe3.cS
ro 80

Woo

field,

it

because

Add
fell

down,

it.

wsj^o 3oJ3?A eso&oCO adsS woSo^o,

e5d?i^o 20^0

man

ne died, because disease

tne flower of a shrub which was put there in a pot,

lapse of time, e.g.

sJJS^cS

because the end of his garment touched

in

^>oJ

=^^3.^0,
M
was spoiled; because nobody cultivated the

$5^ wOoio
co

attacked (him).

=#033*

(to

down, because his hand slipped, and

because nobody took
=^'e3,^j,
C^

fell

3oJ5279

ro^d dssC^

was ruined,

2,

s^jda^
5

king died, because a snake bit (him), and the poison rose

?33 <&, the

died.

>ero

from the

(there) fell a ripe fruit

joy originated, because

?foa>5l3 s tJrfjdi,

Sort^oSo^o

it is

it

is

five

a month since

the king came.

The forms

362.
173.

of the present verbal participle are

adduced

in

172.

It expresses

contemporaneous action, e.g. Nrto3oo wrfo, he came laughing.

1,

WF^o, he
j,

(whilst)

came

blessing.

may stumble

(and)

laughing,

Rama

dances

3^do, he cut

X>&fbr(j3 S^ecSo, he

kz&2^
fall,

laughing (and) eating,

O^O^S^cS,

^^^

he beat chiding.

he spoke laughing.

goes running

^cSJsL^o 20^0, he came

he went calling.

singing,

fighting,

^a

chipping.

went shining,

3oJ3^r(od^^J <^d^) ^n^>

^rto;^

rfo,

^rto^

he who

3rtaX sddeJos^,^, he prates

us^orfo Soe)^^,

playing a

36

atjfifl'tfj^

musical

N^J^

^od)

instrument (and)

421

man

an old
g^tf, see, father! from that side (there) conies
on the ground

(his) stick
2,

continuation

a)

in the present tense (see

b)

in the imperfect (see

>r3>sJCo

339,

6)

tS^zJj^dro,

313,
313,

crcreo^sto 'acSFo, he

(arrows),

2),

i).

e.g.

was eating.

-anJo^dro, he was shooting

up

to this

tails of the

was

like

Soodi^o^

^dc$c3o,

313,

modern

282. 285. 286), e.g.

even spring coming

spring comes).

flame.

rtrs5J3o3oj

^Fo,

^od)6oio?i)^

3).

dialect the

present

participle

has

its

own

combined with a euphonic 53* (see

sj^^ fcdo^eS 3JWd vu^akJ^d, the cuckoo cries

suffixes the vowels

it

subject,

the

in

seized the

Ganapati walked seeking- his horse.

future (see

in the

Bhima
jj

two furious elephants, (and) whilst he crushed

mouth being the

(their)

When

^e>cs

a blacksmith who plied the bellows, the blood that caine

forth from

c)

&>?&

moment.

tp?si>o

(them),

^^

F^* Wo

both of us looked about, did not see thee (and) were

in anxiety (as to thee)

end of the

down

every step to support himself).

(at

(cf.

putting

(i.e.

or

'a,

at thd very time

sSocS>?oo^d

do3o>c5

when spring comes, as soon as

>? .ktf &riuzk3> ?!rto^0 z3?rf,

do not laugh on account of love for (your) wife and son, (your) heart
even taking pleasure

The forms

363.

(in

them).

of the past relative participle are given in

75

79.

254.

Cf.

It is used

e.g. 33e>&ao,
,

he who sang; ^?rio, he who went; d?azSvS she who begged;

he who considered; &?C$OFC$O,

c?Sd

rise;

to take the place of the relative pronouns in other languages,

in
5^t)o, a place

that drank; CCOo*, those

&)&

which (people) played;

thing which (somebody) had given;

germinated;

it

sSjss?^

^jo*,

CJ

who

3?ix, a (or the)

tu e grass which

had

srodo, the lesson which (somebody) had learned; ^?c3o

the place (of the body) to which (somebody) applied a blow; wrf

Vishnu

who had become;

sirac^d

tfo&, a

field

which nobody

422
in case that (something) should not be destroyed;
cultivates; -S-^d sj^o,
A^
!

is

which

a strap which has been tightened; sS^rf

C3e>?3o,

5e>c5

"

not proper;

)ftd

Oo,

yso&Fo an

affair

^&3o, an affair that does not end;

3edd

a gift which has been asked for; ^o^rfj* to?oOrodo, he whose affliction was
removed; 3g^?& aookjrfddo, they to whom a son has not been born;

gj

^JSdoo s&oSS'dUo,., an ox whose horns are broken.

About

The forms

364.

180

in

They

use before adverbs (postpositions,

its

186.

bank that

Cf.

is

who knows

254.

or will

$,

(somebody)

applies

^do3oo d
his

mouth

or will nourish; j&O^Se)^, a

3^

See

sjSjaoi^

a kettle-drum

$0,

^oSJo, a conch-shell that (somedody)

a stream that runs;

to

^S^s*, a sand-

roja&o*, a lamp that hangs;

)?l>d 2,j)^odo, a chowrie which (somebody)

for

perspiration which comes forth (see

So*

186); ^jscksj

(see

an ear of corn that grows; ^jsdsJ

^>S53

3JO>

know

^jsrtarf

accumulating;

that (somebody) beats;

come.

282.

waves; 23$s3

TJrJSS^d

see

of the present and future relative participles are given

a rain which dashes;

blows;

6)

same way as the relative past participle (also before

185. 316);
282. 365), e.g. ero*,o, he who is or has (see

ssSS'sJV*, she

212,

are used in the

adverbs, see

doS^ 2

267.

Cf.

>&s3 ^ads?,

^rsu,d

blowing;

253,

woman who

2, d)\

a trumpet which
c^s&Pfcj^ortv*,

^PCdo, he that nourishes

scares

away

254).

(see

SorS
Cv

wofo^J, the time in which (the cows) are milked, has

273. 330, and.c/.

267.

An

additonal instance

is:

eroreo,

^js^orto

||

the black

e3

bees which hum, the wind which blows, the leaves of palms which wave
about, the plantains which fluctuate in (the water of) the ponds, the
small islands (in the river) which are cool, the herons which do meet
together, the ruddy geese which mutually touch and kiss, the parrots
which play about, the clever birds which utter pleasant words cause

much

pleasure to those who look on.

After one or more preceding past participles the present-future relative

participle is often used, giving it or them so to say the sense of the
present,

e.

g.

^tf

e;j5r

sra^o,

tail

which

is

long and extends

itself.

423

away and

drive

strike those

rtv'ddo

TO

who are

zSe^srlu^

3oJS?rt

power

demand

c3,

c5ozjFejOe>t33do fc)>3

him

d ^oi:* 3&ado

because weak persons have

the hand of very strong

seize

&$&

dishonest,

the speed of the arrows that touch, knock against

(and) miss (their deadly aim).

to

which

^JS^Clorf siacrfXSrtfelrtrf'S*, the doorkeepers' sticks

esfel

(their rights), they are obliged to

not

sufficient

to

persons,
stop (them and)
bear quietly whatsoever those

do.
It is still to

be mentioned that occasionally present relative participles

are put in an uninterrupted series one after another,

c

3*

artoasSeSddaejdo^&Os
(regarding)

ettrtg&,ota&

man who

e.

g.

rt^ascraciisj

e^o,o, the suffix atiga

seizes a pole (and) plays, (regarding)

bears (or uses to bear) a lamp, (and) regarding one

who

&

used

is

one who

carries on a

betel-leaf trade.

33>a}o

that
(king's) son's

grand army which was piercing, causing

behaving

ing,

proudly,

shouting,

crying

aloud,

to retreat,

coming

whoopand

near,

attacking, striving, crowding, surrounding, closing with, standing, gain-

ing the victory, coming forth, jumping up, advancing, beating excessively,
getting entangled, struggling, rising (and) pushing in a good manner,

attracted the attention.

365.

The forms and

Here follow some

signification of the infinitive

instances:

^erio, he went to bring.

rf

erorso*
fcjtfdoo

2J?d o,

appear in

he came

JTO^O*

to

^pertoi:*?

187. 188.
eat.

3d5^

e^*,

<^s3

VidyaqiCs^ 33F, which world doest thou go to subdue? Tell,

he came to speak.
dharacakravarti!
^
fajSaJoei. so^o
0^s3,df!*5*
O
Tf
O
tell to make large the heap of gold!
rfjsrf^
cStfo,
Sjjsjf|j3?F^,a?joo,
he (is) clever to make.
suitable
examine.
he
to
^J8fcSo* Xsioq^Fo,
(is)
c3?r

put on clothes.

to eat.

it (is)

good

it (is)

time to go.

&>^er

^s3ooJoo,

it (is)

time to see.

n>ris3e&3* (or v\3d?3^t>"), tell (him) to

3ds^t3< (or <idd^eo*)

tell to
rfi^ci Se>z3?73qi^sl)o,

bring

424
the force of well equipped horses.

23^

^tosrf

vosjjlds&o

(or

t?rtao 23^8 dido, that is fit (or about) to

23^), do not cause trouble.
become.
aoozSorfdo yqir^^o, rl3o?3ejs3do, the boys cannot understand

the meaning,

$23 do

the (proper) way.

^re^o eruaO^ 3oJ3eri>^\ 26^0,

~c

to go to the town,

ordered us to go

d&nj
\

wd

.js^ort^^dc

^^c5o

under
286.

its

it is

used

used, and

when

darpana under sutra

there'

they
g^s^)

you may come

in.

come

to

See 8 315

here.

satyartha, see Sabdamanidarpana

oi

188, remark;

187, 4;

(see also the passive in

According to the grammarian

are two subjects (ubhayakartri, Sabdamani352,

e.

249),

me

3 seq.

the infinitive with the final vowel

it is

eJ

can read,

to

must not utter such words.

sutra 133) has been touched upon in

315 wherein

come

^JSfcldo,

<o

205o.)C5o,

them

for

locative-infinitive (satisaptami;

It is

Kesava

316,

33J cl

zodo^cS,

2^d

you

proper

it is

(concerning the passive);

The

'"^

ersdtSj,

^-

zod

^fi todO^,

early,

deliver.

will not

necessary for

is

it

soja^o
3o?3tf SoJ^rf^., tfsjjfl
- re,s3
eo
-d

home

you must

23^*0,

twN>

mean persons

2ode3-J3^> do,

3oe>8ri

g.

i,

a).

rreofos'o

sissi

d^rfo

djfcS- c3o,

when the

fcy

singer sang, the king was pleased

pleased).

S3e>3 S3e>d

(lit.

the singer a singing, the king was

when the actor

Sj^rf^o WejZo&rio,

cian sounded (his) musical instrument.

the bard praised, the liberal

king) saw

earth quaked,

mind was

3v$

(him).

when the

gave,

$&&&&

spectators' eyes

played, the musi-

23>ft

when

eod ^reo,
A

=$Je>fe3.o,
"

(he)

when

came, (the

^ra o?3 sJo^o^JSd?^,

f*9

when the

became

when the

tired

(and)

afflicted.

"Some authors", Kesava

<0),

man

e2>6

O ^pri^

but that

is

says,

"do not hesitate

to use $353* instead (of

and adduces the following instances as

not proper",

wrong (abaddha):
JfcraAi?rf<33fte$r
srodSjC^prttfca* ZoS^^do* ata>g,^3j3
7? wrtv*, when (they) shampooed (his) lotus-like feet, king Sudrika was
then comfortably seated.

when

OaA)O* ^^?oa*

sooSo^

o^ctas^o^dorV,

(they) desired the purple sunshine of evening,

hermitage appeared

(see

Kesava remarks that

120, a,
in

dro^o

cuckoo sang,

dropped down.

rj^s?

2od&do

trees of the

2).

the above instances

would have been right (suddha),

stances:

the

for

ws3J3do (PJO* + O^O)

which he gives the following in-

&fl>{ftdo&tt>rUo,

)f?3e3ja^$*

when spring came,

when the wind

'SWwojJ,
c*

the

blew, leaves

425
According to that grammarian substitutes (udesas, as

to use)

for

and also
tfutfoo
(vodo+sroo), y<^c, w^rio, ?3&:3o
e.g. ^ejdo^do ^do* ssrfoft fjjrtri) f

are atfo, ^rSrio,

when

C3

Skanda beats him

(his)

pride hides itself (and)

becomes ashamed.

so that he

when extremity. comes, he bears

(it)

crushed completely,

is

w&F?3rto

es3

ioCsS?!^

patiently,

oirfoo

<W)wd s^po* ^fifc^ 6)ZJFdoilfi?dd?io, when (he) said "tell Vishnu to

come (him) who appears (and) is coming (there) like the Anjanacala!"
3Je^ 3 ,o3J3v* a6rfo ?j) iJatirto^rfjo, when the female companion
V

^^Okrf

"remain near thy beloved one", and went away. L^rio sids^dodj*
we3J32c3rt ^3^.0, when the assembly dispersed, he began to consider.
v
when he who is on
wucSOcSFs'
286.)
(See

said

^ridF^o ^aSo^sS^^'S'o^cSo,
in order to beat (him)!

high jumps down,

,

jump upon (him)

so that (his son)

jrto^rfo

ward (and) enters the pools

when he comes

ZJSJr^rls^

may

-so*,

$co3^ao, when from

of the Ganges.

fear (he) rushes for-

'aa^Fob tizU S3&J ^JSrso,

oO
i3

he remains.

give,

race spoke.

^dro,

3?s3f3r!dj*

so

s&o^orra&Ov* 3$
when in (thy) old age

2*s3o3j3i2?2

be together with the fire-place

grey hair grows.

Kuru

receive a boon, he worships,

meet (him), he embraces (him).

to

that (the king)

may

^oao^oejs^Sjo ^jScdo&Oc^o, when the chief of the

53e>d?3 &cdJ3^o ^)^o* o^rfjrfo, when the duck-weed

was destroyed, the water became clear (see

when (he) came, he gave (him something).
Kesava remarks that
present and future,

S5f2rto,

tAidoo,

?5clo,

S5?3J5do

a?Srio,

the past,

286).

'S.fSo

use to express the

and according

to this his

remark the sentences quoted above have been translated.

Concerning Kesava's rule as to the use of the infinitive with final <j
may be made that Bhattakalanka, the author of the

the observation

Sabdanusasana, does not take notice of

it,

because he quotes (as

it

seems)

the following sentences regarding the use of ee? without raising any
objection:

n>co?o

king was pleased.

liberal

man

gave.

33e>c2e3*

wC?oo sSo^rfo, when the singer sang, the

IT

espr s2^E5* cysjioao^o, when the beggar begged, the

jS^jtfes* sjjjjrfo*
^PPCSocSo, when the sun rose,
tfe^eS

darkness went.
54

426
In the modern dialect there

is

no particular rule regarding the use of

it is also employed to express 'when', e.

g. =$f<s*e;j,
(=yo*), although
when (he, she, etc.) asked (lit. an asking). k>> ^JS^^o, when (he, she,

etc.)

assented.

<o?too,

when

(he, she, etc.) said,

zjSsJOFffo

t?tfo3

o>fc:*3

&, when Dharma was ruling the kingdom, (his)

2oti^>j ;=3e>ok ScJS^rbJ^cS, when thou comest,
subjects were happy.
It is however more common to suffix wh (the past participle
I shall go.
doo

3j.2rt<) ?doaja>

c3

of

to es^o, e.g.

wrlo)

she, etc.) heard;

oi,

in

<o

e.

occurs occasionally, see

366 under remark

e.

from the Dasapadas quoted

g. the verse

a.

About the conjugation of verbs, (nouns, pronouns and

189-204.
the present, future and past see

Some

instances are

<3Z3
sS?o?loe>&ic3*
B

Ari, the king of spring comes;

for

him who

is

separated from

fishes in the ocean.

p;3.>s?J3

?i^o,

3
CO

tifs

(his wife

^orso
eJ

23$J?> zi, if

are

also

ones),

>oi&e

no

(there) is

and other dear

there

adjectives)

wckr&oCO

^rfc ^ss?
Q

to-day (and) to-morrow

ort<s*,

is.

(he,

w^oJ^dOejh.

rfjs^sj-sA,

366.

in

when

it

52^, S3t>o

with

i.

has been shown that the so-called infinitives ending in

In modern poetry the form
originally are verbal nouns.

188

In

^^SJSA, a hearing having become,

life

^oorto^)

devouring large

thou art, the white umbrella

dJ36?^ 25jap&38 CXSiOf fc$6{, are there (any) deities like you?

s^ds'o, Taraka frightened the three worlds.

53o?o3orodo,

he caused the kine to eat grass on the

banks of the Yamuna.

force like fire

&33gta33tic33ie>r$^ c^ojrfo,
that has obtained an oblation of ghee.

NJSwd i'i3^t>djf3*
m

-^5^, this

woman knew

he increased in
s5S59 rfs?*

33>?3o^

the whole state of the sons of

Pandu.

I shall
|

know, Prithe

will

know, Krishna will know, the sun

the very wise person Sahadeva will know;

make known)? When

will

(or Indra) will

thou to

nobody know, king of Anga?

whom

know,

(didst thou

427

..

e-rv

a6o?3

^rJjiflLd^OJo&ftzStSe)^
*
Q

cradoijo
O
O

saying

U I

stopping
I

a bunch of flowers,

will give thee

my

bud

will give thee a soft shining

||

She was

female parrot,

black bee, ever without

swan, and

of the red lotus,

cool wind, if to-day (you) search, bring

will give thee fragrance,

place

sl^SDZ&^r?*

a present,

will give thee a fully ripe fruit as

quickly

and

lover near me".

.

eJ

o sSoii.do

d^

si>oi|

Mandara appeared

tain

(they) said:
(or) did
S527S

the

it

"did

it

not place

alj^fa^

In front the moun||

to the eyes of the deities in such

touch

down

sjo^b^wo

(or)

(its)

^f^Ar^QO,

did

it

not touch heaven? did

foot on the top of

Isvara's

o 200JJO

tt

mind became

^jsad

place
tfrf

agitated, the

^a^HJ^ SL^io,

'a^j
-

it

Rasatala?" -g^

Kinnaras ran away. sJ^Orod^ 5JoJ3dd?3o3J3v* tS^rtrd-w

red colour spread about in the east.

hugeness that

sJotf;^

army

of

a dazzlingly

lustre

t^aoioo

down

II

came

in.

"With haste

he will make a crop like a farmer who does not remove the weeds (and)
sows the wife examines the young plants, sighs deeply (and) reviles the
way in'which (he) has done it. $JSd^033e)o FkartosJo" W ClJS^ort Xfi
;

^B rt3'sq5rsl)o, the king told the messenger the meaning contained in his
own mind. ^jndcriooSrtoo $o&a?3 S)rfjrt3o rlsiaoo the cuckoo cried
nicely, the

wind blew,

darkness had quite swallowed sun and moon, thunder-bolts came down.
will
d! o3J2?rtc3j3v* wd dJS^sJoo^oo SeaoO^oo, in this manner (he)
remove whatsoever sickness.
Brahma
33e>>tfo,o fcjrtsS^rfo tfsJo^Sirfo,
ti

rules the whole world.

54

428

Ringworm

will

disappear in five days when (one) rubs (it) with dried cow-dung, rubs,
in a merciless manner, the root of Senna and also Emblic myrobalan
in
to

a well-matured lemon, and applies

the juice of

medicament

(this

it).

Remarks.

195 the contingent future

In

of the

modern

dialect (the

Nudigattu
samsayarthakriyapada) has been introduced. Here follow some
additional instances:
esddo ^>$ ZO^D do, they may come to-morrow.
a)

calls it

CM

L^o^

3oJrtjs3sSf3o tOz3>

3oo>

fall.

AjoSo^^ <od>OrO3j,
wdo&cra

he

<3o,

a tiger

may

may

may

sti

withstand a

the king's house a dinner

in
-Ssrt

he who goes running

>zjdfi),

mbie (and)

lion.

Oe>cdoc!

be obtained.

may

be coming now.

When (one) teaches (her) the duty of truth continually,

be pleasant to the mind of a female servant? When (one) tells
the real nature of the soul manifoldly, could it be known to the
(it)
mind of a donkey? When (one) has drawn a figure of pure gold, if (one)
Dasapada 9

could

kisses

||

it

(it),

could

forehead, will
6)

it

speak?

When

(one) applies a

mark

The past tense, as remarked in

194,

is

3$, know
I

(soon) be ready;

shall

come, walk on!

to the

certainly give,

e3<3rto&>o5o3:>,

put the leaves (used as plates)!

die (or shall die).

^^o

eo???l>,

O
oo>3-0, dinner

SJS^j

eje>s3

^^
will

dJsrS^

33, he who knows (proper) words, brings a

he who' does not know (proper) words, brings quarrel. (It
9

dJS^o e53 akt3rf

fcirttf

ruby; (but)
may be mentioned here that sometimes the English 'is'
WOfo^J, it became or has become, e. g. SoJSg^oSo^o, it is
^a,

musk

not unfrequently used for

the present or future, e.g. $3o3v%, c3)^o rj^tfo, alas,

3f3,

of

possibly not cause a nice appearance?

it

it is

morning,

what o'clock

is

^^cdjo^ej^c-soao^o,

it? &;$o

it is

rtfl,aS3e)03o^o. it is
eJ

evening,

one o'clock.

is

expressed by

late.

oj^o.
So

rtpl.

wC3o s3d

429
it

is

half past six o'clock.

3o3,dzl) ^e>yj rtrfo3jso3J^j,

*

is

it

3&3o

36^, rt?io&e>05j3o, it is a quarter to

ten; but wok'Er, jra^o, ao^fejo 3Q>&> Ws3, it is four minutes to five.)
quarter past twelve.

=5-3^0

"

The present tense may be used

c)

for the future,

garden (and) bring

fresh flowers (see

the

^s3ro,

(for

go into the

thee, sister,

a bunch of

215,

5,

shall bring)

g.

3
1

"Q

e.

^J

o.,

6).

The Kannada grammar Nudigattu says that in speaking (wsoija^o)

form of the future does not occur (in modern Kannada), in its stead

the present

is

used,

e.

g. for

o>o3odo

wdosjdo people say

<j3e)$

Also when in the modern dialect the meaning of 'to use'

is

expressed

either by the simple future tense, as

zj^Sorsdo acSD^o sra^rf rfjssiorfdo,
or by the continuative
a^s^o
people say

?TS^ sissj^os]^,

zja-a^pdo
future tense, as

4^

w^sdipdo

rado

*t3 ^js^o^djs^d

?^^CS

?3\^ siJScli^dosJOo, .they say ZTO,a^

313,

(see

few additional sentences are:

morrow.
some).

^^dj t3?^s)C56 ^Je^oji^N,

zodjd

>?;3)

^^^

^do^^,

?i6 N?ldo jraew,

to-morrow,

367.

my

if

3).

^33$

want water,

(you)

shall

aoJSfrtoJ^,

stay

ad?od iodo a^)o^

till

shall

go

I shall give

(you

you come.

cS, if (I)

to-

come with thee

-3

study

The forms

The following

will

be interrupted for four days.

of the imperative appear ID

instances

may

205

208."

be given:
Singular.

c5*

'ado siraC^o,

33-?>z2s3

3ox!

let

me do

it!

zon?3s3 3jsefie3!

3e^s3 rWsssd! hum,

black

rv

bee! cry,
11

It

cuckoo! blow,

may be remarked

wind! aoD,

^^,

hear,

ll.iri!

that according to the SabdAnuDHsana the imperative with final

rt.

includes asis, blessing, beneJiction; vidbi, ordering; nimantrana, biililinj;

Araantrana,
calling; adhyeshana, soliciting; samprasnn, questioning about or considering what is to be

etc.

done; preshana, urging (an inferior);

(to follow a rule)

prarthana, praying.

viji'iapana,

begging

(a superior); aj lApana. directing

430

e3Jse=aclEs?*!

Stand

whilst resembling a

sword-weapon-bow (?)
In the

manner

the world!

shining flash of lightning!

become a teacher

of a scoundrel learn all well (and)

^^

^^

&&> or
sjorts?

(o.

r.

<,o*,

sodos?)

in

be thou!
!

|j

Have

like a

Step slowly like a crane! Hide with the stratagem of a tortoise!

like a spinning top (?)!
Be roaming like a bee! Swing the

crow!

their

Look
jj

Remain,

daughter!

the vain grammarian and the vain disputant and the rustic as
aim excellent poems which are (only) the aim of the mass of very

clever poets?

-S-o

When

JS^Oo ^^j^w^o
took the waters that

"take! take!" and

fell

all at

the

||

pond

from the hands of the young women who said

once sprinkled, it became reddish-brown water

on account of the filaments (of lotus flowers) that became loose and
were scattered about.
3oA?,
^toe)>, 'aOfi w>, brother, come here!

eruakM
"C"

joyful!

^d,

sister,

c3es3e>,

go to dine!

$$,&.
L
v

en)c3 0?dJ,

^orts??,

ou>?S
O

'SiCo,

sSooe^frart^ofS!

(J3ed, ^^J3^di)s3JS^?S? J!
walkest like a female swan! see thou who hast the
We>d,

partridge!

^^

come thou who

fickle

eye

of

ad, be thou!

>roo,
^

y^qiO^ao

be

daughter,

God, save me!

save (thou) me!

s^cSf^o,

listen (thou) to

sjorto^ 23ee3^

(my) respectful petition!

z3

eSe^dj,

d&
*"*n\

even pray (thou),

pray (thou) again!

,

may

he give!

2ooqio,
let

let the

ado ^F, let him (or may

wise man worship the gods

him perform the

religious

he) bring!

^o^o3J3v*

observance in

the

431
ui^o^o

evening!

hungry man

the

may

$J3?fc:3orto3,>,

lrersrf^fSFS* toft?5ofl, let the teacher instruct the

S3e>o* Crests* todort,

or he

grammar,
vant work!

sjd?^

give us alms!

soon the

may

C50& dJSCaO,
let

him come

that

life

is

d?ortto, may

35lftF&

the countries to thrive in that manner!

s^dd-ias*

316,

man

the king cause

C3e>coo

TT

usual in the veda, become thine!

may God have compassion on

in! (see

fco>

this

may

}si)A?3o tp^orfjo ^orfort,

*"*A

y 3C3ao

^d^sqte*

let the ser-

the king do this!

may

acSo 5&>z2ort,

read the

may

en^^rtortoSo,

zora.^s*
tJ

<

people do thus!

let the

c&tf,

may

in the sastras!

boy

kdotf, the son

^?drfO(3

53o?F5*

read the veda!

eat!

10.

u).

J5Oo

do,

may

thee!

the Jina give us joy!

Plural.
6

3s>rtodo

^sjors^jas?

let

dodj* ^?rt^ wg So^qio^od^o,

Phalguna! esdo* <ow
00
**
*^
form a horse-sacrifice! ^^QJJO, what shall we do?

us

attack

altogether

us now per-

let all of

^j

let

us

now go

to

(our) house!

k;3rt ouJS^JS^rs,

'aj^o.
^

3$Q o3o3i.elcdo^o,^ $?tfj,

let

us ask the

CN)

permission of (our) father!

TOc^dr^o^rfoo

?jsjj

s&ida^

elephants! rbdort^TO,

communicate a story
praise

God

^,o, make ye ready

ss^,
ro'

sir, sit

'ado dje)0j Oo, make you

oJ

may

co

%,

brother,

wfi
0,'
^=L

down! ^J3^a

may

guru, delightfully
children,

dfdOfixaSJirtCJ'D,

^^,

come here!

?^

see ye!

give ye us the desired object!

this!

they (or let them) do

(it)!

the wise put their trust in true knowledge!

^orfoT^,

let

'S,

^4^,

&cS'

may

oO^ori z3^^)o =2rZpoioo,

to us! rfo^^De),

continually!

the troop of beasts (and)

odo, ^jrioh^o* s2rg o

o
FO

they give a female to our son! erf do 2j3ol>&,

may

they (or

them) write!

s^o*

'ado rfjsCOo do,

let

them do

this!

wrfdo aoJaertosjdo,

let

them

go
368.
cf.

The forms

31G, 5.6.8.9.

of the conjugated negative are given in

Regarding bhavavacanas combined with 'ao

298. 299. 316, 2.13;

cf.

254, remark

i.

209. 210;
see

209

432
Here follow some modern

come now.

oiwas* 3$

wddo

instances:

ricraarotirfrfo,

o^ssto,

<&&

der?d)?
*^, \*v*

wsddo, they do not

&ir(

<

3"<i

^ww^w^^w

He

uuw

Qj

<3\c5 J^P

much

shall I praise the virtuous

utter

abusive words even against his enemies, he did not look at the

conduct of Yudhishthira?

wives of others with a wicked eye,

live

no longer.

chariot

does

etc.

'arfj.

^e>W3 ^o,

r3e><3o

dLodoJo Oq5;j9c5dJ3 oifloSood Bdrtc5o, even

not

go without

oil.

did not

shall

the king's

d^ddo ^o> ^JS^.OJS o^3e>0

sJos

^JSc^o, though God gives a boon, the officiating priest does not give the
boon.

d^dOrH

3s?o3jc5 cos>^

God's knowledge
S3>rtc3o,

is

djsdjs^do

<xift,rtj8

never possible for us.

he cannot bear such a load.

ssd^jd

3oJS>ddJ3
zp$$
^X *

wilderment goes,

fear has not gone,

rtc3o,

'SoStj.

De>s3ur& erusOri

does not go abroad.

(his)

fSO^^?)

acting without

zpsdsj

3.>d>cc)

Rama

3oJ^rl>53SoCO

though

Z^oio 3J3^riC>^>,
CO

be-

(his)

^rs^ ^^J5 55?lt),

have

said nothing.

XXVII.

On words corrupted from Samskrita.

The Kannada language consists

words that are peculiar to the country (desiyas) or are pure
Kannada (accagannada, which are represented by fat types in the
369.
1,

of

Mangalore Dictionary),
2,

of

words that have been borrowed from Samskrita without any

alteration (samasamskritas, see

3,

70),

of words that have been

(apabhramsas or tadbhavas, see

273. 370), regarding which it

more or

less corrupted

74. 79. 81. 82. 84

is

to be

from Samskrita

89. 218. 219. 223.

remarked that they may also

(in

speaking or writing) be used in their original form,

4,

of

some words (about 21) that

exist in

Kannada

Samskrita (tatsamas, see

71, and compounds with them,
as it were Kannada and Samskrita.

Of these four kinds

of the

of

as well as in

252,

3)

or are

words the language was made up at the time

grammarian Kesava and

his learned predecessors.

Afterwards during the reign of the Musulmans many Hindusthani

terms were introduced, and also Mahratti words became naturalised in

Kannada.

433
370.

Saiiiskrita

ised or used as

74

words which only change their finals when naturalhave been introduced in

declinable bases in Kannada,

79. 81. 82.

8489.

Samskrita words which undergo further, so to say more essential

changes when adopted by Kannada people, i.e. the real apabhramsas or
It will be sufficient for learning the
tadbhavas, are now to be considered.

way

of their formation

the following alphabetical

frorii

list in

which

all

the Tadbhavas especially mentioned by Kesava as such (about 800) are

included, the terms in parenthesis denoting the original Saiiiskrita terms.

Final

of

Samskrita words

is

($33=5^
^i

IT

(3oO?o);

represented by

or

UZcr

yorl^j;

&

(vz*

Jo-^-

>

?5^O (?5JO);

S5^sS (S55|^^0);

<o.

or
eej^)
to

<J3d>

(?5qi^);

?5oior1 (^oiis^rl,);

SSa^

(557-

ydoad (ad-);
cf.

or

Cf.

yd);

see 55^^;

^ort^ (ssorrsd);
;

^^^

(^

-acrto

(3oorL);

);

or

o); ewti

ro^);

^us^

(ero^y);

or

erosi^

trt
(SJO'JrQ);

^oS^J

(^)0^);

a (^3^); 3r^

(SJ^);

^1
3r| (^CP);
;

=^eJJd

^^

(^ZJ5);

(^JS?0);
(*c

);

^U

^ff.* or

tf^O (*ir3);

f/.

55

434

or

or

or

or

rlrlrd

rra^ (r(363);

or rre;3

7Te>C)e;

rrasS

see

(7Te>zp);

or rU^drl.
o. r.

O^ra);-.^^ ($,); Zc^ (252*0,); 2*^ (^^); Scdod (&^>d);

33O ($3}:
&XO (&3 ): eD^ feSoSor); t^O fdO): ^D^?3 fejD^?3): 2^^^
'O'''
^WjCS

>Q)'"

O^'Q-'

o. r.

?wOci; C/.

or C^

c/.

2!?^); tea*

435

d);
o. r.

c/.

23edri, o. r.

fcio^);

e2rtotf

e^Orl (^dtf);

or
or

t2?s3rt

wort (cijort);

see fck>d>

2iJ3cl)

o. r.

or perhaps

or

d
^rf

^o*);

(3eJ)

(aj>);

or

JS

or

fa);

dort

(a^);

dortos;

or

(al);

(qidor,

see

cf.

^O);

sirtdra
;
f33*)
\
**v

or

</
55*

436

or
see

?^o or

or

or
Or

Or
;

or

ej

cf.

caca/a

^sio^; c/. ao?jjr9);

sS^ff,

or

Sb^M,

perhaps

S5

3oe)?3);

or
ca

o. r.

sg^W

o. r.

?,

or

perhaps
see

or
or
j

or

);

zora
);

(zo,aot;

(sSrsr);

20^ (rfAr

zou^d (cjeord;

c/-

c/.

e3JSm));

fg^od);

rrad or

or

2*^

rs, see

wrs

(fcooj);

sjozc

(si>tfoej);

or

437

ejV

or

si)tf,

sk^C

(s^o^g);
'

ft

3s?

(rfocSro):
\

si>?i

sjozcj

(rfj^d);

C&

(si>*);
^

si)^

s3o?lc&
('s&rfa'h
*
/
V

(dori);
\

Q"

.'dodo

see

or

si); Sj^

GJS^

Sjoo^

^raS;

doosu;

c/.

o
rSj

or ^ora
(s5o^,

c/.

d?^);

Ue)rO

o. r.

sSoppv ^o^?o

sSoi^o (;3jco&3j);

("oSofSSl");

oSo. '.

or

(0>3
or

or

^>r\ T?
r\

(sjDfVxr)
^
3- '

?JZaC3

^do^;

perhaps ^rfo,j

o
fS79oji?iV
^
~B ' '

z?

t>5jj.fo

fs^SjO
>

t)

ii

or perhaps also

d0

^'S^

^'^)

ri

or

"D/

(5Jfe3*);

rfcS

5>Sj0.v,

c^rfo^ or eras&Sw

(^>De>eJ); Sjtftf,

jc)
'

(^);

rfra

(sfira);

^ra

(sjrfj;

);^(^^

sS^a or

Sl^rt
,

o.r.

7^ (Rl^w);

);

SlrfJi

^ZOorf (^ZJ);

(^F);

438

ra

(33o);

Or

73e>&,

and

?3

(30);

or
cf.

or

OF
3o?odc$, see

3o?od

(g?oO);
,

cf.

Cf.

or
(3^)31);

3oC3oio

or
(3irSr)

aJ3^ri, or perhaps agjatf^rt

(?3^^^,

Regarding compounds with them see

252,

c/.

seq.

In the Sabdanusasana there are the following additional tadbhavas:

orl)5

wd

(Soortoe;^);

ewrt

439

);

rfrort

sa
(SXJJ^O);

Aoorid

3oO

Of these

Ss^d (ob^d).

(^j?);

?j

a^s,

d,

[as steal, ac^, dorl,

f\
,

a^crfo, ^r^,

91 tadbhavas twenty-eight (riz.

Z3e>rl,

e^d, AA, Jed^

?rota, Aiortd,

?3e^)

also the Sabdanusasana's words with 63 in

It

[as l

are in

the Dictionary.

See

231.

must not be thought that the tadbhavas mentioned by Kesava in

list and the Sabdanusasana, are all which Kannada contain*:

the above

Kesava himself knew more, e.g.

3J!^o3jri, 3J33o, etc.

others, as the Dictionary will show.

It

tadbhavas are used in conversation by

XXVIII,
371.

As

in

On

Saiiiskrita

may

There are many

be said that most of the

all classes of

Kannada

people.

the doubling of consonants,

so also

in

Kannada

a doubling of consonants
takes place which properly does not belong to the department of grammar.
It

is

now found mostly

in ancient inscriptions (sasanas),

also in ancient manuscripts.

more or

less

440
The grammarian Kesava teaches such doubling
instances in all of which

in the dative plural

1,

3fiF

H9,

"

&
S

or es

tf

e.
,

is

s
preceded by c

formed by

cjo

W33JF

F,

183,

in

also

10),

e.g.

preceded by

d^rtr, ^6

5);

c*, e.g.

155);

rf

180,

-as^F, ^3JF, ws^F,

not the case, e.g. JjS^sJ

compounds

240,

132, a, dative;

s5^3F, tfoSsir, tfjatf^F

#.

also, if that is

4,

and

f\

ri

in the present-future relative participle, if

3,

and

5 c5otfr

2^djr
Q

?:5oF,
55^oc3or,
Q
Q

<J^

a, dative),

following

optional:

where

in the past participle

2,

by

it is

the

in

and

are preceded

r)

i),

JJ^F

22<^, o^,, ^Q

after a repha, e.g.

when there are no compounds,

,,

183,

saasS^F
^Areo,
A
to
<O
9
F"
e.g. d?
c5orfo,

i.

2);

183,

246, a),

^J^F^riocSo

246, a).

His other rules regarding the doubling of consonants ( 109,

194 536 o etc. for essSo etc. in the present tense;
*, for ^;
for

^^o

a, dative

198,

203 3:KO for ^oo in the present, future

in the past tense;

TS

and past tenses;

of

f?*,

?j*,

certain

273

OoO*,

248,

esri^

for

in the imperative; 215,

7,

XT

^'

verbal themes;

negative;

and

205

in

declinable bases;

215,

7,

that of

215,
$*, pg^

where a following consonant

is

7,

d the doubling
that of 0&* in
oijf , ^*

in the

doubled after

for yriO^j, etc.) belong to the sphere of

Bhattakalanka in his grammar Sabdanusasana (sutra 65

00;

grammar.

seq.)

expatiates

on the doubling of consonants, giving e.g. the following instances:

eJ

441
A
A

5^~

toerso,
" a

~,o,
o

v;

.,
t

?2e?i

A
(o.

r
*

-d

ti

eoo

wd^j

yti^JS

eS^j^o r,

?rs,o,

"

'

tsrto^r,

A
io;

A
-S-tfosiFofcS

o,

- 3&ft r,
A

^?jrl^ro, dor1o!jo

irt^o,

33080

o;

*
.

J^F,

A
A

AA

o;

'

r\

Fo,

A^

A
szre

3o,

o,'

A
A
?szjt)!Oo o

.3

0,

3,

A
:

'

'

o,

A
A

_ojsA'

A
A

A'

-A

;
'

^3
3.

A
A

A,

AA

O o,
O

A
A

A
,

IT

of

A
A

A'

.,

Max

mA v,
A

Professor

^&

Midler gives the following instances on the doubling

consonants in Samskrita in his 'A Sanskrit

Grammar

for Beginners'
56

442
59:

p.

g^c-

Je (for

W^F),

(for

it is

d^rJ^,

fc,3^), dcir^

(for

w,3o^c5*

&

shown).

remarks are as follows:

His general

(for rfqJFtf), da^

marians any consonants except

and

h,

"According to some gram-

followed by another consonant

and preceded by a vowel, may be doubled; likewise any consonant preceded

As no

or h, these letters being themselves preceded by a vowel.

by

practical object is obtained

rian) Sakalya, to discontinue

An

372.

this practice, it is best, with (the

by

it

throughout."

(compounds and

words

of

list

arranged

alphabetically

gramma-

others) which are contained in various places of the Sabdanusasana, the

numbers referring to the sutras under which they are found. When a
word is explained in the Sabdanusasana, the explanation in that grammar's
generally Samskrita form
If

a mere number

is

adduced immediately

is

added,

after

in the

it

list.

denotes that the meaning of the term

it

not given by Bhattakalanka and

is

not

known

is

author of the

to the

present grammar.

Tadbhavaof wrfJuU. 160.

rra.

ertriftS.

A washerwoman.

oo

190.

wc^dsS. 80. Cf. ^ortos? i n Dictionary

Sec under rfriodonsa

warrior.

^dor-^ofcs aajonaQrftSrtfarao aa.

':

leather or skins; the

Working
etfo^.
6H& Wfld^. A man who is at the
making ready or decorating horses etc. 425.
eafc tfort. = wz& vsoio 425.
eotf^. 80.
head of, or engaged in, eafrta tf. 425.
Za
lo
in

eSJdoJJ.

(Tbh. of eo2>o2r?).
disunion of others.

Jd^.

67. (Cf.

407.

SS^ssso
S5ydoS3ri.

410.

ecfrrt.

erao,*.

441.

ei*.

A man who
erfsJ*.

in Dictionary?).

e563j3fi8

mistress' betel-nut pouch. 200.

wdo^j'?. sj^rflesjg. A man who

cooks.

^JwJTOOsJdsJo.

Producing dissension or
tsSJ^oSJ.
407.
practices

female who carries her

^QcOJ^. The lower part of a spear. 348.

practices cooking. 545.

= ecfcftrt.
Dative of

410.

e.

The

cseSrf.

265.

A man who

<9d>Ari.

act of touching, etc. 561.

wddcse^.

Grief,

page 101

in the

5
following verse: cicj^icssesa ^e^oJorf^MO^ ecjo <o^esjo ^J)o25 djsoao^ 002^0

3tf$

L)?ijc5''

SA^) 2Jo s5c:'^c^Sy^Jsy?oo

fk^j* ^OT

53^^

enmity, captivity, grief, weeping, and poverty, cheat

slander, hunger, famine, blame,
that district.

beyond;

w?)J)J?o.

manner, so, thus.

bed.

73.

Tbh. of

not to be disregarded.

437.

wdSjrtv*.

There

is

no pillage,

fraud, bribery, theft,

destruction, weariness, trembling, sickness in

$z>J*.

441.

138.

orf^.

erfoyo^..
80.

Not

erf^&Jj.

to

be passed

^93.

ln

that

Tbh. of ezp^ort. 151.

estos^Tk. A joint248.
king's daughter.
edda^cgj. A flower-garden.
azSriort.

(?),

||

443
wdo^. A

73.

of536r.

= edad^.
MOadr^.

Six cubits.

355.

MurlatFdB.

73.

195.

473. 515.

^ato.

473.

Tbh. of

Wrfd

elephant-killer: a

ejjoda^.

wrtd.

195.

as a verb together

akd.fcrfs.
*A '

ecyzsrf.

Either-or.

20.

19. 20.

with

296.
wrtdo

(CJ/l

Addiction

An

Aoris.

wtfrtoO.

557.

etc.

lion.

man.

wU trass* #.

addicted to play. 423.

^^oatfrs.

vile

At that time.

3n3.

402.

74.

there

appears

(It

A male

Wko.

561.

male who has a flower-like eye.

67.

140.

<lt

wSJ^a.

431.

play.

e;jc
o3

etc.

Grinding,

3*. Tbh.

147.

erfrrf..

A woman who is hasty from necessity.

w^j.

in Dictionary).
to

tsejrirre^.

e3z>.

147.

flowering amaranth or barleria.

wdriosoDo..

fo.

oSaS^. Tbh. of

95.

flower-bud.

147.

w<^. Leaving upon,

= woi^rt. 20.
woJ^8.
eoS^. Selecting. 556.
5593^8 Ba^lS^QvMt Placed at the head of, etc.; being engaged in or occupied
An able, great man, 88. 352 in the following
with; etc. 425.
wri^F. (WSJOF).

20.

etc.

Vehemently,

verso: ^JS^oroSo^

3jo$oi>o

e'&i)

male who

2j5-^03JO

545.

80. (A sweet cake?).

65, and in one under 193.
in this

manner. 437.

Two
547.

*&

579.

yy^cSj^ea*.

In a verse under

greatly.

nsirf^Uj.

^o.

Thus,

r.

rising river

'SOrtJC.

90.101.

wajj^jc*.

choultries.

sweet

^^.

cat.

young (*awij).
en)JA.

333.

ijses*).

557.

93.

(Two armies V, see

rat-killer:

Bringing forth

(sro^^^j

Eating.

'a^r^a. Two

-anars.

93.

579.

enjs?.

93. 94.

92.

points.

Giving (*^)^3).

A
J^KJA
m

265.

140.

fluid, etc.

'g^Sra^
'Sl^SJa^).
In the sentence eru35393,oi>rf^do sdcxiod^ ^ort:'

"Sl^rl.

Two

smile. 95.

ends of a garment.

adJ8rS.

Sinking in a

In a crowd

Dative of

ariraa. Twopairs.

221.

333^).

WC3A"? (i.e.

^o*,-

^^-

^(8.

i
>
'95 JFC3 rt.es <r

55.

mango.

*>

e-

23?!r{j3E80 |I.

inclined to play.

is

3ejQy<" Sjoitfd
a

So.ro SKS*

fit

rfj^A 5JU53JF tf96y6QdM

Tbh. of

In the sentence

eruraOrt.
^4

"^

erus^&i Pulling up by the roots, destroying; a disease

See tfu^&S
How? in what manner?
erurf^. s^^o (?).
=
GUrSL 2.
i. =
437.
437.
437.
eru-^ik.
yucfo;
en)^.
u^.
^JS^co. Silently,
euSaaArf. A man
437.
The
431.
state
of
quietly.
being high.
enjrf^rf.
suirfri). Tbh.
who abstains from food. 407.
Tbh. of ea)33 6J. 160.
erue^a.

214.

of the

external

of eruSrf^.

133.

CA)rt. tfssr.

140.
arfri.

uuu'y.

sAfl&Jrt.

441._eru3^.
stupid

etc.

female.

in

So much as

eroS!^.

suffix to denote

140.

415.

Crying

female.

Eight gavudas.

How?

ear.

140.

eruts^.

enfl&Jsrffi.

i^.

what manner?

Plural <o33c3oi>^o

185.

WUK'^O*.

410.

tfus&jrf.

tJ^j^JS?

439.
j

an intermediate manner.

great eater.

196.

441.
aus*^'.

140.

415.
cnfl'^o.

o^oaS. 375.
i^03*. Tbh. of
To cause to reckon, etc. 541.

<orfA^o.

197.

351.

of.

Feminine of eA/3Jdrf^.

558.

out, etc.

this in

a maker

<o^,-

ssoa^. Eight times. 351.

= ojrf^SJo.

.odyorf.

JdrfSoJJV*.

439.

aaoiai^

*-

ort.

3rfo
:

jws^^i^.
Uj. ^^o.

second

wind-eater: a snake.
56

444
546.

Two

lOdKo^s.

<os3or.

odooa

313.

times.

'

Two

ff
.

<ow^J or <oy3>x.

444.

female buffalo.

vicara and amantrana.

<07

21.

|-

dri^tf.

87.

herd of young kine.

*Q. 140.
160.

of flower-leaves.

73.

place of petals.

73.

calf.

87.

otfcfcewseB^.

gigantic swallow-wort. 140.

An upward look, a
140. (Standing up?).
^wdafe^.
aafodA.. Tbh. of
otfoaS. A heap, a crowd. See
<o^os*._*>o.

332.

high view.

The

(ts^r, <O#F).

<ocs^.

particle used in smarana,

The fragrance

A mat of (or for) petals. 73.

<07te|re.
)Vrtew.
A young
A ring of petals. 72.

.3*9333.

359.

knives or swords.

The eleventh day. 160.

633^.
ac^sSd. Seven gavudas. 356.
times.
X^ad^s. A male who has seven hands. 356.
ac^. 70^3303^. Seven

a^)d!>.

fcrtoi

356.

stick

One end
One head.

fcorfo.

A
A

0^-

&:&

which one runs.

416.

brazier.

who makes a
340.

fulness.

101.

*$

a good village.

419.'

A
34.

Zotfj^Orf.

male who

i^oo&TW.

person addicted to reading.

Ldsso^.

n Dictionary.

*5&

The business

sraroios

^etoo^o^.?

man.

great wonder.

fight in

$-$

140.

^r

i,w

of a olekara.

sao^sads. A
^3* '^rorfr^. A male

^o^o^Qri.

431.

not to be disregarded. 441.

is

In a

(A verb from which

566.

2-*-

73.

strong, or rough,

^doeSja^ESrt.

inner garden.

^^j^*

^djoart.

93.

A-

strong

^c&nsQ.

403.

Great graceExcessive love,

A male who is blind of the eyes. 301.

B^oto. Tbh. of
See however s^oijdd -- 3ri?l>. To be angry with, in the sentence
^eSobdd.
5^,
214.
378.
Tbh. of ^ra.^cra.d.
to
sJ
>3
H
s'eS.dodd. 378.
^eS.oJowsd. = ^^oj^dd. 378
w

296.

etc.

&S3.

339.

bone.

^^

^^^-

An

ijs?ij.

female servant, in the sentence wdrfort?^

= ^o^ns^'^

decision that

=cl>o.

420.

oioo* i,^do.

ff

^o^jnsea5 ^.

431.

in,

keJrisa&F.

Lt>rt53aFoiio

rid

k<

2-^rd.

2^

a good village.

in

Ldo^os?.

344.

573.

Loving.

been born

or has

73.

good pearl. 71.

s-^S^ri. 71.2-^ort^. Good Kannada. 55.

333.

fine string of pearls.

to,

101.

90.

^^- A

566.

male who has been born

belongs

2-epaFAd.

2-

One span one sword.

One thousand. 94.

See under edawo*.

quarrel of the inland country.

derived).

561.

94.

^dw --

Rising,

2^e3?e^.

One hand.

z-rfFOfc*.

^rUFra*.

Trembling.

verse on page 78 beginning

is

201.

560.

Pulling or rubbing.

z-^sj.

one arrow. 101.

of a garment.

358.

67.

sheath-maker.

female

One

fcorad

335.

Plural z-rtoirt^.

etc.

Bursting forth,

of the body.

etc.

5*swdod.

160.

cad.

An

eye-ball.

eye.

95.

403.

A man
190.

346.

S^SJJ^
The

SF'ZSS.SJ.

s'aSFtf.

A man who

born in the
s'm'Srt.

Kannada

poet.

89.

has ears of corn,

country.

410.

^^0^0^. A

55.

(tfcwstojtff).

pupil of the eye.

^^^ A male

etc. 73.

420. 421.

a^ooei

rt^Ok*.

s^|oi>.

tf^&S.

water-lily-like

who has
80.

eyes.

^^6^.

A Kannada woman.

fragrance-sucker.

308.

tfs^e*. The wife of a blacksmith, etc. 199.

^^. ^or^sar.
tfd^e^.
male who does any act or work. 412.
A man born ia the country

546.

A
of

445
Karahada.

man who
3*0*0

A woman born

tteaSaiS.

420.

resides in, or has been born in,

3^o

eia

a'aoijtfa'j'

as.

in

Karahada.

Karahada.

Black colour, (as that

^3^.

rt.353Q$dJar5jfS

?foit>rf zre
iS

<

Q)

made

likeness (or form)

wax

of bee's

^SwJ^d^r

#0*3^. A man
*&>

194.

*3->

The word *3J denotes a

dJaazJe as.
&^5l$;5o73
^>
_
:

A.

cloth, blankets, etc.;

of)

one who has a black colour, one who is black. 402. 403.
&Qv- A female who is black.
who has a black colour. 402.

*333s>3rf.

196.

419.

2*)

(surrounded with clay) in order to pour

when one makes statues of gold,

etc.

out (the metal) in a fluid state (into the form),

and other metals

silver

(i. e.

mould)

or at the construction of a house, etc.

denotes the first (or principal) post erected at an auspicious time. 296. See
afco.
?
^rire^. 344. (Could it be ^rir^ Cf. 23drtrc| under ddrir^ ?).
A black pool. 334. ^e^Q. 330, in the sentence c3sd 3v3oQ, (perhaps
;

born from the

sio

425.

^ej^es

2,

g^o. 569.

&od,g.

has been

&^Q-

420.

a Sudra.

(A verbal theme from which

horn of a bow.

4^o,

Who

mutual fighting with stones.

= Sro^cJo..
^y^r!.
superintendent of (precious) stones. 425.
Q
Stone-rain. 93.
&<2,
plantain hard as a stone. 70.

feet,

331.

sadsv*

steal

a 3^3338, a quarrelsome female).

it

^3^

^sc&nsra* O r 53Ct>orR>ra\

83.

comes).

stoc'j^o.

forked

To see a wilderness. 380.

^DCJ^. Fruit having developed.

person addicted to take pods. 414.
saexuo*.
53UJ39rt. A man
Plural sao^oriv*. 553.
n^^os. A village. 419.
who resides in, or is born in, a village. 419.
^^n^' ^ ma l e lame in one

530Jo^?.

man who has

belly

(?).

-S-^^o*.

Low

feet.

403.

91.

*^

small pile.

Tl

A tank with a channel. 305.

"3^^. A
fleet
A
223.
esc^d A black
person.
^a^;A.
^
roa
i e Wh
h
as
e
es
iit e fi re
3n._
w.\derirf*.
y

343.

or

-S-K^c:^

53.

may
*C3 s
UO.

inexact sollige.

with the sickle.

potter-female.

"o^-

trti-bVZ.

93.

412.

tfoa^ree.
small hands. 97.

478.

2O*.

^c ^.
8

^oao

384.

tfoeidoS.

&cc-3sj3

557.

or

HO.

03*.

^j^esS.

^oesjrioJj,.

small house.

Uprooting,

certain imitative

-^cAe^rL
*o^jrtd^oi3. To cut

tfcojjrt.

small

leaves.

90. 368.

562.

Plural tfoQsfortv*.

198.

Red new

140.

-S-^^rS.

*^.-

-3-isJrtJ2?o

-o-XjodSo*.

The abdomen.

Boiling.

esS.

potter.

158.

Tbh. of *o*.

^^*JOsJ.

300.
199.

^^-

small orange. 337.

close, etc.

certain imitative sound.

368.

8s.

Making

Tbh. of

*esS'0tf.

*3,tf.

3etf.

stand for

etc., that

sound.

87.

^,-

condition, etc. 368.

stick or arrow.

An

^eSs3

301.

leg or in the legs.

tfjaoiesJ.

ffosfo^saF.

potter.

male who has a small hand or

369.

*o*.

ejJoSotrf

waoia; a?

A mind deprived of strength by fear or shame. 441.

A man whose mind is deprived of strength by fear or shame. 441.
A woman with a short neck. 328. *>>* A suffix used in S?sj, ^^33 and ^
en)33^S3re;o i?^8.

545.

^^

Bending.

A sharp

warrior.

557.
90.

3^2*.
BrJjrir^..

Sharpness.

See under

sharp knife or sword.

345.

446
90.
c|.

343.

red flame.

'to 3.

343.

= rfrf*..

tfci*,.
**

"8

tO

tfrfoo.
tfcfcO.=
^
2o

Burnished

341.

gold.

^0.

343.

purple
tfdaidd.

*=&*& =
;

(or

a red plantain).

^.

343.

Adeaffemale.

under sracjB
O !0

it

in

3^3*

Cf.

342.

tfoasog.

83.

hair.

90.

(?).

fruit.

reddish elephant.

red seed, in a verse under 193: see

a^waorirfo.

be had

is to

red unripe

red cadjan leaf, etc. 341.

343'.

to

^So,^-).
*

197.

eyes.

^zSJS^eS.

^onsok*.

111.

d^zia^o. The red cocoauuttree (=z3^orto)

^c|orto.

341. 342.

structure where boiled rice

tf~w33. A dishevelled head of

343.

twilight.

83.

SvasB,.
l\ Jj

A female with red

A red kind of rice.

Dictionary.

red lightning, in the instance flsoaAs^ ^a^oili. 218.

^dJo^AS.
A female weapon-maker, a woman of the weapon-makers. 192. ^o3j^z&. A
^w;i>F. A few times. 441.
5-s?o&^rf. Companionhandy earthen pan. 305.
etc.

ship,

344.

432.

Brahmana

of ^
<M

Tbh.

tfttfra.

190.

female.

^o3

140.

tfo.

140.

= ^jao^ozsse?.

379.

^aotfo^r.

with an axe.

300.

&adye33.
A

Concan

379.

staff.

*8osfcB^E8.
^JS^OrtS. To cut

bent eyebrow. 372.

305.

stain on the throat.

peacock.

crying

^.cos^AS.

foosfcsseS.

3<fiv>o&S.8?tf.

*<. 67.
A crooked

155.

sJra.

00$

^Jaw&J.

^Jsyc?3 140.
cB^Zl cd>FTOO On.. Jumping and other surprising art. 441.
a
82.
&s:O3&o>.
g*.
end
of
tank.
Water from the
.

wd
strike

one another with

mountain.

82.

the Kshatriyas.
"O*

408.

rtrao^s.

160.

rts*.

See

riao*.

408.

woman. 329.

Cf.

rt65.

A man

rfjfcdonsw.

Tbh.

itt*.

fid.
See under rtd3fc3rt
perfumes. 192.
fid^i&i See under Tldsyfi
decent woman. 430.

ri^

of

A 3.

The

rftf^rf.
rtdd&3rf.

fid

^**.
female

state of a
zsooSjrf

na3

^y

A man who

is

^ao6?

donarc**

versed in arithmetic.

rtd* in
Dictionary.

seller of

i>?^s ^^ sci)o^.
^SD ndsSJ
engine.

^%o3o^. A woman of
Tbh. of ^H. 143.

wcjo.*?.

67.

rtelarf.

under

See

Valiantness.
false

which they mutually

j^ona^o. The top of a

fight in

^JSt^-TijS.

140.

Tbh. of rid^.

rtrf^Seirfo.

rtrf^.

a^s.

190.

331.

Playing, sporting.

fytiti.

oiw^djss?* odo.

sticks.

in (the business of)

engaged

a certain water-

5JoJjFJcra033 ^.oJj^jssS^?

^^d

d^s^e^s

^^Soiio^s. Or one who is engaged in the guarding which is made in a fort, etc.
fi3orr\o.
by wandering about from watch to watch, etc. 441.
^JsScost^?. The
76.

A man who

rods, etc.

(i. e.

73.

ne3 3&3ri.

548.

See

233-^fia?,

A Domba.

^eso.

80.

441.

narfftS.

Adonaoda*.

fijyfi.

rt^rUo*. Boiled rice of the stick

89.

fic^rteoO

r. rtc

<$& oo^jracra.sSabrtf'o? sdjs.t^^dcso ^n* ero5J3Js

u la

The

nsSsses.

excellent

"With

charming man,

wife of an oil-maker.

The unripe

sjO-^.sosrs^s.

The most

fics*

rtc:

%fi3?

"o

3 O3.

Aert.

cow.

boiled rice which has been turned with a stick?).

rtjac^O).

380.

bamboo

bruises

rt>.

plant Bignonia suaveolens.

fruit of

a whirl,

a tree.
etc.

AckriG.

190.

380.

20.

in the instance

nzfcorta.
fiores'dj.

To

ntfcria.

fi^3on>o

fto

nsa

cut a tree.

380.

sJ^ajrf,^
^
e)

s.

jj

of properties.

296.

See ^do.

rtodir.

Cuffing.

Plural

447
rtJ2-*c*.
140.
rt^o. A seizer or taker. 414.
3
3
I
T
rt
A<
Tbb. of rtjasunsd. 378.
( \> &< *>
*>***
l^ 3*> Seizing,
A gainer or winner.
ri^rraa.
taking, accepting; using, putting on; etc. 414.
rt<raooOrf. A knife (of the length) of a span. 55.
The length
383.
rttrf^tf.

552.

ritf.

'

of a span.

346.

95.

Tbh.

rtjscrfo^.

'Sio^aOrJ.

tf43rta<.

tubular vessel of the throat.

rto

Dictionary).

r^a.

129.

of fo>t3o35*.

rtjstra^"?.

in

^"?. Tbh. oftt*&. 140.

Dictionary).

See

rtJ83o5S3*

rt.e?53$,

(Cf.

140.

rt-Qario.

female servant. 240.

naOrt or

(=

$>30rt.

See

frightened cow.

<?. = rtstrac5^.
^Ort

(See rt^a in

in Dictionary

_ ^SJ^.

tfrfrfr^.

346.

r).

^sors^jotfo

perfuming (of the body) which

is performed with an
unguent of sandal, saffron and other fragrant substances.
441.
tity^- 33^aF?s*. A man who performs that perfuming. 441. (Cf.

acQert^&staFaj^Ea

ritfa^NO.

in Dictionary).

A golden
= j?on33J3

tf

*.

^oasoeS.

343.

133.
tf^aoTf.
with
the
off
Cutting

zJ^Q^.

55.

23Jd.

342.

for the

0,^.

S^S^FO.

^tf.

430.

Beauty.

Sharing

or entitled

in,

four

kinds, in

Tbh. of

riV^eJ.

tsrttfa^.

A man who
A man who

376.

has a

Cf.

Dictionaries?).
imitative

d^jSo^.

sound,

fight

with clubs.

R3e6.

ai^^.

of adverb.

in

d|J3

U.=

oaeJ.

Tbh. of d^^i-

BOB. 140.

&pooj3

cfja?^<3.
dja^rt.
the instance rfoQdo* cptfa'c*. 65.

292.

ssrari-^.

In a verse

Tbh. of oijs^o^.

es^doil.

201.

four
arttf.

143.

305.

z-?5^F.

141.

male gambler.
"*

20.

49.

80.
z^jtftf.

Cf.

A^JJ3o^?5.

a3E3D37)d

In the instance tartoa oseS.

of

143.

jump; springing, jumping.

In the instance SKO aas^^o.

49.

Four-fold;

140.
gambling.
of s^ofcTi*. 134.
Tbh.
sa^oij.
143. 402. (Is d^o^U in Samskrita

Brt'.

spring, a

160.

410.

clever in quarrels.

expert
o<c^rt. 140.

the instance

331.

is

in

is

Afemaleyogi. 202.

376.

See under e^scio*

ssStf.

female gambler.

A man who

(A

^^r.

ts'atf.

(?).

adj.

402.

atfa. Tbh. of

105.

Tbh. of

Tbh. of dpotf.

sort.

in Dictionary.

KJsajnsSr.

134.

Deceit

male who

402.

402.

aarfa-^

tsjsrfo23ara.

zss^oij.

sacrificial cord.

has fame.

376.

part.

e^io^.

arttfsara.

quarrelsome male.

on page 77.
tsjtt'rt.
140.
384.

ways.
143.

eaupadas.
to, a fourth

105.

rf^dri.

570.

20.

#a.

tf4da9Tt =* t*rfOlt.

410.

140.

nails, etc.

Manifestly, clearly.

i?4.
crested female? or cf. 8*^3 in Dictionary?).
sa^o4). Tbh. of diJ^.oi). 376.
Pdj8.
Tbh. of

A man who makes

&*&.

Tbh. of

ri^skTb.

seat.

term

531.

52^*0?

The bearer

An

mutual

See *erto

dja^rrt.

A kind

of a banner

(?),

in

^^
Cutting, paring, planing; a cutter
an abrader the divisor employed in certain computations. 533.
3d zo3441.
Bluntness or perplexity of speech. 20.
OWP^e^eraqJri.
re -

Tbh. of

^rfo.
147.

149.
^soco*.

^^O.
140.

Tbh. of

i.

Joining head to head. 570.

147.

*&*= *&

Bringing. Plural ^Jfaonv*. :.

itfsotf. RcsFciJCS^;.
Decisively, certainly.

3*)Fdj.

448
id.

i'Prtrao^. The redness of

Sprinkling, etc. Plural ^sSortv*. 562.
ess^d.
^3. 140.
sses'rt.
leaves.
73.
Becoming dry, etc. 565.

20.

young

The

tree Terminalia bellerica.

s^rtitij.

82.

90, in the verse

Suffering, etc. 565.

f
Plural 33K v* O r 33cwrtv

^^ s

33<$r\.
|

(and other plants or trees).

SJMJA.
quoted under SssoB.)
the produce

A woman

of)

Tbh-of t,^^- 376.

Srtore^.
Sdd. Tbh. of?, 3d- 376.
Sdjarf.

378.

etc.

55.

S9sJ.

^osS

Tbh. of

&XJ30,.

160.

oscillating staff.

66.

green grass.

344.

3d&
is*.

3<i3J.

361.

80.

3.

160.

197.

Becoming wet,
562.

(It is

iJaU
(

3ja33.

rt.

aborts*.

^t&oAS.

i^so--.

Xine times.

553.

^^.

female

florist.

Shining,

191.
s.

i>aec5
Sjsosras. A place of appearing. 87.
big male. 403.
&QCCJ. 140.
%^Jra. Having three pits (?). 376.
^^?. Three cows.

_ ^^jja).

Tbh. of

^S3d.

Three faced

^v

name

124.

df^^^.

liberal man. 65.

very
*

(savage) bodily power of a

Qeaotf. ^cajJ*.

441.

Excessively.

561.

^cisaosc^.

of an Arhat.

^^w9

aj^ra.

Page 65

tfiksato.

Having a stick,

140.
etc.

A man who

3;s3?rt.

c33^y.

is

w&

is

373.

Tbh. of a^oissdo.

Making

377.

haste.

the instance ddo*

drfoQj^o.

^*.

To

satisfy,

cta^rf.

Tbh. of

140.

s^Art.

3c4-. 140.

nsrf

^S &tato>jtatogj3dd>i&<durc>a

without fear and deliberation.

possessed of that

Tbh. of a;333;^tf.

~;a?^.

Qraj

Qrao.
w&

man who

in

402.

d^jyi ^So^o fiac&atalt tioatoea ^.$-8. A mint. 378.

A man who sells corn. 405. ^3. Tbh. of -^iW. 160.

See

etc.

aaesj^yi. in
Dictionary.

^J3d.

In

302.

chariot.

^ros^rg.

$Jd3\.

3ja

*^^
as\

o^^^r

fora

Swinging,

361.

140.

Tender

a term for a certain female).

tree (used)

85.

Plural

etc.

i*C3.

5.

i??iJ^o.

ii^PS*.

is^^oo
In a verse on page 100.

irSord.

140.

s^otr.

^^=.

55.347.

20.

qf&^neaelo'. C/-.
in the verse under 474.

The

%4

562.

in Dictionary?).

3u^

(Of.

Smearing, etc. 561.

Kine persons.
^oS-ee ro.

ijsoi^.

561.

Delicate lustre.

^Jsdsj.

^ojsetoj^!.

534.

Bartering,

Tbh. of

87.

for kine (to graze).

Taking.

Plural Jcrtrv* O r iwwrfi?*.

SjatfsJortv*.

iijsO^.

See

*^tfrio.

manner.

etc.

^s4^S3S

140.

^or.

Tbh. of ^oSjs?:^.

20.

etc.

^rtsJ.

thin or delicate belly.

an unfirm

A jungle

ijssinarfj.

mass of gold. 332.

etc.

Sad^^s*.
See &$3ou?bew

20.

'

eO

= art.

Tbh. of
See the third verse on page 100.
!>rt. = 3ri.
*)dJS
3x$do
A wicked, etc. female. 197.
See
N
10 (?).

378.

?ke*.

3rt.

Sewtf.

Plural acsJorfv*.

clear, etc.

Becoming

193.

376.

^3.}oa>.

Sort. 3J3^^EB3^rg. \Vhirlingly, etc.

s$3o.
296.
What is thin or delicate.

Bright lustre.

An

A^rt. AUjcS.

Tbh. of

sacwn.

49. See aU,<3 in Dictionary.

557.

00*.

saeoAS.

The palm

her livelihood by

in (gaining

engaged

193.

the palmyra tree.

or 33j.

140. 193- (See the verse

(i. e.

QAa

441.

a wild or savage man.

Sra^),
(OtAcS*).

rfj^ojx

Playing, sporting.

Tbh. of P^OJJ.

377.

Tbh. of P,3oJ;. 377.__doaojtf. Tbh. of P,3ww. 377._rfj3rt. Tbb. of

449

377.

faults are.

e33B. Tbh.

Two

^J

e53s f
ds^dl. A

of

& See under

402.

night watches.

e53fift^.

escort.

129.

= dj

do3oi>.

377.

who worships an

female

A man who makes

A woman who makes idols.

c3<3)?A3.

ficing to the gods.

= do3oi>.

SndJSo.

c3?ddo

d<3rt.

410.

dtart.

djs^ok.

ctoaoo*.

111.

idol.

= d)Z3D3. 377.
= cfcsiwtf. 377.

stops'.

378.

idols.

410.

192.

t3<33 y

<3d$rt.

A man

cSjscs.3^.

Sacri-

whom

in

certain coin, a drachma.

PjOfcaso.

person who is
rich woman. 402.
tfsard Tbh.

418.

doorkeeper.

tftforto*.

addicted to receive money, etc. 383.

$333^. A
F<
of tf^ r 123.
Holding,
bearing, supporting; a bearer, supporter, pre^^
3
rfrt^ae.
in Dictionary?).
server.
93*. 466, in a verse.
(Cf. na
353^?
33.
A
who
is proficient in laughter (or jest) or addicted to it.
man
0tt$xtof<
-

o^o
423.

oSrtea^F.

201.

rfstf.

etc.

bow,

cW> q.

441.

v.

91.

193.

(Cy.

tSwo*

345.

TOca^cfc.
3

jraeo

.^. A

^303*

jsaa^g.

dcfo,

long

foot.

53.

160.

SKCtoFtf.

diluted with water.

fe3r!.

SKO* rgs
is in

etc.

on

KUO

92.

^^

female with long

long row. 93.

asfcd-joix.

$33.

A man

A man who

Tbh. of S^SJJ.

~
3ds:33,73;us

The

place of a water-pool. 87.

^dSD.aj33 J?R! a33i 33 7oO3,ck.3drai?y8.
t)

5><3oFC&O3ra.
i

rafts or

also otherwise.

?aJjv

ff

441.

A woman with

door (which

S^F
A man

"o

the habit of practising with water

the

Not

which water goes out.

KSJftrtFao^o^do. The opening through
s?0o ijatf. To wash with water. 292.
R?30FsSrt. Buttermilk

StrtFcl.

who

140.

c33C|UjijCi},

$oi>ort.

87.

401. 407.

practises or observes religious observances.

90.

with four

ftrfJSE?oJj. A man with a long forehead.

Ss^JSo^. 80.
f&cfcddO. A female with long
with a long back. 329.

S^J^e^. A long pregnancy.

29. 194.

328.

33&>n.

hands.

or rf^rf^P?. 461.A long or large head.

$cfori|L
oJdotSDO*.

32C3O*.

90.

etc.

saoto^d.

327.

A male

be ruined.

afa*

c^o*.

uses herbs,

cracfcAS.

441.

rfo^cjzj

53.

441.

with four

saw^es.

district-weight,

339.

(?).

A body become

193.

A male

navigator.

S^^o

has
etc.

poison.

etc.

district to

A man who

Small power,

A man who

^c&mnac^.

it.

To

cto<xft>&.

ns^o.

made

fomalo with long braided tresses.

A man

acfcdc^.

e3<rero

uses herbs,

pupil of a long eye.

ftdinao*.

with a long body.

328.

sirfoaQdj.

artificially

factor!.

long extent

The

SC&rtEo^O.

eyes. 29. 194.

or

0^3*.

82.

the sentence

sado woij.

fingers.

Slight anger.

424.

3333

was ruined.

sdo&sdoJjiT*.

101.

33^33 s^aoass^ra 33

in Dictionary?).

false, firm, in
S6j|j0jj.

proficient in laughter (or jest) or addicted to

Four gavudas. 351.

33^^.
A male with four heads. 97.

33>o.

294.

district

is

A woman who

cWdon.

c3303^)ri.

arms.

who

sickness

plant, a herb.

424.

etc.

*%& aojjsa

by old age,

decrepit
.

female

rf^)do)7Jo.

N^

citf.

k^9

Being extinguished, etc. Plural rf^rfrtv*. 568.

rfA*.
A muscle bundle (?). 332.
534.
rfdrtitoj.

is

so

one whoso habit

A
rfo&ft^oix
182.

sole thighs.

narrow

that)

one has

to

man

is to

cross rivers

with soft thighs.

5fcri>v\3e3rt.

squeeze through.

72.
7:2.

450
in

{3?3sj.

Bearing
man, etc. 332.

cSdascD*.

firm condition of

73.

sunny place.
f
rS-fc^.
561.
(&ec3
569.

The

^3

Tbh. of

tf~.

376.

The

3joz33oi>.

rfdo

abode-,

&$&, A

304.

bird's nest.

537.
parts or limbs.

five

having

441.

*&

*JM&*.

Tbh. of

his

by
200.

33

^^ars*.

eo

master: a servant. 407.

A man who

rfraorto*.

path, a road.

130.

Qo*, in Br-e^o*

^A

Tbh. of

585.-^.

(?).

A man who makes

441.

path, a road.

431.

rf^.

**&>,.

(i. e.

407.

^^3^.

left

419.

202.

JjJJ,?33>A3.
w

rf

80.

a dwelling place or
a variety of

srf3o ? ,

Tbh.

142.-^^.

431.-

sSe^^sJ.

receives

557.

fruit

one who makes verses.

sounds to join
of

160.

3ti,7ft>&.
eo

414.

s^rfo ri^^r&^tAflt

comes.

?)

140.

ctood.

being produced.
sj^. Ripe
sJraDcS.
receives ripe fruits (as a bribe?). 414.

A man who

cScTooarre.

3&&3. Swallowing.

or has been born in, a town.

192.

Caries.

381.-

srcSoa^e.

Tbh. of 3330.

sun.

Fivefold,

side, a faction.

(as a bribe?).

c^oo.

sj^rUdo.

resides in,

441.

partisan.

332.

flies.

549.

49.

female silk-weaver.

of

A man who eats the remainder of the food

iftfd^. A female commander of an army.
money

neighbouring

Tbh. of 3?^.

82.

disk of the sun.

3Jrfe:3re .
t

A man who

ztfarirfs.

160.

341.

fruit.

rfUjrfrt.

140.

(full)

in Dictionary.

33,53^?}.

Green, unripe

3oa.

verbal theme from which 3><33> (3J83>

wilderness

Seeing, sight, etc. Plural etoccfcrf**.

See

cSdsasrf.

74.

life.

cStriurU,.
?).

Aotfnazfc.

or sjs^cl

140.

381.

seize land, etc.

Se^es.
c35|jd.
of the chief officiating priests at a Soraa sacrifice.

<^^- One

124.

To

<8^.

rSdow5

561.

etc.

mind,

sJoi)3*.

adoiosio

See u^a^oi)?^.
rfoQj^tfj. ad^ rfosej. d^si^o. Ten hundred, a
thousand. 363.
Ten
persons. 363.
tfo&jao^o*.
sJoDJ^. dsJaaOBj^. Ten times.
rg.
20.-33dwJrt. A pearl-merchant. 424.Quickly.
in Dictionary.

Tbh. of g^.

147.-5rf3*or(.

Tbh. of rfo^ort.

A man
328.

- do^EB.

who

cooks, etc.

cooks, etc.

Tbh. of
410.

192.

an army,
Fighting.

woman

2*e^cxbrf.

= 333doijdd.

A Brabmana woman.

202.

the caste of snake-catchers.

peacock. 547.

B3^>r&

a snake-ornament. 441.
esorto.

The hind end

82.

ssaeod).

- 333dr^. =
192.

board-like

chest.

140.-333*rf.

SJS^^SSF.

A man

Plural
fight).

Tbh. of

3333>rbsD.

353^'dra'.

202.

(Is Tamil.

sssoj^orts

A jumping

csdF^.

A woman who

3335\><?A3.

SJ^oJjrfd.

See ^ESFS.

333 a.

naoix Jumping, etc.

meant?).
See saaads*. ((y. Tamil. 333i3J, to

addicted to quarrel.

384.

singer.

378.

ff

A drummer.

410. 411.

<Bs*^*rt.TO*rt.

353Cl>ri.

ss^oJjnDd.

378.

l60.-^^C3

ISl.-Ses'rt.

with

iguana

15 .

553.

art>3o5i?O3
(?).

3333Qn.

snake-killer:

82.

3533F3.

female of

a mungoose; a

snake-eater: a peacock. 546.

ss^d^. A male with
353*^.
333?N.
&o^
of
Tbh.
140. 160.
(Cf.
sS?^).

of a garment.

seller of long pepper.

9'3.

409.

fc^d.
2>5tf.l

The back

of the head.

Tbh. of &<&#.

349.

140. 160.

451
A speaker

Tbh. of tftadds^ 133.- 3t*waQ.

of

3&>3GA3. A female
Fixing, as an arrow, admitting, etc. 557.
A hind leg. JJ69. -s5raS^rf. One who has a wife.

A man addicted to, or

3^*^o d,XB5
sScs'ftoTto.
A man with a moon-like forehead.
s

areo

424.

woman
132.

182. 328. 330.

with a moon-like forehead.

ln

3prto3.

3z3jy*.

a river;

i,

2,

an ornament

327

- sto^eSokv6

To cause

402,-^praO?^.

to

(cf.

in the instance

fight,

J&ra^zk. To cause (somebody)

537.

WrSobo
jSoix>

dJ3^63rtS!c3

Plural ^pa^rtv^.

who

is

to,

^P^rt^o.

c&re^JF.

in Diction-

ro^)St^;
4P^tf. A golden

^praSAd?

make (something)

541.

wcirfo.

ii<do. 537.

etc.

addicted

to

z>z

4ftfe^. An ornamental dress. 441.

333^:3^. A male who has a (big) belly, in the instance

93.

'.

140.

560.

311.

ary).

402.-tfrart.

occupied about, women.

aSca^.

Plural s&rtSrie*.

Entering, etc.

192.

florist.

cae^c&sv*

a verse under 140 (page 100):

33<tt3tf.

329.-

lies.

^P^d^o
6

sheet of gold. 93.

golden stone.
SGS.-JfiJ^orte^.
and busy with acquiring, gold. 424.

e^oiio

fight, in the instance

= jgsraQTio,

staff.

n the instance

3s*$3. Joining,

A man

55.-*rf^rt.

^^S-

67.

sJJiio^v*.

igpflsj.
Nourishing, etc. 561. ^s
Beating; a blow. Plural sSpoJJort^. 555.
An outer tie, etc. lOl.-JSpesrfob*. The upper part of the hand. 101.-

An

outer fort.

101.

posteriors.

Cows

of flight

sSseadJza'rf 7lc|.

^pajtortFEj.

73.-5^^^rfr^.

(?).

swelling at the

Bearing on the

73. -Jgpsujtf.

^^

A new
tsaSQ.
elephant.
tfrfco.
A
beautiful
zsrf*.
91.-*^
93.-5Sarf
New
cloth.
choultry.
antelope.
91.
A new balance, etc. 101. s2P^ iJ3?y. A new garden. 101.
^prf iJ3^.
55570 z3ci)dA)*). Fine loose pearls. 87.- &* 3rfJ. A new
camp. 87. -3&* ^o^A new pool. 87. 30^ aja^Hjj. A now artificial structure. 87. ^^^^. A
head,

etc.

new woman.
89.

sugar.

jgpcjjart^.

160.

^"^

557.

w<3.

wonderful

46.

A wonderful mountain. 92. J^P^^^. Beautiful

M
verb
from which
SJWrto.
140. Plural
3Spt3^.
(A
comes).
574.
^P?^Name of a man. 80.
JJP*rl
Tbh. of
169.

J&3?3;3&j.

&&$

&W*.

Used as verb
463.

intransitive in the sentence s&

5

^pteades

Oh! woe

to

Parts to bo scattered.

me!; unexpectedly.
33 OJJ rf^TJ*

193

a verse).
See Ji

(in

20.^^.
^33

V
^p
Pratisthana denotes the eating of the remainder (of the dinner)
<P

of

him

(i. e.

of the master), one (who does so) sitting

down

in the

very same

which the master has eaten, risen and gone. 407.

^93^2. A female
of noble birth. 191.-Urt*a3F. A mindful woman. 201.
Urt^So*. A tigerplace in

skin.

379.-Wort^. A man

round breasts.

328.

u^rirfo wcsOa^o.

W^r?.

536.

A man

420.
w^dstfoiiv*.
on the road, a traveller,

-Ud*.

of Bangala.

A woman

with

in the instance

female who beats; or a lean female.

57*

A woman
380.

541.

wraao.

(Tbh. of

333. 344.

up.

make

beat,

u^d^aiJtS*.

WS^

a3J8**

"raoo.

Ud3).

To take a cudgel.

zoSrS-feV*.

the instance 2J3AAd>

in

5
(Tbh. of 3J&3 trade?).

80.

rf,S? c/.

182.-

of the north.

To cause to

20<3A7k.

w^^do

siofcs*.

aorsKJ.

&;3oOorf 3a

80.

329.

"Water, milk, etc. drying

What

^dosto, dJ^da^eSs.

born

is

in the

Uofc.
a flash of lightning. 420.- uaJ^<2. a,3,$Fg. Quickly. 20.
wd^.
In
Tbh.
of
147.
the
278.evening.
*,*
zjo3^oi>.
6

A naked

whereon (somebody or something) comes. 332.

A vain man. 172.- wa^v*. A vain woman.

A man

A
To

sWjfi.

uwo

66.

great valiant man.

The making and

uw. Living

a verse under

lustre, in

grammarian. 408.
Tbh. of asrtotf.

flesh,

- Od^c3. = aa^rt.
A man

32|ojo.

Tbh. of ^03^-

346.-^3^srt.

z3?-&.

239C3*.

87.-tfcrrt<?.

H4.-a3ec: 4

gare, 2>i3d.

A camp.

A man

^^)3ja0?.

on deception
eSortao*.

(?).

-ddd.

^(3.

&&

Stiffly, in

whitish male.

342.
^wijlFg.

^3
A

^^?J-

20.

^^?^to.

white man. 403.

Instance aS^odoo

zort o.

6y.

consonant

To enter

aukdj^rt).

406.-

lute-player.

which the plural

halting place. 55.

is

z3dort*,

3<cao^9._3e33

66.-2J-5rtS.

a^v

ra.
i

Tbh. of

JO^^j. '^rfSj5.
Deception, fraud (?). 415.

Uc^ofiS.

zjjs^n.

A sunbeam. 341.
tf^-

90.

140.-

rid^a. 102. Plural za^oJo^o*. 884.

in
Dictionary?).-^. 140. Cf. 8fy

^3?do, of

3o wd. The

147.

73.

place of living.

flstort.

living on deception (?). 415.

193.

TleoJ^r-S-drss.

stone: crystal.

343.

87.

WJrtJ& =jjjrt3.

See

One who

Tbh. of ^onaO.

z3c&3jrio. 538. C/. ^ff^rfo in Dictionary ?

38^ 8*>4wt>.tctx3j^7to. 380. ttttirt,

5e^*. 233.-Oca>crac8.

147.

(Of.

ana.

^J3^o. Silently, quietly.

rough manner or custom. 369.-*&"

39oi)V*

white female.

an abode, etc.
3d. Tbh. of 9ao.
or

zi^oJj.

194.

(A certain verb). 507.

in Dictionary ?

82.-W3CO-3ra.

i33Q.

swelling of a wale.

233^- Tbh. of ti.OMX UQ.-t.Mtf.

white woman.

The

W3roJK^ra^.

of rough manners. 369.

aofcv*.

102.

20.-239|.

160.

A
419.

425.-

wartOr?.

160.

Tbh. of n^d!>.
hollow of the sky.

408.-W3rfdrfrt.

418.- ^SAOTCJ^. =

In the second verse under 468.

20.

regular lustre, in a

Tbh. of s^tfdca.

living herd of kine.

happy

wad^.

in wsttSoijadodo.

u^rraca *.

to^a. 381.

uo?*itx Living,
steady

uc^d. 140.

doorkeeper.

rtrtrfrt^rs.

wa'^tfrto.

431.

140.

waridca.

140.

resides, or is born, in the sky.

W3

898:~W^Oft. =

(?).

140.

araACrt.

twrioTkGD*.

-^9. Abigmountain.
331.-^^. Strong effort. 66.-

A man of great exertion, etc. 329.

^esao^. Abundant duck-weed. 66. -

selling of bracelets.

verse under 140.

= ueM

asoft.

66.

seize the pot-stone pencil.

101.

foot.

ue"3v.

172.

road

utfoFsfortv. 572.

with a strong hand.

great villain.

sky:

Z0o5^a3j8*,

-"d^. A

20es 3 53S3

^fdo. Coming. Plural

Go

203.

Hot.

See

193.

20JS^oSr^r(

A woman living
= UJ3^)ri. 415.

rfjacxSjF^^tsJws. The sun23^jO.

a3^rtJ863 ?
Hot rice.

^orfo*.

z3ii tfjsc: 5

Manifestly, clearly.

aJJS^oA.

20.-t3tiJO.

hot flame.

343.-

453
A hot potsherd.
A hill-miide.

..

jo

to

343.-

336. 341.

371).

379.- z56JJj*^.=

hill-stroara, or a hill-path.

tf^dv*.
zi

83.

102.A

fierce female.

z3Ujcrrarfo.= i3Uj,narfj.
tj

379.-t3yo.dett'.
M W

379.-^- 80.-

Holes'.

23da;t*>.

rtg,.
(Originally 23djirU|x= ddrtr^.
frightened iguana (?).
6
82.-ddrtr^. (Originally tfdrtFfJ). rf*irto. A frightened cow. 83.- tf&^ao
=
tfzSs trio.
The skin of the back. 80.-tf?%0. A hot flame. 343.- diSjB.tifc.

'-CO

"^

riaojBQ.

343.

341.-

Hot ashes.

tfjtwiziJri.
C9
e*

10

(or tftfO).

23-?

to

rain of white

dtfd

(or z3tf). #oJo^33adFs. Frightened from fear, etc. 20.White cloth. 223. 347.-3<Jrt*. White flax. 336. - z3fy A white
8
tfcs
female. 197.- 23w^. 140.
140.- z3<dofi. A woman who deals in, or sells,

93.

colour.

193.-23ion^.-23don.

roots.

3rio.

90.

?3^J3dj.

See

Hotness.

23<?Jje,

z3s^(dj.

343.

skooaO.

hot potsherd.

An impediment

z3^rc?.

193.

e3rfoO.

trader.

of roots, etc.

hot flame. 334.

e3ooJ^dd.

329.

343.A man

&{C3~;i>ON3^ajra3 &j3Q3,qi,;jz3rfs. An old dirty

^jarfos'. 3a* (23jsrfo)
mat
of
and
other
441.
cloth,
things.
piece
rf^s*. A man
who puts on an old dirty piece of cloth, etc. 441. z3.efy A vociferous woman (?).

clever in

197.-23*cy.

into a pool.

^orfrf^^ri.

metre.
house.

412.

143.

rijaotfdeS.

a mango.

348.

A cluster

of

193.

&

A man

dotfjeas*.

rf^^. Bonding, etc.

See ^ra.c^
& in Dictionwho composes the madanavati
140.

The

S^rfrf^o.

rf^a^^js? audj^^
To cut a tree or wood. 382.

SJdjrrtjaa*.

Srao&Stf.

mangoes.

379.

See under

Disregard.

^orforrtjacs5 .

66.-

foolish laugher.

So"*.

348.

Ttoodonaes.

^efo^e?.

3a*>AA.;to*on. 193.

348.

^JS^orirfri.

140.

small branch of a

articles of

wood-pecker; a wood-cutter,
3JtfortQ.

3odrtQ.

28.190.

380.

129.as.

3od> Forte co*.

379.

Tbh. of

do^JOai.

5.

^ocgjcc'.

a carpenter. 548.
aodotfje drt.
382.
it.

dorfiaj^o

rf^d^diE^^aiiO BSr.

3od3rO&3ri.

89.

554.

female.

in Dictionary.
60. C/.
dJt3|S3rf
Water of a pool. 380.- d^aj^ea*.

ifcajK

dorfJSo*.

^rioaw*.

380.

Plural noc^orttf 5

579.

^orf^do.
ary.

*>

See

(?).

A washerwoman. 200. -

^.
fall

HO.-^^raAS. A Brahmana

140.-z3JBC#.

Deception, fraud

To

&Qtfo-

305.

spying.

^ras5>.

The splendour
348.

tree.

dJa^oA.

talkative

Tbh. of

z&rt-

iiraortao*.

mango

= J&cJrfQ.

Rice with a drug in

talkative

man. 415.

of

Sjaosiado.

woman.

djsdojrtov*.

An opening bud of a mango. 332. aras&JSy The flower of a mango. 348.siraOrt. SJ39o3oo ^psJ?ioao.
A man who
dja^fsc*. A couple of mangoes. 348.
worships Mari.

413.-^^^J.

that measures a fathom.

female

Tbh. of ^^add. 160.

structure.
etc.

545.

saw v*

See

$prt-.

Another iguana(?).
drae33Qrt.

90.

florist.

192.

Jftatfo. =

sfta^rfrt.

Sjatfd.

s^d QAVSO^

3J3rtJ8?F3.

82.

\ male

florist.

staflf

416.

See
^Ja^^J. 488.

&?<y;jo* ^<^ort.

3a,B.. An
Sj

A man

tt

artificial

addicted to making,

^Jacj^do
3Jaa B. Sec also the
following verse under 193:

rfj:tt^P.

-3jaw^. 140.=

140.

SJaonwads.

>

o^rDo

.
||

- Jisaoes'. An

artificial

stream.

87.-

454
560.

Plural OJrfJrf**.

etc.

Becoming great,

-OJ^. Past participle of ^8.

562.-S.JQtf. Tbh. of

344.

etc.

482.

a^e* IGO.-^

bhava noun of

a crane.
147.

3oo^.

547.

Three

541.

dMrfj^t*.

aoortotf.

68.

kos.

fire-fly,

Pounding. Plural

33.

566.-

out, etc.

it

spit

Three

sioo^J3,S.

fisherman;

Tbh. of 3oo.

riJO^S.

mouth with water and

to rinse the

aoosk'SAAdo do?Acoo aeso.

*

?-

dodoj?r.

See

3o:>a>.

A.

(A certain verb).

K,

10>.

ooOrf.

aJ2orfo. a3d"g 3j*3g?&e

Tbh. of

To cause

Sojs^S&rio.

Instance

3^. 566.

- aioafcsw^ezo.

506.-

etc.

crores,

559.

Closing, etc.

A cluster of buds. 73.

budding pomegranate. 74.
pJftjHto^ortO*.
3ua;33- Three choultries. 93.- 3oji>f raorto. Three
Three bankers, etc. (?). 94.
Jo
to
A

ends of a garment. 93.

3JJz3^,. Three halting places for travellers, etc. 68.
s&oraaatf. Three thousand.
3oozSj3 ?Q?o.
94._3oora;>.
94.
935* FO. Violence,
ct
eo{>
V
m>
A
man
to violence, etc. 423.
audacity, etc. 423.
disposed
s&oraj^B.

Three heads.

536.- ^ok-

morning.

Eighteen

3:u?<:3

73.

or

bundle or cluster of thorns.

go down,

68.

the instance

etc., in

Three cows.

- sojcwonrio.

93.

20&3,rto

3M3i>rd. Thrice. 88.

the body.

Three spans.

hand.

331.

S i\

woman. 59.

okv*.

A woman

140.

33tf.

or town.

tfrf.

66.

92.-s3j3^5j.

143.-^?0^.
Striking,

ndodo.

^^^.402.

chew.

tender bud, in

^Jtw^Oti.

^?^J30

420.

to

s3oe3s3Foi).

with a kind

140.

precious pearl.

word.

sSodsrt.

ff
.

heart.

t>

Plural

A man who
drfcxJjra.

409.

a verse

See

The
sSoole^o*.
.

under

Cu

skin of

A man

with a soft

442.

^sDde*.

with a kind heart.

14.

A
^^^f

^^^- SoO^o. Black pepper.

has been born in a superior village
A
420.
village or town.

182.

A man who
superior

Scooping, etc. 561.

Striking,

^-wcs.
-

97.

^jjartoix. 97.

62.-^^ol>g

A man

^ Jei^- An excellent

etc.

(u. tr.) to

353.

Tbh. of dj8. 160.

3oc3..

seller of black pepper.

To cause

3oC?i).

89.

gentle, etc.

To immerse

male with three heads. 352.

Cu

3oreArt.

in Dictionary.

93.

male with three hands.

t>

352.

etc.

thorns. 72.

rt^.d^v 5 sypwo
sooaooAAdo. 536.
w

slxoew^oix.

352.

Three servants,
.

Sojsddojx

female of the east. 140.

360.- 30)0^09.

thrice.

^ojodsa^v*.

Three heaps. 353.- ^o-etfoj^.

3\xala&kThree parasols. 353.

sunshine of the

first

aw 52^0*. = SoooJ^o 5 354.

sjo*?3). A prickly garment.
66.- soJV^fto*. A door of

Prickly ends of a garment.

let

Three times,

a,??* 33033*.

bumblebees).
Three persons. 360.

SoooJjjO*.

^^^^^.
The

ff

68.-^o^Ao

101.

etc.

ties,

83.

to the top.

(or three

feet-,

cluster of thorns.

Three

^^^,,^.

Three spans.

68.

360.

knot from the root

etc.

^^^-

colour.

Aoc?.

dJS?do^do.

sS-otdorte*.

sSo?^^- An excellent
140. -3&1&3. Tbh. of 3a<
92.

579. Plural 3a<a^rfv*.

549.

stecri^a.

569.-

deceiver,

etc.

guarded-, one who guards. Instance

tf^3^
tfssoi)?*.
of
Tbh.
160.
oa^^osoio. ^fonadcqioaas. A
is

455
295.-O3W93 C39.

-00. Tbh.

of i>Q
159.-doo2l (A
_ uorirt. woiiOo
See
laugher,
3od)tfj^t3rt.
8<L7io;3c. A man who lives
wo'^A. A woman who
by taking bribes. 401. 415.
wo^n3.= oo^n. 193. oo^^rfrt. = votfn. 196. we8.
takes bribes.
193.
!

chief of horsemen.

197.

feminine noun).

deeply designing woman.

of
wa^&i.
era^o^. 160.
3rt

Tbh. of

born

in

SrtF.

)3dc3&.

20.

a^Jorrae^.

To pass

Tioba^Fg.

Tbh. of 3,d.
v-/

ra

80.

Tbh. of

To

a^naw*.

140.-

$3.).

- 3<

20.

o.

rfew.

140.

A man

Tbh. of rf^w.

384

3oaronda?3

Ttoodonao.

60.

f"

Two words

rtreo

33o

s'jsoi

^Jd^yoJjjrfdjsv*

rtcs^^rfrf

MMftfcka^o

the disregard of the combatant

441.

441.

147.-^*.

the following verse under

in

combatant,

u&

nsearf ^J9o?rdf?oSo

Tbh. of

402.-Jfcfc3,x

rfrw.

?i

with an umbrella.

= doo.
382.-

see the moon.

s^jssaoiida&^dt^.

^ozo

A man

Dictionary V).-3d?rf.

That has poison. Instance:

20.-3 i od. Tbh. of aaa33

?jf80^rgj s!w^
r-a

in

which denote the particular limbs of a hump-backed and dwarfish man.

man who is small:) a man who is hump-backed or dwarfish.
Tireo^. (A
rf^rtUrf,.

Tbh.

?).-yrfort.

Clearly, manifestly.

59.

etc.

3*53^.

rio3.

^J.
rs

(= W3orl

140.

wj

(Qf.

Manifestly.

140.

441.

7irej2r.

-:&,*.

TfctoatfFg.

over,

382.

etc.

Lasciviousness, lustiness, lewdness, dissoluteness.

153.-^.

at^nsra*.

402. -deo.

197.

420. -3^o.

Varala.

es'.atcirf.

140.

3j6JruJUdo

rfdido

rfjsos'o^

a warrior's valiantness, sharpness, even

\\

who pushes away

fierce soldiers in a

vehement

2J 'l 3i
Tbh. of
fight one has to call the essence of valiantness.
rfdSr^r!.
A
406. A man who binds, confines or checks the voice or tono(?).
?33;3f|A3.

female saravandiga.
of young plants,

in

etc., in

Tbh. of tiv.

?&tf.

man

192.

tiQtt.

a verse under

139.

a row or

in rows.

A male

of TX>$&.

147.

Ttoda?^.

Tbh.

143.

asoesjoara.

545.

?33AdFe3oi).

87.

?O^FSJ.

193. - ?5A;3<sod.

aads^ Tbh.

addicted to contracting debts.

saAdJStF^.

Tbh. of

138.

scioraaws.

356.

*>rf^.

With the sound of

AOdd, *3c33d, AOuad. Tbh. of

aftdi.

*w^i.

378.

who

is

disposed

capsula,

tearing

191.

193
off.

-*>*.

82.

to, etc.

in

screaming iguana (?).- *<3-

160.-

Asdis^.
Plural TkAaort?*. 554.

Tbh. of

^?^oortsj.

a verse.

place where calves are

20.
sentence Art^
378. Cf. *0oi>ricj, etc. in Dictionary, and Axdodd, e tc.-A3O33o. Tbh. of
296.
A?oijrfd, A?o3oa3d, A;oio^3d.
*^. 140, in a verse near the end.
etc.

male with a thousand heads. 356.

with a thousand arms.

splitting, in the

garden

of 2SBg?a)l

?33^?.

split

split

cheek.

abdomon.

&o$f\.

Tbh. of

55.91.

&& A

atv^ofc*.
&>r\3.

AOdd,

female

split

Fearing;

female collector of customs.

^- 160,-^oJ^. Breathing, etc. Plural

A woman with curled hair. 194. -?^^. With

the sound

C9

of ]>ouring, dropping, etc., in the instance

82.

Tojsoiasre.

kitchen.

378.

announcing,

Tbh. of
?to*.

ti>37X>

rfo,

proclaiming,

3^3
A

SJSS^TOO.

sado sdjdrfo
apprising,

sa.

rfj3do.

20.

cook's place, a cooking place, a

time,

publishing,

a turn;

making known,

relating,

communication;

456
information; representation; delivering, giving, entrusting; an offering, oblation;
dedication.
etc.

425.

425.

?oJSK3 J8V

rijac^soi^.

rfJSKi'Soa^.

A female banker,

female

etc.

w^a^^o. A

rfjaw^oj^.

man

195.

appointed to proclaiming,
= ?ojac5'3oj^. 425.

rfjscsjrt.

190.200.-*!%. 67.-^^. HO.-^rio. 140.-

*.

or jS3dfy A general. 426. -3?^. Drawing water out. 569.

Tbh. of ^t|. iGO.-toaoj^. 140 (where s&siHa' is separately adduced).

&oft&>d.

go.

kiss, or the affection, of a daughter-in-law.

- ?^33rt. Tbh. of ^r. 123.-?^/. One who remembers

Tbh. of ^* 145.-aJart. Tbh.
recollects.
See ^dart._.
?J,durf
See 80^-

i?9

154.
aosarci.

ajas

07!.

- Sodoi).

oo

89

Tbh. of

Tbh. of

aSa^r.

S)53ci.

Scratching;

fwi

QjJ

312.

CO

aoe^aoO.

a6ydoo

of

See

150.-&>cSd.

i^J

i,

The bodv;

Z<3

aosj^oo

or

spreading.

IGO.-sso^.

rf,?ra^rf.

Tbh. of^oJo. 160. &*o Tbh. of A *ty (A

sa).
\
TJ/
3eJ. sou^zos5 3333$rg ^d&0 aa^A'tr !39.
145.

the front tuft of hair.

'

CO

63

^S^. 1(10. aMO

123.-^^^^. Tbh. of

5)

Tbh. of
2,

aJ63.rt.

tf.

aSO*

101.

rf

do^ a^w

which they mutually trample on the body of each other.

oiwddav* esdo. 2, A fight in which they mutually
seize the front tuft of hair of each other. 312.
i,

fight in

soyjjo?^ Ldjsrfo &2^)C33

INDEX.
The numbers refer

Kannada and Samskrita

I.

to the

pages.

and words,

letters, syllables

wherever required with due diacritioat signs.

The

a. i.

final

letter of

crude

many

nouns and pronouns 34

36. 46. 47.

comprising masculine, feminine

60,

4.

am.

5.

am.

6.

42. 43. 48.

1.

a. 3.

=a

i).

under a
a. 4.

=a

the

of

plural

words

42. 43. 50. 52. 53. 62. 63.

1.

Sign

2).

of

the genitive

singular and

plural, in the singular

occasionally

suffixed

one or more euphonic

n

iua

-',

2,

ana

50-60.

42.

i,

63.

da

i,

da, na, ara

'

80.

122.

a. 8.

a. 9.

Taddhita suffix 29. 36. 200.

am.

3.

i)

Cf.

akke.

seq.

i.,

59.

5.

aksharamale.

5.

akshararupa.

4.

aksharasanjnakara.

4.

aksharasarijiwrupa.

4.

aksharatmaka.

115.

age.

in 6 47. 51. 53. 58. 111. 112.

age.

2.

50 - 54. 56. 58. 59. 62. 65

69.71.73-75.

Sign of the dative

Imperative of agu 111. 150.

2.

akshara.

i.

189.

= arke.

i.

aksharavritti. 30.

Sign of the accusative 41. 43.

47. 48.

5.

60. 62. 63. 73.

212, and

24.

5.

akkaramale.

338.
157.

127.

Becomes a

changes
i.

akkara.

147.
59. '60. 62. 63. 73.

i.

147.

Of the imperative 149

In Tadbhavas 31. 32.

a. 12.

ake. = akke.

111. 147.

65-75.

Vulgar form of va

= akkum.

akum.

akkum. Of agu

160. 161. 324.

a. 11.

266 seq.
89.

akaranta. 31.

akke.

10. = am

etc.

letters (see d,

Sign of the infinitive

a. 7.

adi 213.

And,

akku. = akkum.

Sign of the vocative 81. 82.

a. 6.

In the imperative 148 seq.

of

by means

112.
5.

masculine singular 88. 127.

akarmakadhatu.

Sign of the accusative

singular and

Termination of the third person

3.

am.

49. 60. 61. Cf. 218.

a.

am.

Sign of the nominative singular

of the words under a

Masculine pronominal suffix 111.

2.

119.218.

and epicine words 37. 45. 47 49.

44.
51. 207, and neuter words 41
a. 2.

a.

am.

- 67.

4.

Sign of the dative 53.

In the formation of adverbs

169 (and adjectives

ankitanama.

30.

aftke. 22.

58

458

angtkara. 176.

atva. 32.

acetana. 37.

ada.

aSSagannada.

432.

5.

adu.

atiga. Taddhita suffix 203.

= am. 213.
= atiga. 203.
adiga.
ade. = are, ode. 167.
an.
an.

2.

ana.

Augment

= ana

1.

58

271 seq. 319 seq.

61. 62. 80.

(an + a).

= aninde.
(ana + attanim).

Sign of the negative participle

Third person singular neuter

2.

133. 135..

adhyaharya. 406.
adhva. 382.

Verb 352

an. annu.

(ana

+ da -f inda).

Sign of

+ im).

Sign of the ablative

58. 60. 61.

anindam. (ana

-f

+ inde).

(an + ge).

60.

Sign of the abla-

Sign of the dative 58.

60.74.

222 seq. 241.

of

Sign

attanindam.

the

ablative

41.

4.

16.

anu.

2.

anu.

3.

= am
= am

attaninde.

41.

= attanim.

41.

= atu.

74.

ane.

3.

127.

2.

218.

53. 56. 60.

14. 16.

11.
16. 21.

= ana 2.
2. = age 2.

248.

i.

auekakshara.

attanindam. 50.

47-51.

43.

1.

aneya. 256 seq.

48

50.

4850.

52.

54. 67.

222 seq.

Termination of the third person

neuter singular 127.
2.

60. 68.

248.

63.67-69.75.

ane.

52. 54. 67.

i.

= am

i.

anusvara.

74.

i.

48-50.52.54.67.74.75.

at tanin de.

anu.

anuloma.

atisayatara. 310.

attaninda.

ananunasika.

anunasika.

atisaya. 302.

attanim.

= antha.

anishta. 382. 386. 389. 395.

61.

= aninde.
indam).

tive 60. 61.

= adu

2.

anibar. 241.

= anindam.
(ana + inda).

aninde. (ana

ana.

seq.

Sign of the accusative

anitu, etc. 257.

aniga. Taddhita suffix 203.

aninda.

ana.

i.

anaksharatmaka.

the ablative 61.

attu.

i.

adhyahara. 413.

anada. (anafda). Sign of the genitve 61.

attu.

ade.

adhyar6pa. 412. 415. 416.

61.

60.

anim. (ana

112. 222 seq.

adhikarana. 381. 389.

61.

anattanim.

atu.

2.

106 seq. 111.

Sign of the genitive

= ana. 111.282.
ana.
anake. (an + a + ke). = ange.
anakke. = anake. 61.

ange.

adu.

ade.

2.

anadinde.

58-60.

Termination of the third person

neuter singular 127. 157.

60.

i.

111. 142.

Demonstrative neuter pronoun

i.

singular 47.

adi.

I.

= ada.

79.

25

anekaksharadhatu.

22.

anekaksharasabda.

32. 34. 35.

anta.

i.

anta.

2.

ante.

28.

antaha. 188.

109. 141.

On

dit.

antha, etc.

anthavanu,

136. 142. 358.

= antaha.
etc.

188. 248.

188. 189.

459

= iri.

antyalopa. 32.

ari.

antyavarna. 28.

arir.

28.

anna, (annam).
annal.

Feminine

of

= ar
51. 52. 71.
= ar 3. 127. 139.
= arga). 52.
arugal.
aru.

188. 248.

annam (anna

i.

i.

2)-

arugalir.

= am

Sign of the accusative

i.

43. 48. 49. 53. 56. 60. 65. 66. 68. 70. 75.

anne. = annal.

188.

anya. 88.
anyakartri. 89.

arugalu.

= arugal.
= aruga).

= ade, ode. 167. 271

arkal. = arga). 51. 70.
arkalir. = arkal. 51. 70.
= ar
51.
argal.
Argala.

arghya. 386.

ayonya. 310.

artha. 29. 313.

anvaya. 407. 411. 412.

arthavyakti. 216.

anvayasvatantra. 414.

arthanurupa. 30.

anvayisu. 407.

ar.

= appa.

30.

110. 117. 118. 144.

3.

Augment

i.

Six. 252. 253.

ara.

(ar

i.

+ a).

apadana. 380. 388. 395.

appa. = aha.

arattanim.

30.

432 seq.

11 J. 117. 144. 188. 243.

abinduka. 187.

arannu.

abhtkshana. 363.

ay.

i.

ay.

2.

ay.

Taddhita suffix 200.

arali.

Past participle 103. 142. 261.

Termination

of

the

second

= ay

ayila.

3.

252.

Taddhita suffix 204.

ar.

2.

ar. 3.

70-72.

136.

Plural of

am

2.

111. 119. 218.

Formation of the third person

plural 127.

aradesa. 32.

Sign of

(ara

+ annu).

Sign

of

the

59. 60. 62.

Sign of the locative

(ara-alli).

59. 60. 62. 73.

Verb

339.

arim. (ara

mental

+ im).

Sign of the instru-

58. 59. 62. 73.

= arinde. 59. 60. 63arindavu. = arinde. 59.

arinde. (ara + inde). = arim.
arinda.

ayte. Third person neuter singular 133.

ar. i.
Sign of the nominative plural
51.

+ attanim).

(ara

= aralli.

aralli.

ari.

Five 212. 252. 253.

ayatnakritagurutva. 399.
ayi.

252.

accusative 60.

person singular 127.

3.

Sign of the genitive

63. 73.

the ablative 62.

abhavakriye. 106-

ame.

61.

ar. 2.

5860. 62.
ara. 2. = ar 2.

apabhramsa.

seq. 319 seq.

i.

anyapurusha. 88.

apa.

52.
52.

are.

anyatotisaya. 302.

anvarthanama.

72.

aru. 2

188.

annu.

51. 70.

i.

arisamasa. 215. 216. 218.

antyakshara.
anna. i. = annu. 49. 53. 60.
2. = antaha.

159.

= ar

5i>.

aru. Six. 212. 252. 253.

arul.

= arol.

arol.

(ara

59.

+ 61).

Sign of the locative

59. 62. 73.

arolage.
arolu.

- arol.

= ar61.

59. 60. 62. 63.

59.62.
58*

+ ke).

arke. (ar

Sign of the dative 58.

460
avu.

59. 62. 73.

al.

42. 54. 67.

Sign of the infinitive 120. 121.

125. 324.

Sign of prohibition 153 seq.

Defective verb 160.

al. 5.

Euphonic 265.

+ agi).

alagi. (al
ali.

= alli.

i.

153 seq.

333.

66-68.

42

44.

70. 75.

Masculine demon-

strative pronoun, nominative singular

38. 47 seq. 112. 218.

= ana
= aj
alu.
ala.

suffix 46. 71.

alu.
a.

i.

a.

2.

222 seq. 234.

2.

avayavasambandha.

i.

2.

46. 71.

127.

Sign of the accusative singular

43. 53. 56. 60.

392.

Sign of the genitive singular and

plural 42. 44. 48. 49.

avar. avaru. Plural of ava 51. 52. 112,

and of the feminine aval, avalu

51.

52. 71. 72. 218. 234.

avarga. 14.

67

38.

53

seq. 112. 218. 222 seq. 234.

avikara. 39.
avikrita. 39.

Plural of the pronoun adu 47.

- 69.

52-54.

60. 65-

189. 305.

a. 8.

Sign of the vocative 81 seq.

a. 4.

Of the imperative

a. 5.

Demonstrative pronoun 217. 230.

a. 6.

The

14.

Feminine of ava

a]

60. 61.

i.

i.

avadharana. 175.

i.

144.

feminine singular 127.

of the locative

73. 112. 218.

118.

Termination of the third person

al. 2.

360 seq.

57. 60. 63.

aval, avalu.

117.

111. 119. 218. 249.

ava. avam. avanu.

avarglya.

111.

Feminine personal

i.

al.

allada. 361 seq.

Sign

appa.

145. 243.

160. 161. 291 seq. 293. 339.

49-54.

5.

aha. = apa,

allam. 160. 291.

106. 293.

89. 90. 92.

i.

asvaravidhi.

121. 125. 159. 324. 426.

2.

= isu.

asuye. 304. 387.

alpaprana. 14.

avu.

etc. 257. 260.

asamasa. 187.

asu.

altu. alte. 362.

alii.

73.

asravya. 147.

ashtu,
151 seq.

1.42.43.54.67.68.

i.

allade.

i.

asamasate. 30.

= al
2. = al

alia.

= avu

avugalu.

avyayfbhava. 213 seq.

338.

alu.

Taddhita suffix 200.

3.

avyayalinga. 33. 37. 39. 261.

426.

alim. In the imperative 153 seq.

alu.

avu.

avyayapada. 260.

43.44.49-51.54.57.68.

= alim.

2.

third

avyaya. 31. 39. 160. 164 seq. 179. 260 seq.

70. 75.
ali.

the

ave. Third person neuter plural 133.

al. 4.

al. 3.

of

person neuter plural 127. 157.

Sign of the locative

l.

al. 2.

Termination

2.

final

151.

letter of

a few verbs

97. 107.
a. 7.

It

becomes a and

e in

personal

and reflexive pronouns 74 seq., may

take the place of a in some verbs
24.

157,

and

changes into e

in

Sathskrita nouns

and a

31.

461
am.

Sign of the accusative singular

i.

53. 58, J89. 305.

am.

2.

Nominative singular and

(an).

plural of the

pronoun of the

first

person 74. 75. 222 seq.

akara.
ake.

ayta. Taddhita suffix 29. 204.

ayla.

= ayila.

ar.

i.

= ar

ar.

2.

-ar3.

ar.

3.

Feminine of

67. 112. 218.

ata,

222

atam, atanu 38.

aru.

agadu.

160. 337. 339.

agama.

41. 105.125. 207.

agi.

200 seq.

agir (agi

ava

38. 53. 72. 110.

am

2.

75.

avudu. Neuter singular of avam 58.

avuvu. Plural of avudu

etc. 136.

ana.

111. 282.

ata.

atam. atanu.

61.

110. 222 seq. 234.

adu. 367.

= ava,

etc.

38. 47

seq. 112. 218. 222 seq. 234.

Past relative participle of agu

111. 243.

ave.

Interrogative pronoun 223.

ave.

2.

134.

asu. 339.

aha. 118. 243.

al.

i.

etc. 278.

= al

adhikya. 302. 307. 308. 385.

127. 139.

Taddhita suffix

i.

Final letter of
92.

29. 204.

many
107.

95.

many nouns

of

verbs 26. 28.

121.

122,

and

66

- 70.

34. 35. 45. 46.

80.
i. 2.

ami. anum. 282. 310.

anupurvya. 300.

2.

88. 91.

adhara. 389.

ana. 111. 282.

73.

i.

ali.

adesa. 117. 177. 208.

2.

223 seq. 235.

avishtalinga. 398.

agiru. 244.247.248.

i.

Masculine singular of

38. 47. 72. 110.

avu. Plural of

+ ir).

126.

223 seq. 235.

160.

= ane

340.

Feminine of avam

aval.

agu. 334-336.339.

adodam,

72.

avam. avanu.

aga. For agadu 160.

= aga.

3.

Verb

ava. Interrogative pronoun 110. 217.

akhyatavibhakti. 126.

ane.

aval 72. 230.

artu. 235.241.

126.

akhyatamarga.

aga.

= ar

aru kriyavibhakti.
30. 88. 126.

akhyatapada.

i.

avam and

aru. Six 212. 253.

akhyata. 88.

ane.

127. 139.

Plural of

ar. aru.

seq. 234.

akshepa. 176.

ada.

204.
71.

235 seq.

5.

agutte,

i.

forms the nominative singular

It

67.68.
i.

248.

3.

It

forms the vocative singular 81

seq.
i. 4.

Sign of the locative

apa. 117. 118.

i. 5.

Sign of the instrumental 43. 44. 69.

abadha. 366.

i.

6.

i.

7.

134. 135.

amantrapa.
ay.

= ayi.

ayila, Taddhita suffix 204.

being euphonic 23. 24. 28. 33.

90. 104. 249. 250.

81.

103.261.

Its

42. 43.

Its

being a formative vowel in the

past participle 26. 137 seq.

462
i.

Appears as

8.

i 24,

and becomes

e in

some verbs 29; changes into u 91.

101, and into a in some verbs 95. 100.
In some nouns

becomes

it

210. 211. 213, e 36. 210,

Proceeds from

i.

9.

i.

10.

in

36, e 36.

and u

211.

Tadbhavas

31.

Sign of the second person singular

im.

the

of

Sign

ablative 41. 43.

instrumental

48-54.

and

= ige.

i.

ike.

inannu. Sign of the accusative singular

i.

= ike

i.

57. 59. 121.

2.

= ike

2.

200.

= ininda.

inolu.

= inol.

inta.

i.

inta.

2.

Another form of inda

= intha.

89. 90. 92.

indam.

263.

188.

188. 189.
43. 44.

- 61.

= im.

- 66.

188.

+ aha).

= indam.

56. 57. 59
i.

56. 59. 64

59. 60. 65.

intha. = intaha.

64-66.

1.

59. 65.

intaha. (intu

59.
55. 56. 58. 59.

58. 59.

+ 61). = 61

Taddhita suffix 204.

= isu

irii.

= inol.
inolage.

inda.
icu.

56. 57. 59.

+ im). =
58. 59. 64 - 66.
=
2
+ inda). inda. 56. 57. 60.
(ina

201.

2.

i.

ica.

= inol.

60.64-66.

inol. (ina 2

Sign of the dative 50. 51. 53. 56.

= ike

alii).

inibar. 241.

57.59.60.64-66.69.70.75.
inke. = inge.
= ige
inge.

57. 59. 65.

(ina 2 4-

inalli.

ininde.

iga. Taddhita suffix 29. 204.

i.

= inalli.

64. 66.

ikke.

2.

= inattanim. 58. 65.

=
inattanindam. 58. 65.
inattaninde.

56. 57. 59. 121.

ikke.

ige.

80.

+ attanim). = attanim.

64-66.

58.

ininda.

Taddhita suffix 200.

2.

ige.

Sign of the genitive

inim. (ina 2

Taddhita suffix 204.

ike.

+ a).

inattanindam.

56. 58. 59.

63-67.69.70.74.
ika.

(in

inattanim. (ina 2

inali.

Taddhita suffix 204.

11.

2.

55.57-60. 64-66.

65.

127.
i.

ina.

48-51.

63. 64.

41 . 43.

48 -

53. 54.

66 - 70.
53. 59.

75. 80.

65

- 67.

idu. 367.
69. 74.

itaretara. 310.

indavu.

= indam.

43. 49. 50. 59. 67. 74.

Taddhita suffix 46. 204.

iti.

75.

Third person neuter singular

itu.

127.

inde.

137 seq.

= iti. 46.
ittu. = itu. 127.

inna.

137 seq.

ip.

Demonstrative

58-60. 222

135.
in.

pronoun

neuter

seq.

i.

Two

in. 2.

in a.

i.

Two.

ir. i.

210.

253.

= inannu.

58. 60.

252.
118.

Sign of the nominative plural 51.

Termination of the second person

plural 127. 136. 137.

ir. 3.

65.

188.

70. 71.
ir. 2.

= inidu).
(

= intaha.

= irpa.
ippa.

Third person singular neuter 133.

ide.

48-54.

innu. 273. (Cf. indu).

itthambhutalakshana. 384.

singular 46.

41. 43.

66. 67. 69. 74. 75.

itti.

idu.

= indam.

ir.

Two.

iru.

4.

178. 211. 252. 253.

Verb

332. 416 seq.

463
ira.

(ir

+ a).

Sign of the vocative

plural 81.82.
ira, (ir

= ir 2.

iri.

81.82.

127.

It

verbs

= ali.

Taddhita suffix 205.

ilia.

159. 161.

i.

285 seq. 293. 331. 332.

ita. itarii. itanu.

ivam- ivanu. Masculine demonstra-

pronoun, nominative singular

and of

the feminine ival 51. 52. 71. 72. 234.

= in
=
ir 3.
ir.

Feminine of iva 53

seq.

U.

however

u. s.

a 171, 172,

90. 118,

and

It is

Verb

Taddhita suffix 201.

u.

5.

Its

u.

58-60. 62-67.

nouns

64. 65. 69.

euphonic character 23

7.

42.

44-46. 57-60.

changes into
and i 118.211.

It

The

final

ft

68.

<>^.

u.

s.

u. 9.

of

polysyllabic

Taddhita suffix 203.

And,

etc.

L'IUJ s, v/.

25. 28.
62. 63.

36, 6 29. 99, 6

Samskrita nouns becomes u

20.

and of the genitive singular

6.

36,

Sign of the accusative singular

the

the sign of the nominative

letter of

u.

iha.^ippa. 118. 144. 145. 245.

in

u. 4. Its radical character as the final

and

342.

and

44. 45.

67. 68.

66. 68. 90. 95. 114. 212.

3.

verbs

many

a kind of augment

6 173.

2.

i.

is

33-35.

isu.

1.

vowel of

88. 90. 91. 102. 103. 160,

being suffixed to final

isu.

ili.

final

singular 55. 56.

89. 91. 118. 146.

used also in transitive

its

It

68.

90. 342.

nominative singular

appears at the ondof repetitions KM.

of

The

i.

u. 2.

and intransitive verbs

The way

Verb

many nouns 33 - 36.

64.68-70.80.

133.135.

Causal suffix 23.

It is

71.

that of

ishtu, etc. 257. 260.

i.

211. 254.

27-29.

ishta. 381. 384. 386. 389. 395.

isu.

38. 47. 79. 222.

Sign of the locative singular

isu.

127.

= ave.

= iva.

Sign of the plural

ili.

ivu. ivugalu. Plural of idu 47. 73.

ive.

Ita 38. 67. 222. 229.

210.

i.

iru.

222 seq. 234.

= evu.

31.

irshe. 384.

seq. 234.

ivar. ivaru. Plural of iva 51. 52,

ivi.

(nirii)

229. 234.
in.

ivalu.

becomes

It

pronoun ni

234.

illavu. 289.

ival.

in the

of Samskrita polysyllabic

Feminine of

ike.

331.

47-49. 222

24.

36. 210.

ikaranta. 31.

illade. 106. 359.

tive

Final

6.

illam. 160. 285. 331.

iva.

and mi

nouns becomes

337. 340. 341.

111.

proceeds from

74-76.

54. 55. 57. 60.

ili. 2.

illada.

it

takes the form of

the personal

in

Taddhita suffix 205.

i.

the initial syllable of a few

211.

Defective verb 160.

ill.

I'&seq.

etc.

irba, etc. 258.

173. 217. 230.

342.

nouns

ofir<. 116.

ila.

As

5.

i.

2.

Verb

4.

irpa. Present-future relative participle

il.

= ay

i. 3.

+ a). = ira.

Pronoun

i. 2.

283.

'*-

464
urn.

And,

266 seq. 400-402. 405.

etc.

406.

ubhayamatra.
umuvidhi. 266.

uka. Taddhita suffix 205.

ume. Taddhita

uke. = uge.

ura.

121.

ukti. 33. 38.

11.

suffix 201.

16.

urasya. 16.

= uka.
Uga.

205.

80.

ulli.

ugi. Taddhita suffix 205.

uvam. Masculine demonstrative

uge. Sign of the dative 69.

noun, nominative singular

ucita. 40.

222. 234.

uni. Taddhita suffix 205.

i.

uta.

2.

= ute.

108.

Suffix of the present tense 126.

uvu.

uvam

Plural of udu

i.

i.

= ute.

108.

uvu.

ul.

i.

ul.

2.

ute. Sign of the present participle 108.

uliga. Taddhita suffix 205.

neuter plural 127. 157.

i.

= uta

i.

108.

Utta. 2.= uta

2.

126.

= utam.

108.

i.

uttam.

135.

uttum.

108.

= ute.

i.

114. 331. 334.

2.

Taddhita suffix 205. 244.

The

i.

final letter

Kannada nouns
ft.

108.

2.

It

has proceeded from u in sudu

108.

proceeds from uva 115. 146.

u.

3.

It

u.

4.

Pronoun

udaya. 389. 395.

u.

5.

And,

U.

218. 222.

ukaranta. 32.

udu

2. Termination of the third

person
neuter singular 127. 138 seq. 157.

+ aha).

unna. = untaha.

upadhmaniya.

polysyllabic

their final

u into u

words

32.

uke. Feminine of utam 38. 67. 222. 234.

utam.

188.

188.

unnati. 385.

266 seq.

Samskrita

change

ri.

seq.

untaha. (untu

6.

217. 230.

etc.

Demonstrative neuter pronoun,

nominative singular 46. 58. 111. 112.
i.

udum. 271

of one or two

66.

36.

utpata. 387.

udu.

67.

130. 332.

ulla.

u.

= utum.

Verb

ulla.

uttamapurusha. 89. 126.

= uta.

Sign of the locative 42. 54.

uliga. Taddhita suffix 205.

uttaraa. 89.

utte.

47. 73. 111.

Termination of the third person

2.

= ute. 108.
222.241.
utu. = udu
=
108.
utum. ute.

utta.

38. 53. 222.

112. 218.

uta.

utta.

and of the

51,

234.

135.

utam.

47.

feminine uval 51.

uval. Feminine of

until. 130. 376.

uta.

uvam

uvar. Plural of

ufcitaksharagama. 170.

pro-

38.

= uvam.

38. 47. 222.

Generally remains in Samskrita

nouns 66. 69. 70; in some Tadbhavas
it is

changed

32.

rikaranta. 32.
16. 17. 21.

upadana. 383. 391.

rl.

Remains
66. 69.

in a

few Samskrita nouns

465
e.

Final letter in

verbs 26. 28.

elli.

231.

29. 30. 68. 70. 88. 91.92. 95. 107. 121.

evu.

em.

i.

122,
<!<).

e.

in

many nouns 34-36.

46.

80. 81.

It

-2.

and

many

67.

68,

and

the

also

5.

e.

e.

7.

Sign of the genitive singular

Particle of emphasis 227. 291.

24. 92. 107.

<*.

Sign of the accusative singular 68.

Taddhita suffix 200. 205.

e. 6.

Sign of the vocative 81 seq.

Particle of emphasis 107. 133. 171.

e. 7.

Adverbial suffix 265.

e. 8.

Is

e. 9.

In the interrogative pronoun

It

2.

127.

127.

changes into

43. 91,

proceeds from

21.

e in be.

See

Final Samskrita a becomes e 31;

retain their

monosyllabic terms

32.

Becomes

See under e

Termination of the

ekamatraka.
ekavacana.

11.

40.

first

person

ekaksharadhatu. 22. 24-27.

ekaksharasabda. 32.
eke. 62.234.

ettantu. 241.

ekokti. 40.

ennu. Verb 352 seq.

enta.

2.

= entaha.

Sign of the locative singular 68.

eli.

+ aha).

entha.= entaha.

ep.

eru. Sign of the nominative plural 71.

188.

109. 141.

entaha. (entu

etake. etakke. 62. 238.

etarke. 62. 234. 238.

127.

enta.

the verb be 24.

ekate. 40.

en. Eight 212.252.253.

i. = entha.

in

e
10.

ekasthani. 16. 194.

singular 127.

enu. = 6rii.

(da) 62. 63.

ekatva. 40.

6.

but Samskrita

becomes ya

it

110. 223. 238.

e. 10.

29. 36. 211. 213,

and takes the place of

also under a

into a

and ya

68.

used like ava 235.

(en, enu)

91. 95. 100, into e 211,

enna.

ke and be

5.

= erii.

en.

K anna da

e- 4.

e. 9.

em.

in

e. 3.

= ay

e. 11.

diphthong

It is final in the verbs

e. 2.

176. 227.

It

real

Sign of the infinitive 123. 125.270.

e. 8.

e. 10.

no

185.

forms the vocative 81 seq.

Sign of the instrumental 67.

282.324.424-426.428.
e. 6.

252.

It is

e- i.

It

e. 4.

= el.

accusative

singular 68.
e. 3.

first

person plural 127.

el.

forms the nominative singular

Termination of the

188.

188. 189.
188.

evuduSI.
ei.

(ai).

Seven 252.

em. Eight 252.

= avudu.

Seven

It is

Kannada
6.

i.

It

235.

252. 253.

no

real

diphthong

in

185.

takes the place of 6 in no :M.

eral.

253.

that of u 29. 211, that of a 47. 51.

erde.

16.

53. 58,

ella.

ellam. ella. 62. 210. 232. 395.

elladu. 222. 232.

nva!46, and may

See oiii i and 2,

that of

change

into 6 189.

odu, or

3,

61

3,

.1.

59

466
va occasionally becomes

Initial

6. 2.

au.

6 21.

6m.

i.

partly

=aih

= am 3.

2.

Occurs in Samskrita glau

2,

partly

= am 3.

111.

aueitya. 40.

m. = a

2.

Sign of the nominative singu-

lar 41. 42.

127.143.

45-48.

62. 74. 75.

ode. If 167. 270 seq. 319 seq.

ka. Taddhita suffix 201. 205.

odeya. Taddhita suffix 205.

kantha.

ottakkara. 20.

= udu

6du.

or.
or.

or.

112. 119. 218.

3.

One

kannada.

139. 143.

etc.

211. 253.

Verb 240

61. 2.

61.

i. = uli.

= al
= al2.
= 61
olage.

karnatakabhashabhushana.
43.

48-50.

karnatakaiabdanusasana.
52.

54.

kartri. 39. 380. 381. 384.

114. 119. 218.

127. 139.

42-44. 48-54.

i.

57. 67.

karmaniprayoga. 323.
karmadharaya. 209 seq. 217. 232.
kavarga.

68. 70. 75.

42. 43. 49. 50. 52. 54. 67. 68.

i.

14.

kavirajamarga.

2.

= gal. 51. 69.

kaliru. = kal. 52.
kal.

71. 75.
6. i.

no
6. 2.

It is final in the verbs kg, to

and

24. 91. 92. 107.

It is

3. 4.

4.

karma. 380. 381.

i.

= 61

14.

seq.

42.

61. 3.

61u.

432.

karnatakaprakriti. 171.

65-70.74.75.
61. 2.

1. 2.

karkasavarna.

198 seq.

1.

16.

karana. 380. 382. 391.

orba, etc. 258.

51,

16.

kanthyanasikya.
kanda. 174.

i.

4.

16.

16.

kanthyatalavya.

2.

or.

kanthya.

112. 218.

2.

= ar 51.
= ar 2 and
3. = ar 3. 127.
i.

16.

kanthosthya.

and

253.

ombay.

no real diphthong

in

Kannada

71.

= kal. 52.
= kalu.
kalugal.

52.

kagunitakshara.

17.

kalu.

185.

kara. 21.
6. 3.

It proceeds

113,

and 6

from u

211.

See

In Samskrita go

6. 4.

66. 69.

changed

36,

from ava

or.
it

onama.

5.

6r.= 6r

4.

Cf. 44. 45.

254.

oshthya. 16.
i.

It is

185.

karakavasa. 380.
karana. 388. 396.
kara. Taddhita suffix 205.
kala. 88. 382. 388. 391. 395. 397.

oshtha. 16.

an.

karaka. 216. 217. 380. 398. 413.

karakapada. 407.

remains un-

Adverbial suffix 265 seq. 282.

c. 5.

66. 69.

Cf. 44. 45.

119. 139. 218.

6m.

2.

no real diphthong in Kannada

kalatraya. 88. 314.

kalatrayaparinami. 125.
kalatrayasueaka. 125.

kalavaeaka. 64.
kalavaci. 64.

97.

194.

kavyamarga.

kriyaprayojaua. 120.
kriyartha. 120.

3.

kavyavalokana.

467

kil. = kelagu. 178.213.

ku. = kum. 146 seq.

kriyjivibhakti. 126. 170.

kriyasamabhihara. 363.

kuih. Verbal termination 106. 146

set].

kriyasamasa. 216.

kutiga. Taddhita suffix 205.

kriyasakalya. 364.

kudu. Verb 368.

kriye. 29. 30. 88. 89. 125. 390.

kutsana. 304.

kvacitprayoga. 39.

kulasambaudha. 391.

kshala. 5.

kuli. Taddhita suffix 206.

kheda. 176.

5. 14. 189. 194. 195.

kula.

gada. 176.

kudadu. 337. 339.

143. 217.

2.

ke.

3.

37

41. 43. 44. 46.

121.

11. 14. 15. 22.

27-29.

35.

- 39. 46 - 48. 89. 94. 105. 117 - 122.

123. 131. Ittseq. 160. 185.

197

195.

215

200.

203.

187-191.
206.

- 217. 223. 235. 245. 254.

323-325.

393.

411.

207.

261. 271.

424. 425.

439. 440.

433.

386.

gamana.
16.

gala.

Termination of the imperative 149.

Taddhita suffix 201.
3. 4.

112. 119. 217. 218.231.

245.

Sign of the dative

kusava.

gamakasamasa.

218 seq.

51.54.55.61-63.
ke.

gandu. 40.
gadya. 197.

seq.

i.

14.

gandakkara.
218

29. 39. 110. 119. 131. 198. 217.

krillinga. 29. 30. 33. 39. 119. 127. 139.

ke.

189. 194.

ga. Taddhita suffix 206.

kuli. Taddhita suffix 206.

krit.

13-15.

Sign of the nominative plural

gal.

50. 52. 69.

galir.

= gal.

50. 70. 71.

galu.=

gal. 50. 52. 70.

ganta.

117.

gara. Taddhita suffix

i.

'>();.

gu.

-'.

Final syllable of verbs 117.

gu.

= gum.

gum.=

kuiii.

146 seq.
106. 14i> seq.

147.

kesiraja. 3.

gugum.

kodisu. 342.

gudasu. gudisu. gudusu.

kodu. 342. 368.

guna.

kombu.

20.

11.

gunavacana.

33. 37. 198. 217.

koral. 16.

gunavaci. 33.

k6. 152.

guiianurupa. 30.

kopa. 304.

gunokti. 33.

kkum- = kum.
= ke
kke.
i.

i.

146 seq.

guru.

41.43.44.46.61.

gurutva. 385. 389.

kke. 2.= ke2. 149.

kriyatmaka.

160.

kriyanimitta. 380.

kriyapada. 30. 88. 125. 126. 170.

20.

185.390.
_'}_'

11.

gul. Taddhita suffix 201.

guli. T.uldhita saffix

ge.

i.

= ke.

i.

48

20<i.

51. 54. 63.

71.80.
59*

t>

49.

2.

ge.

Termination of the imperative

149. 429.
3.

ge.

tadbhava.

51. 71.

i.

= gal. 49-51.74.
= ngal. 49 51.
ngalir.
ngalu. = iigaJ. 49. 50. 52.
48. 49. 74. 75.
nge. = ge
i.

= dapa. 125. 128 seq.

= tapa. 125. 128 seq.
tappatalekattu. 6. 17. 20. 21.
80.

tavarga. 14.
taha- 118.

caturthi. 40.

364.

ta.

i.

ta.

2.

153.

tanu.

tarn-

225.

5.

Nominative plural of

cu. Causal suffix 23. 89. 90. 92.

tarn.

eelvu. 188.

tana. 16.

eetana. 37.

tadarthya. 387.

ch. Stands for s 178. 253.

talavya.

Shandas. 194. 197. 411.

taluka. 16.

j.

Stands for s 178.

jatisambandha. 391.

jaina. 2

tavarga.

tu.

16. 17. 21.

tu.

into la 191.

2.

2,

tarn,

46. 206.

Formative syllable of the past

i.

participle 25

- 27.

Neuter pronominal

suffix 46. 57.

72. 74. 79. 249.

14.

tu.

tiku. 412.

Changes into la 191.

May become 1 117. 211.

tha.
d.

etc. 74.

16.

Taddhita suffix

4.

Changed

ta.

2,

tavu. Nominative plural of to

tanu 74 - 76. 228.
ti.

16.

jihvamuliya.

ta

taluge. 16.

jati. 71. 390. 398. 404. 405.

jihvamula.

Reflexive pronoun,
74. 75. 223 seq.

nominative singular

cavarga. 14.

akshusha.

432 seq.

tapa.

Stands for s 178.

capalate.

33. 214. 215.

tana. Taddhita suffix 201.

ngal.

C.

taddhitapratyaya. 198. 199. 200 seq.

taddhitaliriga. 29. 33. 36. 39. 203 seq.

Taddhita suffix 201.

gge.= ge

468

3.

= udu

2.

127.

tuti. 16.
ti-itlye. 40.

Taddhita suffix 201.

te.

dakara. 117.
torn. 212. 252. 254.
n. Final letter of

and of verbs

nouns
107.

33. 53. 69. 70,

tti.=ti. 46.

In sandhi and
ttu.

samasa
ta.

i.

Sign of the relative past participle

110. 125. 126.

ta.

'2.

2.

46.57. 72. 249.

triprayoga. 93. 162. 163. 362.

tribhuvana. 400.
trimatraka. 11.

Taddhita suffix 201.

Changes into
takkadu. 337.
ta. 3.

= tu

179. 187.

la 191.

tatpurusha. 208 seq. 217.

tatsama. 31. 214. 432.

taddhita. 29. 35. 39. 198. 200 seq.

trilinga. 38.

tva. 21.
d.

Euphonic.

da.

i.

42. 73. 249. 25').

(d + a).

Sign of the

genitive

singular with a euphonic d before

the a 42 - 44. 46.

469
da.

Sign of the past and negative

'-i.

relative participle

110 xeq. 126. 218

3.

da.

4.

Suffix for the past tense 125. 126.

5. 432.

dravida.

teq. 421 seq.

da.

188.

K-si.

desiya.

so-called krit suffix 29.

bhiitavatikrit,

dam. In allidam.

1.

dravya. 390.
dravida. 1.

Cf.

bha visit yantikr it.

dr&ha. 387.

dvandva. 213.400.

207.

dvihpray6ga. 93. 162. 362.

dadda. 20.

dvikarma. 382. 385.

daddakkara.

20. 196 seq.

dvigu. 211 seq.

danta. 16.

dvitiye. 40.

dantoshtya. 16.

dvitva. 40. 88. 121. 188.

dantya. 16.

dapa. Suffix for the present tense 125.

128 seq.

dvitvakshara. 20.

dvimatra.

dappa.= dapa. 125. 128 seq.

daha.= Japa. 125. 126. 128 seq.
a euphonic d before the a 42.

daru.= yaru.
dava.= yava.

dvivaefana. 40. 88.

dhatu. 23 seq. 30. 88.

44.

72.

dhatupatha. 22.

n.

davadu.= yavadu.
davanu.= yavanu.

72. 223. 231.

davavu.= yavavu.

73.

Final letter of nouns 34, and of

i.

verbs 88. 167.

223. 231.
n.

2.

223. 231.

digvaci. 62.

nage.= nge.

49.

uapumsaka.

;!T.

30.

37.

nappu.
Sign of the nominative plural 52.
70.71.
dir. 52.

dirkal.=

namaskura. 385.

nammavaru.
nalu.=
na.

l.

dirghakaku. 81.

na.

2.

du.

= tu
2. = tu
i.

i.

26.27. 57.

2.

46.57. 72. 249.

dushkara. 188.
dushprattti.
diira.

177. 198.

363. 38?.

224.

nainmake. 224.

dir. 70.

dtrgha. 11. 20.

du.

37.

napumsakalinga.

dir.

dim. =

179. 187.

na. Sign of the genitive singular with

a euphonic n before the a 42. 43.

dikku. 387. 395.

digvacaka. 62.

42.

Euphonic

Becomes n

n. 3.

Taddhita suffix 206.

ditanama.

27. 28. 160.

dhtitusvarupa. 88.

231.

davalu.= yavalu.

11.

dvirbhava. 32.210.

da. Sign of the genitive singular with

di.

dvitvavikalpa. 121.

;{!>:>.

devar. devaru. 403.

252.

nal.

= nauu.

nam. = aui

-'.

nagavarma.
323-325.
nanu.

75.

222 *eq.

Four 253.

= nam.

74.

222

stv/.

3.

11.

38.

U'.Y

Nominative singular of

the pronoun of the

'2-2'2

89.

first

person

7">.

470
nama.

30.

nura. 252 seq.

30. 170.

namapada.

nuru. 252 seq.

uamaprakriti. 30.

nripatunga.

30. 33.

namalinga.

2.

ndaru. = ndiru.

198 seq.

52.

namavibhakti. 40. 170. 380.

ndir. Sign of the nominative plural 51.

nami.

ndirir.

Four

nal.

212. 252. 253.

naligeya buda.

16.

ndiru.

nanu (nam) 74

Plural of

navu.

= ndir. 51.
= ndir. 51.
ndirirgal.

11.

76.

223 seq.
nasike.

16.

nasikya. 16.
nige.

p.

pa.

= nage.

2.

pa.

3.

pa.

4.

= va
= va

3.

119.

2.

125.

paksha. 321.

nijadhatu. 198.

paneaka.

187.

14.

paneami. 40.

nityabindu. 187.

paneavarga.

ninde. 304.

14.

pada. 30. 88. 126. 198.

ninna and nimma. 225.

padaecheda. 412.

nipata. 39. 169. 175. 176. 260 seq.

padamadhyasandhi.

niyama. 194.

padantyasandhi. 170.

niyama. 194.
16.

padin. 212. 251.

nirdosha. 216.

padyardha. 174.

nirdharana. 390.

pan. 212. 251.

33.

nirviseshapavan.

pampa (hampa).

nivartya. 382.

75.

parakartri. 89.

222 seq.

parushavarria. 14.

Nominative singular and plural

of the pronoun of the second
person

nim.

74.

222 seq. 224.

seq. 225.

Sign of the nominative singular

42. 43. 48. 49. 62. 63. 75.

37. 38. 236. 246.

397. 404. 408.

nur.

pavarga.

14.

Taddhita suffix 202.

pirn. 213.

pintu. 213.
pide. 366.

nivu. Plural of ninu 75. 76. 225.

nudigattu.

16.

pal.

pi.

ninu. Nominative singular of the pronoun of the second person 75. 222

nu.

3.

payin. 212. 253.

niseitanama. 30.

= ninu.

170.

padi. 212. 251.

niranunasika.

ni.

187. 188.

Taddhita suffix 202.

nijakartri. 90.

nityadvitva.

52. 71.

Takes the place of h

i.= va i. 113 seq.

pa.

49.

= ndir.

= nuru. 212.

pu.

i.

Taddhita suffix 202.

pu.

2.

Used instead of hu

verbal themes 28.

268. 365.

pum.

37.

pumstrilinga. 37.
253.

punarukti. 199.

at the

end of

471
pluta. 11. 176.

puiinapumsakalinga. 37.

purusha

i.

(linga).
2.

Person of the verb

purusha.
purushatraya. 89.

88. 12G.

i.

113 seq.

ba.

2.= va

3.

119.

ba.

3.= va2.

i.

= bar.

pullinga. 37.

baru.

i.

pujyasadhunipuna. 390.

barn.

2.

purvakalakriye. 93.

barpa kala.

piirvakriye. 93.

balla. 340.

peda. 210. 214.

balle. 284.

pen. 40.

baha. 118.

40.

38.

52.

Verb. 368.
88.

bahute. 40.

pennu.
perme. 389.

peram.

125. 126.

bar. Sign of the nominative plural 51.

39.

purushava&ika.

= va

ba.

37.

bahutva. 40.

222 seq. 231 seq.

146. 337. 338.

bahudu.

peratu. 222 seq.

peiadu. 222 seq.

bahuvacana.

peral. 32. 222 seq.

ball. 284.

poda kala. 88.

poy. Past participle 103. 142.

balasikshe.

= pa
ppa.

bidu. 342. 368.

baradu. 336. 337. 339.

125.

3.

40.

bahuvrthi. 39. 212 seq.

5.

prakarsha. 302.

bindu. 16. 17.

prakara. 383.

birudavali. 215.

prakriti. Declinable base 29. 37. 40;

verb's crude

form

bflakkara. 13.

bem. 213.

88.

prakritisvarupa. 88.

beku. belku. belkum. 119. 333. 334.

prati. 386.

beda. 160. 161. 335. 336.

pratinitlhi. 386.

bedafn. 160.

pratimukhavalokana. 263.

beha. 118.

pratishedha. 88.

bhattakalanka.

pratishedhakriye. 106 seq.

pratyaya.

case

Suffix:

terminations

40: verbal personal terminations 22.

126;

taddhitas

syllables 31;

29.

39;

235.

323-325.

:'>.">.

l.haya. 388. 395.

bhartsana. 403.
bhavat. 88.
bhavjitkj'ila. 88.

l>havishyat. 88.

bhavishyatkala. 88.

88.

prathamapurusha.
prathame.

formative

a euphonic syllable

pratyekartha. 302.

prathama.

4. 47. 89.

425. 440. 442.

S8. 12(5.

S
bhavishyantikrit. 110. 133. 21

40.

prii nyanadarasmarana.

prapya. 382.
prasa. 194 seq. 411.

bhavishyauti. 88.

385.

blmva.

71.

143.200.

hhavaviu-ana. 36. 100. 104. 123-125.

130.139. 143. 144. 148. l.V. 198-

472
251 seq. 285. 287 seq. 332. 333.

seq.

431.

modalada. 401. 402.

mbar. 51.

bhavavaci. 36.

mbaru.

bhavi. 88.

i.

y.

bhinnakartri. 89.

final letter of

2.

y.

bhuta. 88.

68 -

70.

euphonic character 45. 66.

67.

Changes
Its

4.

y.

into

bhutakalakriye. 93.

73. 88. 91. 92. 107.

bhutavati. 88.

seq. 212.

bhutavatikrit. 110. 111. 218 seq.

bheda. 383. 388. 395.

ma.

Takes the place of va

i.

ma.

Taddhita suffix 202.

2.

189.

ya.

121.

170 seq. 174

In attributive nouns 217. 245. 246.

194.

yamaka.

ya. In interrogative pronouns

284.

73,

88.

madhyamapurusha.
16.

mahaprana.

14. 169.

mahapranakshara.

63. 238.

= aru.
yaru.
ava.
yava.

88.

madhyama.

and also in other nouns that of

yake. 21.

matsara. 384.

185 seq.

28.

235 seq.
dava. 110.

72.

= avadu. 38. 60. 110. 223 seq.

=
avam. 38. 49. 223 seq. 235.
yavanu.
yavadu.

yavavu.

-~

avuvu.

= avalyavalu.

73. 110.

110. 223 seq. 235.

matra. 387.

yugala. 398.

matre.

yngaloccarana. 93. 162. 362.

i.

mu.

'->.

mum.
mun.

11.

Taddhita suffix 202.

= mu.

212.252.253.

y6gavaha.

Final letter of verbs

and of nouns

253.
402.

Changes

ra.

of

254.

muy.
mu. Three
murdhan.

211. 252. 253.

16.

murdhanya.

16.

rariduvarna. 14.

193,

rudhanama.
rupaka.
r.

116. 117,

me.

2.

Time

212. 253.

men.

176.

285.

into la 191, takes the place

and changes

into

194.

or times 259.

30.

ru. Final letter of verbs 23. 24. 114.

Taddhita suffix 202.

213.

27. 92. 118,

40. 194. 195.

i.

mem.

25-

34. 53. 69.

ruci. 384.

me.

meSSu.

17.

yogyate. 388.
r.

213.

muntada.

takes

g21.

matte. 284.

mu.

it

the place of a and e 21. 38. 62. 72.

mattu. 285.

mastaka.

186.

249.

madi. 259.

mattam.

34. 53.

93.

sometimes nasal

y. 3. Is

bhutakala. 88.

verbs 36. 88. 91.

and of nouns

107. 121 ,

385.

bhiti.

52.

The

and of nouns

etc. 177. 196.

Cf. 195.

rakara. 116.
1.

i.

Final letter of verbs 24. 88. 91. 92.

107,

and of nouns

34. 53. 69.

473
sometimes nasal

186.

1.

2.

Is

1.

3.

Is euphonic 265. 270.

vargadvitfyakshara. 14.

changes into na and la

14. 187.

vargapanama.

sometimes used for ra 193, and

la. Is

193.

vargapanftamakshara.

lakshana. 195.

vargaprathamakshara.

lakshanasambandha. 392.

vargakshara.

laghu. 11.

= ali

li.

varaa.

57. 68.

ili.

linga. 29. 30. 33.

37-40.

46. 47.

14.

5. 21.

varnasanjne.

4.

litigatraya. 39.

varnaiike.

lekka. 32.

varnavritti. 194.

V.

i.

Is

euphonic

65. 69.

in

107-109.

nouns

etc.

35. 45.

170. 173 seq.

290

seq.

i.

sometimes nasal

186.

113

27.

26.

seq.

118.

119 seq. 126. 144.

93. 108.

vashatkara. 387.
vala. Taddhita suffix 29. 206.
vali.

Suffix for the future tense 125.

2.

Taddhita suffix 202.

valla.

= vala.

29. 206.

vakya. 178. 380.

126.
va.

3.

A so-called krit

va.

4.

Taddhita suffix 202. Cf. 122. 203.

va.

5.

Changed

6.

When

va.

vartamanakalakriye. 93. 108.

vartipa kala. 88.

Sign of the present-future relative

participle

va.

88.

vartamanakala. 88.

vartamanakriye.

V. 2. Is

va.

4.

vartamana.

lopa. 117. 118. 122. 170.

14.

14.

vargiyakshara.

or

14.

14.

vargaprathama.

comes 6

vaana.

into

initial

suffix 29. 39. 119.

ma
it

189.

sometimes be-

vakyadtpaka. 414.

vakyamale.

30.

vakyavinyasa. 380.
vakya vesh tana. 174.

vakyanvaya. 414.

21.

vaeyalinga. 38. 111. 119. 242.

40.

Taddhita suffix 202.

vaSanatraya. 39.

vi.

vafcanatritaya. 39.

vikarasambandha. 392.

vatiga. Taddhita suffix 206.

vikarya. 382.

= vatiga.
vadiga.

vidhi. 23. 88. 148 seq. 341. 383. 429.

206.

vanige. Taddhita suffix 202.

vidhikriye. 88.

vanta. Taddhita suffix 206.

vidhyartha. 88.

var. = bar. 51.

varu. = var. 52.

vipsasamasa. 218.

vtpsa. 300.

vibhakti.

varga. 14.

varga&iturtha.

22. 88.

14.

vargaaturthakshara.

14.

vargatritiya. 14.

29.

30.

Verbal personal terminations

126 seq.; case terminations
40.

41 seq. 208 ,

case 40.

Regarding the use of cases see 381

vargatritiyakshara. 14.

vargadvittya.

14.

vibhaktimale. 40.
60

474
363-366.

vibhaktisvara. 171.
vir. Sign of the nominative plural 70.

= vir. 70.
virkal. = vir. 70.
virgal

= virkal.

2. 15. 40.

439.

sithila. 196.

70.

sithilatva. 197.

viloma. 11.

sira. 16.

vilomakriye. 106.

suddhage.

visanke. 175.

suddhakshara.

visesha. 40. 302.

sunya. 16.

viseshanapada. 407.

seshasambandha. 392.

5.
5.

17.

viseshya. 40.

sravana.

viseshyadhtna. 223. 229. 242.

srutikashta. 177.

viseshyadhfnalinga. 38. 111. 119.

shashthi. 40.

vishaya. 390.

sa.

visarga. 16. 17. 21. 32.

samyoga. 383.

visarjanfya. 16.

samsayarthakriyapada. 428.

vu.

i.

Sign of the nominative singular

42. 43. 46.

vu.

2.

vu.

5.

In sandhi 178.

samskritaprakriti. 171.

samsparsasambandha.

Sign of the nominative plural

Taddhita suffix 203.

89.

sakarmakadhatu.

89.

vritti. 35. 411.

sankhyana.

vriddhi. 11. 185.

sankhyanavastu.

ve. Taddhita suffix 203.

sankhyapurvaka. 211.

vaishayika. 382.

sankhyavastu. 399.

vol, etc. 198. 199.

sankhyava^i. 31. 33.

vyanjana.

5. 13. 14. 21. 28.

sankheya.

17.

vyaojananga.

71. 399.
71.

sankhye. 22. 33. 39.

5.

vyanjanavidhi.

392.

samhite. 170.

sakarmaka.

7.3-75.
3.

438-440.

442.

sasana.

virir.

383. 384. 393.

71. 198. 217.

71. 399.

sati. 123.

32. 33.

vyanjananta.
vyavahara. 391.

satisaptami. 123. 424.

vyapaka. 390.

sandhi. 34. 35. 170 seq. 180 seq. 208.

sattrinanta. 31.

sakti. 387.

sabda.

sandhyakshara.

4. 5. 30. 38.

sabdadravya.

11.

sannida. 216.

4.

sannidhanasambaudha. 392.

sabdamanidarpana.

3. 4. 35. 47. 48. 62.

saptami. 40.

66. 98. 153. 164. 176. 192. 204. 229.

saptavibhakti. 40.

293. 323. 324. 363. 364. 411.

sabinduka. 187.

sabdanusasana.

4. 62. 89.

97. 131. 134

samasamskrita. 31. 214. 215. 432.

seq. 164. 167. 171. 176. 191. 192. 196.

samanakshara.

199-202. 204-206.

samasa. 30. 31. 177 seq. 197. 198. 216

294. 295. 323.

11.

\seq.

475
samipa. 363.

svara. 5. 10. 11. 21.

samprati. 88.

svarayuktavyahjana. 170.
380. 384.

svararahitavyanjana. 170.

sampradana.
sambandha. 391.

svaranga.

sambandhasambandha. W2.

svaranta. 34.

sambandhartha. 381.

svasti. 385.

sambuddhi.

svamisambandha. 391.

81.

sambodhana.

sambhrama.

40. 81 seq.

svaha. 387.

364.

svtkara. 389.

Takes the place of p

sammati. 304.

h.

saralavarna. 14.

ha.

sarvanama.

17.

i.

= va
= va

125. 126.

ha.

2.

salla. 160. 161. 342.

ha.

3.

savarna. 11.

ha.

sahaja. 185. 197.

hadi. 212. 251.

31. 33. 38. 198. 217.

= va
4. = va

2.

3.

119.

4.

122. 203.

sahajadhatu. 36.

hadin. 212. 251.

sahajavyanjana. 177.

han. 251.

saku. 147.

haku. 368.

satatya. 364.

hage. 289. 294. 322.

sadrisya. 386.

hangft. 285.

santa. 118.

hita. 384.

sarthaka. 30.

hu.

sasira. 178.

su.

i.

su.

2.

hu.

= isu

89-91.

J.

118. 147.

28.

Taddhita suffix 203.

2.

hen.

Taddhita suffix 203.

- pen.

40.

hennakkara.

sundara. 188.

hennu.

sdtra. 35.

sonne. 16.

Instead of pu at the end of verbal

i.

themes

siddhi. 383.

187. 188.

1.113. 118. 144.

14.

40.

hetu. 89. 383. 384. 389. 395.

17.

21.

44.

179 seq. 187. 199. 216.

stri. 37.

strinapumsa.

128.

136.

148.

hetuka. 89.
hetukartri. 8D.

hortu. 321 seq.

hogu. 369.

38.

strtnapumsakalinga.

38.

hoha. 118.

strilinga. 37.

haudu.

strtvaSaka. 39.

hrasva. 11.

sthalasambandha. 392.

hrasvakaku. 81.

sthana. 16.

1. 1.

145. 229.

Final letter of nouns and of feminine

svakartri. 90.

pronouns

svadha. 387.

verbs 28. 88. 92.

svabhava. 185. 385.

svayankartri. 90.

1. 2.

Final

34. 38. 53. 69. 190,

and of

occasionally becomes

190.

60*

476
la.

into na 190,

Changes
place of

190.

and takes the

191.

from ta 190, and da

It

1. 2.

proceeds

Occurs

la.

190.

Proceeds from d 105. 117. 177, and

changes into
191

1.

i.

Final letter of nouns 34. 53. 69,

and of verbs

28. 88. 92. 107. 117.

adverbs of circumstance or manner 165

seq. 251

262 seq.\

seq.

and expres-

sion 169. 295 seq.

words

in English.

continuative imperfect 215 seq.

- 10

crude base in the nominative 42. 43.

48, 49.

53

68. 75

seq.

38.

and

in

- 60. 79, plural 73 seq. 222

seq
230 - masculine 38. 47 - 49. 79,
.

as

as. 346.

plural 51 seq.\

as

so.

feminine 38. 53 seq.

67 seq., plural 69. 71 seq.

348 seq.
242.

See gunavafcana.

diacritical signs 6.

308

seq.

doubling 93. 107. 162. 163. 170. 177

- 179.

distributiveness

auxiliary verbs 330.

305.

306.

310.

1.

Carnatic

-68

57

229.

cardinal

63

demonstrative pronouns neuter singular

appellative verbs 93.

Canara

in the accusative

the vocative 81. 82.

etc.

nouns of number 258

nouns

43. 53. 54. 56. 59.

305.

attributive

191.

continuative present 315 seq.

their formation

appellative

la

abverbs of time 165. 262

Adverbs in general 260

alphabet

ta. tha, ta, ra,

continuative (or habitual) future 316.

About

words

of

and proceeds from

193. 211,

adverbs of place 164. 165.

seq.

2.

number

jakara. 117.

Indexical

2.

190.

in

numbers 251

seq.

210. 439 seq.

1.

cases (vibhakti) and their use 381 seq.

duplication 304.

343 seq.

Interchange of the seven cases 393

either

seq.

examination of the terminations and

change of verbal root vowels

24. 29. 36.

or.

augments

in the seven cases 82 seq.

Fleet, J. F., Dr. 15. 103.

107. 157.

conjugated appellatives 93. 136 seq.

conjugation 426 seq.; that of the

for,

because. 297 seq. 347.

frequentative action 28. 93. 162 seq.

future perfect 317 seq.

negative 431. 432.

conjunctions 167. 260 seq.

future tense 142 seq. 340.

combination of certain words 362 seq.

comparison 376 seq.

Grammar

compound tenses 315

Hindusthani 432.

seq.

contingent future perfect 318.

contingent

present-future

133. 315. 338. 428.

tense

in English of the

Carnataka

Language by McKerrel Esq.

Hodson, Rev. Thomas, 323. 344.

132.

how much

so much. 342 seq.

imitative sounds 168. 169. 173.

4.

477
148 seq.

imperative

indefinite

forms

Irregular

pronouns

39.

Pfithak, K. B., B. A.

3.

perfect 316 seq.

See vidhi.

152 seq.

279 seq. 305.

infinitive 120 seq. 122. 123.

433 seq.

permutation of consonants in sand hi

177 seq.

interchange of the seven cases 393 seq.

personal pronouns 73 seq. 222 seq.

interjections 168.

personal terminations of the verb 126

interrogative pronouns 38. 58

60. 72.

Mahratti 432.
Muller,

possessive pronouns 39. 239 seq.

Max, Professor

postpositions 167.

431.

multiplication 254 seq. 310.

Musulmans

present participle

negative participle and relative negative

participle 106 seq. 112. 113, 179.

Origin of the negative 160 seq.

nor. 344 seq.

nouns identical with verbal themes

numerals 251 seq.
numerical adverbs

128133.

86.

punctuation 32.
reciprocal relation 307. 310.

reflexive

pronouns 73
225 seq.

reiteration 304. 308.

relative participle

orthography

76.

110 seq.

317 seq.

421 seq.
relative

256.

pronouns not

in

Kannada

other. 311.

repetition, reduplication,

passive 181. 323 seq.

26. 29.

doubling 28.

102. 107. 109. 160. 162. 208. 213. 218.

past participle ending in

94

du

23.

- 99.

93

- 99,

Its short

300 seq. 362 seq.

Rice, B. Lewis, M. R.

JL.

s.,

etc.

form without du and tu 99

102.

self 227 seq.

Its

and

slackness of consonants 196 seq.

ending in

idu

103.

under da

104.
2.

26. 102. 103. 105,

See

and ta

participles 103.

1.

relative

form

Irregular past

Original meaning of

the past participle 105

seq.

Short

past participles used with ilia 282 seq.

The

past

110.

233. 351 seq.

5.

and tu 24 -

222 seq.

reflexive verbs 93. 369 seq.

164.

order of verbs in a sentence 408

seq.
410 seq.

numbers

315; used for

the future 429.

only, alone. 314.

ordinal

in sen-

present relative participle 23. 26. 29.

113 seq. 218 seq. 422 seq.
present tense

negative, conjugated 157 seq. 179. 332.

341.

108 seq.\

tences 420 seq.

432.

namely, as follows. 347. 348.

neither

seq. 223. 381.

pluperfect 318 seq.

73. 223. 231. 233.

participle

in

sentences

419 seq.
past tense 137 seq. ; used for the present
or future 129. 428.

specialities regarding the singular

plural 398 seq. 403 seq.

spontaneously, of

syntax 380 seq.

tense suffixes 125 seq.

the -the. 345 seq.

there, there

is,

etc. 418.

and

405-407.

itself 227. 223.

subjunctive 319 seq.

as. 346.
such

4.

also adding a vowel 36.

See triprayoga.

twelve modes of declension 86. 87.

verbal

final

consonants,

syllables 22 seq.

vowels

verbal themes identical with nouns 36.

and

26-28.

168.

their

See sambodhana.

what happened. 348.

what is that. 348.
when. 350.

verbal noun. See bhavavaeana.

altering

very. 249. 261. 308. 310.

vocative.

verbal forms etc. used as adverbs 167.

verbal themes

vowel to become nouns, sometimes

time, times 255 seq. 259.

tripling.

478

radical

whether

or.

345.

CORRECTIONS AND ADDITIONS.

Page

2, note,

read Kharoshti for Kha-

P. 39,
P. 40,

noshti.

& for w*.

P. 5, line 32, read

read

1.

read 253,

12,

1.

29,

2,

for 253,

2, c.

put a stop after iat^v*,

and read (See

102, 9>

P. 42,

1.

24,

read bottom for botom.

read sub letter for sub-letter.

P. 44,

1.

30,

put a comma after therefore.

P. 45,

1.

3,

read n^^J for rf*3-

Present Malaysia),

P. 47,

1.

28,

put

P. 47,

1.

37,

read Z3& for 33^.

P. 48.

1.

4,

P. 49,

1.

i,

P. 11, 1.35, read 19 for 18.

P. 49,

1.

& for a*.

P. 53,

1.

P. 6,

1.

P. 7,

1.

P. 8,

1.

P. 10,

29,
11,
16,

1.

P. 11, L

P. 15,

P. 16,
P. 16,

1.

lr.

n, read

n, read

for

read gala for

2,

1.

e w

w.

read 216 for 217.

26,

1.

rl.

for

24 (under

1.

read lri/or
P. 11,

ri

18,

galla.

read ananunasika for anu-

1.

n, read tlri/or

P. 26,

1.

24,

read

?rae

tlri.

T&W-

for

P. 26,

1.

34,

add,

P. 26,

1.

35,

read 24 for 34.

P. 27,

1.

2,

P. 28,

1.

35,

read Sojojrfj for

P. 29,

1.

19,

read

34,

read

P. 31,
P. 32,
P. 33,
cOe;

1.

P. 35,

1.

1.

No.
P. 37,

P. 38,

read

28,

3z^*3V*&
:

1.

8,

1.

9,

read dialect for

P. 57.

1.

2,

read 371 for 370.

1.

for

before

it.

read 3^3o* for ^odoi.

P. 54,

dialects.

y$dos JS9 5

read

7,

for

of for of

1.

31,

read

P. 65,

1.

19,

remove

P. 65,

1.

32,

remove

for o.

P. 66,

1.

22,

add

for w.

P. 66, after

4.

^" .7*

read, and also

P. 71,

18,

read

25,

read 3oocw

1.

19,

8,
1.

1.

is

for

are.
rt

P. 72,

for 3oc^

read (see No.

8, &)

rt.

1.

o^
1.

n>

rf

26,

add, 7, Loc.
f*

Q)

26,

/or

(see

remark).

20,
29,

read same for sume.

note

1,

1.

42,

note

2,

1.

36,

read

remove

u, read

P. 73,

1.

P. 74,

1.

P. 76,

1.

24,

l>3A^Jo

for

P. 83,

1.

29,

6,

put

letter c.

oy soo

for

after the plural.

readMalayala/or MalyAla.
tor
read a for o 5 and
'_

read (Tter, a 2^ for

P. 83.

P. 38,

dialects.

do.

P. 35,
P. 37,

read dialect for

read "a^o for ti^o.

18, read are for and.

P. 60,

151, a,

20 after <08&>,

1.

after accusative.

P. 55,

P. 59,

& for

n, read

1.

-,

4.

151, a,

remove

for

Adtfrio 6 , and remove

nasika.
P. 19,

put

read

3<rf

for

P. 85,

1.

1.

40,
40,

read dialects for

dialect.

read 131, a. b for 131, 6,

c.

480
P. 88,

1.

P. 88,

1.

26,

P. 92,

1.

26,

P. 92,

1.

P. 93,

29,

tAj

P. 147,

1.

32,

remark, remove

P. 149,

1.

36,

read

3&>e3

P. 150.

1.

13,

read

*53<?^ for 33S"#.

remove

P. 151,

araroSJKto.

4,

>*

ioradso or ^redre, cutting,

*&
A

from

0?fo

add, Curious formations are

?b (in
sasanas ^ra 0?to) and &
\

1.

ajc3

before as.

3
put a comma after
SOFCM&
after
add

remove

11,

engraving, and

1.

remove the comma

19,

after

50.

P. 158,

before I have not

5,

put

3,

remove the comma

1.

seen.
P. 160,

aSs^rieS.

3pe.

for

1.

after

P. 98, L 31, read must have been

P. 102,

1.

P. 102,

1.

3d 3

read

19,

e^ for

read

35,

for 3

P. 103, foot-note, read Dr. J. P. Fleet

for Dr.

I.

F. Fleet.

P. 104,

1.

10,

read

P. Ill,

1.

27,

read

1.

28,

put a

w*)

(of

3,

1.

15,

P. 169,

1.

18,

put a

25,

read

1.

32,

read

P. 172,

1.

11,

read

P. 174,

1.

6,

P. 176,

1.

read 316,

5 for 318, 5.

comma

after

for the semicolon.

appears in the para-

graph under No.

5?sS).

1.

for

wo*) appears

i for 109 a, 5;
a
semicolon
put
after

32,

P. 168,

P. 171,

(of

med., mod.).

(d,

read 109, a,

17,

1.

1.

v&

include within the brackets

Sood, behind

P. 169,

in this paragraph under No. 2

t?5j

1.

after

(see sub

comma after srafide*.

read

2,

P. 165,

wsaz^Oort for

read yet to be for yet be.

^^, behind, rearmed.

24,

33,

awrf

5
P. 111,1. 29, after SjsQdo read S33Qdo^>

P. 118, L

1.

1.

P. 167,

Sort.

P. Ill,

P. 161,

P. 164,

1.

read

e3 enjo
e for w.

for

eruo*.

ss^oicv* for
96 for
97.

read ^tssctoi for

7,

read

P. 118,

1.

8,

P. 120,

1.

17,

read

(of

^o^Qss

remove

an

(of

for

an

P, 176,

n:

see page

eros?^;

114,

remark).
P. 120, L

29,

add, It

may

be thought

mentioned instances,

in 23??io^,

a.
e. c/

simply a euphonic 3* may have

been inserted to form the genitive.
P. 127,

1.

14,

read 254 for 253.

P. 129,

1.

26,

read *<tf

P. 141,

1.

ofc*

28,

read

^
+

6.

read in for

P. 177,

1.

35,

P. 182,

1.

P. 182,

1.

read fi^ra for

35, read

P. 184,

1.

see.
fc

5,

and

for do

1.

29,

afc

for

read

1.

n, read wofc* for wofc*.

P. 142,

1.

30,

read

P. 145,

1.

10,

read wss^o* for

for

wd.

and

1.

^* + $u for
s

29,

read

(ox

1.

25,

insert this before Nara-

simha.

P. 142,

+ ^^>;

read

27,

for (33$W).
P. 188,

for

oi^-f

(23?

ofc* -f Tg^O),

+ -330)

remove

12,

some of the above

that at least in

(23

1.

P. 193,

1.

4,

add, Cf.

P. 193,

1.

8,

read

P. 193,

1.

22,

P. 194,

1.

35,

read

P. 195,

1.

22,

read yamaka/or vamaka.

372.
for

remove the parenthesis of

for

$&

481
P. 200,

1.

1,

3rd person,

205, 1, d.

for
P. 201,
1.

read 205,

15,

1.

comma

after

5
(20 0& ).

33,

P. 205,

1.

35,

read rfco'ess for

P. 206,

1.

27,

read

and after
1.

23,

1.

Q&fa

read a euphonic 3*n, read QoartSo

3,

for
P. 297,

1.

P. 298,

1.

<3,

1.

read dotewOri for

P. 204,

P. 214,

1.

read z30^r for 3<3^r, and

16,

put a stop for the

21,

P. 291,
P. 294,

25,

read dative for genitive

read upon thee for upon

1.

17,

1.

and

read aitfdoo for

10,

7,

1.

you.

Q&

5>,afc3ybr

28,acW, See page 446.

P.

304,

P. 306,

read rtfi^rfcWo for

put a semicolon after

fellow.
14.

read i-3jsriro 5

for

P. 214,

1.

read dow doooa^tfo for

3i,

P. 309,
dJ5

P. 216,

1.

put a quotation

9,

mark

P. 312,

read played for sang.

5
15, compound w?^ and ^oJ

1.

P. 233,

1.

P. 235,

1.

i,

P. 238,

1.

25,

P. 239,

1.

10,

for a/ter used.

read

for a^ci.

remove the stop after

1.

P. 247,

1.

is,

P. 249,

1.

8,

read

P. 251

1.

8,

read of the uvula for of the

ab

1.

(is)

27,

and

3).

1.

and

make

make

for 3?oa.

a sensualist.

read ttdodde^-etfrt for

1.

35,

read

for zo3ado39.

to

P. 320,

read having caused

2,

was,

had caused

i. e.

and

or had made',

3ooii-es)
1.

1.

10,

1.

P. 255,

read aoosraad for

28,
1.

and

27

after S353d.

23,

add, Let

it

be expressly

atf.>?raad.

^<3 that

z-c? is

28,

read ^J3?^9 for

participial

attached also to the

form used for the form-

ation of the present tense (see

P. 259,

1.

11,

P. 264,

1.

29,

read 'ado^ for ado.

read of the becoming then

for of the coming then.

P. 265,
20^5,

P. 265,

1.

i.

1.

21,

P. 273,

1.

1.

24,
32,

P. 322,

1.

after

P. 328,

we:*;

P. 329,

1.

c).

and

1.

put mango in parenthesis.

P. 332,

and put a comma

read
362,

for

c)/or 362, after

read zJ&s^cidort for

ddort.

P. 276,

1.

33.

read S53do33 for

P. 285,

1.

25,

read

tf

1.

read

7,

tf^rrt^

for

1.

*,

&3

for

read

1
,

rtjrf^rfo andgr-ihastha-,
/or a^iwrttfrf.
m

10, aoOSJjrfCrf
*

co

1.

4,

ca

<f

insert large a//cr swallow-

ing.

P. 334,

wo eo)

read we for (you), and

3,

it.

& (or eo^/br

2,

194)

in the ancient dialect.

read us for you.

remove the semicolon

and 1 22,
P. 271,

to

insert

stated here with regard to rftfotfd

eyes.

P. 253,

for

put but in parenthesis:

read if one is a sensualist

one

if

for

P. 319,

read that for this.

read (see
355, 1,

Q&^dJajd^ for
read w^idJ*

32.

1.

24,

25,

Sdes'jstftf'

genitives.

1.

P. 317,

P. 240,

13,

and

1.

and

6,

put

read

29,

after

(arthavyakti).

P. 219,

1.

do

P. 335,

1.

1.

29,

5,

read itetoaoTWrf for

read akto for

61

482
P. 343,

1.

P. 418,

ortori<?6 for

read

10,

1.

read

15,

is

for

read adric^rfo for

P. 345,

1.

11,

P. 346,

1.

si,

tr^

and

P. 350,

read

1.

34,

SAP for

P. 422,
for

1.

remove

and

16

1.

n>,

read

17,

read

^^

read

23.8

cw A

1.

1.

4,

read wdotaS, for

P. 431,

P. 365,

1.

7,

read wdooadodj for

P. 434,
it

c3jdo.
1.

read ^es'SC&saS for

9,

1.

read

33,

read

1.

14,

add

1.

P. 438,
P. 370,

put a

wso

1.

for

aao.

71 to ^J3?&3,

^^^

H, read ArfoO

for

and

where

term.

read ($.^) for

5,

sss

comma before

appears as a

P. 435,

3^3 after

15,

1.

P. 358,

insert

1.

P. 426,

28,

17,

19,

for

1.

for 3rJ3os3.

remove 3 before

16,

29,

1.

27,

d*re^3o.

read asd^o for

P. 424,

P. 356,

P. 367,

1.

and

for

^ozS

read

P. 423,

1.

n, after 185 insert 186; and

1.

24,

and

s;

1.

(23).
for

(*^d)
24,

read cf.

for c/.
^ 8o6JJ.
eC

P. 377,

1.

read j3-)?do>oAt^c3f for

i,

o3o?

P. 441,

1.

and

tboSoAcifc^.

1.

and

P. 382,

1.

28,

add, Cf.

P. 383,

1.

24,

read treatise for treaty.

P. 384.

1.

7,

P. 393,

1.

352,

6, b.

read kartri/or kartri.

read (Candraprabhapurana)

6,

1.

9,

P. 396,

1.

31,

read No.

P. 396,

1.

35,

add, Cf. 346,

P. 397,

1.

17,

P. 397,

add, Cf. 347,

read 350,

and

27

1.

2,

33,

8,

8.

a for No.

2, c.

7.

for 350,

8,

etc.

rc.ad parenthesis

and brackets.
P. 400,

1.

P. 402,

and

1.

1.

P. 403,

1.

P. 408,

1.

P. 411,
a?id

14,

33,
34,

read

1.

P. 412,

35,
i,

riJSNC;

3dd&0

for

2,

read he incessantly

shot.

P. 413,

6,

remove as perhaps

half-verse quoted above.

P. 414,

1.

n, read

fol-

here as far as the explanations are

not conjectural,

bird of

viz.

omen.

^J

erott'y^fJjs

^J

CO

(Karnatakasanjtvana).

The old

spelling of

^rt^.

The same as ^tfrtj in the Diction^ ?s^- The act of hearing.

ary.
tf GS.

&3$

for

in the

game

in cards called

^^

tod^.

sojscs.zz^jscj.

a)J3

o(Karnatakasanjivana).

There- is a
(or ^etfos)
(23*

*>rt

C3idJ.-^.

1.

Through the

the reception of pepper-water, etc.

^^.

and

add

and a hollow made for

n K Rice

read ftv^ofor
read 3o.>rioJ)s'o/or 3000)
1.

372,

kindly prepared by his Munshi, was

forwarded to the author, and is given

A fool.

read and one for and two.

17, read like a blacksmith',

1.

&, under

favour of Mr. B. Lewis Rice the

^c^.
t^jscs^

4.

10,

1.

jjg^orfd rf-S^

(our).

read tfjactf for

add

o for

read

21,

39

for

o.

)C3'y.

read our for

19,

10,

read 330

lowing "Explanation of some of the

words contained in Rev. Kittel's list"

for (Candraprabhapurana).
P. 396.

1.

^ do for

read

2,

Imitation of the sound pro-

o
duced when plunging into water.
^3>M'.
z33JK*o3^d ^5rf63
(KarnataOJ
00
V
<XJ

kasanjtvana).

3?e3*. J?e3i.

As a verb

483
(

= ido2

of the Dictionary)

'to succeed

3wdiS^

etc.'

means

it

;$& o&3

ites*. 3?
(Karnataka nighantu).
eo as a noun
(=3do3) means 'sucrio

3?rtF~v f

cess'.

successes.

cto$ci.

=eot)j?
j

e (Karnatakasarijivana).

v* (=;3j5c"~ of the
Dictionary).

c3ja

fSjiv^

30* appears to

mean

rfQo*

(is)

success
o3 Jt d

SO ww 630 C30 ^
J,

etc.

mean some animal

cascade'-,

of the

it

may

modern

Dictionary
)ti.
f
,

).

Dictionary).

(23ca.)d)
*&

Sjosg.

One who

to COOk).-

seems

"has

A^. Tadbhava of
P. 442,

6,

&^

The

di^od.

read tsjp^ort for etps,ort.

read w^) = wa (Sabdanu-

read sollige/or

32,

P. 449,

1.

37,

read

P. 452,

sollige^

and

1.

1.

32,

read

if

dfiticoi for

of the

for

3tf.it>.
u)

P. 453,

Lameness.

1.

read

2,

and

1.

is,

for

read

for

cooked (from

P. 456,

1.

35,

of

sasana sutra 473. 480. 513).

P. 445, 1. 24, read a black, or bad, belly ;

P. 455,

1.

P. 443,

?333J3

$<?o 5

doorf.

'

same as the second part

(Qf. ^PM?ro in the

JC3>J).

+ ^)S^).

^Jra
Oft

to

be the correct form

cd

Buffoonery (from

(q)c|sa).

35,

rather than 'a

^tdJfS.

qjrfdo

pendent roots.

read Brod^nae.
P. 446, 1. 37, read Domba/or Domba.

rj

are compounds of

Atesjdo of the
Dictionary

tfa'O*, to get

Samskrita

1.

Ca

with A)^J, a well-known animal.

etc.

for

3^(3C33^

clear mistake

BASF.L MISSION PRESS,

1.

13,

1.

1.

34,

read

4,

read

read

MAXKALOKK.

for

and

and